JP7226397B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special game state. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special game state based on a game ball entering a part. Then, when the state shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device (for example, See Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-005447 A

Here, in the gaming machine such as the one illustrated above, it is necessary for the control means to suitably execute processing, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which control means can suitably execute processing.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 provides control means for executing various predetermined processes,
information storage means in which information is written when the predetermined various processes are executed in the control means;
with
The information storage means is
a first storage area in which information is written when the predetermined various processes are executed;
a second storage area that is contiguous to the first storage area at the address of the information storage means and in which information is not written when the predetermined various processes are executed;
a third storage area contiguous to the second storage area at the address of the information storage means and into which information is written when the predetermined various processes are executed;
with
This game machine is
erasure execution means for executing information erasure processing on the storage areas of the information storage means including the first storage area, the second storage area and the third storage area when a predetermined information erasure opportunity occurs ;
Predetermined prohibition setting means for performing a predetermined prohibition setting so that information is not written into the second storage area;
predetermined prohibition canceling means for canceling the predetermined prohibition setting when the information erasing process is executed;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably execute processing by the control means.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (a) and (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents of the symbol display device when a game cycle is executed. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining main symbols and sub-symbols that are variably displayed in each symbol row. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining contents of various counters and various storage areas; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining contents of a support mode; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first right/wrong table at low probability; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second right/wrong table at low probability; (c) right/wrong at high probability It is an explanatory view for explaining a table. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table for the first special figure, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table for the second special figure, (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the time saving distribution table for 1 special figure, (d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the time saving distribution table for 2nd special figure. (a) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of each jackpot result, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of each time saving result and ceiling time saving. (a) ~ (e) is a time chart showing how the time saving state is set by the time saving result or the ceiling time saving. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in main side MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU; It is a flow chart which shows the general map general electric control processing in main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing during normal figure decision in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the holding|holding information in main side MPU. It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for specifying a variable display period in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure decision in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric end processing in main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing subtraction processing of a high-probability state counter in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing for time saving results in main side MPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop result of the special figure display unit and the stop result of the symbol display device. (a) The stop result of the first special figure display unit and the symbol display device in the case of the first time saving result in the game round triggered by the first reservation information which is the final game round of the normal game state or the time saving state (b) is a game round other than the final game round of the high probability state or the time saving state, and the first time saving result in the game round triggered by the first suspension information 1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop result of the special figure display unit and the symbol display device, (c) the first special figure display unit and It is an explanatory view for explaining the stop result of the pattern display device. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variation pattern determination processing in the sound and light side MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing subtraction processing of a ceiling counter in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the time saving state counter in main side MPU. (a) ~ (e) is a time chart for explaining the execution order of the processing in the process during special figure determination. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing subtraction processing of a variation selection state counter in the main MPU; FIG. (a) ~ (f) It is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the execution timing of the reach high frequency state and the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving. It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process executed by the main side MPU in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure decision in main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing for time saving results in main side MPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing subtraction processing of a ceiling counter in the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining contents of various counters and various storage areas in the third embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure decision in main side MPU. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process in main side MPU. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the main MPU in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board in the sixth embodiment. (a) A longitudinal sectional view of the special winning device in a non-induced state, and (b) a longitudinal sectional view of the special winning device in a guided state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the distribution winning device. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining contents of various counters and various storage areas; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining a first success/failure table, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a second success/failure table, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining a jackpot sorting table. , (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time-saving distribution table, (e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the small hit distribution table, (f) for explaining the contents of each small hit result It is an explanatory diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the holding|holding information in main side MPU. It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure decision in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric end processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure monitoring process in main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure decision performed in main side MPU in a 7th embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for specifying a variable display period in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the time saving state counter performed by main side MPU in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing for time saving results performed by main side MPU in a 9th embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing subtraction processing of a ceiling counter in the main MPU; FIG. (a) ~ (g) is a time chart for explaining the subsequent game state when the time saving result or ceiling time saving occurs in the time saving state. It is a front view of the game board in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining contents of various counters and various storage areas; It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special figure special electric control processing in main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special figure special electric control processing in main side MPU. It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for specifying a variable display period in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure decision in main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows end judging processing of a time saving state in main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing for time saving results in main side MPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing subtraction processing of a ceiling counter in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows left hitting information processing in sound light side MPU. (a) ~ (f) It is a time chart showing how the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state is executed with the first suspension information as the execution target. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing processing for specifying a variable display period executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing processing for specifying a variable display period executed by the main MPU in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a front view of a main controller in a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how programs and data are set in a main-side ROM; It is an explanatory view for explaining a setting mode of each area in main side RAM. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various storage areas provided in a work area for specific control and various storage areas provided in a work area for non-specific control; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for transmitting a command from the main side MPU to the sound and light side MPU; (a) to (d) are time charts showing how commands are transmitted. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting confirmation in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process in main side MPU. To explain the details of the processing that is executed in the main processing when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power failure processing is executed while the setting value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is being executed. It is an explanatory diagram. 4 is a flowchart showing first management processing in the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the disconnection short circuit process in main side MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing first timer interrupt processing in the main MPU; It is an explanatory view for explaining the configuration related to the discharge of the game ball that has flowed down the game area. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration for inputting a detection result of a detection sensor to the main MPU; It is a flow chart which shows the entering ball detection processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the holding|holding information in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for fraud detection in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the information clear processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud detection execution process in main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the electric power control processing in main side MPU. (a) A flowchart showing a special electric start process in the main MPU, (b) a flowchart showing a special electric open process in the main MPU, and (c) a flowchart showing a special electric closed process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the magnetism monitoring process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud handling process in main side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how winning is monitored, taking the second actuation opening detection sensor as an example. It is a flowchart which shows the process for security in main side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how security signals are output to the outside. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of a non-specific control work area used for managing game histories; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of a calculation result storage area; (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices. 4(a) to 4(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing second management processing in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the check process in main side MPU. 10 is a flow chart showing normal ball entry management processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the result calculation process in main side MPU. FIG. 4 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration for display control of various display circuits by a main CPU; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various buffers provided in a work area for specific control; It is an explanatory view for explaining an electric composition of display IC. 10 is a flowchart showing second timer interrupt processing in the main MPU; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing setting processing for an eighth display data buffer in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a display in main side MPU. (a) to (i) are time charts showing how various displays are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices and the setting display device when supply of operating power to the main MPU is started. It is a flowchart which shows RAM clear processing in main side MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing information abnormality monitoring processing in the main MPU; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing first timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the entering ball detection processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the holding|holding information in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting processing of the counter for prize balls in main side MPU. 10 is a flow chart showing normal ball entry management processing in the main MPU.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 2, the structure in a game area is abbreviate|omitted for convenience.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by fixing an outer frame 11 to an island facility. Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may have a structure in which the outer frame 11 is attached to the island facilities of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable backward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the tip of the rotation, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21 . The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 23 of the resin base 21 .

The configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. FIG.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The guide rail is configured as A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by guide rails.

Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 66a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a, and a and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When a shooting operation device (or a shooting handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is turned, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and game balls are shot.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general prize opening 31, a special electric prize winning device 32, a first operation opening 33, a second operation opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, a general figure unit 38, etc. ing.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when a ball enters the first working port 33 or when a ball enters the second working port 34, three prize balls are paid out, 10 prize balls are put out when a ball enters a general prize winning port 31, and 15 prize balls are put out when a ball enters a special electric prize winning device 32. .

In addition, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the second operation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 may be the first operation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33. Also, it is not limited to a configuration in which both the number of prize balls when a ball enters the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls when a ball enters the second operating port 34 are plural. Instead, it may be configured such that the number of prize balls is one when the ball enters the first operating port 33, and the number of prize balls when the ball enters the second operating port 34 is one. A configuration may be adopted, or a configuration may be adopted in which the number of prize balls for both is one.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only is the game ball discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode of continuing the flow down of the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game ball is also expressed as winning.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24 . Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are open upward. Further, the two operating ports 33 and 34 are vertically aligned with the first operating port 33 facing upward.

A stage portion 36b is provided on a lower frame portion 36a of the variable display unit 36, which is a portion below the pattern display device 41, so as to extend in the horizontal direction above the first operation opening 33. In the left frame portion 36c, which is the left portion of the pattern display device 41 in the unit 36, there is an entrance of a warp passage that makes it possible to guide game balls flowing down the left area of the variable display unit 36 to the stage portion 36b. A portion 36d is formed. A center portion in the lateral direction of the stage portion 36b is present vertically above the first operating port 33, and a lead-out portion 36e for leading the game ball downward of the stage portion 36b by its own weight is provided in the center portion. is formed. In this case, the game ball drawn to the stage portion 36b and drawn downward from the stage portion 36b from a region other than the lead-out portion 36e is difficult to enter the first operating port 33, but the lead-out portion 36e A game ball drawn downward from the stage portion 36b enters the first operation opening 33 with a high probability.

The first operating port 33 is open upward, and is not provided with a member such as an opening/closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the first operating port 33 . Then, in a situation where the game balls are shot in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operation opening 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operation port 33 is always capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area PA toward the first operation port 33 .

The second operating port 34 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. A game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34 when the universal electrical role 34a is closed, and the winning to the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal electrical role 34a is in the open state.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation port 34 in the direction in which the game ball flows. The through-gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball entering the through-gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operation port 34. - 特許庁

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Concretely, as the winning to the through gate 35 as a trigger is performed normal figure propriety determination processing, the normal figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner which is the area through which the game ball does not pass in the game area PA Variation display of the pattern is performed in the general pattern display section 38a. Then, when the result of the general pattern correctness determination process is the electric role open election and the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed and the variable display of the general pattern display unit 38a is ended, the state is shifted to the general electric open state. In the common electric open state, the common electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, the normal figure display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device. , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed in the normal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal pattern unit 38, a normal pattern holding display portion 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal pattern display portion 38a. The number of winning game balls in the through gate 35 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the normal figure reservation display section 38b.

Winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is used as a trigger to perform the winning/failure determination process. Then, the result of the propriety determination process is clearly shown through the display effect in the special figure unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36.

The special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display portion 37a and a second special figure display portion 37b. In the first special figure display unit 37a, the variable display of the pattern is performed by performing the winning/failure determination process with the winning to the first operation opening 33 as a trigger. Then, a stop result corresponding to the result of the suitability determination process is displayed. In this case, there are jackpot results, time saving results and off results to be described later as a result of the success or failure determination process, but the contents of the stop result of the first special figure display unit 37a are the jackpot results, time saving results and off results, respectively. are different. The display of the stop result in the first special figure display portion 37a is maintained until the next game round is started and the first special figure display portion 37a starts the variable display of a new pattern. In addition, in the second special figure display section 37b, winning to the second operation opening 34 is used as a trigger, and winning/failure determination processing is performed, so that the variable display of the pattern is performed. Then, a stop result corresponding to the result of the suitability determination process is displayed. In this case, there are jackpot results, time saving results and off results described later as a result of the success/failure determination process, but the contents of the stop result of the second special figure display unit 37b are the jackpot results, time saving results and off results, respectively. are different. The display of the stop result in the second special figure display portion 37b is maintained until the next game cycle is started and the second special figure display portion 37b starts the variable display of a new pattern.

In addition, the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b are configured by a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but it is not limited to this Instead, it may be constituted by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, and multiple types of characters A configuration in which is displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of colors are displayed, or the like is conceivable.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure reservation display part 37c and a second special figure reservation display part 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b. . The number of game balls winning the first operation port 33 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the first special figure reservation display section 37c. In addition, the number of game balls winning the second operation opening 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the second special figure reservation display section 37d.

More specifically, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or other display device having a display surface, or a dot matrix display device. may

In the symbol display device 41, when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the first special symbol display unit 37a based on the winning to the first operation port 33, the variation display of the pattern is performed according to it, and the second operation port When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the second special figure display part 37b based on the winning to 34, the variable display of the pattern is performed accordingly. In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effects triggered by the winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, but also the display effects during the opening and closing execution mode, which will be described later, after a big win result, etc. is done.

Based on the winning of any of the operation ports 33, 34, the display is started in any of the special figure display units 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination process is displayed. The period from the end of the game to the completion of the processing during special figure determination in the main control device 71, which will be described later, corresponds to one game round.

In this pachinko machine 10, the winning/failure determination process is executed based on the winning to the operation openings 33 and 34, and when the result of the winning/failure determination process becomes a jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode is entered. In the opening/closing execution mode, opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed, and game balls are paid out by winning the special electric prize winning device 32 in the open state. Specifically, a predetermined number of round games are executed in the opening/closing execution mode. A round game is a game that continues until either one of the elapse of a predetermined open continuation period and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls winning the special electric winning device 32 is satisfied. That is. In this case, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. , the open continuation period is set to 29 seconds, and the upper limit number is set to 10. Therefore, since the open continuation period of the round game is set to a time longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, the special electric winning device 32 has an upper limit in each round game. It can be expected that more game balls than the number will win. Also, the upper limit number of round games differs depending on the type of the jackpot result that triggered the shift.

A high probability mode and a low probability mode exist as the success/failure lottery mode of the success/failure determination process so that the probability of a big win resulting in a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high or low. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the manner in which the universal electronic accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state differs from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared in a situation in which game balls are continued to be shot in a similar manner to the game area PA, the frequency at which the general electric accessory 34a becomes an open state per unit time A high-frequency support mode (a first high-frequency support mode and a second high-frequency support mode, which will be described later) and a low-frequency support mode are set so that . The game state in a situation other than the open/close execution mode differs according to the type of combination of the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. The game state includes a normal game state that is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, a high probability state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, and a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode. A time saving state is set. In the high-probability state and the time-saving state, the average period required for one game cycle to be completed is shorter than in the normal game state.

Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in the lower area PAU, which is the area below the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. Also, the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are unitized as a working port device in a state in which the first working port 33 faces upward and the second working port 34 faces downward in the vertical direction. It is In addition, the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 can be controlled to an open state with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger. It is located in a certain left area PAL. The game ball flowing down the left area PAL is guided to the lower area PAU, and the game ball guided to the lower area PAU is guided to the area where the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided. can be Therefore, when the shooting operation is performed with the aim of winning the first working opening 33, not only can the first working opening 33 win, but also the second working opening 34 can win. When a shooting operation is performed with the aim of winning a prize in the second working port 34, not only the winning in the second working port 34 can occur, but also the winning in the first working port 33 can occur.

When the game state is the normal game state, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode as described above, so that the second operation port 34 is less likely to win a prize, and the first operation port is more difficult to win than the second operation port 34. Winning to 33 becomes easy to occur. Therefore, in the normal game state, basically, the execution target of the game round is the first special figure display portion 37a, and when the winning to the second operation opening 34 occurs accidentally, the second special figure display portion 37b is displayed. It becomes the execution object of the game round.

On the other hand, when the game state is the high-probability state or the time-saving state, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode as described above, so winning to the second operation port 34 is likely to occur. In this case, it becomes easier to win a prize in the second working opening 34 than in the first working opening 33 . However, as already explained, when the shooting operation is performed aiming at the winning to the second working opening 34, the winning to the first working opening 33 can occur, and it is guided to the lead-out part 36e of the stage part 36b. Since the game ball will enter the first operating port 33 with a high probability, even in the high frequency support mode, the winning in the first operating port 33 will occur with the same frequency as in the low frequency support mode. .

In a mode corresponding to the pattern of the special figure display portions 37a and 37b that are the target of execution of the game round, the design display device 41 executes the effect for the game round. The display contents of the symbol display device 41 when the game round effect is executed will be described.

FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 when a game cycle is executed.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display surface of the pattern display device 41 is provided with three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower rows as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. In other words, when a game cycle is executed, most of the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is used to display symbols in a variable manner.

FIGS. 5(a) to 5(j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the main symbols and sub-symbols variably displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As shown in FIGS. 5( a ) to 5 ( j ), the patterns, which are one type of pattern, include nine main patterns with numbers “1” to “9”, and shell-shaped patterns. It is composed of a sub pattern consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character patterns such as an octopus are assigned numbers '1' to '9' to form main patterns.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is placed between each main symbol. are distributed one by one. In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main pattern of "4" is additionally arranged in , and one sub-pattern is arranged between each of these main patterns. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. Then, on the display surface, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The symbol display device 41 is designed to stop-display three symbols for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3×3 are stopped-displayed. As shown in FIG. 4A, the pattern display device 41 has five effective lines, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5. there is

When the pattern display device 41 performs the variable display of the symbols based on the winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction. The variable display is started so as to Basically, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and finally predetermined symbols are statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. is terminated with

When the variable display of symbols ends, and when the result of the success/failure determination process in the main controller 71, which will be described later, is a jackpot result, which will be described later, the same combination of symbols is formed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. be. In addition, if the result of the success or failure determination process is a time saving result described later, and if the time saving state is set with the time saving result as a trigger, any effective line when the fluctuation display of the pattern ends A predetermined symbol combination (for example, "1.2.3", "3.4.1") is formed on L1 to L5, which is neither a combination of identical symbols nor a combination of ready-to-win symbols. In this case, since there are a plurality of types of time saving results as will be described later, the content of the combination of predetermined symbols also differs according to the types of time saving results. On the other hand, if the result of the success or failure determination process is a time saving result to be described later, and the setting of the time saving state triggered by the time saving result is not performed, when the fluctuation display of the symbol ends, the reach symbol A stop symbol is displayed for non-out-of-reach where no combination is formed. In other words, if the result of the success/failure determination process is a time saving result to be described later and the setting of the time saving state triggered by the time saving result is not performed, the stop result in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is the success/failure determination process. result would be the same stopping result as if it were an outlier result.

As described above, in the configuration in which the symbols are varied and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, an expected effect is set as the display effect of the symbol display device 41 when the game cycle is executed. The expected effect is a display state that makes the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in a big win, in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 is started. say. There are two types of expectation effects: a ready-to-win display and an advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win display and the occurrence of a big win in a stage before the occurrence of the ready-to-win display.

In the ready-to-win display, the combination of the ready-to-win symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the symbols of the same kind in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and in that state, the remaining medium symbols are displayed. Column Z2 includes a display state in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in a state in which the combinations of ready-to-win patterns are displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a ready-to-win effect. , the combination of the ready-to-win pattern is reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface to perform the ready-to-win effect. In game rounds that result in a big hit, symbols of the same kind as symbols forming a combination of ready-to-win symbols are stopped and displayed on the ready-to-win line in the middle symbol row Z2, and in game rounds that do not result in a big win, the ready-to-win symbols are displayed. A symbol of a different kind from the symbols forming the combination of is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2.

In the advance notice display, after the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 start to display the symbols variably, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, or some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed. A mode is included in which characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a situation in which symbols are variably displayed in the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in Z3. In addition, it also includes a background screen in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such an advance notice display can occur in any game cycle when the reach display is performed or when the reach display is not performed, but it is higher when the reach display is performed than when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

On the display surface of the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a holding display area 42 and a state suggesting area 43 are set in addition to the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. A reserved display area 42 is set below the display surface of the pattern display device 41 . In the pending display area 42, an image is displayed for notifying the player of the number of pending information acquired by the main control device 71, which will be described later, based on the winning of the first operation port 33. 42a, and a second hold display area 42b displaying an image for informing the player of the number of hold information acquired by the main controller 71, which will be described later, based on the winning of the second operation port 34. . Reservation information is information that triggers the execution of the winning/failure determination process in the main control device 71, and is information that triggers the execution of a game round. Reservation information (hereinafter also referred to as first reservation information) acquired with the opportunity of winning the first operation port 33 becomes the execution opportunity of the game round in the first special figure display unit 37a, and the winning to the second operation port 34 Acquired pending information (hereinafter, also referred to as second pending information) triggered by the second special figure display portion 37b is the execution trigger of the game round. A maximum of four pieces of the first reservation information are reserved and stored, and a maximum of four pieces of the second reservation information are also reserved and stored.

The number of first pending images G1 corresponding to the number of first pending information is displayed in the first pending display area 42a. In other words, if the number of first pending information stored is zero, the first pending image G1 is not displayed in the first pending display area 42a. In addition, if the number of the first pending information that is retained and stored is one, the first pending image G1 is displayed one, and if the number of the first pending information that is retained and stored is two, the first pending If two images G1 are displayed and the number of the first reserved information held and stored is three, three first reserved images G1 are displayed and the number of held and stored first reserved information is four. If so, four first reserved images G1 are displayed. When a plurality of first reserved images G1 are displayed, the plurality of first reserved images G1 are displayed side by side at regular intervals. Further, when the number of the first reserved information held and stored increases, the first reserved image G1 is displayed so as to increase toward the right, and the first reserved information serves as a trigger for starting a game round and is reserved and stored. When the number of the displayed first reserved information decreases, the first reserved image G1 is displayed so as to decrease toward the left.

The number of second pending images G2 corresponding to the number of second pending information is displayed in the second pending display area 42b. In other words, if the number of second pending information stored is zero, the second pending image G2 is not displayed in the second pending display area 42b. In addition, if the number of the second pending information that is reserved and stored is one, the second reserved image G2 is displayed one, and if the number of the second reserved information that is reserved and stored is two, the second hold is displayed. If two images G2 are displayed and the number of the second reserved information held and stored is three, the second reserved images G2 are displayed three times and the number of the second held information held and stored is four. If so, four second pending images G2 are displayed. When a plurality of second reserved images G2 are displayed, the plurality of second reserved images G2 are displayed side by side at regular intervals. In addition, when the number of the second reserved information held and stored increases, the second reserved image G2 is displayed so as to increase toward the right, and the second reserved information serves as a trigger for starting the game cycle and is held and stored. When the number of second pending information displayed decreases, the second pending image G2 is displayed so as to decrease toward the left.

In addition, in FIG. 4(b), the number of the first pending information stored in the pending storage is four and the number of the second pending information is four. Four images G1 are displayed, and four second reserved images G2 are displayed in the second reserved display area 42b.

The state suggesting area 43 is set above the display surface of the pattern display device 41 . The state suggesting area 43 has a smaller display area than the display areas of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In the state suggesting area 43, the symbols for the game round are variably displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the winning/failure determination process of the game round is not displayed. In some situations, a color switching display is performed. Specifically, a predetermined display color pattern is repeated such as red->blue->green->red->blue->green->red. Then, at the timing when the stop result corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination process is displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the fixed display (static display) is started, the game situation at that time and the stop corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination process are displayed. Results are displayed. In this case, if the result of the winning/failure determination process is a big hit result or a losing result, red is stop-displayed in the state suggesting area 43 . Also, if the result of the success or failure determination process is a time saving result that will be described later, when the time saving state is set with the time saving result as a trigger, the red color is stopped regardless of the type of time saving result, and the time saving When the setting of the time saving state triggered by the result is not performed, blue or green is stop-displayed according to the type of the time saving result. As described above, if the result of the success/failure determination process is a time saving result to be described later, and if the time saving state is not set with the time saving result as a trigger, the stop result in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is the success/failure determination process. In a configuration that can result in the same stop result as when the result is an outlier result, if the result of the success/failure determination process is a time saving result to be described later, the time saving state triggered by the time saving result is not set. By making the display content of the state suggestion region 43 different between the case and the case where the result of the success/failure determination process is a result of deviation, the result of the success/failure determination process is a time saving result to be described later, even if the time saving result It is possible to set different display contents as the entire display contents of the pattern display device 41 when the setting of the time saving state is not performed triggered by .

Returning to the description of the game board 24 (see FIG. 3), when the result of the win/fail determination process is a big hit result, the opening/closing execution mode is entered as already described. In the opening/closing execution mode, opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed. The special electric prize winning device 32 includes a large prize winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open/close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and when a big hit result is selected in the winning/failure determination process, the opening/closing door 32a is switched to an open state in which game balls can win. ing. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the symbol display device 41 executes a display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode.

A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above structure is attached to the resin base 21 . As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 through which substantially the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is made of glass in a colorless and transparent manner, but is not limited to this, and may be made of a synthetic resin in a colorless and transparent manner. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

A display light-emitting portion 64 is provided above the window portion 61 . A pair of left and right speaker units 65 are provided for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state. An upper bulging portion 66 and a lower bulging portion 67 that bulge forward are vertically arranged below the window portion 61 . Inside the upper swelling portion 66 is provided an upper tray 66a which is open upward, and inside the lower swelling section 67 is similarly provided a lower tray 67a which is also open upward. The upper tray 66a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding them toward the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 67a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 66a.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 71 that controls the main game is mounted. The main controller 71 has a main control board housed in a board box. In addition, the substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the circuit board box are combined inseparably, and the structure of the joint part that requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating, and the adhesive layer that remains on the adhesion target when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of the fact that it has been sealed is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box is conceivable.

A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 71 . The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism 73 and a controller assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72 .

The payout mechanism 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper tray 66a or the lower tray 67a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76.例文帳に追加The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling a payout device 76, and a predetermined electric power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and output, and is accompanied by the operation of the shooting operation device 28 by the player. A power/shooting control device 78 is provided for controlling the launching of game balls. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control device 71 has a main control board 81 that controls the main game. An MPU 82 is mounted on the main control board 81 . The MPU 82 includes a ROM 83 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 83. A RAM 84, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 82, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 71 .

The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 82 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 85 provided in the main control device 71, and a payout control device 77 is connected. A power supply/emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 85 , and power is supplied to the MPU 82 via the power failure monitoring board 85 .

Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 86a to 86e are connected to the input side of the MPU82. The various prize detection sensors 86a to 86e include a detection sensor 86a provided in the general prize opening 31, a detection sensor 86b provided in the special electric prize winning device 32, a detection sensor 86c provided in the first operation opening 33, and a second operation A detection sensor 86d provided at the mouth 34 and a detection sensor 86e provided at the through gate 35 are included. Based on the detection results of these various prize detection sensors 86a to 86e, the MPU 82 determines the prize for each prize winning ball portion. Also, in the MPU 82, various lotteries are executed based on the winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34. FIG.

The output side of the MPU 82 is connected with a power outage monitoring board 85, a payout control device 77 and a sound emission control device 91. A winning ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the winning judgment result to the winning corresponding winning ball portion. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 91 .

On the output side of the MPU 82, a special electric drive unit 32b that opens and closes the open/close door 32a of the special electric prize winning device 32, a general electric drive unit 34b that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation opening 34, A figure unit 37 and a general figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display portion 37a, a second special figure display portion 37b, a first special figure reservation display portion 37c and a second special figure reservation display portion 37d. are all connected to the output side of the MPU 82 . Similarly, the normal map unit 38 is provided with a normal map display unit 38a and a normal map reservation display unit 38b, but all of these are connected to the output side of the MPU82. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 81, and the MPU 82 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 82 executes drive control of the drive unit 32b for the special electric so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the general electric role opening winning of the general electric role 34a is won, the MPU 82 performs drive control of the drive unit 34b for the general electric so that the general electric role 34a is opened and closed. Moreover, display control of the special figure unit 37 is performed in MPU82 in the case of each game time. Further, when the lottery result as to whether or not the universal electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the MPU 82 executes the display control of the universal diagram unit 38. FIG.

The blackout monitoring board 85 relays between the main control board 81 and the power/launch controller 78, and also monitors the maximum voltage output from the power/launch controller 78, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the MPU 82 of the main control device 71 .

The power supply/emission control device 78 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, a game hall. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control device 71, the payout control device 77, etc. are each generated with necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied.

More specifically, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power-on power supply section 78a and a power-off power supply section 78b. The power-on power supply unit 78a is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply in a game hall or the like, and generates operating power in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power supply, and supplies the generated operating power. have a function. The power-off power supply unit 78b is composed of a capacitor, and supplies power from the power-on power supply unit 78a when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (when power is being supplied from an external power supply). is charged by In addition, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state or in a power interruption state (when the power supply from the external power supply is interrupted) such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the power supply during power interruption 78b discharges the main power. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 84 of the control device 71 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 77 . Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 and the RAM of the payout control device 77 is not erased while the backup power is supplied from the power supply unit 78b for power failure. stored in memory.

Here, the RAM 84 of the main controller 71 temporarily stores information on the current game state and the progress of the game, and the RAM of the payout controller 77 temporarily stores information on the number of unpaid prize balls. be done. In this case, the backup power is supplied to these RAMs from the power supply section 78b for power interruption as described above, so that the current game can be played even in a situation where there is no power supply from the power supply section 78a for power supply. It is possible to store and hold the state, progress of the game, and unpaid prize ball information for a predetermined period. On the other hand, the sound emission control device 91 and the display control device 101 are not supplied with backup power from the power supply during power failure 78b. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 95 of the sound emission control device 91 and the RAM 105 of the display control device 101 is not backed up, and is destroyed or destroyed when the power supply from the power supply unit 78a is stopped. erased.

A relatively large capacity is ensured for the power supply section 78b for use during power failure, and the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main controller 71 before the power failure is retained for a predetermined period (for example, one day or two days). be. The power-off power supply unit 78b is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like.

The power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure (not shown) that is different from the power supply unit 78b for power failure. In the power supply/launch control device 78, even after the stable 24 volt DC power supply becomes less than 22 volts, by discharging from the power supply unit for power failure, for a time sufficient for executing the power failure processing described later, It is configured to maintain the 5-volt output, which is the drive power source for the control system, at a normal value. As a result, the main controller 71 and the like can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a launch control section 78c in addition to various power supply sections 78a and 78b. A touch sensor 28a, a push sensor 28b, and a variable resistor 28c built in the firing operation device 28 are electrically connected to the firing control section 78c.

The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand touches the outer surface of the operating handle and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electric signal corresponding to the detection of the handle operation is sent out by the firing controller 78c. output to Upon receiving the predetermined electric signal, the shooting control section 78c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operating handle. In addition, the firing control unit 78c grasps whether or not the firing stop switch of the firing operation device 28 is operated according to the electric signal received from the push sensor 28b, and operates the operation handle according to the electric signal received through the variable resistor 28c. to grasp the amount of rotation operation.

The launch control unit 78c transmits a condition fulfillment signal in a predetermined signal form to the MPU 82 of the main control unit 71 when a predetermined game ball launch condition is satisfied. Specifically, the firing control unit 78c receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operation handle is being touched by the player, and a signal indicating that the firing stop switch is not manually operated by the player. is received from the push sensor 28b, a HI level condition establishment signal (a signal corresponding to the establishment of the condition) is continuously transmitted to the MPU 82. If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition satisfaction signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the MPU 82 . However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. In addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball lending device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting the condition establishment signal corresponding to the establishment of the condition.

In the MPU 82, when the HI level condition establishment signal is received and the shooting of the game ball can be permitted, a HI level firing permission signal (a signal corresponding to the firing permission) is sent to the firing control unit 78c. continue to send. When the MPU 82 does not receive a HI level condition satisfaction signal from the firing control section 78c, the MPU 82 transmits a LOW level firing permission signal (a signal not corresponding to firing permission). The relationship between level and HI level may be reversed.

The shooting control unit 78c is electrically connected to the game ball shooting mechanism 27, and periodically drives and controls the game ball shooting mechanism 27 when receiving a HI level shooting permission signal from the MPU82. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball shooting mechanism 27, one game ball is shot to the game area PA in a specific shooting cycle (specifically 0.6 seconds). be. In addition, since the shooting intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c at the time of shooting, the game ball is shot with intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle.

The audio emission control device 91 includes an audio emission control board 92 on which an MPU 93 is mounted. The MPU 93 includes a ROM 94 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 93, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 94. A RAM 95, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated. Based on the command received from the main control device 71 , the MPU 93 drives and controls the display light emitting section 64 and the speaker section 65 and transmits the command to the display control device 101 .

A display control device 101 includes a display control board 102 on which an MPU 103 is mounted. The MPU 103 includes a ROM 104 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 103, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 104. A RAM 105, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated. The MPU 103 controls the pattern display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 91 .

Although not shown, the display control board 102 includes a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, etc. in addition to the MPU 103 . The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing, and causes the pattern display device 41 to display the image data. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41 . This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 82, ROM 83 and RAM 84 of the main controller 71 will be referred to as the main MPU 82, main ROM 83 and main RAM 84, and the MPU 93, ROM 94 and RAM 95 of the sound emission control device 91 will be referred to as the sound and light side. The MPU 93, the sound and light side ROM 94 and the sound and light side RAM 95 are called, and the MPU 103, the ROM 104 and the RAM 105 of the display control device 101 are called the display side MPU 103, the display side ROM 104 and the display side RAM 105.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 82>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 82 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main side MPU 82 uses various counter information during the game to set the winning lottery, the display setting of the special figure display units 37a and 37b, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the display setting of the normal figure display unit 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery of winning occurrence, a type random number counter C2 used when determining the jackpot result type and the time saving result type, A reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the pattern display device 41 fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the hit random number counter C1, special figure display parts 37a, 37b and pattern display A variation type counter CS that determines the variation display period in the device 41 is used. Furthermore, a general electric random number counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the general electric open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 84b of the main RAM 84. FIG.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. The information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure reservation provided in the main side RAM 84 when the winning to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 occurs. Stored in area 84a. The special figure reservation area 84a includes a first special figure reservation area 111, a second special figure reservation area 112, and an execution area 113 for special figures.

The first special figure reservation area 111 includes a first area 111a, a second area 111b, a third area 111c and a fourth area 111d. Each numerical value information of the type random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 111a to 111d as first reserved information. In this case, in the first area 111a to the fourth area 111d, when the winning to the first operation opening 33 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 111a→second area 111b→third area 111c→third area Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the 4 areas 111d. Since the four areas 111a to 111d are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operation opening 33 are reserved and stored. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 111 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular.

The second special figure reservation area 112 comprises a first area 112a, a second area 112b, a third area 112c and a fourth area 112d. Numerical information of the type random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as second reserved information in one of the areas 112a to 112d. In this case, in the first area 112a to the fourth area 112d, when the winning to the second operation opening 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 112a→second area 112b→third area 112c→third area Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the 4 areas 112d. Since the four areas 112a to 112d are provided in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the second operation opening 34 are reserved and stored. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 is not limited to 4 and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3 or 5 or more , may be singular.

Execution area 113 for the special figure is an area in which reservation information of the target for performing the success/failure determination, distribution determination, etc. is stored when the variable display is started in one of the special figure display units 37a and 37b. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a, the reservation information stored in the first area 111a of the first special figure reservation area 111 is moved to the execution area 113 for the special figure. be. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the 2nd special figure display part 37b, the reservation information stored in the 1st area 112a of the 2nd special figure reservation area 112 is moved to the execution area 113 for special figures.

Information corresponding to the general/universal electric random number counter C4 is stored in the general/universal diagram reservation area 84c when winning to the through gate 35 occurs. The general pattern reservation area 84c includes a first area 114a, a second area 114b, a third area 114c and a fourth area 114d. is stored in one of the areas 114a to 114d as reserved information on the normal map side. In this case, in the first area 114a to the fourth area 114d, when winning to the through gate 35 occurs multiple times in a row, the first area 114a→second area 114b→third area 114c→fourth area Numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of 114d. Since the four areas 114a to 114d are provided in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the through gate 35 are reserved and stored. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the normal drawing reservation area 84c is not limited to 4 and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3 or 5 or more. may be An execution area 115 for a normal map is provided in the normal map reservation area 84c. The general pattern execution area 115 is an area in which reservation information for which the general pattern correctness determination process is performed when the variable display is started in the normal pattern display section 38a is stored. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is started, the reservation information stored in the first area 114a of the normal map reservation area 84c is moved to the execution area 115 for the normal map.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the general electric random number counter C4 will be described. The general electric random number counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the general drawing reservation area 84c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35.例文帳に追加Then, at a predetermined timing, a general/universal pattern correctness determination process for determining whether or not to control the general/universal electric accessory 34a to the open state is performed based on the stored value of the general/universal electric random number counter C4.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a plurality of types of support modes so that the modes of support provided by the general electric role item 34a are different from each other. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the support mode.

In the support mode, the frequency at which the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 becomes an open state per unit time when compared with the situation where the shooting of the game ball is continued in the same manner to the game area A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the is relatively high and low. A first high-frequency support mode and a second high-frequency support mode are set as high-frequency support modes.

As a determination mode in the case where the general pattern suitability determination process is executed for determining by lottery whether or not the general electric role 34a is in the open state, the probability of winning the electric role open is relative. There is a high probability mode on the general map side and a low probability mode on the general map side so that it is relatively high and low. In the low-probability mode of the general map side, the probability of being elected to open the electric role in one general pattern correctness determination process is 1/2, whereas in the high-probability mode of the general map side, the general pattern correctness judgment is performed once. In the process, the probability of winning the electric role open is 4/5.

When the normal pattern suitability determination process is executed, the variable display of the pattern is started in the normal pattern display section 38a. In this case, as the variation period of the general pattern, which is the duration of the variation display times in which the variation display of the pattern is executed in the general pattern display section 38a, a long period and a short period are selected so that the period is relatively long and short. exists. The long term is 10 seconds whereas the short term is 1 second.

When the variable display time of the normal pattern display unit 38a ends, the normal map display unit 38a displays the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the normal pattern correctness determination process that triggered the execution of the variable display time. . In this case, when the determination result of the general/universal pattern correctness determination process is a result of deviation, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed on the general/universal pattern display unit 38a, and the transition to the general/universal power open state does not occur. When the reservation information on the side of the general pattern is stored in the general pattern reservation area 84c, the reservation information on the side of the general pattern is newly subjected to the general pattern propriety determination process, and is newly displayed in the general pattern display unit 38a. A variable display time is started. On the other hand, if the determination result of the general pattern correctness determination process is the result corresponding to the electric role open winning, the stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the general pattern display unit 38a, and the transition to the general electric open state is performed. Occur.

As execution modes in the general electric open state, there are a high expectation mode and a low expectation mode so that the degree of expectation of a game ball entering the general electric accessory 34a is relatively high and low. In the low-expectation mode, the short opening of the universal electrical accessory 34a occurs once. The duration of the short opening is 0.7 seconds. As already explained, the shooting cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds. Even if it does occur, the number of hit balls is about one. The general electric open state also ends when the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 reaches 10, which is the upper limit number of the general electric side, but when short open occurs once As described above, even if a game ball enters the second operating port 34, it is about one, so the upper limit number of game balls on the power supply side will not enter the second operating port 34.

In the high expectation mode, the long opening of the universal electrical accessory 34a occurs three times. The duration of the long open is 2 seconds. As already explained, since the game ball shooting cycle is 0.6 seconds, when the general electric accessory 34a is opened once for a long time, about 3 game balls enter the second operation opening 34. obtain. Then, in the general electricity open state of the high expectation mode, the long opening occurs three times with an interval period (specifically, 1 second) on the general electricity side in which the second operating port 34 is in the closed state. Therefore, when the high-expectation mode general electric open state occurs, about nine game balls can enter. In addition, as described above, the general electric open state ends when the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 reaches 10, which is the upper limit number of the general electric side. When the open state occurs, the event that the general electric open state ends can occur when the upper limit number of game balls on the general electric side enter the second operation opening 34 .

As described above, in the configuration in which the determination mode of the general pattern suitability determination process, the execution mode of the general pattern fluctuation period and the general electrical open state in the general pattern display unit 38a are set, in the low frequency support mode, the general pattern suitability determination process The judgment mode of is a low probability mode on the general map side, the fluctuation period of the general pattern is a long period, and the execution mode of the general electric open state is a low expectation mode in which short opening occurs once. In addition, in the first high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the general pattern correctness determination process is the high probability mode on the general pattern side, the fluctuation period of the general pattern is short, and the execution mode of the general pattern open state is long open 3 times It becomes a high expectation mode that occurs. In addition, in the second high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the general pattern correctness judgment process is the low probability mode on the general pattern side, the fluctuation period of the general pattern is short, and the execution mode of the general pattern open state is long open 3 times It becomes a high expectation mode that occurs. Therefore, when the shooting of the game ball is continued in the same manner so as to generate a winning prize to the through gate 35, the rate at which the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 is in the open state per unit time is the highest in the first high-frequency support mode, the second highest in the second high-frequency support mode, and the lowest in the low-frequency support mode. In addition, in the low frequency support mode, since the execution mode of the normal electric open state becomes the low expectation mode, in the low frequency support mode, although the game ball hardly enters the second operation port 34 On the other hand, in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the execution mode of the mains open state is the high-expectation mode, so when the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode It can be expected that the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 is the upper limit number or more of the second reservation information in the second special figure reservation area 112.

It should be noted that the configuration for differentiating the degree of expectation of the rate at which the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state per unit time between the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode is It is not limited to the above, for example, a short period is selected in the first high-frequency support mode as the fluctuation period of the normal chart, while a short period and a long period are selected in the second high-frequency support mode. In the first high-frequency support mode as the execution mode of the normal power open state, the long open occurs three times, while the long open occurs twice in the second high-frequency support mode. It is good also as a structure which generate|occur|produces twice. Also, in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, although the determination mode of the normal pattern suitability determination process is the same in the high probability mode on the normal map side, the normal pattern fluctuation period or the normal electric open state is executed Depending on the content of the mode, the first high-frequency support mode has a higher expectation of the ratio of the general electrical equipment 34a of the second operation port 34 being in the open state per unit time than the second high-frequency support mode. may be configured.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9999, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 9999). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, stored in the first special figure reservation area 111 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 33, and second at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the special figure reservation area 112. Then, using the stored numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, a win/fail determination process is performed.

The values of random numbers to be won in the winning/failure determination process are stored in the main ROM 83 as a winning/failure table. The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode in which the probability of a big win result is relatively high or low as the win-or-fail lottery mode of the win-or-fail determination process. As the success/failure table referred to in the success/failure determination process in the low-probability mode, the first success/failure table 121 at the time of low probability referred to when the success/failure determination process is executed for the first reservation information, and the second suspension information. A second success/failure table 122 for low probability is provided to be referred to when the success/failure determination process is executed. A high-probability success/failure table 123 is provided as a success/failure table referred to in the success/failure determination process in the high-probability mode.

FIG. 9(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first right/wrong table 121 at the time of low probability, and FIG. 9(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second right/wrong table 122 at the time of low probability, FIG. 9(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success/failure table 123 when the probability is high.

As shown in FIGS. 9(a) to 9(c), the result of the winning/failing determination process includes a big win result, a time saving result, and a losing result. The jackpot result is a winning/failing result that can serve as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode in which a plurality of round games are executed, as well as a trigger for shifting to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. Although a time saving result does not serve as a shift opportunity to the opening/closing execution mode and does not serve as a shift trigger for the success/failure lottery mode, it is a win/fail result that can serve as a shift trigger for the support mode. The deviation result is a win/fail result that does not trigger a shift to the opening/closing execution mode, and does not trigger a shift to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode.

The pachinko machine 10 has a set value that determines the degree of advantage per unit time. The setting value is "setting n" (where n is an integer from "1" to "6"). "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" exist as setting values. As shown in FIG. 9(a), in the first right/wrong table 121 at the time of low probability, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a big win result, and the higher the set value, the lower the probability of a misrepresentation result. . On the other hand, the probability of a time saving result is set to be the same for any of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

Specifically, the lowest setting value "setting 1" is set to 50 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big hit, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a time saving result. 100 is set as the number of , and 9850 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss. In addition, 52 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big hit in the "setting 2", which is a set value that is one step higher than the "setting 1", and the winning random number counter that results in a time saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9848 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss. In addition, 54 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big hit in the "setting 3", which is a set value one step higher than the "setting 2", and the winning random number counter that results in a time saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9846 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss. In addition, 56 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big hit in the "setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than the "setting 3", and the winning random number counter that results in a time saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9844 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss. In addition, 58 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big hit in "setting 5", which is a set value one step higher than "setting 4", and the winning random number counter that results in a time saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9842 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss. In addition, 60 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a big win in the "setting 6" which is the highest setting value, and as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time saving result 100 pieces are set, and 9840 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss. As described above, the probability of a time-saving result in the low-probability mode is higher than the probability of a jackpot result, regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), in the second right/wrong table 122 at the time of low probability, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a big win result, and the higher the set value, the lower the probability of a misrepresentation result. . On the other hand, the probability of a time saving result is set to be the same for any of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

Specifically, the lowest setting value "setting 1" is set to 50 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big hit, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a time saving result. 120 is set as the number of , and 9830 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss. In addition, 52 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big hit in the "setting 2", which is a set value that is one step higher than the "setting 1", and the winning random number counter that results in a time saving result. 120 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9828 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss. In addition, 54 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big hit in the "setting 3", which is a set value one step higher than the "setting 2", and the winning random number counter that results in a time saving result. 120 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9826 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss. In addition, 56 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big hit in the "setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than the "setting 3", and the winning random number counter that results in a time saving result. 120 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9824 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss. In addition, 58 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big hit in "setting 5", which is a set value one step higher than "setting 4", and the winning random number counter that results in a time saving result. 120 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9822 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss. In addition, 60 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a big win in the "setting 6" which is the highest setting value, and as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a time saving result 120 pieces are set, and 9820 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss.

In other words, the probability of the big win result for each setting value is the same between the first success/failure table 121 for the low probability and the second success/failure table 122 for the low probability. On the other hand, the 2nd right/wrong table 122 at the time of low probability is higher than the 1st right/wrong table 121 of low probability as for the probability that a time saving result is chosen by right/wrong judgment processing. Therefore, when the success/failure lottery mode is a low probability mode, the case where the success/failure determination process is executed for the second reservation information is better than the case where the success/failure determination process is executed for the first reservation information. , the probability that the time-saving result will be selected increases.

In addition, it is not limited to this, and the probability that the time saving result is selected in the propriety determination process is the same or substantially the same in the first propriety table 121 at the time of low probability and the second propriety table 122 at the time of low probability or the first right/wrong table 121 for low probability may be higher than the second right/wrong table 122 for low probability. Moreover, in the 1st right/wrong table 121 at the time of a low probability, the probability of a time saving result is not limited to the structure which is the same with each set value, It is good also as a structure which fluctuates according to a set value. In this case, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of the time saving result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of the time saving result. Moreover, in the 2nd right/wrong table 122 at the time of a low probability, the probability of a time saving result is not limited to the structure with the same setting value, and it is good also as a structure which fluctuates according to a setting value. In this case, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of the time saving result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of the time saving result.

As shown in FIG. 9(c), the success/failure table 123 at the time of high probability is set such that the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a big win result, and the higher the set value, the lower the probability of a misrepresentation result. On the other hand, the probability of a time saving result is set to be the same for any of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

Specifically, 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big hit in the "setting 1" that is the lowest setting value, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a time saving result. 100 is set as the number of , and 9400 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss. In addition, 520 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big hit in the "setting 2", which is a set value one step higher than the "setting 1", and the winning random number counter that results in a time saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9380 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss. In addition, 540 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big hit in the "setting 3", which is a set value that is one step higher than the "setting 2", and the winning random number counter that results in a time saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9360 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss. In addition, 560 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big win in "setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "setting 3", and a winning random number counter that results in a time saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9340 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss. In addition, 580 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big hit in the "setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than the "setting 4", and the winning random number counter that results in a time saving result. 100 is set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9320 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss. In addition, 600 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big win in the "setting 6" which is the highest setting value, and as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a time saving result. 100 pieces are set, and 9300 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss.

If the high-probability correctness table 123 is in the high-probability mode, either the correctness determination process is executed for the first reserved information or the correctness determination process is executed for the second reserved information. It is referenced even if it exists. As a result, the correctness table corresponding to each case where the correctness determination process is executed for the first reservation information in the high probability mode and the case where the correctness determination process is executed for the second reservation information in the high probability mode is provided, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main-side ROM 83 required for storing the right/wrong table.

In the "setting 1", the probability of a big hit result is 1/200 in the low probability mode and 1/20 which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 2", the probability of a big hit result is about 1/192 in the low probability mode and about 1/19.2 which is ten times as high in the high probability mode. In the "setting 3", the probability of a big win result is about 1/185 in the low probability mode and about 1/18.5 which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 4", the probability of a big hit result is about 1/179 in the low probability mode and about 1/17.9 which is ten times as high in the high probability mode. In the "setting 5", the probability of a big win result is about 1/172 in the low probability mode and about 1/17.2 which is ten times as high in the high probability mode. In the "setting 6", the probability of a big win result is about 1/167 in the low probability mode and about 1/16.7 which is ten times as high in the high probability mode. In other words, the probability of a big win result in any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is 10 times higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

On the other hand, the probability of a time saving result is 1/100 in any of the "setting 1" to "setting 6" in the first right or wrong table 121 at the time of low probability and the right or wrong table 123 at the time of high probability, and the low probability In the second right/wrong table 122 of the hour, it is about 1/83 for any of "setting 1" to "setting 6". However, it is not limited to this, and the probability of a time saving result in the success/failure table 123 at the time of high probability is higher than the first success/failure table 121 at the time of low probability, and from the second success/failure table 122 at the time of low probability. may be set to be lower, or may be set to be higher than the second right/wrong table 122 at the time of low probability.

The numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1, which is the result of the big win, may be collectively set so as to be a serial number, or at least part or all of it may be distributed and set so as not to be a serial number. It is good also as a structure with. In addition, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, which is a time saving result, may be configured to be aggregated and set so as to be a serial number, and at least part or all of it may be distributed and set so as not to be a serial number. It is good also as a structure with.

As described above, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability that the result will be a big hit, regardless of whether the first reservation information is the trigger or the second reservation information is the trigger. The higher the value, the more advantageous it is for the player. In addition, the open/close execution mode is a period during which the amount of increase in the number of balls possessed by the player per unit time is the largest. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the set value.

In a configuration in which the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the probability of a jackpot result in the high-probability mode is the low-probability mode regardless of any of "setting 1" to "setting 6" , the probability of a big hit result is a certain number times (specifically, 10 times) higher than “1”. As a result, it is possible to make constant the fluctuation rate of the probability of a big win between the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode in any setting state.

When the combination of the set value and the win/fail lottery mode is the same and the combination is compared, the probability of the big win result is the same when triggered by the first reservation information and when triggered by the second reservation information. . As a result, it is possible to prevent a difference in the probability of occurrence of the big winning result between the case triggered by the first reservation information and the case triggered by the second reservation information.

The probability of a time saving result when triggered by the first pending information is the same for any of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In addition, the probability of the time saving result when triggered by the second hold information is the same for any of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it becomes possible for the player to limit the target to which the player pays attention in estimating the set value to the result of the big win, and it is possible to make it difficult to estimate the set value. On the other hand, the probability of the time saving result is higher when the second suspension information is the trigger than when the first suspension information is the trigger. Thereby, it is possible to make the occurrence frequency of the time saving result different between the case where the game round triggered by the first reservation information is executed and the case where the game round triggered by the second reservation information is executed.

The type random number counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The type random number counter C2 is periodically updated, stored in the first special figure reservation area 111 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33, and the second at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation opening 34. It is stored in the special figure reservation area 112.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are obtained by providing differences in three conditions: the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode, the success/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. is set. A jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure is provided as a jackpot distribution table referred to in the distribution determination processing for the jackpot when the jackpot result is selected in the success/failure determination processing for the first reservation information. there is In addition, a jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure is provided as a jackpot distribution table to be referred to in the distribution determination processing for the jackpot when the jackpot result is selected in the success/failure determination processing for the second reservation information. It is

FIG. 10(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure, and FIG. 10(b) is an explanation for explaining the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure. It is a diagram. As shown in FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b), the jackpot distribution tables 125 and 126 have 5R low-probability results, 5R high-probability results, and 10R high-probability results as types of jackpot results. is set. FIG. 11(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each jackpot result.

The 5R low-probability result is generated by being selected in the big-hit allocation determination process as a big-hit result in the success/failure determination process, as already described. The 5R low-probability result is that the number of times the round game is executed in the opening/closing execution mode is five times, the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the first high frequency. It is a jackpot result that becomes the support mode. The low probability mode in this case continues at least until the next open/close execution mode occurs. Further, the first high-frequency support mode ends when 100 game rounds are completed without the opening/closing execution mode newly occurring. When 100 games have been completed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

As already explained, the 5R high-probability result is generated when a jackpot result is selected in the hit/fail determination process and selected in the jackpot distribution determination process. The 5R high probability result is that the number of times the round game is executed in the opening/closing execution mode is five times, the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the first high frequency. It is a jackpot result that becomes the support mode. In this case, the high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode are terminated when 100 game rounds are completed without any new open/close execution mode. When 100 games have been played, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

The 10R high-probability result is generated by being selected in the big-hit allocation determination process as a big-hit result in the success/failure determination process, as described above. The 10R high probability result is that the number of times the round game is executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 10 times, the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the first high frequency. It is a jackpot result that becomes the support mode. In this case, the high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode are terminated when 100 game rounds are completed without any new open/close execution mode. When 100 games have been played, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 10A, the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure is set with 5R low probability results, 5R high probability results and 10R high probability results as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. ing. In the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 14" corresponds to the 5R low probability result, and the type random number counter C2 of "15 to 22" corresponds to the 5R high probability result. Correspondingly, the type random number counter C2 of "23 to 29" corresponds to the 10R high probability result. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure is set with 5R low probability results and 10R high probability results as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. In the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 14" corresponds to the 5R low probability result, and the type random number counter C2 of "15 to 29" corresponds to the 10R high probability result. Yes.

The jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure and the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure have the same probability of entering the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode when the jackpot is won. On the other hand, the average number of executions of the round game is larger in the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special symbol than in the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special symbol. Therefore, as for the types of jackpot results that can be selected when a jackpot is won, winning to the second operating port 34 is more likely than winning to the first operating port 33 and winning/failure determination processing is performed. It is more advantageous for the player if it occurs and the success/failure determination process is performed.

Not only are multiple types of jackpot results set, but also multiple types of time-saving results are set. When the time saving result is selected in the success/failure determination process, the type of the time saving result is determined by lottery using a type random number counter C2 used for determining the type of the jackpot result by lottery. In other words, not only the hit random number counter C1 used for selecting the jackpot result is used as the random number for selecting the time-saving result in the success/failure determination process, but also the time-saving result is selected in the success/failure determination process. As a random number for selecting the type of time saving result in the case, the type random number counter C2 used for selecting the type of jackpot result is used. As a result, the number of lottery counters can be reduced, and the storage capacity of the main-side RAM 84 required for conducting the lottery can be reduced.

A time-saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure is provided as a time-saving distribution table that is referred to in the time-saving distribution determination processing when the time-saving result is selected in the suitability determination processing for the first reservation information. there is In addition, a time-saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure is provided as a time-saving distribution table that is referred to in the time-saving distribution determination processing when the time-saving result is selected in the suitability determination processing for the second reservation information. It is

FIG. 10(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time-saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure, and FIG. 10(d) is an explanation for explaining the time-saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure. It is a diagram. As shown in FIG.10(c) and FIG.10(d), the 1st time-saving result and the 2nd time-saving result are set to each time-saving distribution table 127,128 as a kind of time-saving result. FIG.11(b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of each time saving opportunity.

A 1st time saving result generate|occur|produces by becoming a time saving result by right/wrong determination processing as already demonstrated, and being selected by distribution determination processing for time saving. The first time-saving result is a time-saving result in which the support mode is set to the second high-frequency support mode without triggering the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and furthermore not triggering the transition to the win/fail lottery mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 100 game rounds are completed without any new open/close execution mode. When 100 games have been completed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

A 2nd time saving result generate|occur|produces by becoming a time saving result by right/wrong determination processing as already demonstrated, and being selected by distribution determination processing for time saving. The second time-saving result is a time-saving result in which the support mode is set to the second high-frequency support mode without triggering the shift to the opening/closing execution mode and further without triggering the shift to the win/fail lottery mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 150 game rounds are completed without any new open/close execution mode. When 150 game rounds have been completed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. That is, the second time saving result has more execution times of the game times in which the second high-frequency support mode continues than the first time saving result. Therefore, the second time saving result is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving result.

As the time saving distribution table 127 for the 1st special figure shows in FIG.10(c), the 1st time saving result and the 2nd time saving result are set as a kind of the time saving result used as distribution object. In the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 19" corresponds to the first time saving result, and the type random number counter C2 of "20 to 29" is the second time saving result Yes. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10(d), the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure has the first time saving result and the second time saving result set as the type of time saving result to be distributed. . In the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 9" corresponds to the first time saving result, and the type random number counter C2 of "10 to 29" is the second time saving result. Yes.

In the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure, the selection probability of the first time saving result, which is relatively disadvantageous, is higher than the selection probability of the second time saving result, which is relatively advantageous. In the time saving distribution table 128 for 2 special figures, the selection probability of the second time saving result, which is relatively advantageous, is higher than the selection probability of the first time saving result, which is relatively disadvantageous. Furthermore, the selection probability of the 2nd time saving result which is relatively advantageous is higher in the time saving distribution table 128 for 2nd special figures than the time saving distribution table 127 for 1st special figures. Therefore, as the type of time saving result that can be selected when the time saving result is obtained in the success or failure determination process, the second operation than when the winning to the first operation port 33 occurs and the success determination process It is more advantageous for the player when winning to the mouth 34 occurs and the win/loss determination process is performed.

Here, the fact that the time saving result is selected in the success or failure determination process can occur even if the success or failure lottery mode is any of the low probability mode and the high probability mode, even if the time saving result is selected in the high probability mode The setting of the support mode triggered by the time saving result is not performed. In addition, the fact that the time saving result is selected in the propriety determination process can occur in any of the low frequency support mode, the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode, Even if the time saving result is selected in the frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the setting of the support mode triggered by the time saving result is not performed. That is, the setting of the support mode triggered by the time saving result corresponding to the time saving result being selected in the propriety determination process occurs only in the situation of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the situation of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the last of the high frequency support mode in the situation of the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode It also includes the situation after the processing for terminating the high-frequency support mode and shifting to the low-frequency support mode is executed in the game round.

Since the transition to the second high-frequency support mode due to the time-saving result occurs only in the low probability mode, when the time-saving result occurs and the transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs, in the low probability mode There is a second high-frequency support mode. That is, the time saving result is the result of shifting the game state to the time saving state without intervening the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, the support mode set after the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the first high-frequency support mode, while the support mode set by the time-saving result is the second. 2 High frequency support mode. That is, the support mode triggered by the jackpot result is more advantageous than the support mode triggered by the time saving result.

In the pachinko machine 10, as an event that shifts the support mode to the second high-frequency support mode without generating the opening and closing execution mode, there is a ceiling time saving in addition to the time saving result as described above. The ceiling time reduction occurs when the ceiling number of game rounds is completed without a jackpot result as shown in FIG. 11(b). Note that the number of times of ceiling is set when a jackpot result occurs, and also when supply of operating power is started. This will be explained in detail later. The ceiling time reduction is a result of setting the support mode to the second high-frequency support mode without triggering the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and further not triggering the transition to the win/fail lottery mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 100 game rounds are completed without any new open/close execution mode. When 100 games have been completed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

The number of continuations of the second high-frequency support mode that occurs due to the ceiling time reduction is the same as the number of continuations of the second high-frequency support mode that occurs due to the first time reduction result, and the second time reduction result less than the number of continuations of the second high-frequency support mode caused by Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player if the time saving result is selected in the success/failure determination process rather than the ceiling time saving.

Digestion of the ceiling number of game rounds does not occur in the high probability mode. Therefore, even if the ceiling number is newly set by the 5R high probability result or the 10R high probability result, the remaining ceiling number is not subtracted until the subsequent high probability mode ends. On the other hand, in the low-probability mode, the completion of the ceiling number of game rounds occurs regardless of which mode the support mode is. However, even if the ceiling number of games is completed in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the support mode is not set with the completion of the ceiling number of games. That is, the setting of the support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving for the completion of the ceiling number of game times occurs only in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the situation of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the last of the high frequency support mode in the situation of the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode It also includes the situation after the processing for terminating the high-frequency support mode and shifting to the low-frequency support mode is executed in the game round.

Since the transition to the second high-frequency support mode due to the ceiling time reduction occurs only when it is in the low probability mode, when the ceiling time reduction occurs and the transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs, in the low probability mode There is a second high-frequency support mode. That is, the ceiling time saving is the result of shifting the game state to the time saving state without intervening the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, the support mode set after the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the first high-frequency support mode, while the support mode set by the ceiling time reduction is the second. 2 High frequency support mode. That is, the support mode triggered by the jackpot result is more advantageous than the support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

FIG. 12 is a time chart showing how the time saving state is set according to the time saving result or the ceiling time saving. FIG. 12(a) shows the period of the opening/closing execution mode, FIG. 12(b) shows the state of the ceiling counter 131 provided in the main RAM 84, and FIG. 12(c) shows the period of the high probability state. , FIG. 12(d) shows the timing at which the time saving result is selected in the success/failure determination process, and FIG. 12(e) shows the time period in the time saving state.

First, a case will be described in which the event of the time saving state triggered by the time saving result and the event of the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occur non-continuously.

When the result of the suitability determination process becomes the 5R high probability result or the 10R high probability result, the opening/closing execution mode is started at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 12(a). In this case, with the start of the opening/closing execution mode as a trigger, 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 provided in the main RAM 84 as shown in FIG. 12(b). The ceiling counter 131 is a counter for specifying the number of remaining ceilings in the main MPU 82 .

After that, at the timing t2, the open/close execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 12(a), resulting in a high probability state as shown in FIG. 12(c). The high-probability state is a game state that is a high-probability mode and a first high-frequency support mode. The high probability state ends at timing t4 when 100 game rounds are completed. In the opening/closing execution mode, the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented because the game round is not executed, and in the high-probability mode, even if the game round is executed, the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented. Therefore, at the timing t4 when the high probability state ends, the value of the ceiling counter 131 does not change from the timing t1 when the fixed ceiling count is set in the ceiling counter 131 . In addition, at the timing of t3, which is the timing in the middle of the high-probability state, the time-saving result is selected in the success/failure determination process as shown in FIG. be done.

At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 12(c), the game state changes to the normal game state by ending the high probability state. In the normal game state, whether the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed or the game round triggered by the second hold information is executed, as shown in FIG. 12(b) Thus, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12(d) at the timing of t5, the time saving result is selected in the success/failure determination process. Since the game state at the timing of t5 is the normal game state, as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the opening/closing execution mode does not intervene, and the win/fail lottery mode is maintained in the low probability mode. The time-saving state is a low-probability mode and a game state that is a second high-frequency support mode. In the time saving state, when the game round triggered by the first reservation information is executed and when the game round triggered by the second reservation information is executed, as shown in FIG. 12(b) , the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted. After that, the time saving state ends as shown in FIG. 12(e) because the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state becomes 0 times at the timing of t6 without a big hit result occurring in the time saving state. In this case, the game state is the normal game state.

After that, at the timing of t7, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 12(b). In other words, the ceiling number of game times is completed. Since the game state at the timing of t7 is the normal game state, as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the opening/closing execution mode does not intervene, and the win/fail lottery mode is maintained in the low probability mode. The time-saving state is a low-probability mode and a game state that is a second high-frequency support mode. After that, the time saving state ends as shown in FIG. 12(e) by the remaining number of continuation times of the time saving state becoming 0 times at the timing of t8 without a big hit result occurring in the time saving state. In this case, the game state is the normal game state.

The value of the ceiling counter 131 is not set when the ceiling time saving state is used as a trigger to move to the time saving state or when the time saving state ends. In addition, the transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving is the value of the ceiling counter 131 as a result of the game round being digested and the value of the ceiling counter 131 being subtracted in a situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more is "0". Therefore, the transition to the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs only once after the jackpot result occurs, and if the transition to the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs once, basically after that Unless the value of the ceiling counter 131 is set due to the occurrence of the jackpot result, the transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving does not occur.

Next, the case where the phenomenon which becomes a time saving state triggered by becoming a time saving result and the phenomenon which becomes a time saving state and the ceiling time saving as a trigger are continuously generated will be described.

When the result of the suitability determination process becomes the 5R high probability result or the 10R high probability result, the opening/closing execution mode is started at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 12(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 12(b), the ceiling counter 131 is set to 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings, when the opening/closing execution mode is started.

After that, at the timing of t10, the open/close execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 12(a), resulting in a high probability state as shown in FIG. 12(c). The high probability state ends at timing t11 when 100 game rounds are completed. In this case, the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented because the game round is not executed in the opening/closing execution mode, and the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented even if the game round is executed in the high-probability mode. Therefore, at timing t11 when the high probability state ends, the value of the ceiling counter 131 does not change from timing t9 when the number of fixed ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 .

At the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 12(c), the game state changes to the normal game state by ending the high probability state. In the normal game state, whether the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed or the game round triggered by the second hold information is executed, as shown in FIG. 12(b) Thus, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented.

Then, as shown in Drawing 12 (d) at the timing of t12, a time saving result is chosen by propriety judging processing. Since the game state at the timing of t12 is the normal game state, the time saving result is used as a trigger to shift to the time saving state as shown in FIG. 12(e). In this case, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the opening/closing execution mode does not intervene, and the win/fail lottery mode is maintained in the low probability mode. The time saving state is a game state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. In the time saving state, when the game round triggered by the first reservation information is executed and when the game round triggered by the second reservation information is executed, as shown in FIG. 12(b) , the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted. After that, at the timing of t13, which is the timing in the middle of the time saving state, the time saving result is selected in the success/failure determination process as shown in FIG. .

After that, in the time saving state, the remaining number of continuation times of the time saving state becomes 0 times at the timing of t14 without the jackpot result occurring, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. Become. In this case, it is in the time saving state at the timing when the last game round of the time saving state is started, but the remaining number of continuation times of the time saving state becomes 0 times in the processing executed when the game round ends. By specifying that, the support mode is changed from the second high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and the game state changes from the time-saving state to the normal game state. Also, when the game cycle ends, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented by 1 after the processing is executed, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". That is, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after the game state is set from the time saving state to the normal game state in the game round. Therefore, the time-saving state is set in response to completion of the ceiling number of game rounds in the game round. Therefore, the time saving state will continue without the time saving state ending at the timing of t14. The time-saving state is a low-probability mode and a game state that is a second high-frequency support mode. After that, the time saving state ends as shown in FIG. 12(e) because the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state becomes 0 at the timing of t15 without a big hit result occurring in the time saving state. In this case, the game state is the normal game state.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 in FIG. 7 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The ready-to-win display is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in game rounds in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Moreover, in the game times corresponding to the time saving result, the reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Also, in the game cycle corresponding to the result of the loss, the reach table stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to, and the reach display is executed when the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the generation of the reach display.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display period in the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the variation display period of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 in the main side MPU82. The variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated, and is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the special figure display units 37a and 37b and at the start of variation in the design by the design display device 41.

<Regarding various processes executed by the main MPU 82>
Next, each process executed in order to advance the game in the main MPU 82 will be described. The processing of the main MPU 82 can be roughly classified into main processing that is activated when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is periodically activated (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during this predetermined waiting period. Also, access to the main side RAM 84 is permitted.

Thereafter, an internal function register setting process is executed (step S102). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt period of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to a predetermined period (specifically, 4 milliseconds). Details of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) will be described later. In the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the interrupt period, the process of setting the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1, for example, is executed.

After that, "1" is set to the start-up processing flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S103). Even if the timer interrupt process (Fig. 14) is started, the start-up process flag is used to monitor power outages, update various counters, and monitor fraud among the various processes set in the timer interrupt process (Fig. 14). is executed, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is to be ended without executing the processing for advancing the game.

The start-up processing flag is set to "1" when the processing (steps S101 to S126) at the start of supply of operating power is started in the main processing (FIG. 13). (Steps S101 to S126) are completed and before the remaining processing (Steps S127 to S130) is started, "0" is cleared. In the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S207 to S220 is not executed, so that the processing at the start of supply of operating power ( Among steps S101 to S126), the processing for progressing the game can be prevented from being executed while the setting confirmation processing (step S112) or setting value update processing (step S117), which will be described later, is being executed. becomes. On the other hand, in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) as described above, even if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", by executing the processing of steps S201 to S205, the operating power is supplied. Power outage monitoring is executed even in a situation where setting confirmation processing (step S112) or set value update processing (step S117), which will be described later, of the processing at the start (steps S101 to S126) is being executed. The hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is performed.

In particular, by executing the power failure monitoring process (step S201) even in a situation where the start-up flag is set to "1", the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps S101 to SB126) Even if a power failure occurs while the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the set value update process (step S117), which will be described later, is being executed, the power failure process can be executed. In the power failure process, the power failure flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the main RAM 84, so the supply of operating power is restarted. In this case, it is possible not to specify that the main side RAM 84 is abnormal. As a result, if a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117), which will be described later, the occurrence of the power failure can be notified to the next operating power during these setting-related processes. It is possible to specify when the supply of Incidentally, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the set value update process (step S117), which will be described later, is being executed, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is not prohibited from being interrupted at an arbitrary timing. It is possible.

After "1" is set to the start-up processing flag in step S103, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the power failure flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S104). The power failure flag is set to "1" when the power failure process is executed in the power failure monitoring process (step S201) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). The power failure flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the power failure process was appropriately performed at the time of the previous power failure.

If the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S104: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step S105). Specifically, first, a checksum is calculated for the main RAM 84 . The checksum may be calculated by any method, but the calculation method is the same as the calculation method when the checksum is calculated in the power failure process in the power failure monitoring process (step S201) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) described later. ing. After that, the checksum calculated in the power failure processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped and stored in the main RAM 84 is read, and the read checksum is transferred to the main MPU 82 this time. Compare with the checksum calculated in the process. Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match.

If the checksums match (step S105: YES), it is determined whether the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area of the main RAM 84 is within the normal range (step S106). The setting reference area is a storage area in which information for specifying the setting value set to be used in the current pachinko machine 10 by the main side MPU 82 is stored. When the setting reference area stores the numerical value information of "1", the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1". When the setting reference area stores the numerical value information of "2", the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". When the setting reference area stores the numerical value information of "3", the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". When the numerical value information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". When the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". When the numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6". In step S106, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting reference area is one of "1" to "6".

If affirmative determination is made in all of steps S104 to S106, it means that information abnormality has not occurred in the main RAM 84. FIG. In this case, it is determined whether or not the setting updating flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S107). The setting updating flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that the setting value updating process (step S117) described later is being executed. is a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a setting value being updated on the notification display device 141 (see FIG. 6) mounted on the main control board 81 of the main control device 71. is done. The notification display device 141 has a plurality of segment displays. These multiple segment displays are arranged side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, and the display surface of each segment display can be viewed from the outside of the board box without opening the board box of the main control unit 71. It has become.

The setting updating flag is set to "1" when the setting value updating process (step S117) is started, and is cleared to "0" when the setting value updating process (step S117) ends. In a situation where the setting value updating process (step S117) is not executed, the setting updating flag is basically not set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped while the set value update process (step S117) is being executed, then if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started , the setting updating flag is set to "1". This state in which the setting update flag is set to "1" is maintained until the setting update flag is cleared to "0" in the setting value update process (step S117).

If a negative determination is made in step S107 because the setting updating flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the reset button 142 (see FIG. 6) is pressed (step S108). The reset button 142 is provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 , and the pressing operation portion of the reset button 142 is not covered by the board box of the main control device 71 . Therefore, it is possible to operate the reset button 142 without opening the board box. In step S108, it is determined whether or not the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state where the reset button 142 is pressed and the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 82 is started.

If the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S108: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S109). The game stop flag is set to "1" when the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksum does not match, or the set value is abnormal. By setting "1" to the game stop flag, while executing the processing of steps S201 to S205 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) described later, step S207 to step S207 by making an affirmative determination in step S206 The process of S220 is not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, the storage state of the main RAM 84 has changed since the previous power failure. If the checksum does not match or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed. will not be executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S109, the processes of steps S124 and S125, which will be described later, are executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S109, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 143 (see FIG. 6) is turned on using the setting key (step S110). The setting key inserting portion 143 is provided on the device mounting surface of the main control board 81 , and the keyhole portion for performing ON operation using the setting key for the setting key inserting portion 143 is formed in the board box of the main controller 71 . not covered by Therefore, it is possible to perform an ON operation by pressing the setting key to the setting key insertion portion 143 without opening the circuit board box. If the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on using the setting key (step S110: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S112). Further, even if the setting key insertion unit 143 is not turned on using the setting key (step S110: NO), the setting checking flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1". If there is (step S111: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S112).

The setting confirmation flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 82 that the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed. On the display device 141, a display indicating that the setting value is being checked and a display indicating the currently set setting value are performed. The setting confirmation flag is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process (step S112) is started, and is cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process (step S112) is terminated. In a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) is not executed, the setting confirmation flag is basically not set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started after that , the setting confirmation flag is set to "1". When the setting confirmation flag is set to "1", a RAM clearing process (step S119), which will be described later, is executed, a setting value update process (step S117), which will be described later, is executed, or a setting confirmation flag is set to "1". This is maintained until the setting confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in the process (step S112).

As described above, not only when the reset button 142 is not pressed and the setting key insertion portion 143 is ON (that is, when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 142 is The setting confirmation process (step S112) is executed by executing the setting confirmation process (step S112) even when the pressing operation is not performed and the setting confirmation flag is set to "1". If the power failure process is executed in this situation, the setting confirmation process (step S112) is executed even if the "setting confirmation operation" is not performed when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter. As a result, it is possible to continue to confirm the current set values of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, even if the power failure process is executed while the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed, if the reset button 142 is pressed when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter, Without executing the setting confirmation process (step S112), the RAM clear process (step S119) and the setting value update process (step S117) corresponding to the operation performed when the supply of operating power is restarted are executed. be. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the RAM clearing process (step S119) or the set value updating process (step S117) over the setting confirmation process (step S112).

Here, the setting confirmation process executed in step S112 will be described.

In the setting confirmation process, first, interrupt permission is set. As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is interrupted and started at a predetermined cycle. In the pachinko machine 10, in the process (steps S101 to S126) at the start of supply of operating power, the interrupt of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is basically prohibited, and the setting confirmation process (step S112) and the setting Execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is permitted while the value update process (step S117) is being executed. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117) is being executed, the startup process in progress flag is set to "1", so the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is started, among the various processes of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the process for advancing the game is executed. The timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is terminated without interruption. After that, on the condition that the setting confirmation flag of the main RAM 84 is not set to "1", the setting confirmation flag is set to "1". By setting the setting confirmation flag to "1", a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the notification display device. 141. After that, a confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . As a result, an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed and an image for recognizing the operation content for ending the setting confirmation process (step S112) are displayed on the pattern display device 41. The display side MPU 103 is display-controlled so that the

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key. When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 143 has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting confirmation flag of the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, the state in which the display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are performed on the notification display device 141 is canceled. be. After that, the interrupt prohibition is set. As a result, when the setting confirmation process (step S112) is terminated and the operation power supply start process (steps S101 to S126) in the main process (FIG. 13) is resumed, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed. interrupt is disabled. After that, a return command for confirmation is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . As a result, an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed in the pattern display device 41 and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for ending the setting confirmation process (step S112) are displayed. Display is terminated.

Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 13), when the setting key insertion unit 143 is not turned on using the setting key and the setting confirmation flag is not set to "1" (steps S110 and Step S111: NO), it is determined whether or not the gaming machine body 12 is open (step S113). A body open detection sensor 144 (see FIG. 6) is provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 . The body open detection sensor 144 is electrically connected to the main side MPU 82, and when the gaming machine body 12 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, it transmits a LOW level open detection signal to the main side MPU 82. On the other hand, when the game machine body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, an open detection signal of HI level is transmitted to the main side MPU82. Note that the relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed. In step S113, it is determined whether or not a HI level open detection signal has been received from the main body open detection sensor 144 or not.

When a HI level open detection signal is received from the main body open detection sensor 144 (step S113: YES), that is, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the ceiling of the main side RAM 84 Information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings, is set in the counter 131 (step S114). The process of step S113 is executed when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started and the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 143 is turned ON by the setting key. In addition, both the setting updating flag and the setting checking flag of the main RAM 84 are not set to "1". In this case, the setting confirmation process (step S112), the set value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119) are not executed in the process (steps S101 to S126) when the supply of operating power is started. situation. In addition, in the game hall, the main power supply for supplying operating power to each pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the power switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 78 of each pachinko machine 10 is turned on in advance. When it is time to start business for the day, the pachinko machines 10 are activated all at once by turning on the main power supply.

Under such circumstances, if the affirmative determination is made in step S113, the setting confirmation process (step S112), the setting value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119) are not executed. This is the case where the supply of operating power is started while the main body 12 is intentionally left open. In such a situation, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the ceiling counter 131 is set to 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings, when the supply of operating power is started, as a situation different from that at the start of normal business hours, and to confirm the setting. It is possible to generate this operation without using the application process (step S112), the set value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119).

When a negative determination is made in step S113 or when the process of step S114 is executed, a normal return command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 (step S115). By receiving the normal return command, the sound and light side MPU 93 identifies that the main side MPU 82 has completed the process (steps S101 to S126) for starting supply of operating power, (steps S101 to S126), it is determined that none of the RAM clearing process (step S119), setting confirmation process (step S112), and setting value update process (step S117) has been executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S108 that the reset button 142 has been pressed, and if it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 143 has been turned on using the setting key (step S116: YES). Alternatively, if it is determined in step S107 that the setting updating flag is set to "1", the setting value updating process is executed (step S117). As described above, not only when the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 143 is turned ON (that is, when the "setting change operation" is performed), the reset button 142 is pressed. The setting value update process (step S117) is executed even when the setting updating flag is set to "1" regardless of whether or not there is a pressing operation and an ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 143, thereby updating the setting value. If the power failure process is executed while the process (step S117) is being executed, the operation contents at the time of starting the supply of the operating power after that are "no operation", "RAM clear operation", "setting change". The setting value update process (step S117) is executed regardless of whether the operation is "operation" or "setting confirmation operation". This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the set value update process (step S117).

Here, the set value update process executed in step S117 will be described.

In the set value update process, first, interrupt permission is set. As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is interrupted and started at a predetermined cycle. In the pachinko machine 10, in the process (steps S101 to S126) at the start of supply of operating power, the interrupt of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is basically prohibited, and the setting confirmation process (step S112) and the setting Execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is permitted while the value update process (step S117) is being executed. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117) is being executed, the startup process in progress flag is set to "1", so the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is started, among the various processes of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the process for advancing the game is executed. The timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is terminated without interruption. After that, on condition that the setting updating flag of the main RAM 84 is not set to "1", the setting updating flag is set to "1". By setting the setting updating flag to "1", a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display of the setting value selected as an update target of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. This is performed by the notification display device 141 .

After that, the game stop flag of the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". If the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure (step S104: NO), the game stop flag is set to the main side from the time of the previous power failure. If the checksum does not match due to a change in the storage state of the RAM 84 (step S105: NO), or if the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area is not within the normal range (Step S106: NO) This is a flag set to "1" in step S121 of the main process (FIG. 13). By setting the game stop flag to "1", the process of steps S201 to S205 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), while the affirmative determination is made in step S206 to perform steps S207 to S220. Take no action. As a result, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84 as described above, processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while processing for progressing the game is executed. It will not be done. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the set value update process, the state in which the occurrence of information abnormality in the main side RAM 84 is specified is released when the set value update process (step S117) is executed. becomes possible.

After that, "1" is set in the setting update area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. The setting update area is a storage area in which information about setting values being updated in the setting value update process (step S117) is stored. If the setting update area stores the numerical value information "1", the setting value to be updated is "setting 1". If the setting update area stores the numerical value information "2", the setting value to be updated is "setting 2". When the setting update area stores the numerical value information "3", the setting value to be updated is "setting 3". When the setting update area stores the numerical value information "4", the setting value to be updated is "setting 4". If the setting update area stores the numerical value information "5", the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". If the setting update area stores the numerical value information "6", the setting value to be updated is "setting 6". After that, an update start command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . As a result, an image indicating that the setting value update process (step S117) is being executed, an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for changing the setting value, and the setting value update process (step S117) are completed. The display side MPU 103 is display-controlled so that the image for making the operation content for making it recognizable is displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

In the setting value update process, 1 is added to the value of the setting update area on condition that the reset button 142 is pressed. As a result, each time the reset button 142 is pressed once, the set value is updated to a value one step higher. If the value of the setting update area after adding 1 is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area. As a result, when the reset button 142 is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting returns to "setting 1".

In the setting value update process, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key. When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting reference area is overwritten with the setting value information stored in the setting update area. As a result, the setting value information updated as a result of this setting value updating process (step S117) is set in the setting reference area, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the current pachinko game. It becomes the setting value of the machine 10. After that, the interrupt prohibition is set. As a result, when the set value update process (step S117) is terminated and the main process (FIG. 13) returns to the operation power supply start process (steps S101 to S126), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed. interrupt is disabled.

After that, RAM clear processing is executed. In the RAM clearing process, an area (that is, a setting reference area) in which information of setting values indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main side RAM 84, information for calculating the role ratio in the ceiling counter 131 and the main side RAM 84 Except for the area where is stored, the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and initialized. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the winning lottery draws regardless of the winning lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Mode is low probability mode. In addition, the game round is not executed, the open/close execution mode is not executed, and the normal diagram display section 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. situation. In addition, since the special figure reservation area 84a and the general figure reservation area 84c are also cleared to "0", the first reservation information, the second reservation information and the reservation information on the general drawing side are erased. Also, the setting updating flag, the setting checking flag and the setting updating area are cleared to "0". Also, in the RAM clearing process, the various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step S102 is executed.

Here, even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed, the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not initialized, and the ceiling counter 131 is newly set including the fixed ceiling number information. is not performed. As a result, even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed, the remaining number of peaks can be maintained.

After that, a return command at the time of updating is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . As a result, an image indicating that the set value update process (step S117) is being executed in the pattern display device 41, an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for changing the set value, and the set value update process (step S117). The display of the image for recognizing the content of the operation for ending step S117) ends.

Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 13), if it is determined in step S108 that the reset button 142 has been pressed and the setting key insertion portion 143 has not been turned ON using the setting key, When determined (step S116: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S118). The game stop flag is set to "1" when the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksum does not match, or the set value is abnormal. By setting the game stop flag to "1", the process of steps S201 to S205 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), while the affirmative determination is made in step S206 to perform steps S207 to S220. Take no action. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, the storage state of the main RAM 84 has changed since the previous power failure. If the checksum does not match due to the fact that the game is running, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed. will not be executed.

If the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step S118: NO), RAM clear processing is executed (step S119). In the RAM clearing process, an area (that is, a setting reference area) in which information of setting values indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main side RAM 84, information for calculating the role ratio in the ceiling counter 131 and the main side RAM 84 Except for the area where is stored, the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and initialized. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the winning lottery draws regardless of the winning lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Mode is low probability mode. In addition, the game round is not executed, the open/close execution mode is not executed, and the normal diagram display section 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. situation. In addition, since the special figure reservation area 84a and the general figure reservation area 84c are also cleared to "0", the first reservation information, the second reservation information and the reservation information on the general drawing side are erased. Also, the setting updating flag and the setting checking flag are cleared to "0". Also, in the RAM clearing process, the various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing of step SB102 is executed.

Here, even if the RAM clearing process (step S119) is executed, the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not initialized, and furthermore, the new setting of the ceiling number including the information of the fixed ceiling number is not performed. Not done. As a result, even if the RAM clearing process (step S119) is executed, the remaining ceiling count can be maintained.

Thereafter, a return command for clearing is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 (step S120). The sound and light side MPU 93 receives the return command at the time of clearing, thereby specifying that the main side MPU 82 has completed the operation power supply start process (steps S101 to S126), and at the same time, starts supplying the current operating power. It specifies that the RAM clearing process (step S119) has been executed in the time process (steps S101 to S126).

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S104 to S106 in the main process (FIG. 13), that is, if the power failure flag is not set to "1", if the checksum does not match, or if the set value is abnormal If so, the game stop flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S121). As already described, by setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps S201 to S205 is executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), while the affirmative determination is made in step S206 to step S207. ~ Do not execute the process of step S220. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, the storage state of the main RAM 84 has changed since the previous power failure. If the checksum does not match or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed. will not be executed.

Thereafter, information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S122). As already explained, the set value update process (step S117) is executed, but even if it is executed, the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not initialized. A new setting of the number of times is not performed. Therefore, even if the setting value update process (step S117) is executed to cancel the game stoppage state due to the information abnormality when the information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 84, the information of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained as it is. . On the other hand, when it is specified that an information error has occurred in the main RAM 84 and the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the ceiling counter 131 is set to 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling frequency. information is set. As a result, even if the information in the ceiling counter 131 has been rewritten when an information error occurs in the main RAM 84, the information in the ceiling counter 131 can be reset to the fixed ceiling number of times of 500 times. becomes.

After that, it is determined whether or not the reset button 142 is pressed (step S123). If the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S123: NO), an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag, checksum, or set value is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 at the start of supply of operating power. (Step S124). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting section 64 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of supply of the operating power, and the speaker section 65 reads "Please change the setting." output a sound. Also, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification will not be made until the setting value update process (step S117) is executed when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed. It will start again.

After that, external output processing at the time of abnormality is executed (step S125). In the abnormal external output process, a process for externally outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, it is not limited to this, and in the situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", the signal output of the abnormal signal is continued, and the game stop flag is cleared to "0" to output the abnormal signal. A configuration in which signal output is stopped may be employed.

If the reset button 142 has been pressed (step S123: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 143 has been turned on using the setting key (step S116). When the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on using the setting key (steps S116 and S123: YES), set value update processing is executed (step S117). The processing contents of the set value update processing are as already explained. In other words, if the operating power is supplied to the main MPU 82 while the "setting change operation" is being performed, it means that the main RAM 84 has an abnormality, and it is negative in any of steps S104 to S106. Even when the determination is made, the set value update process (step S117) is executed. This makes it possible to give priority to changing the setting value. Also, in the set value update process (step S117), the game stop flag is cleared to "0" as already described. As a result, when the set value update process (step S117) is executed, it is possible to eliminate the state in which the main RAM 84 is abnormal after the update of the set values is completed.

On the other hand, if the reset button 142 has been pressed but the setting key insertion portion 143 has not been turned ON (step S123: YES, step S116: NO), the game stop flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". (step S118). In the process of step S118 after the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S121, the game stop flag is naturally set to "1", so an affirmative determination is made in step S118. In this case, an abnormality command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 in step S124, and an abnormality signal is output to the outside in step S125.

In other words, when an abnormality related to the power failure flag, checksum, and set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps S104 to S106, the operation to the main MPU 82 is performed in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. Even if power supply is started, the RAM clearing process (step S119) is not executed. In addition, when the game stop flag is set to "1" and the "RAM clearing operation" is being performed, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. Step S119) is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started while the "RAM clearing operation" is being performed, the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1" is not cleared. It becomes possible. On the other hand, if the "setting change operation" is performed, regardless of whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1", the setting value update process (step S117) is executed and the setting The game stop flag is cleared to "0" in the value update process (step S117). As a result, it becomes necessary to execute the set value update process (step S117) in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1". Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84, it is possible not only to initialize a part of the area of the main RAM 84 but also to reset the set values.

When the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 82 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", the "setting change operation" is not performed, that is, the case of "no operation" Alternatively, if the "RAM clear operation" or "setting confirmation operation" is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S109 or step S118, whereby an abnormal command is transmitted in step S124 and an external Execute output processing. As a result, when the game stop flag is set to "1", the main side Every time the supply of operating power to the MPU 82 is started, an abnormality notification in the pachinko machine 10 and an external output at the time of abnormality to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize that the set value should be changed.

When the process of step S112 is executed, when the process of step S115 is executed, when the process of step S117 is executed, when the process of step S120 is executed, or when the process of step S125 is executed, The raising process flag is cleared to "0" (step S126). When the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is started by clearing the start-up processing flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S206, so that not only the processing of steps S201 to S205 but also step S207 The processing of step S220 is executed, and the state in which the processing for progressing the game is not executed is released. In step S126, the power failure flag of the main RAM 84 is also cleared to "0".

After that, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps S127 to S130. In other words, although the main MPU 82 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of the timer interrupt processing, but such irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining processing of steps S127 to S130. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S127 to S130 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining process, first, in step S127, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). In subsequent step S128, random number initial value update processing for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S129, variation counter update processing for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 84, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, they are cleared to "0" when the counter value exceeds the maximum value. After that, in step S130, interrupt permission is set to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted. When the process of step S130 has been executed, the process returns to step S127, and the processes of steps S127 to S130 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started at a period of 4 msec.

First, power failure monitoring processing is executed (step S201). In the power failure monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 85, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, an infinite loop occurs after the power failure process is executed. . In the power failure processing, the power failure flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored.

After that, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the general electric random number counter C4, and after executing the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, Executes a process to overwrite the read source counter. In this case, they are cleared to "0" when the counter value exceeds the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S203, random number initial value update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S128 of the main processing (FIG. 13), and in step S204, fluctuation counter update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S129 of the main processing (FIG. 13). do.

After that, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S205). In the fraud detection process, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag of the main RAM 84 (step S206). If "1" is set to either the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag (step S206: YES), this timer interrupt process is terminated without executing the processes of steps S207 to S220. As a result, in a situation where the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag is set to "1", power failure monitoring, random number updating, and fraud monitoring are executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14). It is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from S207 to S220.

When "1" is not set to both the game stop flag and the start-up processing flag (step S206: NO), the process for progressing the game in steps S207 to S220 is executed. Specifically, first, port output processing is executed (step S207). In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b is started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, read processing is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. After that, ball entry detection processing is executed (step S209). In the ball-entering detection process, signals received from the winning detection sensors 86a to 86e are read and sent to the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35. Execute processing to identify the presence or absence of a ball entry.

After that, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 84 (step S210). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. may be configured.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of game balls is executed (step S211). In a situation where the shooting operation is continued with respect to the shooting operation device 28, one game ball is shot every 0.6 seconds so as to have a predetermined shooting cycle, as already explained.

After that, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S208, disconnection of each of the winning detection sensors 86a to 86e is checked, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is checked (step S212).

After that, a special figure special electric control process is executed to control the execution of game rounds and the opening and closing execution mode (step S213), and the display control of the general figure display unit 38a and the execution control of the general electric open state are performed. Executes the normal/universal electric power control process for the purpose (step S214). These special figure special electric control processing and general figure general electric control processing are explained in detail later.

In the following step S215, based on the processing result of step S213 and step S214 immediately before, setting the output information for reflecting the increase/decrease number of the first reservation information in the first special figure reservation display section 37c, the second reservation information Set the output information for reflecting the increase/decrease number in the second special figure reservation display section 37d, and set the output information for reflecting the increase/decrease number of the reservation information on the normal diagram side in the normal diagram reservation display section 38b. In addition, in step S215, based on the processing results of step S213 and step S214 immediately before, while setting the output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b , and sets output information for updating the display contents of the normal map display section 38a.

After that, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and payout state reception processing for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S216). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Also, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S218).

Thereafter, setting monitoring processing is executed (step S219). In the setting monitoring process, by determining whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting reference area of the main side RAM 84 is one of "1" to "6", it is set as a use target. It is determined whether the setting value is one of "setting 1" to "setting 6". If the setting value information stored in the setting reference area is "0" or 7 or more, it means that the setting value set as the object to be used is abnormal. is set to "1". As a result, the game cannot proceed until the setting value to be used is newly set in the setting value update process (step S117). Thereafter, management processing is executed (step S220). In the management process, a process for storing the game history for calculating the role ratio, a process for calculating the role ratio using the stored game history, and a notification display of the calculated role ratio. A process for displaying on the device 141 is executed.

<Public power control processing>
Next, the normal figure normal electric control process performed in step S214 of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is demonstrated, referring the flowchart of FIG.

When winning to the through gate 35 has occurred (step S301: YES), the number of reservation information on the side of the general pattern stored in the first area 114a to the fourth area 114d of the general pattern reservation area 84c is the upper limit number On condition that it is less than four (step S302: NO), the storing process to the general pattern reservation area 84c is executed (step S303). In the storage process, the numerical information of the general electric random number counter C4 is used as the reservation information of the general map side, and the reservation information of the general map side is not stored in the first area 114a to the fourth area 114d of the general map reservation area 84c. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order. In addition, when the reservation information on the general map side is acquired, data for updating the display contents of the general map reservation display unit 38b according to the increase in the number of the reservation information on the general map side this time Make settings.

When a negative determination is made in step S301, when an affirmative determination is made in step S302, or when the process of step S303 is executed, the general/universal/universal electrical address table stored in the main ROM 83 is read (step S304). In the general/universal electrical address table, the start address of the program for executing the processing corresponding to the numerical information of the general/universal electrical counter is set. The normal map general electric counter is a counter for specifying the processing contents to be executed in the general map general electric control process by the main side MPU 82 .

The general/universal electric counter can take values of "0" to "3", and each value of "0" to "3" corresponds to each process (steps S307 to S310). Specifically, when the value of the general pattern general electric counter is "0", the general pattern fluctuation start process (step S307), which is a process for starting the fluctuation display times in the general pattern display unit 38a, is executed. Then, when the value of the normal map general electric counter is "1", the normal map fluctuation process (step S308), which is a process for advancing the fluctuation display times in the general map display unit 38a, is executed. When the value of the figure general electric counter is "2", the general figure determination process (step S309), which is a process for ending the fluctuation display times in the general figure display unit 38a, is executed, and the general figure general electric When the value of the counter is "3", a general electric control process (step S310), which is a process for controlling the general electric open state of the general electric accessory 34a in the second operation port 34, is executed.

In the general map general electric control process, after reading the general general electric address table (step S304), the start address corresponding to the information of the general general electric counter is acquired from the general general electric address table (step S305). , jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S306). Each process of steps S307 to S310 will be individually described below.

<Normal map fluctuation start processing>
First, the normal pattern fluctuation start processing in step S307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the normal pattern fluctuation start process, on condition that the reservation information on the normal pattern side is stored in the normal pattern reservation area 84c (step S401: YES), the data setting process is executed (step S402). In the data setting process, the data stored in the first area 114a of the normal map reservation area 84c is moved to the execution area 115 for the normal map. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the general pattern reservation area 84c is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 114a to 114d to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area 114c→second area 114b, fourth area 114d→third area 114c. Then, the fourth area 114d is cleared to "0". In addition, in the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display contents of the general pattern reservation display section 38b are updated in accordance with the fact that the number of pieces of reservation information on the general pattern side has decreased this time.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current state is the opening/closing execution mode (step S403), and if it is not the opening/closing execution mode, whether or not the first high frequency flag provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". (step S404). The first high-frequency flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode in the main MPU 82. When the transition to the first high-frequency support mode occurs, The first high frequency flag is set to "1", and the first high frequency flag is cleared to "0" when the first high frequency support mode ends.

If it is the opening/closing execution mode (step S403: YES), the low probability table for the normal pattern is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S405). Further, if the first high-frequency flag is not set to "1" although the opening/closing execution mode is not set (step S404: NO), that is, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the main The low-probability table for the normal chart side is read from the side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84 (step S405). On the other hand, if the first high-frequency flag is set to "1" instead of the opening/closing execution mode (step S404: YES), that is, if the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, The high-probability table for the normal chart side is read out to the RAM 84 (step S406). The value of the general electric random number counter C4 that becomes the electric role open winning is set in each of the low probability table on the general diagram side and the high probability table on the general diagram side. In this case, the number of values of the general electric random number counter C4 that becomes the electric role open winning is set more in the high probability table on the general pattern side than in the low probability table on the general pattern side. As a result, when the high probability table on the general pattern side is referred to, the probability of winning the electric role open is higher than when the low probability table on the general pattern side is referred to. In other words, the high probability mode of the general pattern side and the low probability mode of the general pattern side are set so that the probability of winning the electric role is relatively high or low as the judgment mode of the general pattern correctness determination process (step S407) to be described later. Existing. The low probability table on the general map side is set so that the probability of winning the electric role is 1/2, and the high probability table on the general pattern side is set so that the probability of winning the electric role is 4/5. However, if the high-probability mode on the general map side has a higher probability of winning the electric role open than the low-probability mode on the general map side, the probability of winning the electric role open is arbitrary. .

When the process of step S405 or the process of step S406 is performed, a normal figure propriety determination process is performed (step S407). In the general map propriety determination process, for the table read in step S405 or step S406, numerical information about the general electric random number counter C4 in the reservation information on the general map side that is the execution target of the general pattern propriety determination process this time to match.

When the result of the general pattern winning judgment process is the electric role open winning (step S408: YES), the stop result setting process for the general pattern winning result is executed (step S409). Concretely, the information of the stopping mode of the pattern for the winning result of the general pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current variable display time in the general pattern display unit 38a is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. In addition, one type of pattern stop mode may be set as the pattern stop mode for the normal pattern winning result, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set.

When the result of the normal pattern right or wrong determination process is not the electric role open election (step S408: NO), the stop result setting process for the normal pattern deviation result is executed (step S410). Concretely, the information of the stop mode of the pattern for the normal pattern deviation result that is finally stopped and displayed in the current display continuation time on the normal pattern display unit 38 a is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 . In this case, the information on the mode of the selected pattern is different from the information on the stop mode of the pattern for the normal pattern winning result.

When the process of step S409 or the process of step S410 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current state is the opening/closing execution mode (step S411). It is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the frequency flag or the second high frequency flag (step S412). As already explained, the first high-frequency flag is a flag for specifying whether the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode in the main MPU 82, and the transition to the first high-frequency support mode occurs. The first high-frequency flag is set to "1" when the first high-frequency support mode is terminated, and the first high-frequency flag is cleared to "0" when the first high-frequency support mode ends. The second high-frequency flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode in the main MPU 82, and when the shift to the second high-frequency support mode occurs, the The second high frequency flag is set to "1", and the second high frequency flag is cleared to "0" when the second high frequency support mode ends.

If it is the opening/closing execution mode (step S411: YES), information corresponding to a long period of 10 seconds as the duration of the fluctuation display times in the normal map display unit 38a is stored in the normal map side provided in the main side RAM 84. A timer counter is set (step S413). Also, if "1" is not set to both the first high-frequency flag and the second high-frequency flag (step S412: NO), that is, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the current general map display unit Information corresponding to 10 seconds, which is a long period of time as the duration of the variable display times in 38a, is set in the normal map side timer counter provided in the main side RAM 84 (step S413). The update of the numerical value information set in the normal map side timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). As a result, when the opening/closing execution mode is selected or when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the variable display times in the normal figure display section 38a are performed over a relatively long period of time.

If the first high-frequency flag or the second high-frequency flag is set to "1" instead of the opening/closing execution mode (step S412: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. If it is the mode, information corresponding to 1 second, which is a short period of time, is set in the normal pattern side timer counter of the main side RAM 84 as the duration of the fluctuation display times in the normal pattern display section 38a (step S414). As a result, when the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the variable display times in the normal diagram display section 38a are performed over a short period of time, which is a relatively short duration.

After that, the variable display of the pattern in the general pattern display section 38a is started (step S415). As a table to be referred to by the main side MPU 82 when the normal pattern display unit 38a performs the variable display of the pattern, the main side ROM 83 stores in advance a variable display table for the normal pattern. When the variation display of the pattern is executed in the normal pattern display section 38a, the same variation display table is used regardless of the result of the normal pattern propriety determination process. When the variable display of patterns is performed in the normal pattern display section 38a, the variable display of patterns according to a predetermined pattern is repeated. Control data for one round is set. Therefore, when the variable display of the pattern is performed in the normal pattern display section 38a, the variable display table for the normal pattern is repeatedly used until immediately before the final display is performed. Then, 1 is added to the value of the general-to-universal electric counter (step S416). As a result, the value of the normal map normal counter becomes "1" corresponding to the normal map fluctuation process (step S308).

<Normal map fluctuation process>
Next, the processing during the normal pattern fluctuation of step S308 in the normal pattern normal electric control process (FIG. 15) will be described.

In the processing during normal pattern fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the timing is during the variable display of the pattern in the normal pattern display section 38a and before the final display. Specifically, when the value of the normal diagram side timer counter that measures the duration of the current variable display time is 0.4 seconds remaining, it is determined that it is the timing before the fixed display. If it is before final display, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern in the normal pattern display section 38a is executed. This regular change is continued until the timing of starting the confirmation display. Moreover, this regular change is performed in a fixed manner regardless of whether or not the result of the normal figure suitability determination process (step S407) is an electric role open winning. Also, when the timing for final display has come, the display mode of the pattern in the normal pattern display unit 38a is set to the stop mode corresponding to the result of the normal pattern propriety determination processing of this time. This stop mode is a stop mode corresponding to the information read out to the main side RAM 84 at step S409 or step S410 of the normal pattern fluctuation start process (FIG. 16). Then, by adding 1 to the value of the general pattern general electric counter, the value of the counter is updated to correspond to the general pattern determination process.

<Normal map finalization process>
Next, it demonstrates, referring the flowchart of FIG. 17 about the process during the normal pattern determination of step S309 in the normal pattern normal electric control process (FIG. 15).

By determining whether the value of the general chart side timer counter that measures the duration of this variable display time is "0", the fixed display period of this variable display time (specifically 0.4 seconds) has elapsed (step S501). If the fixed display period has passed (step S501: YES), it is determined whether or not the result of the general figure winning/losing determination process in this variable display time is the electric role open winning (step S502). If it is not the electric role open winning (step S502: NO), after clearing the value of the general pattern general counter to "0" (step S503), this general pattern determination process is terminated. As a result, the value of the normal pattern normal electric counter corresponds to the normal pattern fluctuation start process.

If it is elected to open the electric role (step S502: YES), it is determined whether the current state is the opening/closing execution mode (step S504), and if it is not the opening/closing execution mode, the first high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 and It is determined whether or not "1" is set to any of the second high frequency flags (step S505). If it is the open/close execution mode (step S504: YES), the processing of steps S506 to S508 is executed. Further, when the opening/closing execution mode is not set but both the first high-frequency flag and the second high-frequency flag are not set to "1" (step S505: NO), that is, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, The processing of steps S506 to S508 is executed.

In steps S506 to S508, first, "1" is set in the normal/commercial power open counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S506). In addition, "10" is set in the general electric winning counter provided in the main side RAM 84 (step S507). In addition, information corresponding to 0.7 seconds, which is the duration of the short opening on the universal power side, is set in the universal power side timer counter of the main side RAM 84 (step S508). The general electric open counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 is set to the open state in the general electric open state of this time. The general electric prize counter specifies whether or not the number of game balls entered into the second operation opening 34 in the current general electric open state has reached 10, which is the upper limit number of the general electric side, by the main side MPU 82. is a counter for

By executing the processing of steps S506 to S508, the execution mode of the general power open state that occurs in the low frequency support mode becomes the low expectation mode. In other words, in the low-expectation mode general-purpose open state, the general-purpose electrical accessory 34a is short-opened once. As already explained, the shooting cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds. Even if it does occur, the number of hit balls is about one.

If the first high-frequency flag or the second high-frequency flag is set to "1" instead of the opening/closing execution mode (step S505: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. If it is in the normal mode, set "3" to the general electric open counter of the main side RAM 84 (step S509), set "10" to the general electric prize winning counter of the main side RAM 84 (step S510), Information corresponding to 2 seconds, which is the continuation period of long open on the general power side, is set in the timer counter on the drawing side (step S511). By executing the processing of steps S509 to S511, the execution mode of the normal power supply open state that occurs in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode becomes the high expectation mode. In other words, in the normal/universal electric open state of the high expectation mode, the long open of the general/universal electric accessory 34a occurs three times. As already explained, since the game ball shooting cycle is 0.6 seconds, when the general electric accessory 34a is opened once for a long time, about 3 game balls enter the second operation opening 34. obtain. Then, in the general electric open state of the high expectation mode, the long opening occurs three times with an interval period on the electric power side in which the second operating port 34 is in the closed state. Therefore, when the high-expectation mode general electric open state occurs, about nine game balls can enter. In addition, since the general electric open state ends when the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 reaches 10, which is the upper limit number of the general electric side, the general electric open state in the high expectation mode When it occurs, the event that the general electric open state ends may occur when the upper limit number of game balls on the general electric side enter the second operation opening 34 .

When the process of step S507 or the process of step S510 is executed, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 is opened by starting to output a drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b. After that, by adding 1 to the value of the general/universal electric counter, the value of the counter is updated to correspond to the general/universal electric control process.

<Common electricity control processing>
Next, the general electric power control process of step S310 in the general electric power control process (FIG. 15) will be described.

In the general electrical control process, when a prize to the second operation port 34 has occurred, the value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the general electrical winning counter of the main side RAM 84 . Then, when the value of the general electric prize winning counter is "0", the value of the general electric open counter in the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive section 34b is stopped. By doing so, the second operating port 34 is closed. Then, the value of the general/universal/universal electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next process round of the normal pattern normal electric control process becomes the normal pattern fluctuation start process (step S307).

If the winning to the second operation port 34 has not occurred or if the value of the general electric winning counter is not "0", it is checked whether the value of the general diagram side timer counter of the main side RAM 84 is "0". judge. When the value of the universal diagram side timer counter is "0", the output of the drive signal to the universal electric drive unit 34b is stopped, thereby closing the second operation port 34. FIG. Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the general electric open counter of the main side RAM 84, and it is determined whether or not the value of the general electric open counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0". If the value of the general electric open counter after subtracting 1 is 1 or more, after maintaining the second operation port 34 in the closed state over the interval period (specifically, 1 second) on the general electric side, By outputting the drive signal to the drive portion 34b again, the second operation port 34 is opened. In addition, information corresponding to 2 seconds, which is the continuation period of long open on the universal power side, is set in the universal power side timer counter of the main side RAM 84 . As a result, the second operation port 34 is opened again, and the continuation period of the open state is set to 2 seconds, which is the continuation period of the long opening on the general power side. When the value of the general/universal electric open counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the value of the general/universal electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next process round of the normal pattern normal electric control process becomes the normal pattern fluctuation start process (step S307).

<Special special train control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control processing executed in step S213 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a hold information acquisition process is executed (step S601). In the pending information acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the number of pieces of one piece of pending information is less than the upper limit storage number (step S702: YES), a process for acquiring the first piece of pending information is executed.

In the process for acquiring the first pending information, the number of unprocessed first pending information stored in the first special figure pending area 111 is provided in the main side RAM 84 in order to grasp the number of unprocessed first pending information in the main side MPU 82 1 is added to the value of the first special figure reservation counter (step S703). The display contents of the first special figure reservation display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 are adjusted according to the value of the first special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure reservation display portion 37 c corresponds to the number of first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 111 . After that, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 111, that is, the number of reserved storage added by 1 in step S703 and the corresponding storage store in the area (step S704). After that, the first hold command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 (step S705). Thereby, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display content of the first reserved display area 42a of the pattern display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase of the first reserved information.

When a negative determination is made in step S701, when a negative determination is made in step S702, or when the process of step S705 is executed, a prize has been won in the second operation opening 34 (step S706: YES). Furthermore, on the condition that the number of second pending information stored in the second special figure pending area 112 is less than the upper limit storage number (step S707: YES), the process for acquiring the second pending information is executed. do.

In the process for acquiring the second pending information, the number of unprocessed second pending information stored in the second special figure pending area 112 is provided in the main side RAM 84 in order to grasp the number of unprocessed second pending information in the main side MPU 82 1 is added to the value of the second special figure reservation counter (step S708). The display contents of the second special figure reservation display section 37d in the special figure unit 37 are adjusted according to the value of the second special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure reservation display section 37 d corresponds to the number of second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 . After that, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 112, that is, the number of reserved memories added by 1 in step S708 and the corresponding memory Store in the area (step S709). After that, the second hold command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 (step S710). Thereby, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display content of the second reserved display area 42b of the pattern display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase of the second reserved information.

Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), after executing the pending information acquisition process in step S601, while reading the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter provided in the main side RAM84 (step S602) , the special figure special electric address table provided in the main side ROM 83 is read (step S603). Then, the start address corresponding to the numerical information of the special special electric counter is acquired from the special special electric address table (step S604), and the process indicated by the acquired start address is jumped to (step S605).

The special special electric counter is a counter for the main side MPU 82 to grasp which of the processes of steps S606 to S612 in the special special electric control process should be executed, and the special special electric address table , the start address in the program for executing each process of steps S606 to S612 is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the special special electric counter. When the value of the special figure special electric counter is "0", it jumps to the special figure fluctuation start processing of step S606, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "1", the special figure fluctuation processing of step S607 Jump to, if the value of the special special electric counter is "2", jump to the processing during special figure confirmation of step S608, if the value of the special special electric counter is "3" special electric of step S609 Jump to the start process, if the value of the special special electric counter is "4", jump to the special electric open processing of step S610, if the value of the special special electric counter is "5", of step S611 It jumps to special electric closing processing, and jumps to special electric end processing of step S612 when the value of the special special electric counter is "6". Each process of steps S606 to S612 will be individually described below.

<Special figure fluctuation start process>
First, the special figure fluctuation start processing of step S606 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the special figure fluctuation start process is not executed in the situation where the game round is already executed and in the situation where the opening and closing execution mode is executed.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, if the second reservation information is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 and the first reservation information is stored in the first special figure reservation area 111 (step S801: YES, step S802: NO), the first data setting process is executed (step S803). In the first data setting process, the data stored in the first area 111a of the first special figure reservation area 111 is moved to the execution area 113 for special figures. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area 111 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 111a to 111d to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area 111c→second area 111b, fourth area 111d→third area 111c. Then, the fourth area 111d is cleared to "0". After that, the value of the first special figure reservation counter of the main side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. As a result, the display content of the first special figure reservation display portion 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first reservation information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, the first decrease command indicating that the first reservation information in the first special figure reservation area 111 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . Thereby, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display content of the first reserved display area 42a of the pattern display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the decrease of the first reserved information.

On the other hand, when the second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 (step S801 and step S802: YES), the first reservation information acquired earlier than the second reservation information is the first Even if it is stored in the 1 special figure reservation area 111, the second data setting process is executed (step S804). In the second data setting process, the data stored in the first area 112a of the second special figure reservation area 112 is moved to the execution area 113 for special figures. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area 112 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 112a to 112d to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area 112c→second area 112b, fourth area 112d→third area 112c. Then, the fourth area 112d is cleared to "0". After that, the value of the second special figure reservation counter of the main side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. As a result, the display content of the second special figure reservation display portion 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second reservation information is reduced by one. In addition, in the data setting process, a second decrease command indicating that the second reservation information in the second special figure reservation area 112 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . Thus, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display content of the second reserved display area 42b of the pattern display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the decrease of the second reserved information.

When the second pending information is stored as described above, even if the first pending information acquired earlier than the second pending information is stored, the second pending information is the execution area for the special figure. 113 is subject to shift. As a result, the second pending information is digested with priority over the first pending information as a game start target.

When the process of step S803 or the process of step S804 is executed, the suitability determination process is executed (step S805). In the success/failure determination process, if the success/failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the start target of the game cycle is the first reservation information, the first success/failure table 121 (see FIG. 9A) at the time of the low probability is read from the main ROM 83. Read out to the main side RAM 84, and if the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game cycle is the second reservation information, the second win/fail table 122 (see FIG. 9(b)) at the time of the low probability is stored in the main side ROM 83. to the main side RAM 84, and if the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the winning/failing table 123 at the time of high probability (Fig. 9(c) )) is read from the main-side ROM 83 to the main-side RAM 84 . After reading the success/failure tables 121 to 123, from the hold information stored in the execution area 113 for the special figure, read out the information for success/failure determination, that is, the numerical information obtained from the random number counter C1, and the read numerical information is Then, it is determined whether or not the data group corresponding to the setting value of the current use target among the read success/failure tables 121 to 123 matches any of the numerical information set as the big winning result. In addition, when the numerical information set as the jackpot result does not match, the information for winning/failure determination is a data group corresponding to the setting value of the current use target among the read winning/failure tables 121 to 123. WHEREIN: It is determined whether it corresponds with any of the numerical information set as a time saving result.

When the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S806: YES), a jackpot distribution determination process is executed (step S807). In the jackpot distribution determination process, if the start target of the game round is the first reservation information, the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure (see FIG. 10(a)) is transferred from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. If the target for starting the game round is the second reservation information, the second special figure jackpot distribution table 126 (see FIG. 10(b)) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 . After reading the jackpot distribution table 125, 126, from the reservation information stored in the execution area 113 for the special figure, read the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information obtained from the type random number counter C2, the jackpot swing By referring to the minute tables 125 and 126, it is specified which type of jackpot result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the distribution determination process for the big win, the flag of the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of the result of the big win specified in the distribution determination process for the big win is set to "1" (step S808). After that, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S809). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which are the targets for starting the game round this time, is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 84 . In the stop result table for the jackpot results, the types of stop modes of the symbols stopped and displayed in the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b are set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step S809, the main side RAM 84 stores information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in step S808. The pattern stop mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the jackpot results. Any method can be used to select a stop result for a jackpot result in which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set.

When the result of the success/failure determination process is not the jackpot result but the time saving result (step S806: NO, step S810: YES), the allocation determination process for time saving is executed (step S811). In the allocation determination process for time reduction, if the start target of the game round is the first reservation information, the time reduction allocation table 127 for the first special figure (see FIG. 10(c)) is transferred from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 Read out, if the start target of the game round is the second reservation information, the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure (see FIG. 10(d)) is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84. After reading the time-saving distribution tables 127 and 128, from the pending information stored in the execution area 113 for the special figure, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information obtained from the type random number counter C2 is read, and the time-saving distribution By referring to the minute tables 127 and 128, it is specified which type of time saving result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After performing the distribution determination process for time saving, "1" is set to the flag of main side RAM84 corresponding to the kind of time saving result specified by the distribution determination process for the said time saving (step S812). Then, the stop result setting process for time saving results is performed (step S813). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which are the targets for starting the game round this time, is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 84 . In this stop result table for the time saving result, the type of stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed in the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of time saving result. In step S813, the main RAM 84 stores information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of time saving result specified in step S812. The pattern stop mode may be set in correspondence with each time saving result on a one-to-one basis, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the time saving results. The method of selecting the stop result for the time saving result in which the stop mode of multiple types of patterns is set is arbitrary, but for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type random number counter C2. The information on the form of the pattern selected in step S813 is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

When the result of the success/failure determination process is neither the jackpot result nor the time saving result (step S810: NO), the stop result setting process for the out result is executed (step S814). Specifically, information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game round is stored in the main side ROM 83 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main side RAM 84 . The information of the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information of the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information of the pattern mode selected in the case of the time saving result, and furthermore, the first feature There is one common type in the figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b.

When the process of step S809, the process of step S813, or the process of step S814 is performed, the process of specifying the variable display period is performed (step S815). FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing processing for specifying a variable display period.

First, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S901). The high-probability flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the lottery mode is the high-probability mode. is set, and the high probability flag is cleared to "0" when the high probability mode ends. If the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S901: YES), that is, if the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the table group for high probability is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S901: YES). S902). In the situation where the selection process of the variable display period is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for high probability, if a big hit result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the success/failure determination process is out of line. Numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information that is the object of execution corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display, and if the out-of-reach display occurs in the current game round, the fluctuation type counter at that time By collating the CS numerical information against the table corresponding to the reach in the table group for high probability, the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read. Although there are a plurality of types of variable display periods of the reach display mode, the variable display period of any of the reach display modes is longer than the variable display period in the case where the reach display does not occur.

If no big win result occurs in the current game round and no out-reach display occurs, the second reservation information is the execution target of the game round and there are two or more second pieces in the second special figure reservation area 112 If it is a game round started in a situation where the hold information is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read as the variable display period of the current game round. As a result, it is possible to increase the efficiency of digestion of game times triggered by the second suspension information in the high-probability mode. In addition, even if a time saving result occurs in this game round, the second reservation information is the execution target of the game round and two or more pieces of second reservation information are stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 If it is a game round started in a situation, the information of the shortest period (specifically 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read.

On the other hand, in the current game round, when no big hit result occurs and no out-reach display occurs, the second reserve information is the execution target of the game round and one second reserve is placed in the second special figure reserve area 112. When the game round is started in the state where the information is stored, or when the big win result does not occur in the current game round and the winning reach display does not occur, the first hold information is the execution object of the game round. If it is, read the information of the middle period (specifically 10 seconds) on the special figure side as the variable display period of this game round. Thereby, it becomes possible to secure a situation in which the second reservation information is acquired in the high probability mode. In addition, even if the time saving result occurs in this game round, the second reservation information is the execution target of the game round and one second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 If it is a game round started in the situation, or if the first pending information is the execution target of the game round, the information of the middle period (specifically 10 seconds) on the side of the special figure is read.

Even if the time saving result is selected in the success/failure determination process (step S805) in the high probability mode, it is invalidated. In this case, when the variable display period of the game round is selected by referring to the table group for high probability, the time saving result is treated in the same way as the off result, so that the occurrence of the time saving result that is invalidated It is possible to make it inconspicuous.

If the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S901: NO), either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not there is (step S903). If "1" is set to the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag (step S903: YES), that is, the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second 2 If it is the high frequency support mode, the table group for high frequency support is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S904). In the situation where the variable display period selection process is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for high-frequency support, if a big hit result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the success/failure determination process is out of line In addition, if the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information to be executed corresponds to the occurrence of the reach out indication and the out reach indication occurs in the current game round, the fluctuation type at that time By collating the numerical value information of the counter CS against the table corresponding to the reach in the table group for high frequency support, the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode is different from when the table group for high probability is referred to. Specifically, when the table group for high probability is referred to, the frequency is higher. A longer variable display period is more likely to be selected than when a supporting table group is referenced. However, this relationship may be reversed.

If no big win result occurs in the current game round and no out-reach display occurs, the second reservation information is the execution target of the game round and there are two or more second pieces in the second special figure reservation area 112 If it is a game round started in a situation where the hold information is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read as the variable display period of the current game round. As a result, it is possible to increase the consumption efficiency of the game times triggered by the second hold information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. In addition, even if a time saving result occurs in this game round, the second reservation information is the execution target of the game round and two or more pieces of second reservation information are stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 If it is a game round started in a situation where it is, the information of the shortest period (specifically 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read.

On the other hand, in the current game round, when no big hit result occurs and no out-reach display occurs, the second reserve information is the execution target of the game round and one second reserve is placed in the second special figure reserve area 112. When the game round is started in the state where the information is stored, or when the big win result does not occur in the current game round and the winning reach display does not occur, the first hold information is the execution object of the game round. If it is, read the information of the middle period (specifically 10 seconds) on the special figure side as the variable display period of this game round. This makes it possible to secure a situation in which the second hold information is acquired in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. In addition, even if the time saving result occurs in this game round, the second reservation information is the execution target of the game round and one second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 If it is a game round started in the situation, or if the first pending information is the execution target of the game round, the information of the middle period (specifically 10 seconds) on the side of the special figure is read.

In the situation where the low probability mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, even if the time saving result is selected in the success judgment process (step S805), the last game of the high frequency support mode times, it is disabled. In this case, if the variable display period of the game cycle is selected by referring to the table group for high frequency support, the time saving result will be invalidated by treating the time saving result in the same way as the lost result. can be made inconspicuous. Also, if the time saving result is selected in the last game round of the high frequency support mode, the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result will occur, but even in this case the For the variable display period of the game cycle, the same variable display period as in the case of the loss result in which the reach display does not occur will be selected, so it is possible to determine whether the time-saving result or the loss result is from the variable display period of the game cycle. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize.

When neither the first high frequency flag nor the second high frequency flag is set to "1" (step S903; NO), that is, the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. If there is, it is determined whether or not the reach high frequency state flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S905). The high-frequency reach state flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 82 whether or not the high-frequency reach state can occur in the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode. The reach high frequency state is a gaming state in which the out-reach display occurs more frequently than in the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode when the reach high frequency state is not present.

If the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" (step S905: YES), that is, in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode and in the high reach frequency state, the table group for the high frequency reach It is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S906). In a situation where the variable display period selection process is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for high reach frequency, the variable display period is selected in step S908 with reference to the table group for low frequency support, which will be described later. Numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information to be executed when the result of the success/failure determination process is out of the situation in which the selection process is executed corresponds to the occurrence of the out of reach display more likely to be identified as

If a big hit result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the winning/failure determination process is a loss result, the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information that is the object of execution corresponds to the occurrence of a loss reach display If the out-reach display occurs in the current game round, the reach display mode is obtained by collating the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time against the reach correspondence table in the reach high frequency table group. Reads the information of the variable display period of In this case, the variable display period selection mode of the reach display mode is such that a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected than when a table group for low-frequency support, which will be described later, is referred to. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode is the same as in the case of referring to the table group for high probability, but the variation is longer than that in the case of referring to the table group for high probability. A display period may be easily selected, a shorter variable display period may be easily selected than when a high-probability table group is referred to, and a high-frequency support table group may be referred to. The configuration may be the same, or the configuration may be such that a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected than when a table group for high-frequency support is referred to.

If a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated against the table corresponding to the time-saving result in the table group for high reach frequency, so that the variable display corresponding to the time-saving result Read period information. Multiple types of information are set for the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result, and any variable display period corresponding to the time saving result is longer than the shortest period on the special figure side, corresponding to the occurrence of reach display. It is a period shorter than the variable display period. Specifically, 10 seconds, 11 seconds, 12 seconds and 13 seconds are set as the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result, and the period corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS acquired among these is the game this time is selected as a variable display period.

When the big hit result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round and the out reach display does not occur, the first reservation information is the execution target of the game round and there are three or more in the first special figure reservation area 111 If it is a game round started in a situation where the first hold information is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read as the variable display period of the current game round. As a result, it is possible to increase the efficiency of digestion of game times triggered by the first suspension information in the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the current game round, when the jackpot result and the time saving result do not occur and the out reach display does not occur, the first reservation information is the execution target of the game round and one or more in the first special figure reservation area 111 When the game round is started in a state where two pieces of first reservation information are stored, or when the big win result and the time saving result do not occur in the current game round and the winning reach display does not occur, the second When the hold information is the execution target of the game round, by collating the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time against the table corresponding to the complete loss result in the high frequency reach table group, the complete loss result Read the information of the corresponding variable display period. Multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to the complete deviation result are set, and any variable display period corresponding to the complete deviation result is longer than the shortest period on the special figure side, and the variable display corresponding to the short time result The period is shorter than the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display. Specifically, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds are set as the fluctuation display periods corresponding to the complete deviation result, and the period corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired among these is this time It is selected as the variable display period of the game round.

If the reach high frequency state flag is not set to "1" (step S905: NO), that is, if the low probability mode is the low frequency support mode and the reach high frequency state is not set, the low frequency support table The group is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S907). In a situation where the variable display period selection process is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for low-frequency support, the variable display period is displayed in step S908 with reference to the table group for high-frequency reach, as described above. When the result of the success/failure determination process is out of the situation in which the period selection process is executed, the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information to be executed is out and the reach display occurs. Less likely to be identified as compatible.

If a big hit result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the winning/failure determination process is a loss result, the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information that is the target of execution corresponds to the occurrence of a loss reach display If the out-of-range reach display occurs in this game round, the reach display mode is obtained by collating the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time against the reach-ready table in the low-frequency support table group. Reads the information of the variable display period of In this case, the variable display period of the reach display mode is selected such that a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the table group for high reach frequency is referred to, as described above.

If a time-saving result occurs in the current game round, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated against the table corresponding to the time-saving result in the table group for low frequency support, and the variable display corresponding to the time-saving result Read period information. The selection mode of the information of the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result is the same as when the table corresponding to the time saving result in the table group for reach high frequency is referred to. In other words, multiple types of information are set for the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result, and even in any variable display period corresponding to the time saving result, the reach display will occur longer than the shortest period on the special figure side. This period is shorter than the corresponding variable display period. Specifically, 10 seconds, 11 seconds, 12 seconds and 13 seconds are set as the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result, and the period corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS acquired among these is the game this time is selected as a variable display period.

When the big hit result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round and the out reach display does not occur, the first reservation information is the execution target of the game round and there are three or more in the first special figure reservation area 111 If it is a game round started in a situation where the first hold information is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read as the variable display period of the current game round. As a result, it is possible to increase the efficiency of digestion of game times triggered by the first suspension information in the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, when the big hit result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round and the out reach display does not occur, the first reservation information is the execution target of the game round and one or more in the first special figure reservation area 111 When the game round is started in a state where two pieces of first reservation information are stored, or when the big win result and the time saving result do not occur in the current game round and the winning reach display does not occur, the second When the hold information is targeted for execution of the game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is collated against the table corresponding to the complete loss result in the table group for low frequency support, and the complete loss result is obtained. Read the information of the corresponding variable display period. The mode of selecting the information of the variable display period corresponding to the completely unsuccessful result is the same as the case of referring to the table corresponding to the completely unsuccessful result in the table group for high reach frequency. In other words, multiple types of information are set for the variable display period corresponding to the complete deviation result, and any variable display period corresponding to the complete deviation result is longer than the shortest period on the special figure side, This period is shorter than the display period and the variable display period corresponding to occurrence of reach display. Specifically, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds are set as the fluctuation display periods corresponding to the complete deviation result, and the period corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired among these is this time It is selected as the variable display period of the game round.

When the process of step S902, the process of step S904, the process of step S906, or the process of step S907 is executed, the table group read out in any one of these processes is referred to, and the variable display period selection process is executed (step S908). The contents of the selection processing are as already explained. Then, the information of the variable display period selected in step S908 is set to the special figure side timer counter provided in the main side RAM84 (step S909). The update of the numerical value information set in the special figure side timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 20), after executing the process of specifying the fluctuation display period in step S815, the command for fluctuation corresponding to the game turn to be started this time and the type command It is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 (step S816). The variation command includes information on the variation display period specified in step S815, and the game round to be started is either the first special figure display portion 37a or the second special figure display portion 37b. Contains information indicating whether it is supported. Although the variable command does not include information on whether or not to execute the reach display, the variable display period when the reach display occurs is set to be longer than the variable display period when the reach display does not occur. Since it is set, the sound and light side MPU 93 can specify whether or not the ready-to-win display is generated from the information on the variable display period. The type command includes information as to whether or not the game round to be started this time corresponds to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, which type of jackpot result. It contains information indicating whether In addition, the type command includes information on whether or not the game round that is the target of this start corresponds to the time saving result, and if it corresponds to the time saving result, which type of time saving result It contains information indicating whether the

After that, the variable display of the pattern is started in the display part which is the start target of the game cycle of this time among the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b (step S817). Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S818). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "1" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation process (step S607).

In addition, when the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the variation command and the type command, it executes processing for determining the execution contents of the game round effect corresponding to those commands. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 and sound output control of the speaker unit 65 are executed according to the table corresponding to the processing result. As a result, the light emission effect in the display light emitting unit 64 and the sound output effect in the speaker unit 65 are executed over the variable display period of the current game round. Further, the sound and light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the content of execution of the game round effect determined this time to the display side MPU 103 . By receiving the command, the display side MPU 103 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 according to the table corresponding to the command. As a result, the display effect on the symbol display device 41 is executed over the variable display period of the current game cycle.

<Process during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the processing during special figure fluctuation executed in step S607 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 18) will be described.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is 1 or more and the fluctuation display period of the current game round has not passed, the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b which are the execution targets of the current game round When it is the update timing of the contents, data setting for updating the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is performed. Thereby, the display contents of the pattern in the special figure display portions 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents of the next order.

Aspect at the start of the variation display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a, 37b, and the update aspect of the variation display of the pattern are performed in a constant manner regardless of the result of the judgment result and the distribution judgment result, and the pattern display device It is carried out in a fixed manner regardless of the content of the presentation for the game round in 41 . For example, when a predetermined update timing occurs a plurality of times, the display content of the pattern rotates once, and a display pattern in which the display order is in a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when the variable display period has passed, the display pattern The stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed regardless of the order of display. Thereby, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, when the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the variable display period has elapsed, the final stop command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93. After that, at the start of the game cycle, the pattern stop mode of the special figure display units 37a and 37b stored in the main side RAM 84 in either step S809, step S813 or step S814 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) Read information. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped in a state where the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game round is displayed in the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. After that, the information of the final stop period (specifically 0.5 sec) is set to the special figure side timer counter. Thereby, the measurement of the final stop period is started. After that, add 1 to the value of the special special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "2" corresponding to the special figure confirmation process (step S608).

When receiving the final stop command, the sound and light side MPU 93 transmits a corresponding command to the display side MPU 103 . When the display side MPU 103 receives the command, the combination of symbols corresponding to the stop result of the current round of the game is fixedly displayed on the symbol display device 41 over the final stop period.

<Processing during special figure confirmation>
Next, the processing during special figure determination executed in step S608 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has passed (step S1001: YES), and the game result of this game round is a jackpot result (step S1002: YES ), information corresponding to the opening period (specifically 5 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter (step S1003), and an opening command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 (step S1004). When receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting portion 64 and the speaker portion 65 to perform an effect corresponding to the opening period.

After that, information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S1005). That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is started after the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is completed, the ceiling counter 131 is set with the information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings. If the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set the number of fixed ceiling times during the opening/closing execution mode or when the opening/closing execution mode ends, not when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the operation is performed after the opening/closing execution mode is started. If the power supply is stopped and the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the set value update process ( In the step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is cleared as already explained, whereas the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so that the operation power is supplied. There is a risk that the game may be restarted in a situation where the number of remaining ceilings is small while the profit of the opening/closing execution mode is obtained until the game is stopped. On the other hand, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with the information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings, so that the fraudulent act as described above can be neutralized.

Thereafter, information of 450 times, which is the period switching reference number, is set in the variation selection state counter 132 provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1006). The trigger for subtracting 1 from the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is the same as the trigger for subtracting 1 from the value of the ceiling counter 131 . That is, when one game cycle is completed in a situation where the winning lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented by 1 at the end of the game cycle. Then, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented by 1 in a situation where the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more, and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0", the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" in the reach high frequency state flag. In the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, if the high frequency reach state flag is set to "1", the high frequency reach is performed in the variable display period identification process (Fig. 21) as already described. A variable display period for game rounds is selected with reference to the table group for.

In other words, after the opening and closing execution mode is finished, if the period switching reference number of games is completed in the low probability mode, if the low frequency support mode, the table group for high frequency reach is referred to. High frequency state. And, in the reach high frequency state, as already explained, the probability that the reach display will be selected is higher in the case of the outlier result than in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode and not in the high reach frequency state. In addition, the variable display period when the reach display is selected tends to be longer in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode than in the high reach frequency state. Also, the period switching reference number of times is a predetermined number of times (specifically, 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number of times. Therefore, it is possible to generate the reach high frequency state before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1007). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "3" corresponding to the special electric start processing (step S609).

If the game result of this game round is not a jackpot result (step S1002: NO), the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 (see FIG. 6) is executed in step S1008, and the change selection state counter 132 in step S1009 Perform subtraction processing, perform setting processing for time saving results in step S1010, perform subtraction processing of ceiling counter 131 in step S1011, and subtract high probability state counter 133 (see FIG. 6) in step S1012 Execute the process. The details of the processing in steps S1008 to S1012 will be described later. After that, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1013). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to special figure variation start processing (step S606).

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric start processing executed in step S609 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 18) will be described.

On the condition that the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, that the opening period has passed, the setting process of the number of times of opening and closing is executed. In this case, if the current game result is a 5R low probability result or a 5R high probability result, the round counter provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to "5", and if the current game result is a 10R high probability result, the main The round counter of the side RAM 84 is set to "10". The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode by the main side MPU 82 . In addition, the information (specifically 29 seconds) of the opening duration of the round game is set to the special figure side timer counter. In addition, "10" is set in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. The winning counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of winning upper limit numbers in the main MPU 82 . In addition, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened by outputting a drive signal to the driving section 32b for the special electric. After that, add 1 to the value of the special special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "4" corresponding to the special electric open processing (step S610).

<Processing during opening of the special train>
Next, a description will be given of the special electric open processing executed in step S610 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 18).

If the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, if the open continuation period has elapsed, the value of the round counter of the main side RAM84 is subtracted by 1 and the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric The special electric prize winning device 32 is closed by stopping the output. When a game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32, the value of the prize winning counter is decremented by 1, and when the value of the prize counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0", the main side RAM 84 The value of the round counter is decremented by 1 and the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric is stopped, so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed. Also, if the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1, if the value of the round counter after the subtraction of 1 is 1 or more, after setting the interval period information (specifically 3 seconds) to the special figure side timer counter , Add 1 to the value of the special special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric closing process (step S611). On the other hand, if the value of the round counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the information of the ending period (specifically 5 seconds) is set to the special figure side timer counter, and the ending command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 After that, add 2 to the value of the special special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special electric end processing (step S612). When receiving the ending command, the sound/light side MPU 93 causes the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting portion 64 and the speaker portion 65 to perform an effect corresponding to the ending period.

<Treatment during special train closure>
Next, the processing during special electric closing executed in step S611 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 18) will be described.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the interval period has passed, the information of the open continuation period of the round game (specifically 29 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter . Also, "10" is set in the winning counter of the main side RAM 84. - 特許庁In addition, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened by outputting a drive signal to the driving section 32b for the special electric. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "4" corresponding to the special electric open processing (step S610).

<Special call end processing>
Next, the special electric end processing executed in step S612 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, if the ending period has passed (step S1101: YES), the game result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time is a 5R high probability result or 10R If the result is a high probability result (step S1102: YES), the high probability flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1103). The high-probability flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode in the main side MPU 82, as already explained. When the high probability flag is set to "1", the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode.

Thereafter, the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1104). As already explained, the first high frequency flag is a flag for specifying whether the support mode is the first high frequency support mode in the main side MPU 82, and the second high frequency flag is the support mode as already explained. is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 82 whether or not is the second high-frequency support mode. When the first high frequency flag is set to "1" and the second high frequency flag is cleared to "0", the support mode becomes the first high frequency support mode.

After that, the high probability state counter 133 provided in the main side RAM 84 is set with the information of "100", which is the number of times of continuation of the high probability (step S1105). The high-probability state counter 133 is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuations of the high-probability mode in the main side MPU 82 . In this pachinko machine 10, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability result or the 10R high probability result ends, and the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode are entered. If the number of times the game is executed without a new jackpot result occurring in the mode is 100 times, which is the high probability continuation number, the low probability mode and the low probability mode are applied even if the jackpot result does not occur Low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is the 5R low probability result (step S1102: NO), the high probability flag of the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1106). When the high probability flag is cleared to "0", the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode. Thereafter, the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1107). When the first high frequency flag is set to "1" and the second high frequency flag is cleared to "0", the support mode becomes the first high frequency support mode.

Then, the information of "100" which is the 1st time-saving continuation frequency is set to the time-saving state counter 134 provided in main side RAM84 (step S1108). The time saving state counter 134 is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode (first high-frequency support mode or second high-frequency support mode) in the low-probability mode situation in the main MPU 82 . In this pachinko machine 10, when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode are entered. In the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, if the number of times the game is executed without generating a new jackpot result is the first number of time-saving continuations, the jackpot result is not generated. Low probability mode and low frequency support mode.

If the process of step S1105 or the process of step S1108 has been executed, the state designation command transmission process is executed (step S1019). In the transmission process, a state designation command corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 determined by the processes of steps S1102 to S1108 is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93. The sound and light side MPU 93 executes a process for causing the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting section 64 and the speaker section 65 to execute an effect corresponding to the content of the received state designation command. After that, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to special figure variation start processing (step S606).

<Subtraction processing of high probability state counter 133>
Next, it demonstrates, referring the flowchart of FIG. 24 about the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 performed in step S1012 of special figure determination processing (FIG. 22).

If the high-probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1201: YES), that is, if the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the value of the high-probability state counter 133 of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. (step S1202). Then, if the value of the high-probability state counter 133 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1203: YES), the high-probability mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the first high-frequency support mode. means that 100 game times, which is the high-probability continuous number of times, have been completed. In this case, the high probability flag is cleared to "0" (step S1204), and the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1205). As a result, the normal game state is the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode. After that, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S1206). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the high-probability state has ended is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . By receiving the state designation command, the sound and light side MPU 93 terminates the execution of the effect corresponding to the high probability mode in the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65, and performs the effect corresponding to the normal game state. to start.

<Setting processing for time saving results>
Next, the setting process for the time saving result executed in step S1010 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the game result of the current game round is the time saving result (step S1301: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1302). And when "1" is set to the high probability flag (step S1302: YES), the setting process for this time saving result is complete|finished, without performing the process after step S1303. In other words, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the success or failure determination process of the game round executed in the high probability mode, the time saving result is triggered by the second high frequency support The time saving result is invalidated without setting the mode.

Here, setting processing for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed before the subtraction processing (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133 as already explained in the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 22). As a result, in the last game cycle in the high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode, the value of the high-probability state counter 133 is decremented by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high-probability state counter 133. Before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0" by the value of the high probability state counter 133 becoming "0", the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed Become. Then, when the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed at the timing, the high probability flag is still set to "1", so the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is not performed. Therefore, in the game round in which the success/failure determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time saving result. In addition, such an effect during processing (FIG. 22) in the processing order of executing the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133 in the special figure determination It can be realized by setting.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S1302: NO), it is determined whether or not the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" ( step S1303, step S1304). That is, it is determined whether the support mode is one of the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode. When the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S1303 or step S1304: YES), this time saving result setting process is terminated without executing the processes after step S1305. That is, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the game round success determination process executed in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the time saving In the case of the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode at the timing when the setting process for the result (FIG. 25) is executed, the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result Time-saving results are nullified without being done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting for shifting to the high-frequency support mode from being additionally executed in the middle of the high-frequency support mode.

If the support mode is the low-frequency support mode (steps S1303 and S1304: NO), the second high-frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1305). As a result, the support mode becomes the second high-frequency support mode. Then, if the time saving result of this time is the first time saving result (step S1306: YES), the time saving state counter 134 (see FIG. 6) provided in the main side RAM 84 is the first time saving continuation number "100" information is set (step S1307), and if the current time saving result is the second time saving result (step S1306: NO), information of "150" which is the second time saving continuation number is set to the time saving state counter 134 (step S1308 ). The time saving state counter 134 is a low probability mode and is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state which is a high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) in the main side MPU 82 is. When the number of game rounds executed without the occurrence of a new jackpot result in the time saving state becomes 100 times, which is the first number of continuous time-saving operations, or 150 times, which is the second number of continuous time-saving operations, the jackpot. The low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode are entered even if no result has occurred.

If the process of step S1307 or the process of step S1308 has been executed, the state designation command transmission process is executed (step S1309). In the transmission process, a state specifying command indicating that the time saving state has started is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . The state designation command also includes information on the number of times of time-saving continuation set this time. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 perform processing to indicate that the time saving state is started. Execute.

Even if the time saving result is selected in the success or failure determination process as described above, depending on the situation at the timing when the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed at the end of the game round that resulted in the time saving result, the The setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result may or may not be performed. In this case, the stop result that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b in the game round in which the time saving result is selected in the success/failure determination process is the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result. While it does not change depending on whether it is performed or not, the stop result stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 41 changes depending on whether or not the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is performed. . Such contents will be described in detail below. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop result of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the stop result of the symbol display device 41. FIG.

As already described, the game results that can be selected by the game round success/failure determination process (step S805) and various allocation determination processes (steps S807 and S811) include 5R low probability result, 5R high probability result, 10R high probability result, There is a first time saver result, a second time saver result and a miss result. The stop result that is stopped and displayed as the fixed display of the game round in the special figure display units 37a and 37b is "1" in the case of the 5R low probability result and "2" in the case of the 5R high probability result, 10R high probability result is "3", the first time saving result is "4", the second time saving result is "5", and the result is "- ”. These stop results do not change in any game situation. Therefore, by confirming the stop result of the special figure display portions 37a and 37b, the manager of the game hall can uniquely grasp the game result of the game round.

The stop result that is stop-displayed as the confirmation display of the game cycle on the pattern display device 41 does not change in any game situation in the case of a jackpot result or in the case of a losing result, whereas it is a time-saving result. In some cases, it changes depending on the game situation. Specifically, in the case of the 5R low-probability result, the combination of the same even-numbered symbols is stop-displayed on any of the effective lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3, and red is stop-displayed in the state suggestion area 43. be. In the case of the 5R high-probability result, a combination of the same odd-numbered symbols other than the "7" symbol is stop-displayed on any of the effective lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3, and red color stops in the state suggesting area 43. Is displayed. In the case of the 10R high probability result, a combination of "7" symbols is stop-displayed on any of the valid lines L1-L5 of the symbol rows Z1-Z3, and red is stop-displayed in the state indication area 43. In the case of an out result, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result on each effective line L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a combination of the first time saving pattern ("1 2 3") and a second time saving pattern (“3, 4, 1”) are stopped, and red is stopped in the state suggestion area 43 .

In the case of the first time saving result, the normal game state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, or the time saving state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) If it is the final game round, the combination of the first time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3") is stopped and displayed on any of the valid lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the state suggestion area 43 is displayed in red. In the case of the second time saving result, the normal game state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, or the time saving state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) If it is the final game round, the combination of the second time-saving patterns ("3, 4, 1") is stopped and displayed on any of the valid lines L1 to L5 of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the state suggesting area 43 is displayed in red. Although details will be described later, in the final game round of the time saving state, the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) after the subtraction process (step S1008) of the time saving state counter 134 for terminating the time saving state is executed. is executed, the time saving state has already ended at the timing when the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed, and the game state is normal.

FIG. 27A shows the first special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device when the first time saving result is obtained in the game round triggered by the first reservation information, which is the final game round of the normal game state or the time saving state. 41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop result of No. 41; FIG. As shown in FIG. 27 (a1), in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, the combination of the first time-saving patterns ("1, 2, 3") is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, suggesting a state. In the area 43, red is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 27(a2), "4", which is the stop result corresponding to the first time saving result, is stop-displayed on the first special figure display portion 37a.

On the other hand, if it is a game round other than the final game round of the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, or the final game round of the time saving state, the symbol row is either the first time saving result or the second time saving result In Z1 to Z3, combinations of non-reach-out symbols are stop-displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5. The combination of non-reach out patterns is the combination of patterns corresponding to the jackpot result, the combination of the first time saving patterns (“1 2 3”), the second time saving pattern combination (“3 4 1” ) and a combination of symbols other than the combination of out reach symbols. In the state suggesting area 43, blue is stop-displayed in the case of the first time saving result, and green is stop-displayed in the case of the second time saving result.

Figure 27 (b) is a game round other than the final game round of the high probability state or the time saving state, and the second special figure display section 37b in the case of the first time saving result in the game round triggered by the second reservation information and an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop result of the pattern display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 27(b2), "4", which is the stop result corresponding to the first time saving result, is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display portion 37b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27(b1), in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, non-out-of-reach symbol combinations are stop-displayed on the respective effective lines L1 to L5, and in the state suggesting area 43, Blue is displayed as stopped.

In the case of a time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, a combination of non-reach out symbols on each effective line L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 appears stopped. Then, the combination of the non-reach out-of-reach symbols is stopped and displayed even when the result of the success/failure determination processing is the out-of-reach result.

FIG. 27(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop result of the second special figure display unit 37b and the symbol display device 41 in the case where the winning result is out of the winning judgment process in the game round triggered by the second reservation information is. As shown in FIG. 27(c2), the second special figure display portion 37b is stop-displayed as "-" which is the stop result corresponding to the deviation result. Further, as shown in FIG. 27(c1), in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, combinations of non-reach-out symbols are stop-displayed on the respective effective lines L1 to L5, and in the state suggesting area 43, Red is displayed as stopped.

The display area of the symbol display device 41 is wider than the display area of the special symbol display portions 37a and 37b, and the symbol display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA, whereas the special symbol display portions 37a and 37b are arranged. is arranged on the corner side of the game area PA, the symbol display device 41 attracts the player's attention more than the special symbol display portions 37a and 37b. In addition, while the symbol display device 41 executes a wide variety of effects such as ready-to-win display, the special symbol display units 37a and 37b perform variable display of patterns in a fixed manner as already described, corresponding to the game results. Since only the stop result is displayed, the symbol display device 41 attracts the player's attention more than the special symbol display portions 37a and 37b also from this point. In such circumstances, if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode is off to each effective line L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 result By stopping and displaying the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols that can be stopped and displayed in the case of, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that it has been invalidated despite the fact that the time saving result has been selected. Become.

If it is a time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, the valid lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as described above. Even if the combination of the non-reach out-of-reach symbols is stopped and displayed even when the result is a loss result, a stop result different from the case where the result of the success/failure determination process is a loss result is displayed in the state suggesting area 43. Stop is displayed. That is, in the case of FIG. 27 (b) and FIG. 27 (c), if the first time-saving result does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode, the state as shown in FIG. 27 (b) While the suggestion area 43 is stopped in blue, the state suggestion area 43 is stopped in red as shown in FIG. In addition, in the case of the second time saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode, green is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43, whereas in the case of the off result, the state suggestion area 43 is displayed in red. As a result, in a situation where the special symbol display portions 37a and 37b are difficult for the manager of the gaming hall to visually recognize, the combinations of non-reach out symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. In this case, by checking the state suggesting area 43, it is possible to grasp which of the time saving result and the off result.

If it is the first time saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, and if it is the second time result that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, the symbol column Z1 ~ Even if the combination of the non-reach out symbols is stopped and displayed on each of the effective lines L1 to L5 of Z3, the stop result different from the first time saving result and the second time saving result is displayed in the state suggesting area 43. Stop is displayed. That is, in the case of the first time saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high-frequency support mode, the blue color is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43, while the second high-frequency support mode setting is triggered. In the case of the second time saving result that does not occur, green is stopped and displayed in the state suggesting area 43 . As a result, in a situation where the special symbol display portions 37a and 37b are difficult for the administrator of the gaming hall to visually recognize, the combinations of non-reach out symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. In this case, by checking the state suggesting area 43, not only is it a time saving result or a deviation result, but if it is a time saving result, it is either the first time saving result or the second time saving result. It is possible to comprehend.

A processing configuration that enables display of the stop result in the pattern display device 41 as described above will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern determination process executed by the sound and light side MPU 93 . Note that the variation pattern determination process is executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 82 .

When information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to the jackpot result is set in the type command received this time (step S1401: YES), stop symbol determination processing for jackpot result is executed. (step S1402). In the stop symbol determination process for the big win result, as the stop result to be stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the type of the current big win result is selected. The relationship between the types of jackpot results and combinations of stop symbols is as shown in FIG. In addition, in the stop symbol determination process for the big win result, the effective lines L1 to L5 for stopping and displaying the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the type of the big win result of this time are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step S1403).

If information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to the time saving result is set in the type command received this time (step S1404: YES), the current game state is a high probability state and time saving If it is not in the state (step S1405 and step S1406: NO), or if the current game state is the time saving state, even if it is the final game round of the time saving state (step S1406 and step S1407: YES), for time saving suggestion (step S1408). In addition, the sound and light side MPU 93 can specify whether the current game state is the normal game state, the high probability state or the time saving state by the state designation command received from the main side MPU 82, and further corresponds to the start of the time saving state It is possible to specify whether or not it is the final game round in the time saving state by the number of receptions of the variation command after receiving the state designation command to be performed.

In the stop symbol determination process for suggesting time saving, as the stop result to be stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the type of the current time saving result is selected. Specifically, if it is the first time saving result, the combination of the first time saving pattern (“1, 2, 3”) is selected, and if it is the second time saving result, the combination of the second time saving pattern (“3, 4.1”). In addition, in the stopping symbol determination process for suggesting time saving, the effective lines L1 to L5 for stop-displaying the combination of the stopping symbols corresponding to the type of the time saving result of this time are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step S1409).

On the other hand, when the information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to the time saving result is set in the type command received this time (step S1404: YES), and the current game state is If it is a high probability state (step S1405: YES), or if the current game state is a time saving state and is not the final game round of the time saving state (step S1406: YES, step S1407: NO), for non-reach out (step S1410). In the stop symbol determination process for non-reach out, as the stop result to be stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the combination of the first time-saving generated symbols ("1, 2・ 3 ”), the combination of the second time saving pattern (“3 4 1”) and the combination of non-reach out pattern, which is a combination of patterns other than the combination of the out reach pattern, is stopped and displayed. decide.

After that, when information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to the first time saving result is set in the type command received this time (step S1411: YES), the symbol display device 41 blue is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 (step S1412). In addition, when information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to the second time saving result is set in the type command received this time (step S1411: NO), the pattern display device 41 green is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 (step S1413).

If the type command received this time contains information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to a loss result (step S1404: NO), stop symbol determination processing for loss result is executed. (step S1414). In the stop symbol determination process for the result of losing, when the variation display period information indicating that the game round to be started this time corresponds to the occurrence of the ready-to-win display is set in the variation command received this time As a stop result to be stopped and displayed in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, the effective lines L1 to L5 are determined by lottery to determine the combination of the winning reach symbols and to stop and display the determined combination of the winning reach symbols. It is decided by lottery. In addition, in the stop symbol determination process for the outlier result, the variable display period information indicating that the game round to be started this time does not correspond to the occurrence of the ready-to-win display is set in the variable command received this time. If there is, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, a combination of the first time-saving patterns (“1 2 3”), a combination of the second time-saving patterns (“3 4 1”) and off reach A lottery determines the result of stop display of a combination of symbols other than the combination of symbols. After that, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 (step S1415).

When the process of step S1403, the process of step S1409, the process of step S1412, the process of step S1413, or the process of step S1415 is executed, the determination process of the variation pattern is executed (step S1416). In the process of determining the variation pattern, first, an advance notice lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice display and, if the advance notice display is to be executed, the type of the notice display. Then, as a result of the advance notice lottery process, a variation pattern corresponding to the stop result determined in steps S1401 to S1415 and the information of the variation display period included in the variation command received this time is selected, and the selected variation pattern is selected. The corresponding variation pattern table is read from the sound and light side ROM 94 to the sound and light side RAM 95 . The sound and light side MPU 93 controls the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read variation pattern table, thereby causing the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 to perform the effect of the variation pattern corresponding to the current game round. .

Thereafter, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S1416 is transmitted to the display side MPU 103 (step S1417). The display side MPU 1417 reads the display control table corresponding to the received variation pattern command from the display side ROM 104 to the display side RAM 105 . The display-side MPU 103 controls the symbol display device 41 according to the read display control table, thereby causing the symbol display device 41 to display a variation pattern corresponding to the current game turn. In this case, the stop result to be stop-displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 and the stop result to be stop-displayed in the state suggesting area 43 of the pattern display device 41 in the game cycle are determined by the variation pattern determination process (FIG. 28). This is the stop result determined in steps S1401 to S1415.

<Subtraction processing of ceiling counter 131>
Next, it demonstrates, referring the flowchart of FIG. 29 about the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 performed in step S1011 during special figure determination (FIG. 22).

First, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1501). Then, if the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S1501: YES), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 ends without executing the processes after step S1502. In other words, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented in the game cycle executed in the high probability mode, and the ceiling counter 131 value is not decremented, thereby causing a ceiling time reduction. Nor.

Here, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24) as already explained in the process during special figure determination (FIG. 22). As a result, in the last game cycle in the high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode, the value of the high-probability state counter 133 is decremented by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high-probability state counter 133. Before the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0" and the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0", the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed. Become. Then, when the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed at this timing, since the high probability flag is still set to "1", the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being subtracted in a game round in which the winning/losing determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high-probability mode. In addition, such an effect of the processing order of executing the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) before the subtraction processing of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24) in the special figure determination process (FIG. 22) It can be realized by setting.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S1501: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S1502). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S1502: NO), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1503. As already explained, the process of setting information in the ceiling counter 131 is performed in a situation where none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation" and "setting confirmation operation" are executed and the game machine body 12 is in the open state. Step S114 when the supply of operating power is started in a certain situation, step S122 when an information error occurs in the main side RAM 84 when the supply of operating power is started, and opening/closing execution mode are started. , and after the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" unless one of the above processes is executed. On the other hand, the ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented by 1 in a situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" as described above (step S1502: NO), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1503. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", and a time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs, and the game times of the time-saving continuation number are digested without a big hit result occurring in the time-saving state. When the time saving state ends and the normal game state is entered, the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving does not occur even if the game rounds in which no big winning results occur are repeated after that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive occurrence of the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving.

If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S1502: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the ceiling counter 131 (step S1503), and whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction of 1 is "0". (step S1504). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S1504: YES), on condition that the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S1505: NO) The second high frequency flag of the RAM84 is set to "1" (step S1506), and the information of "100" is set to the time saving state counter 134 of the main side RAM84 (step S1507). Thereby, it will be in the time saving state which is low probability mode and is 2nd high frequency support mode. In addition, the time-saving state ends when the number of times the game is executed without the occurrence of a jackpot result reaches 100 times, which is the first time-saving continuation number. state.

After that, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S1508). In the transmission process, a state specifying command indicating that the time saving state has started is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . Information on the number of continuation of the first time saving set this time is also included in the state designation command. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 perform processing to indicate that the time saving state is started. Execute.

On the other hand, even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtracting 1, if the second high frequency flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S1506 to S1508 is not executed. This ceiling time saving is invalidated without setting the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving. That is, even if the game times of the fixed number of times are completed in the state of the time saving state, the ceiling time saving is invalidated without setting the second high-frequency support mode with the ceiling time saving as a trigger. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting for shifting to the high-frequency support mode from being additionally executed in the middle of the high-frequency support mode. In addition, the first high-frequency support mode is set only within the range until 100 game rounds are completed after the opening and closing execution mode, but when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the fixed ceiling number of times is set to 500 times. is set, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after decrementing 1 does not become "0" in the first high-frequency support mode.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S1505 or when the process of step S1508 is executed, the reach high frequency state flag of the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1509). As a result, when the ceiling time saving occurs, the reach high frequency state ends regardless of whether or not the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving is performed.

<Subtraction processing of time saving state counter 134>
Next, it demonstrates, referring the flowchart of FIG. 30 about the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 performed in step S1008 during special figure determination (FIG. 22).

First, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1601). When "1" is set to the high probability flag (step S1601: YES), the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is terminated without executing the process after step S1602. In the high-probability state, the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, but since the high-probability state counter 133 is used to identify the trigger for ending the high-probability state, the high-probability flag is set to "1". is set, the process for subtracting the value of the time saving state counter 134 is not executed.

When "1" is not set to the high probability flag and "1" is set to the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM84 (step S1602: YES), that is, time saving state, the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main side RAM84 is subtracted by 1 (step S1603), and when the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1604: YES), the main Both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the side RAM 84 are cleared to "0" (step S1605). As a result, when the first high-frequency support mode is selected, the first high-frequency support mode is terminated and the low-frequency support mode is selected, and when the second high-frequency support mode is selected, the second high-frequency support mode is selected. The mode ends and becomes the low-frequency support mode. That is, the time saving state ends and the normal game state is entered.

After that, transmission processing of the state designation command is executed (step S1606). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has ended is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . By receiving the state designation command, the sound and light side MPU 93 terminates the execution of the effect corresponding to the time saving state in the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65, and performs the effect corresponding to the normal game state. let it start.

Here, as already explained in the process during special figure determination (Figure 22), the subtraction process (Figure 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is executed before the setting process for the time saving result (Figure 25), The subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 (FIG. 30) is executed before the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29). Moreover, the setting process (FIG. 25) for a time saving result is performed before the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 as already demonstrated in processing (FIG. 22) during special figure determination. The effect of setting the execution order of the processes will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 31(a) shows the period during which the game round is being executed, FIG. 31(b) shows the period of the time saving state, and FIG. 31(c) shows subtraction of the time saving state counter 134 (step S1603). FIG. 31(d) shows the timing of setting the time saving state triggered by the time saving result (steps S1305 to S1308), and FIG. 31(e) shows subtraction of the ceiling counter 131 (step S1503 ) is executed.

First, the case where the result of the success/failure determination process becomes the time saving result in the last game in the time saving state and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" will be described.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), in the situation of the time-saving state, a game round is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 31(a). Then, when the variable display period of the game round has passed, the stop result corresponding to the game result is displayed on the side of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b that is the execution target of the game round. Along with the confirmation display, the stop result corresponding to the game result is also confirmed and displayed on the symbol display device 41 . The processing after step S1002 in the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 22) is executed by the lapse of the final stop period in a state where these stop results are displayed. In this case, since the game result of the game round is not a jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S1002 of the special figure fixing process (FIG. 22), and the processes after step S1008 are executed.

In the processing after step S1008, the subtraction processing of the time saving state counter 134 (FIG. 30) is executed first. Since this time is a game round executed in the time saving state, the time saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 1 is subtracted from the value of Then, the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the subtraction of 1 becomes "0", so that the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 are cleared to "0", at the timing of t2 As shown in FIG. 31(b), the current time-saving state ends and the normal game state, which is the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, is entered.

After that, the setting process (Fig. 25) for the time saving result in which the execution order of the process is set to the later order than the subtraction process (Fig. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 in the special figure finalizing process (Fig. 22) is executed do. Since the time saving result is selected in the success or failure determination process this time, the time saving result of this time as shown in FIG. The time saving state is set as a trigger. Therefore, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 31(b), the game state becomes a time saving state in which the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are provided. In addition, since the time saving result of this time is the second time saving result, information of “150” which is the second time saving continuation frequency is set to the time saving state counter 134 .

After that, the execution order of the processing is set to the later order than the setting processing for the time saving result (FIG. 25) in the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 22) Execute the subtraction processing (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 . At the timing t4 during execution of the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented by 1 as shown in FIG. The value becomes "0". In other words, ceiling time reduction occurs. However, as already explained, the result of the success/failure determination process in this game round is the time saving result, and at the timing of t3 in this game round, the time saving state has already been set with the time saving result as a trigger. Therefore, the ceiling time reduction that occurred this time is invalidated. After that, at the timing of t5, the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 31(a).

As described above, the setting process for the time saving result (Figure 25) is set in the order after the execution order of the process than the subtraction process (Figure 30) of the time saving state counter 134 in the special figure determination process (Figure 22) By doing so, even if the result of the success/failure determination process is a time saving result in a game time other than the final game time in the time saving state, the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is not performed. When the result of the winning/failure determination process is the time saving result in the final game round of the time saving state, the setting of the second high frequency support mode can be performed with the time saving result as a trigger. As a result, by preventing the setting of the time-saving state from being newly set in the middle of the time-saving state, the time-saving state does not continue excessively, and the time-saving result in the final game round of the time-saving state is triggered. By making the setting of the time saving state valid, it is possible to give the player the benefit of selecting the time saving result in the success/failure determination process as much as possible. Also, such excellent effects can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

As described above, even if the result of the success/failure determination process is a time saving result in the game times other than the final game time in the time saving state, the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is not performed. However, in the final game round of the time saving state, if the result of the success/failure determination process is a time saving result, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result has already been described. As a result, in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, when the result of the success/failure determination process is a time saving result in the game round other than the final game round in the time saving state, each effective line L1 to L5 of non-reach off symbols The combination is stopped and displayed, and if the result of the success or failure determination process in the final game round in the time saving state is a time saving result, a combination of time saving patterns on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (first time saving pattern combination or The combination of the second time saving generating pattern) is stopped and displayed. Thereby, it is possible to set the stop result in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 as the stop result corresponding to whether or not the time saving result triggers the setting of the time saving state.

In particular, the combination of non-reach out symbols that are stopped and displayed when the result of the success/failure determination process is a time reduction result in a game cycle other than the final game cycle in the time saving state is stopped when the result of the success/failure determination process is out. It is a combination of symbols to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is not performed even though the time saving result is obtained.

As described above, although the time saving result was obtained, if the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is not performed, the result of the success/failure determination process is off in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. If the result is a stop display Even if the stop result is displayed, the pattern corresponding to the time saving result is stopped and displayed in the special figure display units 37a and 37b. As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm whether or not the time saving result has occurred regardless of whether or not the setting of the second high-frequency support mode has been performed.

As described above, although the time saving result was obtained, if the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is not performed, the result of the success/failure determination process is off in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. If the result is a stop display Even if the stop result is displayed, the state suggesting area 43 of the pattern display device 41 displays a stop result different from the case where the result of the success/failure determination process is wrong. As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm whether or not the time saving result has occurred regardless of whether or not the setting of the second high-frequency support mode has been performed.

By setting processing (FIG. 25) for the time saving result in the order before the execution order of the processing than the subtraction processing (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 in the processing (FIG. 22) during special figure determination, If the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 is "0" in the game round in which the result of the determination process is a time saving result, the time saving result is higher than the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving. It is possible to give priority to the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by this. The number of continuous time reductions in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction is fixed at 100 times, while the number of continuous time reductions in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction results is the first time reduction result. If there is, it is 100 times, and if it is the second time saving result, it is 150 times. That is, the number of continuous working hours in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is equal to or greater than the number of continuous working hours in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling working hours. In this case, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is prioritized over the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving as described above, so that the result of the judgment process is When the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes '0' after subtraction of 1 in the game round resulting in the time saving result, it is possible to prevent the setting mode of the continuous number of time saving from being disadvantageous to the player. Also, such excellent effects can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

Next, a case will be described in which the result of the success/failure determination process is a wrong result and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" in the final game round in the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), in the situation of the time-saving state, a game round is started at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 31(a). Then, when the variable display period of the game round has passed, the stop result corresponding to the game result is displayed on the side of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b that is the execution target of the game round. Along with the confirmation display, the stop result corresponding to the game result is also confirmed and displayed on the symbol display device 41 . The processing after step S1002 in the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 22) is executed by the lapse of the final stop period in a state where these stop results are displayed. In this case, since the game result of the game round is not a jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S1002 of the special figure fixing process (FIG. 22), and the processes after step S1008 are executed.

In the processing after step S1008, subtraction processing of the time saving state counter 134 (FIG. 30) is executed first. Since this time is a game round executed in the time saving state, the time saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 1 is subtracted from the value of Then, the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the subtraction of 1 becomes "0", so that the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 are cleared to "0", at the timing of t7 As shown in FIG. 31(b), the time-saving state ends and the normal game state, which is the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, is entered. After that, the setting process for the time saving result in which the execution order of the process is set to the later order than the subtraction process (Fig. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 in the special figure finalizing process (Fig. 22) is executed (Fig. 25) However, in this game round, the result of the success/failure determination process is a result of deviation, so the time saving state is not set in the setting process.

After that, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) whose execution order is set to the later order than the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 (FIG. 30) in the special figure determination process (FIG. 22) is executed. do. At the timing t8 during execution of the subtraction processing (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented by 1 as shown in FIG. The value becomes "0". In other words, ceiling time reduction occurs. Then, by setting the time saving state triggered by the occurrence of the ceiling time saving, the game state is the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 31 (b) at the timing of t8 short-time state. In addition, since the ceiling time saving is triggered, the time saving state counter 134 is set with the information of "100" which is the first time saving continuation number. After that, at the timing of t9, the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 31(a).

As described above, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is set in the order after the execution order of the process than the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 (FIG. 30) in the special figure determination process (FIG. 22) As a result, even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0" in game rounds other than the final game round in the time saving state, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving is performed. However, when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0" in the final game round of the time saving state, the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving is performed. It becomes possible to As a result, the setting of the time saving state is not newly performed in the middle of the time saving state, so that the time saving state does not continue excessively, and the ceiling time saving occurs in the final game round of the time saving state. By validating the setting of the time saving state triggered by , it is possible to give the player as much as possible the benefit of the occurrence of the ceiling time saving. Also, such excellent effects can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

<Subtraction processing of fluctuation selection state counter 132>
Next, the subtraction process of the variation selection state counter 132 executed in step S1009 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1701). If the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S1701: YES), the subtraction process of the variable selection state counter 132 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1702.

As already explained, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, when the period switching reference number of game rounds is completed in the low probability mode, in the low frequency support mode, the reach high frequency table group is referred. reach high frequency state. And, in the reach high frequency state, as already explained, the probability that the reach display is selected is higher in the case of the outlier result than in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode and not in the high reach frequency state. In addition, the variable display period when the reach display is selected tends to be longer in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode than in the high reach frequency state. Also, the period switching reference number of times is a predetermined number of times (specifically, 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number of times. Therefore, it is possible to generate the reach high frequency state before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction. The variable selection state counter 132 is a counter for measuring the number of game times of the remaining period switching reference number of times. In this case, as already explained, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted in the high-probability state, and the ceiling time reduction does not occur in the high-probability state. Therefore, when the high probability flag is set to "1", the process for subtracting the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is not executed.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the variation selection state counter 132 is 1 or more (step S1702). If the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is "0" (step S1702: NO), the subtraction processing of the variable selection state counter 132 is terminated without executing the processing after step S1703. The processing for setting information in the variable selection state counter 132 is performed only in step S1006 when the open/close execution mode is started as already explained, and after the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0", step S1006 is performed. The value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0" unless the process of . On the other hand, in the reach high frequency state, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable selection state counter 132 and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0". occurs when In this case, if the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is "0" as described above (step S1702: NO), the subtraction processing of the variable selection state counter 132 is performed without executing the processing after step S1703. finish. As a result, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0" and a reach high frequency state occurs, and when the reach high frequency state ends, the digestion of game rounds in which no jackpot result occurs is repeated. High reach frequency condition does not occur even if As a result, it is possible to prevent the reach high frequency state from occurring excessively.

In addition, as already explained, the period switching reference number of times is set to a predetermined number of times (specifically 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number of times, so the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time saving Before However, if the ceiling time reduction occurs once, it will not occur even if the game rounds in which no big winning result occurs are repeated after that. In this case, when the reach high frequency state ends as described above, even if the game cycle in which no jackpot results occur is repeated after that, the reach high frequency state does not occur, thereby reducing the ceiling time. It is possible to prevent the reach high frequency state from occurring in a situation where it does not occur.

If the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more (step S1702: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable selection state counter 132 (step S1703), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after the 1 subtraction becomes " 0” (step S1704). If the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is "0" (step S1704: YES), the reach high frequency state flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1705).

In the state where the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1", the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" by subtracting 1 in the subtraction processing (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131, and the reach high frequency in step S1509. It is canceled by executing the process of clearing the status flag to "0". That is, the state in which the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" is canceled regardless of whether or not the setting of the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving is performed when the ceiling time saving occurs.

Here, the process of step S1705 is performed even if it is a time saving state. On the other hand, in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 21), the main side Since the process of step S903 is executed to determine whether "1" is set to either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the RAM 84, "1" is set to the reach high frequency state flag. Even if it is set, when selecting the variable display period of the game cycle, the selection mode of the variable display period in the time reduction state has priority over the selection mode of the variable display period in the reach high frequency state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the digestion efficiency of game rounds is high in the time saving state from being hindered by setting the reach high frequency state flag to "1".

On the other hand, even if it is a time saving state, the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" and the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" is maintained. Therefore, when the time saving state ends before the opportunity to clear the reach high frequency state flag to "0" occurs, it becomes possible to generate the reach high frequency state from that point.

After that, transmission processing of the state designation command is executed (step S1706). In the transmission process, a state specifying command indicating that the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93. FIG. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the design display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 show the effect indicating that the reach high frequency state is started on the condition that it is not in the time saving state Execute processing to ensure that the In addition, when the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command in the time saving state, when the time saving state ends before the game round of the period switching reference number of times is digested, the reach high frequency state is started. A process for causing the shown effect to be executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 is executed.

Next, it demonstrates, referring the time chart of FIG. 33 for the relation of the execution timing of the reach high frequency state and the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving. FIG. 33(a) shows a period of opening and closing execution mode, FIG. 33(b) shows a period of high probability state (high probability mode and first high frequency support mode), FIG. 33(c) shows time saving state (Low probability mode, first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) shows the period, FIG. 33(d) shows the state of the variable selection state counter 132, and FIG. FIG. 33(f) shows the state of the ceiling counter 131 during the high frequency state.

First, the case where the reach high frequency state occurs at the timing when the value of the variation selection state counter 132 becomes "0" will be described.

The opening/closing execution mode is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. In this case, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. Information of 500 times, which is the number of times of fixed ceiling, is set in the counter 131 .

After that, at the timing of t2, the opening/closing execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 33(a), resulting in a high probability state of the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 33(b). . The game round is repeatedly executed in the high probability state, but even if the game round is repeatedly executed in the high probability state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted as shown in FIG. The value of the variable selection state counter 132 is never decremented as shown in 33(d).

After that, at the timing of t3, the high-probability continuous game rounds in the high-probability state are completed, and the high-probability state ends as shown in FIG. It will be in a normal game state. Each time the game cycle is completed by entering the normal game state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. value is subtracted.

Then, as shown in Drawing 33 (c), a time saving state is started because a time saving result is chosen by right or wrong judging processing at the timing of t4. In the time-saving state, each time a game round is completed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33(f), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted as shown in FIG. be done.

After that, at the timing of t5, the time-saving continuation number of game rounds are completed, so that the time-saving state ends and the normal game state is entered as shown in FIG. 33(c). In the normal game state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decreased as shown in FIG. 33(f) and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is increased as shown in FIG. subtracted.

After that, at the timing of t6, the value of the variation selection state counter 132 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 33(d). At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 33(c), it is not in the time-saving state. Therefore, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 33(e), a reach high frequency state occurs. In the high frequency reach state, as already explained, the probability that the reach display will be selected is higher than in the normal game state but not in the high frequency reach state, and the probability that the reach display will be selected is higher. The variable display period in 2 is also likely to be longer than in the normal game state and not in the reach high frequency state.

After that, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 33(c), it is not in the time-saving state. Therefore, as shown in FIG.33(c), it will be in a time saving state at the timing of said t7. Also, at the timing of t7, the reach high frequency state ends as shown in FIG. 33(e). In the time-saving state, a short period is likely to be selected as the variable display period of the game rounds, so the efficiency of digesting the game rounds increases.

After that, at the timing of t8, the time-saving continuation number of game rounds are completed, so that the time-saving state ends and the normal game state is entered as shown in FIG. 33(c). In this case, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" without resetting the value to the ceiling counter 131 as shown in FIG. 33(f) at the timing of t8. Also, at the timing t8, as shown in FIG. 33(d), the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0" without being reset.

Next, the case where the setting of the reach high frequency state is delayed due to the time saving state at the timing when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0" will be described.

The opening/closing execution mode is started at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. In this case, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. Information of 500 times, which is the number of times of fixed ceiling, is set in the counter 131 .

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the opening/closing execution mode ends, and as shown in FIG. 33(c), the low-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode are in the time-saving state. In the time-saving state, each time a game round is completed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33(f), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted as shown in FIG. be done.

After that, at the timing of t11, the time-saving continuation number of game rounds are completed, so that the time-saving state ends and the normal game state is entered as shown in FIG. 33(c). In the normal game state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33(f) and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is increased as shown in FIG. subtracted.

Then, as shown in FIG.33(c), a time saving state is started by a time saving result being selected by the right or wrong determination process at the timing of t12. In the time-saving state, each time a game cycle is completed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33(f), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted as shown in FIG. be done.

After that, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 33(d) at the timing of t13 which is the time saving state. At the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 33(c), it is in a time-saving state. Therefore, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 33(e), the reach high frequency state does not occur. However, the reach high frequency state flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", and the state in which the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" is maintained. In this case, the time-saving state continues, and in the time-saving state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG.

After that, at the timing of t14, the time-saving continuation number of game rounds are completed, so that the time-saving state ends and the normal game state is entered as shown in FIG. 33(c). However, since the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the reach high frequency state occurs at the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 33(e). In the high reach frequency state, as already explained, the probability that the reach display will be selected is higher than the situation in which the reach state is not in the normal game state and the reach state is not the high frequency reach state. The variable display period in 2 is also likely to be longer than in the normal game state and not in the reach high frequency state.

After that, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. At the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 33(c), it is not in the time saving state. Therefore, as shown in FIG.33(c), it will be in a time saving state at the timing of said t15. At the timing of t15, the reach high frequency state ends as shown in FIG. 33(e). In the time-saving state, a short period is likely to be selected as the variable display period of the game rounds, so the efficiency of digesting the game rounds increases.

After that, at the timing of t16, the time-saving continuation number of game times is completed, so that the time-saving state ends and the normal game state is entered as shown in FIG. In this case, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" without resetting the value to the ceiling counter 131 as shown in FIG. 33(f) at the timing of t16. Also, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 33(d), the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0" without being reset.

According to the embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

Even if the time saving result or the ceiling time saving occurs in the time saving state (excluding the final game round), the setting of the time saving state triggered by these time saving results or the ceiling time saving is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from being newly set in the middle of the time saving state, and to prevent the time saving state from continuing excessively.

The setting process for the time saving result (Figure 25) is set in the order after the execution order of the process than the subtraction process (Figure 30) of the time saving state counter 134 in the special figure determination process (Figure 22), Even if the result of the success/failure determination process is a time saving result in a game time other than the final game time in the time saving state, the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is not performed, while the time saving state When the result of the success/failure determination process in the final game cycle is a time saving result, it is possible to set the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result. As a result, by preventing the setting of the time saving state from being newly set in the middle of the time saving state, the time saving result in the final game round of the time saving state is triggered by preventing the time saving state from continuing excessively. By making the setting of the time saving state valid, it is possible to give the player as much as possible the benefit of the time saving result being selected in the success/failure determination process. Also, such excellent effects can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

In the game times other than the final game time in the time saving state, even if the result of the success/failure determination process is the time saving result, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is not performed, while the time saving state. In the final game round, if the result of the success/failure determination process is a time saving result, the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is performed. In the rows Z1 to Z3, when the result of the success/failure determination process is the time saving result in the game times other than the final game time in the time saving state, the combination of the non-reach-off symbols is stopped and displayed on each of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the time saving state. If the result of the success or failure determination process in the final game round is a time saving result, a combination of time saving patterns on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (a combination of the first time saving patterns or a combination of the second time saving patterns) to stop displaying. As a result, the stop result in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 can be set as the stop result corresponding to whether or not the time saving result triggers setting of the time saving state.

In particular, the combination of non-reach-out symbols that are stopped and displayed when the result of the success/failure determination process is a time-saving result in a game cycle other than the final game cycle in the time-saving state is stopped when the result of the success/failure determination process is out. It is a combination of symbols to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is not performed even though the time saving result is obtained.

Although the time saving result was obtained, when the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is not performed, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 stop and display the result of the success/failure determination process when the result is out. is displayed, the pattern corresponding to the time saving result is stopped and displayed in the special figure display units 37a and 37b. As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm whether or not the time saving result has occurred regardless of whether or not the setting of the second high-frequency support mode has been performed.

Although the time saving result was obtained, when the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is not performed, the result of the success/failure determination process is out of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 Stop result displayed stopped when the result is out. is displayed, the state suggesting area 43 of the pattern display device 41 displays a stop result that is different from the result of the success/failure determination process. As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm whether or not the time saving result has occurred regardless of whether or not the setting of the second high-frequency support mode has been performed.

If the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result of the time saving result is not performed, even if the time saving result is the first time saving result and the second time saving result, the symbol column Z1 ~ In Z3, a stop result that is stopped and displayed when the result of the success/failure determination process is a wrong result is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to make not only the invalidation of the time saving result but also the invalidation of the occurrence of the relatively advantageous second time saving result be inconspicuous. .

If the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result of the time saving result is not performed, even if the time saving result is either the first time saving result or the second time saving result, the symbol column Z1 ~ In Z3, the result of the success/failure determination process is stopped when the result is out and the stop result is displayed. Stop is displayed. As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm whether the first time saving result and the second time saving result have occurred regardless of whether the second high frequency support mode has been set. becomes.

If the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result of the time saving result is not performed, even if the time saving result is the first time saving result and the second time saving result, the symbol column Z1 ~ In Z3, in the configuration in which the result of the success/failure determination process is stopped and displayed in the case of a result that is not the result, the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 corresponds to each of the first time saving result and the second time saving result Stop results are displayed. As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm whether the first time saving result and the second time saving result have occurred regardless of whether the second high frequency support mode has been set. becomes.

By the fact that the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (Figure 29) is set in the order after the execution order of the process than the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 (Figure 30) in the special figure determination process (Figure 22) Even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtracting 1 in game times other than the final game time in the time saving state, the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving is not performed. On the other hand, when the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtracting 1 in the final game round of the time saving state, the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving is performed. becomes possible. As a result, the setting of the time saving state is not newly performed in the middle of the time saving state, so that the time saving state does not continue excessively, and the ceiling time saving occurs in the final game round of the time saving state. By validating the setting of the time saving state triggered by , it is possible to give the player as much as possible the benefit of the occurrence of the ceiling time saving. Also, such excellent effects can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

If a time saving result or a ceiling time saving occurs in the final game round of the time saving state, the time saving state triggered by the time saving result or the ceiling time saving will be started following the end of the current time saving state. The total number of execution times of the game rounds is greater than the number of execution times of the game rounds in the time saving state when the time saving state is started from the normal game state. As a result, if a time saving result or a ceiling time saving occurs in the final game round of the time saving state, the time saving result or the ceiling time saving will be triggered following the end of the current time saving state so that the time saving state will be started. It is possible to increase the advantage of what you have done.

By setting processing (FIG. 25) for the time saving result in the order before the execution order of the processing than the subtraction processing (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 in the processing (FIG. 22) during special figure determination, If the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 is "0" in the game round in which the result of the determination process is a time saving result, the time saving result is higher than the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving. It is possible to give priority to the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by this. The number of continuous time reductions in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction is fixed at 100 times, while the number of continuous time reductions in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result is the first time reduction result. If there is, it is 100 times, and if it is the second time saving result, it is 150 times. That is, the number of continuous working hours in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is equal to or greater than the number of continuous working hours in the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling working hours. In this case, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is prioritized over the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving as described above, so that the result of the judgment process is When the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtracting 1 in the game round resulting in the time saving result, it is possible to prevent the setting mode of the continuous number of time saving from being disadvantageous to the player. Also, such excellent effects can be produced by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

During special figure determination processing (Figure 22) setting processing for time saving result (Figure 25) before subtraction processing of high probability state counter 133 (Figure 24) is executed. As a result, in the last game cycle in the high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode, the value of the high-probability state counter 133 is decremented by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high-probability state counter 133. Before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0" by the value of the high probability state counter 133 becoming "0", the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed Become. Then, when the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed at the timing, the high probability flag is still set to "1", so the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is not performed. Therefore, in the game round in which the success/failure determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time saving result. In addition, such an effect during processing (FIG. 22) in the processing order of executing the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133 in the special figure determination It can be realized by setting.

In the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 22), the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed before the subtraction processing of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24). As a result, in the last game cycle in the high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode, the value of the high-probability state counter 133 is decremented by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high-probability state counter 133. Before the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0" and the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0", the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed. Become. Then, when the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed at this timing, since the high probability flag is still set to "1", the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being subtracted in a game round in which the winning/losing determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high-probability mode. In addition, such an effect of the processing order of executing the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) before the subtraction processing of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24) in the special figure determination process (FIG. 22) It can be realized by setting.

In the high-probability state, not only does the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving state occur, but also the processing itself for subtracting 1 from the ceiling counter 131 is not executed. As a result, it is possible to exclude the number of game rounds executed in a high-probability state advantageous to the player from the game rounds to be subtracted from the value of the ceiling counter 131 .

The value of the ceiling counter 131 is not set when the ceiling time saving state is used as a trigger to move to the time saving state or when the time saving state ends. In addition, the transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving is the value of the ceiling counter 131 as a result of the game round being digested and the value of the ceiling counter 131 being subtracted in a situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more is "0". Therefore, the transition to the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs only once after the jackpot result occurs, and if the transition to the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs once, basically after that Unless the value of the ceiling counter 131 is set due to the occurrence of the jackpot result, the transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the excessive occurrence of shift to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving.

Even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed, the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not initialized, and the number of ceilings including the fixed ceiling number of times is not newly set. do not have. As a result, even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed, it is possible to maintain the remaining number of peaks.

Even if the RAM clearing process (step S119) is executed, the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not initialized, and the number of ceilings including the information of the number of fixed ceilings is not newly set. . As a result, even if the RAM clearing process (step S119) is executed, the remaining ceiling count can be maintained.

Although the set value update process (step S117) is executed, even if it is executed, the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not initialized, and furthermore, the ceiling counter 131 including the fixed ceiling number information is updated. No settings are made. Therefore, even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed to cancel the game stop state due to the information abnormality when the information abnormality of the main side RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained as it is. . On the other hand, when it is specified that an information error has occurred in the main RAM 84 and the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the ceiling counter 131 is set to 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling frequency. information is set. As a result, even if the information in the ceiling counter 131 has been rewritten when an information error occurs in the main RAM 84, the information in the ceiling counter 131 can be reset to 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling frequency. becomes.

When the game machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the ceiling counter 131 of the main side RAM 84 is set with information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings. When such processing is executed, it means that the setting confirmation processing (step S112), the set value updating processing (step S117), and the RAM clearing processing in the processing (steps S101 to S126) at the start of supply of operating power. This is a situation in which the process (step S119) is not executed. In addition, in the game hall, the main power supply for supplying operating power to each pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the power switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 78 of each pachinko machine 10 is turned on in advance. When it is time to start business for the day, the pachinko machines 10 are activated all at once by turning on the main power supply. Under these circumstances, the gaming machine body 12 is intentionally left open in a situation in which the setting confirmation process (step S112), the setting value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119) are not executed. When the supply is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the ceiling counter 131 is set to 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings, when the supply of operating power is started, as a situation different from that at the start of normal business hours, and to confirm the setting. It is possible to generate this operation without using the application process (step S112), the set value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119).

When the opening/closing execution mode is started after the game round corresponding to the result of the jackpot is finished, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings. If the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set the number of fixed ceiling times during the opening/closing execution mode or when the opening/closing execution mode ends, not when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the operation is performed after the opening/closing execution mode is started. If the power supply is stopped and the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the set value update process ( In the step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is cleared as already explained, whereas the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so that the operation power is supplied. There is a risk that the game may be restarted in a situation where the number of remaining ceilings is small while the profit of the opening/closing execution mode is obtained until the game is stopped. On the other hand, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with the information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings, so that the fraudulent act as described above can be neutralized.

After the open/close execution mode ends, if the period switching reference number of game rounds is completed in the low probability mode, in the low frequency support mode, the table group for high frequency reach is referred to high frequency reach state. Then, in the reach high frequency state, the probability that the reach display is selected in the case of the outlier result is higher than in the situation of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the reach is not in the high frequency state. The variable display period when the display is selected also tends to be longer in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode than in the high reach frequency state. Further, the period switching reference number of times is a predetermined number of times (specifically, 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number of times that triggers the ceiling time reduction. Therefore, it is possible to generate the reach high frequency state before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction.

When the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 in the reach high frequency state becomes "0" and the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs, the reach high frequency state ends. In the time-saving state, a short period is likely to be selected as the variable display period of game rounds, so the efficiency of digesting the game rounds is increased. As a result, it is possible to allow the reach high frequency state to occur while not hindering the increase in the digestion efficiency of game rounds in the time saving state.

The processing of setting the reach high frequency state flag of the main side RAM 84 to "1" when the value of the variation selection state counter 132 after subtracting 1 becomes "0" is executed even in the time saving state. On the other hand, in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 21), the main side Since the process of step S903 for determining whether "1" is set to either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the RAM 84, "1" is set to the reach high frequency state flag. Even if it is set, when selecting the variable display period of the game cycle, the selection mode of the variable display period in the time reduction state has priority over the selection mode of the variable display period in the reach high frequency state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the state in which the digestion efficiency of game rounds is high in the time saving state from being hindered by setting the reach high frequency state flag to "1".

On the other hand, even if it is a time saving state, the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" and the reach high frequency state flag is set to "1" is maintained. Therefore, when the time saving state ends before the opportunity to clear the reach high frequency state flag to "0" occurs, it becomes possible to generate the reach high frequency state from that point.

The processing for setting information in the variable selection state counter 132 is only step S1006 when the open/close execution mode is started, and the processing in step S1006 is executed after the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0". The value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0" unless On the other hand, in the reach high frequency state, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable selection state counter 132 and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0". occurs when In this case, if the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is "0" (step S1702: NO), the subtraction processing of the variable selection state counter 132 is terminated without executing the processing after step S1703. As a result, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0", and a reach high frequency state occurs, and when the reach high frequency state ends, the digestion of game rounds in which no jackpot result occurs is repeated. High reach frequency condition does not occur even if As a result, it is possible to prevent the reach high frequency state from occurring excessively.

Since the period switching reference number of times is set to a predetermined number of times (specifically 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number of times, the reach high frequency state is reached before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time saving. However, when the ceiling time saving also occurs once, the ceiling time saving does not occur even if the game cycle in which no big win result occurs is repeated after that. In this case, when the reach high frequency state ends, even if the game rounds in which no jackpot results occur are repeated after that, the reach high frequency state does not occur, so that the ceiling time reduction does not occur. It is possible to prevent the reach high frequency state from occurring in.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the execution order of the processing in the process during special figure determination is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process in this embodiment executed by the main side MPU 82. As shown in FIG.

In steps S1801 to S1817, the same processing as steps S801 to S817 of the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed. After executing the process of step S1817, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the current gaming state is the high probability state. (Step S1818). If the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S1818: YES), the start high probability flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1819), and the high probability flag is set to "1". is not set (step S1818: NO), the start accuracy flag is cleared to "0" (step S1820). The start high certainty flag is a flag for the main side MP82 to specify whether or not the winning lottery mode at the start of the game round was the high probability mode in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 35) to be described later.

When the process of step S1819 or the process of step S1820 is executed, 1 is added to the value of the figure special electric counter (step S1821). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "1" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation process (step S607).

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing processing during special figure determination in this embodiment executed by the main side MPU 82 .

In steps S1901 to S1907, the same processing as steps S1001 to S1007 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is executed. When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has passed (step S1901: YES), and the game result of this game round is not a jackpot result (step S1902: NO ), the high probability state counter 133 subtraction processing is executed in step S1908, the time saving state counter 134 subtraction processing is executed in step S1909, the variation selection state counter 132 subtraction processing is executed in step S1910, and step Setting processing for time saving results is executed in S1911, and subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 is executed in step S1912. Then, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1913). That is, in the present embodiment, the setting process for the time saving result and the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 are not set as the processing order after the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131, but the setting process for the time saving result and the ceiling The subtraction processing of the high-probability state counter 133 is set as the processing order before the subtraction processing of the counter 131 .

Figure 36 is a flow chart showing the setting process for the time saving result in this embodiment executed in step S1911 of the process during special figure determination (Figure 35).

If the game result of the current game cycle is a time saving result (step S2001: YES), it is determined whether or not the start high probability flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2002). And when "1" is set to the start high probability flag (step S2002: YES), the setting process for this time saving result is complete|finished, without performing the process after step S2003. In other words, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the game round success determination process started in the high probability mode, the time saving result is used as a trigger for the second high frequency support The time saving result is invalidated without setting the mode.

If the start high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S2002: NO), it is determined whether or not the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". (step S2003, step S2004). That is, it is determined whether the support mode is one of the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode. When the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S2003 or step S2004: YES), this time saving result setting process is terminated without executing the processes after step S2005. That is, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the game round success determination process executed in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the time saving If the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode at the timing of the setting process for the result (FIG. 36) is executed, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result Time-saving results are nullified without being done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting for shifting to the high-frequency support mode from being additionally executed in the middle of the high-frequency support mode.

If the support mode is the low-frequency support mode (steps S2003 and S2004: NO), the second high-frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2005). As a result, the support mode becomes the second high-frequency support mode. Then, if the time saving result of this time is the first time saving result (step S2006: YES), the time saving state counter 134 provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to the first time saving continuation number "100" information (step S2007), if the time saving result of this time is the second time saving result (step S2006: NO), information of "150" which is the second time saving continuation frequency is set to the time saving state counter 134 (step S2008). When the number of game rounds executed without the occurrence of a new jackpot result in the time saving state becomes 100 times, which is the first number of continuous time-saving operations, or 150 times, which is the second number of continuous time-saving operations, the jackpot. The low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode are entered even if no results have occurred.

If the process of step S2007 or the process of step S2008 has been executed, the state designation command transmission process is executed (step S2009). In the transmission process, a state specifying command indicating that the time saving state has started is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . The state designation command also includes information on the number of times of time-saving continuation set this time. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 perform processing to indicate that the time saving state is started. Execute.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in this embodiment executed in step S1912 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 35).

First, it is determined whether or not the start high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2101). Then, if the start high probability flag is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 ends without executing the processes after step S2102. In other words, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented in the game cycle started in the high-probability mode, and the ceiling counter 131 value is not decremented, thereby causing a ceiling time reduction. Nor.

If the start high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S2102). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S2102: NO), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S2103. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", and a time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs, and the game times of the number of time saving continuations are digested without a big hit result occurring in the time saving state. When the time saving state ends and the normal game state is entered, the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving does not occur even if the game rounds in which no big winning results occur are repeated thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive occurrence of the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving.

If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S2102: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the ceiling counter 131 (step S2103), and whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction of 1 is "0". (step S2104). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S2104: YES), on condition that the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S2105: NO), The second high frequency flag of the RAM84 is set to "1" (step S2106), and the information of "100" which is the first time saving continuation number is set to the time saving state counter 134 of the main side RAM84 (step S2107). Thereby, it will be in the time saving state which is low probability mode and is 2nd high frequency support mode. In addition, the time-saving state ends when the number of times the game is executed without the occurrence of a jackpot result reaches 100 times, which is the first time-saving continuation number. state.

After that, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S2108). In the transmission process, a state specifying command indicating that the time saving state has started is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . Information on the number of continuation of the first time saving set this time is also included in the state designation command. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 perform processing to indicate that the time saving state is started. Execute.

On the other hand, even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtracting 1, if the second high frequency flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S2106 to S2108 is not executed. This ceiling time saving is invalidated without setting the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving. That is, even if the game times of the fixed number of times are completed in the state of the time saving state, the ceiling time saving is invalidated without setting the second high-frequency support mode with the ceiling time saving as a trigger. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting for shifting to the high-frequency support mode from being additionally executed in the middle of the high-frequency support mode. In addition, the first high-frequency support mode is set only in the range until 100 game rounds are completed after the opening and closing execution mode, but when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the fixed ceiling number of times is set to 500 times. is set, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after decrementing 1 does not become "0" in the first high-frequency support mode.

When affirmative determination is made in step S2105 or when the process of step S2108 is executed, the reach high frequency state flag of the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2109). Thereby, when the ceiling time saving occurs, the reach high frequency state ends regardless of whether or not the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving is performed.

According to the embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

During special figure determination processing (Figure 35) setting processing for the time saving result (Figure 36) is executed after the subtraction processing of high probability state counter 133 (step S1908). However, when the game cycle is started, the high-probability mode is set and the win-or-fail determination process is executed with reference to the win-or-fail table 123 at the time of high probability. be done. And, when the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 36) is started, even if the time saving result is selected in the success/failure determination process when "1" is set to the start high probability flag, the time saving The setting of the time saving state triggered by the result is not performed. Thereby, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time saving result in the game cycle in which the success/failure determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode.

The time saving result is invalidated in the time saving result setting process (Fig. 36) by using the start high probability flag which is set to "1" under the condition that the high probability mode is set when the game round is started. Since it is a configuration that determines whether or not, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects regardless of the execution order of the processing in the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 35).

In the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 35), the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 37) is executed after the subtraction processing of the high probability state counter 133 (step S1908). However, when the game cycle is started, the high-probability mode is set, and if the win-or-fail determination process is executed with reference to the win-or-fail table 123 at the time of high probability, "1" is set to the start high-probability flag of the main side RAM 84. be done. When the ceiling counter 131 subtraction process (FIG. 37) is started and the start accuracy flag is set to "1", the ceiling counter 131 value is not subtracted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being subtracted in the game round in which the winning/losing determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high-probability mode.

The value of the ceiling counter 131 is changed in the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 37) using the start high probability flag which is set to "1" under the condition that the high probability mode is set when the game round is started. Since it is the structure which determines whether it subtracts, it becomes possible to produce the above outstanding effects regardless of the execution order of the process in process (FIG. 35) during special figure determination.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the trigger for shifting the win/fail lottery mode from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 82 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, a falling random number counter C5 is provided in addition to a hit random number counter C1, a type random number counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI, a fluctuation type counter CS, and an electric random number counter C4. In addition, the contents of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, the fluctuation type counter CS and the general electric random number counter C4 and the processing using these counters C1 to C4, CINI, CS The contents are the same as those of the first embodiment.

The falling random number counter C5 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The falling random number counter C5 is periodically updated, stored in the first special figure reservation area 111 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, and second at the timing when the game ball wins the second operating port 34. It is stored in the special figure reservation area 112. In the high-probability mode, when a game round is started, fall determination processing is executed using numerical information corresponding to the fall random number counter C5 among the holding information for which the game round is started. Then, when the fall result is selected in the fall determination process, the win/loss lottery mode changes from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at that time. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, when the number of game rounds executed in the high-probability mode becomes the high-probability continuation number, the win-or-fail lottery mode is configured to shift from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. In the embodiment, the transition to the low probability mode does not occur depending on the number of game rounds executed in the high probability mode, and the transition to the low probability mode occurs by selecting the fall result in the fall determination process. .

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process in this embodiment executed by the main side MPU 82. FIG.

If the second reservation information is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 and the first reservation information is stored in the first special figure reservation area 111 (step S2201: YES, step S2202: NO), the first Data setting processing is executed (step S2203). The content of the first data setting process is the same as step S803 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment. On the other hand, if the second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 (step S2201 and step S2202: YES), the first reservation information acquired earlier than the second reservation information is the first Even if it is stored in the 1 special figure reservation area 111, the second data setting process is executed (step S2204). The content of the second data setting process is the same as step S804 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

When the process of step S2203 or the process of step S2204 is executed, on condition that the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2205: YES), the fall determination process is executed (step S2206). ). In the fall determination process, the fall determination table is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 . Numerical information of the fall random number counter C5, which is the fall result, is set in the fall determination table. Only one type of fall determination table is provided, and the probability of selecting a fall result in the fall determination process is constant regardless of the set value, and the start target of the game round is the first hold information and the second hold information. is constant in either case. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of selecting a fall result in the fall determination process may be configured to vary according to a set value. It is good also as a structure which fluctuates according to which of the 1 reservation information and the 2nd reservation information is the start target of the game cycle.

The fall determination table is set so that the probability of selecting the fall result is 1/15, but the probability may be lower than 1/15 or higher than 1/15. In the fall determination process, the information for fall determination, that is, the numerical information obtained from the fall random number counter C5 is read from the reserved information stored in the execution area 113 for the special figure, and the read numerical information is used for the fall determination read above. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information set as the fall result in the table.

If the result of the fall determination process is the fall result (step S2207: YES), the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2208), and if the result of the fall determination process is not the fall result (step S2207 : NO) to keep the high probability flag set to "1". As a result, when the result of the fall determination process is the fall result, the success/failure lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and when the result of the fall determination process is not the fall result, the success/failure lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode. mode is maintained. Further, the fall determination process is executed before the success/failure determination process (step S2209), and the transition to the low-probability mode when the result of the fall determination process is the result of the fall occurs before the success/failure determination process (step S2209). executed before. As a result, when the result of the fall determination process is the fall result, the win/fail determination process (step S2209) can be executed in a situation where the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S2205, if a negative determination is made in step S2207, or if the process of step S2208 is executed, a suitability determination process is executed (step S2209). The content of the propriety determination process is the same as step S805 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

If the result of the success determination process is a jackpot result (step S2210: YES), the distribution determination process for the jackpot is executed (step S2211), the flag setting process for the jackpot is executed (step S2212), and the result for the jackpot result is stop result setting process (step S2213). The contents of steps S2211 to S2213 are the same as steps S807 to S809 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

If the result of the success or failure determination process is not the jackpot result but the time saving result (step S2210: NO, step S2214: YES), if the high probability flag of the main side RAM84 is set to "1" (step S2215: YES), the first time saving result is selected (step S2216), and when the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S2215: NO), the distribution determination process for time saving is executed. (step S2217). In the distribution determination process for time saving, similar to step S811 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment, if the start target of the game round is the first reservation information, the first special figure The time saving distribution table 127 (see FIG. 10(c)) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84, and if the game start target is the second reservation information, the time saving distribution table 128 (see FIG. 10(c)) for the second special figure 10(d)) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 . After reading the time-saving distribution tables 127 and 128, from the pending information stored in the execution area 113 for special figures, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information obtained from the type random number counter C2 is read, and the time-saving distribution By referring to the minute tables 127 and 128, it is specified which type of time saving result the read numerical information corresponds to. Therefore, either the first time saving result or the second time saving result is selected.

Even in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even if the result of the success/failure determination process in the high probability state is a time saving result, the time saving state is set with the time saving result as a trigger. In this case, if the result of the success or failure determination process in the high probability state is a time saving result, by forcibly selecting the first time saving result that is less advantageous than the second time saving result, high Even if the player recognizes from the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41 that the result of the success/failure determination process has become a time saving result in the probability state, in the second time saving result with a high degree of advantage It is possible to make the player recognize that the first time saving result with a low advantage has been invalidated, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of wasteful withdrawal due to the occurrence of the invalidation. The configuration may be applied to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and may be applied to fourth to twelfth embodiments described later.

When the process of step S2216 or the process of step S2217 is performed, the flag setting process for time saving is performed (step S2218), and the stop result setting process for time saving results is performed (step S2219). The contents of steps S2217 to S2219 are the same as steps S811 to S813 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment. Moreover, when the result of the success/failure determination process is neither the big hit result nor the time saving result (step S2214: NO), the stop result setting process for the out result is executed (step S2220). The content of step S2220 is the same as step S814 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

If the processing of step S2213, the processing of step S2219, or the processing of step S2220 is executed, the processing of steps S2221 to S2224 is executed. The contents of steps S2221 to S2224 are the same as steps S815 to S818 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing processing during special figure determination in this embodiment executed by the main side MPU 82 .

In steps S2301 to S2307, the same processing as steps S1001 to S1007 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is executed. When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has passed (step S2301: YES), and the game result of this game round is not a jackpot result (step S2302: NO ), in step S2308 the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is executed, in step S2309 the subtraction process of the variation selection state counter 132 is executed, in step S2310 the setting process for the time saving result is executed, to step S2311 Then, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed. Then, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S2312). In steps S2308 to S2311, the same processes as steps S1008 to S1011 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment are executed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133, which was set in the special figure determination process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, is not set in the special figure determination process (FIG. 40) . Therefore, in this embodiment, the transition to the low-probability mode does not occur depending on the number of games played in the high-probability mode.

As described above, when the game round is started in the high probability mode, the fall determination process (step S2206) is executed, and if the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is the fall result, the winning lottery mode at that time changes from high-probability mode to low-probability mode. These processes are executed before the suitability determination process (step S2209). As a result, when the result of the fall determination process is the fall result, the win/fail determination process (step S2209) can be executed in a situation where the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode.

If the time saving result is selected in the right or wrong determination process (step S2209), in the case of the low probability mode the first time saving result or the second time saving result is selected in the time saving distribution decision process (step S2217) On the other hand, in the high probability mode, the first time saving result is forcibly selected. Even in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even if the result of the success/failure determination process in the high probability state is a time saving result, the time saving state is set with the time saving result as a trigger. In this case, if the result of the success/failure determination process is a time saving result in a high probability state, by forcibly selecting the first time saving result that is less advantageous than the second time saving result, the high probability Even if the player recognizes from the display contents of the special figure display units 37a, 37b and the pattern display device 41 that the result of the success or failure determination process has become a time saving result in the state, it is not the second time saving result with a high degree of advantage. It is possible to make the player recognize that the first time saving result with a low degree of advantage has been invalidated, and it is possible to reduce the sense of wastefulness caused by the occurrence of the invalidation.

In the configuration in which the first time saving result with relatively low advantage is selected when the result of the success or failure determination process (step S2209) is the time saving result in the high probability mode, the time saving result is the first time saving result and the second The fall determination process (step S2206) is executed before the process (step S2215 to step S2219) of distributing to one of the time saving results. Thereby, when the transition to the low probability mode occurs because the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is the result of the fall, the time saving result is the first time saving after the transition to the low probability mode is performed. A process (steps S2215 to S2219) of distributing to either the result and the second time saving result is executed. Therefore, when the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is the result of the fall and the transition to the low probability mode occurs, relative It is possible to allow a second time saving result to be selected which is advantageous to

In the configuration in which the transition from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode is performed when the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is the result of the fall, the process of transitioning to the low-probability mode is executed at the start of the game cycle. On the other hand, setting processing for the time saving result (step S2310) and subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 (step S2311) are executed in the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 40) which is the processing at the end of the game round. Thereby, when the transition to the low probability mode occurs because the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is the fall result, setting processing for the time saving result after the transition to the low probability mode is performed (Step S2310) and subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 (Step S2311) are executed. Therefore, when the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is the result of the fall and the transition to the low probability mode occurs, the time reduction It is possible to set the time saving state triggered by the result, and when the ceiling time saving occurs by setting the value of the ceiling counter 131 to "0" after subtracting 1, the ceiling time saving is set. It is possible to set the time-saving state as a trigger.

<Fourth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the processing configuration of the main processing. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. As shown in FIG.

In steps S2401 to S2416, the same processes as steps S101 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed. If it is determined that the reset button 142 has been pressed (step S2408 or step S2422: YES), and if it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 143 has been turned on using the setting key (step S2416). : YES), or if it is determined in step S2407 that the setting updating flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", setting value update processing is executed (step S2417). The set value update process will be described later. Further, in steps S2418 to S2420, the same processes as steps S118 to S120 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S2404 to S2406, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to "1", if the checksum does not match, or if the set value is abnormal, the main side The game stop flag of the RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2421). By setting the game stop flag to "1" in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the processes of steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), while an affirmative determination is made in step S206. By doing so, the processing of steps S207 to S220 is not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, the storage state of the main RAM 84 has changed since the previous power failure. If the checksum does not match due to the fact that the game is running, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed. will not be executed.

In the first embodiment, when the game stop flag is set to "1" at step S121 by specifying that the information abnormality has occurred in the main side RAM 84, the ceiling counter of the main side RAM 84 is set at step S122. 131 is configured to execute a process of setting information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of times, but this process is not set in this embodiment. In other words, even if the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S2421 by specifying that the information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84, the process of setting the information in the ceiling counter 131 is not executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the reset button 142 is pressed (step S2422). If the reset button 142 has not been pressed (step S2422: NO), the processes of steps S2423 and S2424 are executed. The processes of steps S2423 and S2424 are the same as steps S124 and S125 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment.

If the reset button 142 is pressed (step S2422: YES), setting value update processing is performed on condition that the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned ON using the setting key (step S2416: YES). Execute (step S2417). In steps S2425 to S2429, the same processes as steps S126 to S130 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed.

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the set value update process executed in step S2417 of the main process (FIG. 41).

First, interrupt permission is set (step S2501). After that, the setting updating flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2502). After that, if the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S2503: NO), after executing the RAM clearing process (step S2504), the process proceeds to step S2507, and the game stop flag is set to " 1" is set (step S2503: YES), the RAM clearing process is executed (step S2505), the ceiling counter 131 is set (step S2506), and then the process proceeds to step S2507.

In the RAM clearing process in each of steps S2504 and S2505, in the main side RAM 84, an area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (that is, a setting reference area), a ceiling counter 131, and a setting updating flag. And the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and initialized except for the area in which the information for calculating the role ratio is stored in the main side RAM 84 . As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the winning lottery draws regardless of the winning lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Mode is low probability mode. In addition, the game round is not executed, the open/close execution mode is not executed, and the normal diagram display section 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. situation. In addition, since the special figure reservation area 84a and the normal diagram reservation area 84c are also cleared to "0", the first reservation information, the second reservation information and the reservation information on the normal diagram side are erased. Also, the setting checking flag and setting update area are cleared to "0". Also, in the RAM clearing process, the various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step S2402 is executed.

In the setting process of the ceiling counter 131 in step S2506, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings. As a result, it is specified that an information error has occurred in the main RAM 84, and the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", thereby preventing the start of the process for advancing the game. When the set value update process is executed in the state where the ceiling is present and the blocked state is canceled, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceiling times.

After that, "1" is set in the setting update area of the main side RAM 84 (step S2507), and an update start command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 (step S2508). Also, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting update area is one of "1" to "6" (step S2509). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step S2509: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area (step S2510). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2509 or if the process of step S2510 is performed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step S2511). If a negative determination is made in step S2511, on condition that the reset button 142 is pressed (step S2512: YES), 1 is added to the value of the setting update area (step S2513). As a result, each time the reset button 142 is pressed once, the set value is updated to a value one step higher. If the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S2512: NO) or if the value of the setting update area is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S2509. If it is determined that the value of the area is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area in step S2510. As a result, when the reset button 142 is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting returns to "setting 1".

If it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S2511: YES), the setting reference area is overwritten with the setting value information stored in the setting update area (step S2514). ). As a result, the setting value information updated as a result of this setting value updating process is set in the setting reference area, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the current setting of the pachinko machine 10. value.

After that, interrupt prohibition is set (step S2515). Also, a return command at the time of updating is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 (step S2516). Also, the setting updating flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2517).

According to the above configuration, when it is specified that an information error has occurred in the main RAM 84 and the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the process for advancing the game can be started. When the set value update process is executed in the blocked state and the blocked state is canceled, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings. As a result, even if the information in the ceiling counter 131 has been rewritten when an information error occurs in the main RAM 84, the information in the ceiling counter 131 can be reset to 500 times, which is the fixed ceiling frequency. becomes.

When an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 84, the information of the ceiling counter 131 is reset to the information of 500 times which is the fixed ceiling frequency, and the situation where the start of the processing for progressing the game is blocked is released. It is possible to concentrate on the set value update process executed for the purpose. In addition, when an information error occurs in the main RAM 84, the process of resetting the information of the ceiling counter 131 to the information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings, is blocked from starting the process for advancing the game. When the set value update process is executed to cancel the

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the processing configuration of the main processing. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. As shown in FIG.

In steps S2601 to S2612, the same processes as steps S101 to S112 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed. If the setting key insertion unit 143 is not turned on using the setting key and the setting confirmation flag is not set to "1" (steps S2610 and S2611: NO), the main body open detection sensor 144 It is determined whether or not the gaming machine body 12 is being opened by determining whether or not a HI level open detection signal has been received from (step S2613).

When the HI level open detection signal is received from the main body open detection sensor 144 (step S2613: YES), that is, when the game machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the ceiling of the main side RAM 84 Information of 500 times, which is the first ceiling number, is set in the counter 131 (step S2614). The case where the process of step S2613 is executed means that when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the pressing operation of the reset button 142 and the ON operation by the setting key to the setting key insertion portion 143 are performed. In addition, both the setting updating flag and the setting checking flag of the main RAM 84 are not set to "1". In this case, the setting confirmation process (step S2612), the setting value update process (step S2617) and the RAM clear process (step S2619) are not executed in the process (steps S2601 to S2626) when the supply of operating power is started. situation. In addition, in the game hall, the main power supply for supplying operating power to each pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the power switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 78 of each pachinko machine 10 is turned on in advance. When it is time to start business for the day, the pachinko machines 10 are activated all at once by turning on the main power supply. Under such circumstances, the affirmative determination is made in step S2613 when the game machine This is the case where the supply of operating power is started while the main body 12 is intentionally left open. In such a situation, the ceiling counter 131 is set with the information of 500 times, which is the first ceiling number. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the first number of times of ceiling, when the supply of operating power is started, as a situation different from that at the start of normal business hours. This can be generated without accompanying confirmation processing (step S2612), setting value update processing (step S2617), and RAM clear processing (step S2619). It should be noted that the information of 500 times, which is the first ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131 also when the opening/closing execution mode is started as a result of a big win.

In steps S2615 to S2620, the same processes as steps S115 to S120 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S2604 to S2606, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to "1", if the checksum does not match, or if the set value is abnormal, the main side The game stop flag of the RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2621). By setting the game stop flag to "1" in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the processes of steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), while an affirmative determination is made in step S206. By doing so, the processing of steps S207 to S220 is not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, the storage state of the main RAM 84 has changed since the previous power failure. If the checksum does not match or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed. will not be executed.

After that, the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is set with the information of 800 times, which is the second ceiling number which is larger than the first ceiling number (step S2622). In steps S2623 to S2630, the same processes as steps S123 to S130 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed.

Even if the set value update process (step S2617) is executed as in the first embodiment, the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not initialized, and the ceiling count is not newly set. can't break Therefore, even if the set value update process (step S2617) is executed in order to cancel the game stop state due to the information abnormality when the information abnormality of the main side RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained as it is. . On the other hand, when it is specified that an information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84 and the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the ceiling counter 131 is set to 800, which is the second ceiling number. times information is set. As a result, even if the information in the ceiling counter 131 has been rewritten when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84, the information in the ceiling counter 131 can be reset to the information of 800 times, which is the second ceiling number. It becomes possible.

The second ceiling number is a number greater than the first ceiling number set in the ceiling counter 131 when the opening/closing execution mode is started or at step S2614 of the main process (FIG. 43). As a result, when an information error occurs in the main RAM 84, the second ceiling count, which is a relatively large number, is set in the ceiling counter 131. When the action is performed, it becomes possible to give a penalty that the number of execution times of the game times required to generate the ceiling time reduction is increased.

<Sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the game area PA provided on the game board 24 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 44 is a front view of the game board 24 for explaining the configuration of the game area PA in this embodiment.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The guide rail is configured as A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

As in the first embodiment, the game board 24 includes a general prize winning port 31, a special electric prize winning device 32, a first operation port 33, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, and a general figure unit 38. is provided. Also, a special winning device 151 is provided in place of the second operation port 34 in the first embodiment. Further, in this embodiment, a distribution winning device 161 is provided.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters any one of the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the special winning device 151, and the distribution winning device 161, the number of game media available to the player is A predetermined number of game balls are put out to increase the number. Specifically, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, 15 balls are paid out. game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the first operating port 33, three game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the special winning device 151, One game ball is put out, and when a ball enters the distribution winning device 161, 15 game balls are put out.

As will be described later, the distribution winning device 161 is provided with a discharge passage region 165b and a V winning passage region 165c. Although it will pass through either of the areas 165c, the same number (specifically 15) of game balls will be paid out regardless of which of the discharge passage area 165b and the V winning passage area 165c the game balls pass. be done. Also, the number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the first operation port 33 and the special prize winning device 151 may be the same, and the number of prize balls in the distribution prize winning device 161 is greater than the number of prize balls in the special electric prize winning device. The number of prize balls may be greater than or less than 32.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, as well as various members such as windmills.

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 36 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area in which the game balls shot to the game area PA can flow down is defined. Specifically, an upper area PA1, which is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA, and a lower area continuous with the upper area PA1 and higher than the variable display unit 36. A left area PA2 which is an area on the left, a right area PA3 which is an area continuous below the upper area PA1 and to the right of the variable display unit 36, and a left area PA2 and a right area PA3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA4 which is an area below the variable display unit 36 continuously below it.

When the player operates the shooting operation device 28 with the amount of rotation in the first range which is less than the reference amount of rotation as the first shooting operation, the game ball is ejected to the left of the center position in the horizontal direction in the upper area PA1. flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1→left area PA2→lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the shooting operation device 28 with a rotation amount in a second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as a second shooting operation, the upper area PA1 is positioned to the right of the lateral center position. A game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1→right area PA3→lower area PA4. In other words, the player can adjust the rotation operation amount of the shooting operation device 28 so that the game ball can flow down the left side area PA2 of the left side area PA2 and the right side area PA3. A game can be played so that a game ball flows down PA3. Incidentally, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated with the maximum amount of rotation, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper area PA1→right area PA3→lower area PA4.

The first operation port 33 is installed in the lower area PA4. The first operating port 33 is open upward, and a member such as an opening/closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the first operating port 33 is not provided. Then, in a situation where the game balls are shot in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operation opening 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operation port 33 is always capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area PA toward the first operation port 33 . In addition, the first operating port 33 is arranged directly below the stage portion 36b formed in the variable display unit 36, and a game ball flowing into the stage portion 36b through the guide passage formed in the variable display unit 36 A game ball ejected outside the variable display unit 36 from the lateral center of the stage portion 36b easily enters the first operation opening 33. As shown in FIG.

As described above, the first operating port 33 is provided in the lower area PA4, but on the upstream side of the first operating port 33 toward the right side area PA3, the game ball that has flowed down the right side area PA3 is the first A regulating nail 24c is provided so as to make it impossible to reach the 1 operation port 33. As shown in FIG. Further, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided for the left area PA2 and not provided for the right area PA3. With these configurations, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, it is possible to win the first operation opening 33, but the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. When the shooting operation device 28 is operated so as to do so, winning to the first operation port 33 is disabled. However, it is not limited to this, and the game ball flows down in the right area PA3 by not providing the control nail 24c or providing the entrance of the guide passage to the stage part 36b in the right area PA3. As described above, the configuration may be such that even when the firing operation device 28 is being operated, the winning to the first operation opening 33 is possible.

The special winning device 151 is installed in the right area PA3. That is, the special winning device 151 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the shooting operation device makes the game ball flow down the right area PA3. 28 is operated, winning is possible.

The configuration of the special winning device 151 will be described with reference to FIG. 45(a). FIG. 45(a) is a longitudinal sectional view of the special winning device 151 in the non-guided state. The special prize winning device 151 includes a base unit 151a formed with a discharge passage 153 for discharging game balls flowing in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 24, and a discharge passage 153 for discharging game balls flowing down the game area PA. and a guidance unit 152 for guidance. An entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 has an opening area equal to or larger than one game ball, and is open toward the front of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加A detection sensor 154 is provided on the exit portion 153b side of the discharge passage 153, and the game ball that has won the special winning device 151 is detected by the detection sensor 154. FIG.

Guidance unit 152 receives from below the game ball flowing down the front area of the entrance portion 153a in the game area PA, guide member 155 for guiding the received game ball into the discharge passage 153, into the discharge passage 153 A situation in which the guide drive unit 156 for displacing the guide member 155 between the initial position that disables the guidance of the game ball and the guidance position that allows the guidance, and the guide member 155 is arranged at the initial position is arranged in a blocking position that blocks the inflow of game balls into the discharge passage 153, and in a situation where the guide member 155 is arranged in the guiding position, it is arranged in a non-blocking position that does not block the inflow of game balls into the discharge passage 153. and a blocking member 157 . The guide member 155 and the blocking member 157 are opposed to each other with a predetermined gap in the vertical direction, with the guide member 155 facing downward. A transmission unit 158 is provided to transmit the driving force of the guide driving portion 156 to the guide member 155 and blocking member 157 .

When the guide driving portion 156 is in a non-driving state, the guide member 155 is arranged at the initial position and the blocking member 157 is arranged at the blocking position by the biasing force of biasing means such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 155 and blocking member 157 are entirely buried in the discharge passage 153 and do not protrude into the game area PA. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front region of the entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 153 by the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157, that is, the game ball is a special winning prize. The ball flows downward in the play area PA without entering the device 151. - 特許庁Further, since the blocking member 157 is arranged at the blocking position, the substantial opening area of the inlet portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 is less than one game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent game balls from entering the special winning device 151 when the guide member 155 is located at the initial position.

When the guide driving portion 156 is driven, the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157 are displaced against the biasing force of the biasing means, so that the guide member 155 is placed at the guiding position and the blocking member 157 is released. placed in the blocking position. FIG. 45(b) is a longitudinal sectional view of the special winning device 151 in the guided state.

When the guide member 155 is arranged at the guiding position, the tip side of the guide member 155 protrudes from the entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 toward the game area PA. This amount of protrusion is such that it is possible to receive from below the game ball that flows down the area in front of the entrance portion 153a in the game area PA. Since the upper surface of the tip of the guide member 155 slopes downward toward the inlet 153a of the discharge passage 153, the game ball received from below at the tip of the guide member 155 moves toward the upper surface of the guide member 155. , and is guided into the discharge passage 153 . Further, when the blocking member 157 is arranged at the non-blocking position, the tip of the blocking member 157 is displaced so as to be positioned above the blocking position, so that the upper surface of the guide member 155 is rolled. The ball flows into the discharge passage 153 without interfering with the blocking member 157 . As a result, the guide driving portion 156 is driven, and the game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance portion 153 a in the game area PA enters the special winning device 151 . Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the state in which the guide drive unit 156 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 155 is arranged at the initial position, and the blocking member 157 is arranged at the blocking position is referred to as the non-guiding state of the guide unit 152 or the special winning device 151. The closed state of the guide driving unit 156 is the driving state, the guide member 155 is arranged at the guiding position, and the blocking member 157 is arranged at the non-blocking position. It is called open state.

The special prize winning device 151 has a cover member 159 provided to face the entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 . The cover member 159 is formed in the shape of a gate so as to form a vertical passage portion 159a in the area in front of the entrance portion 153a in the game area PA. It is provided so as to limit the number of game balls to one and restrict the forward movement and lateral movement of the game ball in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, when the guidance unit 152 of the special winning device 151 is in the guided state, a plurality of game balls are prevented from being simultaneously guided into the discharge passage 153 of the special winning device 151, and the guidance state , it is possible to reliably guide the game ball passing through the front region of the entrance portion 153a into the discharge passage 153.

As shown in FIG. 44, a through gate 35 is provided above the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. That is, the through gate 35 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Winning is possible when is operated. The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. In addition, a special winning device 151 is provided at a position vertically below the through gate 35, and a special electric winning device 32 and a distribution winning device 161 are provided downstream of the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. It is Therefore, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the special prize winning device 151 , the special electric prize winning device 32 or the distribution prize winning device 161 .

The right side area PA3 in which the special winning device 151 and the through gate 35 are collectively arranged is defined by a side wall 36f of the variable display unit 36 which bulges forward from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. , and the right side is defined by a regulation wall provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 . The right side area PA3 is set to have a lateral dimension narrower than that of the lower side area PA4, and the lateral dimension is such that it is impossible to arrange the game ball entry devices in the lateral direction at the same height position. It has become. As a result, it is possible to limit the flow path of the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 to a predetermined range, and the game ball is likely to enter the special prize winning device 151 and the through gate 35 .

The arrangement mode of the plurality of nails 24b on the upstream side of the through gate 35 in the right area PA3 is set so as to guide the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to the through gate 35.例文帳に追加As a result, a game ball flowing down the right area PA3 can easily enter the through gate 35, and the ball can easily enter the special winning device 151 as the ball easily enters the through gate 35.例文帳に追加

By switching the induction unit 152 of the special prize winning device 151 from the non-guiding state to the guiding state based on the winning of the through gate 35, the special prize winning device 151 changes from the closed state to the open state. Concretely, as the winning to the through gate 35 as a trigger, the general figure propriety determination process is performed, and the general figure unit 38 provided in the lower left corner which is the area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA Variation display of the pattern is performed in the figure display section 38a. Then, when the result of the general pattern correctness determination process is the electric role open winning and the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed and the variable display of the general pattern display unit 38a is ended, the state shifts to the general electric open state. In the general electric open state, the special winning device 151 is opened in a predetermined manner by the guidance unit 152 being in the induced state in a predetermined manner.

Even in the present embodiment, a low-frequency support mode, a first high-frequency support mode, and a second high-frequency support mode are set as support modes. The probability of open winning, the selection mode of the duration of the variable display times in the normal diagram display section 38a, and the selection mode of the stop result in the normal diagram display section 38a are the same as in the first embodiment. In addition, the manner in which the special prize winning device 151 is in the open state when the power supply is open in each support mode (open duration, number of times of opening, upper limit number of winning prizes, interval period) is different from each other in the first embodiment. It is the same as the mode (open duration, number of times of opening, upper limit winning number, interval period) in which the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state when the general electrical is opened in the support mode.

In the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the special prize-winning device 151 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation port 33 is higher than in the special prize-winning device 151, but in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the first operation port The probability of winning to the special winning device 151 is higher than 33. When a prize is awarded to the special prize winning device 151, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. A game can be played while trying not to reduce it.

Based on the fact that the winning to the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151 has occurred, the win/loss determination process is performed. Then, the result of the propriety determination process is clearly shown through the display effect in the special figure unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. The special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display portion 37a and a second special figure display portion 37b as in the first embodiment. In the first special figure display unit 37a, the variable display of the pattern is performed by performing the winning judgment processing on the first reservation information acquired by the occurrence of the winning to the first operation port 33. Then, a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the success/failure determination process is displayed. In this case, as in the first embodiment as the determination result of the success/failure determination process, there are a jackpot result, a time saving result and an off result, but the content of the stop result of the first special figure display unit 37a is a jackpot result, It is different in each of the time saving result and the off result. The display of the stop result in the first special figure display portion 37a is maintained until the next game round is started and the first special figure display portion 37a starts the variable display of a new pattern. In addition, in the second special figure display unit 37b, the variable display of the pattern is performed by performing the winning judgment processing on the second reservation information acquired by the occurrence of the winning to the special winning device 151. Then, a result corresponding to the determination result of the success/failure determination process is displayed. In this case, as in the first embodiment, there are a big hit result, a time saving result, and a misplaced result as well as a small hit result as well as the result of the success/failure determination process. The contents of the stop result of the second special figure display portion 37b are different for each of the big hit result, the time saving result, the small hit result and the off result. The display of the stop result in the second special figure display portion 37b is maintained until the next game cycle is started and the second special figure display portion 37b starts the variable display of a new pattern.

In the special figure unit 37, the 1st special figure reservation display part 37c is provided in the position adjacent to the 1st special figure display part 37a. The number of game balls winning the first operation port 33 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the first special figure reservation display section 37c. On the other hand, the special figure reservation display section corresponding to the second special figure display section 37b is not provided. The number of game balls won by the special winning device 151 is not retained and stored unlike the first operation port 33. - 特許庁That is, when the special winning device 151 wins in a situation where the game round can be started, the game round is executed in the second special figure display section 37b, but the game round cannot be started. Even if a prize to the special prize winning device 151 is generated in the situation, the hold information that triggers the start of the game cycle is not stored. However, even if a prize is awarded to the special prize winning device 151 in a situation in which the game cycle cannot be started, the game balls are paid out accordingly.

The display ranges of the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b are narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Further, the entire display range of the first special figure display portion 37a, the second special figure display portion 37b and the first special figure reservation display portion 37c is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the symbol display device 41 more than the first special figure display portion 37a, the second special figure display portion 37b and the first special figure reservation display portion 37c.

When the first special figure display portion 37a or the second special figure display portion 37b performs the variable display of the pattern, that is, when the game round is being executed, the symbol display device 41 performs the display effect accordingly. When the game-turn effect is executed on the symbol display device 41, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the first pending display area 42a and the state suggesting area 43 are set in the same manner as in the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the second pending display area 42b is not displayed because the second pending information is not stored. In addition, the symbol display device 41 performs not only the display effect for the game cycle, but also the display effect during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts after the result of a big hit, and the like.

When a big winning result is selected in the win/fail judgment processing executed based on the winning to the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151, the opening/closing execution mode is shifted to after the game round corresponding to the big winning result is finished. In the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to win a prize for the special electric prize winning device 32 . As shown in FIG. 44, the special electric winning device 32 is provided at a position below the special winning device 151 and above the distribution winning device 161 in the right area PA3. That is, the special electric prize winning device 32 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the shooting operation device 32 makes the game ball flow down the right area PA3. 28 is operated, winning is possible.

The special electric prize winning device 32 has a large prize winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and has an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and when a big hit result is selected in the success/failure determination process, the opening/closing door 32a is switched to an open state in which game balls can win. ing. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state. Further, the execution contents of the opening/closing execution mode are the same as those of the first embodiment.

When a small hit result is selected in the winning/failure determination process executed based on the winning to the special prize winning device 151, after the game round corresponding to the small winning result is completed, the game shifts to the distribution execution mode. In the distribution execution mode, prizes can be awarded to the distribution winning device 161 .

As shown in FIG. 44, the distribution winning device 161 is provided at a lower position than the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. That is, the distribution winning device 161 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is operated.

The configuration of the distribution winning device 161 will be described with reference to FIG. 46 in addition to FIG. FIG. 46 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the distribution winning device 161. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 44, the distribution winning device 161 includes a distribution entrance 161a having a size through which game balls can pass. A distribution side opening/closing member 162 is provided for switching between an open state through which a ball can pass. The distribution side opening/closing member 162 is opened by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown) by the driving section 163 for the distribution entrance.

A game ball that has entered the sorting entrance 161a is guided to a branch passage 165 formed in a base body 164 of the sorting prize winning device 161, as shown in FIG. The branch passage 165 has an upstream passage region 165a which is set such that the passage direction is inclined downward in the horizontal direction from the entrance portion of the branch passage 165 to a midway position of the branch passage 165, and the upstream passage region 165a. and a discharge passage area 165b set so that the passage direction is vertically downward, and a side different from the discharge passage area 165b provided by branching from the middle position of the discharge passage area 165b. It has a V winning path area 165c for guiding the ball. In this case, the upstream passage area 165a has a dimension in the direction perpendicular to the passage direction that is equal to or more than one game ball and less than two game balls, so that the direction perpendicular to the passage direction The game balls are prevented from passing through the upstream passage area 165a in a state in which a plurality of game balls are lined up. Therefore, it is prevented that a plurality of game balls simultaneously reach the branch position to the V winning path area 165c in the discharge path area 165b.

A switching piece 166 for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the discharge path area 165b to the V winning path area 165c is provided at the branch point of the discharge path area 165b to the V winning path area 165c. The switching piece 166 is rotatably supported in a region opposite to the V winning passage region 165c with respect to the discharge passage region 165b in the base body 164, and is entirely retracted outside the discharge passage region 165b. and a V-guide position projecting into the discharge passage area 165b. A driving force of a switching driving portion 167 is transmitted to the switching piece 166 through a transmission unit (not shown). When the switching driving portion 167 is in the non-driving state, the switching piece 166 is arranged at the retracted position by the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown), and when the switching driving portion 167 is in the driving state, the switching piece 166 is retracted. The switching piece 166 is displaced against the urging force and placed at the V-guiding position.

When the switching piece 166 is arranged at the retracted position, the game ball flowing into the branch passage 165 flows down the discharge passage region 165b without being guided to the V prize passage region 165c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 24 after being detected by a count detection sensor 168 provided downstream of the branch position of the switching piece 166 in the discharge passage area 165b. On the other hand, when the switching piece 166 is arranged at the V guide position, the game ball flowing into the branch passage 165 is received by the switching piece 166 from below. The upper surface of the switching piece 166 in the state of being arranged at the V guide position slopes downward toward the V winning path area 165c. As a result, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 166 flows into the V winning path area 165c due to its own weight, and flows down the V winning path area 165c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 24 after being detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 provided in the V winning path area 165c.

When the distribution side opening/closing member 162 is in an open state, the period during which the open state is maintained is fixed at 2 seconds, which is a period longer than the game ball firing cycle, and distribution is performed in the distribution execution mode. The upper limit number of game balls that can enter the winning device 161 is constant at five. Further, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Then, when the distribution side opening/closing member 162 is in the open state, the number of game balls winning the distribution prize winning device 161 is often one or two, and the maximum is about three. On the other hand, the switching piece 166 starts to operate when the operating power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the switching piece 166 is arranged at the V-leading position for a certain period at a certain cycle. . The cycle in which the switching piece 166 is placed in the V-lead position is once every 4 seconds, and the period in which it is held in the V-lead position is 1 second. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the distributed prize winning device 161 in the open state, the switching piece 166 is not arranged at the V guide position at the timing when the game ball reaches the position of the switching piece 166. It is assumed that the game ball is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 in this case.

When the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 168 or when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169, the same number of prize balls corresponding to the distribution winning device 161 are paid out. be done. Further, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the distribution execution mode, the opening and closing execution mode occurs after the distribution execution mode. On the other hand, when the distribution execution mode ends without the game ball being detected by the V winning detection sensor 169, the opening/closing execution mode does not occur.

In this embodiment, when the distribution execution mode occurs and the shooting of the game ball toward the distribution winning device 161 is continued, there is a probability of 1/2 that the V winning detection sensor 169 will detect the game ball. Detection occurs. However, it is not limited to this, and the probability may be lower than 1/2 or higher than 1/2. Further, when the distribution execution mode occurs and the shooting of the game ball toward the distribution winning device 161 is continued, the game ball in the V winning detection sensor 169 has a probability of 100% or approximately 100%. may be configured to generate the detection.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 82 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a winning random number counter C1, a type random number counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI, a fluctuation type counter CS, and a general electrical random number counter C4 are provided. The contents of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, the fluctuation type counter CS and the general electrical random number counter C4 and the contents of the processing using these counters C1 to C4, CINI, CS It is the same as the first embodiment. Also, when a prize is won to the through gate 35, the numerical information of the general electric random number counter C4 is stored in the general diagram reservation area 84c, and the configuration of the general diagram reservation area 84c is the same as that of the first embodiment. is.

Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first special figure area 171 provided in the main side RAM 84 when the winning to the first operation opening 33 occurs. be done. Further, each numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1 and the type random number counter C2 is stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure provided in the main side RAM 84 when the special winning device 151 wins. .

The first special figure area 171 includes a first area 172a, a second area 172b, a third area 172c and a fourth area 172d. , the type random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as first reserved information in one of the areas 172a to 172d. In this case, in the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d, when winning to the first operation opening 33 occurs multiple times in succession, the first area 172a→second area 172b→third area 172c→third area Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the 4 area 172d. By providing four areas 172a to 172d in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating port 33 are reserved and stored. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure area 171 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular.

In the first special figure area 171, an execution area 173 for the first special figure is provided in addition to the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d. The execution area 173 for the first special figure stores the first pending information to be subjected to the success/failure determination process, various distribution determination processes, etc. when starting the variable display of the pattern in the first special figure display unit 37a. It is an area where The hold information stored in the first area 172a is shifted to the execution area 173 for the first special figure when starting the variable display of the first special figure display section 37a.

In the execution area 174 for the second special figure, each numerical value information of the random number counter C1 and the type random number counter C2 is displayed when the special winning device 151 wins in the situation where the game round can be started. Stored as pending information. Here, in the first special figure area 171, the first to fourth areas 172a to 172d are provided as already explained, and even if it is impossible to start the game round, the first reservation information In contrast to the configuration for holding and storing the second holding information, only the execution area 174 for the second special figure is provided, and the area for holding and storing the second holding information is not provided. . This makes it possible to treat the presence/absence of reserved storage differently between the first reserved information and the second reserved information. In addition, in the game round triggered by the second suspension information, the reach effect that is finally lost does not occur, so the first suspension information includes the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3. 2 The pending information does not include the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the second reservation information may include numerical information of the reach random number counter C3.

The winning random number counter C1 is used to execute the winning determination process. Although the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the winning lottery mode in the first embodiment, only one winning lottery mode is provided in the present embodiment.

When the suitability determination process is executed for the first reserved information, the first suitability table 181 stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first right/wrong table 181 when the set value that is set to be used is "setting 3". As shown in FIG. 48( a ), the first success/failure table 181 is set with a jackpot result, a time saving result and an off result as a result of the success/failure determination process. In addition, even if it is the 1st right/wrong table 181 corresponding to setting values other than "setting 3", a jackpot result, a time-saving result, and an off result are set. The number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 set corresponding to the big winning result is different for each set value as in the first embodiment, and the winning random number set corresponding to the time saving result. The number of numerical information of the counter C1 is the same for each set value.

When the right/wrong determination process is executed for the second reserved information, the second right/wrong table 182 stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second right/wrong table 182 when the set value that is set to be used is "setting 3". As shown in FIG. 48(b), the second right/wrong table 182 is set with a big hit result, a time saving result, and an off result as a result of the right/wrong determination process, and further, a small hit result is set. It should be noted that even in the second right/wrong table 182 corresponding to setting values other than "setting 3", big hit results, time saving results, small hit results and off results are set. The number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 set corresponding to the big winning result is different for each set value as in the first embodiment, and is made to correspond to each of the time saving result and the small winning result. The set number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 is the same for each set value.

When a jackpot result is selected in the success/failure determination process, the type of jackpot result is selected using the type random number counter C2. When the jackpot distribution determination process for determining the type of the jackpot result is executed, the jackpot distribution table 183 stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot allocation table 183. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 48(c), a low-frequency jackpot result and a high-frequency jackpot result are set in the jackpot distribution table 183 as the result of jackpot distribution determination processing.

The result of the low-frequency jackpot serves as a trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode. In the open/close execution mode triggered by the result of the low-frequency jackpot, the number of executions of the round game is 10 times. Also, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the low-frequency support mode. The low-frequency support mode in this case continues at least until the next opening/closing execution mode occurs.

The high-frequency jackpot result serves as a trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode. In the open/close execution mode triggered by the high-frequency jackpot result, the number of executions of the round game is 10 times. Further, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the first high-frequency support mode. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends when 10 game rounds are completed without any new open/close execution mode. When 10 game rounds are completed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

The jackpot distribution table 183 refers to any case where the result of the hit/fail determination process for the first reservation information is a jackpot result, and the result of the hit/fail determination process for the second hold information is a jackpot result. be done. In addition, the same jackpot distribution table 183 is referred to regardless of the set value. The jackpot distribution table 183 is set so that the low-frequency jackpot result is selected with a probability of 2/3 and the high-frequency jackpot result is selected with a probability of 1/3, but these selection probabilities are arbitrary.

When the time saving result is selected in the propriety determination process, the type of the time saving result is selected using the type random number counter C2. When the allocation determination process for time saving for determining the kind of this time saving result is performed, the time saving distribution table 184 memorize|stored in main side ROM83 is referred. FIG. 48(d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving apportionment table 184. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG.48(d), the 1st time saving result and the 2nd time saving result are set to the time saving distribution table 184 as a result of the distribution determination process for time saving.

A 1st time saving result is a time saving result which makes a support mode a 2nd high frequency support mode, without becoming a shift opportunity of opening-and-closing execution mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 10 games, which is the first time-saving continuation number, are completed without the opening/closing execution mode newly occurring. When 10 game rounds are completed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

A 2nd time saving result is a time saving result which makes a support mode into 2nd high frequency support mode, without becoming a shift opportunity of opening-and-closing execution mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 15 games, which is the second time-saving continuation number, are completed without the opening/closing execution mode newly occurring. When 15 game rounds are completed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. That is, the second time saving result has more execution times of the game times in which the second high-frequency support mode continues than the first time saving result. Therefore, the second time saving result is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving result.

In addition, even if it is this embodiment, ceiling time reduction exists. When the second high-frequency support mode is set with the ceiling time-saving as a trigger, as in the case of the first time-saving result, the second high-frequency support mode is the first time-saving continuous number of times without the opening and closing execution mode newly occurring. The game ends when certain 10 game rounds are completed. When 10 game rounds are completed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

Time saving distribution table 184, when the result of the success/failure determination process for the first pending information is a time saving result, and when the result of the success/failure determination process for the second pending information is a time saving result, refer to any be done. In addition, the same time-saving apportionment table 184 is referred to regardless of the set value. The time saving distribution table 184 is set so that the first time saving result is selected with a probability of 2/3 and the second time saving result is selected with a probability of 1/3, but these selection probabilities are arbitrary.

When a small hit result is selected in the success/failure determination process, the type of the small hit result is selected using the type random number counter C2. When the small hit distribution determination process for determining the type of the small hit result is executed, the small hit distribution table 185 stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48(e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the small hit distribution table 185. FIG. As shown in FIG. 48(e), the small hit distribution table 185 is set with a first small hit result, a second small hit result and a third small hit result as a result of the small hit distribution determination processing. ing.

All of these first to third small winning results serve as triggers for shifting to the distribution execution mode. In the distribution execution mode, as already explained, the distribution winning device 161 is in the open state. A game ball entering the distribution winning device 161 flows into the V winning path area 165c and is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169, thereby shifting to the opening/closing execution mode after the distribution execution mode. Then, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, a support mode corresponding to the kind of the result of the small win is entered. FIG. 48(f) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination of the opening/closing execution mode and the support mode corresponding to each small winning result.

The first small winning result is a small winning result in which the number of executions of the round game in the open/close execution mode shifted to when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the distribution execution mode is one. Also, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the low-frequency support mode.

The second small winning result is a small winning result in which the number of executions of the round game is four in the open/close execution mode that has shifted due to the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the distribution execution mode. Further, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the first high-frequency support mode. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends when 10 game rounds are completed without any new open/close execution mode. When 10 game rounds are completed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

The third small winning result is a small winning result in which the number of executions of the round game in the open/close execution mode, which has shifted due to the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the distribution execution mode, is 9 times. Further, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the first high-frequency support mode. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends when 10 game rounds are completed without any new open/close execution mode. When 10 game rounds are completed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 48(e), the small hit distribution table 185 is a small hit when the result of the right or wrong determination process for the first reservation information is a small hit result, and the result of the right or wrong determination process for the second reservation information is a small hit. Whichever of the resulting cases is referenced. In addition, the same small hit distribution table 185 is referred to regardless of the set value. The small winning distribution table 185 selects the first small winning result with a probability of 1/3, selects the second small winning result with a probability of 1/3, and selects the third small winning result with a probability of 1/3. , but these selection probabilities are arbitrary.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the special figure special electric control processing in this embodiment executed by the main side MPU 82 .

First, hold information acquisition processing is executed (step S2701). FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the process of acquiring hold information. If the winning prize to the first operation port 33 has occurred (step S2801: YES), the number of first pending information stored in the first area 172a to fourth area 172d of the first special figure area 171 On the condition that it is less than 4, which is the upper limit storage number (step S2802: NO), the storage process to the first special figure area 171 is executed (step S2803). In the storage process, the numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the first reservation information, and the first It is stored in the area on the side of the earlier consumption order among the areas in which the pending information is not stored. In addition, when the first reservation information is acquired, the data setting for updating the display contents of the first special figure reservation display unit 37c in accordance with the fact that the number of the first reservation information has increased this time conduct. Also, when the first hold information is acquired, a command corresponding to it is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . As a result, the image of the first reservation display area 42a on the pattern display device 41 is updated in correspondence with the new acquisition of the first reservation information.

If a negative determination is made in step S2801, if a negative determination is made in step S2802, or if the process of step S2803 is executed, it is determined whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special winning device 151 (step S2804). . If the affirmative determination is made in step S2804, the condition is that the current situation is that none of the game times, the distribution execution mode and the opening and closing execution mode are executed (step S2805: YES), for the second special figure to the execution area 174 (step S2806). In the storage process, each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1 and the type random number counter C2 is stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure as the second reservation information. That is, the second reservation information is acquired only in a situation where none of the game times triggered by the first reservation information, the game times triggered by the second reservation information, the distribution execution mode and the opening and closing execution mode are executed be done. And, as will be described in detail later, regarding the execution of the winning/failure determination process, in other words, regarding the execution of the game cycle, the second reservation information is given priority over the first reservation information as an execution trigger, so the second reservation information is the second reservation information. When stored in the execution area 174 for a special figure, the success/failure determination process triggered by the second reservation information is immediately executed, and the game cycle triggered by the second reservation information is started. In addition, the second special figure reservation display unit for notifying the number of stored second reservation information is not provided, and furthermore, in the design display device 41, for notifying the number of reservation storage of the second reservation information No image is displayed.

Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 49), after executing the pending information acquisition process in step S2701, the special figure special electric address table stored in the main ROM 83 is read out (step S2702). In the special figure special electric address table, the start address of the program for executing the processing corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is set. The special figure special electric counter is a counter for specifying the processing contents to be executed in the special figure special electric control process by the main side MPU 82 .

The special figure special electric counter can take a value of "0" to "8", and each value of "0" to "8" corresponds to the start address of each process (step S2705 to step S2713). Specifically, when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "0", the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S2705), which is a process for starting the effect for the game round, is executed, and the special figure special electric When the value of the counter is "1", the processing during special figure fluctuation (step S2706), which is the processing for advancing the effect for the game round, is executed, and the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2". In some cases, special figure determination processing (step S2707), which is processing for terminating the effect for the game round, is executed, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "3", the distribution execution mode The distribution start processing (step S2708), which is the processing for setting the start of the distribution, is the target of execution, and when the value of the special special electric counter is "4", various processing in the distribution execution mode is executed. (step S2709) for distribution is to be executed, and when the value of the special special electric counter is "5", special electric start processing (step S2710) which is a process for controlling the opening of the opening and closing execution mode is to be executed, and if the value of the special electric special electric counter is "6", the special electric open processing (step S2711), which is a process for controlling the open state of the special electric prize winning device 32, is executed, If the value of the special electric counter is "7", the special electric closing process (step S2712), which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric winning device 32, is executed, and the special electric electric counter When the value is "8", special electric end processing (step S2713), which is processing for controlling the ending of the opening/closing execution mode and the transition of the game state at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, is executed.

In the special special electric control process, after reading the special special electric address table (step S2702), the start address corresponding to the information of the special special electric counter is acquired from the special special electric address table (step S2703). Jump to the process indicated by the start address (step S2704). Each process from step S2705 to step S2713 will be individually described below.

<Special figure fluctuation start processing>
First, the special figure fluctuation start processing of step S2705 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In special figure fluctuation start processing, on condition that the 1st reservation information or the 2nd reservation information is stored (step S2901: YES), data setting processing is executed (step S2902). In the data setting process, when the second pending information is stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure, the first pending information acquired earlier than the second pending information in the first special figure area 171 is acquired, the second pending information stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure is set as an object to be executed. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the second suspension information over the first suspension information as an execution trigger for the success/failure determination process, and to prioritize the execution trigger for a game cycle. The second reservation information stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure is erased when the game cycle triggered by the second reservation information ends.

On the other hand, in the data setting process, if the second pending information is not stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure, the data stored in the first area 172a of the first special figure area 171 is stored in the first special figure. to the execution area 173 for After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure area 171 is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 172a to 172d to the lower area side. 2 area 172b, fourth area 172d→third area 172c, etc. After the data in each area is shifted, the fourth area 172d is cleared to "0". Also, in the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display contents of the first special figure reservation display section 37c are updated in accordance with the fact that the number of pieces of reservation information on the first special figure side has decreased this time. Also, in the data setting process, a hold decrease command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . As a result, the image of the first reserved display area 42a on the pattern display device 41 is updated in accordance with the decrease of the first reserved information.

After executing the data setting process, the propriety judgment process is executed (step S2903). In the success/failure determination process, if the execution target of the current game round is the first reservation information, the first success/failure table 181 (see FIG. 48(a)) corresponding to the current set values is read from the main ROM 83, and the current game is executed. If the execution object of the round is the second pending information, the second right/wrong table 182 (see FIG. 48(b)) corresponding to the current setting is read from the main side ROM83. In addition, as already explained, there is one kind of lottery mode. After reading the success/fail tables 181 and 182, if the first suspension information is the trigger for the current game cycle, numerical information about the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special figure is read. Read out, when the second pending information is the trigger of the game round this time, read out the numerical value information about the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure. Then, it is determined which of the game results set in the success/failure tables 181 and 182 matches the numerical value information about the read winning random number counter C1.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S2904: YES), a jackpot result process is executed (step S2905). In the processing for the jackpot result, the same processing as steps S807 to S809 of the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed. However, in the distribution determination process for the big hit, the big hit distribution table 183 shown in FIG. 48(c) is referred to regardless of the type and set value of the reservation information that is the target for starting the game cycle. In this case, when the first reservation information is the target for starting the game cycle, numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special figure is set in the jackpot distribution table 183. It is determined which one of the jackpot results that have been done matches. In addition, when the second reservation information is the start target of the game round, numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure is set in the jackpot distribution table 183. It is determined whether it matches any of the jackpot results. In addition, in the jackpot flag setting process, when the low-frequency jackpot result is selected in the jackpot distribution determination process, the corresponding flag is set, and when the high-frequency jackpot result is selected will set the corresponding flag. In addition, in the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, when a low-frequency jackpot result is selected in the jackpot distribution determination process, information on the stop result corresponding to it is stored in the main side RAM 84, and a high-frequency jackpot result is stored. When a big hit result is selected, the information of the stop result corresponding to it is stored in the main side RAM84.

When the result of the suitability determination process is a time saving result (step S2906: YES), the process for time saving results is performed (step S2907). In the processing for the time saving result, the same processing as the steps S811 to S813 of the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed. However, in the time saving distribution determination process, the time saving distribution table 184 shown in FIG. 48(d) is referred to regardless of the type and set value of the hold information for which the game round is to be started. In this case, when the first reservation information is the start target of the game cycle, numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special figure is set in the time reduction distribution table 184 Determine which of the time saving results that are being matched. In addition, when the second reservation information is the start target of the game round, numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure is set in the time reduction distribution table 184 Determine which of the time saving results matches. In addition, in the flag setting process for time saving, in the distribution determination process for time saving, when the first time saving result is selected, the flag corresponding to it is set, and when the second time saving result is selected will set the corresponding flag. In addition, in the stop result setting process for the time saving result, when the first time saving result is selected in the time saving distribution determination process, information on the stop result corresponding to it is stored in the main side RAM 84, and the second When the time saving result is selected, the information of the stop result corresponding to it is stored in the main side RAM84. The information on the form of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a small hit result (step S2908: YES), a distribution determination process for a small hit is executed (step S2909). In the distribution determination process for the small hit, the small hit distribution table 185 shown in FIG. 48(e) is referred to regardless of the type and set value of the reservation information that is the target for starting the game cycle. In this case, when the first reservation information is the start target of the game round, the numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special figure is stored in the small hit distribution table 185 It is determined which of the set small hit results matches. Further, when the second reservation information is the target for starting the game cycle, numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure is set in the small hit distribution table 185. It is determined which one of the small hit results matches.

After that, a small hit flag setting process is executed (step S2910). In the flag setting process for small hits, in the distribution determination process for small hits in step S2909, when the first small hit result is selected, the corresponding flag is set, and the second small hit result is When selected, the corresponding flag is set, and when the third small winning result is selected, the corresponding flag is set.

After that, stop result setting processing for the small hit result is executed (step S2911). In the stop result setting process for the small hit result, the information of the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the second special figure display unit 37b is set to the small hit result stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main side RAM 84 . In this stop result table for the small hit result, the type of stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the small hit result, and in step S2911 , information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of the small winning result specified in step S2909 is stored in the main side RAM84. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result and is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the time saving result. . The pattern stop mode may be set in correspondence with each small win result on a one-to-one basis, or a plurality of types of picture stop modes may be set for at least some of the small win results. .

If the result of the right/failure determination process is the result of being out of line (step S2908: NO), the stop result setting process for the result of being out of line is executed (step S2912). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b that is the execution target of the game round is specified from the stop result table for outlier results stored in advance in the main ROM 83 , and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84 . The information of the pattern mode selected in this case is the information of the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result, the information of the pattern mode selected in the case of the time saving result, and the selected pattern mode information in the case of the small win result. It is different from the information of the mode of the pattern.

After executing one of the stop result setting processes, the variable display period specifying process is executed (step S2913). In the specific processing of the variable display period, if the current state is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, if a jackpot result occurs in the current game round, or the result of the win/fail judgment processing is a wrong result. Numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information to be executed together corresponds to the occurrence of the out reach display, and if the out reach display occurs in this game round, the fluctuation type counter CS at that time By collating the numerical information of with the reach correspondence table in the table group for high frequency support, the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read. In addition, when a small hit result occurs in this game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is collated against the table corresponding to the small hit in the table group for high frequency support. The information of the variable display period of the winning mode is read. In addition, when the big hit result, the out reach display and the small hit result do not occur in the current game round, if the second reservation information is the execution target of the game round, the special figure side is used as the variable display period of the current game round. information for the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) is read. As a result, it is possible to increase the consumption efficiency of game rounds triggered by the second hold information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the first reservation information is the execution target of the game round when the big hit result, the out reach display and the small hit result do not occur in the current game round, the special figure side as the variable display period of the current game round The information for the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) of is read.

If the current status is the low-frequency support mode, if a big hit result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the success/failure determination process is a failure result, it corresponds to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information that is the object of execution. If the numerical information corresponds to the occurrence of the outlier reach display and the outlier reach display occurs in this game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is added to the reach correspondence table in the table group for low frequency support By collating against it, the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read. In addition, if a small hit result occurs in this game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is collated against the table corresponding to the small hit in the table group for low frequency support. Information on the variable display period of the winning mode is read. Also, if a time saving result occurs in this game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is collated against the time saving table in the table group for low frequency support. Read the information of the variable display period. Also, if the big hit result, the out reach display, the small hit result and the time saving result do not occur in the current game round, if the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, the variable display period of the current game round Read the information of the longest period (specifically 10 minutes) on the special figure side. As a result, it is possible to reduce the efficiency of digestion of game times triggered by the second hold information in the low-frequency support mode. On the other hand, in the case where the big hit result, the out reach display, the small hit result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round, if the first reservation information is the execution target of the game round, 3 in the first special figure area 171 If it is a game round started in a situation where more than one piece of the first hold information is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read as the variable display period of the current game round. , If the game round started in a situation where one or two pieces of the first reservation information is stored in the first special figure area 171, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is for low frequency support Information of the variable display period corresponding to the complete failure result is read out by collating against the table corresponding to the complete failure result in the table group.

After executing the variable display period specifying process in step S2913, a variable command and a type command corresponding to the game turn to be started this time are transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 (step S2914). The variation command includes information on the variation display period specified in step S2913, and the game round to be started is either the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. Contains information indicating whether it is supported. Although the variable command does not include information on whether or not to execute the reach display, the variable display period when the reach display occurs is set to be longer than the variable display period when the reach display does not occur. Since it is set, the sound and light side MPU 93 can specify whether or not the ready-to-win display is generated from the information on the variable display period. The type command includes information as to whether or not the game round to be started this time corresponds to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, which type of jackpot result. It contains information indicating whether In addition, the type command includes information on whether or not the game round that is the target of this start corresponds to the time saving result, and if it corresponds to the time saving result, which type of time saving result It contains information indicating whether the In addition, the type command includes information as to whether or not the game turn to be started this time corresponds to the small winning result, and if it corresponds to the small winning result, which type of Information indicating whether it is a small winning result is included.

After that, the variable display of the pattern is started in the display part which is the start target of the game cycle of this time among the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b (step S2915). Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S2916). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "1" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation processing (step S2706).

<Process during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the processing during special figure fluctuation executed in step S2706 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 49) will be described.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is 1 or more and the fluctuation display period of the current game round has not passed, the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b which are the execution targets of the current game round When it is the update timing of the contents, data setting for updating the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is performed. Thereby, the display contents of the pattern in the special figure display portions 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents of the next order.

Aspect at the start of the variation display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a, 37b, and the update aspect of the variation display of the pattern are performed in a constant manner regardless of the result of the judgment result and the distribution judgment result, and the pattern display device It is carried out in a fixed manner regardless of the content of the presentation for the game round in 41 . For example, when a predetermined update timing occurs a plurality of times, the display content of the pattern rotates once, and a display pattern in which the display order is in a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when the variable display period has passed, the display pattern The stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed regardless of the order of display. Thereby, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, when the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the variable display period has elapsed, the final stop command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93. After that, at the start of the game round, step S2905, step S2907, step S2911 and step S2912 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 51) The design of the special figure display units 37a and 37b stored in the main side RAM 84 Read the information of the stop mode. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped in a state where the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game round is displayed in the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. After that, the information of the final stop period (specifically 0.5 sec) is set to the special figure side timer counter. Thereby, the measurement of the final stop period is started. After that, add 1 to the value of the special special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "2" corresponding to the special figure confirmation process (step S2707).

When receiving the final stop command, the sound and light side MPU 93 transmits a corresponding command to the display side MPU 103 . When the display side MPU 103 receives the command, the combination of symbols corresponding to the stop result of the current round of the game is fixedly displayed on the symbol display device 41 over the final stop period.

<Processing during special figure confirmation>
Next, the processing during special figure determination executed in step S2707 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has passed (step S3001: YES), and the game result of this game round is a jackpot result (step S3002: YES ), information corresponding to the opening period (specifically 5 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter (step S3003), and an opening command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 (step S3004). When receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting portion 64 and the speaker portion 65 to perform an effect corresponding to the opening period. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 3 (step S3005). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric start processing (step S2710).

If the game result of this game round is not a jackpot result (step S3002: NO), the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is executed in step S3006, the setting process for the time saving result is executed in step S3007, and step In S3008, subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 is executed. The subtraction processing of the time saving state counter 134 in step S3006 is the subtraction processing of the time saving state counter 134 in the first embodiment ( 30). In addition, the setting process for the time saving result in step S3007 is the setting process for the time saving result in the first embodiment ( 25). In addition, the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 in step S3008 is performed when the processing of step S1501 is not executed due to the absence of the high probability mode, and when the second high-frequency support mode occurs with the ceiling time reduction as a trigger is the same as the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in the first embodiment (FIG. 29), except that the time saving state counter 134 is set to the information of 10 times, which is the first time saving continuation number.

After that, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game round is a small winning result (step S3009). When the game result of the current game round is a small winning result (step S3009: YES), the value of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S3010). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "3" corresponding to the distribution start processing (step S2708). If the game result of the current game round is not a small winning result (step S3009: NO), the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3011). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to special figure variation start processing (step S2705).

<Distribution start processing>
Next, the distribution start processing executed in step S2708 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 49) will be described.

First, a distribution start command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the distribution start command from the main side MPU 82, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 and the sound output of the speaker unit 65 are performed so that an effect indicating that the distribution execution mode is in progress is executed. Execute control. Also, the sound and light side MPU 93 transmits a distribution start command to the display side MPU 103 . When the display-side MPU 103 receives the distribution start command from the sound and light-side MPU 93, the display effect indicating that the distribution execution mode is started is executed, and then the display effect indicating that the distribution execution mode is in progress. Display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed.

After that, "5" is set in the distribution winning counter provided in the main RAM 84. - 特許庁The distribution winning counter provides an opportunity to switch the distribution winning device 161 from the open state to the closed state in relation to the number of game balls entering the distribution winning device 161 which is in the open state in the distribution execution mode. This is a counter for identification by the main MPU 82 . In addition, a set processing of the distribution open period is executed. In the distribution open period setting process, information corresponding to the 2 seconds is stored in the timer counter of the main side RAM 84 so that the period during which the distribution winning device 161 is maintained in the open state is 2 seconds, which is the distribution open period. set. Then, in order to bring the distribution winning device 161 into an open state, it starts outputting a driving signal to the driving section 163 for the distribution entrance. After that, add 1 to the value of the special special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "4" corresponding to the distribution process (step S2709).

<Distribution processing>
Next, the distribution processing executed in step S2709 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 49) will be described.

When a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 of the distribution winning device 161, the V winning flag provided in the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". The V winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that the game ball has been detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 . Also, it transmits a V winning command to the sound and light side MPU 93 . When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the V winning command from the main side MPU 82, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker are performed so that the effect corresponding to the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 is executed. The sound output control of the section 65 is executed. Also, the sound and light side MPU 93 transmits a V winning command to the display side MPU 103 . When the display side MPU 103 receives the V winning command from the sound and light side MPU 93, the display side MPU 103 displays and controls the pattern display device 41 so that a display performance indicating that the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 is executed. .

In the sorting process, it is determined whether or not the sorting open period measured by using the timer counter of the main RAM 84 has passed while the sorting winning device 161 is in the open state. When the distribution open period has not passed, the distribution winning device 161 wins by determining whether or not the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 168 or the V winning detection sensor 169 of the distribution winning device 161. It is determined whether or not has occurred. When the winning to the distribution winning device 161 has occurred, the value of the distribution winning counter of the main side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the distribution winning counter after subtracting 1 is "0".

When the distribution opening period has passed or when the value of the distribution winning counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the closing condition of the distribution winning device 161 is established, so the driving for the distribution entrance By stopping the output of the driving signal to the unit 163, the distribution winning device 161 is brought into a closed state. Thereafter, information corresponding to the waiting period is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 84 in order to wait for the end of the distribution execution mode until there are no more game balls in the distribution winning device 161 . The standby period is set as a period longer than the longest period required until the game ball entering the distribution winning device 161 is detected by either the count detection sensor 168 or the V winning detection sensor 169 . Specifically, it is set to 4 seconds. By waiting for the completion of the distribution execution mode until the standby period elapses in this way, it is assumed that the game ball entering the distribution winning device 161 just before the distribution winning device 161 is closed is temporarily detected as V winning. If detected by the sensor 169, it can be treated as valid.

In the sorting process, it is determined whether or not the standby period measured by the timer counter of the main RAM 84 has passed. When the waiting period has passed, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1". If the V winning flag is set to "1", a process for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, display start processing of the special display portion 191 provided on the game board 24 is executed. In the display start processing, the display of the special display portion 191 is controlled so that the display state of the special display portion 191 becomes a predetermined display state corresponding to execution of the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the same processing as steps S3003 to S3005 in the special figure determination process (FIG. 52) is executed. As a result, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is started, and the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric start processing (step S2710). It should be noted that, even in the processing during special figure determination (Fig. 52), when executing the processing for shifting to the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the special display portion 191 is set to a predetermined display state corresponding to the execution of the opening and closing execution mode. The display of the special display portion 191 may be controlled in advance.

On the other hand, if the V winning flag of the main RAM 84 is not set to "1", the flag clearing process is executed. In the flag clearing process, various flags of the main side RAM 84 used in the current game round are cleared to "0". For example, in the distribution execution mode, any one of the first to third small winning flags of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", but the flag set to "1" is cleared to "0". . After that, the value of the special special electric counter is cleared to "0". Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to special figure variation start processing (step S2705).

Here, when the game ball is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 although the distribution execution mode is entered, the processing for shifting to the support mode is not executed. As a result, when the opening and closing execution mode does not occur after the shift to the distribution execution mode, the support mode corresponding to the type of the small winning result that triggered the distribution execution mode and the duration table of the game round It is possible to prevent the setting from being performed. After the distribution execution mode ends, the support mode before starting the distribution execution mode is maintained.

In the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 in the subtraction process (step S3006) of the time saving state counter 134 when the game round of the small winning result is executed. When the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" while being subtracted, the process for shifting to the low frequency support mode is executed, so the first high frequency support mode or the second Even if a game cycle with a small winning result is started in the high-frequency support mode, the distribution execution mode may be in the low-frequency support mode. In this case, if the open/close execution mode does not occur after the distribution execution mode, a new game cycle is executed in the low-frequency support mode.

Even if it is a game round of a small hit result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 (step S3008), and the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction of 1 is "0". ”, the processing for shifting to the second high-frequency support mode is executed with the ceiling time saving as a trigger, so even if the game round of the small hit result is started in the low-frequency support mode, distribution execution The mode may be the second high frequency support mode. In this case, if the open/close execution mode does not occur after the distribution execution mode, a new game cycle is executed in the second high-frequency support mode.

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric start processing executed in step S2710 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 49) will be described.

On the condition that the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, that the opening period has passed, the setting process of the number of times of opening and closing is executed. In this case, if the current game result is a low-frequency jackpot result or a high-frequency jackpot result, the round counter of the main side RAM 84 is set to "10", and if the current game result is the first small win result, the main side RAM 84 If the current game result is the second small win result, the round counter of the main side RAM 84 is set to "4", and if the current game result is the third small win result. For example, the round counter of the main side RAM 84 is set to "9". The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode by the main side MPU 82 . In addition, the information (specifically 29 seconds) of the opening duration of the round game is set to the special figure side timer counter. Also, "10" is set in the winning counter of the main side RAM 84. - 特許庁The winning counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of winning upper limit numbers in the main MPU 82 . In addition, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened by outputting a drive signal to the driving section 32b for the special electric. After that, add 1 to the value of the special special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special electric open processing (step S2711).

<Processing during opening of the special train>
Next, a description will be given of the special electric open processing executed in step S2711 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 49).

If the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, if the open continuation period has elapsed, the value of the round counter of the main side RAM84 is subtracted by 1 and the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric The special electric prize winning device 32 is closed by stopping the output. Further, when a game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32, the value of the prize winning counter is decremented by 1, and when the value of the prize counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0", the main side RAM 84 The special electric winning device 32 is closed by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter and stopping the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric. Also, if the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1, if the value of the round counter after the subtraction of 1 is 1 or more, after setting the interval period information (specifically 3 seconds) to the special figure side timer counter , Add 1 to the value of the special special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "7" corresponding to the special electric closing process (step S2712). On the other hand, if the value of the round counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the information of the ending period (specifically 5 seconds) is set to the special figure side timer counter, and the ending command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 After that, add 2 to the value of the special special electric counter. Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "8" corresponding to special electric end processing (step S2713). When receiving the ending command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting portion 64 and the speaker portion 65 to perform an effect corresponding to the ending period.

<Treatment during special train closure>
Next, the processing during special electric closing executed in step S2712 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 49) will be described.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the interval period has passed, the information of the open continuation period of the round game (specifically 29 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter . Also, "10" is set in the winning counter of the main side RAM 84. - 特許庁In addition, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened by outputting a drive signal to the driving section 32b for the special electric. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special electric open processing (step S2711).

<Special call end processing>
Next, the special electric end processing executed in step S2713 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, if the ending period has passed (step S3101: YES), the game result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode of this time is the high frequency jackpot result, the second If it is the second small hit result or the third small hit result (step S3102: YES), the first high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3103), and the second small win result of the main side RAM 84 The high frequency flag is cleared to "0" (step S3104). As already explained, the first high frequency flag is a flag for specifying whether the support mode is the first high frequency support mode in the main side MPU 82, and the second high frequency flag is the support mode as already explained. is the second high-frequency support mode. When the first high frequency flag is set to "1" and the second high frequency flag is cleared to "0", the support mode becomes the first high frequency support mode.

Then, the information of "10" which is the 1st time saving continuation frequency is set to the time saving state counter 134 of main side RAM84 (step S3105). The time saving state counter 134 is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode (first high-frequency support mode or second high-frequency support mode) in the main MPU 82 . As a result, the first high-frequency support mode is maintained until ten game rounds, which is the first time-saving continuation number, are completed. In the first high frequency support mode, the special winning device 151 is frequently opened. When a game ball enters the special winning device 151, a small winning result is selected with a high probability, and the distribution execution mode is executed by selecting the small winning result. Then, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 of the distribution winning device 161 in the distribution execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode is generated.

Here, if the result of the success or failure determination process is the first time saving result and the second high frequency support mode is set, the time saving state counter 134 is set to the first time saving continuation number of times "10" information is set. On the other hand, if the result of the success/failure determination process is the second time saving result and the second high frequency support mode is set, the time saving state counter 134 is set to the second time saving continuation that is greater than the first time saving continuation number Information of "15" which is the number of times is set. In other words, when the second high-frequency support mode is set due to the second time-saving result, the number of time-saving continuations is greater than when the first high-frequency support mode is set with the result of the big hit or the small hit as a trigger. number of times is set. Thereby, it becomes possible to heighten the advantage that the result of the success/failure determination process is the second time saving result.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time is the low frequency jackpot result or the first small hit result (step S3102: NO), the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 Both frequency flags are cleared to "0" (step S3106). Also, the time saving state counter 134 of the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3107). As a result, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

If the process of step S3105 or the process of step S3107 has been executed, the state designation command transmission process is executed (step S3108). In the transmission process, a state designation command corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 determined by the processes of steps S3102 to S3107 is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU93. The sound and light side MPU 93 executes a process for causing the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting section 64 and the speaker section 65 to execute an effect corresponding to the content of the received state designation command.

After that, information of "500" corresponding to the number of fixed ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S3109). Then, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3110). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to special figure variation start processing (step S2705).

When the opening/closing execution mode ends as described above, the ceiling counter 131 is set with 500 times of fixed ceiling information. In the present embodiment, as already described, if the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode is entered when the game cycle ends, and if the result of the success/failure determination process is a small hit result. When the distribution execution mode in which the V winning detection sensor 169 detects the game ball is completed, the opening/closing execution mode is entered. In other words, there are a plurality of routes for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode. In this configuration, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings. It is possible to consolidate the processing of setting information on the number of fixed ceilings into one processing. Therefore, it is possible to set the ceiling counter 131 to 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings, when the open/close execution mode occurs, while reducing the program capacity.

FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing power failure monitoring processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82 . The power outage monitoring process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

If a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure has been received from the power failure monitoring board 85 (step S3201: YES), the current state is the opening/closing execution mode, and the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. is the low frequency jackpot result or the first minor hit result (steps S3202 and S3203: YES), the ceiling counter 131 is set with "800" information corresponding to the number of special ceilings (step S3204). This special ceiling count is a number greater than the fixed ceiling count set in the ceiling counter 131 in step S3109 of the special call termination process (FIG. 53). On the other hand, if the current state is not the opening/closing execution mode (step S3202: NO), or even if the current state is the opening/closing execution mode, the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency jackpot result, the second small If it is either the winning result or the third small winning result (step S3202: NO), the process of step S3204 is not executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3202, when a negative determination is made in step S3203, or when the process of step S3204 is executed, the power failure flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3205), and the main RAM 84 is calculated, the calculated checksum is stored in the main RAM 84 (step S3206), and the output port is cleared (step S3207). After that, the process waits until the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped.

In the configuration in which the number of fixed ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 when the opening and closing execution mode ends as in the present embodiment, when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the low frequency jackpot result is started, or the first When the distribution execution mode triggered by the small hit result occurs and the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the distribution execution mode and the opening and closing execution mode is started, the opening and closing execution mode is started. If there is an illegal act of stopping the supply of the operating power in the middle and executing the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the set value In the updating process (step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is cleared as in the first embodiment, while the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game may be restarted in a situation where the number of remaining ceiling times is small while the profit of the opening/closing execution mode is obtained until the supply of the operating power is stopped. In particular, when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the low-frequency jackpot result or the first small hit result is executed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode, so the low-frequency jackpot result or the first small hit result Even if the fraudulent act as described above is performed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the winning result, the fraudulent person does not suffer any disadvantage in relation to the support mode. On the other hand, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the low-frequency big win or the result of the first small win, the ceiling counter 131 before the supply of the operating power is stopped. is set with "800" information corresponding to the number of special ceilings. This makes it possible to neutralize the fraudulent act as described above.

Furthermore, when the fraudulent act as described above is performed, the ceiling counter 131 is set with a special ceiling number, which is a larger number than the fixed ceiling number which is set when the opening/closing execution mode ends. Therefore, it is possible to give a penalty to the fraudulent act as described above.

On the other hand, even in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", and "setting confirmation operation" are executed. is open, in step S114 in the main process (FIG. 13), the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of "500", which is the number of fixed ceilings. As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the low-frequency jackpot or the result of the first small hit, even though the fraudulent act as described above is not performed. , the operation power is not supplied in a situation where the game hall manager does not perform any of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation" and "setting confirmation operation" and the game machine main body 12 is in the open state. By performing the operation to start, it becomes possible to set the ceiling counter 131 to the information of "500", which is the number of fixed ceilings, in the same way as when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

<Seventh Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the mode of selection of the variable display period of game rounds. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing processing during specific determination in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82 .

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has passed (step S3301: YES), and the game result of this game round is a jackpot result (step S3302: YES ), the information corresponding to the opening period (specifically 5 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter (step S3303), and the opening command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 (step S3304). When receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting portion 64 and the speaker portion 65 to perform an effect corresponding to the opening period.

After that, information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S3305). That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is started after the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is completed, the ceiling counter 131 is set with the information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings. If the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set the number of fixed ceiling times during the opening/closing execution mode or when the opening/closing execution mode ends, not when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the operation is performed after the opening/closing execution mode is started. If the power supply is stopped and the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the set value update process ( In the step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is cleared as already explained, whereas the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so that the operation power is supplied. There is a risk that the game may be restarted in a situation where the number of remaining ceilings is small while the profit of the opening/closing execution mode is obtained until the game is stopped. On the other hand, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with the information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings, so that the fraudulent act as described above can be neutralized.

After that, the number-of-games counter provided in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3306). The number-of-games counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not the number of executions of games started after the end of the opening/closing execution mode has reached the reference number of times. The reference number of times is the number of times that the last digit of the number of game times is the reference number. "7" is set as the reference number. Therefore, the number of game times started after the opening/closing execution mode ends is "7", "17", "27", "37", "47", "57", "67", "77", ``87'', ``97'', ``107'', . becomes. After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S3307). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "3" corresponding to the special electric start processing (step S609).

When the game result of the current game round is not a jackpot result (step S3302: NO), subtraction processing of the time saving state counter 134 is executed (step S3308). The content of the processing is the same as the subtraction processing (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 in the first embodiment. Then, the setting process for time saving results is performed (step S3309). The content of the processing is the same as the time saving result setting processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment. Thereafter, subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 is executed (step S3310). The content of this process is the same as the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 in the first embodiment. After that, the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 is executed (step S3311). The content of this process is the same as the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high-probability state counter 133 in the first embodiment. After that, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3312). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to special figure variation start processing (step S606).

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing processing for specifying a variable display period according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. As shown in FIG.

First, 1 is added to the value of the number-of-games counter of the main side RAM 84 (step S3401). In other words, the game number counter is cleared to "0" at step S3306 in the special figure determination processing (FIG. 55) when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and the variable display is performed every time the game round is started regardless of the game state. 1 is added in step S3401 in the period specifying process (FIG. 56). In addition, the value of the game number counter is either when the shift to the second high-frequency support mode occurs with the result of the time saving result or when the shift to the second high-frequency support mode occurs with the time saving result. is not updated, including "0" clear. As a result, the main MPU 82 can use the game number counter to count the number of times the game has been played after the opening/closing execution mode is terminated. It should be noted that when the supply of operating power is started and the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed in the main process (FIG. 13), the game number counter of the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, when the set value updating process (step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119) is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the master side The MPU 82 can count the number of games played after the supply of operating power is started by using the game number counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter of the main RAM 84 is the reference number of times (step S3402). As already explained, the reference number of times is the number of times the last digit of the number of game times is the reference number (specifically, "7"). If affirmative determination is made in step S3402, it is determined whether or not a big hit result has been selected in the win/loss determination processing of this game round (step S3403).

When the jackpot result is selected (step S3403: YES), the jackpot result table is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3404). In the situation where the selection process of the variation display period is executed in step S3411 with reference to the table for the jackpot result, by collating the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time against the table for the jackpot result , information on the variable display period of the reach display mode is read. Although there are a plurality of types of variable display periods of the reach display mode, the variable display period of any of the reach display modes is longer than the variable display period in the case where the reach display does not occur. When the information of the variable display period of the ready-to-win display mode is selected, the ready-to-win display is reliably generated on the pattern display device 41 as in the first embodiment.

When the jackpot result is not selected (step S3403: NO), the reach non-occurrence table is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3405). In a situation where the fluctuation display period selection process is executed in step S3411 with reference to the reach non-occurrence table, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is collated against the reach non-occurrence table. Thus, the information of the variable display period in which the ready-to-win display does not occur is read. Although there are a plurality of types of variable display periods in which the reach display does not occur, any of the plurality of types of variable display periods is shorter than the variable display period when the reach display occurs. When the information of the variable display period in which the ready-to-win display does not occur is selected, the ready-to-win display does not occur reliably on the symbol display device 41 as in the first embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in step S3402, if the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3406: YES), the table group for high probability is transferred from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. (step S3407). The manner in which the variable display period is selected when the high-probability table group is referred to is the same as in the first embodiment. Further, when the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S3406: NO), either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". If set (step S3408: YES), the table group for high frequency support is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3409). The manner in which the variable display period is selected when the table group for high-frequency support is referred to is the same as in the first embodiment. Further, when the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is not set to "1" (step S3406: NO), both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 are set to "1". is not set (step S3408: NO), the table group for low frequency support is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3410). The manner in which the variable display period is selected when the low-frequency support table group is referred to is the same as in the first embodiment.

When the process of step S3404, the process of step S3405, the process of step S3407, the process of step S3409, or the process of step S3410 is executed, the process of selecting the variable display period by referring to the table group read out in any of these processes is executed (step S3411). The contents of the selection processing are as already described. Then, the information of the variable display period selected in step S3411 is set to the special figure side timer counter of the main side RAM84 (step S3412). The update of the numerical value information set in the special figure side timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

According to the above configuration, in a game cycle in which the number of executions after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the reference number, the ready-to-win display is not generated on the symbol display device 41 unless a big win results. In this case, when the ready-to-win display occurs in the standard number of game rounds, the occurrence of the big win result is determined. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 41 in relation to the number of times the game round is executed.

The number-of-games counter for measuring the reference number of times is cleared to "0" when the open/close execution mode is executed, and when the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result occurs and when the ceiling time-saving is triggered. It is not cleared to "0" in any case where the second high frequency support mode occurs. As a result, even if the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result or the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs after the opening and closing execution mode ends, after the opening and closing execution mode ends It is possible to make the ready-to-win display occur only when a big win results in a game round in which the number of times of execution is the reference number. Therefore, the game turn that is the reference number of times becomes easy for the player to understand.

It should be noted that the pattern display device 41 may display the number of times the game has been executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the display of the number of execution times of the game round on the pattern display device 41 is displayed when the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result occurs, and when the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs It should not be cleared to "0" in either case. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the game round that is the reference number of times.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 executed by the main side MPU 82 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing subtraction processing of the time saving state counter 134 in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82 .

First, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3501). When "1" is set to the high probability flag (step S3501: YES), the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is terminated without executing the processes after step S3502. In the high-probability state, the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, but since the high-probability state counter 133 is used to identify the trigger for ending the high-probability state, the high-probability flag is set to "1". is set, the process for subtracting the value of the time saving state counter 134 is not executed.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" and the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3502: YES), that is, the low probability mode and the first high probability mode If the frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main RAM84 is subtracted by 1 (step S3503), and if the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3504: YES) , the first high frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3505). As a result, the first high-frequency support mode ends and the low-frequency support mode is entered. That is, the time saving state ends and the normal game state is entered.

After that, transmission processing of the state designation command is executed (step S3506). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has ended is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . By receiving the state designation command, the sound and light side MPU 93 terminates the execution of the effect corresponding to the time saving state in the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65, and performs the effect corresponding to the normal game state. let it start.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" and the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3507: YES), that is, the low probability mode and the second high probability mode If the frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main side RAM84 is subtracted by 1 (step S3508), if the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3509: YES) , the second high frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3510). As a result, the second high-frequency support mode ends and the low-frequency support mode is entered. That is, the time saving state ends and the normal game state is entered. In addition, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S3511). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has ended is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . By receiving the state designation command, the sound and light side MPU 93 terminates the execution of the effect corresponding to the time saving state in the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65, and performs the effect corresponding to the normal game state. let it start.

After that, the setting processing of the variable selection state counter 132 is executed (step S3512). In this case, the change selection state counter 132 of the main side RAM 84 is set with information of 50 times, which is the predetermined switching reference number. Even in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, if one game round is completed in a situation where the winning/failure lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the variable selection state counter 132 is changed at the end of the game round. The value is decremented by 1. Then, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented by 1 in a situation where the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more, and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes "0", the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" in the reach high frequency state flag. In the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, when the reach high-frequency state flag is set to "1", the variable display period identification process (FIG. 21) is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. At , the variable display period of game times is selected with reference to the table group for reach high frequency.

In other words, after either the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result or the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving is completed, if the game times of the predetermined switching reference number are digested in the low-probability mode, low-frequency support If it is the mode, it will be in a reach high frequency state in which a table group for reach high frequency is referred to. Then, in the reach high frequency state, as in the first embodiment, the reach display is selected when the result is out of the low probability mode and low frequency support mode and not in the high reach frequency state. In addition, the variable display period when the reach display is selected tends to be longer in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode than in the high reach frequency state. Therefore, after either the time saving state triggered by the time saving result or the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving is completed, if the game times of the predetermined switching reference number are digested, the reach high frequency state occurs. It is possible to raise the degree of attention to the game.

In the time-saving state, the efficiency of digesting game rounds is high, whereas in the reach-high frequency state, the efficiency of digesting game rounds is low. In this case, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of digestion of game rounds from becoming excessively high by causing the reach high frequency state to occur after the time saving state ends.

When the time saving state ends, the reach high frequency state does not occur immediately, but the reach high frequency state occurs when the game times of the predetermined switching reference number of times are completed after the time saving state ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent a rapid change from a state in which the digestion efficiency of game rounds is high to a state in which it is low. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above while not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration when a time saving result or ceiling time saving occurs in the time saving state is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing setting processing for time saving results in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82 .

If the game result of the current game round is a time saving result (step S3601: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3602). And when "1" is set to the high probability flag (step S3602: YES), the setting process for this time saving result is complete|finished, without performing the process after step S3603. In other words, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the success or failure determination process of the game round executed in the high probability mode, the time saving result is triggered by the second high frequency support The time saving result is invalidated without setting the mode.

Here, setting processing for the time saving result (FIG. 58) is executed before the subtraction processing (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133 as already explained in the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 22). As a result, in the last game cycle in the high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode, the value of the high-probability state counter 133 is decremented by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high-probability state counter 133. Before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0" by the value of the high probability state counter 133 becoming "0", the setting process for the time saving result (Fig. 58) is executed. Become. And, when the setting process for the time saving result (Fig. 58) is executed at the timing, the high probability flag is still set to "1", so the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is not performed. Therefore, in the game round in which the success/failure determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time saving result. In addition, such an effect during processing (FIG. 22) in the processing order of executing the setting process for time saving results (FIG. 58) before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24) It can be realized by setting.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S3602: NO), it is determined whether or not the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3603). That is, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. If the support mode is not the first high-frequency support mode (step S3603: NO), the second high-frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3604), and the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. If there is (step S3603: YES), the process of step S3604 is not executed. Thereby, when the time saving result in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode is maintained, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode are maintained, and the time saving result in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode When it becomes, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained, and when the time saving result is obtained in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, it becomes the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode.

When affirmative determination is made in step S3603 or when the process of step S3604 is performed, it is determined whether this time saving result is the 1st time saving result (step S3605). If this time saving result is the first time saving result (step S3605: YES), the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main side RAM 84 determines whether it is "100" or more corresponding to the first time saving continuation number (Step S3606). When the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time saving continuation number (step S3606: NO), the information of "100" corresponding to the first time saving continuation number is set to the time saving state counter 134 (step S3607) .

After that, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S3608). In the transmission process, a state specifying command indicating that the time saving state has been started or that the first time saving continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93.

When the processing of step S3608 is executed after the processing of step S3607 is executed in a situation where the current game state is not the time saving state, the state designation command indicates that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 perform the effect indicating that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number starts Execute the process to make In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, the combination of the first time-saving generating symbols (“1, 2, 3”) is stopped and displayed. After these stop results are stopped and displayed, the symbol display device 41 displays an image indicating that the time saving state will occur and an image indicating the first number of times of continuing time saving. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game rounds are displayed in the reduced area, by the reduction, The display of the image indicating that the time saving state occurs in the secured area and the image indicating the first time saving continuation number of times is continued. The display of the image ends when one round of the game ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When the process of step S3608 is executed after the process of step S3607 is executed in the situation where the current game state is the time saving state, it indicates that the first time saving continuation number of times has been reset to the state designation command Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the design display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 perform the effect indicating that the first time saving continuous number of times has been reset. Execute the process to make In this case, in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, a combination of the first time-saving patterns (“1, 2, 3”), and a combination of the second time-saving patterns (“3 4.1”) and a combination of non-reach-out symbols, which is a combination of symbols other than the combination of out-reach-out symbols, is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the confirmation display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that the number of continuous time-savings in the time-saving state has been reset and an image showing the first number of continuous time-savings are displayed. Is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game turn are displayed in the reduced area, In the secured area, the display of the image indicating that the number of times of continuous time saving in the time saving state has been reset and the image indicating the reset first number of continuous time saving is continued. The display of the image ends when one round of the game ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

If the time saving result of this time is the second time saving result (step S3605: NO), regardless of the current value of the time saving state counter 134, the time saving state counter 134 corresponding to the second time saving continuation number of times "150" information set (step S3609). After that, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S3610). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has been started or that the second time saving continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 .

When the process of step S3610 is executed after the process of step S3609 is executed in a situation where the current game state is not the time saving state, the state designation command indicates that the time saving state of the second time saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 perform an effect indicating that the time saving state of the second time saving continuation number starts Execute the process to make In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, the combination of the second time-saving generating symbols (“3, 4, 1”) is stop-displayed. After these stop results are stopped and displayed, the pattern display device 41 displays an image indicating that the time saving state will occur and an image indicating the second time saving continuation number of times. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game rounds are displayed in the reduced area, by the reduction, The image indicating that the time saving state occurs in the secured area and the image indicating the second time saving continuation number of times are continued to be displayed. The display of the image ends when one round of the game ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When the process of step S3610 is executed after the process of step S3609 is executed in the situation where the current game state is the time saving state, it indicates that the second time saving continuation number of times has been reset to the state designation command. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 perform the effect indicating that the second time saving continuation number of times has been reset. Execute the process to make In this case, in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, a combination of the first time-saving patterns (“1, 2, 3”), and a combination of the second time-saving patterns (“3 4.1”) and a combination of non-reach-out symbols, which is a combination of symbols other than the combination of out-reach-reach symbols, is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the confirmation display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that the number of continuous time reductions in the time reduction state has been reset and an image showing the second number of continuous time reductions are displayed. Is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game turn are displayed in the reduced area, In the secured area, the display of the image indicating that the number of times of continuous time saving in the time saving state has been reset and the image indicating the second number of times of continuing time saving that has been reset is continued. The display of the image ends when one round of the game ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3701). Then, if the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S3701: YES), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 ends without executing the processes after step S3702. In other words, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented in the game cycle executed in the high probability mode, and the ceiling counter 131 value is not decremented, thereby causing a ceiling time reduction. Nor.

Here, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 59) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24) as already explained in the process during special figure determination (FIG. 22). As a result, in the last game cycle in the high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode, the value of the high-probability state counter 133 is decremented by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high-probability state counter 133. Before the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0" and the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0", the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 59) is executed. Become. Then, when the subtraction process (FIG. 59) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed at this timing, since the high probability flag is still set to "1", the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being subtracted in the game round in which the winning/losing determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high-probability mode. In addition, such an effect of the processing order of executing the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 59) before the subtraction processing of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24) in the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 22) It can be realized by setting.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S3701: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S3702). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S3702: NO), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S3703. As in the first embodiment, the process of setting information in the ceiling counter 131 is performed in a state where none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation" and "setting confirmation operation" are executed and the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state, step S114 when the supply of operating power is started, step S122 when an information error occurs in the main side RAM 84 when the supply of operating power is started, and opening/closing execution This is only step S1005 when the mode is started, and after the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" unless any of the above processes are executed. . On the other hand, the ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented by 1 in a situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" as described above (step S3702: NO), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S3703. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", and a time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs, and the game times of the number of time saving continuations are digested without a big hit result occurring in the time saving state. When the time saving state ends and the normal game state is entered, the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving does not occur even if the game rounds in which no big winning results occur are repeated thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive occurrence of the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving.

If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S3702: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the ceiling counter 131 (step S3703), and whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction of 1 is "0". (step S3704). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S3704: YES), regardless of whether the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the second high frequency flag is set to " 1” is set (step S3705). As a result, when the ceiling time is shortened in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained, and the ceiling time is shortened in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In this case, the low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode are selected. In addition, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode occur after the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result is completed, and when the game times of 100 times, which is the first time saving continuous number, are digested Since the first high-frequency support mode ends, the ceiling time reduction that occurs when 500 games, which is the fixed ceiling number of times, is completed in the low probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the first high-frequency support mode. does not occur in the situation where

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main side RAM 84 is equal to or greater than "100" corresponding to the first time saving continuation number (step S3706). If the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time saving continuation number (step S3706: NO), set the information of "100" corresponding to the first time saving continuation number to the time saving state counter 134 (step S3707) .

After that, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S3708). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has been started or that the first time saving continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93.

When the processing of step S3708 is executed after the processing of step S3707 is executed in a situation where the current game state is not the time saving state, the state designation command indicates that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 perform the effect indicating that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number starts Execute the process to make Since the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs in a game cycle in which neither the jackpot result nor the time-saving result occurs, the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 in the pattern display device 41 are a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the first time-saving. A combination of outlier patterns that is a combination of patterns other than the combination of generated patterns (“1, 2, 3”) and the combination of second time-saving patterns (“3, 4, 1”) (including the combination of outlier reach patterns) appears stopped. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the confirmation display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs and an image showing the first number of continuous time saving are displayed. . Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game rounds are displayed in the reduced area, by the reduction, The display of the image indicating that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs and the image indicating the first time saving continuation number of times is continued in the secured area. The display of the image ends when one round of the game ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When the processing of step S3708 is executed after the processing of step S3707 is executed in the situation where the current game state is the time saving state, it indicates that the reset of the first time saving continuation number of times has been performed in the state designation command Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the design display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 perform the effect indicating that the first time saving continuous number of times has been reset. Execute the process to make Since the reset of the first time-saving continuous number triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs in a game cycle in which neither the jackpot result nor the time-saving result occurs, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in the pattern display device 41 are the patterns corresponding to the jackpot results. A combination of symbols other than the combination of the first time-saving pattern (“1/2/3”) and the combination of the second time-saving pattern (“3/4/1”). (including combinations of symbols) are stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the confirmation display over the final stop period is completed, an image indicating that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs and that the first time saving continuation number has been reset The image shown is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game rounds are displayed in the reduced area, by the reduction, The display of the image indicating that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs in the secured area and the image indicating that the first time saving continuation number has been reset is continued. The display of the image ends when one round of the game ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S3706 or when the process of step S3708 is executed, the reach high frequency state flag of the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3709). Thereby, when the ceiling time saving occurs, the reach high frequency state ends regardless of whether or not the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time saving is performed.

Here, in the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 22), the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 59) is executed after the setting processing for the time saving result (FIG. 58) is executed, and the subtraction of the ceiling counter 131 In the process (FIG. 59), even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 is "0", if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is "100" or more, the processing of steps S3707 and S3708 is not executed. By doing so, it becomes possible not to reset the number of continuation times of the first time saving triggered by the ceiling time saving in the game times with the first time saving result or the second time saving result. As a result, resetting of the number of continuations of time saving triggered by the result of time saving and resetting of the number of continuations of time saving triggered by the ceiling time saving can be prevented from being performed redundantly. In particular, if the second time saving continuation number triggered by the second time saving result is reset and the first time saving continuation number triggered by the ceiling time saving is reset, the time saving continuation number will decrease. By adopting the above configuration, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

Next, the subsequent game state when the time saving result or the ceiling time saving occurs in the time saving state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 60(a) shows the period in the open/close execution mode, FIG. 60(b) shows the period in which the first high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1", and FIG. 60(d) shows the state of the time saving state counter 134, and FIG. 60(e) shows the timing at which the first time saving result occurs , FIG. 60(f) shows the timing when the second time saving result occurs, and FIG. 60(g) shows the timing when the ceiling time saving occurs.

First, the case where the second time saving result occurs in the middle of the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 60(e) at the timing of t1, the result of the success/failure determination process becomes the first time-saving result, and when the game round in which the success/failure determination process is executed ends, it is shown in FIG. 60(c). As shown in FIG. 60(d), "1" is set to the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84, and "100" information corresponding to the first time saving continuation number is set to the time saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60(d). be. Thereby, it will be in the time saving state which is low probability mode and the 2nd high frequency support mode, and will be in the state to which the 1st time saving continuation frequency|count was set as the remaining continuation frequency|count of the said time saving state. And the value of the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted as shown in FIG.60(d) by repeatedly performing the game round which does not become the shift opportunity to opening-and-closing execution mode.

After that, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more and the result of the success or failure determination process is the second time saving result as shown in FIG. 60 (f) at the timing of t2 which is the second high frequency support mode Information of "150" corresponding to the second time saving continuation number is set to the time saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. As a result, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state increases from a number less than the first number of continuations of time saving to the second number of continuations of time saving in the middle of the time saving state.

Next, the case where the profit due to the occurrence of the ceiling time saving is not given although the ceiling time saving occurs in the middle of the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 60(f) at the timing of t3, the result of the success/failure determination process becomes the second time saving result, and when the game round in which the success/failure determination process is executed ends, it is shown in FIG. 60(c) As shown in FIG. 60(d), "1" is set to the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84, and "150" information corresponding to the second number of continuous time saving is set to the time saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60(d). be. Thereby, it will be in the time saving state which is low probability mode and the 2nd high frequency support mode, and will be in the state to which the 2nd time saving continuation frequency|count was set as the remaining continuation frequency|count of the said time saving state. And the value of the time saving state counter 134 is reduced as shown in FIG.

After that, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more, and at the timing of t4 which is the second high frequency support mode, the ceiling time saving occurs as shown in FIG. 60(g). In this case, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is a value larger than the first time saving continuation frequency set with the occurrence of the ceiling time saving as a trigger. Therefore, as shown in FIG.60(d), the value of the time saving state counter 134 is maintained as it is. In this way, even if the ceiling time saving occurs in the middle of the time saving state, the remaining number of continuous times in the time saving state at that time is set as a trigger for the occurrence of the ceiling time saving If the value is greater than the first time saving continuation number , the occurrence of ceiling time reduction is invalidated.

Next, the case where ceiling time saving occurs in the middle of the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, and the profit due to the occurrence of the ceiling time saving is given will be described.

As shown in FIG. 60(e) at the timing of t5, the result of the success/failure determination process becomes the first time saving result, and when the game round in which the success/failure determination process is executed ends, the result is shown in FIG. 60(c). As shown in FIG. 60(d), "1" is set to the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84, and "100" information corresponding to the first time saving continuation number is set to the time saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60(d). be. Thereby, it will be in the time saving state which is low probability mode and the 2nd high frequency support mode, and will be in the state to which the 1st time saving continuation frequency|count was set as the remaining continuation frequency|count of the said time saving state. And the value of the time saving state counter 134 is reduced as shown in FIG.

After that, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more, and at the timing of t6 which is the second high frequency support mode, the ceiling time saving occurs as shown in FIG. 60(g). In this case, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is a value smaller than the first time saving continuation frequency set with the occurrence of the ceiling time saving as a trigger. Therefore, the information of "100" corresponding to the first time saving continuation number is set to the time saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60(d) at the timing of t6 when the ceiling time saving occurs. Thereby, in the middle of the time saving state, the remaining number of times of continuation of the time saving state increases from the number of times less than the first number of times of continuing time saving to the first number of times of continuing time saving.

Next, the case where a 1st time saving result generate|occur|produces in the middle of low probability mode and 1st high frequency support mode is demonstrated.

At the timing of t7, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends as shown in FIG. 1" is set, and as shown in FIG. 60(d), information of "100" corresponding to the first number of continuations of time saving is set to the time saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. Thereby, it will be in the time saving state which is low probability mode and 1st high frequency support mode, and will be in the state to which the 1st time saving continuation frequency|count was set as the remaining continuation frequency|count of the said time saving state. And the value of the time saving state counter 134 is reduced as shown in FIG.

After that, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more and at the timing of t8 which is the first high frequency support mode, the result of the success/failure determination process becomes the first time saving result as shown in FIG. 60(e). In this case, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is a value smaller than the first time saving continuation frequency set with the occurrence of the first time saving result as a trigger. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60(d), the time saving state counter 134 shows "100" information corresponding to the first time saving continuation number when the game round in which the result of the success/failure determination process is the first time saving result ends. set. Thereby, in the middle of the time saving state, the remaining number of times of continuation of the time saving state increases from the number of times less than the first number of times of continuing time saving to the first number of times of continuing time saving. In addition, the support mode in the time-saving state is not changed to the second high-frequency support mode, but the first high-frequency support mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second high-frequency support mode, is maintained. Triggered by the occurrence of the time saving result, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state, which is the first high-frequency support mode, is set to the first time saving continuation number of times.

Next, the case where a 2nd time saving result generate|occur|produces in the middle of low probability mode and 1st high frequency support mode is demonstrated.

At the timing of t9, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends as shown in FIG. 1" is set, and as shown in FIG. 60(d), information of "100" corresponding to the first number of continuations of time saving is set to the time saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. Thereby, it will be in the time saving state which is low probability mode and 1st high frequency support mode, and will be in the state to which the 1st time saving continuation frequency|count was set as the remaining continuation frequency|count of the said time saving state. And the value of the time saving state counter 134 is reduced as shown in FIG.

After that, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more, and at the timing of t10 which is the first high frequency support mode, the result of the success/failure determination process becomes the second time saving result as shown in FIG. 60(f). The second time-saving continuation number set with the occurrence of the second time-saving result as a trigger is a number greater than the first time-saving continuation number set when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends. be. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60(d), the time saving state counter 134 shows "150" information corresponding to the second time saving continuation number when the game round in which the result of the success/failure determination process is the second time saving result ends. set. As a result, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state increases from a number less than the first number of continuations of time saving to the second number of continuations of time saving in the middle of the time saving state. In addition, the support mode in the time-saving state is not changed to the second high-frequency support mode, but the first high-frequency support mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second high-frequency support mode, is maintained. Triggered by the occurrence of the time saving result, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state, which is the first high-frequency support mode, is set to the second time saving continuation number of times.

By being the said structure, when the time saving result occurs in low probability mode and low frequency support mode, it transfers to the time saving state of the time saving continuation frequency corresponding to the kind of the time saving result concerned. Thereby, based on the result of the propriety determination process in low probability mode and low frequency support mode, it becomes possible to produce the situation which a transition to a time saving state generate|occur|produces, without opening-closing execution mode.

When the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is reset to 100 times, which is the first time saving continuation number Low probability mode and first high Frequency support mode continues. Also, when the second time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is set to 150 times, which is the second time saving continuation number Low probability mode and the first High frequency support mode continues. Thereby, when the time saving result occurs in the first high-frequency support mode, while continuing the first high-frequency support mode in which the second operation port 34 is more likely to be in an open state than the second high-frequency support mode, until then A situation occurs in which the number of remaining continuations of the time saving state increases. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of the time saving result occurring in the time saving state.

If the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 100 times or more, which is the first time saving continuation number when the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, by the occurrence of this first time saving result The low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode continue without any new setting relating to the time-saving state. Also, if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than 100 times, which is the first time saving continuation number when the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 The low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode continue in a state of being set to 100 times, which is the first time-saving continuation number. Also, when the second time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is set to 150 times, which is the second time saving continuation number Low probability mode and the second High frequency support mode continues. As a result, when a time saving result occurs in the second high-frequency support mode, a situation can occur in which the number of times the remaining time-saving state continues increases more than before while continuing the second high-frequency support mode. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of the time saving result occurring in the time saving state.

If a time-saving result occurs in the time-saving state, the larger number of the remaining number of times of the current time-saving state and the number of times of time-saving continuation that can be set by the newly generated time-saving result number of continuations. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of the occurrence of the time saving result in the time saving state.

In the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, when the ceiling time-saving occurs, it shifts to the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the transition to the time saving state occurs without going through the opening and closing execution mode based on the completion of the ceiling number of games in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

When the ceiling time saving occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 100 times or more, which is the first time saving continuation number, the new time saving state due to the occurrence of this ceiling time saving The low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode continue without any setting. Also, if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than 100 times, which is the first time saving continuation number when the ceiling time saving occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is the first The low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode continue in a state of being set to 100 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations. In other words, if the ceiling time saving occurs in the time saving state, the remaining number of times of the current time saving state and the number of time saving continuations that can be set due to the newly occurring ceiling time saving, whichever is greater Remaining number of continuations. As a result, if the ceiling time saving occurs in the second high-frequency support mode, a situation can occur in which the number of remaining time saving states continues to increase, so it is possible that the ceiling time saving will occur in the time saving state. It is possible to increase the advantage.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the game area PA provided on the game board 24 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 24 for explaining the configuration of the game area PA in this embodiment.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The guide rail is configured as A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

As in the first embodiment, the game board 24 includes a general prize winning port 31, a special electric prize winning device 32, a first operation port 33, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, and a general figure unit 38. is provided. Also, a special winning device 151 is provided in place of the second operating port 34 in the first embodiment. The configuration of the special winning device 151 is the same as that of the sixth embodiment.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters any one of the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the special winning device 151, a predetermined number of A game ball is put out. Specifically, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, 15 balls are paid out. game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the first operating port 33, three game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the special winning device 151, A payout of one game ball is executed. The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and the number of prize balls of the first operation port 33 and the special winning device 151 may be the same.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, as well as various members such as windmills.

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 36 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area in which the game balls shot to the game area PA can flow down is defined. Specifically, an upper area PA1, which is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA, and a lower area continuous with the upper area PA1 and higher than the variable display unit 36. A left area PA2 which is an area on the left, a right area PA3 which is an area continuous below the upper area PA1 and to the right of the variable display unit 36, and a left area PA2 and a right area PA3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA4 which is an area below the variable display unit 36 continuously below it.

When the player operates the shooting operation device 28 with the amount of rotation in the first range which is less than the reference amount of rotation as the first shooting operation, the game ball is ejected to the left of the center position in the horizontal direction in the upper area PA1. flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1→left area PA2→lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the shooting operation device 28 with a rotation amount in a second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as a second shooting operation, the upper area PA1 is positioned to the right of the lateral center position. A game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1→right area PA3→lower area PA4. In other words, the player can adjust the rotation operation amount of the shooting operation device 28 so that the game ball can flow down the left side area PA2 of the left side area PA2 and the right side area PA3. A game can be played so that a game ball flows down PA3. Incidentally, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated with the maximum amount of rotation, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper area PA1→right area PA3→lower area PA4.

The first operation port 33 is installed in the lower area PA4. The first operating port 33 is open upward, and a member such as an opening/closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the first operating port 33 is not provided. Then, in a situation where the game balls are shot in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operation opening 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operation port 33 is always capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area PA toward the first operation port 33 . In addition, the first operating port 33 is arranged directly below the stage portion 36b formed in the variable display unit 36, and a game ball flowing into the stage portion 36b through the guide passage formed in the variable display unit 36 A game ball ejected outside the variable display unit 36 from the lateral center of the stage portion 36b easily enters the first operation opening 33. As shown in FIG.

As described above, the first operating port 33 is provided in the lower area PA4, but on the upstream side of the first operating port 33 toward the right side area PA3, the game ball that has flowed down the right side area PA3 is the first A control nail 24c is provided so as to make it impossible to reach the 1 operation port 33. As shown in FIG. Further, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided for the left side area PA2 and not provided for the right side area PA3. With these configurations, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, it is possible to win the first operation opening 33, but the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. When the shooting operation device 28 is operated so as to do so, winning to the first operation port 33 is disabled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control nail 24c is not provided, or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided to the right side area PA3, so that the game ball can pass through the right side area PA3. The configuration may be such that even when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so as to flow down, the winning to the first operation opening 33 is possible.

The special winning device 151 is installed in the right area PA3. That is, the special winning device 151 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the shooting operation device makes the game ball flow down the right side area PA3. 28 is operated, winning is possible.

A through gate 35 is provided above the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. That is, the through gate 35 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Winning is possible when is operated. The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. A special winning device 151 is provided at a position vertically below the through gate 35, and a special electric winning device 32 is provided downstream of the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. Therefore, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the special prize winning device 151 or the special electric prize winning device 32 .

The right side area PA3 in which the special winning device 151 and the through gate 35 are collectively arranged is defined by a side wall 36f of the variable display unit 36 which bulges forward from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. , and the right side is defined by a regulation wall provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 . The right side area PA3 is set to have a lateral dimension narrower than that of the lower side area PA4, and the lateral dimension is such that it is impossible to arrange the game ball entry devices in the lateral direction at the same height position. It has become. As a result, it is possible to limit the flow path of the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 to a predetermined range, and the game ball is likely to enter the special prize winning device 151 and the through gate 35 .

The arrangement mode of the plurality of nails 24b on the upstream side of the through gate 35 in the right area PA3 is set so as to guide the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to the through gate 35.例文帳に追加As a result, a game ball flowing down the right area PA3 can easily enter the through gate 35, and the ball can easily enter the special winning device 151 as the ball easily enters the through gate 35.例文帳に追加

By switching the induction unit 152 of the special winning device 151 from the non-guiding state to the guiding state based on the winning of the through gate 35, the special winning device 151 changes from the closed state to the open state. Concretely, with winning a prize to thru gate 35 as a trigger, general figure propriety determination processing is performed, and general figure unit 38 provided in the lower left corner, which is an area through which the game ball does not pass, in game area PA Variation display of the pattern is performed in the figure display section 38a. Then, when the result of the general pattern correctness determination process is the electric role open winning and the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed and the variable display of the general pattern display unit 38a is ended, the state is shifted to the general electric open state. In the general electric open state, the induction unit 152 is in the induction state in a predetermined manner, so that the special winning device 151 is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

Even in the present embodiment, a low-frequency support mode, a first high-frequency support mode, and a second high-frequency support mode are set as support modes. The probability of open winning, the selection mode of the duration of the variable display times in the normal diagram display section 38a, and the selection mode of the stop result in the normal diagram display section 38a are the same as in the first embodiment. In addition, the manner in which the special prize winning device 151 is in the open state when the power supply is open in each support mode (open duration, number of times of opening, upper limit number of winning prizes, interval period) is different from each other in the first embodiment. It is the same as the mode (open duration, number of times of opening, upper limit winning number, interval period) in which the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 is in the open state when the general electrical is opened in the support mode.

In the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the special prize-winning device 151 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation port 33 is higher than in the special prize-winning device 151, but in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the first operation port The probability of winning to the special winning device 151 is higher than 33. When a prize is awarded to the special prize winning device 151, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. A game can be played while trying not to reduce it.

Based on the fact that the winning to the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151 has occurred, the win/loss determination process is performed. Then, the result of the propriety determination process is clearly shown through the display effect in the special figure unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. The special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display portion 37a and a second special figure display portion 37b as in the first embodiment. In the first special figure display unit 37a, the variable display of the pattern is performed by performing the winning judgment processing on the first reservation information acquired by the occurrence of the winning to the first operation port 33. Then, a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the success/failure determination process is displayed. In this case, as in the first embodiment as the determination result of the success/failure determination process, there are a jackpot result, a time saving result and an off result, but the content of the stop result of the first special figure display unit 37a is a jackpot result, It is different in each of the time saving result and the off result. The display of the stop result in the first special figure display portion 37a is maintained until the next game round is started and the first special figure display portion 37a starts the variable display of a new pattern. In addition, in the second special figure display unit 37b, the variable display of the pattern is performed by performing the winning judgment processing on the second reservation information acquired by the occurrence of the winning to the special winning device 151. Then, a result corresponding to the determination result of the success/failure determination process is displayed. In this case, as in the first embodiment as the determination result of the success or failure determination process, there are a jackpot result, a time saving result and an off result, but the content of the stop result of the second special figure display unit 37b is a jackpot result, It is different in each of the time saving result and the off result. The display of the stop result in the second special figure display portion 37b is maintained until the next game cycle is started and the second special figure display portion 37b starts the variable display of a new pattern.

In the special figure unit 37, the 1st special figure reservation display part 37c is provided in the position adjacent to the 1st special figure display part 37a. The number of game balls winning the first operation port 33 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the first special figure reservation display section 37c. Further, in the special figure unit 37, a second special figure reservation display section 37d is provided at a position adjacent to the second special figure display section 37b. The number of winning game balls in the special winning device 151 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display section 37d.

The display ranges of the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b are narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. In addition, the entire display range of the first special figure display portion 37a, the second special figure display portion 37b, the first special figure reservation display portion 37c and the second special figure reservation display portion 37d is also displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 41. It has a narrower range than As a result, the player's attention to the symbol display device 41 is increased more than the first special figure display unit 37a, the second special figure display unit 37b, the first special figure reservation display unit 37c, and the second special figure reservation display unit 37d. can be increased.

When the first special figure display portion 37a or the second special figure display portion 37b performs the variable display of the pattern, that is, when the game round is being executed, the symbol display device 41 performs the display effect accordingly. When the game-turn effect is executed in the symbol display device 41, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the first reservation display area 42a, the second reservation display area 42b and the state suggesting area 43 are displayed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. set. In addition, the symbol display device 41 performs not only the display effect for the game cycle, but also the display effect during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts after the result of a big hit, and the like.

When a big winning result is selected in the win/fail judgment processing executed based on the winning to the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151, the opening/closing execution mode is shifted to after the game round corresponding to the big winning result is finished. In the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to win a prize for the special electric prize winning device 32 . The special electric winning device 32 is provided at a position below the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. That is, the special electric prize winning device 32 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the shooting operation device 32 makes the game ball flow down the right area PA3. 28 is operated, winning is possible.

The special electric prize winning device 32 includes a large prize winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open/close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and when a big hit result is selected in the winning/failure determination process, the opening/closing door 32a is switched to an open state in which game balls can win. ing. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state. Further, the execution contents of the opening/closing execution mode are the same as those of the first embodiment.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 82 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a winning random number counter C1, a type random number counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI, a fluctuation type counter CS, and a general electrical random number counter C4 are provided. The contents of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, the fluctuation type counter CS and the general electrical random number counter C4 and the contents of the processing using these counters C1 to C4, CINI, CS It is the same as the first embodiment. Also, when a prize is won to the through gate 35, the numerical information of the general electric random number counter C4 is stored in the general pattern reservation area 84c, and the configuration of the general pattern reservation area 84c is the same as in the first embodiment. is.

Each numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first special feature of the main side RAM 84 in the same manner as in the first embodiment when the winning to the first operation opening 33 occurs. It is stored in the drawing reservation area 111 . Each of the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 indicates that the winning to the second operation port 34 occurs in the first embodiment when the winning to the special winning device 151 occurs. It is stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 of the main side RAM 84 in the same way as when it is done.

The execution area 192 for the special figure is provided with an execution area 192a for the first special figure and an execution area 192b for the second special figure. The execution area 192a for the first special figure is an area in which the first pending information to be subjected to the success/failure determination process, the distribution determination process, etc. is stored when the variable display is started in the first special figure display unit 37a. be. The execution area 192b for the second special figure is an area where the second pending information to be subjected to the success/failure determination process, the distribution determination process, etc. is stored when the variable display is started in the second special figure display unit 37b. be. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the first special figure display portion 37a, the first reservation information stored in the first area 111a of the first special figure reservation area 111 is used for the first special figure. is shifted to area 192a. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the second special figure display unit 37b, the second reservation information stored in the first area 112a of the second special figure reservation area 112 is displayed in the execution area 192b for the second special figure. shifted.

In the present embodiment, at least part of the game cycle period in the first special figure display portion 37a and at least part of the game cycle period in the second special figure display portion 37b are configured to overlap. That is, even while the game round is being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, the game round can be started in the second special figure display unit 37b, and the game round is executed in the second special figure display unit 37b. A game round in the first special figure display portion 37a can be started even while the game is being played.

When the propriety determination process is executed for the first reservation information, as in the first embodiment, if the low probability mode first propriety table 121 at the time of low probability is referred, even if the high probability mode For example, the success/failure table 123 for high probability is referred to. Further, when the validity determination process is executed with respect to the second reservation information, as in the first embodiment, if the low probability mode, the second validity table 122 at the time of low probability is referred to, and the high probability mode If so, the success/failure table 123 at the time of high probability is referred to. In addition, when the jackpot result is selected in the propriety determination process for the first reservation information, the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure is referred to in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Minute determination process is executed, if the time saving result is selected in the right or wrong determination process for the first pending information, referring to the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure in the same manner as in the first embodiment The distribution determination process for time saving is executed. In addition, when the big hit result is selected in the propriety determination process for the second reservation information, the big hit distribution table 126 for the second special figure is referred to in the same manner as in the first embodiment. minute determination process is executed, if the time saving result is selected in the right or wrong determination process for the second pending information, refer to the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure in the same manner as in the first embodiment The distribution determination process for time saving is executed.

In this embodiment, as the special figure special electric control processing, the first special figure special electric control processing corresponding to the first reservation information and the second special figure special electric control processing corresponding to the second reservation information are set. These processes are described below.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the first special figure special electric control process executed by the main side MPU 82, and FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the second special figure special electric control process executed by the main side MPU 82. Since the first special figure special electric control process and the second special figure special electric control process are similar in processing configuration, each corresponding processing configuration will be described.

In the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), the acquisition process of the first pending information is first executed (step S3801). Also, in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), first, the acquisition process of the second reservation information is executed (step S3901).

In the acquisition process of the first reservation information, the winning to the first operation port 33 has occurred, and the number of the first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 111 is less than the upper limit storage number , Per random number counter C1, type random number counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 as the first reservation information, the first reservation information in the first area 111a ~ fourth area 111d of the first special figure reservation area 111 is stored Store in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been processed. In addition, when the first reservation information is acquired, the data setting for updating the display contents of the first special figure reservation display unit 37c in accordance with the fact that the number of the first reservation information has increased this time conduct. Moreover, the first suspension command indicating that the first suspension information has increased is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . The sound and light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first hold command to the display side MPU 103, thereby increasing the display of the number of first hold information in the first hold display area 42a of the pattern display device 41. change accordingly.

In the acquisition process of the second reservation information, if the winning to the special winning device 151 has occurred, and the number of second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 is less than the upper limit storage number, Per random number counter C1, each value of the type random number counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 as the second reservation information, the second reservation information in the first area 112a ~ fourth area 112d of the second special figure reservation area 112 is stored Store in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas where there is no data. In addition, when the second reservation information is acquired, the data setting for updating the display contents of the second special figure reservation display unit 37d according to the fact that the number of the second reservation information has increased this time conduct. Also, it transmits to the sound and light side MPU 93 a second hold command indicating that the second hold information has increased. The sound and light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second suspension command to the display side MPU 103, thereby increasing the display number of the second suspension information in the second suspension display area 42b of the pattern display device 41. change accordingly.

In the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63) and the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), after executing the pending information acquisition process (step S3801 or step S3901), it is stored in the main ROM 83 Read out the special figure special electric address table (step S3802, step S3902). In the special figure special electric address table, a program for executing processing corresponding to the numerical information of the first special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 84 and the second special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 84 is started. address is set. The first special figure special electric counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63) by the main side MPU 82 . The second special figure special electric counter is a counter for specifying the processing contents to be executed in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64) by the main side MPU 82 . The value of each special figure special electric counter corresponds to the start address respectively, and when the value of each special figure special electric counter is "0" special figure fluctuation start processing (step S3805, step S3905) is executed, each When the value of the special figure special electric counter is "1", special figure fluctuation processing (step S3806, step S3906) is executed, and when the value of each special figure special electric counter is "2", special figure determination Medium processing (step S3807, step S3907) is executed, and when the value of each special special electric counter is "3", special electric start processing (step S3808, step S3908) is executed, and the value of each special special electric counter If is "4" special electric open processing (step S3809, step S3909) is executed, if the value of each special special electric counter is "5" special electric closed processing (step S3810, step S3910 ) is executed, and when the value of each special special electric counter is "6", special electric end processing (step S3811, step S3911) is executed.

In the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63) and the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), after reading the special figure special electric address table (step S3802, step S3902), the corresponding special figure special electric counter The start address corresponding to the information is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step S3803, step S3903), and the process indicated by the acquired start address is jumped (step S3804, step S3904). Hereinafter, special figure fluctuation start processing (step S3805, step S3905), processing during special figure fluctuation (step S3806, step S3906) and processing during special figure determination (step S3807, step S3907) will be described. Note that the special electric start processing (steps S3808 and S3908), the special electric open processing (steps S3809 and S3909), and the special electric closed processing (steps S3810 and S3910) are the same as steps S609 to S611 in the first embodiment. are identical. In addition, the special electric end processing (step S3811, step S3911) is not provided with the high probability state counter 133 in the main side RAM 84, and when the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability result or the 10R high probability result ends is the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, except that the high probability state will continue until the next game round that results in a big hit. (FIG. 23) is executed.

<Special figure fluctuation start processing>
First, the special figure fluctuation start processing of steps S3805 and S3905 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not the process for the jackpot state is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) of this time (step S4001). As already explained, in this embodiment, even if the game round is executed in one of the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b, the game round can be executed in the other. In this case, step S4001 is executed, and when the process for the jackpot state is executed on the side that does not correspond to this special special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64), the processes after step S4002 are executed. The start of a new game round is regulated without any change. Thereby, in the situation where the opening and closing execution mode is executed triggered by the game round in one of the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b, the game round in the other is not newly started. Regulated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, if this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), it is determined in step S4001 whether the value of the second special figure special electric counter is 3 or more, and 3 or more If it is, it is configured not to execute the processing after step S4002, and if this is the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is 3 or more is determined in step S4001, and if the number is 3 or more, the processing after step S4002 is not executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4001, it is determined whether or not the corresponding pending number is one or more (step S4002). If this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), it is determined whether or not one or more pieces of the first reservation information are stored in the first special figure reservation area 111, and this time If it is a special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), it is determined whether or not one or more pieces of second reservation information are stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, data setting processing is executed (step S4003). In the data setting process, if this time is the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), the data stored in the first area 111a of the first special figure reservation area 111 is transferred to the first special figure execution area 192a. Moving. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area 111 is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 111a to 111d to the lower area side. The fourth area 111d is cleared to "0" after the data in each area is shifted in the order of area 2 111b, fourth area 111d→third area 111c. In this case, the display content of the first special figure reservation display portion 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first reservation information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a command indicating that the first reservation information in the first special figure reservation area 111 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . The sound and light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 103, so that the display of the number of the first pending information in the first pending display area 42a of the pattern display device 41 corresponds to the decrease in the number of pending information. let me change it.

In the data setting process, if this time is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), the data stored in the first area 112a of the second special figure reservation area 112 is transferred to the execution area 192b for the second special figure. Moving. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area 112 is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 112a to 112d to the lower area side. 2 area 112b, fourth area 112d→third area 112c, etc. After the data in each area is shifted, the fourth area 112d is cleared to "0". In this case, the display content of the second special figure reservation display portion 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second reservation information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a command indicating that the second reservation information in the second special figure reservation area 112 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . The sound and light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 103, so that the display of the number of second pending information in the second pending display area 42b of the pattern display device 41 corresponds to the decrease in the number of pending information. let me change it.

After executing the data setting process, the game round is being executed on the side that does not correspond to this special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64), and the holding information that triggered the start of the game round is the jackpot result. (step S4004). If a negative determination is made in step S4004, then a suitability determination process is executed (step S4005). In the success/failure determination process, if the success/failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game cycle is the first reservation information, the first success/failure table 121 at the time of the low probability is read from the main side ROM 83, and the success/failure lottery mode is the low probability. If the mode is the game round start target is the second reservation information, the second right/fail table 122 at the time of low probability is read from the main side ROM 83, and if the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the game round start target is the second. The success/failure table 123 at the time of high probability is read out from the main side ROM 83 for any of the 1 pending information and the 2nd pending information. After reading the success/failure table, from the holding information stored in the side of the execution area 192a for the first special figure and the execution area 192b for the second special figure, which is the target for starting the game round this time, , that is, the numerical value information obtained from the win random number counter C1 is read, and it is determined which game result in the success/failure table the read numerical value information corresponds to.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S4006: YES), a jackpot distribution determination process is executed (step S4007). In the big hit distribution determination process, if the game round start target is the first reservation information, the first special figure jackpot distribution table 125 is read from the main side ROM 83, and the game round start target is the second reservation information. If so, read the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure. Then, from the holding information stored in the side of the execution area 192a for the first special figure and the execution area 192b for the second special figure, which is the target for starting the game round this time, the information for distribution determination, that is, the type random number By reading the numerical value information acquired from the counter C2 and referring to the distribution table, it is specified which type of jackpot result the read numerical value information corresponds to.

After executing the distribution determination process for the big win, "1" is set to the flag of the main side RAM 84 corresponding to the type of the big win result specified in the distribution determination process (step S4008). After that, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S4009). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which are the targets for starting the game round this time, is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 84 . In the stop result table for the jackpot results, the types of stop modes of the symbols stopped and displayed in the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b are set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step S4009, the main side RAM 84 stores information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in step S4008. The pattern stop mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the jackpot results.

When the result of the right or wrong determination process is a time saving result (step S4010: YES), the allocation determination process for time saving is performed (step S4011). In the distribution determination process for time saving, if the start target of the game round is the first reservation information, the time reduction distribution table 127 for the first special figure is read from the main side ROM 83, and the start target of the game round is the second reservation information. If so, read the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure. Then, from the holding information stored in the side of the execution area 192a for the first special figure and the execution area 192b for the second special figure, which is the target for starting the game round this time, the information for distribution determination, that is, the type random number By reading the numerical value information acquired from the counter C2 and referring to the distribution table, it is specified which type of time saving result the read numerical value information corresponds to.

After performing the distribution determination process for time saving, "1" is set to the flag of main side RAM84 corresponding to the kind of time saving result specified by the said distribution determination process (step S4012). Then, the stop result setting process for time saving results is performed (step S4013). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which are the targets for starting the game round this time, is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 84 . In this stop result table for the time saving result, the type of stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed in the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of time saving result. And, in step S4013, the main RAM 84 stores information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of time saving result specified in step S4012. The pattern stop mode may be set in correspondence with each time saving result on a one-to-one basis, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the time saving results. The information on the form of the pattern selected in step S4013 is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

When the result of the success/failure determination process is neither the jackpot result nor the time saving result (step S4010: NO), the stop result setting process for the result is executed (step S4014). Specifically, information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game round is stored in the main side ROM 83 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main side RAM 84 . The information of the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information of the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information of the pattern mode selected in the case of the time saving result, and furthermore, the first feature There is one common type in the figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4004, that is, the game round is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control processing (FIGS. 63 and 64) of this time, and the holding that triggered the start of the game round If the information corresponds to the jackpot result, the already explained stop result setting process for the outlier result is executed without executing the winning judgment process (step S4014). In other words, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which even if one of the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b is in a state in which a game round is being executed, the game round can be started in the other. However, if the hold information that triggered the start of the game round that has already been executed corresponds to one of the jackpot results, the hold information that triggered the start of the newly executed game round Regardless of whether or not the game corresponds to the big win result, the game round corresponds to the result of losing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game times corresponding to the big winning results from being repeated. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the start of a new game round is blocked when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result has already been executed, even if the hold information for starting the game round is acquired, Regardless, when a new game round is not started, it may become clear that the game round currently being executed is the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, but the game round corresponding to the jackpot result has already been executed. It is possible to prevent such an event from occurring by adopting a configuration in which a new game round can be started even when the game is already played.

When the processing of step S4009, the processing of step S4013 or the processing of step S4014 is executed, on condition that the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main side RAM84 is 1 or more (step S4015: YES), the time saving state counter 134 1 is subtracted from the value (step S4016). And, if the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4017: YES), the first time saving end flag and the second time saving end flag provided in the main side RAM84 "1" is set to the time saving end flag on the side corresponding to the figure special electric control process (Fig. 63, Fig. 64) (step S4018). The first time saving end flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that the time saving state should be ended and the normal game state should be shifted to when the game round in the first special figure display portion 37a is finished. be. The second time saving end flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that the time saving state should be ended and the game state should be shifted to the normal game state when the game round in the second special figure display portion 37b is finished. be.

When a negative determination is made in step S4015, when a negative determination is made in step S4017, or when the process of step S4018 is executed, a variable display period specifying process is executed (step S4019). The processing for specifying the variable display period will be described later. After that, the variation command and the type command corresponding to the game turn to be started this time are transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 (step S4020). The variation command includes information on the variation display period specified in step S4019, and the game turn to be started is either the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. Contains information indicating whether it is supported. The type command includes information indicating whether the game round to be started this time corresponds to the jackpot result, the time saving result, or the missing result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, contains information indicating which type of jackpot result it is, and includes information indicating which type of time saving result it is when it corresponds to the time saving result.

In the low-frequency support mode, the sound and light side MPU 93 changes the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 when receiving the variation command and the type command indicating that the first hold information is the game turn start target. In addition to starting the variable display of the symbols, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 perform an effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbols, while the second pending information indicates that the game round is to be started. Even if the variation command and the type command are received, the variation display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 and the corresponding effects in the display light emitting part 64 and the speaker part 65 are not executed. Therefore, when a game cycle triggered by the first reservation information is executed in the low-frequency support mode, the first special symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display of symbols and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 are displayed. In contrast to the variation display of the pattern is performed in the low frequency support mode, when the game round triggered by the second reservation information is executed, the variation display of the pattern is performed in the second special figure display unit 37b On the other hand, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the symbols are not variably displayed.

In addition, a small display area is set on the outer edge side of the display surface of the pattern display device 41, and in the low frequency support mode, when the game round triggered by the second hold information is executed, the display area A configuration in which blinking display or color switching display is performed may be employed. In addition, in the low-frequency support mode, when a big hit result occurs in a game round triggered by the second hold information, there is an effect of notifying the occurrence of the big win result on the symbol display device 41 at the timing when the game round ends. In the low-frequency support mode, when the time saving result occurs in the game round triggered by the second hold information, the pattern display device 41 announces the occurrence of the time saving result at the timing when the game round ends. is done.

In the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the variation command and the type command indicating that the second hold information is the game start target, and the pattern The variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the display device 41 is started, and the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 are caused to perform an effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbols. Even if a variation command and a type command indicating that it is to be started are received, the variation display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 and the corresponding effects in the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 are not performed. don't let it run. Therefore, when the game round triggered by the first suspension information is executed in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, while the fluctuation display of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display unit 37a, In the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the symbols are not variably displayed. When it is executed, the second special figure display portion 37b performs the variation display of the pattern, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 perform the variation display of the pattern.

In addition, a small partitioned display area is set on the outer edge side of the display surface of the pattern display device 41, and a game cycle triggered by the first suspension information is executed in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. If there is, a configuration may be adopted in which blinking display or color switching display is performed in the display area. In addition, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, when a big hit result occurs in a game round triggered by the first suspension information, the pattern display device 41 is displayed at the timing when the game round ends. An effect is performed to notify the occurrence of the jackpot result, and in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, when the time-saving result occurs in the game round triggered by the first hold information, the game round At the timing when the game is finished, the pattern display device 41 performs an effect to announce the occurrence of the time saving result.

After that, the variable display of the design is started in the display part which is the start target of the current game cycle out of the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b (step S4021). Also, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (Fig. 63), 1 is added to the value of the first special figure special electric counter, and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process ( 64), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S4022).

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the variable display period specifying process executed in step S4019.

If "1" is not set to both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main side RAM 84 (step S4101: NO), that is, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the current game round is the first pending information (step S4102). When the start target of the current game cycle is the first reservation information (step S4102: YES), the table group for the normal fluctuation period is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S4103). Then, the table group for the normal variable period is used to execute the variable display period selection process (step S4104), and the information on the variable display period selected by the selection process is stored in the first It is set to the special figure side timer counter (step S4105). The update of the numerical value information set in the first special figure side timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

In the situation where the variable display period selection process in step S4104 is executed with reference to the table group for the normal variable period, if a big hit result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the success/failure determination process is not the result Numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information that is the object of execution corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display, and if the out-of-reach display occurs in the current game round, the fluctuation type counter at that time By collating the CS numerical information against the table corresponding to the reach in the table group for the normal fluctuation period, the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read.

When a time-saving result occurs in the current game cycle, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated against the table corresponding to the time-saving result in the table group for the normal variation period, and the variation display corresponding to the time-saving result is performed. Read period information. Multiple types of information are set for the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result, and any variable display period corresponding to the time saving result is longer than the shortest period on the special figure side, corresponding to the occurrence of reach display. This period is shorter than the variable display period. Specifically, 10 seconds, 11 seconds, 12 seconds and 13 seconds are set as the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result, and the period corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS acquired among these is the game this time is selected as a variable display period.

In the current game round, when neither the big hit result nor the time saving result occurs and the out reach display does not occur, the first special figure reservation area 111 starts in a situation where three or more pieces of the first reservation information are stored. If it is a game round, the information of the shortest period (specifically 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read as the variable display period of this game round. As a result, it is possible to increase the efficiency of digestion of game times triggered by the first suspension information in the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, when the big hit result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round and the out reach display does not occur, the first reservation information is the execution target of the game round and one or more in the first special figure reservation area 111 If the game cycle is started in a state where two pieces of the first pending information are stored, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is transferred to the table corresponding to the complete loss result in the table group for the normal fluctuation period. By collating with , the information of the variable display period corresponding to the result of complete deviation is read. Multiple types of information are set for the variable display period corresponding to the complete deviation result, and any variable display period corresponding to the complete deviation result is longer than the shortest period on the special figure side, and the variable display period corresponding to the short time result and a period shorter than the variable display period corresponding to occurrence of reach display. Specifically, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds are set as the fluctuation display periods corresponding to the complete deviation result, and the period corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired among these is this time It is selected as the variable display period of the game round.

In the case of low frequency support mode (step S4101: NO), if the start target of this game round is the second hold information (step S4102: NO), special figure as the variable display period of this game round Information on the longest period of the side (specifically 10 minutes) is set to the second special figure side timer counter provided in the main side RAM84 (step S4106). The update of the numerical value information set in the second special figure side timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

As described above, in the low-frequency support mode, if the first hold information is to start a game round, the variable display period for the game round is selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period. , If the second hold information is to start the game round, the longest period of the special figure side (specifically 10 minutes) is selected as the variable display period of the game round regardless of the game result of the game round. . The longest period on the special figure side is longer than any variable display period selected with reference to the table group for the normal variable period. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player operates the shooting operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2 to play the game.

If "1" is set to either the first high-frequency flag or the second high-frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4101: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. If it is the support mode, it is determined whether or not the start target of the current game round is the first hold information (step S4107). If the start target of this game round is the first pending information (step S4107: YES), the information of the special figure side for a long time (specifically 2 minutes) as the variable display period of this game round is mainly It is set to the first special figure side timer counter of the side RAM 84 (step S4108).

In the case of the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S4101: YES), if the start target of the current game round is the second hold information (step S4107: NO), a short period of time The variable table group is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S4109). Then, the variable display period selection process is executed using the short-term variation table group (step S4110), and the information on the variable display period selected in the selection process is stored in the main side RAM 84 on the second special figure side. A timer counter is set (step S4111).

In the situation where the process of selecting the variable display period in step S4110 is executed with reference to the short-term variable table group, if a big hit result occurs in the current game round, or if the result of the win/fail determination process is out of line. Numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information that is the object of execution corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display, and if the out-of-reach display occurs in the current game round, the fluctuation type counter at that time By collating the CS numerical information against the table corresponding to the reach in the table group for short-term fluctuation, the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read.

When no big win result occurs in the current game round and no out-reach display occurs, the game is started in a situation where two or more pieces of second reservation information are stored in the second special figure reservation area 112.例文帳に追加If it is a time, the information of the shortest period (specifically 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read as the variable display period of this game time. As a result, it is possible to increase the consumption efficiency of game rounds triggered by the second hold information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. Also, even if a time saving result occurs in this game round, if it is a game round started in a situation where two or more pieces of second reservation information are stored in the second special figure reservation area 112, Read the information of the shortest period (specifically 3 seconds) on the special figure side.

On the other hand, the game round started in a situation where one piece of the second holding information is stored in the second special figure holding area 112 in the case where no big hit result occurs in the current game round and the out reach display does not occur. In that case, the information of the middle period (specifically 10 seconds) of the special figure side is read as the variable display period of the game round this time. This makes it possible to secure a situation in which the second hold information is acquired in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. Also, even if a time saving result occurs in this game round, if the game round is started in a situation where one second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 112, Information for the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the side of the drawing is read.

As described above, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, if the second hold information is the game round start target, the game round fluctuation display with reference to the short-term fluctuation table group While the period is selected, if the first hold information is to start the game round, the long period of the special figure side (specifically 2 minutes) is the game regardless of the game result of the game round is selected as a variable display period. The long period on the special figure side is a period longer than the shortest period (specifically 3 seconds) on the special figure side selected in the game round of the loss result in which the reach display triggered by the second hold information does not occur be. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game by operating the shooting operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3.

<Process during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S3806 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63) and step S3906 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64) will be described.

If the fluctuation display period of the current game round in the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled has not passed, and if it is the update timing of the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b, the special figure Data setting for updating the display contents of the display units 37a and 37b is performed. Thereby, the display contents of the pattern in the special figure display portions 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents of the next order.

Aspect at the start of the variation display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a, 37b, and the update aspect of the variation display of the pattern are performed in a constant manner regardless of the result of the success or failure determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. , is carried out in a fixed manner regardless of the content of the performance for the game round on the symbol display device 41 . For example, when a plurality of predetermined update timings occur, the display contents of the pattern make one cycle, and a display pattern in which the display order is in a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when the variable display period has passed, the display pattern The stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed regardless of the order of display. Thereby, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, when the variable display period has passed, the final stop command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 . The final stop command includes information corresponding to the side where the fluctuation display period has passed among the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b. After that, the information of the pattern stop mode of the special figure display portions 37a and 37b stored in the main side RAM 84 at the start of the game turn to be ended this time is read. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped in a state in which the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game round is displayed in the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled.

After that, the information of the final stop period (specifically 0.5 sec) is set to the timer counter corresponding to the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. Thereby, the measurement of the final stop period is started. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (Fig. 63), 1 is added to the value of the first special figure special electric counter, and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process ( 64), add 1 to the value of the second special figure special electric counter.

<Processing during special figure confirmation>
Next, refer to the flowchart of FIG. 67 for the special figure determination process executed in step S3807 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63) and step S3907 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64) I will explain while

If the final stop period has passed (step S4201: YES), and if the game result of this game round is a jackpot result (step S4202: YES), this special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63, By determining whether the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side that does not correspond to FIG. It is determined whether or not a game cycle is being executed on the display units 37a and 37b (step S4203). If the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side that does not correspond to this special figure special electric control processing (FIGS. 63 and 64) is not "0" (step S4203: NO), this special figure special electric control processing (FIGS. 63, 64, FIG. 64) ends the fluctuation display of the pattern in the special figure display units 37a and 37b on the side that does not correspond to the result in a stopped state (step S4204). And, the special figure special electric counter of the side which does not correspond to this special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 63, FIG. 64) is cleared to "0" (step S4205). As a result, in the situation where the fluctuation display of the pattern is executed in both the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b, the fluctuation display of one pattern is stopped and the opening and closing execution mode becomes a jackpot result. If this occurs, the variable display of the other pattern is forcibly terminated while the result of the error is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S4203 or if the processing of step S4205 is executed, the information corresponding to the opening period (specifically 5 seconds) corresponds to this special figure special electric control processing (Fig. 63, Fig. 64) It sets the timer counter on the side to do so (step S4206), and transmits an opening command to the sound and light side MPU 93 (step S4207). When receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting portion 64 and the speaker portion 65 to perform an effect corresponding to the opening period.

Thereafter, information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S4208). That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is started after the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is completed, the ceiling counter 131 is set with the information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings. If the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set the number of fixed ceiling times during the opening/closing execution mode or when the opening/closing execution mode ends, not when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the operation is performed after the opening/closing execution mode is started. If the power supply is stopped and the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the set value update process ( In the step S117) or the RAM clearing process (step S119), the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is cleared as already explained, whereas the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so that the operation power is supplied. There is a risk that the game may be restarted in a situation where the number of remaining ceilings is small while the profit of the opening/closing execution mode is obtained until the game is stopped. On the other hand, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with the information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings, so that the fraudulent act as described above can be neutralized.

After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (Fig. 63), 1 is added to the value of the first special figure special electric counter, and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process ( 64), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S4209).

If the game result of this game round is not a jackpot result (step S4202: NO), the end determination process of the time saving state is executed in step S4210, the setting process for the time saving result is executed in step S4211, and step S4212 , the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (Fig. 63), the first special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0", and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process ( 64), the second special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S4213).

Figure 68 is a flow chart showing the end determination process of the time saving state executed in step S4210 of the process during special figure determination (Figure 67).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the time saving end flag corresponding to the special figure special electric control processing (FIGS. 63 and 64) of this time in the main side RAM 84 (step S4301). That is, if this processing corresponds to the first special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 63), it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the first time saving end flag of the main side RAM84, and this time If the process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the second time saving end flag of the main side RAM84.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S4301, the time saving end flag corresponding to this special special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) is cleared to "0" (step S4302). After that, both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0" (step S4303). As a result, the time saving state ends and the normal game state is entered.

Even while the game round is being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, the game round can be started in the second special figure display unit 37b, and the game round is executed in the second special figure display unit 37b. In the configuration where the game round in the first special figure display unit 37a can be started even during the time, the time saving state is when the game round corresponding to the end started in a situation where the remaining number of continuations is 1 is completed. finish. In this case, even if the game round started after the game round corresponding to the end is started and ends earlier than the game round corresponding to the end, the time saving state continues and ends when the game round corresponding to the end ends. . On the other hand, in the time-saving state (that is, the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode), if it is a game turn for which the second hold information is to be executed, the game is played by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuations. While the variable display period of times is selected, the long period of the special figure side (specifically 2 minutes) is uniquely selected in the game times for which the first reservation information is executed. Then, in the time saving state, by operating the shooting operation device 28 so that the game ball basically flows down the right side area PA3, the game round with the second holding information as the execution object is repeatedly executed, and the time saving state By operating the shooting operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 so that the first reservation information becomes the execution target of the game round when the remaining number of continuations becomes one. It is possible to make the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state be the game round for which the first suspension information is to be executed. Then, by starting the game round corresponding to the end with the first reservation information as the execution target, the game round corresponding to the end is executed over a long period of time (specifically 2 minutes) on the special figure side, While the game round corresponding to the end is being executed, the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3 so that the game round with the second hold information as the execution object is repeatedly executed. By doing so, it is possible to substantially increase the number of continuations of the time saving state.

Figure 69 is a flow chart showing the setting process for the time saving result executed in step S4211 during special figure determination process (Figure 67).

If the game result of the current game cycle is a time saving result (step S4401: YES), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4402). And when "1" is set to the high probability flag (step S4402: YES), the setting process for this time saving result is complete|finished, without performing the process after step S4403. In other words, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the success or failure determination process of the game round executed in the high probability mode, the time saving result is triggered by the second high frequency support The time saving result is invalidated without setting the mode.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S4402: NO), it is determined whether or not the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4403). That is, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. If the support mode is not the first high-frequency support mode (step S4403: NO), the second high-frequency flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4404), and the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. If there is (step S4403: YES), the process of step S4404 is not executed. Thereby, when the time saving result in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode is maintained, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode are maintained, and the time saving result in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode When it becomes, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained, and when the time saving result is obtained in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, it becomes the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode.

When affirmative determination is made in step S4403 or when the process of step S4404 is performed, it is determined whether this time saving result is the 1st time saving result (step S4405). If this time saving result is the first time saving result (step S4405: YES), the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main side RAM 84 determines whether it is "100" or more corresponding to the first time saving continuation number (Step S4406). When the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time saving continuation number (step S4406: NO), the information "100" corresponding to the first time saving continuation number is set to the time saving state counter 134 (step S4407). .

After that, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S4408). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has been started or that the first time saving continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93.

When the processing of step S4408 is executed after the processing of step S4407 is executed in a situation where the current game state is not the time saving state, the state designation command indicates that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 perform the effect indicating that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number starts Execute the process to make In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, the combination of the first time-saving generating symbols (“1, 2, 3”) is stopped and displayed. After these stop results are stopped and displayed, the symbol display device 41 displays an image indicating that the time saving state will occur and an image indicating the first number of times of continuing time saving. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game rounds are displayed in the reduced area, by the reduction, The display of the image indicating that the time saving state occurs in the secured area and the image indicating the first time saving continuation number of times is continued. The display of the image ends when one round of the game ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When the processing of step S4408 is executed after the processing of step S4407 is executed in the situation where the current game state is the time saving state, it indicates that the reset of the first time saving continuation number has been performed in the state designation command Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the design display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 perform the effect indicating that the first time saving continuous number of times has been reset. Execute the process to make In this case, in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, a combination of the first time-saving patterns (“1, 2, 3”), and a combination of the second time-saving patterns (“3 4.1”) and a combination of non-reach-out symbols, which is a combination of symbols other than the combination of out-reach-out symbols, is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the confirmation display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that the number of continuous time-savings in the time-saving state has been reset and an image showing the first number of continuous time-savings are displayed. Is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game rounds are displayed in the reduced area, by the reduction, In the secured area, the display of the image indicating that the number of times of continuous time saving in the time saving state has been reset and the image indicating the reset first number of continuous time saving is continued. The display of the image ends when one round of the game ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

If the time saving result of this time is the second time saving result (step S4405: NO), regardless of the current value of the time saving state counter 134, the time saving state counter 134 corresponding to the second time saving continuation number of times "150" information set (step S4409). After that, a state designation command transmission process is executed (step S4410). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has been started or that the second time saving continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 .

When the process of step S4410 is executed after the process of step S4409 is executed in a situation where the current game state is not the time saving state, the state designation command indicates that the time saving state of the second time saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 perform an effect indicating that the time saving state of the second time saving continuation number starts Execute the process to make In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, the combination of the second time-saving generating symbols (“3, 4, 1”) is stop-displayed. After these stop results are stopped and displayed, the pattern display device 41 displays an image indicating that the time saving state will occur and an image indicating the second time saving continuation number of times. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game rounds are displayed in the reduced area, by the reduction, The image indicating that the time saving state occurs in the secured area and the image indicating the second time saving continuation number of times are continued to be displayed. The display of the image ends when one round of the game ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When the process of step S4410 is executed after the process of step S4409 is executed in the situation where the current game state is the time saving state, it indicates that the second time saving continuation number of times has been reset to the state designation command. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 perform the effect indicating that the second time saving continuation number of times has been reset. Execute the process to make In this case, in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, a combination of the first time-saving patterns (“1, 2, 3”), and a combination of the second time-saving patterns (“3 4.1”) and a combination of non-reach-out symbols, which is a combination of symbols other than the combination of out-reach-out symbols, is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the confirmation display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that the number of continuous time reductions in the time reduction state has been reset and an image showing the second number of continuous time reductions are displayed. Is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game rounds are displayed in the reduced area, by the reduction, In the secured area, the display of the image indicating that the number of times of continuous time saving in the time saving state has been reset and the image indicating the second number of times of continuing time saving that has been reset is continued. The display of the image ends when one round of the game ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When the process of step S4408 or the process of step S4410 is performed, each of the 1st time saving end flag and the 2nd time saving end flag provided in main side RAM84 is cleared by "0" (step S4411). As a result, the second hold information is executed while the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state is being executed for a long period of time (specifically 2 minutes) on the special figure side with the first hold information as the execution target When a time saving result occurs in the game round, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is extended. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of executing the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state with the first suspension information as the execution target.

By being the said structure, when the time saving result generate|occur|produces in low probability mode and low frequency support mode, it transfers to the time saving state of the time saving continuation frequency corresponding to the kind of the time saving result concerned. Thereby, based on the result of the propriety determination process in low probability mode and low frequency support mode, it becomes possible to produce the situation which a transition to a time saving state generate|occur|produces, without opening-closing execution mode.

When the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is reset to 100 times, which is the first time saving continuation number Low probability mode and first high Frequency support mode continues. Also, when the second time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is set to 150 times, which is the second time saving continuation number Low probability mode and the first High frequency support mode continues. Thereby, when the time saving result occurs in the first high-frequency support mode, while continuing the first high-frequency support mode in which the second operation port 34 is more likely to be in an open state than the second high-frequency support mode, until then A situation occurs in which the number of remaining continuations of the time saving state increases. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of the time saving result occurring in the time saving state.

If the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 100 times or more, which is the first time saving continuation number when the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, by the occurrence of this first time saving result The low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode continue without any new setting relating to the time-saving state. Also, if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than 100 times, which is the first time saving continuation number when the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 The low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode continue in a state of being set to 100 times, which is the first time-saving continuation number. Also, when the second time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is set to 150 times, which is the second time saving continuation number Low probability mode and the second High frequency support mode continues. As a result, when a time saving result occurs in the second high-frequency support mode, a situation can occur in which the number of times the remaining time-saving state continues increases more than before while continuing the second high-frequency support mode. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of the time saving result occurring in the time saving state.

If a time-saving result occurs in the time-saving state, the larger number of the remaining number of times of the current time-saving state and the number of times of time-saving continuation that can be set by the newly generated time-saving result will be the remaining number of times in the time-saving state number of continuations. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of the occurrence of the time saving result in the time saving state.

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 executed in step S4213 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 67).

First, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4501). Then, if the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S4501: YES), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S4502. In other words, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented in the game cycle executed in the high probability mode, and the ceiling counter 131 value is not decremented, thereby causing a ceiling time reduction. Nor.

If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S4501: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S4502). If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S4502: NO), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S4503. As in the first embodiment, the process of setting information in the ceiling counter 131 is performed in a state where none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation" and "setting confirmation operation" are executed and the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state, step S114 when the supply of operating power is started, step S122 when an information error occurs in the main side RAM 84 when the supply of operating power is started, and opening/closing execution This is only step S4208 when the mode is started, and after the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" unless any of the above processes are executed. . On the other hand, the ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented by 1 in a situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" as described above (step S4502: NO), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S4503. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", and a time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs, and the game times of the number of time saving continuations are digested without a big hit result occurring in the time saving state. When the time saving state ends and the normal game state is entered, the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving does not occur even if the game rounds in which no big winning results occur are repeated thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive occurrence of the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving.

If the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S4502: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the ceiling counter 131 (step S4503), and whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4504). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S4504: YES), regardless of whether the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the second high frequency flag is set to " 1” is set (step S4505). As a result, when the ceiling time is shortened in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained, and the ceiling time is shortened in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In this case, the low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode are selected. In addition, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode occur after the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result is completed, and when the game times of 100 times, which is the first time saving continuous number, are digested Since the first high-frequency support mode ends, the ceiling time reduction that occurs when 500 games, which is the fixed ceiling number of times, is completed in the low probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the first high-frequency support mode. does not occur in the situation where

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main side RAM 84 is equal to or greater than "100" corresponding to the first time saving continuation number (step S4506). When the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time saving continuation number (step S4506: NO), the information "100" corresponding to the first time saving continuation number is set to the time saving state counter 134 (step S4507). .

After that, transmission processing of the state designation command is executed (step S4508). In the transmission process, a state designation command indicating that the time saving state has been started or that the first time saving continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93.

When the processing of step S4508 is executed after the processing of step S4507 is executed in a situation where the current game state is not the time saving state, the state designation command indicates that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 perform the effect indicating that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number starts Execute the process to make Since the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs in a game cycle in which neither the jackpot result nor the time-saving result occurs, the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 in the pattern display device 41 are a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the first time-saving. A combination of outlier patterns that is a combination of patterns other than the combination of generated patterns (“1, 2, 3”) and the combination of second time-saving patterns (“3, 4, 1”) (including the combination of outlier reach patterns) appears stopped. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the confirmation display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs and an image showing the first number of continuous time saving are displayed. . Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game rounds are displayed in the reduced area, by the reduction, The display of the image indicating that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs and the image indicating the first time saving continuation number of times is continued in the secured area. The display of the image ends when one round of the game ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When the process of step S4508 is executed after the process of step S4507 is executed in the situation where the current game state is the time saving state, it indicates that the first time saving continuation number of times has been reset to the state designation command. Contains information. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the design display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 perform the effect indicating that the first time saving continuous number of times has been reset. Execute the process to make Since the reset of the first time-saving continuous number triggered by the ceiling time-saving occurs in a game cycle in which neither the jackpot result nor the time-saving result occurs, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in the pattern display device 41 are the patterns corresponding to the jackpot results. A combination of symbols other than the combination of the first time-saving pattern (“1/2/3”) and the combination of the second time-saving pattern (“3/4/1”). (including combinations of symbols) are stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and the confirmation display over the final stop period is completed, an image indicating that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs and that the first time saving continuation number has been reset The image shown is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is reduced, and while the symbols corresponding to the new game rounds are displayed in the reduced area, by the reduction, The display of the image indicating that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs in the secured area and the image indicating that the first time saving continuation number has been reset is continued. The display of the image ends when one round of the game ends, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set returns to its original size.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S4506 or when the process of step S4508 is executed, the first time saving end flag and the second time saving end flag provided in the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0" (step S4509). As a result, the second hold information is executed while the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state is being executed for a long period of time (specifically 2 minutes) on the special figure side with the first hold information as the execution target When a time saving result occurs in the game round, the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is extended. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of executing the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state with the first suspension information as the execution target.

Here, in the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 67), the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 70) is executed after the setting processing for the time saving result (FIG. 69) is executed, and the subtraction of the ceiling counter 131 In the process (FIG. 70), even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 is "0", if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is "100" or more, the processing of steps S4507 and S4508 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible not to reset the number of continuations of the first time saving triggered by the ceiling time saving in the game times with the first time saving result or the second time saving result. As a result, resetting of the number of continuations of time saving triggered by the result of time saving and resetting of the number of continuations of time saving triggered by the ceiling time saving can be prevented from being performed redundantly. In particular, if the second time saving continuation number triggered by the second time saving result is reset and then the first time saving continuation number triggered by the ceiling time saving is reset, the time saving continuation number will decrease. By adopting the above configuration, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

By being the said structure, when ceiling time saving occurs in low probability mode and low frequency support mode, it transfers to the time saving state of 1st time saving continuation frequency. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the transition to the time saving state occurs without going through the opening and closing execution mode based on the completion of the ceiling number of games in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

When the ceiling time saving occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 100 times or more, which is the first time saving continuation number, the new time saving state due to the occurrence of this ceiling time saving The low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode continue without any setting. Also, if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than 100 times, which is the first time saving continuation number when the ceiling time saving occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is the first The low-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode continue in a state of being set to 100 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations. In other words, if the ceiling time saving occurs in the time saving state, the remaining number of times of the current time saving state and the number of time saving continuations that can be set due to the newly occurring ceiling time saving, whichever is greater Remaining number of continuations. As a result, if the ceiling time saving occurs in the second high-frequency support mode, a situation can occur in which the number of remaining time saving states continues to increase, so it is possible that the ceiling time saving will occur in the time saving state. It is possible to increase the advantage.

Next, the left-handed informing process executed by the sound/light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Left-handed information processing is repeatedly executed in a relatively short period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

If it is not the high probability mode (step S4601: NO) but the high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) (step S4602: YES), the current high frequency support mode is started. It is determined whether or not the number of games executed since then is the notification reference number (step S4603). The notification reference number of times is when the remaining number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode (that is, the time saving state) is 5 times. This five times is set as the number of times of a value obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of reservations of the second reservation information in the second special figure reservation area 112 .

In step S4603, left-handed notification processing is executed (step S4604). In the left-handed notification process, a process for displaying a left-handed notification image on the symbol display device 41 is executed. As a left-handed notification image, an image that enables the player to recognize that the game ball should be shot aiming at the left area PA2 so that the execution target of the game round five times after the current state becomes the first reservation information. is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prompt the player to perform the shooting operation so that the game cycle corresponding to the end in the time saving state is executed with the first suspension information as the execution target.

Next, how the game cycle corresponding to the end in the time saving state is executed with the first suspension information as the execution object will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 72 . Figure 72 (a) shows the period of time saving state, Figure 72 (b) shows the period during which the game round is executed with the first suspension information as the execution target, Figure 72 (c) shows the second suspension information 72(d) shows the period during which the first time-saving end flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", and FIG. 72(e) shows The timing of occurrence of the time saving result is shown, and FIG. 72(f) shows the timing of occurrence of the ceiling time saving.

First, the case where the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state is executed with the first suspension information as the execution object and neither the time saving result nor the ceiling time saving occurs during the game round corresponding to the end will be described.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), at the timing of t1, which is the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 72(b), a game round for execution of the first hold information is started. The variable display period of the game round is 2 minutes, which is the long period on the special figure side. Since the game round is started in a situation where the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is one time, it is a game round corresponding to the end of the time saving state, and as shown in FIG. 72 (d) at the timing of t1 "1" is set to the 1st time saving end flag of main side RAM84. After that, as shown in FIG. 72(b), timing t2, timing t3, timing t4, timing t5, and timing t6, which are situations in which the game round corresponding to the end with the first suspension information as the execution object is being executed. At each of a plurality of timings including the timing of , as shown in FIG. In this case, each of the plurality of timings including the timing of t2 to the timing of t6 is in a short time state as shown in FIG. In the game cycle started with , the variable display period of the game cycle is determined by referring to the table group for short-term variation. Each of these game times is started in a situation where two or more pieces of second reservation information are stored in the second special figure reservation area 112, and neither the jackpot result nor the outreach reach display occurs, so the game times The variable display period is the shortest period on the special figure side (specifically 3 seconds).

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(b), at the timing of t7, the end-corresponding game round whose execution target is the first hold information ends. In this case, since "1" is set to the first time saving end flag of the main side RAM84 as shown in FIG. 72(d), the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode, and as shown in FIG. State ends.

As described above, the game round for which the first hold information is to be executed is executed as the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and in the game round corresponding to the end, the variable display period of the game round is a long period on the special figure side (specifically is 2 minutes). In the game rounds corresponding to the end, about 30 game rounds triggered by the second hold information, which is the shortest variable display period, occur. As a result, in the current time saving state, the number of game rounds which is about 30 times higher than the number of times of continuation to be set among the first number of times of continuing time saving and the second number of times of continuing time saving is executed.

Next, the case where the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state is executed with the first suspension information as the execution target and the time saving result occurs in the middle of the game round corresponding to the end will be described.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), at the timing of t8, which is the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 72(b), a game round for execution of the first hold information is started. The variable display period of the game round is 2 minutes, which is the long period on the special figure side. Since the game round is started in a situation where the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is one time, it is a game round corresponding to the end of the time saving state, and as shown in FIG. 72 (d) at the timing of t8 "1" is set to the 1st time saving end flag of main side RAM84.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(b), the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14 are the situations in which the game round corresponding to the end with the first suspension information as the execution object is being executed. At each of a plurality of timings including the timing of , as shown in FIG. In this case, at each of a plurality of timings including the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. A variable display period of a game cycle is determined by referring to a group of tables for short-term variation for each of a plurality of timings including timing, timing t10, timing t11, timing t13, and timing t14. be done. Each of these game times is started in a situation where two or more pieces of second reservation information are stored in the second special figure reservation area 112, and neither the jackpot result nor the outreach reach display occurs, so the game times The variable display period is the shortest period on the special figure side (specifically 3 seconds).

Among a plurality of game rounds including timing t9, timing t10, timing t11, timing t13, and timing t14, the game round at timing t11 is determined as shown in FIG. 72(e). The result of processing is a time-saving result. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 72 (d) at the timing of t12 when the game round ends, the first time saving end flag of the main side RAM84 is cleared to "0", and if it is the first time saving result, the time saving state counter 134 The first time saving continuation number is reset in , and if it is the second time saving result, the second time saving continuation number is reset in the time saving state counter 134 . Therefore, it will be in the state by which the time saving state was extended.

After that, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 72(b), the end-corresponding game cycle whose execution target is the first hold information ends. However, since the time saving state is extended while the first time saving end flag is cleared to "0" at the timing of t12, the time saving state does not end at the time of t14.

As described above, the game round for which the first hold information is to be executed is executed as the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and in the game round corresponding to the end, the variable display period of the game round is a long period on the special figure side (specifically is 2 minutes). And the time-saving state is extended by the fact that the time-saving result occurs in the game-time for which the second pending information executed in the game-time corresponding to the end is executed. By executing the game round for which the first suspension information is to be executed as the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, it is possible to provide the benefit of extension of the time saving state.

Next, the case where the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state is executed with the first suspension information as the execution object and the ceiling time saving occurs in the middle of the game round corresponding to the end will be described.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), at the timing of t15, which is the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 72(b), a game round for execution of the first hold information is started. The variable display period of the game round is 2 minutes, which is the long period on the special figure side. Since the game round is started in a situation where the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is one time, it is a game round corresponding to the end of the time saving state, and at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. "1" is set to the 1st time saving end flag of main side RAM84.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(b), timing t16, timing t17, timing t18, timing t19, and timing t21, which are situations in which the game round corresponding to the end with the first suspension information as the execution target is being executed. At each of a plurality of timings including the timing of , as shown in FIG. In this case, at each of a plurality of timings including the timing of t16, the timing of t17, the timing of t18, the timing of t19 and the timing of t21, as shown in FIG. A variable display period of a game cycle is determined by referring to a group of tables for short-term variation for each of a plurality of timings including timing, timing t17, timing t18, timing t19, and timing t21. be done. Each of these game times is started in a situation where two or more pieces of second reservation information are stored in the second special figure reservation area 112, and neither the jackpot result nor the outreach reach display occurs, so the game times The variable display period is the shortest period on the special figure side (specifically 3 seconds).

1 is subtracted at timing t20, which is the timing at which the game round at timing t19 ends among a plurality of game rounds including timing t16, timing t17, timing t18, timing t19, and timing t21. The value of the ceiling counter 131 later becomes "0", and ceiling time saving occurs as shown in FIG. 72(f). As shown in FIG. 72(d) at the timing of t20, the first time saving end flag of the main side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the first time saving continuation number is reset to the time saving state counter 134. Therefore, it will be in the state by which the time saving state was extended.

After that, at the timing of t21, as shown in FIG. 72(b), the end-corresponding game cycle whose execution target is the first hold information ends. However, since the time saving state is extended while the first time saving end flag is cleared to "0" at the timing of t20, the time saving state does not end at the time of t21.

As described above, the game round for which the first hold information is to be executed is executed as the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and in the game round corresponding to the end, the variable display period of the game round is a long period on the special figure side (specifically is 2 minutes). Then, the second suspension information executed in the game round corresponding to the end is triggered by the game round to be executed, and the time saving state is extended by the occurrence of the ceiling time saving. By executing the game round for which the first suspension information is to be executed as the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, it is possible to provide the benefit of extension of the time saving state.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the tenth embodiment in the processing configuration of the variable display period specifying process executed by the main MPU 82 . The configuration different from that of the tenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the tenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing processing for specifying a variable display period according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. As shown in FIG.

If both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 are not set to "1" (step S4701: NO), that is, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, steps S4702 to step The process of S4706 is executed. These steps S4702 to S4706 are the same as steps S4102 to S4106 in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 66) in the tenth embodiment. That is, in the low-frequency support mode, if the first hold information is to start a game round, the variable display period for the game round is selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period. If the second hold information is to start the game round, the longest period (specifically 10 minutes) on the special figure side is selected as the variable display period of the game round regardless of the game result of the game round. The longest period on the special figure side is longer than any variable display period selected with reference to the table group for the normal variable period. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player operates the shooting operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2 to play the game.

If "1" is set to either the first high-frequency flag or the second high-frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4701: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. If it is the support mode, it is determined whether or not the start target of the current game round is the first hold information (step S4707). If the start target of the game round this time is the first suspension information (step S4707: YES), it is determined whether or not the first time saving end flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4708). That is, it is determined whether or not the game round for which the current first suspension information is to be executed is the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state. If "1" is set to the first time saving end flag (step S4708: YES), the information on the shortest period (specifically 3 seconds) on the side of the special figure as the variable display period of this game round Set to the first special figure side timer counter of the main side RAM84 (step S4709), and when "1" is not set to the first time saving end flag (step S4708: NO), the fluctuation display of this game round Information of a long period (specifically 2 minutes) on the special figure side as a period is set to the first special figure side timer counter of the main side RAM 84 (step S4710).

If it is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S4701: YES), and if the start target of the current game cycle is the second hold information (step S4707: NO), step S4711 to execute the processing of step S4713. These steps S4711 to S4713 are the same as steps S4109 to S4111 in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 66) in the tenth embodiment.

As described above, when the game round triggered by the first suspension information in the time saving state is executed as a game round other than the game round corresponding to the end, the variable display period of the game round triggered by the first suspension information Special figure A long period of time (specifically 2 minutes) on the side is selected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the efficiency of digestion of game rounds triggered by the first suspension information in the time saving state. On the other hand, when the game round triggered by the first hold information is started as the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, the shortest period on the special figure side as the variable display period of the game round triggered by the first hold information (Specifically, 3 seconds) is selected. The shortest period on the side of this special figure is a period selected as a variable display period of a game round in which the reach display does not occur, which is a game round triggered by the second hold information in the time saving state. As a result, when the game round triggered by the first hold information becomes the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, the game triggered by the second hold information in the situation where the game round corresponding to the end is being executed It is possible to prevent a cycle from being repeatedly executed.

In addition, if the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state becomes the game round triggered by the first reservation information, if the big hit result occurs in the game round, the shortest on the special figure side as the duration of the game round A configuration may be adopted in which a period longer than the period is selected. For example, it may be configured to select the middle period (specifically 10 seconds) on the special figure side, or may be configured to select the long term (specifically 2 minutes) on the special figure side. Also, using the table for big hits included in the table group for short-term fluctuation read in step S4711 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time, the fluctuation display period corresponding to the occurrence of the ready-to-win display is determined by lottery. The configuration may be determined. As a result, even when the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state becomes the game round triggered by the first holding information, it is possible to secure a certain amount of time until the big winning result occurs.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the tenth embodiment in the processing configuration of the variable display period specifying process executed by the main MPU 82 . The configuration different from that of the tenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the tenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing processing for specifying a variable display period according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82. As shown in FIG.

If both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 are not set to "1" (step S4801: NO), that is, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, steps S4802 to step The process of S4806 is executed. These steps S4802 to S4806 are the same as steps S4102 to S4106 in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 66) in the tenth embodiment. That is, in the low-frequency support mode, if the first hold information is to start a game round, the variable display period for the game round is selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period. If the second hold information is to start the game round, the longest period (specifically 10 minutes) on the special figure side is selected as the variable display period of the game round regardless of the game result of the game round. The longest period on the special figure side is longer than any variable display period selected with reference to the table group for the normal variable period. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player operates the shooting operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2 to play the game.

When "1" is set to either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4801: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. If it is the support mode, it is determined whether or not the start target of the current game round is the first hold information (step S4807). When the start target of the current game round is the first reservation information (step S4807: YES), it is determined whether or not the first time saving end flag of the main side RAM84 is set to "1" (step S4808). That is, it is determined whether or not the game round for which the current first suspension information is to be executed is the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state.

When "1" is set to the 1st time saving end flag (step S4808: YES), the table group for the end timing is read from main side ROM83 to main side RAM84 (step S4809). Then, the variable display period selection process is executed using the table group for the end timing (step S4810), and the information of the variable display period selected in the selection process is stored in the first special figure side timer of the main side RAM84. A counter is set (step S4811).

In the situation where the variable display period selection process in step S4810 is executed with reference to the end timing table group, if a big hit result or a time saving result occurs in this game round, the shortest period on the special figure side (specifically Typically 3 seconds) information is read. Even in the present embodiment, the sound and light side MPU 93, like the tenth embodiment, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the second hold information is the target for starting the game round. When a variation command and a type command indicating that the symbol display device 41 receives a variation command and a type command, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 are started to be variably displayed, and an effect corresponding to the variably displayed symbols is displayed by the display light emitting unit 64 and the While the speaker unit 65 is made to perform, even if the variation command and the type command indicating that the first suspension information is the object to start the game round are received, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 are changed. The variable display and the corresponding effects in the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 are not executed. In addition, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, when a big hit result occurs in the game round triggered by the first suspension information, the pattern display device 41 is displayed at the timing when the game round ends. An effect is performed to notify the occurrence of the jackpot result, and in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, when the time saving result occurs in the game round triggered by the first hold information, the game round At the end timing, the design display device 41 performs an effect to notify the occurrence of the time saving result If both the big hit result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is ended Information on the variable display period corresponding to the end is read out by referring to the table corresponding to the end timing in the table group for timing. As the information of the variable display period corresponding to the end, 3 seconds which is the shortest period of the special figure side, 10 seconds which is the middle period of the special figure side, and 2 minutes which is the long period of the special figure side are set. In the table corresponding to the end timing, the shortest period of the special figure side is selected with a probability of 1/3, the middle period of the special figure side is selected with a probability of 1/3, and the length of the special figure side is selected with a probability of 1/3 A time period is set to be selected.

If "1" is not set to the first time saving end flag (step S4808: NO), the information on the special figure side long term (specifically 2 minutes) as the variable display period of this game round , Set to the first special figure side timer counter of the main side RAM 84 (step S4812).

If it is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S4801: YES), and if the start target of the game round this time is the second hold information (step S4807: NO), step S4813 to execute the processing of step S4815. These steps S4813 to S4815 are the same as steps S4109 to S4111 in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 66) in the tenth embodiment.

As described above, when the game round triggered by the first suspension information in the time saving state is executed as a game round other than the game round corresponding to the end, the variable display period of the game round triggered by the first suspension information Special figure A long period of time (specifically 2 minutes) on the side is selected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the efficiency of digestion of game rounds triggered by the first suspension information in the time saving state. On the other hand, when the game round triggered by the first hold information is started as the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, the shortest period on the special figure side as the variable display period of the game round triggered by the first hold information (Specifically 3 seconds), the middle period of the special figure side (specifically 10 seconds) and the long period of the special figure side (specifically 2 minutes) are selected by lottery. When the shortest period on the special figure side is selected, it is unlikely that the game round triggered by the second pending information is repeatedly executed in the situation where the game round corresponding to the end triggered by the first pending information is being executed. If the middle period on the special figure side is selected, the game round triggered by the second hold information is executed a small number of times in a situation where the game round corresponding to the end triggered by the first hold information is executed. When the long period on the special figure side is selected, the game round triggered by the second hold information is repeated many times in the situation where the game round corresponding to the end triggered by the first hold information is executed. . As a result, when a game round corresponding to the end is executed with the first hold information as a trigger, the player expects that a longer variable display period will be selected, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main MPU 82 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 75 is a front view of the main controller 71 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 75, the main controller 71 has a main control board 81 housed in a board box 71a. A main side MPU 82 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 81 . The board box 71a is formed transparent so that the main side MPU 82 accommodated in the board box 71a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 71a. Although the board box 71a is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent if the main side MPU 82 accommodated in the board box 71a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 71a. good. The main controller 71 is mounted on the rear surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 71a such that the facing wall portion 71b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces the pachinko machine 10 rearward. Therefore, by opening the game machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to see the opposing wall portion 71b of the board box 71a and The main MPU 82 can be seen through the opposing wall portion 71b.

The board box 71a is formed by assembling a plurality of case bodies 71c back and forth, and the plurality of case bodies 71c prevents the separation of the case bodies 71c and leaves traces of the case bodies 71c when the case bodies 71c are separated. A coupling portion 71d is provided for leaving the . A plurality of coupling portions 71d are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped board box 71a. As a result, even if the case body 71c is separated by destroying the part of the coupling portion 71d in a state where the separation of the case body 71c is prevented by using the part of the coupling portion 71d, another coupling is performed after that. By bringing the portion 71d into the coupled state, it becomes possible to prevent the separation of the case body 71c again. In addition, since the connecting portion 71d is destroyed and a trace remains when the case body 71c is separated, it is possible to visually check the connecting portion 71d to determine whether or not the case body 71c has been illegally separated. It becomes possible. In addition, a sealing seal 71e is attached to one side of the substrate box 71a opposite to the one side on which the connecting portions 71d are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 71c. When the sealing seal 71e is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body 71c. As a result, when the sealing seal 71e is peeled off when the case body 71c is separated, it is possible to leave a trace.

In the main control device 71 having the above configuration, the main control board 81 includes a setting key insertion portion 195, a reset button 196, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a setting display device 205, and an abnormality display device. 206 are provided. Incidentally, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the six stages of "setting 1" to "setting 6", but is arbitrary.

The setting key insertion portion 195, the reset button 196, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the setting display device 205 and the error display device 206 are all provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81. FIG. Further, the device mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces the opposing wall portion 71b of the board box 71a as already described, but the setting key insertion portion 195 and the reset button 196 are not covered by the opposing wall portion 71b. In other words, areas of the opposing wall portion 71b that face the setting key insertion portion 195 and the reset button 196 are individual openings. As a result, the setting key can be inserted into the setting key insertion portion 195 and the reset button 196 can be pressed without opening the board box 71a.

By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion portion 195 and rotating it in a predetermined direction, the setting key insertion portion 195 is turned on. By starting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 196 in this state (that is, by starting the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 82 of the main controller 71), the pachinko machine 10 setting state can be changed. In this state, each time the reset button 196 is pressed once, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed step by step in the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6" in ascending order. When the reset button 196 is operated in the state of "setting 6", the state is updated to "setting 1". In addition, the setting key insertion portion 195 is turned off by rotating the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion portion 195 from the ON operation position in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction to return to the initial position. Become. When the setting key inserting portion 195 is turned off, the state in which the setting value can be changed ends, and the game can be played with the setting value at that time. It should be noted that even if the reset button 196 is operated after the state in which the setting value can be changed ends, the setting value cannot be changed.

The ON operation for the setting key inserting portion 195 is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 82 of the main controller 71 is started). Therefore, even if the setting key insertion portion 195a is turned ON after the main MPU 82 of the main controller 71 completes the operation power supply start process, the setting value cannot be changed.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the advantage per unit time in the pachinko machine 10, and the larger the value of "setting n" (n is an integer from "1" to "6") (that is, setting The higher the value, the higher the advantage. There are a low-probability mode in which the probability of winning is relatively low and a high-probability mode in which the probability of winning is relatively high as a success/fail lottery mode for determining the probability of winning a jackpot result, and the higher the set value, the lower the probability. It is set so that the winning probability of the jackpot result is high in each of the mode and the high-probability mode.

By starting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the setting key insertion part 195 is ON-operated and the reset button 196 is not pressed (that is, the operating power to the main side MPU 82 of the main controller 71 ), the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed. Further, when the setting key insertion portion 195 is turned off, the state in which the setting value can be confirmed ends.

By starting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the reset button 196 is pressed without turning ON the setting key insertion part 195 (that is, supplying the operating power to the main side MPU 82 of the main controller 71 ), the data in a predetermined area in the main RAM 84 is cleared. The ON operation for the reset button 196 is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 82 of the main controller 71 is started). Therefore, even if the reset button 196 is pressed after the main MPU 82 of the main controller 71 completes the operation power supply start process, the data in the main RAM 84 cannot be cleared.

Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 is a segment display device in which eight LED display segments are arranged, but is not limited to this and is a liquid crystal display device. or an organic EL display. Each of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 is installed so that its display surface faces the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces. It is covered with the opposing wall portion 71b. In this case, since the substrate box 71a is formed transparent, the display surfaces and setting displays of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 accommodated in the substrate box 71a can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 71a. It becomes possible to view the display surface of the device 205 . In addition, the main control device 71 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 71a so that the facing wall portion 71b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth information display devices 201 are displayed through the opposing wall portion 71b. 204 and the display surface of the setting display device 205 can be visually observed.

The management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204. FIG. In addition, in the setting display device 205, under the condition that the setting value updating process for changing the setting value is being executed, the setting value to be selected is displayed, and the setting confirmation screen for confirming the setting value is displayed. The set value to be set is displayed while the process is being executed. That is, when the setting value of the selection object or the setting object is "setting 1", "1" is displayed on the setting display device 205, and the setting value of the selection object or the setting object is "setting 2". , "2" is displayed on the setting display device 205; , when the setting value of the selection object or the setting object is "setting 4", "4" is displayed on the setting display device 205, and the setting value of the selection object or the setting object is "setting 5". If there is, "5" is displayed on the setting display device 205, and "6" is displayed on the setting display device 205 when the setting value of the selection object or the setting object is "setting 6". . It should be noted that the setting display device 205 is kept turned off when neither the setting value updating process nor the setting confirmation process is being executed.

First to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 for displaying game history management results and a setting display device 205 for displaying set values are arranged side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81. . As described above, the main controller 71 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 71a so that the facing wall portion 71b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. , When the game machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth information through the opposing wall portion 71b. The display surfaces of the display devices 201 to 204 and the display surface of the setting display device 205 can be visually observed. Since a setting key inserting portion 195 and a reset button 196 are provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, the game machine main body 12 is placed against the outer frame 11 when executing the setting value updating process or the setting confirmation process. The back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening the pachinko machine 10 forward. By being provided on the mounting surface, not only the setting values to be selected or set on the setting display device 205 but also the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be displayed. Visual observation becomes possible.

The abnormality display device 206 is provided with a monochromatic LED. The error display device 206 is installed so that its light emitting surface faces the direction of the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, and is covered with the opposing wall portion 71b of the board box 71a. In this case, since the board box 71a is formed transparent, the abnormality display device 206 accommodated in the board box 71a can be seen from the outside of the board box 71a. In addition, the main control device 71 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 71a so that the facing wall portion 71b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the rear surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the abnormality display device 206 can be visually observed through the opposing wall portion 71b. becomes. When a predetermined abnormality occurs, the abnormality display device 206 changes from the off state to the on state, and the on state continues until the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 82 is stopped.

<Specific control and non-specific control>
Next, the execution contents of various controls in the main MPU 82 will be described.

Various controls executed using programs in the main MPU 82 are classified into specific control and non-specific control. Specifically, control related to game history management and fraud monitoring is defined as non-specific control, and control other than non-specific control, including control for progressing a game based on game operations by a player, is defined as specific control. ing. Specifically, the control by the main process (FIG. 81) executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started is included in the specific control, except for the first management process described later. The first management process is included in non-specific control. In addition, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) exist as processing that is periodically interrupted and started, and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) All processes are included in the specific control, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is included in the specific control except for the fraud detection process and the second management process, which will be described later. 2 Administrative processing is included in non-specific control.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how programs and data are set in the main-side ROM 83. As shown in FIG. In correspondence with the fact that the control executed by the master side MPU 82 is distinguished between specific control and non-specific control, as shown in FIG. The addresses of the areas in which the data, programs for non-specific control, and data for non-specific control are stored are clearly distinguished.

Specifically, programs for specific control are collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range of address X(1) to address X(k+2). Further, addresses X(k+3) to X(k+5) consecutive to addresses X(1) to X(k+2) are addresses of unused areas in which data is not stored. Data for specific control are collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range from X(k+6) to address X(m+2). Further, addresses X(m+3) to X(m+5) consecutive to addresses X(k+6) to X(m+2) are addresses of unused areas in which data is not stored. Programs for non-specific control are collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range from X(m+6) to address X(n+2). Further, addresses X(n+3) to X(n+5) consecutive to addresses X(m+6) to X(n+2) are addresses of unused areas in which data is not stored. Non-specific control data are collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range from X(n+6) to address X(p+2). The relationship between programs and data and addresses as described above is set in both physical addresses in the main ROM 83 and logical addresses on the memory map recognized by the main MPU 82 .

As described above, the specific control program and specific control data, and the non-specific control program and non-specific control data, regardless of the execution order of the processes for executing the corresponding controls, Since they are stored in different address areas, when checking only the specific control program and specific control data, the address range in which the specific control program and specific control data are stored If only the non-specific control program and non-specific control data are to be checked, the address range in which the non-specific control program and non-specific control data are stored Just check the area. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently perform work when checking programs and data by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control. In addition, along with this, it becomes possible to efficiently perform the work for correcting programs and data by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control.

No data is stored between the address range of the area in which the specific control program and specific control data are stored and the address range of the area in which the non-specific control program and non-specific control data are stored. By setting the address range of the unused area, it becomes easier to grasp the boundary between the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control in checking work.

In each of the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control, programs and data are stored in areas of different ranges of addresses, regardless of the execution order of processes for executing the corresponding control. By doing so, it becomes possible to efficiently perform work when checking programs and data separately. In addition, since the address range of an unused area in which no data is stored is set between the address range of the area in which the program is stored and the address range of the area in which the data is stored, the program This makes it easier to grasp the boundary between the address range and the data address range during the checking work.

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how each area in the main RAM 84 is set. As shown in FIG. 77, in correspondence with the fact that the control executed by using the program in the master side MPU 82 is distinguished between the specific control and the non-specific control, the master side RAM 84 also has a work for specific control. The address ranges of the area 211 and the stack area 212 for specific control are clearly distinguished from the address ranges of the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control.

Specifically, an area of each continuous address within the range of address Y(1) to address Y(r+2) is set as a work area 211 for specific control. In addition, addresses Y(r+3) to Y(r+5) that are continuous with addresses Y(1) to Y(r+2) are addresses of unused areas. An area of consecutive addresses within the range of Y(s+2) is set as a stack area 212 for specific control. In addition, addresses Y (s+3) to Y (s+5) consecutive to addresses Y (r+6) to Y (s+2) are addresses of unused areas. An area of consecutive addresses within the range of Y(t+2) is set as a work area 213 for non-specific control. In addition, addresses Y(t+3) to Y(t+5) that are continuous with addresses Y(s+6) to Y(t+2) are addresses of unused areas. An area of consecutive addresses within the range of Y(u+2) is set as a stack area 214 for non-specific control. The relationship between each area and the address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main side RAM 84 and the logical address on the memory map recognized in the main side MPU 82 .

Since the work area 211 for specific control and the work area 213 for non-specific control are separately set as described above, when the main MPU 82 executes the specific control and when the non-specific control is executed, Therefore, different areas of the main RAM 84 are used when executing various calculations. As a result, when one of the specific control and the non-specific control is executed, it is possible to make it difficult to cause an event in which necessary information in the main RAM 84 is erased in the other. Incidentally, when writing information to the work areas 211 and 213 and reading information from the work areas 211 and 213, the main MPU 82 executes a load instruction.

Since the stack area 212 for specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are separately set, the main MPU 82 can determine whether the main MPU 82 executes the specific control or the non-specific control. Different areas of the main RAM 84 are used for saving the information stored in the register of the side MPU 82 and for storing the return address information on the program. As a result, when one of the specific control and non-specific control is executed, when saving the information stored in the register of the main side MPU 82 and when storing the information of the return address on the program, the other can be used. It is possible to make it difficult to cause an event such as the information to be deleted to be erased. Incidentally, when writing information to the stack areas 212 and 214, the main MPU 82 executes a push instruction, and when reading information from the stack areas 212 and 214, the main MPU 82 executes a pop instruction. When reading information from each of the stack areas 212 and 214, the information written later in the stack area 212 and 214 is read first.

Here, when the main MPU 82 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main MPU 82 can write information to the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, Information can be read from the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. On the other hand, when the main MPU 82 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main MPU 82 can read information from the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. , the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control cannot be written. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control from being erroneously deleted while the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed.

When the main MPU 82 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main MPU 82 can write information to the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. In addition, information can be read from the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. On the other hand, when the main MPU 82 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, although the main MPU 82 can read information from the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, Information cannot be written to the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control from being erroneously deleted in a situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed.

Although backup power is supplied to the main RAM 84 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the backup power includes the work area 211 for specific control, the stack area 212 for specific control, and the non-specific control. and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. As a result, the information stored in the work area 211 for specific control, the stack area 212 for specific control, the work area 213 for non-specific control, and the stack area 214 for non-specific control is stored in the power supply of the pachinko machine 10. Even afterward, the memory is retained while the backup power is being supplied.

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various storage areas provided in the work area 211 for specific control and various storage areas provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

The specific control work area 211 includes a first security counter 211a, a special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b, a general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c, a confirmation flag group 211d, a previous value storage area 211e, a security flag 211f, and a checking flag 211f. A counter 211g is provided. The work area 213 for non-specific control includes first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, a magnetic detection counter 213i, a magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, a second security counter 213k, and first to third general winning abnormalities. Flags 213l to 213n, a special electric prize winning abnormality flag 213o, a first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, a second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, an out abnormality flag 213r, a gate winning abnormality flag 213s and a magnetic abnormality flag 213t are provided.

Both the first security counter 211a in the specific control work area 211 and the second security counter 213k in the non-specific control work area 213 externally output a pulse-shaped security signal from the main MPU 82 to the gaming hall management computer. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not it is necessary to do so. This is the counter used. Events that trigger the output of a pulse-shaped security signal to the outside include execution of set value update processing, execution of clearing processing of the main side RAM 84, detection of disconnection of a predetermined detection sensor, detection of a short circuit of a predetermined detection sensor, and winning anomaly. and detection of magnetic anomaly. The event that triggers the external output of the pulse-shaped security signal is not limited to those listed above. 12 opening operations, etc. may be included. Further, the previous value storage area 211e and the security flag 211f are used when executing the external output of the security signal as described above and the processing associated therewith.

The special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b in the work area 211 for specific control detects the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a provided in the special electric prize winning device 32, and the special electric prize winning device 32 in the open state becomes the closed state. This is a counter that is used by the main MPU 82 to specify a period to be treated as valid even later. The general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c of the work area 211 for specific control detects the game ball detected by the second working opening detection sensor 236a provided in the second working opening 34, and detects the second working opening 34 in the open state. is a counter used by the main side MPU 82 to specify a period to be treated as valid even after the is closed. In the confirmation flag group 211d of the work area 211 for specific control, to each of the out port 24a, the three general winning ports 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 Various confirmation flags are provided for the main side MPU 82 to confirm the entry of the game ball. The checking counter 211g of the work area 211 for specific control is used when executing the display control of the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification.

The first to third winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213c in the work area 213 for non-specific control correspond to the three general winning ports 31 on a one-to-one basis. The first to third winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213c disable the detection of the next game ball after detecting one game ball in the winning hole detecting sensors 231a to 233a provided in the corresponding general winning hole 31. This is a counter used for specifying the period treated as . In addition, in the first embodiment, four general prize-winning ports 31 are provided, but in this embodiment, three general prize-winning ports 31 are provided.

The fourth prize winning monitoring timer counter 213d of the work area 213 for non-specific control detects a game ball in the special electric prize detection sensor 234a of the special electric prize winning device 32 and treats the detection of the next game ball as invalid. This is a counter used for identification by the main MPU 82 . The fifth winning monitoring timer counter 213e of the work area 213 for non-specific control detects one game ball in the first operation opening detection sensor 235a provided in the first operation opening 33, and then the next game ball. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify a period during which detection is treated as invalid. The sixth winning monitoring timer counter 213f of the work area 213 for non-specific control disables the detection of the next game ball after detecting one game ball in the second operation opening detection sensor 236a of the second operation opening 34. This is a counter used for specifying the period treated as . The seventh winning monitoring timer counter 213g of the work area 213 for unspecified control disables the detection of the next game ball after detecting one game ball in the out hole detection sensor 237a provided in the out hole 24a. This counter is used to specify the period to be handled by the main MPU 82 . The eighth winning monitoring timer counter 213h of the work area 213 for non-specific control treats the detection of the next game ball as invalid after detecting one game ball in the gate detection sensor 238a provided in the through gate 35. A counter used to specify the period in the main MPU 82 .

Although the details will be described later, whether or not the game ball enters the three general winning openings 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, the through gate 35, and the out opening 24a normally Non-specific control includes processing for monitoring whether In this case, whether or not the game ball enters the three general winning openings 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, the through gate 35 and the out opening 24a normally. Of the various timer counters 211b, 211c, 213a to 213h provided for monitoring, the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the work area 211 for specific control. On the other hand, the first to eighth winning watch timer counters 213a to 213h are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

Since the measurement of the invalid period of game ball detection using the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h is triggered by the detection result of each detection sensor 231a to 238a, the start trigger is a specific control process. It is possible to specify in the process of non-specific control without considering the result. Therefore, by providing the first to eighth prize-winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the first to eighth prize-winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h can be set without considering the processing result of the specific control. It is possible to measure the invalid period of the game ball detection using the non-specific control process. In such circumstances, by providing the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the required storage capacity in the work area 211 for specific control can be reduced. It becomes possible.

On the other hand, the measurement of the effective period of game ball detection using the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b is started when the special electric winning device 32 is changed from the open state to the closed state. The measurement of the valid period of game ball detection using the delay timer counter 211c is triggered by the execution of the process of changing the second operation port 34 from the open state to the closed state. Since the process of closing the special electric prize winning device 32 and the second operation port 34 is executed as a process of specific control, the process of non-specific control is performed without taking into account the result of the process of the specific control with the start trigger. It is impossible to specify In this case, if the special electricity monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electricity monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the non-specific control work area 213, the special electricity monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electricity monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electricity monitoring delay timer counter 211c There is a risk that the processing configuration for specifying the trigger for starting measurement of the valid period in the counter 211c will become complicated. On the other hand, by providing the special electrical monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electrical monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the specific control work area 211 instead of the non-specific control work area 213, the specific control work area In 211, it is possible to avoid complicating the processing configuration even though the necessary storage capacity increases accordingly.

The first to third general prize winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n of the work area 213 for non-specific control are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the three general prize winning ports 31, and the first to third prize winning monitoring timers are provided. As a result of the monitoring process using the counters 213a to 213c, when it is specified by the non-specific control process that the detection of the entering ball of the game ball which is not normal occurs, the first non-specific control process is performed. 1 is set to the corresponding flag among the third general winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n. The special electric prize-winning abnormality flag 213o of the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided corresponding to the special electric prize-winning device 32, and the result of the monitoring processing using the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b or the fourth prize-winning monitoring timer counter 213d , When it is specified in the non-specific control process that the abnormal game ball has been detected, the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o is set to "1" in the non-specific control process. .

The first operation winning abnormality flag 213p of the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided corresponding to the first operation opening 33, and as a result of the monitoring processing using the fifth winning monitoring timer counter 213e, the game that is not normal When it is specified in the non-specific control process that the ball has been detected, the first action winning abnormality flag 213p is set to "1" in the non-specific control process. The second operation winning abnormality flag 213q of the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided corresponding to the second operation port 34, and the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c or the sixth winning monitoring timer counter 213f is used. As a result of the monitoring process, when it is specified in the non-specific control process that an abnormal game ball has been detected, the non-specific control process sets the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q to " 1" is set.

The out abnormality flag 213r of the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided corresponding to the out port 24a, and as a result of the monitoring processing using the seventh prize winning monitoring timer counter 213g, the entry of the game ball that is not normal When the occurrence of the detection is specified by the non-specific control process, the out abnormality flag 213r is set to "1" by the non-specific control process. The gate winning abnormality flag 213s of the work area 213 for specific control is provided corresponding to the through gate 35, and as a result of the monitoring processing using the eighth winning monitoring timer counter 213h, the entry of the game ball that is not normal. When it is specified by the non-specific control process that the detection has occurred, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s is set to "1" by the non-specific control process.

The magnetic detection counter 213i of the work area 213 for non-specific control is a counter for specifying the number of times the occurrence of magnetic abnormality is specified by the main MPU 82. FIG. In this embodiment, a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the game board 24 , and the detection result of the magnetic detection sensor is input to the main side MPU 82 . The magnetic detection sensor outputs a LOW level magnetic detection signal to the main side MPU 82 when not detecting magnetism, and outputs a HI level magnetic detection signal to the main side MPU 82 when detecting magnetism. The magnetism monitoring delay timer counter 213j in the work area 213 for non-specific control is a counter for specifying a period during which no magnetism abnormality is monitored by the main MPU 82. FIG. In the magnetic abnormality flag 213t of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the magnetic detection counter 213i measures the period in which the magnetic abnormality is not monitored by the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j. "1" is set in the non-specific control process when it is specified in the non-specific control process that the number of occurrences of the timing abnormality has reached the abnormality reference number (specifically, "3"). .

<Configuration of command transmission>
FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for transmitting a command from the main side MPU 82 to the sound and light side MPU 93. FIG.

The main MPU 82 is provided with a specific control processing unit 221 as a function of executing specific control processing using a specific control program and specific control data stored in the main ROM 83 . A non-specific control processing unit 222 is provided as a function of executing non-specific control processing using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data stored in the side ROM 83 . When specific control processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221, as already described, information is read from and written to the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. At the same time, information is read from the work area 213 for non-specific control. When specific control processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221, information is not written to the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. When non-specific control processing is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222, as already described, information is read from the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and information is While writing is performed, information is read from the work area 211 for specific control. When non-specific control processing is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222, information is not written to the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

Regardless of whether the specific control processing unit 221 executes the specific control processing or the non-specific control processing unit 222 executes the non-specific control processing, the registers provided in the main MPU 82 Information is read from the area 223 and written to the register area 223 . The register area 223 is provided with a general-purpose register area 223a and a command transmission buffer 223b. The general-purpose register area 223a includes flag registers, various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, index registers, and the like. A WA register, a BC register, a DE register, a HL register, an IX register and an IY register are provided as various general purpose registers, auxiliary registers and index registers.

The command transmission buffer 223b needs to transmit a predetermined command to the sound and light side MPU 93 provided on the sound light emission control board 92 of the sound light emission control device 91 when the specific control processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221. is stored. Further, the command transmission buffer 223b stores a specific command to be transmitted when it becomes necessary to transmit a specific command to the sound and light side MPU 93 due to execution of non-specific control processing in the non-specific control processing unit 222. commands are stored. The command transmission buffer 223b is provided as a ring buffer having a plurality of unit storage areas capable of storing one type of command. The command to be transmitted is written in the unit storage area corresponding to the information of the write pointer provided in the main MPU 82 . In this case, the unit storage areas to be written are sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the last order unit storage area is the write target, the first order unit storage area is the write target.

Commands written in each unit storage area of the command transmission buffer 223 b are transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224 provided in the main side MPU 82 . The command transmission circuit 224 is provided with a read pointer, and transmits the command stored in the unit storage area corresponding to the information of the read pointer to the sound and light side MPU 93 . In this case, the unit storage areas to be read are sequentially switched according to a specific order, and after the unit storage area in the last order is to be read, the unit storage area in the first order is to be read.

The command transmission circuit 224 does not involve execution of processing using programs in the specific control processing unit 221 and non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82, that is, without intervening execution of processing using programs. A command is read from the read target unit storage area of the command transmission buffer 223b, and the read command is transmitted. Therefore, even when the command transmission circuit 224 is transmitting commands to the sound and light side MPU 93, the specific control processing unit 221 can execute the specific control process, and the non-specific control processing unit 222 A non-specific control process may be performed. Furthermore, even if the command stored in the command transmission buffer 223b is being transmitted by the command transmission circuit 224 due to the execution of the specific control processing by the specific control processing unit 221, the specific control processing unit 221 Not only can the specific control processing be executed in the non-specific control processing unit 222, but also the non-specific control processing can be executed in the non-specific control processing unit 222. As a result, even when the command stored in the command transmission buffer 223b is being transmitted by the command transmission circuit 224, the non-specific control processing unit 222 can execute the non-specific control processing as well as the specific control processing. It is a configuration in which the processing of specific control can be executed in the unit 221 .

Note that the command transmission speed of the command transmission circuit 224 to the sound and light side MPU 93 is such that when a new command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, the untransmitted command stored in the command transmission buffer 223b is overwritten. It is set to a speed that does not overwhelm you.

How the command is transmitted will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 80(a) shows a period during which specific control processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221, and FIG. 80(b) shows a period during which non-specific control processing is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222. FIG. 80(c) shows the timing at which commands are stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, and FIG.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the specific control processing in the specific control processing unit 221 is started. Thereafter, the command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b as shown in FIG. 80(c) by executing the specific control process at the timing of t2. Since an untransmitted command exists in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 starts transmitting the command at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 80(d). Since the specific control processing in the specific control processing unit 221 and the command transmission operation in the command transmission circuit 224 are performed independently of each other, as shown in FIG. Even during the period when the command is being transmitted by the command transmission circuit 224, the specific control processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 as shown in FIG. 80(a).

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the command is sent again to the command transmission buffer 223b as shown in FIG. Stored. Since an untransmitted command exists in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 starts transmitting the command at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 80(d).

After that, in a situation where the transmission of the command started at timing t4 continues, at timing t5, the specific control processing unit 221 performs specific control processing as shown in FIGS. The state of execution is switched to the state of non-specific control processing being executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 . In this case, the operation of transmitting the command in the command transmission circuit 224 is performed not only independently of the specific control processing in the specific control processing unit 221, but also independently of the non-specific control processing in the non-specific control processing unit 222. done. Therefore, even if the situation in which the specific control process is executed is switched to the situation in which the non-specific control process is executed at the timing of t5, the command transmission continues as shown in FIG. 80(d). . Transmission of the command ends at timing t6.

After that, the command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b as shown in FIG. 80(c) by executing the non-specific control process at the timing of t7. Since an untransmitted command exists in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 starts transmitting the command at the timing t7 as shown in FIG. 80(d). Since the non-specific control processing in the non-specific control processing unit 222 and the command transmission operation in the command transmission circuit 224 are performed independently of each other, as shown in FIG. Even during a period in which commands are transmitted by the command transmission circuit 224 over a period of time, as shown in FIG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80(b), in a situation where non-specific control processing is being executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222, at the timing of t9, a command is sent to the command transmission buffer 223b as shown in FIG. 80(c). is stored again. Since an untransmitted command exists in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 starts transmitting the command at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 80(d).

After that, in a situation where the transmission of the command started at the timing of t9 continues, the non-specific control processing unit 222 performs the non-specific control at the timing of t10 as shown in FIGS. The state in which the process is being executed is switched to the state in which the specific control process is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 . In this case, the operation of transmitting the command in the command transmission circuit 224 is performed not only independently of the non-specific control processing in the non-specific control processing unit 222, but also independently of the specific control processing in the specific control processing unit 221. done. Therefore, even if the situation in which the specific control process is executed is switched to the situation in which the non-specific control process is executed at the timing of t10, the command transmission continues as shown in FIG. 80(d). . Transmission of the command ends at timing t11.

As described above, the specified control processing unit 221 is executing the specific control process, and the non-specific control processing unit 222 is executing the non-specific control process. The received command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223. FIG. In other words, even if the area to which information is to be written in the main RAM 84 differs between the situation in which the specific control process is executed and the situation in which the non-specific control process is executed, The command writing area is used both in a situation where specific control processing is being executed and in a situation where non-specific control processing is being executed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to concentrate the processing for storing the command into only one of the specific control processing and the non-specific control processing, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration for storing the command from becoming complicated. It becomes possible.

The commands stored in the command transmission buffer 223b are transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224 that operates independently of the specific control process and the non-specific control process. As a result, there is no need to adjust the command transmission timing in relation to the execution content of the process using the program in the main MPU 82, so it is possible to simplify the processing configuration of the process using the program in the main MPU 82. becomes.

<Main processing>
Next, various processes executed by the main MPU 82 using programs will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. As shown in FIG. Of the processes in steps S4901 to S4932 in the main process, processes other than the first management process called and executed in step S4927 use the specific control program and specific control data. It is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the side MPU 82, and the first management process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main side MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control. be.

First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step S4901). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during this predetermined waiting period. Also, access to the main side RAM 84 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step S4902). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds). seconds), and the interrupt cycle of a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to a cycle shorter than the first interrupt cycle. Set the second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds).

In other words, in this embodiment, there are the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) so that the interrupt cycles are relatively long and short as the timer interrupt processing. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are started by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) and is not activated. In addition, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have passed in a situation where neither the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) nor the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are executed, those cycles The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is started first, regardless of the order of progress. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). However, the invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) may be started with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is set in a predetermined register of the main MPU 82, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is set as the main interrupt period. A specific register of the side MPU 82 is set. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, the setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1, for example, is executed.

After that, protection setting processing is executed (step S4903). In the protect setting process, by setting "1" to the protect register 223c provided in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack for specific control among the areas of the main RAM 84 are set. Unused areas other than the area 212, the work area 213 for non-specific control, and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are excluded from targets for writing information (including "0" clear). .

Specifically, the main MPU 82 is provided with a RAM management circuit 225 (see FIG. 79) for writing information to the main RAM 84 and reading information from the main RAM 84 . When the address of the area from which the information is to be read is specified by executing the processing by the program in the main MPU 82, the RAM management circuit 225 reads the information from the area of the specified address and supplies it to the main MPU 82, When the address of an area to which information is to be written is specified by execution of processing by a program in the main MPU 82, the specified information is written in the area of the specified address. In this case, the main ROM 83 has an unused area address range (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) in the main RAM 84). to address Y(t+5)) are stored in advance. When the protection setting is performed, the RAM management circuit 225, when the address of the area to which information is to be written is specified, stores that address in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83. If it is included, the information is not written. Writing this information also includes a '0' clear. This makes it possible to prevent information from being written to an unused area in the main RAM 84 .

It should be noted that the RAM management circuit 225 specifies that the address specified as the target for writing information is included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main-side ROM 83 when the protection is set. When the information is written, the configuration may be such that not only is the information not written but also the abnormality is notified. The execution mode of the abnormality notification is arbitrary, but for example, the display light emitting unit 64 may be configured to emit light for abnormality, the speaker unit 65 may be configured to output sound for abnormality, or a pattern display device. 41 may be configured to perform a display for abnormality, or may be configured to perform an external output for abnormality to a management computer provided in the game hall.

The register area 223 of the main MPU 82 is provided with a protect register 223c as shown in FIG. The protect register 223c is for unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)). This is a storage area for specifying in the RAM management circuit 225 whether writing of information is prohibited. When the protection information is set in the protection register 223c, the protection setting is performed, and the addresses included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main-side ROM 83 are written. Even if it is specified, information is not written to the area of the address as described above. On the other hand, if the protection information is not set in the protection register 223c, the protection setting is not performed, and the address included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83 is written. When it is specified as a target, information is written in the area of that address.

The protect register 223c is set as a 1-bit area. When "1" is set in the protect register 223c, the protect information is set in the protect register 223c, and when the information in the protect register 223c is "0", the protect register 223c This applies when protection information is not set in When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the information in the protect register 223c is "0", so that the protect information is not set, but the protect setting process of step S4903 is executed. As a result, "1" is set in the protect register 223c and the protect information is set. As a result, information on unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) cannot be written.

The protect register 223c is not limited to a 1-bit area, and may be configured as a 2-bit or more area, a 1-byte area, or a 2-byte area.

After that, "1" is set to the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S4904). Even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), which will be described later, is started, the start-up processing flag indicates power failure monitoring and updating of various counters among the various processing set in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88). , and the main MPU 82 that the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) should be terminated without executing the processing for progressing the game while executing the processing for managing the game history. It is a flag for specifying in .

The start-up processing flag is set to "1" when the processing (steps S4901 to S4928) at the start of supply of operating power is started in the main processing (FIG. 81). It is cleared to "0" before (steps S4901 to S4928) are completed and the remaining processing (steps S4929 to S4932) is started. In the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S5506 to S5520 is not executed. Among the processes (steps S4901 to S4928), it is possible to prevent the execution of the process for progressing the game while the setting confirmation process or setting value update process, which will be described later, is being executed. On the other hand, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), even if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", by executing the processing of steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521, Power outage monitoring is executed even in a situation where setting confirmation processing or setting value update processing, which will be described later, is being executed out of the processing (steps S4901 to S4928) at the start of supply, and the winning random number counter C1, type The random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and the game history is managed.

By the way, in a situation where setting confirmation processing or setting value update processing is being executed, interrupts are not prohibited for either the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) or the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114). Interruption is possible at any timing. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is interrupted and started in the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process, the timer interrupt Information on the return address of the main processing (FIG. 81) for returning after the processing is completed is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and various registers of the main MPU 82 immediately before the timer interrupt processing is started. information is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be activated ends, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 81) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control. Information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control is returned to various registers of the main MPU 82 .

After "1" is set to the startup processing flag in step S4904, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the power failure flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S4905). . When power failure processing is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S5501) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the power failure flag is set to "1". The power failure flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 82 whether or not the power failure processing was appropriately performed at the time of the previous power failure.

If the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S4905: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step S4906). Specifically, first, checksums are calculated for the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. After that, the work area 211 for specific control and the The checksum for the stack area 212 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the current main processing. Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match.

If the checksums match (step S4906: YES), it is determined whether the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area in the specific control work area 211 is within the normal range ( step S4907). The setting reference area is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main side MPU 82 is stored. When the setting reference area stores the numerical value information of "1", the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1". When the setting reference area stores the numerical value information of "2", the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". When the setting reference area stores the numerical value information of "3", the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". When the numerical value information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". When the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". When the numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6". In step S4907, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting reference area is any one of "1" to "6".

If all of steps S4905 to S4907 are affirmative, it is determined whether or not the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 211 is set to "1" (step S4908). The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that the setting value update process described later is being executed. When the setting update display flag is set to "1", the main controller A setting display device 205 of 71 displays a setting value that is being updated. The setting update display flag is set to "1" when the setting value update process is started, and is cleared to "0" when the setting value update process ends. Therefore, the setting value update process is executed. In a situation where the setting update display flag is not set to "1", the setting update display flag is basically not set. However, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped while the setting value update process is being executed, the setting update display will be displayed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started after that. The flag is set to "1". The state in which the setting update display flag is set to "1" is maintained until the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting value updating process.

If a negative determination is made in step S4908 because the setting update display flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the reset button 196 is pressed (step S4909). That is, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 82 is started by performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the reset button 196 is being pressed.

If the reset button 196 is not pressed (step S4909: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S4910). The game stop flag is set to "1" when the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksum does not match, or the set value is abnormal. By setting "1" to the game stop flag, while executing the processing of steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), step by making an affirmative determination in step S5505 The processing from S5506 to S5520 is not executed. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control If the checksum does not match due to a change in the information storage state from the previous power shutdown for at least one of them, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and game play While the process for managing the history is executed, the process for progressing the game is not executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4910, the processing of steps S4924 and S4925, which will be described later, is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4910, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 195 has been turned on using a setting key (step S4911). If the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on using the setting key (step S4911: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S4913). Even if the setting key insertion unit 195 is not turned on using the setting key (step S4911: NO), the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". If set (step S4912: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S4913).

The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 82 that the setting confirmation process is being executed. A setting display device 205 displays a setting value currently set. The setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process is started, and is cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process is terminated. Therefore, the setting confirmation process is executed. In a situation where the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1", the setting confirmation display flag is basically not set. However, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped while the setting confirmation process is being executed, the setting confirmation display will be displayed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is subsequently started. The flag is set to "1". When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the RAM clear processing (step S4919) described later is executed, the set value update processing described later is executed, or the setting confirmation is performed in the setting confirmation processing. This is maintained until the process of clearing the display flag to "0" is executed.

As described above, not only when the reset button 196 is not pressed and the setting key insertion portion 195 is ON (that is, when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 196 is By executing the setting confirmation process even when the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" when no pressing operation is performed, the power failure process can be performed in the situation where the setting confirmation process is being executed. is executed, the setting confirmation process is executed even if the "setting confirmation operation" is not performed when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter. As a result, it is possible to continue to confirm the current set values of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, even if the power failure processing is executed while the setting confirmation processing is being executed, if the reset button 196 is pressed when the supply of operating power is resumed after that, the setting confirmation processing is executed. is executed, the RAM clearing process (step S4919) and the set value updating process corresponding to the operation performed at the time of resuming the supply of operating power are executed. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the RAM clearing process (step S4919) or the set value updating process over the setting confirmation process.

Here, the setting confirmation processing executed in step S4913 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process. The processing of steps S5001 to S5007 in the setting confirmation processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using the specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt permission is set (step S5001). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt cycle.

In the processing (steps S4901 to S4928) at the start of supply of operating power, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are basically prohibited, and the setting confirmation processing is performed. and interrupts are permitted in the set value update process. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process are not executed in the process (steps S4901 to S4928) at the start of supply of operating power, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited, and the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted when the setting confirmation process or the set value update process is being executed. be. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is being executed, even if the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88) is started, the start-up process flag is set to "1". Of the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and management of game history are executed, while processes for progressing the game are executed. Without this, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is terminated.

After that, on condition that the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is not set to "1", the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step S5002). When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the setting display device 205 of the main controller 71 displays the currently set value.

After that, the confirmation start command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5003). When the confirmation start command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, the confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. FIG. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the confirmation start command, an image indicating that the setting confirmation process is being executed and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for ending the setting confirmation process are displayed. The display-side MPU 103 is controlled to display on the device 41 . As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed, and to confirm the operation details necessary to end the setting confirmation process. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize it.

After that, the setting key inserting unit 195 determines whether or not the setting key is used to switch from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5004). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion portion 195 has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. . Therefore, the OFF state is maintained not only when the setting key insertion unit 195 is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit 195 is in the OFF state. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S5004. If it is not specified that the setting key insertion unit 195 has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5004: NO), the process of step S5004 is repeated.

If it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 195 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5004: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5005). As a result, the display of the currently set values on the setting display device 205 ends.

After that, interrupt prohibition is set (step S5006). As a result, in the case of ending the setting confirmation process and returning to the process (steps S4901 to S4928) at the start of supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 81), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) 2 timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is disabled.

After that, the return command at the time of confirmation is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main side MPU 82 (step S5007). By storing the confirmation return command in the command transmission buffer 223 b , the command transmission circuit 224 operates to transmit the confirmation return command to the sound and light side MPU 93 . By receiving the return command at the time of confirmation, the sound and light side MPU 93 can recognize the image indicating that the setting confirmation process is being executed in the pattern display device 41 and the operation content for ending the setting confirmation process. end the display of the image for

As described above, when the setting key inserting portion 195 is turned ON by the setting key without pressing the reset button 196, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. In the situation where the main processing (FIG. 81) is started, the reset button 196 is not pressed and the setting key insertion portion 195 is turned ON, and the game proceeds in the main processing (FIG. 81). The setting confirmation process is executed in a situation where the process at the time of starting supply of operating power is being executed, which is the situation before the process of (1) is executed. As a result, it is possible to check the set value even when no game is being played.

Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 81), when the setting key insertion unit 195 is not turned on using the setting key and the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1" (steps S4911 and Step S4912: NO), the normal return command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S4914). By storing the normal return command in the command transmission buffer 223 b , the command transmission circuit 224 operates to transmit the normal return command to the sound and light side MPU 93 . By receiving the normal return command, the sound and light side MPU 93 specifies that the main side MPU 82 has completed the processing for starting supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), and at the time of starting the current supply of operating power. (steps S4901 to S4928), it is determined that none of the RAM clearing process (step S4919), setting confirmation process, and setting value update process has been executed. Then, the process corresponding to the reception of the normal return command is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4909 that the reset button 196 has been pressed and if it is determined in step S4915 that the setting key insertion unit 195 has been turned on using the setting key, or step S4915 If it is determined in S4908 that the setting update display flag is set to "1", setting value update processing is executed (step S4916). As described above, not only when the reset button 196 is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 195 is turned ON (that is, when the "setting change operation" is performed), the reset button 196 is pressed. The setting value updating process is executed by executing the setting value updating process even when the setting update display flag is set to "1" regardless of whether or not there is a pressing operation and an ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 195. If the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the power failure is performed, the operation contents at the time of starting the supply of the operating power after that are "no operation", "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation" and "setting confirmation operation". The set value update process is executed in any of the cases. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the set value update process.

Here, the setting value updating process executed in step S4916 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing setting value update processing. The processing of steps S5101 to S5115 in the set value update process is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using the specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt permission is set (step S5101). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt cycle.

In the processing (steps S4901 to S4928) at the start of supply of operating power, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are basically prohibited, and the setting confirmation processing is performed. and interrupts are permitted in the set value update process. Therefore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process are not executed in the process (steps S4901 to S4928) when the supply of operating power is started, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited, and the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted when the setting confirmation process or the set value update process is being executed. be. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is being executed, even if the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88) is started, the startup process in progress flag is set to "1". Of the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and management of game history are executed, while processes for progressing the game are executed. Without this, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is terminated.

After that, on condition that the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 211 is not set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step S5102). By setting the setting update display flag to "1", the currently selected setting value is displayed on the setting display device 205 of the main controller 71. FIG.

After that, initial setting at start is performed (step S5103). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". If the game stop flag is not set to "1" in the power failure flag because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure (step S4905: NO), the work area 211 for specific control and If the checksum does not match due to a change in the storage state of information from the previous power shutdown in at least one of the stack areas 212 for specific control (step S4906: NO), or if the setting reference area This flag is set to "1" in step S4922 of the main process (FIG. 81) when the set value corresponding to the stored information is not within the normal range (step S4907: NO). By setting "1" to the game stop flag, while executing the processing of steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), step by making an affirmative determination in step S5505 The processing from S5506 to S5520 is not executed. As a result, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84 as described above, processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and management of game history is executed, while processing for progressing the game is executed. will not be executed. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the processing of step S5103, it becomes possible to cancel the state in which the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main side RAM 84 is specified when the set value update processing is executed. .

Thereafter, "1" is set in the setting update area in the specific control work area 211 (step S5104). The setting update area is a storage area in which information about setting values that are being updated in the setting value update process is stored. When the setting update area stores the numerical value information "1", the setting value to be selected is "setting 1". When the setting update area stores the numerical value information "2", the setting value to be selected is "setting 2". When the setting update area stores the numerical value information "3", the setting value to be selected is "setting 3". When the setting update area stores the numerical value information "4", the setting value to be selected is "setting 4". When the setting update area stores the numerical value information of "5", the setting value to be selected is "setting 5". When the setting update area stores the numerical value information "6", the setting value to be selected is "setting 6".

By setting "1" in the setting update area in step S5104, the setting value to be selected becomes "setting 1". That is, regardless of the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10, when the setting value update process is started, the setting value to be selected becomes "setting 1". Note that a configuration in which the process of step S5104 is not executed may be adopted. In this case, when the setting value update process is started, the information in the setting reference area is written to the setting update area. is the set value to be selected.

After that, the update start command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5105). By storing the update start command in the command transmission buffer 223 b , the command transmission circuit 224 operates to transmit the update start command to the sound and light side MPU 93 . By receiving the update start command, the sound and light side MPU 93 displays an image indicating that the setting value update process is being executed, an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for changing the setting value, and the setting value update. The display side MPU 103 is controlled to display an image on the pattern display device 41 so that the content of the operation for terminating the process can be recognized. This enables the manager of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and to complete the operation content and setting value update process necessary to change the setting value. It is possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the operation contents necessary for

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting update area is any one of "1" to "6" (step S5106). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step S5106: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area (step S5107). As a result, the setting value to be selected becomes "setting 1".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5106 or if the process of step S5107 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 195 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step S5108). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion portion 195 has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. do. Therefore, the OFF state is maintained not only when the setting key insertion unit 195 is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value update process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit 195 is in the OFF state. Also in this case, a negative determination is made in step S5108.

If a negative determination is made in step S5108, on condition that the reset button 196 is pressed (step S5109: YES), 1 is added to the value of the setting update area (step S5110). As a result, each time the reset button 196 is pressed once, the set value is updated to a value one step higher. If the reset button 196 is not pressed (step S5109: NO) or if the value of the setting update area is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S5106. If it is determined that the area value is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area in step S5107. As a result, when the reset button 196 is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting returns to "setting 1".

If it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 195 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5108: YES), the setting reference area is overwritten with the setting value information stored in the setting update area (step S5111). ). As a result, the setting value information updated as a result of this setting value updating process is set in the setting reference area, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the current setting of the pachinko machine 10. value.

After that, interrupt prohibition is set (step S5112). As a result, when the set value update process is finished and the process (steps S4901 to S4928) at the start of supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 81) is to be resumed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) 2 timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is disabled.

Thereafter, RAM clear processing is executed (step S5113). In the RAM clear process, except for the area in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 211 for specific control (that is, the setting reference area) and the setting update display flag, , the work area 211 is cleared to "0" and the initialization is performed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the winning lottery draws regardless of the winning lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Mode is low probability mode. In addition, the game round is not executed, the open/close execution mode is not executed, and the normal diagram display section 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. situation. In addition, since the special figure reservation area 84a and the general figure reservation area 84c provided in the work area 211 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display The reservation information for the normal diagram display section 38a is erased while the reservation information for the section 37b is erased. Also, the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". Also, the setting update area provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". Also, the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, in the RAM clear processing, the stack area 212 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial setting is executed. Also, in the RAM clearing process, the various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step S4902 is executed. For the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the processing for clearing "0" and the processing for initial setting are not executed.

After that, the return command at the time of update is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main side MPU 82 (step S5114). By storing the update return command in the command transmission buffer 223 b , the command transmission circuit 224 operates to transmit the update return command to the sound and light side MPU 93 . By receiving the return command at the time of updating, the sound and light side MPU 93 makes it possible to recognize the image indicating that the setting value update process is being executed in the pattern display device 41 and the operation content for changing the setting value. and the image for making it possible to recognize the content of the operation for ending the setting value update processing are ended. Thereafter, the setting update display flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5115).

In addition to performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 196 as described above, based on the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while performing the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 195 with the setting key, Set value update processing is executed. Also, as already explained, the setting confirmation process is executed based on the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while turning ON the setting key inserting portion 195 with the setting key without pressing the reset button 196 . This makes it possible to share the ON operation for the setting key insertion portion 195 as the operation for executing the setting-related processing related to the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to make the content of the operation for generating the setting-related processing easy for the manager of the game hall to understand.

Further, when the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the setting key inserting portion 195 is ON-operated by the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 196 is not added, the setting confirmation process is executed and reset. When pressing the button 196 is added, set value update processing is executed. This makes it possible to differentiate between the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process depending on whether or not the reset button 196 is pressed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the manager of the game hall to understand the operation contents for executing the desired process out of the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process. Further, by increasing the number of operations for executing the setting value updating process rather than the setting confirmation process, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to illegally perform the setting value updating process.

Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 81), after executing the setting value update processing in step S4916, the value of the first security counter 211a provided in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S4917). ). As already explained, the first security counter 211a is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulse-shaped security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the game hall. It is a counter that is used by the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times the pulse-shaped security signal is output to the outside.

When it is determined in step S4909 in the main processing (FIG. 81) that the reset button 196 has been pressed and the setting key insertion unit 195 has not been turned on using the setting key. (Step S4915: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S4918). The game stop flag is set to "1" when the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksum does not match, or the set value is abnormal. By setting "1" to the game stop flag, while executing the processing of steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), step by making an affirmative determination in step S5505 The processing from S5506 to S5520 is not executed. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control If the checksum does not match due to a change in the information storage state from the previous power shutdown for at least one of them, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and game play While the process for managing the history is executed, the process for progressing the game is not executed.

If the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step S4918: NO), RAM clear processing is executed (step S4919). In the RAM clear process, except for the area in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 211 for specific control (that is, the setting reference area) and the setting update display flag, , the work area 211 is cleared to "0" and the initialization is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the winning lottery draws regardless of the winning lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Mode is low probability mode. In addition, the game round is not executed, the open/close execution mode is not executed, and the normal diagram display section 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. situation. In addition, since the special figure reservation area 84a and the general figure reservation area 84c provided in the work area 211 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display The reservation information for the normal diagram display section 38a is erased while the reservation information for the section 37b is erased. Also, the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". Also, the setting update area provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". Also, the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, in the RAM clear processing, the stack area 212 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial setting is executed. Also, in the RAM clearing process, the various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step S4902 is executed. For the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the processing for clearing "0" and the processing for initial setting are not executed.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the first security counter 211a provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S4920). As already explained, the first security counter 211a is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulse-shaped security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall. It is a counter that is used by the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times the pulse-shaped security signal is output to the outside.

Thereafter, the return command for clearing is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S4921). When the command transmission buffer 223 b stores the return command for clearing, the command transmission circuit 224 operates to transmit the return command for clearing to the sound and light side MPU 93 . The sound and light side MPU 93 receives the return command at the time of clearing, thereby specifying that the main side MPU 82 has completed the operation power supply start processing (steps S4901 to S4928), and at the same time, starts supplying the current operating power. In the time processing (steps S4901 to S4928), it is specified that the RAM clear processing of step S4919 has been executed. Then, the process corresponding to the reception of the return command for clearing is executed.

Here, when the power failure processing is executed while the setting value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is being executed, the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 81) when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

When the power failure processing is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update processing nor the setting confirmation processing is executed, the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 81) when the supply of operating power is resumed after that First, the contents will be explained.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in the "no operation" state, none of the RAM clearing process (step S4919), setting value updating process, and setting confirmation process are executed in the main process (FIG. 81). Further, when the supply of operating power is restarted in a situation where the "RAM clearing operation" has been performed, the RAM clearing process (step S4919) is executed in the main process (FIG. 81), while the set value update process and setting No confirmation processing is performed. When the supply of operating power is restarted in a situation where the "setting change operation" has been performed, the setting value updating process is executed in the main process (FIG. 81), while the RAM clearing process (step S4919) and the No action is taken. When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the main process (FIG. 81) executes the setting confirmation process, while the RAM clear process (step S4919) and the setting value update. No action is taken.

Next, when the power failure processing is executed in a situation where the setting value update process is being executed (that is, the setting update display flag is set to "1"), the main The contents of the processing executed in the processing (FIG. 81) will be described.

If the supply of operating power is resumed in the state of "no operation", if the supply of operating power is resumed in the state of "RAM clear operation", it will operate in the state of "setting change operation". Regardless of whether the supply of power is restarted or when the supply of operating power is restarted while the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the setting value update process is executed in the main process (FIG. 81). On the other hand, RAM clear processing (step S4919) and setting confirmation processing are not executed. In other words, if the power failure process is executed while the set value update process is being executed, the set value update process will be executed again regardless of the operation details when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter. be started.

With the above configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting value update process, when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting key insertion unit 195 and the reset button at the time of power ON of the pachinko machine 10 Setting value update processing can be newly started regardless of the operation content to 196 . This makes it possible to reliably generate an opportunity to complete the update of the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being started even though the update of the setting value is not completed.

Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting value updating process, the setting value updating process is uniquely executed regardless of the operation content when the supply of operating power is restarted. It is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration as compared with a configuration in which the content of processing to be executed is changed according to the content of each operation.

Next, when the power failure process is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation process is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), the main The contents of the processing executed in the processing (FIG. 81) will be described.

When the supply of operating power is restarted in a situation where the "RAM clearing operation" has been performed, the RAM clearing process (step S4919) is executed in the main process (FIG. 81), while the setting value update process and setting confirmation process are executed. is not executed. In other words, even if the power failure processing is executed while the setting confirmation processing is being executed, the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 81) is not newly executed, RAM clear processing (step S4919) is executed. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the RAM clearing process (step S4919) with respect to the "RAM clearing operation". Note that the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clearing process (step S4919).

When the supply of operating power is restarted in a situation where the "setting change operation" has been performed, the setting value updating process is executed in the main process (FIG. 81), but the setting confirmation process is not executed. In other words, even if the power failure process is executed while the setting confirmation process is being executed, if the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed after that, the setting confirmation process is executed again. Execute the setting value update process without executing This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the setting value update process for the "setting change operation". Even if the setting confirmation process is not executed in this way, the setting value to be selected is displayed on the setting display device 205 by executing the setting value update process, and at the end of the setting value update process Since the information of the setting value to be selected at that time is set in the setting reference area, the manager of the game hall can confirm the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 . Note that the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clearing process (step S5113) in the setting value updating process.

If the supply of operating power is restarted in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the main processing (Fig. 81) is for setting confirmation on the condition that no abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag, checksum, and setting value. Execute the process. As a result, even if the power failure processing is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation processing, it is possible to restart the confirmation of the setting value by performing the "setting confirmation operation" when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the state of "no operation", in the main process (FIG. 81), on the condition that no abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag, checksum and setting value, the setting key inserting unit 195 The setting confirmation process is executed even if the ON operation is not performed. As a result, even if the power failure processing is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation processing and the supply of operating power is resumed after that, even if there is no operation, the confirmation of the setting value can be resumed. It becomes possible.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S4905 to S4907 in the main process (FIG. 81), that is, if the power failure flag is not set to "1", if the checksum does not match, or if the set value is abnormal If so, the game stop flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S4922). As described above, the game stop flag is set to "1", so that the processes of steps S5501 to S5504 and S5521 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), while the affirmative determination is made in step S5505. By doing so, the processing of steps S5506 to S5520 is not executed. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control If the checksum does not match due to a change in the information storage state from the previous power shutdown for at least one of them, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and game play While the process for managing the history is executed, the process for progressing the game is not executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the reset button 196 is pressed (step S4923). If the reset button 196 is not pressed (step S4923: NO), an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag, checksum, or set value at the start of supply of operating power is sent to the register area 223 of the main MPU 82. is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b (step S4924). By storing the abnormal command in the command transmission buffer 223 b , the command transmission circuit 224 operates to transmit the abnormal command to the sound and light side MPU 93 . Upon receiving the abnormality command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting unit 64 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of supply of the operating power, and at the same time, from the speaker unit 65, "Please change the setting." output a sound. Also, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the notification is started again when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted until the set value update process is executed. It will happen.

After that, external output processing at the time of abnormality is executed (step S4920). In the abnormal external output process, a process for externally outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, it is not limited to this, and in the situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", the signal output of the abnormal signal is continued, and the game stop flag is cleared to "0" to output the abnormal signal. A configuration in which signal output is stopped may be employed.

If the reset button 196 has been pressed (step S4923: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 195 has been turned on using the setting key (step S4915). When the reset button 196 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on using the setting key (steps S4915 and S4923: YES), set value update processing is executed (step S4916). The processing contents of the set value update processing are as already explained. In other words, if the operating power is supplied to the main MPU 82 while the "setting change operation" is being performed, it means that the main RAM 84 has an abnormality, so it is negative in any of steps S4905 to S4907. The set value update process is executed even when the determination is made. This makes it possible to give priority to changing the setting value. Further, in the set value update process, the game stop flag is cleared to "0" by executing the initial setting at the start in step S5103 as already described. As a result, when the set value update process is executed, it is possible to eliminate the state in which the main RAM 84 is abnormal after the update of the set values is completed.

On the other hand, if the reset button 196 has been pressed but the setting key insertion unit 195 has not been turned ON (step S4923: YES, step S4915: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". is set (step S4918). In the process of step S4918 after the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S4922, the game stop flag is set to "1" as a matter of course, so an affirmative determination is made in step S4918. In this case, in step S4924, processing for transmitting an abnormality command to the sound and light side MPU 93 is executed, and in step S4925, an abnormality signal is output to the outside.

In other words, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S4905 to S4907 due to the occurrence of an abnormality related to the power failure flag, checksum, and set value, the operation to the main MPU 82 is performed while the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. Even if power supply is started, RAM clear processing (step S4919) is not executed. In addition, when the game stop flag is set to "1" and the "RAM clearing operation" is being performed, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. Step S4919) is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started while the "RAM clearing operation" is being performed, the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1" is not cleared. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to "1" and the setting value update process is executed. The game stop flag is cleared to "0" in the initialization at the start (step S5103). As a result, it becomes necessary to execute the set value update process in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1". Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the specific control work area 211, it is possible not only to initialize the specific control work area 211 but also to reset the set values. .

Further, when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 82 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", if the "setting change operation" is not performed, that is, "no operation" , or when the "RAM clearing operation" or "setting confirmation operation" is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S4910 or step S4918, and processing for transmitting an abnormal command is executed in step S4924. In step S4925, external output processing at the time of abnormality is executed. As a result, when the game stop flag is set to "1", regardless of the processing results of steps S4905 to S4907 in the subsequent main processing, as long as the set value update processing is not executed, the operation to the main side MPU 82 Every time the supply of electric power is started, an abnormality notification in the pachinko machine 10 and an external output at the time of abnormality to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize that the set value should be changed.

When the process of step S4913 is executed, when the process of step S4914 is executed, when the process of step S4917 is executed, when the process of step S4921 is executed, or when the process of step S4925 is executed, the specific control Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter 211g (see FIG. 78) provided in the work area 211 (step S4926). The value set in the checking counter 211g is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is started. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter 211g, the checking display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. The contents of the check display will be described later in detail.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, after the main MPU 82 completes the processing (steps S4901 to S4928) at the time of starting the supply of operating power, which will be described later. Before the rest processing (steps S4929-S4932) is started, an initial check period is started. As a result, it is not necessary to control the initial check period when the operation power supply start process is being executed, so the processing load is reduced when the operation power supply start process is being executed. becomes possible.

In addition, while the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process are executed as the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), the process at the start of supply of operating power ends during the initial check period. is started when As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the setting values cannot be displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to avoid affecting it.

After that, the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction (step S4927). The CALLI instruction and first management processing will be described later in detail.

After that, the start-up processing flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S4928). When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is started by clearing the start-up process flag to "0", the process of steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 is performed by making a negative determination in step S5505. In addition, the processing of steps S5506 to S5520 is executed, and the state in which the processing for progressing the game is not executed is released. In step S4928, the power failure flag in the work area 211 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

After that, the process advances to remaining processing in steps S4929 to S4932. In other words, the main MPU 82 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114). will have a residual time. This remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S4929 to S4932 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S4929 to S4932 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In steps S4929 to S4932, the same processes as steps S127 to S130 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, the process of step S4927 of the main process (FIG. 81) will be described.

In step S4927 of the main process (FIG. 81), the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction as already described. The first management process is included in the non-specific control process. That is, in the main process (FIG. 81), when the state in which the specific control process is being executed changes to the situation in which the non-specific control process is to be executed, the non-specific control process is called using the CALLI instruction.

When the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is first saved in the stack area 212 for specific control. The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving the information in the flag register before the program for the first management process, which is a non-specific control process, is started, it is possible to call the first management process and start the first management process. It is possible to save the information of the flag register in the state before the change later in the stack area 212 for specific control.

When the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, after the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt described later are executed. Interruption of processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited. As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which are specific control processes, are interrupted and started while the first management process, which is non-specific control process, is being executed. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

When the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are executed. ) is disabled, the program corresponding to the first management process is started.

In this way, with the configuration in which the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, information in the flag register of the main side MPU 82 is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control by one instruction ("CALLI"). At the same time, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited. Then, a program corresponding to the first management process can be started. For this reason, the instruction to save the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 to the stack area 212 for specific control and the interruption of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited. to reduce the number of instructions set in the program for executing the first management process, compared with the case where the instruction for executing the first management process and the instruction for starting the program for the first management process are separately provided. be able to. As a result, the storage capacity of the main ROM 83 for storing programs can be reduced.

FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing the first management process. The processing of steps S5201 to S5216 in the first management process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, as "LD SP, Y(u+2)", Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction (step S5201). The stack pointer is an area in which address information is set for the main MPU 82 to specify a storage area to which information is to be written by a push instruction in the stack areas 212 and 214 . Each time a push instruction is performed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order, and each time a pop instruction is performed, the stack pointer information is updated to the previous order to be written is updated to the information of the address of the storage area. Further, when the stack area 214 for non-specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and each time the information to be stored is added. Then, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S5201, the information of the last address in stack area 214 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer. The fact that information is stored from the storage area of the last address to the storage area of the first address in this manner is the same for the stack area 212 for specific control.

Incidentally, in both the stack area 212 for specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, if a push instruction is additionally executed even though information is set in all storage areas, All areas of the main side RAM 84 are cleared to "0" assuming that an abnormality has occurred in the storage process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding despite the occurrence of an abnormality in the memory processing.

Thereafter, as "LD (_WABUF), WA", the information in the WA register of the main side MPU 82 is saved in the WA buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5202). Also, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", the information in the BC register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the BC buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5203). Also, as "LD (_DEBUF), DE", the information in the DE register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the DE buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5204). Also, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", the information in the HL register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the HL buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5205). Also, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", the information in the IX register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the IX buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5206). Also, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", the information in the IY register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the IY buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5207).

In the general-purpose register area 223a in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82, there are various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers and index registers in addition to the flag registers already described. In this case, in steps S5202 to S5207, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register, which are some of these various general purpose registers, auxiliary registers and index registers is saved in the corresponding buffer in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The information amount of each of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register is 2 bytes.

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the initialization processing (step S5208) and disconnection/short-circuit processing (step S5209), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control. be. By saving the information set in such registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control prior to executing the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short-circuit process (step S5209), the information is used for the specific control. It is also possible to save the information in these registers before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during the non-specific control, the information saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control is returned to these registers when the non-specific control is terminated. can be returned to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

In addition, instead of saving all information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control, initialization processing (step S5208) and disconnection processing, which are processing corresponding to non-specific control, are performed. By selectively saving the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used in the short-circuit processing (step S5209) to the work area 213 for non-specific control, It is possible to reduce the capacity to be secured for saving register information in the work area 213 for specific control. Therefore, while securing a large capacity of the work area 213 for non-specific control that can be used for the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short-circuit process (step S5209), the above register information is saved. becomes possible.

Of course, among various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main MPU 82, registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register support non-specific control. The information that is set before the start of the process to be performed is stored and held until the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

In addition, by saving register information in the work area 213 for non-specific control instead of saving it in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the capacity of the stack area 214 for non-specific control can be reduced accordingly. It becomes possible. Also, when using the stack area 214 for non-specific control, as already explained, information is written in the order of writing and is read out first. Otherwise, all subsequent read order information will be returned to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 214 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the non-specific control work area 213, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the above event even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

After executing the processes of steps S5202 to S5207, the initial setting process (step S5208) and disconnection/short circuit process (step S5209) are executed. When executing the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short-circuit process (step S5209), a subroutine corresponding to the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short-circuit process (step S5209) set in the non-specific control program When executing the program of the subroutine, in order to specify the return address of the first management process after executing the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short-circuit process (step S5209) is written to the stack area 214 for non-specific control by a push instruction. Then, when the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short-circuit process (step S5209) are completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop instruction, and the first management process indicated by the return address is executed. program. Details of the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short-circuit process (step S5209) will be described later.

After executing the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short-circuit process (step S5209), the stack pointer of the main side MPU 82 is set to the end of the first management process by the load instruction as "LD SP, Y(r+a)". Y(r+a) is set as a fixed address when returning to specific control later (step S5210). The address of Y(r+a) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 212 for specific control.

Immediately before the first management process is called in step S4927 of the main process (FIG. 81), the amount of information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control is always constant. The stack pointer information (that is, the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, the information stored in the specific control stack area 212 includes, for example, return address information of the main process (FIG. 81) after the first management process is completed. The constant information of the stack pointer is Y(r+a). Therefore, when the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection/short-circuit process (step S5209), which are processes corresponding to the non-specific control, are completed and the process corresponding to the specific control is resumed, the certain information Y By setting (r+a) to the stack pointer of the main MPU 82, it is possible to return the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. By setting the fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the information of the stack pointer is restored to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, so that the main side corresponding to the specific control It becomes unnecessary to save the information of the stack pointer of the MPU 82 to the main side RAM 84 before starting the processing corresponding to non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load and eliminate the need to secure an area for saving in the main RAM 84 .

Thereafter, as "LD WA, (_WABUF)", the WA register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the WA buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5211). Also, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the BC register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the BC buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5212). Also, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the DE register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the DE buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5213). Also, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the HL register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the HL buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5214). Also, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the IX register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the IX buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5215). Also, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the IY register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the IY buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5216). By executing the processing of steps S5211 to S5216, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main MPU 82 is processed for non-specific control. It is possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the control.

After executing the processing of steps S5211 to S5216, the RETI instruction returns to the main processing (FIG. 81) included in the specific control processing. By executing the RETI instruction, information in the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before execution of the first management process is restored to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt is executed. The state in which the processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited is switched to the state in which they are permitted. As a result, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is restored to the information for executing the specific control, and new execution of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process becomes possible.

With the configuration for executing the RETI instruction, information in the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before execution of the first management process is transferred to the main MPU 82 by one instruction ("RETI"). It is possible to restore the flag register and switch from the state in which the generation of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted. For this reason, an instruction for restoring the flag register information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before execution of the first management process to the flag register of the main side MPU 82 and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88 ) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are set in the program for non-specific control processing, compared to the case where the instruction for switching from the state in which the generation of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted is provided separately. You can reduce the number of instructions. As a result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main-side ROM 83 for storing programs for non-specific control processing.

Information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed is not saved in the main RAM 84 when the specific control process is restarted. This eliminates the need to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

Further, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed is stored when the non-specific control process is restarted after returning to the specific control process. Information that is not used. In other words, information necessary for a plurality of times of non-specific control processing executed with specific control processing intervening is stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control. It is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main side MPU 82 is not saved in the main side RAM 84 when the non-specific control process is executed, a problem arises in executing the non-specific control process. do not have.

Next, the initialization process executed by calling the subroutine program in step S5208 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing initialization processing. The processes of steps S5301 to S5304 in the initial setting process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

In the initial setting process, among the storage areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the already explained first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, the magnetic detection counter 213i, the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, the second security counter 213k, first to third general prize winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n, special electric prize winning abnormality flag 213o, first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, out abnormality flag 213r, gate winning abnormality flag 213s and A process for initializing the magnetic anomaly flag 213t is executed. These first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, magnetic detection counter 213i, magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, second security counter 213k, first to third general winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n, special electric winning abnormality flag 213o. , the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t all have a data capacity of 1 byte. The addresses are set so that they are consecutive numbers. Each of the first to eighth prize-winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h→magnetism detection counter 213i→magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j→second security counter 213k→first to third general prize-winning abnormality flags 213l-213n→special electric prize-winning abnormality flag The address increases by "1" in the order of 213o→first operation winning abnormality flag 213p→second operation winning abnormality flag 213q→out abnormality flag 213r→gate winning abnormality flag 213s→magnetic abnormality flag 213t.

In the initial setting process, first, a start address is set as an initial setting target address in a predetermined register of the main MPU 82 (step S5301). The start address is the address of the first winning monitoring timer counter 213a.

After that, the area corresponding to the initial setting target address is initialized (step S5302). When the initial setting target address is the start address, the area corresponding to the start address is the first winning monitor timer counter 213a, so the first winning monitor timer counter 213a is initialized. Specifically, as an initial setting, the first winning monitoring timer counter 213a is cleared to "0".

After that, it is determined whether or not the initial setting target address is the final address (step S5303). The final address is the address of the magnetic anomaly flag 213t. If the initial setting target address is not the final address (step S5303: NO), the initial setting target address is updated to the next address in order (step S5304). Specifically, 1 is added to the initial setting target address. Then, in step S5302, the area corresponding to the address after adding 1 is initialized, and the processing in step S5303 is executed.

When the processing of step S5304 is executed in a situation where the initial setting target address is the start address, the initial setting target address becomes the address of the second winning monitoring timer counter 213b, and the second winning monitoring timer counter 213b Initialization is done. Specifically, as an initial setting, the second winning monitoring timer counter 213b is cleared to "0". Further, when the process of step S5304 is executed in a situation where the address of the second winning monitoring timer counter 213b is the initial setting target address, the initial setting target address becomes the address of the third winning monitoring timer counter 213c. Initial setting is performed for the third prize winning monitoring timer counter 213c. Specifically, as an initial setting, the third winning monitoring timer counter 213c is cleared to "0".

When the address of the magnetic anomaly flag 213t corresponding to the final address is set as the initial setting target address in the process of step S5304 by repeating the processing of steps S5302 to S5304, the magnetic anomaly flag 213t is set as the initial setting. After clearing "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S5303. This initial setting process ends by making an affirmative determination in step S5303. In the initial setting process (FIG. 86), a normal counter area 251, a calculation result storage area 252, a display target setting area 253, a switching timing counter 254, and a display target are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The initialization of step S5302 is not executed for the counter 255 .

Next, the disconnection/short-circuit processing executed by calling the subroutine program in step S5209 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing disconnection and short-circuit processing. The processing of steps S5401 to S5411 in the disconnection/short-circuit processing is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, the value of the monitored counter provided in the non-specific control work area 213 is cleared to "0" (step S5401). The monitoring target counter is a counter for specifying the type of detection sensor to be monitored for occurrence of disconnection or short circuit by the main MPU 82 . First to third winning opening detection sensors 231a to 233a provided for each of the three general winning openings 31 as detection sensors to monitor the occurrence of disconnection or short circuit, and provided in the special electric winning device 32 A special electric detection sensor 234a, a first working opening detection sensor 235a provided in the first working opening 33, a second working opening detecting sensor 236a provided in the second working opening 34, an out opening detection sensor provided in the out opening 24a There is a sensor 237a and a gate detection sensor 238a provided on the through gate 35 (see FIG. 90). When the monitored counter value is "0", it corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 231a, and when the monitoring target counter value is "1", it corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 232a. A case where the value of the monitored counter is "2" corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 233a, and a case where the value of the monitored counter is "3" corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 234a. , the case where the value of the monitoring target counter is "4" corresponds to the first working opening detection sensor 235a, and the case where the monitoring target counter value is "5" corresponds to the second working opening detection sensor 236a. A monitored counter value of "6" corresponds to the outlet detection sensor 237a, and a monitored counter value of "7" corresponds to the gate detection sensor 238a.

A voltage of 12V is applied to each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a through an electric path for input. Further, the detection sensors 231a to 238a are connected to the main MPU 82 through electric paths for output, and apply voltages to the main MPU 82 according to the detection results of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. In this case, a plurality of resistors are connected to the electrical path for output, and these resistors keep the voltage applied to the main MPU 82 below a predetermined value and the current supplied thereto below a predetermined value. function is fulfilled.

An electrical signal is input to the main side MPU 82 according to the presence or absence of passage of the game ball at the detection portions of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. In this case, a LOW level electrical signal is input to the main side MPU 82 when the game ball is not passing through the detection parts of the detection sensors 231a to 238a, and a HI level electrical signal is input when the game ball is passing through the detection parts. A signal is input to the main MPU 82 .

When disconnection occurs in each of the electric paths or inside the sensors of the detection sensors 231a to 238a, the voltage input from the detection sensors 231a to 238a to the main side MPU 82 is lower than when it is at the LOW level. voltage (ie 0V). Further, when a short circuit occurs between the electric paths or inside the sensor, the voltage input from the detection sensors 231a to 238a to the main side MPU 82 becomes a higher voltage than in the case of HI level. When the voltage applied from each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is lower than the LOW level, the main MPU 82 determines that a disconnection has occurred, and the voltage applied from each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a If the voltage applied is higher than the HI level, it is determined that a short circuit has occurred.

In the disconnection/short-circuit processing, after the value of the monitored counter is cleared to "0" in step S5401, the voltage input from the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the monitored counter value is a voltage lower than the LOW level. (that is, 0 V), it is determined whether or not disconnection has occurred (step S5402). Then, when it is determined that a disconnection has occurred (step S5403: YES), the disconnection generation command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main side MPU 82 (step S5404). By storing the disconnection generation command in the command transmission buffer 223 b , the command transmission circuit 224 operates to transmit the disconnection generation command to the sound and light side MPU 93 . The sound and light side MPU 93 receives the disconnection generation command, and causes the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65 and the pattern display device 41 to notify that the disconnection has occurred. In this disconnection notification, the type of the detection sensor 231a to 238a that specified the current disconnection occurrence may also be notified.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the second security counter 213k provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S5405). As already explained, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulse-shaped security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall. It is a counter that is used by the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times the pulse-shaped security signal is output to the outside.

When a negative determination is made in step S5403, or when the process of step S5405 is executed, the voltage input from the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitoring target counter becomes a higher voltage than in the case of HI level. By determining whether or not there is a short circuit, it is determined whether or not a short circuit has occurred (step S5406). When it is determined that a short circuit has occurred (step S5407: YES), the short circuit generation command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5408). By storing the short-circuit generation command in the command transmission buffer 223 b , the command transmission circuit 224 operates to transmit the short-circuit generation command to the sound and light side MPU 93 . By receiving the short-circuit generation command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the display light-emitting section 64, the speaker section 65 and the pattern display device 41 to notify that the short-circuit has occurred. In this short-circuit notification, the type of the detection sensor 231a to 238a that specified the occurrence of the current short-circuit may also be notified.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the second security counter 213k provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S5409). As already explained, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulse-shaped security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall. It is a counter that is used by the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times the pulse-shaped security signal is output to the outside.

If a negative determination is made in step S5407, or if the process of step S5409 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the monitored counter is the maximum value of "7" (step S5410). If a negative determination is made in step S5410, after adding 1 to the value of the counter to be monitored (step S5411), the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the counter to be monitored after the addition of 1 are subjected to step S5402 to step S5402. The processing of S5409 is executed. If it is determined in step S5410 that the value of the monitored counter is the maximum value, this disconnection/short-circuit processing ends.

<First timer interrupt processing>
Next, the first timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 82 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing the first timer interrupt processing. Of the processes of steps S5501 to S5521 in the first timer interrupt process, processes other than the fraud detection process called and executed in step S5509 and the second management process called and executed in step S5521 is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using the specific control program and specific control data, and the fraud detection process and the second management process are executed by the non-specific control program and non-specific control It is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using data for specific control.

First, power failure monitoring processing is executed (step S5501). In the power failure monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 85, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, an infinite loop occurs after the power failure process is executed. . In the power failure processing, the power failure flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S5502). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electrical random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the general electric random number counter C4, and after executing the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, Executes a process to overwrite the read source counter. In this case, they are cleared to "0" when the counter value exceeds the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S5503, random number initial value update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S4930 of the main processing (FIG. 81), and in step S5504, fluctuation counter update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S4931 of the main processing (FIG. 81). do.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag of the main RAM 84 (step S5505). If "1" is set to either the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag (step S5505: YES), the game history is managed in step S5521 without executing the processing of steps S5506 to S5520. Proceed to processing for As a result, in a situation where the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag is set to "1", power failure monitoring, random number update, and game history management are executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88). However, it is possible to prevent the processing for progressing the game in steps S5506 to S5520 from being executed.

When "1" is not set to both the game stop flag and the start-up processing flag (step S5505: NO), the process for advancing the game in steps S5506 to S5520 is executed. Specifically, first, port output processing is executed (step S5506). In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous first timer interrupt process, the process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b is started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, read processing is executed (step S5507). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. After that, ball entry detection processing is executed (step S5508). In the entering ball detection process, signals received from the detection sensors 231a to 238a are read, and the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through A process of specifying whether or not the ball has entered the gate 35 is executed.

Thereafter, fraud detection processing is executed by the CALLI instruction (step S5509). The fraud detection process will be described later in detail. After that, specific control timer update processing for collectively updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the specific control work area 211 of the main RAM 84 is executed (step S5510). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. may be configured. Thereafter, fraud handling processing is executed (step S5511). The fraud handling process will be described later in detail.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of game balls is executed (step S5512). In a situation where the shooting operation is continued with respect to the shooting operation device 28, one game ball is shot every 0.6 seconds so as to have a predetermined shooting cycle as in the first embodiment. After that, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing of step S5507, open confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is performed (step S5513).

After that, along with executing the special figure special electric control processing for performing the execution control of the game round and the execution control of the open/close execution mode (step S5514), the display control of the general figure display unit 38a and the execution control of the general electric open state are performed. Executes the general map general electric control processing for the purpose (step S5515). The processing contents of these special figure special electric control processing and general figure general electric control processing are basically the same as those of the first embodiment. The processing configuration of the different part will be explained later.

In subsequent step S5516, based on the processing results of step S5514 and step S5515 immediately before, setting the output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of the first reservation information to the first special figure reservation display unit 37c, the second reservation information Set the output information for reflecting the increase/decrease number in the second special figure reservation display section 37d, and set the output information for reflecting the increase/decrease number of the reservation information on the normal diagram side in the normal diagram reservation display section 38b. In addition, in step S5516, based on the processing results of step S5514 and step S5515 immediately before, with setting the output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b , and sets output information for updating the display contents of the normal map display section 38a.

After that, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and payout state reception processing is executed for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result (step S5517). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S5518). Also, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current first timer interrupt process (step S5519).

Thereafter, setting monitoring processing is executed (step S5520). In the setting monitoring process, by determining whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting reference area of the main side RAM 84 is one of "1" to "6", it is set as a use target. It is determined whether the setting value is one of "setting 1" to "setting 6". If the setting value information stored in the setting reference area is "0" or 7 or more, it means that the setting value set as the object to be used is abnormal. is set to "1". As a result, the game cannot proceed until the setting value to be used is newly set in the setting value update process (FIG. 83).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5505, or if the process of step S5520 is executed, the second management process is executed by the CALLI command (step S5521). The second management process will be described later in detail.

<Structure related to winning>
Next, a configuration relating to prize winning will be described. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to discharge of game balls that have flowed down the game area PA.

As in the first embodiment, a game ball entering any of the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a is discharged from the game area PA. be. In other words, the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flowed into the game area PA is any of the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a It will be discharged from the game area PA by entering the ball into. A game ball entering any one of the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a is led to the back side of the game board 24.例文帳に追加

On the back of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 231 to 237 are formed corresponding to the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 231 to 237 flow down the discharged discharge passages 231 to 237, and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 and to a discharge ball recovery section (not shown). is recovered. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collecting section are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 231a to 237a for detecting game balls are provided in the discharge passage portions 231 to 237, respectively. These discharge passage portions 231 to 237 and detection sensors 231a to 237a will be described below. Since three general prize-winning ports 31 are provided, there are discharge passage portions 231 to 233 corresponding to each of the three. A first winning opening detection sensor 231a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage portion 231 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 among these, and a general winning opening on the right side thereof. A second winning opening detecting sensor 232a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the second discharging passage portion 232 corresponding to the opening 31, and a third discharging passage portion corresponding to the rightmost general winning opening 31. A third winning opening detection sensor 233a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle position of 233 .

A fourth discharge passage portion 234 exists corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32 . A special electric detection sensor 234a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 234, and the game ball entering the special electric winning device 32 passes through the fourth discharge passage portion 234. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a. A fifth discharge passage portion 235 exists corresponding to the first operation port 33 . A first operation opening detection sensor 235a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 235, and the game ball entering the first operation opening 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage portion 235. It is detected by the first operating opening detection sensor 235a while passing through. A sixth discharge passage portion 236 is present corresponding to the second operation port 34 . A second operation opening detection sensor 236a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 236, and the game ball entering the second operation opening 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 236. It is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 236a while passing through. A seventh discharge passage portion 237 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 237a is provided so as to have a detection range in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 237, and the game ball entering the out port 24a passes through the seventh discharge passage portion 237. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 237a.

A game ball that has been detected by any one of the various detection sensors 231a to 237a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 231a to 237a. A gate detection sensor 238a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 on the way down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 238a.

Electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used as the various detection sensors 231a to 238a, but any sensor can be used as long as it can detect game balls individually. Various detection sensors 231a to 238a are electrically connected to the main side MPU 82, and detection results of the various detection sensors 231a to 238a are output to the main side MPU . Specifically, the various detection sensors 231a to 238a output LOW level signals when no game balls are detected, and output HI level signals when game balls are detected. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed without being limited to this.

Next, in the main side MPU 82, based on the detection results of each detection sensor 231a to 238a, the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34 and the through gate 35 A description will be given of a configuration for specifying the presence or absence of entry of a game ball to. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration for inputting the detection results of the detection sensors 231a to 238a to the main MPU 82. As shown in FIG.

An input port 241 is provided in the main MPU 82 . The input port 241 is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle 8 types of signals simultaneously. Areas for storing information of "0" or "1" according to the voltage of each signal are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7. In addition, although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 241, in order to limit the targets to be input at the same time to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 241 depends on the driver IC. Switched through switching control.

In the entering ball detection process (step S5508) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the signal group to be input to the input port 241 is set to the signal group from each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. In such a setting, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 231a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 232a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 233a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special train detection sensor 234a. , the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working opening detection sensor 235a, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working opening detection sensor 236a, and the The sixth bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 237a, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 238a.

Each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a outputs a LOW level signal indicating non-detection as a detection signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected, and when the passage of the game ball is detected. outputs a HI level signal indicating that detection is in progress as a detection signal. When the input port 241 receives a LOW level signal, it stores "0" information in the corresponding bit, and when it receives a HI level signal, stores "1" in the corresponding bit. store the information of In other words, when the detection sensors 231a to 238a do not detect the passage of the game ball, "0" information corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored in the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is detected. In the state where detection is being performed, information of "1" corresponding to information indicating that detection is being performed is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing the ball-entering detection process executed in step S5508 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). The processing of steps S5601 to S5623 in the ball entry detection process is executed by the specific control processing section 221 of the main side MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, various flag clearing processes are executed (step S5601). In the various flag clearing process, the first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, the third winning confirmation flag, the special train winning flag, and the first operation winning confirmation flag provided in the confirmation flag group 211d of the work area 211 for specific control are cleared. , the second operation winning confirmation flag, the out confirmation flag and the gate winning confirmation flag are cleared to "0". The contents of each of these confirmation flags will be explained later. Note that the ball-entering detection process is executed in each process of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in a situation where a negative determination is made in step S5505 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). , since the execution of the process corresponding to the state of the confirmation flag is completed after the ball entry detection process is executed in each processing cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), every time the ball entry detection process is started Even if the confirmation flag is cleared to "0" at this time, no problem occurs.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first winning hole detection sensor 231a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S5602: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the first winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S5603), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to 1. Add (step S5604). The first winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a. The 10 prize ball counter is a counter for the main side MPU 82 to specify the number of times the payout of 10 game balls should be executed. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S5518 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored in the first bit D1 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the second winning hole detection sensor 232a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S5605: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S5606), and the value of the counter for 10 prize balls in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 ( step S5607). The second winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 232a.

When it is confirmed that the state where the information of "0" is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the state where the information of "1" is stored, the third winning hole detection sensor 233a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S5608: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the third winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S5609), and 1 is added to the value of the counter for 10 prize balls in the work area 211 for specific control ( step S5610). The third winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 233a.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the third bit D3 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S5611: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the special electric prize confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S5612), and the value of the counter for 15 prize balls provided in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1. (step S5613). The special electric prize confirmation flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that one game ball has entered the special electric prize winning device 32 . By confirming that "1" is set to the special electric prize confirmation flag in the special electric prize control processing (step S5514) of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), one game to the special electric prize winning device 32 The occurrence of ball entry is specified, and 1 is subtracted from the number of remaining balls that can enter the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game. In addition, since the contents of the special electric winning confirmation flag are also referred to in the second management processing (step S5521) executed after the special electric special electric control processing (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), Even if the information of the special electric prize confirmation flag is confirmed in the special electric prize control process (step S5514), the information of the special electric prize confirmation flag is maintained as it is. The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for the main side MPU 82 to specify the number of times the payout of 15 game balls should be executed. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S5518 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is subtracted by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the fourth bit D4 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first operation opening detection sensor 235a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S5614: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S5615), and the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is changed. 1 is added (step S5618). The one prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times one game ball should be paid out by the main side MPU 82 . When the value of the one-ball counter is 1 or more, a one-ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S5518 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out. The first operation winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that one game ball has entered the first operation opening 33 .

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing the pending information acquisition process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82 . The processing of steps S5701 to S5710 in the hold information acquisition processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main side MPU 82 using a specific control program and specific control data.

If "1" is set to the first operation winning confirmation flag (step S5701: YES), the number of first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 111 is less than the upper limit storage number As a condition (step S5702: YES), a process for acquiring the first pending information is executed. In the process for acquiring the first reservation information, first add 1 to the value of the first special figure reservation counter (step S5703). The display contents of the first special figure reservation display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 are adjusted according to the value of the first special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure reservation display portion 37 c corresponds to the number of first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 111 . After that, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 111, that is, in step S5703. Store in area (step S5704). After that, the first pending command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223 (step S5705). By storing the first pending command in the command transmission buffer 223 b , the command transmitting circuit 224 operates to transmit the first pending command to the sound and light side MPU 93 . Thereby, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display content of the first reserved display area 42a of the pattern display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase of the first reserved information.

The content of the first operation winning confirmation flag is also referred to in the second management process (step S5521) executed after the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). Therefore, even if the information of the first operation winning confirmation flag is confirmed in the reservation information acquisition process (FIG. 92) in the special figure special electric control process (step S5514), the information of the first operation winning confirmation flag is maintained as is.

Returning to the description of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), when it is confirmed that the state in which the fifth bit D5 stores information "0" has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored. , It is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second operating opening detection sensor 236a (step S5617: YES). In this case, the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5618), and the value of the one-ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1. (Step S5619).

In the pending information acquisition process shown in FIG. 92, when the second operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S5706: YES), the second pending information stored in the second special figure pending area 112 is less than the upper limit storage number (step S5707: YES), the process for acquiring the second pending information is executed. In the process for acquiring the second reservation information, 1 is first added to the value of the second special figure reservation counter (step S5708). The display contents of the second special figure reservation display section 37d in the special figure unit 37 are adjusted according to the value of the second special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure reservation display section 37 d corresponds to the number of second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 . After that, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 112, that is, in step S5708. Store in the area (step S5709). After that, the second pending command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223 (step S5710). By storing the second pending command in the command transmission buffer 223 b , the command transmitting circuit 224 operates to transmit the second pending command to the sound and light side MPU 93 . Thus, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display content of the second reserved display area 42b of the pattern display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase of the second reserved information.

In addition, the content of the second operation winning confirmation flag is also referred to in the second management process (step S5521) executed after the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). , Even if the information of the second operation winning confirmation flag is confirmed in the special figure special electric control process (step S5514), the information of the second operation winning confirmation flag is maintained as it is.

Returning to the description of the ball-entering detection process (FIG. 91), when it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored. , it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 237a (step S5620: YES). In this case, the out confirmation flag of the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5621). The out confirmation flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that one game ball has been detected in the out mouth detection sensor 237a.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 238a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S5622: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the gate winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S5623). The gate winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that one game ball has entered the through gate 35 . By confirming that "1" is set to the gate winning prize confirmation flag in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in the general pattern general electrical control process (step S5515), it is stored in the general pattern reservation area 84c On the condition that the number of reserved information on the general map side is less than 4, which is the upper limit number, the numerical information of the current general electric random number counter C4 is stored in the general map reservation area 84c as the reserved information on the general map side. Execute the process.

Next, the process of step S5509 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) will be described.

In step S5509 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the CALLI instruction is used to execute the fraud detection process as already described. Fraud detection processing is included in non-specific control processing. In other words, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), when the situation changes from the specific control process to the non-specific control process, the non-specific control process uses the CALLI instruction. Called.

When the fraud detection process is executed by the CALLI instruction, first, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control. The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution results of operation instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving the information in the flag register before the program for the fraud detection process, which is non-specific control processing, is started, changes can be made after the fraud detection process is called or the fraud detection process is started. It is possible to save the information of the flag register in the state before the control in the stack area 212 for specific control.

When the fraud detection process is executed by the CALLI instruction, after the information of the flag register is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process described later are executed. (FIG. 114) is disabled. As a result, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114), which are specific control processing, are interrupted and started during the execution of the fraud detection processing, which is non-specific control processing. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

When fraud detection processing is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are executed. After the interrupt is prohibited, a program corresponding to the fraud detection process is started.

In this way, by adopting a configuration in which fraud detection processing is executed by the CALLI instruction, information in the flag register of the main side MPU 82 is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control by one instruction ("CALLI"). At the same time, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited. Then, a program corresponding to the fraud detection process can be started. For this reason, the instruction to save the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 to the stack area 212 for specific control and the interruption of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited. It is possible to reduce the number of instructions set in the program for executing the fraud detection process, compared to the case where the instruction for executing the fraud detection process and the instruction for starting the program for the fraud detection process are provided separately. can. As a result, the storage capacity of the main ROM 83 for storing programs can be reduced.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing fraud detection processing. The processing of steps S5801 to S5818 in the fraud detection process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, as "LD SP, Y(u+2)", Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction (step S5801). The stack pointer is an area in which address information is set for the main MPU 82 to specify a storage area to which information is written by a push instruction in the stack areas 212 and 214 . Each time a push instruction is performed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order, and each time a pop instruction is performed, the stack pointer information is updated to the previous order to be written is updated to the information of the address of the storage area. When the stack area 214 for non-specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and each time the information to be stored is added. Then, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S5801, the information of the last address in stack area 214 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer.

After that, as "LD (_WABUF), WA", the information in the WA register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the WA buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5802). Also, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", the information in the BC register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the BC buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5803). Also, as "LD (_DEBUF), DE", the information in the DE register of the main side MPU 82 is saved in the DE buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5804). Also, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", the information in the HL register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the HL buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5805). Also, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", the information in the IX register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the IX buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5806). Also, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", the information in the IY register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the IY buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5807).

In the general-purpose register area 223a in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82, there are various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers and index registers in addition to the already explained flag registers. In this case, in steps S5802 to S5807, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers and index registers is saved in the corresponding buffer in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The amount of information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register is all 2 bytes.

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are processing corresponding to non-specific control, such as information clear processing (step S5808), test firing test processing (step S5809), and timer update for non-specific control. This register is used in the process (step S5810) and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811). The information set in such a register is used to execute information clear processing (step S5808), test firing test processing (step S5809), non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and fraud detection execution processing (step S5811). By saving to the non-specific control work area 213 in advance, it is possible to save the information of these registers used for the specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during the non-specific control, the information saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control is returned to these registers when the non-specific control is terminated. can be returned to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control, information clear processing (step S5808), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used in test processing (step S5809), non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and fraud detection execution processing (step S5811) By selectively saving the information in the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to reduce the capacity to be secured for saving the information in the registers in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Therefore, information clear processing (step S5808), test firing test processing (step S5809), non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810) and fraud detection execution processing (step S5811) work area for non-specific control that can be used 213, it is possible to save the information in the registers as described above.

Of course, among various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main MPU 82, registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register support non-specific control. The information that is set before the start of the process to be performed is stored and held until the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

In addition, by saving register information in the work area 213 for non-specific control instead of saving it in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the capacity of the stack area 214 for non-specific control can be reduced accordingly. It becomes possible. Also, when using the stack area 214 for non-specific control, as already explained, information is written in the order in which later information is read out first. Otherwise, all subsequent read order information will be returned to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 214 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-described phenomenon from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

After executing the processing of steps S5802 to S5807, information clear processing (step S5808), test firing test processing (step S5809), non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810) and fraud detection execution processing (step S5811). Execute. Information clear processing (step S5808), test firing test processing (step S5809), non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and fraud detection execution processing (step S5811) are set in the program for non-specific control. information clear processing (step S5808), test firing test processing (step S5809), non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and fraud detection execution processing (step S5811). However, when the subroutine program is executed, information clear processing (step S5808), test firing test processing (step S5809), non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and fraud detection execution processing (step S5811) are executed. is written in the non-specific control stack area 214 by a push instruction. Then, when the information clear processing (step S5808), the test firing test processing (step S5809), the non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and the fraud detection execution processing (step S5811) are completed, the return address is returned by a pop command. is read out, and the program returns to the fraud detection processing program indicated by the return address.

In the test-firing test process in step S5809, the test-firing test information is generated, and the generated test-firing test information is stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control. In the non-specific control timer update process in step S5810, the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the non-specific control work area 213 of the main RAM 84 is collectively updated. The timer counters include first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h and a magnetism monitoring delay timer counter 213j. All of these timer counters 213a to 213j are decremented by 1 each time the processing of step S5810 is executed, and the carry flag (or borrow flag) is set to "1" by decrementing by 1 when it is already "0". The timer counter is cleared to "0". Details of the information clearing process (step S5808) and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811) will be described later.

After executing the information clearing process (step S5808), the test firing test process (step S5809), the non-specific control timer update process (step S5810) and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811), "LD SP, Y (r+b) , Y(r+b) is set in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction as a fixed address when returning to the specific control after the end of the fraud detection process (step S5812). The address of Y(r+b) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 212 for specific control.

Immediately before the fraud detection process is called in step S5509 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the amount of information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control is always constant. The information of the stack pointer of the side MPU 82 (that is, the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, the information stored in the specific control stack area 212 includes, for example, return address information of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) after the fraud detection process ends. The constant information of the stack pointer is Y(r+b). Therefore, the information clear processing (step S5808), the test firing test processing (step S5809), the non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and the fraud detection execution processing (step S5811), which are processing corresponding to the non-specific control, are completed. When returning to the process corresponding to the specific control by setting the constant information Y(r+b) to the stack pointer of the main side MPU 82, the information of the stack pointer is returned to the process corresponding to the non-specific control It is possible to return to the information immediately before the start of By setting the fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the information of the stack pointer is restored to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, so that the processing corresponding to the non-specific control It becomes unnecessary to save the information of the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 84 before starting the control. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load and eliminate the need to secure an area for saving in the main RAM 84 .

Thereafter, as "LD WA, (_WABUF)", the WA register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the WA buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5813). Also, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the BC register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the BC buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5814). Also, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the DE register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the DE buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5815). Also, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the HL register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the HL buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5816). Also, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the IX register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the IX buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5817). Also, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the IY register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the IY buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S5818). By executing the processing of steps S5813 to S5818, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main MPU 82 is processed corresponding to non-specific control. It is possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the control.

After executing the processing of steps S5813 to S5818, the RETI instruction returns to the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) included in the specific control processing. By executing the RETI instruction, the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before execution of the fraud detection process is restored to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt process is executed. (FIG. 88) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are switched from the state of prohibiting to the state of permitting. As a result, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is restored to the information for executing the specific control, and new execution of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process becomes possible. Note that the RETI instruction in the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) may maintain a state in which the generation of the first timer interrupt process is prohibited.

With the configuration for executing the RETI instruction, by one instruction ("RETI"), the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the fraud detection process is transferred to the flag of the main MPU 82. It is possible to switch from a state in which the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited to occur to a state in which they are permitted. For this reason, an instruction for returning the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before execution of the fraud detection process to the flag register of the main side MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and an instruction for switching from a state in which the generation of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. can reduce the number of As a result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main-side ROM 83 for storing programs for non-specific control processing.

Information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed is not saved in the main RAM 84 when the specific control process is restarted. This eliminates the need to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

Further, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed is stored when the non-specific control process is restarted after returning to the specific control process. Information that is not used. In other words, information necessary for a plurality of times of non-specific control processing executed with specific control processing intervening is stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control. It is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 is not saved in the main RAM 84 when the non-specific control process is executed, a problem arises in executing the non-specific control process. do not have.

Next, the information clear processing executed by calling the subroutine program in step S5808 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing information clear processing. The processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the information clearing process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

In the information clearing process, among the storage areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the already explained first general prize-winning abnormality flag 213l, second general prize-winning abnormality flag 213m, third general prize-winning abnormality flag 213n, special electric prize-winning abnormality A process for clearing the flag 213o, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t to "0" is executed. These first general prize-winning abnormality flag 213l, second general prize-winning abnormality flag 213m, third general prize-winning abnormality flag 213n, special electric prize-winning abnormality flag 213o, first operation prize-winning abnormality flag 213p, second operation prize-winning abnormality flag 213q, out abnormality flag 213r, gate winning anomaly flag 213s, and magnetic anomaly flag 213t all have a data capacity of 1 byte, and addresses are set so as to be serial numbers for each of these areas. First general prize-winning abnormality flag 213l→Second general prize-winning abnormality flag 213m→Third general prize-winning abnormality flag 213n→Special electric prize-winning abnormality flag 213o→First operation prize-winning abnormality flag 213p→Second operation prize-winning abnormality flag 213q→Out abnormality flag 213r The address is incremented by "1" in the order of →gate winning anomaly flag 213s →magnetism anomaly flag 213t.

In the information clear process, first, a start address is set as a clear target address in a predetermined register of the main MPU 82 (step S5901). The start address is the address of the first general winning abnormality flag 213l.

Thereafter, the area corresponding to the clear target address is cleared to "0" (step S5902). When the address to be cleared is the start address, the area corresponding to the start address is the first general prize winning abnormality flag 213l, so the first general prize winning abnormality flag 213l is cleared to "0".

After that, it is determined whether or not the address to be cleared is the final address (step S5903). The final address is the address of the magnetic anomaly flag 213t. If the clear target address is not the final address (step S5903: NO), the clear target address is updated to the next address in order (step S5904). Specifically, 1 is added to the address to be cleared. Then, the area corresponding to the address after adding 1 is cleared to "0" in step S5902, and the process of step S5903 is executed.

When the process of step S5904 is executed in a situation where the address to be cleared is the start address, the address to be cleared becomes the address of the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, and the second general winning abnormality flag 213m is set to "0". ” is cleared. Also, when the process of step S5904 is executed in a situation where the address of the second general winning abnormality flag 213m is the address to be cleared, the address to be cleared becomes the address of the third general winning abnormality flag 213n. "0" clearing is performed with respect to the general prize-winning abnormality flag 213n.

When the address of the magnetic anomaly flag 213t corresponding to the final address is set as the address to be cleared in the process of step S5904 by repeating the processing of steps S5902 to S5904, the magnetic anomaly flag 213t is cleared to "0". After that, in step S5903, an affirmative determination is made. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5903, this information clear processing ends. In the initial setting process (FIG. 86), the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, magnetic detection counter 213i, magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, and second security counter 213k in the non-specific control work area 213 , normal counter area 251, calculation result storage area 252, display target setting area 253, switching timing counter 254, and display target counter 255 are not cleared in step S5902.

By executing the information clearing process as described above, the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, the third general winning abnormality flag 213n, It is possible to clear to "0" the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t. The effect of clearing these flags 213l to 213t to "0" before execution of the fraud detection execution process will be described later.

Next, the fraud detection execution process executed by calling the subroutine program in step S5811 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing fraud detection execution processing. The processes of steps S6001 to S6019 in the fraud detection execution process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, it is determined whether or not the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6001). As already explained, when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second working opening detection sensor 236a in the entering ball detection process (FIG. 91) included in the specific control process, that is, to the second working opening 34 When one game ball wins, "1" is set to the second operation win confirmation flag.

When "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag (step S6001: YES), whether or not "1" is set in the mains open state flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is determined (step S6002), and it is determined whether or not the value of the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the specific control work area 211 is "0" (step S6003).

Here, the general electric power control processing executed in the general electric power control processing of step S5515 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The general electrical control process is a process for controlling the general electrical open state of the general electrical accessory 34a in the second operation port 34, as in the first embodiment. The processing of steps S6101 to S6111 in the general electric power control process is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main side MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, it is determined whether or not the general electric open state flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the second operation port 34 is in the open state. (Step S6101). The general electric open state flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the drive signal is being output to the general electric drive unit 34b and the second operation port 34 is in the open state. In addition, when the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the general electric power is started in the normal electric power control processing (FIG. 15) during the normal electric power control process (step S309), the electric power open state flag is set to "1 ' is set, and also when the output of the driving signal to the drive unit 34b for the general electricity is started in step S6110, which will be described later, the general electricity open state flag is set to "1".

If "1" is set in the electric open state flag (step S6101: YES), processing for closing determination is executed (step S6102). In the closing determination process, when the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the specific control work area 211 is set to "1", that is, the winning of the second operation opening 34 has occurred. In this case, the value of the general electric winning counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by one. As in the first embodiment, the general electric prize counter indicates whether the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 in the current electric open state has reached 10, which is the upper limit number of the general electric side. It is a counter for specifying whether or not at the main side MPU 82 . When the value of the electric winning prize counter after subtraction of 1 is "0", it is determined that the condition for closing the second operation port 34 is established. In addition, when the winning to the second operation port 34 does not occur or when the value of the general electrical winning counter is not "0", the value of the general drawing side timer counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control By determining whether or not it is "0", it is determined whether or not the duration of one opening of the second operation port 34 has elapsed. When the value of the normal map side timer counter is "0", it is determined that the condition for closing the second operation port 34 is established.

If the condition for closing the second operating port 34 is satisfied (step S6103: YES), a closing setting process is executed (step S6104). In the closing setting process, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for general electric power is stopped, thereby closing the second operation port 34. As shown in FIG. After that, the utility open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6105).

After that, the general electric monitoring delay period information is set in the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the specific control work area 211 (step S6106). The general electricity monitoring delay timer counter 211c detects the game ball in the second operation opening detection sensor 236a provided in the second operation opening 34, after the second operation opening 34 in the open state is closed. is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to identify the period during which the The general electricity monitoring delay period is set as a period longer than or equal to the maximum period assumed as the period until the game ball that has won the second operation opening 34 in the open state is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 236a. Specifically, it is set to 1 second.

Thereafter, end branch processing is executed (step S6107). In the end branch processing, when the value of the general electric winning prize counter is "0", the value of the general electric electric counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is changed assuming that the general electric open state of this time has ended. Clear "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next process round of the normal pattern normal electric control process becomes the normal pattern fluctuation start process (step S307). When the value of the general electric prize winning counter is 1 or more, the value of the general electric open counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1. As in the first embodiment, the general electrical open counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened in the current general electrical open state by the main side MPU 82. is. If the value of the general electric open counter after subtracting 1 is "0", it is determined that the current electric open state has ended, and the value of the general electric open counter in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". . As a result, the process to be executed in the next process round of the normal pattern normal electric control process becomes the normal pattern fluctuation start process (step S307). If the value of the general electricity open counter after subtracting 1 is 1 or more, information on the interval period (specifically, 2 seconds) of the general electricity side is transferred to the general electricity side timer counter of the work area 211 for specific control. set. In this case, since the value of the general electric power counter is maintained, the processing to be executed in the next processing round of the general electric power control processing is maintained in the general electric control processing (FIG. 96).

When it is determined that the value of the general electricity open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control in the general electricity control process is "0" (step S6101: NO), the general diagram side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control is "0", it is determined whether or not the interval period of the common electric side has passed (step S6108). If the interval period on the power side has passed (step S6108: YES), information corresponding to the duration of the long open on the power side (specifically 2 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the power side ( step S6109). Further, the second operation port 34 is opened by outputting the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for general electric power again (step S6110). After that, the mains power open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6111). In this case, since the value of the general electric power counter is maintained, the processing to be executed in the next processing round of the general electric power control processing is maintained in the electric power control processing (FIG. 96).

Returning to the description of the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), in a situation where the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6001: YES), the work for specific control "1" is not set to the general electric open state flag in the area 211 (step S6002: NO), and the value of the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the work area 211 for specific control is "0". In the case (step S6003: YES), after the second operation opening 34 is in the closed state, the second operation opening detection sensor 236a treats the detection of the game ball as effective, even though the period has passed. It means that a game ball has been detected by the operation opening detection sensor 236a. In this case, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6004). The second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is provided corresponding to the second operation opening 34 as already described. When it is specified by non-specific control processing that a non-normal game ball has been detected as a result of monitoring processing using the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c or the sixth winning monitoring timer counter 213g , "1" is set to the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the processing of the non-specific control.

After that, the normal electrical winning abnormal command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main side MPU 82 (step S6005). By storing the normal electric winning abnormal command in the command transmission buffer 223 b , the normal electric winning abnormal command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224 . When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the general electric prize winning abnormality command, the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65 and the pattern display device 41 notify that an abnormality has occurred regarding the winning of the second operation opening 34. be done.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6006). As already explained, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulse-shaped security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall. It is a counter that is used by the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times the pulse-shaped security signal is output to the outside.

If a negative determination is made in step S6001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6002, if a negative determination is made in step S6003, or if the processing of step S6006 is executed, special electric winning in the work area 211 for specific control It is determined whether or not the confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S6007). As already described, when it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a in the entering ball detection process (FIG. 91) included in the specific control process, that is, one to the special electric winning device 32 When the winning of the game ball occurs, "1" is set to the special electric winning confirmation flag.

If the special electric prize confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S6007: YES), it is determined whether or not the special electric open state flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". Together with this (step S6008), it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric monitor delay timer counter 211b in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" (step S6009).

Here, the special electric start processing, special electric open processing, and special electric closed processing executed in the special electric special electric control processing of step S5514 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) are shown in FIGS. ) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special electric start process, special electric open process, and special electric closed process are processes for performing opening/closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In addition, the processing of steps S6201 to S6208 in the special electric start processing, steps S6301 to S6307 in the special electric open processing, and steps S6401 to S6407 in the special electric closed processing use the program for specific control and the data for specific control. Then, it is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 .

As shown in FIG. 97(a), in the special electric start process, by determining whether the value of the special figure side timer counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is "0", opening and closing execution mode (step S6201). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6201, the round counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set with information on the number of round games corresponding to the game result that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time ( step S6202). The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the open/close execution mode in the main side MPU 82 as in the first embodiment. In addition, the information (specifically 29 seconds) of the opening duration of the round game is set to the special figure side timer counter (step S6203). Also, "10" is set in the winning counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6204). The winning counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of winning upper limit numbers in the main side MPU 82 as in the first embodiment. Further, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened by outputting a driving signal to the special electric driving unit 32b (step S6205).

After that, the special electric open state flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6206). The special electric open state flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify that the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state with the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric electric.

Thereafter, the special electric release command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main side MPU 82 (step S6207). By storing the special electric release command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the special electric open command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. FIG. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the special electric signal open command, the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65 and the pattern display device 41 execute an effect indicating that the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state. .

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6208). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "4" corresponding to the special electric open processing (FIG. 97(b)).

In the special electric open processing shown in FIG. 97(b), processing for closing determination is executed (step S6301). In the closing determination process, when the special electric prize confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1", that is, when the special electric prize winning device 32 wins 1 is subtracted from the winning counter value in the control work area 211 . When the value of the winning counter after subtracting 1 is "0", it is determined that the conditions for closing the special electric winning device 32 are established. Also, if no winning to the special electric winning device 32 has occurred or if the value of the winning counter is not "0", whether the value of the special figure side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" By determining whether or not, it is determined whether or not the open continuation period of the round game has elapsed. When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", it is determined that the condition for closing the special electric prize winning device 32 is met.

If the condition for closing the special electric prize winning device 32 is satisfied (step S6302: YES), a closing setting process is executed (step S6303). In the closing setting process, the special electric prize winning device 32 is brought into a closed state by stopping the output of the drive signal to the driving section 32b for the special electric. After that, the special electric open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6304).

After that, the special electric monitoring delay period information is set in the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6305). The special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b treats the detection of the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a provided in the special electric prize winning device 32 as valid even after the special electric prize winning device 32 in the open state is closed. This is a counter used for identification by the main MPU 82 . The special electric monitoring delay period is set as a period longer than or equal to the maximum period assumed as the period until the game ball that has won the special electric prize winning device 32 in the open state is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a. is set to 1 second.

After that, after subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6306), ending branch processing is executed (step S6307). In the ending branch process, if the value of the round counter after subtracting 1 is 1 or more, after setting the information of the interval period (specifically 3 seconds) to the special figure side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control , 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter in the work area 211 for specific control. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric closing process (FIG. 97(c)). On the other hand, if the value of the round counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the information of the ending period (specifically 5 seconds) is set to the special figure side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control. Also, the ending command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main side MPU82. By storing the ending command in the command transmission buffer 223 b , the command transmission circuit 224 operates to transmit the ending command to the sound and light side MPU 93 . By receiving the ending command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting section 64, the speaker section 65 and the pattern display device 41 to execute the ending effect of the opening/closing execution mode. After that, add 2 to the value of the special special electric counter. Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special figure special electric end processing (step S612) of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 18).

In the special electric closing process shown in FIG. 97 (c), by determining whether the value of the special figure side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control is "0", whether the interval period has passed It is determined whether or not (step S6401). If the affirmative determination is made in step S6401, the information (specifically 29 seconds) of the opening duration of the round game is set to the special figure side timer counter (step S6402). Also, "10" is set to the winning counter in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6403). Further, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened by outputting a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b (step S6404).

After that, the special electric open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6405). Thereafter, the special electric release command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main side MPU 82 (step S6406). By storing the special electric release command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the special electric open command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. FIG. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the special electric signal open command, the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65 and the pattern display device 41 execute an effect indicating that the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state. . After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S6407). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "4" corresponding to the special electric open processing (FIG. 97(b)).

Returning to the description of the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), in a situation where the special electric winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6007: YES), the work area 211 for specific control is not set to "1" (step S6008: NO), and the value of the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" (step S6009 : YES), the game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a even though the period for validating the detection of the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a has passed after the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed. means that In this case, "1" is set to the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6010). The special electric prize-winning abnormality flag 213o is provided corresponding to the special electric prize-winning device 32 as already explained. As a result of the monitoring process using the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b or the fourth prize winning monitoring timer counter 213e, when it is specified by the non-specific control process that an abnormal game ball has been detected, "1" is set to the special electric prize-winning abnormality flag 213o in the processing of the non-specific control.

Thereafter, the special electric winning abnormal command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main side MPU 82 (step S6011). By storing the abnormal special electric prize command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the special electric prize abnormal command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. FIG. When the sound and light side MPU 93 receives the special electric prize winning abnormality command, the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65 and the pattern display device 41 notify that an abnormality has occurred regarding the prize winning to the special electric prize winning device 32. make it

After that, 1 is added to the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6012). As already explained, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulse-shaped security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall. It is a counter that is used by the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times the pulse-shaped security signal is output to the outside.

When a negative determination is made in step S6007, when an affirmative determination is made in step S6008, when a negative determination is made in step S6009, or when the process of step S6012 is executed, the confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control Among the first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, the third winning confirmation flag, the special electric winning confirmation flag, the first operation winning confirmation flag, the second operation winning confirmation flag, the out confirmation flag, and the gate winning confirmation flag of the group 211d , determines whether or not the confirmation flag corresponding to the value of the monitored counter provided in the non-specific control work area 213 is set to "1" (step S6013).

The monitoring target counter is a counter for specifying the type of confirmation flag to be monitored in steps S6014 to S6016 by the main MPU . At the timing when the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) is started, the value of the monitored counter is "0". The types of confirmation flags to be monitored in steps S6014 to S6016 are the first winning confirmation flag when the value of the monitored counter is "0" and the value of the monitored counter is "1". is the second winning confirmation flag, the case where the monitored counter value is "2" is the third winning confirmation flag, and the case where the monitored counter value is "3" is the special electric winning confirmation flag. When the value of the monitored counter is "4", it is the first operation winning confirmation flag, and when the value of the monitored counter is "5", it is the second operation winning confirmation flag, and the value of the monitored counter is is "6", it is an out confirmation flag, and when the value of the monitored counter is "7", it is a gate winning confirmation flag.

If the confirmation flag corresponding to the current value of the monitoring target counter is set to "1" (step S6013: YES), non-specific control among winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in work area 213 for non-specific control It is determined whether or not the value of the winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h corresponding to the value of the monitoring target counter in the work area 213 for is 1 or more (step S6014).

As already explained, the first to third winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213c detect one game ball in the winning opening detection sensors 231a to 233a provided in the corresponding general winning opening 31, and then the next game ball. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period during which the detection of is treated as invalid. As already explained, the fourth prize-winning monitoring timer counter 213d detects one game ball in the special electric prize detection sensor 234a of the special electric prize-winning device 32, and the main side MPU 82 treats the detection of the next game ball as invalid. A counter used for identification. As already explained, the fifth prize-winning monitoring timer counter 213e detects one game ball in the first operation opening detection sensor 235a provided in the first operation opening 33, and treats the detection of the next game ball as invalid. It is a counter used to specify the period in the main MPU 82 . As already explained, the sixth winning monitoring timer counter 213f is mainly for the period from when one game ball is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 236a of the second operation opening 34 to when the detection of the next game ball is treated as invalid. This is a counter used for identification by the side MPU 82 . As already explained, the seventh prize-winning monitoring timer counter 213g detects one game ball in the out-port detection sensor 237a provided in the out-port 24a, and then treats the detection of the next game ball as invalid. A counter used for identification by the MPU 82 . As already explained, the eighth prize-winning monitoring timer counter 213h detects one game ball in the gate detection sensor 238a provided in the through gate 35, and then treats the detection of the next game ball as invalid. It is a counter used for specifying in .

When the value of the monitoring target counter is "0", the first prize winning monitoring timer counter 213a is to be checked. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "1", the second prize winning monitoring timer counter 213b is to be checked. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "2", the third prize winning monitoring timer counter 213c is to be checked. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "3", the fourth prize winning monitoring timer counter 213d is to be checked. When the value of the monitoring object counter is "4", the fifth prize winning monitoring timer counter 213e becomes the confirmation object. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "5", the sixth prize winning monitoring timer counter 213f is to be checked. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "6", the seventh prize winning monitoring timer counter 213g is to be checked. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "7", the eighth prize winning monitoring timer counter 213h is to be checked.

If the value of the winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h corresponding to the monitored counter value is 1 or more (step S6014: YES), the detection result of the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the monitored counter value is one. It means that the detection result of the detection sensors 231a to 238a becomes a new game ball detection result before the detection invalid period (for example, 0.1 second) elapses after the game ball detection result. When such a situation occurs, for example, the chattering of the game ball occurs in the detection range of the detection sensors 231a to 238a, and the detection of the detection sensors 231a to 238a for the passage of one game ball. The result may be a detection result corresponding to the passage of a plurality of game balls. The detection invalid period is set as a period during which no game ball is newly detected when the game ball passes normally without chattering.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S6014, it means that the game ball is detected before the detection invalid period elapses in the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitored counter. In this case, the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, the third general winning abnormality flag 213n, the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control, Of the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r and the gate winning abnormality flag 213s, the abnormality flags 213l to 213s corresponding to the value of the monitored object counter are set to "1" (step S6015). When the value of the monitored counter is "0", "1" is set to the first general prize winning abnormality flag 213l. When the value of the monitoring object counter is "1", "1" is set to the second general prize winning abnormality flag 213m. When the value of the monitored object counter is "2", "1" is set to the third general prize winning abnormality flag 213n. When the value of the monitored counter is "3", "1" is set to the special electric prize-winning abnormality flag 213o. When the value of the monitored object counter is "4", "1" is set to the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p. When the value of the monitored counter is "5", "1" is set to the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q. When the value of the monitored counter is "6", "1" is set to the out abnormality flag 213r. When the value of the monitored counter is "7", "1" is set to the gate winning abnormality flag 213s. Thereby, when the game ball is detected before the detection invalid period elapses in the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the counter to be monitored, "1" is set to the corresponding abnormality flags 213l to 213s. be.

When a negative determination is made in step S6014, or when the process of step S6015 is executed, a detection invalid period is set in the winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h corresponding to the value of the monitoring target counter (step S6016). As a result, when the detection sensor 231a to 238a corresponding to the counter to be monitored detects the game ball before the detection invalid period elapses, or when the game ball detects the game ball after the detection invalid period elapses. Even if there is, a detection invalid period is set in the winning monitor timer counters 213a to 213h corresponding to the monitored counters.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the monitored counter is the maximum value of "7" (step S6017). If the value of the monitored counter is less than the maximum value (step S6017: NO), 1 is added to the value of the monitored counter (step S6018), and the process returns to step S6013. As a result, the monitoring process of steps S6014 to S6016 is executed for the detection sensors 231a to 238a to be monitored in the next order. By executing the processes of steps S6013 to S6018 as described above, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected within the detection invalid period for each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a.

If the value of the monitored counter is the maximum value (step S6017: YES), magnetic monitoring processing is executed (step S6019). FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the magnetism monitoring process. The processes of steps S6501 to S6509 in the magnetism monitoring process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main side MPU 82 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnetism monitoring delay timer counter 213j in the non-specific control work area 213 is "0" (step S6501). As already described, the magnetism monitoring delay timer counter 213j is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the magnetism monitoring delay period during which the magnetism abnormality is not monitored. The magnetism monitoring delay period is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, it is set to 0.5 seconds.

If the value of the magnetism monitoring delay timer counter 213j is "0" (step S6501: YES), whether or not the detection result of the magnetic detection sensor provided on the back surface of the game board 24 is the detection result corresponding to the magnetic detection. (step S6502). If a negative determination is made in step S6502, the value of the magnetic detection counter 213i in the non-specific control work area 213 is cleared to "0" (step S6503). As already explained, the magnetism detection counter 213i is a counter for identifying the number of times the occurrence of magnetic anomaly is identified by the main MPU 82 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S6502, 1 is added to the value of the magnetic detection counter 213i in the non-specific control work area 213 (step S6504). Then, when the value of the magnetic detection counter 213i after the addition of 1 is equal to or greater than the abnormality reference number of times (specifically, "3") (step S6505: YES), the magnetic abnormality flag 213t in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6506). By setting the magnetic anomaly flag 213t to "1", the main MPU 82 executes processing for coping with the occurrence of the magnetic anomaly.

After that, the magnetic abnormality command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main side MPU 82 (step S6507). By storing the magnetic abnormality command in the command transmission buffer 223 b , the command transmission circuit 224 operates to transmit the magnetic abnormality command to the sound and light side MPU 93 . By receiving the magnetic abnormality command, the sound and light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting section 64, the speaker section 65 and the pattern display device 41 to notify that the magnetic abnormality has occurred.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6508). As already explained, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to determine whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulse-shaped security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall. It is a counter that is used by the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times the pulse-shaped security signal is output to the outside.

If a negative determination is made in step S6505, or if the process of step S6508 is executed, a magnetism monitoring delay period is set in the magnetism monitoring delay timer counter 213j in the non-specific control work area 213 (step S6509). As a result, the measurement of the magnetism monitoring delay period during which the magnetism anomaly is not monitored is started. In this manner, a magnetic monitoring delay period is set during which monitoring of magnetic anomalies is not performed, and when the value of the magnetic detection counter 213i reaches or exceeds an abnormality reference number of times defined as a plurality of times as described above, a magnetic anomaly is detected. By adopting a configuration that identifies the occurrence, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of magnetic anomaly from being identified even when magnetism is generated by electrical noise rather than by an illegal magnetic output.

Next, refer to the flowchart of FIG. 99 for the fraud handling process executed in step S5511, which is the processing order after the fraud detection process including the fraud detection execution process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). I will explain while The processes of steps S6601 to S6625 in the fraud handling process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a specific control program and specific control data.

When "1" is set to the first general prize winning abnormality flag 213l in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6601: YES), this irregularity in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in this processing time Detection of the game ball in the first winning hole detection sensor 231a specified in the ball entering detection process (FIG. 91) of step S5508 which is the processing order before the corresponding process (that is, winning the general winning hole 31) is chattering. It means that it is caused by an abnormality caused by In this case, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in this processing cycle, the specific control work area 211 Although "1" is set to the first winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d, the first winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6602). In the processing order of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), the fraud handling processing (FIG. 99) is after the entering ball detection processing (FIG. 91) and before the second management processing (to be described later). set in the processing order. Therefore, it is specified that the game ball is not detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 231a in the second management process to be described later.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6603). In the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in this processing round, the game ball in the first winning hole detection sensor 231a in the entering ball detection processing (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is the processing order before this fraudulent handling processing The value of the counter for 10 prize balls is incremented by 1 with the detection of . Also, if the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, in the payout output process of step S5518, which is the processing order after the fraud handling process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), A process for transmitting a 10 prize ball command instructing the payout of 10 game balls to the payout control device 77 is executed. In this case, if the game ball detection by the first winning hole detection sensor 231a is caused by an abnormality, the first timer interrupt processing ( 88), the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) before the payout output process of step S5518 is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive payout of game balls.

In steps S6604 to S6606, the same processes as in steps S6601 to S6603 are executed for the second winning opening detection sensor 232a, and in steps S6607 to S6609, the same processes as in steps S6601 to S6603 are performed for the third winning opening detection sensor 233a. to run. Specifically, when the second general winning abnormality flag 213m in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6604: YES), the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6605), and the value of the counter for 10 prize balls in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S6606). Further, when the third general prize winning abnormality flag 213n in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S6607: YES), the third check flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control The winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6608), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the specific control work area 211 is subtracted by 1 (step S6609).

If "1" is set to the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6610: YES), this fraudulent handling processing in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in this processing time The detection of the game ball in the special electric detection sensor 234a specified in the entering ball detection processing (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is the processing order before (that is, winning the special electric prize winning device 32) is abnormal due to chattering or closed state It means that it is due to the illegality of winning a game ball to the special electric winning device 32 that should be. In this case, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in this processing cycle, the specific control work area 211 Although "1" is set to the special electric prize-winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d, the special electric prize-winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6611). The fraud handling process (FIG. 99) is the process order after the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in the process order of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and is the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) and will be described later. The processing order is set before the second management processing to be performed. Therefore, it is specified that the game ball is not detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a in the special electric open processing (FIG. 97(b)) or the second management processing described later.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the 15 prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6612). In the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in this processing round, the game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a in the entering ball detection processing (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is the processing order before this fraudulent handling processing. As a trigger, 1 is added to the value of the counter for 15 prize balls. Also, if the value of the counter for 15 prize balls is 1 or more, in the payout output process of step S5518, which is the processing order after the fraud handling process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), A process for transmitting a 15 prize ball command instructing the payout of 15 game balls to the payout control device 77 is executed. In this case, if the detection of the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a is abnormal or fraudulent, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is incremented by 1. The first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88), the value of the counter for 15 prize balls is decremented by 1 in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) before the payout output process of step S5518 is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive payout of game balls.

When "1" is set to the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6613: YES), this irregularity in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in this processing time The detection of the game ball in the first working hole detection sensor 235a (that is, the winning of the first working hole 33) specified in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is the processing order before the corresponding process, is chattering. It means that it is caused by an abnormality such as In this case, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in this processing cycle, the specific control work area 211 Although "1" is set to the first operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d, the first operation winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6614). The fraud handling process (FIG. 99) is the process order after the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in the process order of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and is the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) and will be described later. The processing order is set before the second management processing to be performed. Therefore, it is specified that the game ball is not detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 235a in the reservation information acquisition process (FIG. 92) or the second management process described later.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the one prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6615). In the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in this processing round, the game ball in the first operation opening detection sensor 235a in the entering ball detection processing (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is the processing order before this fraudulent handling processing The value of the one-ball counter is incremented by one with the detection of . Also, if the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, in the payout output process of step S5518, which is the processing order after the fraud handling process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), A process for transmitting a one prize ball command instructing the payout of one game ball to the payout control device 77 is executed. In this case, if the detection of the game ball in the first operation opening detection sensor 235a is caused by an abnormality, the first timer interrupt processing ( 88), before the payout output process of step S5518 is executed, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by 1 in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99). As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive payout of game balls.

When "1" is set to the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6616: YES), this irregularity in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in this processing time The detection of the game ball in the second working opening detection sensor 236a specified in the ball entering detection processing (FIG. 91) of step S5508 which is the processing order before the corresponding processing (that is, the winning to the second working opening 34) is chattering. It means that it is due to the illegality of winning the game ball into the second operation port 34 which should be in an abnormal or closed state. In this case, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in this processing cycle, the specific control work area 211 Although "1" is set to the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d, the second operation winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6617). In the processing order of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), the fraud handling processing (FIG. 99) is the processing order after the entering ball detection processing (FIG. 91). The processing order is set before the general electric power control processing (step S5515) and the second management processing described later. Therefore, it is specified that the game ball is not detected by the second operating opening detection sensor 236a in the holding information acquisition process (FIG. 92), the general electric control process (FIG. 96), or the second management process described later.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the one prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6618). In the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in this processing round, the game ball in the second operation opening detection sensor 236a in the entering ball detection processing (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is the processing order before this fraudulent handling processing The value of the one-ball counter is incremented by one with the detection of . Also, if the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, in the payout output process of step S5518, which is the processing order after the fraud handling process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), A process for transmitting a one prize ball command instructing the payout of one game ball to the payout control device 77 is executed. In this case, if the detection of the game ball by the second operation opening detection sensor 236a is abnormal or illegal, the value of the counter for one prize ball is increased by 1. The first timer interrupt of the processing time Before the payout output process of step S5518 is executed in the process (FIG. 88), the value of the one-ball counter is subtracted by 1 in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99). As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive payout of game balls.

When "1" is set in the out abnormality flag 213r in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6619: YES), in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in this processing, The detection of the game ball (that is, the ball entering the out port 24a) in the out port detection sensor 237a specified in the ball input detection processing (FIG. 91) of step S5508, which is the previous processing order, was caused by an abnormality such as chattering. means to be In this case, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in this processing cycle, the specific control work area 211 Although the out confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d is set to "1", the out confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6620). In the processing order of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), the fraud handling processing (FIG. 99) is after the entering ball detection processing (FIG. 91) and before the second management processing (described later). set in the processing order. Therefore, it is specified that the game ball is not detected by the outlet detection sensor 237a in the second management process to be described later.

When "1" is set to the gate winning abnormality flag 213s in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6621: YES), the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in this processing time This fraudulent handling processing The detection of the game ball in the gate detection sensor 238a specified in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is the processing order before (that is, winning the through gate 35) is caused by an abnormality due to chattering etc. means that In this case, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in this processing cycle, the specific control work area 211 Although "1" is set to the gate winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d, the gate winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6622). In the processing order of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), the fraud handling processing (FIG. 99) is the processing order after the entering ball detection processing (FIG. 91), and is from the normal/universal power control processing (step S5515). is also set to the previous processing order. Therefore, it is specified that the game ball is not detected in the gate detection sensor 238a in the process for acquiring the hold information on the side of the general pattern in the general pattern general electrical control process (step S5515).

When "1" is set to the magnetic abnormality flag 213t in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6623: YES), "1" is set to the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6624). If "1" is set to the game stop flag, while executing the processing of steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), step by making an affirmative determination in step S5505 The processing from S5506 to S5520 is not executed. As a result, when it is specified that a magnetic anomaly has occurred, a process for monitoring a power failure, updating various counters, and managing the game history is executed, while a process for progressing the game is executed. will not be executed.

In the fraud handling process, after executing the processes of steps S6601 to S6624, security processing is executed in step S6625. Security processing will be described in detail later.

The state of monitoring whether or not the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 236a is normal will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 100(a) shows the period during which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is executed, and FIG. 100(b) shows the entering ball detection process (FIG. 91) included in the specific control process. FIG. 100(c) shows the state of the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control, and FIG. 100(d) shows fraud handling processing included in the specific control processing. (Fig. 99) is executed, Fig. 100 (e) shows a period during which the hold information acquisition process (Fig. 92) included in the specific control process is executed, and Fig. 100 (f) FIG. 100(g) shows a period during which the information clearing process (FIG. 94) included in the non-specific control process is executed, and FIG. FIG. 100(h) shows the state of the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

First, the case where the detection of the game ball by the second operation opening detection sensor 236a is not due to abnormality or fraud will be described.

At the timing of t1, a new processing cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is started as shown in FIG. 100(a). Then, at the timing of t2 when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) of the processing time is being executed, the entering ball detection process (FIG. 91) is started as shown in FIG. 100(b). In the winning ball detection process (FIG. 91), first, the first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, the third winning confirmation flag, the special train winning flag, and the first operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control are set. The confirmation flag, the second operation winning confirmation flag, the out confirmation flag and the gate winning confirmation flag are cleared to "0". In addition, by specifying that the game ball is detected by the second operating opening detection sensor 236a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), it is specified as shown in FIG. 100(c) at the timing of t3. "1" is set to the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for control.

After that, at the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 100(b), the entering ball detection processing (FIG. 91) ends, and at the timing t4, the fraud detection processing (FIG. 93) is called by the CALLI command. As shown in (f), information clear processing (FIG. 94) is started. In the information clearing process (FIG. 94), as already described, the first general prize-winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general prize-winning abnormality flag 213m, and the third general prize-winning abnormality flag are cleared among the storage areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control. 213n, the special electric prize winning abnormality flag 213o, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t are cleared to "0".

After that, at the timing t5, the information clearing process (FIG. 94) ends as shown in FIG. 100(f), and the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) starts at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. be done. In the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) included in the non-specific control process, it is specified that the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". The setting of "1" to the 2-operation winning confirmation flag is not specified as being caused by an abnormality or fraud. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 100(h), the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the non-specific control work area 213 is not set to "1", and the information of the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q becomes " 0”.

Thereafter, the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) ends as shown in FIG. 100(g) at time t6, and the fraud response process (FIG. 99) starts as shown in FIG. 100(d) at time t6. be done. In the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) included in the specific control process, it is specified that the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1". The process of clearing the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for "0" is not executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 100(c), the state in which the second operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1" is maintained.

After that, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 100(d), the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) ends, and at the timing of t7, the pending information acquisition process (FIG. 92) starts as shown in FIG. 100(e). be started. In the reservation information acquisition process (FIG. 92), as shown in FIG. 100(c), the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1", so the second special figure reservation On condition that the number of pieces of the second pending information stored in the area 112 is less than the maximum storage number, the processing for acquiring the second pending information is executed. In addition, when the second operation winning confirmation flag is set to "1", "0" will be cleared in the incoming ball detection process (Fig. 91) in the next process of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88). It is canceled by being released. After that, at the timing of t8, the current processing cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) ends as shown in FIG. 100(a).

Next, the case where the detection of the game ball by the second operation opening detection sensor 236a is due to abnormality or fraud will be described.

At the timing of t9, a new processing cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is started as shown in FIG. 100(a). Then, at the timing t10 when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) of the processing time is being executed, the ball-entering detection process (FIG. 91) is started as shown in FIG. 100(b). In the winning ball detection process (FIG. 91), first, the first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, the third winning confirmation flag, the special train winning flag, and the first operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control are set. The confirmation flag, the second operation winning confirmation flag, the out confirmation flag and the gate winning confirmation flag are cleared to "0". In addition, by specifying that the game ball is detected by the second operating hole detection sensor 236a in the entering ball detection process (FIG. 91), it is specified at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. "1" is set to the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for control.

After that, at time t12, as shown in FIG. 100(b), the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) ends, and at time t12, the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) is called by the CALLI command. As shown in (f), information clear processing (FIG. 94) is started. In the information clearing process (FIG. 94), as already described, the first general prize-winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general prize-winning abnormality flag 213m, and the third general prize-winning abnormality flag are cleared among the storage areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control. 213n, the special electric prize winning abnormality flag 213o, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t are cleared to "0".

After that, at the timing of t13, the information clear processing (FIG. 94) ends as shown in FIG. 100(f), and the fraud detection execution processing (FIG. 95) starts at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. be done. In the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) included in the non-specific control process, it is specified that the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". Then, it is specified that the setting of "1" to the second operation winning confirmation flag is caused by an abnormality or fraud. Therefore, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 100(h), the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the non-specific control work area 213 is set to "1".

Thereafter, the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) ends as shown in FIG. 100(g) at time t15, and the fraud response process (FIG. 99) starts as shown in FIG. 100(d) at time t15. be done. In the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) included in the specific control process, it is specified that the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". Therefore, at the timing of t16, the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 100(c).

After that, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 100(d), the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) ends, and at the timing of t17, the pending information acquisition process (FIG. 92) starts as shown in FIG. 100(e). be started. In the pending information acquisition process (FIG. 92), as shown in FIG. 100(c), the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is not set to "1", so the second pending information is Do not perform processing to acquire. After that, at the timing of t18, the current processing cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) ends as shown in FIG. 100(a).

After that, at the timing of t19, a new processing cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is started as shown in FIG. 100(a). Then, at the timing of t20 when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) of the processing time is being executed, the ball-entering detection process (FIG. 91) is started as shown in FIG. 100(b). By specifying that the game ball is not detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 236a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), the work area 211 for specific control is opened as shown in FIG. 100(c). "1" is not set to the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d.

After that, at the timing t21, as shown in FIG. 100(b), the entering ball detection processing (FIG. 91) ends, and at the timing t21, the fraud detection processing (FIG. 93) is called by the CALLI command. As shown in (f), information clear processing (FIG. 94) is started. In the information clearing process (FIG. 94), as already described, the first general prize-winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general prize-winning abnormality flag 213m, and the third general prize-winning abnormality flag are cleared among the storage areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control. 213n, the special electric prize winning abnormality flag 213o, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t are cleared to "0". Therefore, at the timing of t22, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 100(h). Thereafter, the information clearing process (FIG. 94) ends as shown in FIG. 100(f) at time t23, and the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) starts as shown in FIG. 100(g) at time t23 be done.

As described above, each detection sensor 231a to 238a that detects the entry of the game ball into each of the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the out port 24a, and the through gate 35 Entering ball detection processing (FIG. 91) for specifying whether or not a game ball has been detected in , and processing for progressing the game in response to detection of a game ball by each detection sensor 231a to 238a (Holding information acquisition processing (Fig. 92), general electric control processing (Fig. 96), special electric open processing (Fig. 97 (c)), payout output processing (step S5518), etc.) are included in the specific control processing On the other hand, fraud detection execution processing (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether the detection of game balls by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to abnormality or fraud is included in the non-specific control processing . As a result, there is no need to execute fraud detection execution processing (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether the detection of game balls by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud in the specific control processing. , the data capacity allocated to the specific control program and specific control data in the main ROM 83 can be allocated to processes other than the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95).

In the processing order of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), the entry ball detection processing which is included in the specific control processing and is the processing for specifying whether or not the game ball is detected by each detection sensor 231a to 238a. After (FIG. 91), fraud detection execution processing (Figure 95) is executed, and after the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), it is included in the specific control process and the game is progressed in response to the detection of the game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. (holding information acquisition process (FIG. 92), general electric control process (FIG. 96), special electric open process (FIG. 97(c)), payout output process (step S5518), etc.) are executed. As a result, fraud detection execution processing (Fig. 95) for monitoring whether the detection of game balls by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to abnormality or fraud is executed as non-specific control processing. Even with this configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing for progressing the game from being executed in response to the detection of game balls by the detection sensors 231a to 238a caused by an abnormality or fraud.

When it is specified that a game ball is detected by the detection sensors 231a to 238a in the entering ball detection process (FIG. 91) included in the process of specific control, the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control Each provided confirmation flag is set to "1", and it is specified that the detection of the game ball is caused by an abnormality or fraud in the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95) included in the non-specific control process. is set to "1" in each of the abnormality flags 213l to 213s provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, and when "1" is set to the abnormality flags 213l to 213s, The confirmation flags corresponding to the abnormality flags 213l to 213s set to "1" in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) included in the control process are cleared to "0". As a result, information stored in the work area 211 for specific control can be read in both specific control processing and non-specific control processing, whereas information stored in the work area 211 for specific control can be read. can be written in specific control processing, but not in non-specific control processing, and reading of information stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in specific control processing and non-specific control processing. While it is possible in any case, while writing information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in non-specific control processing but not possible in specific control processing, the above It becomes possible to produce such an excellent effect.

After the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) included in the non-specific control process is executed, until the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) is executed again, the fraud response process ( FIG. 99) is executed. Then, in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99), the confirmation flag is cleared to "0" and various prize ball counters are reset according to the abnormality flags 213l to 213s whose information is set in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95). Execute the subtraction process. In this case, in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), after first clearing the abnormality flags 213l to 213s to "0", a process for setting information to the abnormality flags 213l to 213s is executed. As a result, in a configuration in which writing of information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in non-specific control processing but not possible in specific control processing, an abnormality is detected at an appropriate timing in non-specific control processing. It becomes possible to clear the flags 213l to 213s to "0".

<Configuration related to security signal>
Next, the security processing executed in step S6625 of the fraud handling processing (FIG. 99) included in the specific control processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The processing of steps S6701 to S6714 in the security processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using the specific control program and specific control data.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the second security counter 213k in the non-specific control work area 213 has increased since the previous execution of security processing (step S6701). The specific control work area 211 is provided with a previous value storage area 211e (see FIG. 78) for storing the value of the second security counter 213k when security processing is executed. In step S6701, it is determined whether or not the value of the second security counter 213k is greater than the value of the previous value storage area 211e.

If the value of the second security counter 213k is greater than the value of the previous value storage area 211e (step S6701: YES), the value of the previous value storage area 211e is subtracted from the value of the second security counter 213k, and the value after the subtraction is obtained. is added to the first security counter 211a in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6702). Thereafter, the previous value storage area 211e is overwritten with the value of the second security counter 213k (step S6703).

As already described, the trigger for adding "1" to the first security counter 211a is when the set value update process (step S4916) is executed in the main process (FIG. 81) (step S4917) and when the main process (FIG. 81) is executed. ), the RAM clearing process (step S4919) is executed (step S4920). As already described, the trigger for adding "1" to the second security counter 213k is when the disconnection is confirmed in the disconnection short-circuit processing (FIG. 87) (step S5405), and when the disconnection short-circuit processing (FIG. 87) is confirmed (step S5409), and in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), it is confirmed that a game ball enters the closed second operating port 34 (step S6006), fraud detection is executed. In the processing (FIG. 95), if the entry of the game ball into the special electric winning device 32 in the closed state is confirmed (step S6012), and in the magnetic monitoring processing (FIG. 98), if the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality is confirmed ( step S6508).

If a negative determination is made in step S6701 or if the process of step S6703 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more (step S6704). If the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more (step S6704: YES), the security flag 211f (see FIG. 78) provided in the specific control work area 211 is set to "1" (step S6705). When the security flag 211f is set to "1", the abnormality display device 206 mounted on the main control board 81 of the main control device 71 is in a light emitting state. Incidentally, when the value of the security flag 211f is "0", the abnormality display device 206 is kept turned off. The state in which the security flag 211f is set to "1" is maintained when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is continued, and the RAM clear processing (step S4919) in the main processing (FIG. 81) or the set value The security flag 211f is cleared to "0" when the RAM clearing process (step S5113) in the update process (FIG. 83) is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S6704 or if the process of step S6705 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current situation is a situation in which a security signal is being externally output from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the gaming hall (step S6706). If the security signal is not being output to the outside (step S6706: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more (step S6707). is "0" (step S6708). The continuation period counter measures the output continuation period when the output of the security signal continues for the output continuation period (specifically 200 milliseconds), and the stop continuation period (specifically is 200 milliseconds). The value set in the duration counter is decremented by 1 each time the specific control timer update process of step S5510 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is executed.

If the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more and the value of the duration counter is "0" (steps S6707 and S6708: YES), security signal output start processing is executed (step S6709). As a result, the main MPU 82 starts to output a security signal to the management computer of the game hall. Thereafter, information corresponding to the output duration (specifically, 200 milliseconds) is set in the duration counter in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6710). Also, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first security counter 211a (step S6711).

If the security signal is being output to the outside (step S6706: YES), the output duration is determined by determining whether the value of the duration counter in the work area 211 for specific control is "0". has elapsed (step S6712). If the value of the duration counter is "0" (step S6712: YES), security signal output stop processing is executed (step S6713). As a result, the external output of the security signal from the main side MPU 82 to the management computer of the game hall is stopped. Thereafter, information corresponding to the stop duration (specifically, 200 milliseconds) is set in the duration counter in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6714).

Next, how the security signal is output to the outside will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 102(a) shows the period during which specific control processing is executed, FIG. 102(b) shows the value of the first security counter 211a in the work area 211 for specific control, and FIG. FIG. 102(d) shows the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control, and FIG. FIG. 102(f) shows the state of the security flag 211f in the work area 211 for specific control, and FIG. FIG. 102(h) shows a period during which the abnormality display device 206 mounted on the control board 81 is in a light-emitting state, and FIG.

From timing t1 to timing t3, as shown in FIG. 102(a), the main MPU 82 executes specific control processing. In this case, the main process (FIG. 81) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. Then, by executing the set value update process (step S4916) or the RAM clear process (step S4919) in the main process (FIG. 81), the first security counter is cleared at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 211a is incremented by one.

After that, at timing t3, the first management process (FIG. 85) included in the non-specific control process is called by the CALLI command while the specific control process is being executed in the main process (FIG. 81) (step S4927). ). The first management process (FIG. 85) is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 as shown in FIG. 102(c). In this case, the occurrence of disconnection or short circuit is specified in the disconnection and short-circuit processing (FIG. 87) in the first management processing (FIG. 85). Therefore, at the timing of t4, the value of the second security counter 213k is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 102(d).

After that, when the first management process (FIG. 85) ends at the timing t5, the specific control process is executed from the timing t5 to the timing t6 as shown in FIG. 102(a). In the specific control process, the process of steps S4927 to S4932 in the main process (FIG. 81) and the process of steps S5501 to S5508 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) are executed.

After that, at the timing of t6, while specific control processing is being executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), the CALLI instruction calls fraud detection processing (FIG. 93) included in non-specific control processing ( step S5509). The fraud detection process (FIG. 93) is executed from timing t6 to timing t7 as shown in FIG. 102(c). In this case, in the fraud detection execution processing (FIG. 95) in the fraud detection processing (FIG. 93), the winning to the closed second operation opening 34, the winning to the special electric winning device 32 in the closed state, and the magnetic abnormality Since the occurrence is not specified, the value of the second security counter 213k is maintained without being incremented by one.

After that, when the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) ends at the timing t7, the specific control process is executed from the timing t7 to the timing t10 as shown in FIG. 102(a). In the specific control process, the process of steps S5510 to S5520 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is executed. In this case, security processing (FIG. 101) is executed in fraud handling processing (step S5511) as shown in FIG. 102(e) from timing t8 to timing t9.

In the security processing (FIG. 101), it is specified that the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is greater than the value in the previous value storage area 211e in the work area 211 for specific control. By doing so, the incremented value is added to the first security counter 211a. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 102(b), the value of the first security counter 211a increases from "1" to "2" at the timing of t8.

In the security processing (FIG. 101), by specifying that the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more, "1" is set to the security flag 212f as shown in FIG. 102(f) at the timing of t8. do. By setting "1" to the security flag 212f, the abnormality display device 206 becomes a light emitting state as shown in FIG. 102(g) at the timing of t8.

In the security processing (FIG. 101), by specifying that the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more, external output of the security signal is started at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 102(h), As shown in FIG. 102(b), 1 is subtracted from the value of the first security counter 211a.

After that, at the timing of t10, under the condition that specific control processing is being executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), the second management processing (FIG. 107), which is included in the non-specific control processing, is executed by the CALLI instruction. The second management process (FIG. 107) called (step S5521) is executed from timing t10 to timing t11 as shown in FIG. 102(c).

After that, when the second management process (FIG. 107) ends at the timing t11, the specific control process is executed from the timing t11 to the timing t12 as shown in FIG. 102(a). In the specific control process, the process of steps S4927 to S4932 in the main process (FIG. 81) and the process of steps S5501 to S5508 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) are executed.

After that, at the timing of t12, while specific control processing is being executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), the CALLI instruction calls fraud detection processing (FIG. 93) included in non-specific control processing ( step S5509). The fraud detection process (FIG. 93) is executed from timing t12 to timing t13 as shown in FIG. 102(c). In this case, in the fraud detection execution processing (FIG. 95) in the fraud detection processing (FIG. 93), the winning to the closed second operation opening 34, the winning to the special electric winning device 32 in the closed state, and the magnetic abnormality Since the occurrence is not specified, the value of the second security counter 213k is maintained without being incremented by one.

After that, when the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) ends at the timing of t13, the specific control process is executed from the timing of t13 to the timing of t16 as shown in FIG. 102(a). In the specific control process, the process of steps S5510 to S5520 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is executed. In this case, security processing (FIG. 101) is executed in fraud handling processing (step S5511) as shown in FIG. 102(e) from timing t14 to timing t15.

In the security process (FIG. 101), the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control does not change from the value in the previous value storage area 211e in the work area 211 for specific control. As shown in (b), the process of increasing the value of the first security counter 211a according to the value of the second security counter 213k is not executed. Further, the state in which the security flag 211f is set to "1" is maintained when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is continued, and the RAM clear processing (step S4919) in the main processing (FIG. 81). 102(g), the light emitting state of the abnormality display device 206 is maintained. Further, since the output continuation period (specifically, 200 milliseconds) has not elapsed since the start of the external output of the security signal, the external output of the security signal is continued as shown in FIG. 102(h).

After that, at the timing of t16, under the condition that specific control processing is being executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), the second management processing (FIG. 107), which is included in the non-specific control processing, is executed by the CALLI instruction. It is called (step S5521).

As described above, the process for specifying whether or not an event targeted for external output of the security signal has occurred is executed not only in the specific control process but also in the non-specific control process. As a result, the process for monitoring whether or not the event targeted for the external output of the security signal has occurred is assigned to the non-specific control process, and the program and data for the specific control process Capacity can be allocated to other processes.

A work area 211 for specific control is provided with a first security counter 211a and a work area 213 for non-specific control is provided with a second security counter 213k. If it is identified that the event has occurred, the value of the first security counter 211a is incremented by 1, and it is identified that the event for which the security signal is to be externally output has occurred in the non-specific control process. If so, 1 is added to the value of the second security counter 213k. As a result, writing of information to the work area 211 for specific control is enabled in specific control processing and disabled in non-specific control processing, and writing of information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is disabled. Although it is possible in specific control processing and not possible in specific control processing, events that are subject to external output of security signals occur in each of specific control processing and non-specific control processing can be appropriately specified.

In the security processing (FIG. 101) included in the specific control processing, the increase in the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is added to the first security counter 211a. is 1 or more, the security signal is output to the outside in the security processing (FIG. 101). Then, the external output of the pulse-shaped security signal for a predetermined output continuation period or longer with a predetermined stop continuation period intervening is repeatedly executed until the value of the first security counter 211a becomes "0". Thereby, in a configuration in which the occurrence of an event targeted for external output of a security signal is specified in each of the specific control process and the non-specific control process, the process for externally outputting the security signal. can be integrated into specific control processing.

When the value of the first security counter 211a becomes 1 or more, the security flag 211f is set to "1", and when the security flag 211f is set to "1", the abnormality display device 206 is turned on. . Further, the state in which the security flag 211f is set to "1" is maintained as long as the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is continued, and the RAM clear processing (step S4919) in the main processing (FIG. 81). ) or the RAM clearing process (step S5113) in the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed, and when the security flag 211f is set to "1", the abnormality display device 206 is kept in the light emitting state. be. As a result, at least when the game hall is in operation, regardless of the confirmation timing of the abnormality display device 206, the manager of the game hall can recognize whether or not the event targeted for the external output of the security signal has occurred. becomes possible.

<Configuration related to game history management>
Next, a configuration related to game history management will be described.

The contents of various areas 251 to 254 of the non-specific control work area 213 used to manage the game history will be explained. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the non-specific control work area 213 used to manage the game history.

A normal counter area 251 is provided in the non-specific control work area 213 . The normal counter area 251 is provided with a general winning counter 251a, a special electric winning counter 251b, a first operation counter 251c, a second operation counter 251d, and an out counter 251e. The general winning counter 251a is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The special electric prize-winning counter 251b is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the special electric prize-winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The first operation counter 251c is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entered into the first operation opening 33 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The second operation counter 251d is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entered into the second operation opening 34 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The out counter 251e is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start timing.

Each of the counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 is in a state in which the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and neither in the open/close execution mode nor in the high-frequency support mode. , 31 to 34 to count the number of game balls entered. The reason why the state in which the front door frame 14 is open is not subject to measurement is that when the front door frame 14 is open, the game balls enter the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 by maintenance. This is in order to exclude the number of balls entered in the case where the number is counted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the state in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state may also be measured in the same manner as the state in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state.

The non-specific control work area 213 is provided with a calculation result storage area 252 in addition to the normal counter area 251 . The calculation result storage area 252 is an area for storing information on the game history management result calculated using the normal counter area 251 . The information of the management result of the game history stored in the calculation result storage area 252 is stored and held until the newly calculated information of the management result of the game history is overwritten by the newly calculated information.

FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the calculation result storage area 252 in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

Information of the base value calculated by the main MPU 82 is stored in the calculation result storage area 252 . The base value is the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (ie, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode. It is the ratio of the total number of game balls to be paid out.

When one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 in neither the opening/closing execution mode according to the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode, the value of the general winning counter 251a is incremented by 1, and the special electric winning device 32 When one game ball enters the first operation port 33, the value of the special electric winning counter 251b is incremented by 1, and when one game ball enters the first operation port 33, the value of the first operation counter 251c increases. 1 is added, and when one game ball enters the second operation port 34, the value of the second operation counter 251d is added by 1, and when one game ball enters the out port 24a The value of the out counter 251e is incremented by one. When the values of the various counters 251a to 251e of the normal counter area 251 are set to K91 to K95 in neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the big win nor the high-frequency support mode, the base values are as follows.
・Base value: Total number of game balls paid out (K91 x “Number of prize balls for winning to general winning port 31” + K92 x “Number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32” + K93 x “To first operation port 33 "Number of prize balls for winning" + K94 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls discharged from game area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95).

The calculation of the base value is performed each time the result calculation process (FIG. 110) described later in the second management process (FIG. 107) included in the non-specific control process is executed. The values of the various counters 251a to 251e are in a situation where the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 213 is not set to "1", and in either the open/close execution mode or the high-frequency support mode depending on the jackpot result. When the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number in a situation where it is not, it is cleared to "0" and the management is started. The total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA in a situation where the flag is set to "1" and neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode (that is, supplied to the game area PA) "0" is cleared when the total number of played game balls) becomes the shift reference number.

The management start reference number is set to 300, which is less than the shift reference number. At the stage of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipment, and at that time, game balls are put in each ball entry section and the operation after that is checked. The base value under such circumstances may be a value different from that under which a normal game is played. Therefore, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" and neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode (that is, the game At the stage when the total number of game balls supplied to the area PA) reaches the management start reference number which is smaller than the shift reference number, the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are cleared to "0". As a result, it is possible to reduce the influence of the operation check on the base value in a situation where normal games are being played after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10 . In addition, the management start reference number is not limited to 300, and may be any number as long as it is plural. good too.

The shift reference number is set to 60,000. Since the pachinko machine 10 shoots a maximum of 100 game balls per minute, 60000 is the maximum number of shots in 10 hours. In this case, the general business hours of the game hall is about 13 hours, and the time during which the game is played in neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the result of the big win nor the high-frequency support mode is about 10 hours. Therefore, the shift reference number is set on the assumption of the maximum number of game balls shot in one business day. By clearing the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 to "0" each time the shift reference number is reached, it is possible to calculate the base value within the range of the shift reference number. Note that the shift reference number is not limited to 60,000, and may be any number as long as it is plural. good.

The calculation result storage area 252 is provided with a current status area 256, a first history area 257, a second history area 258, and a third history area 259 as storage areas for storing the base value information. there is All of these various areas 256 to 259 have the same storage capacity, specifically, a capacity of 1 byte so as to be able to store base value information.

A current area 256 stores the base value calculated in the most recent result calculation process (FIG. 110). That is, the current state area 256 stores the most recent base value.

The first history area 257 stores the final base value in the previous calculation period. In this case, if the previous calculation period is after the management start flag is set to "1", the first history area 257 displays the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the previous calculation period. And the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation that is not in the high frequency support mode becomes the shift reference number Stored. Further, if the management start flag is set to "1" by the lapse of the previous calculation period, the first history area 257 displays the opening/closing execution mode and The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation other than the high-frequency support mode becomes the management start reference number Stored.

A second history area 258 stores the final base value in the calculation period two times before. In this case, if the calculation period two times before is after the management start flag is set to "1", the second history area 258 displays the opening/closing execution mode according to the jackpot result in the calculation period two times before. And the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation that is not in the high frequency support mode becomes the shift reference number Stored. Further, if the management start flag is set to "1" by the elapse of the calculation period two times before, the second history area 258 displays the opening/closing execution mode and The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation that is not in any of the high-frequency support modes becomes the management start reference number Stored.

A third history area 259 stores the final base value in the calculation period three times before. In this case, if the calculation period three times before is after the management start flag is set to "1", the third history area 259 displays the opening/closing execution mode according to the jackpot result in the calculation period three times before. And the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation that is not in the high frequency support mode becomes the shift reference number Stored. Further, if the management start flag is set to "1" by the elapse of the calculation period three times before, the third history area 259 displays the opening/closing execution mode and The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation other than the high-frequency support mode becomes the management start reference number Stored.

The base values stored in the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. Specifically, every time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the display is displayed in a predetermined order of current area 256→first history area 257→second history area 258→third history area 259. While the base value to be notified is switched, the switching of the base value to be notified in the predetermined order is repeated.

105(a) to 105(d) are for the first to fourth notifications when the base values stored in the various areas 256 to 259 are notified in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1". 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of display devices 201 to 204; FIG. FIG. 105(a) shows an example of display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the current status area 256 is notified, and FIG. 105(b) shows the first history. An example of display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the area 257 is notified, FIG. FIG. 105(d) shows an example of display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when values are notified, and FIG. An example of display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105(a) to 105(d), each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 has eight display segments 201a to 204a. The seven display segments 201a to 204a out of the eight display segments 201a to 204a are rod-shaped light emitting regions having the same shape and size, and are arranged to form the figure "8". It is On the other hand, one display segment 201a to 204a is a circular light-emitting area, and is located at the lower right position with respect to the seven display segments 201a to 204a arranged in the shape of the letter "8". is provided. At least one display segment 201a to 204a in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a luminous state even when any of the base values of the various areas 256 to 259 is to be notified.

In the first notification display device 201, a display indicating that the base value is being notified in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed. Specifically, the character "b" is displayed on the first notification display device 201 regardless of which of the base values in the various areas 256 to 259 is to be notified. When information other than the base value is notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first notification display device 201 does not display the character "b". As a result, by confirming that the character "b" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the manager of the game hall can use the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as the base. It becomes possible to grasp that the value is notified.

On the second notification display device 202, a display indicating which of the various areas 256 to 259 the base value is being notified is displayed. Specifically, in a situation where the base value of the current area 256 is notified, the character "L." is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 105(a). In the situation where the base value of the first history area 257 is notified, the character "1." is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 105(b). In the situation where the base value of the second history area 258 is notified, the characters "2." are displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 105(c). In the situation where the base value of the third history area 259 is notified, the characters "3." are displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 105(d). As a result, by confirming the characters displayed on the second notification display device 202, the administrator of the game hall can determine which base values are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to grasp whether it is during the calculation period of

In the second notification display device 202, the circular display segments 201a to 204a are in a luminous state regardless of which base value among the various areas 256 to 259 is being notified. On the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, one of the numbers "0" to "9" is displayed as the display corresponding to the base value. In this case, when one of the numbers "1" to "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, three numbers are displayed on the second to fourth notification display devices 202 to 204. It will be lined up, and it will be difficult to grasp the base value. On the other hand, when the circular display segments 201a to 204a provided in the lower right of the second notification display device 202 are in a light-emitting state, the second notification display device 202 displays "1" to " 3" is displayed, the number displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the number displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 It is possible to distinguish between numbers and numbers.

On the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the number of the base value to be notified is displayed. The base value is calculated as a decimal number up to the second decimal place. The second number is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 . Here, when the base value is "1.00", the number "0" is displayed on each of the third display device 203 and the fourth display device 204 for notification. On the other hand, when the base values are not yet stored in the areas 256 to 259 to be notified, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display are displayed as shown in FIG. A “-” character is displayed on each of the devices 204 . As a result, even when a base value calculated as a decimal number up to the second decimal place is reported by two display devices, the third display device 203 and the fourth display device 204, the base value is "1.00" and the display contents can be distinguished between the cases where the base values are not yet stored in the areas 256 to 259 to be notified.

The display contents of the combination of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are the same when the base value is "1.00" and when the base value is "0.00". On the other hand, in order to distinguish between the two, one of the former and the latter may be configured to maintain the light emitting state of "00" display, and the other may be configured to blink the display of "00".

When the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 82 is started, the game hall checks whether each display segment 201a to 204a provided in the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 can normally be in a light emitting state. In order to allow the administrator to confirm, the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until the initial check period elapses. Specifically, as the check display, all the display segments 201a to 204a of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in a light emitting state as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 106(b). .

In a situation where the management start flag in the non-specific control work area 213 is not set to "1", as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. In each of the situations where all the display segments 201a and 202a are in the light emitting state, the third notification display device 203 displays the number to the first decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period. At the same time, the second decimal place number of the base value calculated in the current calculation period is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 . While all the display segments 201a and 202a of the first and second information display devices 201 and 202 are put into a light-emitting state, the third and fourth information display devices 203 and 204 display a number corresponding to the base value. By doing so, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the currently notified base value is the base value in the situation where the management start flag is not set to "1".

Next, the process of step S5521 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) will be described.

In step S5521 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction as already described. The second management process is included in the non-specific control process. In other words, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), when the situation changes from the specific control process to the non-specific control process, the non-specific control process uses the CALLI instruction. Called.

When the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, first, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control. The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving the information of the flag register before the program of the second management process which is non-specific control process is started, the call of the second management process and the start of the second management process can be performed. It is possible to save the information of the flag register in the state before the change later in the stack area 212 for specific control.

When the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, after the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt described later are executed. Interruption of processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited. As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which are specific control processes, are interrupted and started while the second management process, which is non-specific control process, is being executed. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

When the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are executed. ) is disabled, the program corresponding to the second management process is started.

In this way, with the configuration in which the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, information in the flag register of the main side MPU 82 is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control by one instruction ("CALLI"). At the same time, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited. Then, a program corresponding to the second management process can be started. For this reason, the instruction to save the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 to the stack area 212 for specific control and the interruption of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited. to reduce the number of instructions set in the program for executing the second management process, compared to the case where the instruction for executing the second management process and the instruction for starting the program for the second management process are separately provided. be able to. As a result, the storage capacity of the main ROM 83 for storing programs can be reduced.

FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the second management process. The processing of steps S6801 to S6816 in the second management process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, as "LD SP, Y(u+2)", the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 is set to Y(u+2) as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control by a load instruction (step S6801). The stack pointer is an area in which address information is set for the main MPU 82 to specify a storage area to which information is to be written by a push instruction in the stack areas 212 and 214 . Each time a push instruction is performed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order, and each time a pop instruction is performed, the stack pointer information is updated to the previous order to be written is updated to the information of the address of the storage area. Further, when the stack area 214 for non-specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and each time the information to be stored is added. Then, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S6801, the information of the last address in stack area 214 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer.

Thereafter, as "LD (_WABUF), WA", the information in the WA register of the main side MPU 82 is saved in the WA buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S6802). Also, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", the information in the BC register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the BC buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S6803). Also, as "LD (_DEBUF), DE", the information in the DE register of the main side MPU 82 is saved in the DE buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S6804). Also, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", the information in the HL register of the main side MPU 82 is saved in the HL buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S6805). Also, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", the information in the IX register of the main side MPU 82 is saved in the IX buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S6806). Also, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", the information in the IY register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the IY buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S6807).

In the general-purpose register area 223a in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82, there are various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers and index registers in addition to the flag registers already described. In this case, in steps S6802 to S6807, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register, which are some of these various general purpose registers, auxiliary registers and index registers is saved in the corresponding buffer in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The information amount of each of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register is 2 bytes.

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are registers used in information abnormality monitoring processing (step S6808) and check processing (step S6809), which are processing corresponding to non-specific control. be. By saving the information set in such registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control prior to executing the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), the information is used for the specific control. It is also possible to save the information in these registers before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during the non-specific control, the information saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control is returned to these registers when the non-specific control is terminated. can be returned to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control, information abnormality monitoring processing (step S6808), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, and By selectively saving the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register to be used in the check processing (step S6809) to the work area 213 for non-specific control, It is possible to reduce the capacity to be secured for saving register information in the work area 213 for specific control. Therefore, while securing a large capacity of the work area 213 for non-specific control that can be used in the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), the above register information is saved. becomes possible.

Of course, among various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main MPU 82, registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register support non-specific control. The information that is set before the start of the process to be performed is stored and held until the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

In addition, by saving register information in the work area 213 for non-specific control instead of saving it in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the capacity of the stack area 214 for non-specific control can be reduced accordingly. It becomes possible. Also, when using the stack area 214 for non-specific control, as already explained, information is written in the order in which later information is read out first. Otherwise, all subsequent read order information will be returned to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 214 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-described phenomenon from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

After executing the processing of steps S6802 to S6807, information abnormality monitoring processing (step S6808) and check processing (step S6809) are executed. When executing the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), a subroutine corresponding to the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809) set in the non-specific control program is executed. When executing the program of the subroutine, in order to specify the return address of the second management process after the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809) are executed. is written to the stack area 214 for non-specific control by a push instruction. Then, when the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809) are completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop command, and the second management process indicated by the return address is performed. program. Details of the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809) will be described later.

After executing the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), the stack pointer of the main side MPU 82 is loaded with the load instruction as "LD SP, Y(r+c)" to end the second management process. Y(r+c) is set as a fixed address when returning to specific control later (step S6810). The address of Y(r+c) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 212 for specific control.

Immediately before the second management process is called in step S5521 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the amount of information stored in the specific control stack area 212 is always constant. The information of the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 (that is, the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, the information stored in the specific control stack area 212 includes, for example, the return address information of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) after the second management process ends. The constant information of the stack pointer is Y(r+c). Therefore, when the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), which are processes corresponding to the non-specific control, are completed and the process corresponding to the specific control is resumed, the constant information Y By setting (r+c) to the stack pointer of the main MPU 82, the information of the stack pointer can be restored to the information immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. By setting the fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the information of the stack pointer is restored to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, so that the processing corresponding to the non-specific control It becomes unnecessary to save the information of the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 84 before starting the control. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load and eliminate the need to secure an area for saving in the main RAM 84 .

Thereafter, as "LD WA, (_WABUF)", the WA register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the WA buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S6811). Also, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the BC register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the BC buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S6812). Also, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the DE register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the DE buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S6813). Also, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the HL register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the HL buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S6814). Also, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the IX register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the IX buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S6815). Also, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the IY register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the IY buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S6816). By executing the processing of steps S6811 to S6816, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main MPU 82 is processed for non-specific control. It is possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the control.

After executing the processing of steps S6811 to S6816, the RETI instruction returns to the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) included in the specific control processing. By executing the RETI instruction, the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before execution of the second management process is restored to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt is executed. The state in which the processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited is switched to the state in which they are permitted. As a result, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is restored to the information for executing the specific control, and new execution of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process becomes possible.

With the configuration for executing the RETI instruction, information in the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before execution of the second management process is transferred to the main MPU 82 by one instruction ("RETI"). It is possible to restore the flag register and switch from the state in which the generation of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted. For this reason, an instruction for restoring the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before execution of the second management process to the flag register of the main side MPU 82 and the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88 ) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are set in the program for non-specific control processing, compared to the case where the instruction for switching from the state in which the generation of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted is provided separately. You can reduce the number of instructions. As a result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main-side ROM 83 for storing programs for non-specific control processing.

Information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed is not saved in the main RAM 84 when the specific control process is restarted. This eliminates the need to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

Further, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed is stored when the non-specific control process is restarted after returning to the specific control process. Information that is not used. In other words, information necessary for a plurality of times of non-specific control processing executed with specific control processing intervening is stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control. It is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 is not saved in the main RAM 84 when the non-specific control process is executed, a problem arises in executing the non-specific control process. do not have.

Next, the check processing executed by calling the subroutine program in step S6809 will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing check processing. The processing of steps S6901 to S6906 in the check process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

In the check process, if the front door frame 14 is not in the open state (step S6901: NO), is not in the open/close execution mode (step S6902: NO), and is not in the high frequency support mode (step S6903: NO), the normal input After executing ball management processing (step S6904), result calculation processing (step S6905) and display processing (step S6906) are executed. On the other hand, if the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S6901: YES), if it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S6902: YES), or if it is in the high frequency support mode (step S6903: YES), the normal input Result calculation processing (step S6905) and display processing (step S6906) are executed without executing ball management processing (step S6904).

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing normal ball entry management processing in step S6904. The processing of steps S7001 to S7014 in the normal ball entry management process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main side MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control. .

When the first winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the specific control work area 211 is set to "1" (step S7001: YES), a winning to the general winning opening 31 occurs and the first winning opening It means that one game ball is normally detected by the detection sensor 231a. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 (step S7002). Further, when the second winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7003: YES), the winning to the general winning opening 31 occurs and the second winning confirmation flag is set. It means that one game ball is normally detected by the winning hole detection sensor 232a. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 (step S7004). Further, when the third winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7005: YES), winning to the general winning opening 31 occurs and the third It means that one game ball is normally detected by the winning hole detection sensor 233a. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S7006).

If the special electric prize confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7007: YES), the prize to the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs and the special electric detection sensor 234a It means that one game ball was detected normally. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the special electric prize winning counter 251b in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S7008).

When the first operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7009: YES), the winning to the first operation opening 33 occurs and the first It means that one game ball is normally detected by the operation opening detection sensor 235a. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the first operation counter 251c in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 (step S7010).

When the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7011: YES), the winning to the second operation opening 34 occurs and the second It means that one game ball was normally detected by the operation opening detection sensor 236a. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the second operation counter 251d in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 (step S7012).

When the out confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the specific control work area 211 is set to "1" (step S7013: YES), the game ball enters the out opening 24a and the out opening is detected. It means that one game ball was normally detected by the sensor 237a. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the out-counter 251e in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 (step S7014).

A first winning confirmation flag, a second winning confirmation flag, a third winning confirmation flag, a special electric winning confirmation flag, a first operation winning confirmation flag, a second operation winning confirmation flag, and The information of the out confirmation flag is read out in the normal entrance management process included in the non-specific control process, but updating of the information for these flags is not executed in the normal entrance management process. The process of clearing these flags to "0" and the process of setting them to "1" are executed in the entering ball detection process (FIG. 91) included in the specific control process as already described.

FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing result calculation processing executed in step S6905 of the check processing (FIG. 108). The processing of steps S7101 to S7115 in the result calculation process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, base value calculation processing is executed (step S7101). In the arithmetic processing, the values of various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are used to calculate the base value. The calculation method of the base value is as already explained. Then, the current area 256 is overwritten with the calculated base value (step S7102).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 213 is set to "1" (step S7103). The management start flag has a value of "0" when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured. Further, when the work area 213 for non-specific control including the management start flag is cleared to "0" and initialized, the value of the management start flag becomes "0". The total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA in a situation where the management start flag is a value of "0" and neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode (that is, the game area PA) When the total number of supplied game balls) becomes the management start reference number, the management start flag is set to "1". Also, when the management start flag is set to "1", the values of the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are cleared to "0" and a new calculation period is started. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the influence of the operation check at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 to affect the base value in a state where a normal game is played after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

If a negative determination is made in step S7103, the total number is calculated by adding up all the values of the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 (step S7104). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is greater than 300, which is the management start reference number (step S7105). In addition, it may be configured to determine whether or not the total number is 300 or more, which is the management start reference number.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7105, the management start flag is set to "1" (step S7106). Thereafter, data shift processing is executed (step S7107). In the data shift process, the information stored in the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252 is transferred from the second history area 258 to the third history area 259. , the first history area 257→the second history area 258, and the current state area 256→the first history area 257. As a result, the final base value in the calculation period two times before is stored in the third history area 259 as the final base value in the calculation period three times before, and the final base value in the calculation period one time before is stored. is stored in the second history area 258 as the final base value in the calculation period two times before, and the base value last calculated in the current calculation period is the final base value in the calculation period one time before. 1 is stored in the history area 257 . In data shift processing, an LDIR instruction is used to shift information as described above. In the LDIR instruction, by specifying the address of the information storage source area and the information storage destination area address, the information stored in the storage source area is shifted (copied) to the storage destination area. becomes.

However, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", the base value information is basically not stored in the first to third history areas 257 to 259. Therefore, in step S7107, the management Only the final base value of the calculation period in the situation where the start flag is not set to "1" is shifted to the first history area 257. FIG. Thereafter, the counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are all cleared to "0" (step S7108).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7103, the total number is calculated by adding up all the values of the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 (step S7109). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is greater than the initial reference number of 6000 (step S7110). If a negative determination is made in step S7110, the calculation initial flag provided in the non-specific control work area 213 is set to "1" (step S7111). The calculation initial flag is cleared to "0" (step S7112). The calculation initial flag indicates the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA in a situation where neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode has been performed since the base value calculation period newly started (that is, the game area It is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 whether or not the total number of game balls supplied to the PA has reached the initial reference number.

If the processing of step S7111 or step S7112 has been executed, it is determined whether or not the total number calculated in step S7109 is equal to or greater than 60000, which is the shift reference number (step S7113). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7113, data shift processing is executed (step S7114). In the data shift process, as in step S7107, the information stored in the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252 is transferred from the second history area 258 to the third history area. 3. Shift in the order of history area 259, first history area 257→second history area 258, current status area 256→first history area 257. As a result, the final base value in the calculation period two times before is stored in the third history area 259 as the final base value in the calculation period three times before, and the final base value in the calculation period one time before is stored. is stored in the second history area 258 as the final base value in the calculation period two times before, and the base value last calculated in the current calculation period is the final base value in the calculation period one time before. 1 is stored in the history area 257 . In data shift processing, an LDIR instruction is used to shift information as described above. In the LDIR instruction, by specifying the address of the information storage source area and the information storage destination area address, the information stored in the storage source area is shifted (copied) to the storage destination area. becomes. After that, the counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are all cleared to "0" (step S7115).

Next, a configuration for notifying the base value will be described. First, the configuration for controlling the display of various display units by the main MPU 82 will be described. FIG. 111 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration for controlling the display of various display units by the main MPU 82. As shown in FIG.

As targets for which display control is performed by the main side MPU 82, the first special figure display portion 37a, the second special figure display portion 37b, the first special figure reservation display portion 37c, the second special figure reservation display portion 37d, the general figure display At least the unit 38a, the normal map reservation display unit 38b, the setting display device 205 and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 exist. Each of these is provided as a segment display portion in which a plurality of segments for display by LEDs are arranged. These segment display portions are in a light-emitting state by setting data corresponding to the light-emitting state (for example, data "1" which is one of the binary data), and data corresponding to the light-off state (for example, binary data). Data of "0", which is the other of the two, is set to turn off the light.

The main control board 81 is provided with a first display circuit 261 corresponding to the first special figure display portion 37a, and a second display circuit 262 is provided corresponding to the second special figure display portion 37b. , A third display circuit (not shown) is provided in correspondence with the first special figure reservation display portion 37c, and a fourth display circuit (not shown) is provided in correspondence with the second special figure reservation display portion 37d. A fifth display circuit (not shown) is provided corresponding to the normal map display unit 38a, and a sixth display circuit (not shown) is provided corresponding to the normal map reservation display unit 38b, A seventh display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the setting display device 205, and an eighth display circuit 264 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204.

The first display circuit 261 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the first special figure display section 37a. As a result, each display segment of the first special figure display portion 37a becomes a light emitting state or a light emitting state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the first display circuit 261. FIG. In this case, the first display circuit 261 can store and hold the supplied display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually become all "0". will approach the state of Therefore, the display segment of the first special figure display portion 37a, which is in the light emitting state by the display data provided to the first display circuit 261, is not provided with new display data to the first display circuit 261 for a predetermined period. is gradually turned off. Further, even if the display content of the first special figure display unit 37a is not changed, not only when the display content of the first special figure display unit 37a is changed by such a configuration, the previous display The same display data as the data output processing is supplied to the first display circuit 261 .

The second display circuit 262 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the second special figure display section 37b. As a result, each display segment of the second special figure display section 37b is in a light emitting state or a light off state in a mode corresponding to the display data provided to the second display circuit 262. FIG. In this case, the second display circuit 262 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually become all "0". will approach the state of Therefore, the display segment of the second special figure display portion 37b, which is in the light emitting state by the display data provided to the second display circuit 262, does not provide new display data to the second display circuit 262 for a predetermined period. is gradually turned off. In addition, even if the display content of the second special figure display portion 37b is not changed, not only when the display content of the second special figure display portion 37b is changed by such a configuration, the previous display The same display data as the data output processing is supplied to the second display circuit 262 .

The third display circuit provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the first special figure reservation display section 37c. As a result, each display segment of the first special figure reservation display section 37c becomes a light emitting state or an extinguished state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the third display circuit. In this case, although the third display circuit can store and hold the supplied display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), the display data gradually change to all "0" after the predetermined period. state is approaching. Therefore, the display segment of the first special-figure reservation display section 37c, which is in the light emitting state due to the display data provided to the third display circuit, does not provide new display data to the third display circuit for a predetermined period of time. As the time elapses, the light is gradually turned off. In addition, due to such a configuration, not only when the display content of the first special figure reservation display unit 37c is changed, but also when the display content of the first special figure reservation display unit 37c is not changed, the previous The same display data as the display data output processing in 1 is supplied to the third display circuit.

The fourth display circuit provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the second special figure reservation display section 37d. As a result, each display segment of the second special figure reservation display section 37d becomes a light emission state or a light extinction state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the fourth display circuit. In this case, the fourth display circuit can store and hold the supplied display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually become all "0". state is approaching. Therefore, the display segment of the second special-figure reservation display portion 37d, which is in the light emitting state due to the display data provided to the fourth display circuit, does not provide new display data to the fourth display circuit for a predetermined period of time. As the time elapses, the light is gradually turned off. Also, due to such a configuration, not only when the display content of the second special figure reservation display unit 37d is changed, but also when the display content of the second special figure reservation display unit 37d is not changed, the previous The same display data as the display data output processing in 1 is supplied to the fourth display circuit.

The fifth display circuit provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the general-purpose display section 38a. As a result, each display segment of the normal diagram display section 38a is turned on or off in a mode corresponding to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit. In this case, the fifth display circuit can store and hold the supplied display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually become all "0". state is approaching. Therefore, the display segment of the general-purpose display section 38a, which is in the light emitting state by the display data provided to the fifth display circuit, does not provide new display data to the fifth display circuit for a predetermined period of time. gradually turns off. In addition, due to such a configuration, even when the display contents of the normal pattern display unit 38a are not changed, as well as when the display contents of the normal pattern display unit 38a are not changed, the previous display data output process The same display data as the first is supplied to the fifth display circuit.

The sixth display circuit provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the normal drawing holding display section 38b. As a result, each display segment of the normal drawing holding display section 38b is turned into a light emitting state or a light emitting state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the sixth display circuit. In this case, the sixth display circuit can store and hold the supplied display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". state is approaching. Therefore, the predetermined period elapses without new display data being provided to the sixth display circuit for the display segments of the normal pattern holding display section 38b which are in the light emitting state due to the display data provided to the sixth display circuit. As a result, the lights gradually turn off. In addition, due to such a configuration, not only when the display contents of the general pattern reservation display unit 38b are changed, but also when the display contents of the general pattern reservation display unit 38b are not changed, the previous display data The same display data as the output processing time is supplied to the sixth display circuit.

The seventh display circuit 263 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of a plurality of display segments provided in each of the setting display devices 205 . As a result, each display segment of the setting display device 205 is turned on or off in a mode corresponding to the display data provided to the seventh display circuit 263 . In this case, the seventh display circuit 263 can store and hold the supplied display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually become all "0". will approach the state of Therefore, the display segment of the setting display device 205, which is in the light emitting state by the display data provided to the seventh display circuit 263, passes a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the seventh display circuit 263. As a result, the lights gradually turn off. Further, with such a configuration, not only when the display content of the setting display device 205 is changed, but also when the display content of the setting display device 205 is not changed, the previous display data output processing can be performed. The same display data is supplied to the seventh display circuit 263 .

The eighth display circuit 264 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of a plurality of display segments provided in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. As a result, each display segment of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is turned on or off in a mode corresponding to the display data provided to the eighth display circuit 264 . In this case, the eighth display circuit 264 can store and hold the supplied display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". will approach the state of Therefore, new display data is provided to the eighth display circuit 264 for the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 which are in the light emitting state due to the display data provided to the eighth display circuit 264. After a predetermined period of time elapses, the light is gradually extinguished. In addition, due to such a configuration, not only the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed, but also the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed. Even if it is not performed, the same display data as the output processing of the previous display data is supplied to the eighth display circuit 264 .

Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided with eight display segments. On the other hand, display data is provided in units of 8 bits. When the display data of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided to the eighth display circuit 264, the 8-bit display data corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is provided as 8-bit unit data. After that, 8-bit display data corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is provided as 8-bit unit data, and then 8-bit display data corresponding to the third notification display device 203 is provided as 8-bit unit data. , and finally 8-bit display data corresponding to the fourth notification display device 204 is provided as 8-bit unit data.

In the configuration provided with the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 as described above, the main MPU 82 supplies display data to the display IC 266 . In other words, the display ICs 266 are not provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264, but one IC is common to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264. display IC 266 is provided. When supplying display data to the display IC 266, the main MPU 82 also supplies the display IC 266 with type data indicating which of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 the display data corresponds to.

In detail, the electrical connection between the main MPU 82 and the display IC 266 is as follows. It is electrically connected using the line LN4. All of these signal lines LN1 to LN4 are signal lines for transmitting signals from the main side MPU 82 to the display IC 266 by one-way communication.

The type data is transmitted by serial communication from the main MPU 82 to the display IC 266 using the type data signal line LN1. In this case, each 1-bit division of the type data by serial communication is indicated by the type clock signal transmitted from the main side MPU 82 to the display IC 266 using the type clock signal line LN2. The type data is data indicating which of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 the display data to be transmitted corresponds to. The type data is transmitted as 8-bit data consisting of the 1st bit to the 8th bit. When the display data corresponds to the first display circuit 261, the first bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the second display circuit 262, the second bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the third display circuit, the third bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fourth display circuit, the fourth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fifth display circuit, the fifth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the sixth display circuit, the sixth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the seventh display circuit 263, the seventh bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the eighth display circuit 264, the eighth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level.

Display data is transmitted by serial communication from the main MPU 82 to the display IC 266 using the display data signal line LN3. In this case, each 1-bit division of the display data by serial communication is indicated by the display clock signal transmitted from the main side MPU 82 to the display IC 266 using the display clock signal line LN4. The display data is transmitted in 8-bit units of 1st to 8th bits.

The main MPU 82 transmits display data corresponding to each of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 to the display IC 266 in second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114), which will be described later. In this case, in one processing cycle of the second timer interrupt processing, display data is transmitted to one of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264, and the nth display circuit→n+1th display is performed. The display circuits 261 to 264 to which the display data is to be transmitted are changed one by one each time a new processing cycle of the second timer interrupt processing occurs according to the circuit order. In addition, in the second timer interrupt processing in the processing cycle next to the processing cycle in which the display data corresponding to the eighth display circuit 264, which is the last sequence in the order, is transmitted, the first display circuit 261, which is the first sequence in the above sequence, Send the corresponding display data. Note that only one piece of 8-bit unit display data is transmitted in the processing cycle of the second timer interrupt processing for transmitting display data to any one of the first to seventh display circuits 261 to 263, but the eighth display circuit 264 In the processing cycle of the second timer interrupt processing for transmitting display data to , four 8-bit unit display data are transmitted corresponding to the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 .

In the configuration in which the main MPU 82 transmits display data as described above, the work area 211 for specific control and the work area 213 for non-specific control are various storage areas referred to by the main MPU 82 in order to transmit display data. is set. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various buffers 271 to 278 provided in the work area 211 for specific control.

As shown in FIG. 112, the specific control work area 211 includes a first display data buffer 271, a second display data buffer 272, a third display data buffer 273, a fourth display data buffer 274, and a fifth display buffer. A data buffer 275, a sixth display data buffer 276, a seventh display data buffer 277, and an eighth display data buffer 278 are provided.

Display data to be supplied to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the first display data buffer 271 . Since the first display circuit 261 is provided corresponding to the first special figure display portion 37a as already explained, the first display data buffer 271 is provided to cause the first special figure display portion 37a to perform a predetermined display. display data is stored. In this case, the storage of the display data in the first display data buffer 271 is performed in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). . When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) for transmitting display data to the first display circuit 261 comes to process, only when the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is changed. Instead, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is transmitted to the display IC 266 even if the display data has not been changed.

Display data to be supplied to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the second display data buffer 272 . Since the second display circuit 262 is provided corresponding to the second special figure display section 37b as already explained, the second display data buffer 272 is provided to cause the second special figure display section 37b to perform a predetermined display. display data is stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the second display data buffer 272 in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). . Further, when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) for transmitting display data to the second display circuit 262 comes to process, only when the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is changed. Instead, the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is transmitted to the display IC 266 even if the display data has not been changed.

The third display data buffer 273 stores display data to be supplied to the third display circuit. Since the third display circuit is provided corresponding to the first special figure reservation display section 37c as already explained, the third display data buffer 273 is used to cause the first special figure reservation display section 37c to perform a predetermined display. display data is stored. In this case, the storage of the display data in the third display data buffer 273 is performed in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). . Further, when the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) for transmitting display data to the third display circuit comes to the processing time, it is not only when the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is changed that The display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is transmitted to the display IC 266 even if the display data is not changed.

The fourth display data buffer 274 stores display data to be supplied to the fourth display circuit. Since the fourth display circuit is provided corresponding to the second special figure reservation display section 37d as already explained, the fourth display data buffer 274 is used to cause the second special figure reservation display section 37d to perform a predetermined display. display data is stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). . Further, when the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) for transmitting display data to the fourth display circuit comes to the processing time, it is not only when the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is changed that The display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is transmitted to the display IC 266 even if the display data is not changed.

The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data to be supplied to the fifth display circuit. As already explained, the fifth display circuit is provided corresponding to the normal map display unit 38a, so the fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data for causing the normal map display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display. will be In this case, the display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the normal/universal power control process (step S5515) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). will be Further, when the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) for transmitting display data to the fifth display circuit comes to the processing time, it is not only when the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is changed that The display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the display IC 266 even if the display data is not changed.

The sixth display data buffer 276 stores display data to be supplied to the sixth display circuit. Since the sixth display circuit is provided to correspond to the normal pattern reservation display portion 38b as already explained, the sixth display data buffer 276 stores display data for causing the normal pattern reservation display portion 38b to perform a predetermined display. will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the sixth display data buffer 276 in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the normal/universal power control process (step S5515) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). will be Further, when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) for transmitting display data to the sixth display circuit comes to the time of processing, only when the display data stored in the sixth display data buffer 276 is changed, The display data stored in the sixth display data buffer 276 is transmitted to the display IC 266 even if the display data is not changed.

Display data to be supplied to the seventh display circuit 263 is stored in the seventh display data buffer 277 . Since the seventh display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the setting display device 205 as already described, display data for causing the setting display device 205 to perform a predetermined display is stored in the seventh display data buffer 277 . will be Specifically, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) is being executed, in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which is the process corresponding to the specific control, Display data for displaying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the seventh display data buffer 277 . Further, when the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which is the process corresponding to the specific control, causes the pachinko machine 10 Display data is stored in the seventh display data buffer 277 so as to display the current set value of . When it is time to process the second timer interrupt process for transmitting display data to the seventh display circuit 263, not only when the display data stored in the seventh display data buffer 277 is changed, but also when the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the seventh display data buffer 277 is transmitted to the display IC 266 .

The eighth display data buffer 278 stores display data to be supplied to the eighth display circuit 264 . Since the eighth display circuit 264 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as already described, the eighth display data buffer 278 stores the first to fourth notification display devices 201 204 to perform a predetermined display is stored. When it is time to process the second timer interrupt process for transmitting display data to the eighth display circuit 264, not only when the display data stored in the eighth display data buffer 278 is changed, but also when the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the eighth display data buffer 278 is transmitted to the display IC 266 .

Here, the display corresponding to the base value is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. In this case, since the eighth display data buffer 278 is provided in the work area 211 for specific control, the process of storing the display data in the eighth display data buffer 278 is performed as a process corresponding to the specific control. On the other hand, the processing for deriving the base value is performed as processing corresponding to non-specific control, and each base stored in the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258 and the third history area 259 The values are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 .

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 103, the non-specific control work area 213 includes not only the calculation result storage area 252 for storing each base value, but also the current status area 256, first history area 257, and second history area 258. A display target setting area 253 is provided for storing the base values to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 among the base values stored in the third history area 259. . Since the period during which one base value is continuously displayed is 5 seconds, in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, the base value to be displayed according to a predetermined display order every time 5 seconds elapses A value is read from the calculation result storage area 252 and the read base value is stored in the display target setting area 253 . Then, when the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114), which is processing corresponding to specific control, displays The display data stored in the setting area 253 is read, and the read display data is stored in the eighth display data buffer 278 .

In the configuration in which the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 278 are provided as described above, the main MPU 82 displays the display data corresponding to each processing cycle of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114). The display data is read out from the buffers 271-278, the read display data is transmitted to the display IC 266, and the type data indicating to which of the first to eighth display circuits 261-264 the display data corresponds. It transmits to display IC266. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the display IC 266. As shown in FIG.

The display IC 266 includes a type data buffer 281, a selection signal output section 282, a display data buffer 283, and a display data output section 284, as shown in FIG. Display data received from the main MPU 82 is stored in the display data buffer 283 . The display data output unit 284 transmits the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 to the first to eighth display circuits 261-264. The type data buffer 281 stores the type data received from the main MPU 82 . The selection signal output unit 282 outputs a selection signal for designating the display circuit 261 to 264 corresponding to the type data stored in the type data buffer 281 among the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 as the reception destination of the display data. to output

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261 are electrically connected using a display signal group 291 . The display signal group 291 is provided so as to enable 8-bit display data to be transmitted at once, and the 8-bit display data is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. A branched signal group 292 is provided by branching from the display signal group 291, and the branched signal group 292 includes a second display circuit 262, a third display circuit, a fourth display circuit, a fifth display circuit, and a sixth display circuit. The display circuit is electrically connected to each of the seventh display circuit 263 and the eighth display circuit 264 . Similar to the display signal group 291, the branch signal group 292 is provided so as to enable 8-bit display data to be transmitted at once, and the 8-bit display data is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. be.

Since the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 are provided as described above, when the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 is transmitted by the display data output unit 284, the display data is transferred to the first display data. to all eighth display circuits 261-264. In this case, first to eighth selection signal lines 301 to 304 are provided to receive the supplied display data and specify the display circuits 261 to 264 to be used.

The first selection signal line 301 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261 . When the type data buffer 281 stores the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the first display circuit 261 and used. , the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the first selection signal to the first display circuit 261 through the first selection signal line 301 . As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 are received and used only by the first display circuit 261 .

A second selection signal line 302 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the second display circuit 262 . When the type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the second display circuit 262 receives and uses the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. , the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the second selection signal to the second display circuit 262 through the second selection signal line 302 . As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 are received and used only by the second display circuit 262 .

A third selection signal line (not shown) is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the third display circuit. When the type data buffer 281 stores the type data corresponding to the third display circuit, the display data buffer 281 stores the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 so that the third display circuit receives and uses the display data. The selection signal output section 282 of the IC 266 transmits the third selection signal to the third display circuit through the third selection signal line. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 are received and used only in the third display circuit.

A fourth selection signal line (not shown) is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fourth display circuit. When the type data buffer 281 stores the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit, the display data is required to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 to the fourth display circuit. The selection signal output section 282 of the IC 266 transmits the fourth selection signal to the fourth display circuit through the fourth selection signal line. As a result, the display data supplied to all the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 are received and used only in the fourth display circuit.

A fifth selection signal line (not shown) is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fifth display circuit. When the classification data corresponding to the fifth display circuit is stored in the classification data buffer 281, the display data is displayed in order to cause the fifth display circuit to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. The selection signal output section 282 of the IC 266 transmits the fifth selection signal to the fifth display circuit through the fifth selection signal line. As a result, the display data supplied to all the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 are received and used only in the fifth display circuit.

A sixth selection signal line (not shown) is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the sixth display circuit. When the type data buffer 281 stores the type data corresponding to the sixth display circuit, the display data is required to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 to the sixth display circuit. The selection signal output section 282 of the IC 266 transmits the sixth selection signal to the sixth display circuit through the sixth selection signal line. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 are received and used only in the sixth display circuit.

A seventh selection signal line 303 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the seventh display circuit 263 . When the classification data corresponding to the seventh display circuit 263 is stored in the classification data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the seventh display circuit 263 and used. , the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the seventh selection signal to the seventh display circuit 263 through the seventh selection signal line 303 . As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 are received and used only by the seventh display circuit 263 .

The eighth selection signal line 304 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the eighth display circuit 264 . When the type data buffer 281 stores the type data corresponding to the eighth display circuit 264, the eighth display circuit 264 receives and uses the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. , the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the eighth selection signal to the eighth display circuit 264 through the eighth selection signal line 304 . As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 are received and used only by the eighth display circuit 264 .

Next, the second timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The processes of steps S7201 to S7213 in the second timer interrupt process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using the specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt inhibition is set to inhibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) (step S7201). By prohibiting the generation of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88), the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 88) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 114) even if the first interrupt cycle has passed. It is possible to prevent it from being started with In addition, by prohibiting the occurrence of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114), even if the second interrupt cycle has passed during execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114), the second timer interrupt It is possible to prevent the process (FIG. 114) from being started redundantly.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting update display flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7202). The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 82 whether or not the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed in the main MPU 82 . As already explained, the set value update process (FIG. 83) is executed in the main process (FIG. 81) when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. Interruption is permitted in step S5101 when the set value update process (FIG. 83) is started. Therefore, even when the set value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed in the main MPU 82, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is interrupted and activated.

The situation in which "1" is set in the setting update display flag means that the set value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed by the main MPU 82 during the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) this time. It means that it is a processing time that was started by interrupting the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7202, setting processing to the seventh display data buffer 277 during setting update is executed (step S7203). In the setting process, the display data for causing the setting display device 205 to display the setting values currently selected for the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the seventh display data buffer 277 . As a result, the setting display device 205 displays the current setting value to be selected.

If a negative determination is made in step S7202 or if the process of step S7203 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7204). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 82 whether or not the main MPU 82 is executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82). As already explained, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) is executed in the main process (FIG. 81) when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. The interrupt is permitted in step S5001 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) is started. Therefore, even when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) is being executed in the main MPU 82, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is interrupted and activated.

The situation in which the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" means that the main MPU 82 is executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) during the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114). It means that it is a processing time that was started by interrupting the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7204, setting processing to the seventh display data buffer 277 during setting confirmation is executed (step S7205). In the setting process, display data for causing the setting display device 205 to display the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the seventh display data buffer 277 . As a result, the setting display device 205 displays the current setting value.

If a negative determination is made in step S7204, or if the processing of step S7205 is executed, setting processing to the eighth display data buffer 278 is executed (step S7206). FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing setting processing for the eighth display data buffer 278 . The processes of steps S7301 to S7310 in the setting process for the eighth display data buffer 278 are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using a specific control program and specific control data. be.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the checking counter 211g in the work area 211 for specific control is 1 or more (step S7301). If the value of the checking counter 211g is 1 or more (step S7301: YES), it means that it is the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds). In this case, the check display data is set in the eighth display data buffer 278 in the specific control work area 211 (step S7302). The display data set in the eighth display data buffer 278 is the display data for controlling the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as already described. In addition, the check display data is display data for performing check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, that is, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 This is the display data for setting all the display segments 201a to 204a to the light emitting state. By supplying the check display data to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. display segments 201a to 204a are in a luminous state. As a result, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether the display segments 201a to 204a of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can normally be in the light emitting state.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the checking counter 211g in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7303). As a result, when the initial check period is measured using the checking counter 211g, the value of the checking counter 211g is changed periodically every time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is started. is effectively subtracted.

If the value of the checking counter 211g is "0" and it is not the initial check period (step S7301: NO), whether or not the management start flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7304). If the management start flag is not set to "1" (step S7304: NO), a pre-management display setting process is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S7305). In the setting process, display data for making all the display segments 201a and 202a in the light emitting state in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are set in the eighth display data buffer 278, respectively. In addition, it is not limited to the configuration in which all the display segments 201a and 202a of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the light emitting state. 202 may be configured so that all the display segments 201a and 202a blink.

After that, the calculation result data set in the display target setting area 253 in the non-specific control work area 213 is read (step S7306), and the read calculation result data is displayed on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. The display data to be applied is set in the eighth display data buffer 278 (step S7307). Details will be described later, but in the display processing (FIG. 116) included in the non-specific control processing, if the management start flag is not set to "1", the base value is read from the current situation area 256, and the read base value The calculation result data corresponding to the first decimal place number and the second decimal place number are set in the display object setting area 253 . In step S7307, this calculation result data is set in the eighth display data buffer 278 as display data applied to the third and fourth display devices 203 and 204 for notification.

By supplying the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 278 in steps S7305 and S7307 to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. In a situation where all the display segments 201a and 202a in each of the devices 201 and 202 are in a light emitting state, the first decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period by the third notification display device 203 is displayed, and the number to the second decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 . While all the display segments 201a and 202a of the first and second information display devices 201 and 202 are put into a light-emitting state, the third and fourth information display devices 203 and 204 display a number corresponding to the base value. By doing so, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the currently notified base value is the base value in the situation where the management start flag is not set to "1".

In the situation where the management start flag is set to "1", as already explained, every time the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the current area 256→first history area 257→second history While the base values to be notified are switched in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a predetermined order of area 258→third history area 259, the management start flag is set to "1". is not set, the base value of the current area 256 is maintained as a notification target. As a result, when the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is checked at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, the current base value can be confirmed at any timing.

If the management start flag is set to "1" (step S7304: YES), the display data set in the display target setting area 253 in the non-specific control work area 213 is read, and the read display data is 8 is set in the display data buffer 278 (step S7308). By supplying the display data to the display IC 266, if the base value of the current area 256 is to be notified, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. If the base value in the first history area 257 is to be notified, the displays shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 105(b) are the first to fourth information displays If the base value in the second history area 258 is to be notified, the display shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 201 to 204, and if the base value in the third history area 259 is to be notified, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. .about.204.

After that, it is determined whether or not the initial display flag provided in the non-specific control work area 213 is set to "1" (step S7309). The initial display flag is set in the first notification display device 201 to notify that the base value in the current area 256 is the base value in the initial stage of calculation after the start of the calculation period in a situation where the base value is to be notified. and a flag for specifying, in the main MPU 82, that the second notification display device 202 should blink. If the initial display flag is set to "1" (step S7309: YES), blink setting processing is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S7310).

In the blinking setting process, when the display corresponding to the display data currently set in the eighth display data buffer 278 is performed by the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the display is blinked. Make settings to As a setting for blinking display, specifically, for transmission of display data to the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the display data currently set in the eighth display data buffer 278 is used. The corresponding data is transmitted to the display IC 266 until a predetermined lighting period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, after which all the display segments 201a and 202a of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off. State data is transmitted to the display IC 266 until a predetermined turn-off period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, after which the predetermined turn-on period and the predetermined turn-off period are alternately repeated. As a result, when the base value in the current area 256 becomes a notification target immediately after a new calculation period for the base value is started, the calculation initial display is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202. Therefore, it is possible for the manager of the game hall to understand that the current base values notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are those immediately after the start of a new calculation period. It becomes possible.

Here, apart from the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 for displaying the base value, for displaying the setting value in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) setting display device 205 is provided, and the setting display device 205 to display the set value (steps S7202 to S7205), as well as to display the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (step S7206). . As a result, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the manager of the gaming hall places the gaming machine body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. By exposing the front side of the main control device 71 by rotating it, the setting value displayed on the setting display device 205 and the base value displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 Both can be visually confirmed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can set a new setting value while checking the past base value in the setting value update process (Fig. 83), or change the past base value and the current situation in the setting confirmation process (Fig. 82). It is possible to check the correspondence with the setting value.

Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), after the process of step S7206 is executed, the signal transmission state through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is turned off (step S7207). ), and the signal transmission state through the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 is turned off (step S7208). Thereafter, update processing of the type counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is executed (step S7209).

The type counter is a counter for the main side MPU 82 to specify the transmission target of the display data among the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 278 in the current processing of the second timer interrupt processing. When the type counter value is "1", the display data in the first display data buffer 271 is to be transmitted, and when the type counter value is "2", the display data in the second display data buffer 272 is to be transmitted. When the value of the type counter is "3", the display data of the third display data buffer 273 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is "4", the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 is When the type counter value is "5", the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is to be transmitted, and when the type counter value is "6", the sixth display data buffer 276 is displayed. When the data is to be transmitted and the value of the type counter is "7", the display data in the seventh display data buffer 277 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is "8", the eighth display data buffer 278 display data is to be transmitted. In the updating process of the type counter, 1 is added to the value of the type counter, and when the value of the type counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the upper limit value of "8", the value of the type counter is set to "1". . As a result, the display data transmission target is sequentially changed in the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 278 for each processing of the second timer interrupt processing.

After that, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 83 (step S7210). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 83, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the second The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 83, and when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit is read from the main ROM 83, and the value of the type counter is " If the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit is read from the main ROM 83. When the value of the type counter is "6", the type data corresponding to the sixth display circuit is read from the main ROM 83, and when the value of the type counter is "7", the data is displayed on the seventh display circuit 263. The corresponding type data is read from the main-side ROM 83, and the type data corresponding to the eighth display circuit 264 is read from the main-side ROM 83 when the value of the type counter is "8".

After that, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 278 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S7211). Specifically, when the type counter value is "1", the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the type counter value is "2", the display data is read from the second display data buffer 272. When the type counter value is "3", the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273, and when the type counter value is "4", the display data is read from the fourth display data buffer 274. When the type counter value is "5", the display data is read from the fifth display data buffer 275, and when the type counter value is "6", the display data is read from the sixth display data buffer 276. When the type counter value is "7", the display data is read from the seventh display data buffer 277, and when the type counter value is "8", the display data is read from the eighth display data buffer 278. Read display data.

Thereafter, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step S7212). In the transmission process, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step S7210 is transmitted to the display IC 266. FIG. Further, in the transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step S7211 is transmitted to the display IC 266. FIG.

After that, interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) (step S7213).

FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing display processing executed in step S6906 of the check processing (FIG. 108). The processing of steps S7401 to S7420 in the display processing is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the checking counter 211g in the work area 211 for specific control is 1 or more (step S7401). If the value of the checking counter 211g is 1 or more (step S7401: YES), the previous checking flag provided in the non-specific control work area 213 is set to "1" (step S7402). The previous checking flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the value of the checking counter 211g is 1 or more in the previous processing of the display processing.

If the value of the checking counter 211g is "0" (step S7401: NO), it is determined whether or not the management start flag in the non-specific control work area 213 is set to "1" (step S7403). . If the management start flag is not set to "1" (step S7403: NO), the previous checking flag in the non-specific control work area 213 is cleared to "0" (step S7404).

After that, the base value is read from the current status area 256, and the calculation result data corresponding to the first decimal place number and the second decimal place number in the read base value is displayed in the display target setting area in the work area 213 for non-specific control. 253 is set (step S7405). By transmitting the display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the number with the first decimal place in the base value of the current area 256 is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the base value of the current area 256 is displayed. The second decimal place number in the value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 . With the above configuration, when the management start flag is not set to "1", only the base value calculated in the current calculation period is notified without notifying the base value in the past calculation period. be done.

In a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", although the calculation result data is set in the display object setting area 253, the display type data is not set. When the base value is notified in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", as already described, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 The displayed content is different from the case where the base value is notified in the situation where the start flag is set to "1". Specifically, all display segments 201a and 202a of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, respectively, are in a light emitting state.

If the management start flag is set to "1" (step S7403: YES), it is determined whether or not the previous check flag in the non-specific control work area 213 is set to "1" (step S7406). ). If the previous checking flag is not set to "1" (step S7406: NO), the value of the switching timing counter 254 (see FIG. 103) provided in the non-specific control work area 213 is subtracted by 1 (step S7407). The switching timing counter 254 selects one of the base values stored in the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 of the calculation result storage area 252. This is a counter for the main MPU 82 to identify the timing of switching the base value to be notified in the display devices 201 to 204 . As already explained, every time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, notification is made in a predetermined order of current area 256→first history area 257→second history area 258→third history area 259. The target base value is switched, and the switching of the notification target base value is repeated in the predetermined order.

When the processing of step S7407 is executed, by determining whether or not the value of the switching timing counter 254 after subtracting 1 is "0", the base value that is the current notification target becomes the notification target. Then, it is determined whether or not the display continuation period has elapsed (step S7408). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7408, 1 is added to the value of the display target counter 255 (see FIG. 103) provided in the non-specific control work area 213 (step S7409). If the value of the display object counter 255 after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "3" (step S7410: YES), the value of the display object counter 255 is cleared to "0" (step S7411).

The display target counter 255 stores the first to fourth notification values among the base values stored in the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252. This counter is used by the main MPU 82 to specify the base value to be notified by the display devices 201 to 204 . Specifically, when the value of the counter to be displayed is "0", the base value stored in the current status area 256 is to be notified, and when the value of the counter to be displayed is "1", the first history area 257 is to be notified, and if the value of the display counter is "2", the base value stored in the second history area 258 is to be notified, and the value of the display counter is "3". , the base value stored in the third history area 259 is to be notified.

If a negative determination is made in step S7410, or if the process of step S7411 is executed, the display duration ( Specifically, a value corresponding to 5 seconds) is set (step S7412).

When a negative determination is made in step S7408, or when the process of step S7412 is executed, the display data corresponding to the base value to be reported this time is displayed in the display target setting area 253 in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Execute processing to set Specifically, first, the display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter 255 is set in the display target setting area 253 (step S7413). The display type data includes display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to display that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the base value, and display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to display the base value of the notification target. A display indicating which of the current state area 256, first history area 257, second history area 258 and third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252 the value corresponds to is displayed on the second notification display device 202. and display data for causing it to occur.

After that, the base value is read out from the area corresponding to the value of the display object counter 255 among the current state area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252. The calculation result data corresponding to the number with the first decimal place and the number with the second decimal place in the base value are set in the display target setting area 253 (step S7414). The calculation result data includes the display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to display the number corresponding to the first decimal place in the base value to be notified, and the second decimal place to the base value to be notified. and display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to display corresponding to .

As described above, the display data including the display type data and the calculation result data is set in the display object setting area 253 . By transmitting the display data to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), the display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

The processing of step S7414 is executed each time the display processing (FIG. 116) is executed regardless of the switching timing of the base value to be notified. As already explained, each time the calculation result storage process (FIG. 110) is executed, the base value is calculated using the current values of the counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251, and the calculated base value is It is stored in the current state area 256 of the calculation result storage area 252 . In this case, every time the processing for display (FIG. 116) is executed regardless of the switching timing of the base value to be notified in step S7414 for setting the calculation result data in the display target setting area 253 as described above. is executed, if the base value of the current area 256 is to be notified and the base value is changed, the changed base value can be notified.

After that, it is determined whether or not the base value of the current area 256 is to be notified based on the value of the display target counter (step S7415), and the calculation initial flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to " 1” is set (step S7416). As already explained, the calculation initial flag is the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA in a situation where neither the open/close execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode has been performed since the base value calculation period newly started. (ie, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 whether or not the initial reference number has been reached. If both steps S7415 and S7416 result in an affirmative determination, the initial display flag in the non-specific control work area 213 is set to "1" (step S7417), and either step S7415 or step S7416 returns negative. If so, the initial display flag is cleared to "0" (step S7418).

The initial display flag is set in the first notification display device 201 to notify that the base value in the current area 256 is the base value in the initial stage of calculation after the start of the calculation period in a situation where the base value is to be notified. and a flag for specifying, in the main MPU 82, that the second notification display device 202 should blink. When it is specified that "1" is set to the initial display flag in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), not only the display data stored in the display target setting area 253 is transmitted to the display IC 266, When the display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are blinked and the third notification display device is displayed. The display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are lit up. If it is determined in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) that the initial display flag is not set to "1", the display corresponding to the display data stored in the display target setting area 253 is displayed in the first to When the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are illuminated.

When the value of the checking counter 211g in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" and the management start flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7401: NO, step S7403: YES), if the previous checking flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7406: YES), the management start flag is set to "1" It means that the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) has elapsed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started under the circumstances. In this case, after the previous checking flag in work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step S7419), the switching timing counter 254 is set (step S7420).

In the process of setting the switching timing counter 254, the switching timing counter 254 in the non-specific control work area 213 is set to a value corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) as a value corresponding to the next notification target switching timing. set. On the other hand, the value of the display target counter 255 in the non-specific control work area 213 is maintained without being updated. The display target counter 255 stores the first to fourth reporting base values among the base values stored in the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252. This counter is used by the main MPU 82 to specify the base value to be notified by the display devices 201 to 204 .

After executing the processes of steps S7419 and S7420, the processes of steps S7413 to S7418 are executed. As a result, among the base values stored in the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252, the base value corresponding to the value of the display object counter 255 is displayed. Display of the value is started on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started as described above, in the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 82) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 83) ) is executed to start displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and then the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) ends. When the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) occurs, and when the initial check period ends, the current status area 256, the first history area 257, and the second history area 258 in the calculation result storage area 252 are displayed. and the base values stored in the third history area 259, which were subject to notification immediately before the start of the initial check period, are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Along with the restart, the restarted display of the base value is performed over the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) regardless of the remaining display continuation period at the timing when the initial check period was started. This makes it possible to appropriately display the base value after the end of the initial check period.

Note that the switching timing counter 254 and the display target counter 255 are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control as already described. RAM clear processing (step S5113) is executed in the setting value update processing (FIG. 83). Clear processing is executed, but clear processing for the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control is not executed. Therefore, even if the RAM clearing process (step S5113) is executed in the setting value updating process (FIG. 83), the information of the switching timing counter 254 and the information of the display object counter 255 are maintained without being cleared.

FIG. 117 is a time chart showing how various displays are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. 117(a) shows the period during which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 82, FIG. 117(b) shows the period during which the set value update process (FIG. 83) is executed, and FIG. FIG. 117(d) shows the period during which the base values stored in the current area 256 in the calculation result storage area 252 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. 117(e) shows the period during which the base values stored in the first history area 257 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 117(f) shows the period during which the base values stored in the history area 258 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 117(g) shows the period during which the base value stored in is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. FIG. 117(h) shows the period during which the setting value is displayed on the setting display device 205, and FIG. Indicates the period during which the display for

First, the case where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the setting value update process (FIG. 83) are not executed when the supply of operating power is started will be described.

At the timing of t1, supply of operating power to the main side MPU 82 is started as shown in FIG. 117(a). In this case, execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited. Since the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the off state and display of the base value is not started.

After that, at the timing of t2, the setting process of the checking counter 211g (step S4926) is executed, and the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted. Therefore, at the timing t2, the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 117(i). By visually confirming the check display, the manager of the game hall can identify whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are faulty.

After that, when the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses from timing t2, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked at timing t3 as shown in FIG. 117(i). display ends. When the check display ends in a situation where execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted, the display of the base value stored in the current status area 256 is displayed as shown in FIG. 117(c). The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start. At the timing t3, as shown in FIG. 117(g), information corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254. FIG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(g) at the timing of t4, the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses. ) and as shown in FIG. 117(d), the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 changes from the base value stored in the current status area 256 to the base value stored in the first history area 257. value is changed. 117(c) to 117(c) to FIG. 117(c) to FIG. 117(c) to FIG. As shown in 117(f), the base values to be notified in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged in a predetermined order (current area 256→first history area 257→second history area 258→ It is sequentially switched according to the third history area 259). In addition, after the display of the base value in the third history area 259, which is the last order, is performed for the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds), the display of the base value in the current status area 256, which is the first order, is performed. The display is performed over the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds).

Next, the case where the set value update process (FIG. 83) is executed when the supply of operating power is started will be described.

At the timing of t8, supply of operating power to the main side MPU 82 is started as shown in FIG. 117(a). In this case, execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited. Since the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the off state and display of the base value is not started.

After that, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 117(b), the main MPU 82 starts the set value update process (FIG. 83). When the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is started, the setting display device 205 starts to display the current setting values to be selected as shown in FIG. be.

Execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted by starting the set value update process (FIG. 83). By permitting the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), the display of the base values stored in the current status area 256 as shown in FIG. The display devices 201 to 204 for use start. As a result, as shown in FIG. 117(h), the set values are displayed on the setting display device 205, and as shown in FIG. The value is displayed. At the timing t9, as shown in FIG. 117(g), the switching timing counter 254 is set with information corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds).

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 117(g), the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses. ) and as shown in FIG. 117(d), the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 changes from the base value stored in the current status area 256 to the base value stored in the first history area 257. value is changed. Also, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 117(g), the switching timing counter 254 is set with information corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds).

After that, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 117(g), the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses. ) and as shown in FIG. 117(e), the notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are stored in the second history area 258 from the base values stored in the first history area 257. is changed to the existing base value. At the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 117(g), information corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254. FIG.

After that, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 117(g), the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses. ) and as shown in FIG. 117(f), the notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are stored in the third history area 259 from the base values stored in the second history area 258. is changed to the existing base value. At the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 117(g), information corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254. FIG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(g), at the timing of t13 during which the display continuation period is being measured by the switching timing counter 254, the setting value updating process (FIG. 83) ends as shown in FIG. 117(b). When the set value update process (FIG. 83) ends, the display of the set values on the setting display device 205 ends as shown in FIG. 117(h) at the timing of t13. In this case, the setting display device 205 is turned off.

Also, when the set value update process (FIG. 83) ends, display of the base values ends on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 117(f) at the timing of t13. Also, at the timing of t13, the setting process of the checking counter 211g (step S4926) is executed, and the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted. . Therefore, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 117(i), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying for check. By visually confirming the check display, the manager of the game hall can identify whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are faulty.

After that, when the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses from the timing of t13, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked at the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 117(i). display ends. The display of the base value is started when the display for check ends in the situation where execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted. In this case, as shown in FIG. 117(f), the base value to be notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the third history area where the check display was performed immediately before the start of the check display. 259 base value. Further, as shown in FIG. 117(g), information corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) is newly set in the switching timing counter 254. FIG. As a result, the display of the base value of the type that was performed immediately before the display for check was started is resumed after the display for check is finished, and the display of the base value is the remaining value immediately before the display for check is started. is performed over the display continuation period, but is performed over the display continuation period by newly setting the display continuation period.

After that, at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 117(g), the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses. ) and, as shown in FIG. value is changed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 117(g) at the timing of t16, the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses. ) and as shown in FIG. 117(d), the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 changes from the base value stored in the current status area 256 to the base value stored in the first history area 257. value is changed.

Aside from the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 for displaying base values, a setting display for displaying setting values in setting confirmation processing (FIG. 82) or setting value update processing (FIG. 83) In a situation where the device 205 is provided and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), setting to the setting display device 205 Not only the processing for displaying the values (steps S7202 to S7205) but also the processing for displaying the base values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (step S7206) are executed. As a result, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the manager of the gaming hall places the gaming machine body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. By exposing the front side of the main control device 71 by rotating it, the setting value displayed on the setting display device 205 and the base value displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 Both can be visually confirmed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can set a new setting value while checking the past base value in the setting value update process (Fig. 83), or change the past base value and the current situation in the setting confirmation process (Fig. 82). It is possible to check the correspondence with the setting value.

Execution of setting confirmation processing (FIG. 82) or setting value update processing (FIG. 83) in the processing (steps S4901 to S4928) when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. After the display of the base value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is completed and the initial When the check period (specifically, 5 seconds) occurs, when the initial check period ends, the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258 and the third Of the base values stored in each of the history areas 259, the display of the base values that were subject to notification immediately before the start of the initial check period is resumed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the same time, the restarted display of the base value is performed over the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) regardless of the remaining display continuation period at the timing when the initial check period was started. This makes it possible to appropriately display the base value after the end of the initial check period.

<Process for erasing information>
Next, processing for erasing information will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the RAM clearing process executed in step S4919 of the main process (FIG. 81) or step S5113 of the set value update process (FIG. 83). The processing of steps S7501 to S7506 in the RAM clearing process is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using the specific control program and specific control data.

First, protection cancellation processing is executed (step S7501). In the protection cancellation process, among the areas of the main RAM 84, areas other than the work area 211 for specific control, the stack area 212 for specific control, the work area 213 for non-specific control, and the stack area 214 for non-specific control A certain unused area is processed to cancel the state of being excluded from information writing (including “0” clear).

As already described, the main MPU 82 is provided with a RAM management circuit 225 (see FIG. 79) for writing information to and reading information from the main RAM 84 . When the address of the area from which the information is to be read is specified by executing the processing by the program in the main MPU 82, the RAM management circuit 225 reads the information from the area of the specified address and supplies it to the main MPU 82, When the address of an area to which information is to be written is specified by execution of processing by a program in the main MPU 82, the specified information is written in the area of the specified address. In this case, the data for specific control in the main ROM 83 includes the address ranges of unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5) , address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) are stored in advance. When the protection setting is performed, the RAM management circuit 225 detects the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83 when the address of the area to which the information is to be written is specified. On the other hand, if the protection setting is canceled, if it is included in the address specified as the information write target, the unused area will not be written. Even if it is an address range, information is written to the area of that address range. Writing this information also includes a '0' clear.

The register area 223 of the main MPU 82 is provided with a protect register 223c as already described (see FIG. 79). The protect register 223c protects unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)). This is a storage area for specifying in the RAM management circuit 225 whether writing of information is prohibited. When the protection information is set in the protection register 223c, the protection setting is performed, and the addresses included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main-side ROM 83 are written. Even if it is specified, information is not written to the area of the address as described above. On the other hand, if the protection information is not set in the protection register 223c, the protection setting is not performed, and the address included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83 is written. When it is specified as a target, information is written in the area of that address.

The protect register 223c is set as a 1-bit area, and the case where "1" is set in the protect register 223c corresponds to the case where the protect information is set in the protect register 223c. The case where the information of 223c is "0" corresponds to the case where the protection information is not set in the protection register 223c. In the protection cancellation process of step S7501, the protection register 223c is cleared to "0".

After that, the address Y(3) is set as the target address in a predetermined register of the main MPU 82 (step S7502). The address Y(3) is the address of the area included in the work area 211 for specific control in the main RAM 84 as shown in FIG. 1) and the second address Y(2) are set in the following order. The area corresponding to the leading address Y(1) is a setting reference area in which information on setting values to be used is stored. An area corresponding to the second address Y(2) is a setting update display flag. In the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118), the clear processing is executed for the area corresponding to the address after the third address Y(3). Clear processing is not executed for the setting update display flag corresponding to the address Y(2). As a result, it is possible to prevent the information of the set values to be used from being erased by the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118). can be prevented from being erased. Note that the area excluded from the target of the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) may include the ceiling counter 131 as in the first embodiment.

Thereafter, the area corresponding to the target address is cleared to "0" and initialized (step S7503). When the address to be cleared is the address Y(3), the area corresponding to the address Y(3) is cleared to "0" and initialized. If the address to be cleared is one of addresses Y(r+3) to Y(r+5), the corresponding area becomes an unused area, but the protect register 223c is cleared to "0" in step S7501. Therefore, the unused area is also cleared to "0" and initialized.

After that, it is determined whether or not the target address is the address Y(s+1) (step S7504). Address Y(s+1) is an address of an area included in stack area 212 for specific control, as shown in FIG. It is the previous order address. Since the information of the program return address after the end of the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118) is set in the final address Y(s+2) in the stack area 212 for specific control, the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118) Excluded from coverage.

If the target address is not the address Y(s+1) (step S7504: NO), the target address is updated to the address in the next order (step S7505). Specifically, 1 is added to the target address. Then, in step S7503, the area corresponding to the address after adding 1 is cleared to "0" and initialized, and the process of step S7504 is executed.

When the process of step S7505 is executed in a situation where the target address is the final address Y(r+2) in the work area 211 for specific control, the target address becomes the address Y(r+3) corresponding to the unused area, "0" clearing and initialization are performed for the unused area. In this case, since initialization is not performed, it is simply cleared to "0". Further, when the process of step S7505 is executed in a situation where the target address is address Y(r+5) corresponding to an unused area, the target address is the leading address Y(r+6) in stack area 212 for specific control. As a result, "0" clearing and initialization are performed for the area of the start address Y(r+6) in the stack area 212 for the specific control. In this case, since initialization is not performed, it is simply cleared to "0".

By repeating the processing of steps S7503 to S7505, the area of address Y(3) to address Y(r+2) in the work area 211 for specific control, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area for specific control 212 for the unused area in the address range (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) and the area of address Y(r+6) to address Y(s+1) in the stack area 212 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initialized. After the area of address Y(s+1) is cleared to "0" and initialized, affirmative determination is made in step S7504.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7504, protection setting processing is executed (step S7506) as in step S4903 of the main processing (FIG. 81). In the protect setting process, as already explained, "1" is set in the protect register 223c. When "1" is set in the protect register 223c and the protect information is set, unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3)) in the main RAM 84 are to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) cannot be written. After that, the RAM clear processing is terminated.

By executing the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) as described above, part of the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control are cleared as needed when the supply of operating power is started. area can be cleared. In this case, an unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) is set between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control in the main RAM 84. When the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) is executed, the protect release process (step S7501) is executed and the protect register 223c is cleared to "0", so that the unused area (address Y(r+3) . . . address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) through address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) through address Y(t+5)) is canceled. As a result, in the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), when clearing the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control A series of data from the work area 211 for specific control to the stack area 212 for specific control including unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) set between the stack area 212 and Clear processing can be executed by designating an address range (addresses Y(3) to Y(s+1)). Therefore, the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118) is executed by distinguishing between the address range to be cleared in the work area 211 for specific control and the address range to be cleared in the stack area 212 for specific control. It is possible to reduce the processing load compared to

When the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) is started, even if the protect canceling process (step S7501) is executed and the protect register 223c is cleared to "0", the clearing process is executed for the area of the address range to be cleared. is completed, a protect setting process (step S7506) is executed to set "1" to the protect register 223c. As a result, when the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) is completed, unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), It is possible to disable writing of information to addresses Y(t+3) to Y(t+5) again.

In the protection canceling process (step S7501), the protect register 223c in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 is cleared to "0", and in the protect setting process (step S7506), the protect register 223c is set to "1". . As a result, the unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5) in the main side RAM 84 are , address Y (t+3) to address Y (t+5)), and the unused areas (address Y (r+3) to address Y (r+5), address Y (s+3) to It is possible to perform processing for disabling writing of information to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5).

Next, the information abnormality monitoring process executed in step S6808 of the second management process (FIG. 107) included in the non-specific control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The processing of steps S7601 to S7606 in the information abnormality monitoring process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, a process for monitoring the work area 213 for non-specific control is executed (step S7601). In the monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the value of the pointer indicating the processing position of the process being executed in the non-specific control program exceeds the normal numerical range. If so, it is identified as abnormal. Also, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the normal counter area 251 in the non-specific control work area 213 is obviously abnormal information. For example, in the normal counter area 251, when the value of the general winning counter 251a is 1000 or more even though the value of the out counter 251e is "0", it is determined that there is an abnormality.

If it is determined that there is an abnormality in the monitoring process in step S7601 (step S7602: YES), the address Y(s+k) is set as the target address in a predetermined register of the main MPU 82 (step S7603). In the non-specific control work area 213, the area from the top address Y(s+6) to the address Y(s+k-1) is the WA of the main side MPU 82 when the specific control process and the non-specific control process are executed. A WA buffer, a BC buffer, a DE buffer, a HL buffer, an IX buffer, and an IY buffer in which information of registers, BC registers, DE registers, HL registers, IX registers, and IY registers are saved. In the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), the area corresponding to the addresses after the address Y(s+k) in the non-specific control work area 213 is cleared. Clear processing is not executed for the area in the address range from the top address Y(s+6) to the address Y(s+k−1) in . As a result, even if the occurrence of information anomaly is identified in the information anomaly monitoring process (FIG. 119), the WA register, BC register, and DE of the main MPU 82 are changed when the specific control process to the non-specific control process is executed. It is possible to prevent the information saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control from being erased from the registers, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register.

Thereafter, the area corresponding to the target address is cleared to "0" and initialized (step S7604). When the address to be cleared is the address Y(s+k), the area corresponding to the address Y(s+k) is cleared to "0" and initialized.

After that, it is determined whether or not the target address is the address Y(t+2) (step S7605). Address Y(t+2) is the final address in work area 213 for non-specific control, as shown in FIG.

If the target address is not the final address (t+2) in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S7605: NO), the target address is updated to the address in the next order (step S7606). Specifically, 1 is added to the target address. Then, in step S7604, the area corresponding to the address after adding 1 is cleared to "0" and initialized, and the process of step S7605 is executed. As a result, "0" clearing and initial setting are performed for the area included in the predetermined address range (address Y(s+k) to address Y(t+2)) in the work area 213 for non-specific control. In the area of the address range (address Y(s+k) to address Y(t+2)), there are first to eighth award monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, a magnetic detection counter 213i, a magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, and a second security counter. 213k, first to third general prize winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n, special electric prize winning abnormality flag 213o, first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, out abnormality flag 213r, gate winning abnormality flag 213s, magnetic abnormality A flag 213t, a normal counter area 251, a calculation result storage area 252, a display target setting area 253, a switching timing counter 254, and a display target counter 255 are included. If the final address (t+2) in the work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared and an affirmative determination is made in step S7605, this information abnormality monitoring process ends.

As described above, in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), when it is specified that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the main side is detected in the work area 213 for non-specific control. A clear process is executed for areas other than the area where the information of the registers in the MPU 82 has been saved. This makes it possible to deal with information anomalies.

In the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), the clearing process is executed for the work area 213 for non-specific control, but the clearing process is not executed for the stack area 214 for non-specific control. An unused area (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) exists between the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. There is no unused area in the work area 213 of . Therefore, even if a series of address ranges are designated in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119) and the clear process is executed, it is not necessary to execute the protection release process and the protection setting process.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A work area 211 for specific control and a stack area 212 for specific control are provided as storage areas of the main RAM 84 in which information is written when the main MPU 82 executes specific control processing. Thus, it is possible to use the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control according to the role of the storage area to which information is written. In addition, an unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) is provided between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control in the addresses of the main RAM 84, Since information is not written in the unused area when specific control processing is executed, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control are clearly defined in the addresses of the main RAM 84. It is possible to distinguish between

In this case, when the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) is executed, the protection canceling process (step S7501) is executed to clear the protect register 223c to "0", so that an unused area (address Y ( r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), and address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) are canceled. As a result, in the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y( r+5)), which is a series of addresses ranging from the work area 211 for specific control to the stack area 212 for specific control (addresses Y(3) to Y(s+1)) is specified and the clear process is executed. do it. Therefore, the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118) is executed by distinguishing between the address range to be cleared in the work area 211 for specific control and the address range to be cleared in the stack area 212 for specific control. It is possible to reduce the processing load compared to

When the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) is started, even if the protect canceling process (step S7501) is executed and the protect register 223c is cleared to "0", the clearing process is executed for the area of the address range to be cleared. is completed, a protect setting process (step S7506) is executed to set "1" to the protect register 223c. As a result, when the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) is completed, unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), It is possible to disable writing of information to addresses Y(t+3) to Y(t+5) again.

In the protection canceling process (step S7501), the protect register 223c in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 is cleared to "0", and in the protect setting process (step S7506), the protect register 223c is set to "1". . As a result, the unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5) in the main side RAM 84 are , address Y (t+3) to address Y (t+5)), and the unused areas (address Y (r+3) to address Y (r+5), address Y (s+3) to It is possible to perform processing for disabling writing of information to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5).

In the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118), clear processing is executed for the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, including unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)). However, the clearing process is not executed for the non-specific control work area 213 and the non-specific control stack area 214 that are used in the non-specific control process. As a result, in a configuration in which clear processing is executed including unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) in order to simplify the processing configuration, specific control A work area 211 for specific control and a stack area 212 for specific control used in the process of , and a work area 213 for non-specific control and a stack for non-specific control used in the process for non-specific control Area 214 can be clearly distinguished.

In the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), when it is specified that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the register in the main MPU 82 is changed in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Clear processing is executed for areas other than the area in which the information was saved. This makes it possible to deal with information anomalies. In this case, in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), the clearing process is executed for the work area 213 for non-specific control, but the clearing process is not executed for the stack area 214 for non-specific control. An unused area (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) exists between the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. There is no unused area in the work area 213 of . In this configuration, even if a series of address ranges are specified in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119) and the clear process is executed, the protection release process and the protection setting process are not executed. This eliminates the need to cancel protection for unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)). It is possible to prevent it from being done in the future.

Aside from the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 for displaying base values, a setting display for displaying setting values in setting confirmation processing (FIG. 82) or setting value update processing (FIG. 83) In a situation where the device 205 is provided and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), the setting display device 205 Not only the processing for displaying the values (steps S7202 to S7205) but also the processing for displaying the base values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (step S7206) are executed. As a result, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the manager of the gaming hall places the gaming machine body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. By exposing the front side of the main control device 71 by rotating it, the setting value displayed on the setting display device 205 and the base value displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 Both can be visually confirmed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can set a new setting value while checking the past base value in the setting value update process (Fig. 83), or change the past base value and the current situation in the setting confirmation process (Fig. 82). It is possible to check the correspondence with the set value.

In a configuration in which the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 displaying the base values are mounted on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, the setting display device 205 displaying the set values is also mounted on the element mounting surface. is provided. As a result, both the base values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the set values displayed on the setting display device 205 can be easily confirmed.

When the set value update process (FIG. 83) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the first to fourth Display of base values on the notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the display of the base value from starting before the manager of the game hall starts the work for changing the setting value.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the display segments 201a to 201a of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. A check display is executed to enable confirmation of whether or not an abnormality has occurred in 204a. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not the display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed normally before the start of the game. In this case, when the set value update process (FIG. 83) is executed, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is displayed when the set value update process (FIG. 83) is completed. be started. As a result, in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the display devices for the first to fourth notifications 201 to 204 give priority to displaying the base values, while the first to fourth notifications are displayed. It is possible to perform check display on the display devices 201 to 204 for use.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the process at the time of starting supply of operating power ends without executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the set value update process (FIG. 83). When the processing for progressing the game is to be started, the check display is first started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and after the check display is finished, the display of the base value is started. be done. As a result, in this situation, it is possible to give priority to the display for check over the start of display of the base value.

Execution of setting confirmation processing (FIG. 82) or setting value update processing (FIG. 83) in the processing (steps S4901 to S4928) when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. After the display of the base value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is completed and the initial When the check period (specifically, 5 seconds) occurs, when the initial check period ends, the current status area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258 and the third Of the base values stored in each of the history areas 259, the display of the base values that were subject to notification immediately before the start of the initial check period is resumed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the same time, the restarted display of the base value is performed over the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) regardless of the remaining display continuation period at the timing when the initial check period was started. This makes it possible to appropriately display the base value after the end of the initial check period.

When specific control processing is executed, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control are to be written information, but the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area for non-specific control 214 is not the target of writing information, and when non-specific control processing is executed, the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are the target of writing information. The work area 211 for control and the stack area 212 for specific control are never subject to writing information. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the type of storage area to which information is written, depending on whether the specific control process is executed or the non-specific control process is executed. On the other hand, even when specific control processing is executed, not only the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, but also the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack for non-specific control Information can be read from the area 214 as well, and even when non-specific control processing is executed, the specific control is performed in addition to the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Information can also be read from the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. This makes it possible to refer to information corresponding to the processing result of one of the specific control process and the non-specific control process in the other process.

In this case, when it is specified that the detection of the game ball in each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud in the non-specific control process, the corresponding process is executed in the specific control process. be done. As a result, the processing for specifying whether the detection of the game ball in each detection sensor 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud is executed as a non-specific control process instead of a specific control process. Even with a configuration that has a margin in the processing that can be executed as the processing of , the processing corresponding to the fact that the detection of the game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud is defined as a processing of specific control. can be executed.

In a configuration in which a process for specifying whether or not a game ball is detected by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is executed in the process of specific control, the game in each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a in the process of non-specific control When it is specified that the detection of the ball is abnormal or fraudulent, a process for invalidating the detection of the game ball is executed in the specific control process. As a result, the processing for specifying whether the detection of the game ball in each detection sensor 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud is executed as a non-specific control process instead of a specific control process. While providing a margin for the processing that can be executed as the processing of 1, the processing for specifying whether or not the game ball is detected by each detection sensor 231a to 238a and the processing for invalidating the detection of the game ball It is possible to collectively perform specific control processing.

General winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operation port 33, second operation port 34, out port 24a and each detection sensor 231a to 238a that detects the entry of the game ball to each of the through gate 35 Entering ball detection processing (FIG. 91) for specifying whether or not a ball has been detected, and processing for progressing the game in response to detection of game balls by the detection sensors 231a to 238a (holding information Acquisition processing (Fig. 92), general electric control processing (Fig. 96), special electric open processing (Fig. 97 (c)), payout output processing (step S5518), etc.) are included in the specific control processing , fraud detection execution processing (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether the detection of game balls by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to abnormality or fraud is included in the non-specific control processing. As a result, there is no need to execute fraud detection execution processing (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether the detection of game balls by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud in the specific control processing. , the data capacity allocated to the specific control program and specific control data in the main ROM 83 can be allocated to processes other than the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95).

In the processing order of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), the entry ball detection processing which is included in the specific control processing and is the processing for specifying whether or not the game ball is detected by each detection sensor 231a to 238a. After (FIG. 91), fraud detection execution processing (Figure 95) is executed, and after the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), it is included in the specific control process and the game is progressed in response to the detection of the game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. (holding information acquisition process (FIG. 92), general electric control process (FIG. 96), special electric open process (FIG. 97(c)), payout output process (step S5518), etc.) are executed. As a result, fraud detection execution processing (Fig. 95) for monitoring whether the detection of game balls by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to abnormality or fraud is executed as non-specific control processing. Even with this configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing for progressing the game from being executed in response to the detection of game balls by the detection sensors 231a to 238a caused by an abnormality or fraud.

When it is specified that a game ball is detected by the detection sensors 231a to 238a in the entering ball detection process (FIG. 91) included in the process of specific control, the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control Each provided confirmation flag is set to "1", and it is specified that the detection of the game ball is caused by an abnormality or fraud in the fraud detection execution process (Fig. 95) included in the non-specific control process. is set to "1" in each of the abnormality flags 213l to 213s provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, and when "1" is set to the abnormality flags 213l to 213s, The confirmation flags corresponding to the abnormality flags 213l to 213s set to "1" in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) included in the control process are cleared to "0". As a result, information stored in the work area 211 for specific control can be read in both specific control processing and non-specific control processing, whereas information stored in the work area 211 for specific control can be read. can be written in specific control processing, but not in non-specific control processing, and reading of information stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in specific control processing and non-specific control processing. While it is possible in any case, while writing information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in non-specific control processing but not possible in specific control processing, the above It becomes possible to produce such an excellent effect.

After the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) included in the non-specific control process is executed, until the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) is executed again, the fraud response process ( FIG. 99) is executed. Then, in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99), the confirmation flag is cleared to "0" and various prize ball counters are reset according to the abnormality flags 213l to 213s whose information is set in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95). Execute the subtraction process. In this case, in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), after first clearing the abnormality flags 213l to 213s to "0", a process for setting information to the abnormality flags 213l to 213s is executed. As a result, in a configuration in which writing of information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in non-specific control processing but not possible in specific control processing, an abnormality is detected at an appropriate timing in non-specific control processing. It becomes possible to clear the flags 213l to 213s to "0".

In a configuration in which whether or not the detection of a game ball by each detection sensor 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud is executed in a non-specific control process, a special electric monitoring delay that is referred to at the time of the identification The timer counter 211b and the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the work area 211 for specific control. As a result, it becomes possible to perform processing for measuring the period using the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the specific control processing.

In addition, the measurement of the effective period of game ball detection using the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b is started when the special electric winning device 32 is changed from the open state to the closed state, and the general electric monitoring delay is started. The measurement of the valid period of game ball detection using the timer counter 211c is triggered by the execution of the process of changing the second operation port 34 from the open state to the closed state. Since the process of closing the special electric prize winning device 32 and the second operation opening 34 is executed as the process of the specific control, the start timing is set in the process of the non-specific control without taking into consideration the result of the process of the specific control. Impossible to specify. In this case, if the special electricity monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electricity monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the non-specific control work area 213, the special electricity monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electricity monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electricity monitoring delay timer counter 211c There is a risk that the processing configuration for specifying the trigger for starting measurement of the valid period in the counter 211c will become complicated. On the other hand, by providing the special electrical monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electrical monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the specific control work area 211 instead of the non-specific control work area 213, the specific control work area In 211, it is possible to avoid complicating the processing configuration even though the necessary storage capacity increases accordingly.

In a configuration in which specification of whether the detection of game balls by the respective detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud is executed by non-specific control processing, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, 1st to 8th winning monitoring timers to be referred to when monitoring whether or not the entry of the game ball into the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the through gate 35 and the out port 24a is normal Counters 213a to 213h are provided in work area 213 for non-specific control. Since the measurement of the invalid period of game ball detection using the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h is triggered by the detection result of each detection sensor 231a to 238a, the start trigger is a specific control process. It is possible to specify in the process of non-specific control without considering the result. Therefore, by providing the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the invalid period of game ball detection using the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h can be measured by non-specific control processing. In such circumstances, by providing the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the required storage capacity in the work area 211 for specific control can be reduced. It becomes possible.

Regardless of whether the specific control processing unit 221 is executing specific control processing or the non-specific control processing unit 222 is executing non-specific control processing, the command to be transmitted is , is stored in the command transmission buffer 223 b of the register area 223 . In other words, even if the area to which information is to be written in the main RAM 84 differs between the situation in which the specific control process is executed and the situation in which the non-specific control process is executed, The command writing area is used both in a situation where specific control processing is being executed and in a situation where non-specific control processing is being executed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to concentrate the processing for storing the command into only one of the specific control processing and the non-specific control processing, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration for storing the command from becoming complicated. It becomes possible.

The command transmission buffer 223b is provided in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 instead of the main RAM 84. FIG. As a result, the storage area of the main RAM 84 to which information can be written in the specific control process and the storage area of the main RAM 84 to which information can be written in the non-specific control process are divided into a work area 211 for specific control. And in a configuration in which the stack area 212 for specific control, the work area 213 for non-specific control, and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are clearly distinguished, commands are written while avoiding using these areas 211 to 214 It is possible to share a storage area between specific control processing and non-specific control processing.

The commands stored in the command transmission buffer 223b are transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224 that operates independently of the specific control process and the non-specific control process. As a result, there is no need to adjust the command transmission timing in relation to the execution content of the process using the program in the main MPU 82, so it is possible to simplify the processing configuration of the process using the program in the main MPU 82. becomes.

A process for identifying whether or not an event targeted for external output of a security signal has occurred is executed not only in the specific control process but also in the non-specific control process. As a result, the process for monitoring whether or not the event targeted for the external output of the security signal has occurred is assigned to the non-specific control process, and the program and data for the specific control process Capacity can be allocated to other processes.

A work area 211 for specific control is provided with a first security counter 211a and a work area 213 for non-specific control is provided with a second security counter 213k. If it is identified that the event has occurred, the value of the first security counter 211a is incremented by 1, and it is identified that the event for which the security signal is to be externally output has occurred in the non-specific control process. If so, 1 is added to the value of the second security counter 213k. As a result, writing of information to the work area 211 for specific control is enabled in specific control processing and disabled in non-specific control processing, and writing of information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is disabled. Although it is possible in specific control processing and not possible in specific control processing, events that are subject to external output of security signals occur in each of specific control processing and non-specific control processing can be appropriately specified.

In the security processing (FIG. 101) included in the specific control processing, the increase in the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is added to the first security counter 211a. is 1 or more, the security signal is output to the outside in the security processing (FIG. 101). Then, the external output of the pulse-shaped security signal for a predetermined output continuation period or longer with a predetermined stop continuation period intervening is repeatedly executed until the value of the first security counter 211a becomes "0". Thereby, in a configuration in which the occurrence of an event targeted for external output of a security signal is specified in each of the specific control process and the non-specific control process, the process for externally outputting the security signal. can be integrated into specific control processing.

When the value of the first security counter 211a becomes 1 or more, the security flag 211f is set to "1", and when the security flag 211f is set to "1", the abnormality display device 206 is turned on. . The state in which the security flag 211f is set to "1" is maintained as long as the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is continued, and the RAM clear processing (step S4919) in the main processing (FIG. 81). ) or the RAM clearing process (step S5113) in the set value updating process (FIG. 83) is executed, and when the security flag 211f is set to "1", the abnormality display device 206 is kept in the light emitting state. be. As a result, at least when the game hall is in operation, regardless of the timing at which the manager of the game hall checks the abnormality display device 206, the game hall can determine whether or not an event for which the security signal is to be output externally has occurred. It is possible to make the administrator recognize it.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the thirteenth embodiment in the processing configuration of the first timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 82 . The configuration different from that of the thirteenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing first timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82 . Of the processes in steps S7701 to S7719 in the first timer interrupt process, the processes other than the management process called and executed in step S7719 use the specific control program and specific control data. It is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82, and the management process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control. .

In steps S7701 to S7707, the same processes as steps S5501 to S5507 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the thirteenth embodiment are executed. In step S7708, ball entry detection processing is executed.

FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the ball entry detection process in step S7708. The processes of steps S7801 to S7818 in the ball entry detection process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main side MPU 82 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, a prize ball counter setting process is executed (step S7801). The prize ball counter setting process sets each prize ball counter according to the contents of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121) and the contents of the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the previous process. is the processing of The details of the prize ball counter setting process will be described later.

After that, various flag clearing processes are executed (step S7802). In the various flag clearing processes, similar to the various flag clearing processes (step S5601) in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, and the third 3 Clear the winning confirmation flag, the special electric winning confirmation flag, the first operation winning confirmation flag, the second operation winning confirmation flag, the out confirmation flag, and the gate winning confirmation flag to "0".

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first winning hole detection sensor 231a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S7803: YES). In this case, the first winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7804). The first winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored in the first bit D1 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the second winning hole detection sensor 232a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S7805: YES). In this case, the second winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7806). The second winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 232a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the state where the information of "0" is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the state where the information of "1" is stored, the third winning hole detection sensor 233a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S7807: YES). In this case, the third winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7808). The third winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 233a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the third bit D3 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S7809: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the special electric winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7810). As in the thirteenth embodiment, the special electric winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the fourth bit D4 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first operation opening detection sensor 235a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S7811: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7812). As in the thirteenth embodiment, the first operation winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that one game ball has been detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 235a.

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the second operating opening detection sensor 236a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S7813: YES). In this case, the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7814). As in the thirteenth embodiment, the second operation winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that one game ball has been detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 236a.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 237a. is detected (step S7815: YES). In this case, the out confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7816). The out confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the out port detection sensor 237a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 238a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S7817: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the gate winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7818). The gate winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that one gaming ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 238a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

Returning to the description of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120), after executing the ball entry detection processing in step S7708, the step of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in the thirteenth embodiment is performed in step S7709. As in S5510, specific control timer update processing is executed. After that, the processing of steps S7710 to S7718 is executed. In steps S7710 to S7718, the same processes as steps S5512 to S5520 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the thirteenth embodiment are executed.

In this embodiment, the fraud detection process (step S5509) and fraud response process (step S5511) set in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the thirteenth embodiment are not executed. Instead, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in this embodiment, a management process is called by the CALLI instruction in step S7719, and the fraud detection execution process is executed in the management process. Note that the process of step S7719 is executed when affirmative determination is made in step S7705 or when the process of step S7718 is executed.

Next, the process of step S7719 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) will be described.

In step S7719 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120), management processing is executed by the CALLI instruction as already described. Administrative processing is included in non-specific control processing. In other words, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120), when the situation changes from the specific control process to the non-specific control process, the non-specific control process uses the CALLI instruction. Called.

When the management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, first, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control. The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving the information in the flag register before the program for management processing, which is non-specific control processing, is started, the information before the management processing is called or changed after the management processing is started. It is possible to save the information of the status flag register in the stack area 212 for specific control.

When management processing is executed by the CALLI instruction, after the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are executed. ) interrupts are disabled. As a result, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114), which are specific control processing, are interrupted and started while the management processing, which is non-specific control processing, is being executed. It is possible to prevent

When management processing is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are executed. After interrupts are disabled, a program corresponding to administrative processing is started.

In this way, with a configuration in which management processing is executed by the CALLI instruction, information in the flag register of the main side MPU 82 is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control by one instruction ("CALLI"). , the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited. A program corresponding to the management process can then be started. For this reason, an instruction to save the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 to the stack area 212 for specific control and the interruption of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited. The number of instructions set in the program for executing the management process can be reduced compared to the case where the instruction for executing the management process and the instruction for starting the program for the management process are separately provided. As a result, the storage capacity of the main ROM 83 for storing programs can be reduced.

FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing management processing. The processing of steps S7901 to S7920 in the management process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, as "LD SP, Y(u+2)", Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction (step S7901). The stack pointer is an area in which address information is set for the main MPU 82 to specify a storage area to which information is to be written by a push instruction in the stack areas 212 and 214 . Each time a push instruction is performed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order, and each time a pop instruction is performed, the stack pointer information is updated to the previous order to be written is updated to the information of the address of the storage area. Further, when the stack area 214 for non-specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and each time the information to be stored is added. Then, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S6801, the information of the last address in stack area 214 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer.

Thereafter, as "LD (_WABUF), WA", the information in the WA register of the main side MPU 82 is saved in the WA buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S7902). Also, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", the information in the BC register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the BC buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S7903). Also, as "LD (_DEBUF), DE", the information in the DE register of the main side MPU 82 is saved in the DE buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S7904). Also, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", the information in the HL register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the HL buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S7905). Also, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", the information in the IX register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the IX buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S7906). Also, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", the information in the IY register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the IY buffer set in the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S7907).

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are processing corresponding to non-specific control, such as information clear processing (step S7908), test firing test processing (step S7909), and timer update for non-specific control. This register is used in processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912), and check processing (step S7913). The information set in such registers is cleared information processing (step S7908), trial firing test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality By saving the information in the non-specific control work area 213 prior to execution of the monitoring process (step S7912) and the check process (step S7913), non-specific control is started for the information of these registers used for specific control. It is possible to retreat before. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during the non-specific control, the information saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control is returned to these registers when the non-specific control is terminated. can be returned to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

In addition, instead of saving all information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control, information clear processing (step S7908), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, WA to be used in test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912) and check processing (step S7913) By selectively saving the information of the registers, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register to the non-specific control work area 213, the register information is saved in the non-specific control work area 213. It is possible to suppress the capacity to be ensured in order to Therefore, information clear processing (step S7908), trial firing test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912) and check processing While securing a large capacity of the work area 213 for non-specific control that becomes available at (step S7913), it is possible to save the information in the register as described above.

Of course, among various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main MPU 82, registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register support non-specific control. The information set before the start of the processing to be performed is stored and retained until the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the processing corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

After executing the processing of steps S7902 to S7907, information clear processing (step S7908), test firing test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), Information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912) and check processing (step S7913) are executed. Information clear processing (step S7908), trial firing test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912) and check processing (step S7913), information clear processing set in the program for non-specific control (step S7908), test firing test processing (step S7909), timer update processing for non-specific control (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), the information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912), and the check process (step S7913). , Trial test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912), and management after execution of check processing (step S7913) Information for specifying the return address of the processing for use is written in the stack area 214 for non-specific control by a push instruction. Then, information clear processing (step S7908), trial firing test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912), and check processing When (step S7913) is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program for management processing indicated by the return address is returned to.

The processing contents of the information clearing process (step S7908) are the same as the information clearing process (FIG. 94) executed in step S5808 of the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) in the thirteenth embodiment. The contents of the trial shooting test process (step S7909) are the same as the trial shooting test process executed in step S5809 of the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) in the thirteenth embodiment. The contents of the non-specific control timer update process (step S7910) are the same as the non-specific control timer update process executed in step S5810 of the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) in the thirteenth embodiment. The content of the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) is the same as the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) executed in step S5811 of the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) in the thirteenth embodiment. The contents of the information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912) are the same as the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119) executed in step S6808 of the second management process (FIG. 107) in the thirteenth embodiment. The contents of the check process (step S7913) are the same as the check process (FIG. 108) executed in step S6809 of the second management process (FIG. 107) in the thirteenth embodiment.

Information clear processing (step S7908), trial firing test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912) and check processing (step After S7913) is executed, "LD SP, Y(r+d)" is set to the stack pointer of the main side MPU 82 by the load instruction, Y(r+d) as a fixed address at the time of returning to the specific control after the end of the management process. ) is set (step S7914). The address of Y(r+d) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 212 for specific control.

The amount of information stored in the specific control stack area 212 is always constant immediately before the management process is called in step S7719 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). The information of the stack pointer of the MPU 82 (that is, the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, the information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control includes, for example, return address information of the main process (FIG. 81) after the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) ends. The constant information of the stack pointer is Y(r+d). Therefore, information information clear processing (step S7908), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, trial firing test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information When the abnormality monitoring process (step S7912) and the check process (step S7913) are completed and the process corresponding to the specific control is returned to, the fixed information Y(r+d) is set in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82. By doing so, it is possible to return the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. By setting the fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the information of the stack pointer is restored to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, so that the processing corresponding to the non-specific control It becomes unnecessary to save the information of the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 84 before starting the control. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load and eliminate the need to secure an area for saving in the main RAM 84 .

Thereafter, as "LD WA, (_WABUF)", the WA register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the WA buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S7915). Also, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the BC register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the BC buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S7916). Also, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the DE register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the DE buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S7917). Also, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the HL register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the HL buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S7918). Also, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the IX register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the IX buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S7919). Also, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the IY register of the main MPU 82 is overwritten with the information saved in the IY buffer of the non-specific control work area 213 by the load instruction (step S7920). By executing the processing of steps S7915 to S7920, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main side MPU 82 is processed corresponding to non-specific control. It is possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the control.

After executing the processing of steps S7915 to S7920, the RETI instruction returns to the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) included in the specific control processing. By executing the RETI instruction, information in the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before execution of the management process is restored to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt process ( 120) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are switched from being prohibited to being permitted. As a result, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is restored to the information for executing the specific control, and new execution of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process becomes possible.

With the configuration for executing the RETI instruction, by one instruction ("RETI"), the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before execution of the management process is transferred to the flag register of the main MPU 82. , and the state in which the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited can be switched to the state in which they are permitted. For this reason, an instruction for returning the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the management process to the flag register of the main side MPU 82, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) and Compared to the case where an instruction for switching from the state in which the generation of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted is separately provided, the number of commands set in the program for non-specific control processing is reduced. number can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main-side ROM 83 for storing programs for non-specific control processing.

Information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed is not saved in the main RAM 84 when the specific control process is restarted. This eliminates the need to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

Further, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed is stored when the non-specific control process is restarted after returning to the specific control process. Information that is not used. In other words, information necessary for a plurality of times of non-specific control processing executed with specific control processing intervening is stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control. It is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 is not saved in the main RAM 84 when the non-specific control process is executed, a problem arises in executing the non-specific control process. do not have.

As described above, in the present embodiment, non-specific control processing is not distributed and set in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120), but is collectively set as one processing. As a result, processing for saving information of various registers of the main side MPU 82 to the main side RAM 84 when the situation changes from the situation in which the specific control process is executed to the situation in which the non-specific control process is executed, and the non-specific control When the process of (1) is completed and the specific control process is returned to, the process of returning the information saved in the main side RAM 84 to various registers of the main side MPU 82 is one process of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 120). It does not need to be repeated every time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120).

Non-specific control processing, which is collectively set as one processing in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120), is set as the last processing order in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120). As a result, it becomes possible to execute non-specific control processing in each processing cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) based on the processing contents of all specific control processing in that processing cycle. In addition, by setting non-specific control processing to the last processing order in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120), the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) after the processing of the non-specific control is completed. There is no need to store the return address information in the main side RAM 84 .

Since non-specific control processing is aggregated and set to the last processing order in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120), execution of ball entry detection processing (step S7708) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) It is later and the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) is not executed before the execution of the special figure special electric control process (step S7712), the general figure general electric control process (step S7713) and the payout output process (step S7716). In this case, the processing result of the entering ball detection processing (step S7708) in a predetermined processing time of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) is used as the special figure special electric control processing (step S7712) in the predetermined processing time, If it is used as it is in the general electric control process (step S7713) and the payout output process (step S7716), the process for advancing the game triggered by the winning result of the game ball caused by the abnormality or fraud or the game to the player There is a risk that the process for putting out the ball will be executed. A processing configuration for preventing such inconvenience from occurring will be described below.

FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the pending information acquisition process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 82 . The processing of steps S8001 to S8022 in the hold information acquisition processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main side MPU 82 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

In step S8001, it is determined whether or not the first storage standby flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". It is determined whether or not the storage standby flag is set to "1". The first storage standby flag is in a situation where the storage of the first reservation information in the first special figure reservation area 111 is waiting after it is specified that the game ball is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 235a It is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that there is. The second storage standby flag is in a situation where the storage of the second reservation information in the second special figure reservation area 112 is on standby after it is specified that the game ball is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 236a It is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 82 that there is.

If the first storage standby flag is not set to "1" (step S8001: NO) and the second storage standby flag is not set to "1" (step S8008: NO), the specific control It is determined whether or not "1" is set to the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 (step S8015). When "1" is set to the first operation winning confirmation flag (step S8015: YES), the number of first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 111 is less than the upper limit memory number As a condition (step S8016: YES), each value of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first standby area provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8017). . In the first standby area, the first holding information acquired when the game ball is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 235a is displayed as the detection of the game ball by the first operation opening detection sensor 235a. It is an area for waiting without storing in the first special figure reservation area 111 until it is specified in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) that it is not caused. After that, the first storage standby flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8018).

When "1" is set to the first storage standby flag (step S8001: YES), it is checked whether "1" is set to the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Determine (step S8002). That is, the detection of the game ball in the first operation opening detection sensor 235a, which triggered the setting of "1" to the first storage standby flag, is the fraud detection in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) of the previous processing time. It is determined whether or not it is identified as being caused by an abnormality in the execution process (step S7911).

When "1" is not set to the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p (step S8002: NO), the game in the first operation opening detection sensor 235a that triggered the setting of "1" to the first storage standby flag This means that the detection of the sphere was not identified as being caused by an abnormality in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the previous process. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the first special figure reservation counter (step S8003). The display contents of the first special figure reservation display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 are adjusted according to the value of the first special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure reservation display portion 37 c corresponds to the number of first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 111 . After that, the first reservation information waiting in the first waiting area is stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 111, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservation storage added by 1 in step S8003 ( step S8004). After that, the first pending command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223 (step S8005). By storing the first pending command in the command transmission buffer 223 b , the command transmitting circuit 224 operates to transmit the first pending command to the sound and light side MPU 93 . Thereby, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display content of the first reserved display area 42a of the pattern display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase of the first reserved information.

On the other hand, when "1" is set to the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p (step S8002: YES), the first operation opening detection sensor 235a that triggered the setting of "1" to the first storage standby flag. It means that the detection of the game ball in is specified as being caused by an abnormality in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the previous process. In this case, the first pending information waiting in the first waiting area is erased (step S8006). Also, when the process of step S8005 or the process of step S8006 is executed, the first storage standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S8007).

When a negative determination is made in step S8015, when a negative determination is made in step S8016, or when the process of step S8018 is executed, the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". (step S8019). If "1" is set to the second operation winning confirmation flag (step S8019: YES), the number of second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 is less than the upper limit storage number As a condition (step S8020: YES), each value of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second standby area provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8021). . In the second standby area, the second holding information acquired when the game ball is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 236a It is an area for waiting without storing in the second special figure reservation area 112 until it is specified by the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) that it is not due to fraud. After that, the second storage standby flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8022).

When "1" is set to the second storage standby flag (step S8008: YES), it is checked whether "1" is set to the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Determine (step S8009). That is, the detection of the game ball in the second operation opening detection sensor 236a, which triggered the second storage standby flag to be set to "1", is the fraud detection in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the previous processing time. It is determined whether or not it is identified as being caused by an abnormality in the execution process (step S7911).

When "1" is not set to the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q (step S8009: NO), the game in the second operation opening detection sensor 236a that triggered the second storage standby flag to be set to "1" This means that the detection of the sphere was not identified as being caused by an abnormality or fraud in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the previous processing. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the second special figure reservation counter (step S8010). The display contents of the second special figure reservation display section 37d in the special figure unit 37 are adjusted according to the value of the second special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure reservation display section 37 d corresponds to the number of second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 . After that, the second reservation information waiting in the second waiting area is stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 112, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservation storages added by 1 in step S8010 ( step S8011). After that, the second pending command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223 (step S8012). By storing the second pending command in the command transmission buffer 223 b , the command transmitting circuit 224 operates to transmit the second pending command to the sound and light side MPU 93 . Thus, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display content of the second reserved display area 42b of the pattern display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase of the second reserved information.

On the other hand, when the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is set to "1" (step S8009: YES), the second operation opening detection sensor 236a that triggered the second storage standby flag to be set to "1". It means that the detection of the game ball in is specified as being caused by abnormality or fraud in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the previous processing time. In this case, the second pending information waiting in the second waiting area is erased (step S8013). Also, when the process of step S8012 or the process of step S8013 is executed, the second storage standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S8014).

With the above configuration, in the ball entry detection process (step S7708) in the predetermined processing times of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), the game ball is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 235a or the second operation opening detection sensor 236a. is detected, in the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 123) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the predetermined processing time, the hold information corresponding to it is temporarily transferred to the corresponding wait Wait in the area. Then, in the fraud detection execution processing (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) of the predetermined processing time, the detection of the game ball that triggered the acquisition of the reservation information was abnormal or caused by fraud. If it is specified that it is not a thing, wait in the waiting area in the pending information acquisition process (FIG. 123) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the next processing time for the predetermined processing time The reserved information is stored in the special figure reserved areas 111 and 112 corresponding thereto. As a result, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) includes the fraud detection execution processing (step S7911) and non-specific control processing is aggregated in the last processing order. Even if the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) is not set between the entering ball detection process (step S7708) and the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 123) in (FIG. 120), an abnormal or fraudulent It is possible to prevent the reservation information from being stored in the special figure reservation areas 111 and 112 with the detection of the game ball caused by.

It should be noted that, as described above, the execution of the predetermined process triggered by the detection of the game ball is once waited, and then in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911), the detection of the game ball is not caused by an abnormality or fraud. The configuration for executing the predetermined process that has been waiting when it is specified is the suspension of the general pattern side in the general pattern general electric control processing (step S7713) triggered by the detection of the game ball in the gate detection sensor 238a. It is also used in processing for acquiring information.

FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the winning ball counter setting process executed in step S7801 of the entering ball detection process (FIG. 121). It should be noted that the processing of steps S8101 to S8120 in the processing for setting the winning ball counter is executed by the specific control processing section 221 of the main side MPU 82 using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

When the first winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8101: YES), the first general winning abnormality flag 213l in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". is not set (step S8102: NO), 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8103). When it is specified that the detection of the game ball in the first winning hole detection sensor 231a is caused by an abnormality in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous process time "1" is set to the first general winning abnormality flag 213l. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out. The first winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the entering ball detection process (FIG. 121) after the current winning ball counter setting process (FIG. 124) is completed.

When the second winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8104: YES), the second general winning abnormality flag 213m in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". is not set (step S8105: NO), the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the specific control work area 211 is incremented by 1 (step S8106). When it is specified that the detection of the game ball in the second winning opening detection sensor 232a is caused by an abnormality in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous process time "1" is set to the second general winning abnormality flag 213m. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out. The second winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the entering ball detection process (FIG. 121) after the current winning ball counter setting process (FIG. 124) is completed.

When the third winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8107: YES), the third general winning abnormality flag 213n in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". is not set (step S8108: NO), the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the specific control work area 211 is incremented by 1 (step S8109). When it is specified that the detection of the game ball in the third winning opening detection sensor 233a is caused by an abnormality in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous process time , "1" is set to the third general winning abnormality flag 213n. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out. The third winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" at step S7802 of the entering ball detection process (FIG. 121) after the current winning ball counter setting process (FIG. 124) is completed.

When "1" is set to the special electric prize confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8110: YES), "1" is set to the special electric prize abnormal flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control. (step S8111: NO), the value of the 15 prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8112), and the winning counter in the work area 211 for specific control If the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from this value (step S8113). When it is specified that the detection of the game ball in the special electric detection sensor 234a is abnormal or due to fraud in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous processing time "1" is set to the special electric prize-winning abnormality flag 213o. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is subtracted by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out. Also, when the value of the prize winning counter becomes "0", a process for closing the special electric prize winning device 32 in the open state in the special electric special electric control processing (step S7712) is executed. The special electric winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the entering ball detection process (FIG. 121) after the current winning ball counter setting process (FIG. 124) is completed.

When the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8114: YES), the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". is not set (step S8115: NO), the value of the one prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8116). When it is specified that the detection of the game ball in the first operation opening detection sensor 235a is caused by an abnormality in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous process time "1" is set to the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p. When the value of the 1-ball counter is 1 or more, the 1-ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out. The first operation winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" at step S7802 of the entering ball detection process (FIG. 121) after the current winning ball counter setting process (FIG. 124) is completed.

When the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8117: YES), the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". is not set (step S8118: NO), the value of the one prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8119), and the work area 211 for specific control 1 is subtracted from this value when the value of the general electric prize winning counter is 1 or more (step S8120). In the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous process, it is specified that the detection of the game ball in the second operation opening detection sensor 236a is abnormal or caused by fraud. In this case, "1" is set to the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q. When the value of the 1-ball counter is 1 or more, the 1-ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out. In addition, when the value of the general electric winning prize counter becomes "0", in the general electric general electric control processing (step S7713), the processing for closing the second operation port 34 which is in the open state is executed. . The second operation winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the entering ball detection process (FIG. 121) after the current winning ball counter setting process (FIG. 124) is completed.

With the above configuration, it is specified that the game ball is detected by the various detection sensors 231a to 236a in the ball entry detection process (step S7708) in the predetermined processing times of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). However, in the payout output process (step S7716) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the predetermined processing time, the process for executing the payout of the corresponding game ball is not executed, and the predetermined In the special figure special electric control processing (step S7712) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) of the processing time, the processing for advancing the round game is not executed, and the first timer interrupt processing ( In FIG. 120), the general pattern general electric control processing (step S7713) does not execute the processing for advancing the general electric open state. Then, in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the predetermined processing times, the detection of the game ball by the various detection sensors 231a to 236a is not caused by abnormality or fraud. When it is specified, the processing for executing the payout of the game ball, the processing for advancing the round game, and the processing for advancing the electric open state are executed. As a result, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) includes the fraud detection execution processing (step S7911) and non-specific control processing is aggregated in the last processing order. (Figure 120) Entering ball detection processing (step S7708) and payout output processing (step S7716), special figure special electric control processing (step S7712) and general figure public electric control processing (step S7713) Fraud detection execution processing between Even if (step S7911) is not set, processing for executing payout of game balls triggered by detection of game balls caused by abnormality or fraud, processing for proceeding with round game, and general It is possible to prevent the execution of processing for promoting the disconnection state.

FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing normal incoming ball management processing executed in the check processing in step S7913 of the management processing (FIG. 122). The processing of steps S8201 to S8221 in the normal ball entry management process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main side MPU 82 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control. .

When the first winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8201: YES), the first general winning abnormality flag 213l in the work area 213 for non-specific control If "1" is not set (step S8202: NO), it means that a winning to the general winning opening 31 occurs and one game ball is normally detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a. do. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S8203). Also, when the second winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8204: YES), the second general winning abnormality flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control When "1" is not set in 213m (step S8205: NO), winning to the general winning opening 31 occurs and one game ball is normally detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 232a. means In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 (step S8206). Also, when the third winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8207: YES), the third general winning abnormality flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control 213n is not set to "1" (step S8208: NO), a winning to the general winning opening 31 occurs and one game ball is normally detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 233a. means In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S8209).

When the special electric prize confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8210: YES), the special electric prize abnormal flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". is not set (step S8211: NO), it means that a winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 has occurred and one game ball has been normally detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the special electric winning counter 251b in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S8212).

When the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8213: YES), the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" (step S8214: NO), the winning to the first working opening 33 occurs and one game ball is normally detected by the first working opening detection sensor 235a. means In this case, 1 is added to the value of the first operation counter 251c in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 (step S8215).

When the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8216: YES), the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control is not set to "1" (step S8217: NO), the winning to the second working opening 34 occurs and one game ball is normally detected by the second working opening detection sensor 236a. means In this case, 1 is added to the value of the second operation counter 251d in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 (step S8218).

When the out confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8219: YES), the out abnormality flag 213r in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1". If not (step S8220: NO), it means that a game ball entered the out port 24a and one game ball was normally detected by the out port detection sensor 237a. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the out-counter 251e in the normal counter area 251 of the non-specific control work area 213 (step S8221).

The normal ball entry monitoring process (FIG. 125) is performed after the ball entry detection process (step S7708) and after the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in each processing cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). executed. Therefore, after it is specified whether or not the detection of game balls by the various detection sensors 231a to 237a is caused by an abnormality or fraud, the normal ball entry monitoring process (FIG. 125) is executed. In the normal incoming ball monitoring process (FIG. 125), when the abnormality flags 213l to 213r are set to "1", even if the corresponding confirmation flag is set to "1", the "1" "1" is not added to the counters 251a to 251e corresponding to the confirmation flags set. This makes it possible to accurately manage the game history.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configurations of the above embodiments. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other (for example, the combination of the first, seventh, and tenth embodiments, the sixth, eighth, and A combination of the embodiment and the ninth embodiment, a combination of the first embodiment, the eighth embodiment and the thirteenth embodiment, a combination of the sixth embodiment and the fourteenth embodiment), each of the above The configurations of the embodiments may be combined with each other, and the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied thereto individually or in combination.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is performed after the setting process for the time saving result is performed in the process during specific confirmation, and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 It is good also as composition by which setting processing for time saving results is performed after is performed. In this case, when the time saving result is selected in the success/failure determination process in the game round in which the time saving state can be set and the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 is "0" When the ceiling time saving occurs, the ceiling time saving is set. The setting of the time saving state triggered by the time saving result is given priority over the setting of the time saving state triggered by the time saving result. Therefore, the number of times of continuation of time saving set in the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving result is set in the time saving state triggered by the time saving result or the number of time saving continuation times set in the time saving state triggered by the time saving result It is preferable that the number of times is greater than the number of times of continuous time saving.

(2) In the above embodiments, the first time saving result and the second time saving result are set as the time saving result, but only one of the first time saving result and the second time saving result is set. good too. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which three or more types of time saving results are set. In this case, the number of times of continuous time saving set in the time saving state triggered by the time saving result is the time saving set in the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving regardless of the type of time saving result as in each of the above embodiments. It may be configured to be the number of continuations or more, and for at least some of the time saving results, the number of times of continuation of time saving may be less than the number of times of continuation of time saving set in the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of continuous time-savings set in the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result may be less than or equal to the number of continuous time-savings set in the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time-saving. It is good also as a structure which is the number of times smaller than the number of times of time saving continuation set in the time saving state triggered by.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the first high-frequency support mode may be set instead of the second high-frequency support mode in the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result. In this case, the first high frequency support mode is set in the time saving state triggered by the result of the big win or the time saving result, and the second high frequency support mode is set in the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving.

(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving, the first high frequency support mode may be set instead of the second high frequency support mode. In this case, the first high frequency support mode is set in the time saving state triggered by the result of the big hit or the ceiling time saving, and the second high frequency support mode is set in the time saving state triggered by the time saving result.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the first high-frequency support mode is set in the time-saving state triggered by one of the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result, and the second high-frequency support mode is set in the time-saving state triggered by the other. It may be configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to set the high-frequency support mode according to the type of time saving result.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode differ in the probability of winning the electric role open election in the general figure suitability judgment, and the execution mode of other general figure / general electric are the same, but in addition to or instead of the probabilities, other execution modes may be different. For example, one of the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode may be configured to have a longer duration of the fluctuation display times in the normal diagram display unit 38a than the other, and the first high-frequency support mode and the second One of the high frequency support modes may be configured to have a longer average period of duration of the fluctuation display times in the normal figure display unit 38a than the other, and one of the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode The second operation port 34 or the special prize winning device 151 may be configured to be in the open state more times than the other, and one of the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode is more than the other. Also, the total period during which the second operation port 34 or the special prize winning device 151 is in the open state in the general power open state may be long. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode may be more advantageous than the second high-frequency support mode in any execution mode, and the second high-frequency support mode may be used in any execution mode. The first high-frequency support mode may be more advantageous than the first high-frequency support mode, and the first high-frequency support mode is more advantageous than the second high-frequency support mode for some execution modes, and the remaining execution modes are more advantageous. , the second high-frequency support mode may be more advantageous than the first high-frequency support mode.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the time saving state of the second high-frequency support mode occurs regardless of whether the time saving result occurs or the ceiling time saving occurs, but it is limited to this Instead, for example, when the time saving result occurs, the time saving state of the first high frequency support mode occurs, whereas when the ceiling time saving occurs, the time saving state of the second high frequency support mode occurs. Also, when the time saving result occurs, the time saving state of the second high frequency support mode occurs, whereas when the ceiling time saving occurs, the time saving state of the first high frequency support mode occurs. Often, when the time saving result occurs, the time saving state of the first high-frequency support mode occurs, whereas when the ceiling time saving occurs, the high probability state occurs, and the time saving result occurs In some cases, it may be configured such that a high probability state occurs when the ceiling time saving state occurs while the time saving state of the second high frequency support mode occurs.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, when a time saving result is obtained in the success or failure determination process and a time saving state occurs, it is notified that a time saving state occurs by the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41. However, it is not limited to this, and the stop result corresponding to the time saving result is stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 in the middle of the variable display period of the game round, and then the game round. Until the end timing, it may be configured such that a notification is executed so that the player can recognize that the time saving state triggered by the time saving result is started. However, in the case of this configuration, it is necessary to specify whether or not a time saving state triggered by the time saving result occurs at the stage of determining the effect for the game round, so the setting process for the time saving result is the start of the game round It should be executed on time.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, when a time saving state triggered by a ceiling time saving occurs, depending on the result of stopping the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41, the notification that the time saving state occurs is not executed. However, it is not limited to this, and in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41 in the middle of the variable display period of the game round, the stop result corresponding to the ceiling time reduction is stopped and displayed, and then the game round. Until the end timing, it may be a configuration in which a notification is executed so that the player can recognize that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving is started. However, in the case of this configuration, it is necessary to specify whether or not a time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs at the stage of determining the effect for the game round, so the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is performed at the start of the game round. It should be executed on time.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, when the time-saving result is obtained in the success/failure determination process and the game round in which the success/failure determination process is executed ends, a new game round in the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result is immediately started. Although it is allowed, it is not limited to this, and when a time saving state occurs triggered by a time saving result, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds ), the start of a new game cycle may be prevented. In this case, using the predetermined period, it is possible to perform notification for allowing the player to recognize that the time saving state triggered by the time saving result is started.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, when the game round in which the ceiling time saving occurs ends, the start of a new game round in the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving is immediately allowed. However, it is limited to this. However, if a time-saving state occurs triggered by the ceiling time-saving, when the game round with the ceiling time-saving ends, a new game round is started for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). It is good also as a structure blocked. In this case, using the predetermined period, it is possible to perform notification for allowing the player to recognize that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving is started.

(13) In the above-described embodiments, when the game round ends, the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134, the subtraction process of the variable selection state counter 132, the setting process for the time saving result, and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131. However, these processes may be configured to be executed after the suitability determination process is executed and before the variable display period specifying process is executed. In this case, it is possible to specify whether or not the ceiling time saving occurs before executing the specific process of the variable display period, so as a result of stopping the special figure display units 37a and 37b Corresponds to the occurrence of the ceiling time saving The stop result may be selected, and the stop result corresponding to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction may be selected as the stop result in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the pattern display device 41.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, both the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 and the setting process for the time saving result are executed at the end of the game round, but are not limited to this, and the time saving state counter 134 The subtraction process may be executed at the start of the game round, and the setting process for the time saving result may be executed at the end of the game round.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, both the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 are configured to be executed at the end of the game round, but are not limited to this, and the time saving state counter 134 The subtraction process may be executed at the start of the game round, and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 may be executed at the end of the game round.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the time saving state is configured to end when the predetermined number of times of continuous time saving is completed, but the end lottery process executed in the time saving state is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the time saving state is ended when the ending lottery result is obtained. In this case, when the end lottery process is executed and the end lottery result is obtained, the process of terminating the time saving state is configured to be executed before the setting process for the time saving result and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131. good too. As a result, it is possible to start a new time saving state triggered by the time saving result or the ceiling time saving in the game round in which the time saving state has ended.

(17) In the first embodiment and the like, both the setting process for the time saving result and the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 are configured to be executed at the end of the game round, but it is not limited to this, The setting process for the time saving result may be executed at the start of the game round, and the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 may be executed at the end of the game round.

(18) In the first embodiment and the like, both the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 and the subtraction processing of the high-probability state counter 133 are executed at the end of the game cycle, but the present invention is not limited to this. The subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 may be executed at the start of the game round, and the subtraction process of the high-probability state counter 133 may be executed at the end of the game round.

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented even if a game cycle is executed in the high probability state. The value of the ceiling counter 131 may be decremented when a game cycle is executed. In this case, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 in the high probability state may become "0", but in this case, it is preferable to invalidate the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction and continue the high probability state.

(20) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted when the game round is executed even in the time saving state, but it is not limited to this, and in the time saving state A configuration may be adopted in which the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not decremented even when a game cycle is executed.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, when a predetermined trigger occurs, the ceiling counter 131 is set to a numerical value such as the number of fixed ceilings, and when a game is played, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented by one. Although it is configured that a time saving state occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", it is not limited to this, and when a predetermined trigger occurs, the ceiling counter 131 " When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is incremented by 1 when it is cleared and a game round is executed, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the increment of 1 becomes a value corresponding to the generation trigger such as the number of fixed ceilings. It is good also as a structure which a time saving state generate|occur|produces.

(22) In each of the above-described embodiments, it is configured to determine whether or not to generate a time saving result in the success or failure determination process using the winning random number counter C1, but is not limited to this, and the winning random number counter C1 and It is good also as a structure which determines whether to generate a time saving result by another determination process using another random number counter. In this case, in the above-described third embodiment, it may be configured to determine whether or not to generate the time-saving result in the fall determination process using the fall random number counter C5.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the type random number counter C2 is used to determine the type of time saving result, but it is not limited to this, and a random number counter different from the type random number counter C2 is used. It is good also as composition which determines a kind of a time saving result. In addition, instead of determining whether to generate a time-saving result in the success/failure determination process using the hit random number counter C1, the hit result in the success/failure determination process using the hit random number counter C1, the first time-saving result, the second It is good also as a structure which determines which of two time saving results and a deviation result is generated.

(24) In the first embodiment, when an information error occurs in the main RAM 84, the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set information corresponding to the same number of fixed ceiling times as when the open/close execution mode occurs. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which information corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is fixed is set less than the number of times the ceiling is fixed when the open/close execution mode occurs. Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the set value update process is executed when an information error occurs in the main RAM 84, the number of fixed ceiling times is the same as when the opening/closing execution mode occurs in the ceiling counter 131. Although the information is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set information corresponding to the number of fixed ceiling times less than the number of fixed ceiling times when the open/close execution mode occurs.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs. Although the information about the number of ceilings is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and information abnormality occurs in a configuration in which a high-probability state occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after subtracting 1. The configuration may be such that the ceiling counter 131 is set with the information on the number of ceilings when the information abnormality occurs, and the opening/closing execution mode is generated when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtracting 1 becomes "0". In this case, the ceiling counter 131 may be configured to set information on the number of ceilings.

(26) In the above-described first embodiment and the like, when the set value update process is executed, the ceiling counter 131 is configured not to set the information on the number of ceiling times. The counter 131 may be configured to set information on the number of peaks. As a result, it becomes possible to set information on the number of peaks in the ceiling counter 131 when the set value is changed.

(27) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the RAM clearing process is executed, the ceiling counter 131 is not set with information on the number of ceilings. information may be set. As a result, it is possible to set the information of the number of ceiling times in the ceiling counter 131 when the main RAM 84 is cleared.

(28) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the operating power supply is started in a situation where the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation and the RAM clear operation are not performed and the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state, Although the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set information corresponding to the number of fixed ceilings, it is not limited to this, and in the situation, it may be configured to set information corresponding to a number of times greater than the number of fixed ceilings. , in this situation, it may be configured to set information corresponding to the number of times less than the fixed ceiling number of times. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started in a situation where the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation and the RAM clear operation are not performed and the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the ceiling counter 131 is fixed to the ceiling. It may be configured to set information corresponding to the number of times, may be configured to set information corresponding to the number of times greater than the fixed ceiling number of times, or may be configured to set information corresponding to the number of times less than the fixed ceiling number of times. . In addition, when the supply of operating power is started in a state in which a dedicated operation button is operated, information corresponding to the number of fixed ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131. The configuration may be such that the corresponding information is set, or the configuration is such that the information corresponding to the number of times less than the fixed ceiling number of times is set.

(29) In the above-described first embodiment and the like, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, information corresponding to the number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 in the processing during special figure determination, but it is not limited to this. Instead, the ceiling counter 131 may be configured to set the information corresponding to the number of times of ceiling at the timing in the middle of the opening period, and the ceiling counter 131 at the timing just before the first round game in the open/close execution mode is started. It may be configured to set information corresponding to the ceiling count. Even in these cases, it is possible to set information corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is opened in the ceiling counter 131 when the opening/closing execution mode is started.

(30) In the sixth embodiment, when it is confirmed that the ending period has passed in the special call ending process, information corresponding to the ceiling count is set in the ceiling counter 131, but it is limited to this. Alternatively, information corresponding to the number of ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131 at the timing when the last round game in the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the number of ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131 at the timing immediately before the ending period starts. or information corresponding to the number of peaks is set in the ceiling counter 131 at a timing in the middle of the ending period.

(31) In the sixth embodiment, when it is specified that the open/close execution mode is triggered by the result of the low-frequency jackpot or the result of the first small hit in the power failure monitoring process, the Although the information corresponding to the number of special ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131, it is not limited to this, and in the above situation, the information corresponding to the number of fixed ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131 In the above situation, information corresponding to the number of times less than the number of fixed ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131 . Further, in the blackout monitoring process, if the open/close execution mode is in progress, even if the trigger is not the result of the low-frequency big win or the result of the first small win, the ceiling counter 131 may be configured to set the information corresponding to the number of times of the ceiling.

(32) In the first embodiment and the like, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", it becomes a reach high frequency state and the reach display is likely to occur. There is no limitation, and when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after subtracting 1 becomes “0”, it may be configured to be in a state where an effect indicating that the ceiling time saving is approaching is performed. In this state, by selecting a variable display period different from the case where the reach display occurs and the case where the result is a complete loss, the sound and light side MPU 93 , it is possible to specify the state in which an effect indicating that the ceiling time saving is approaching is to be executed.

(33) In the first embodiment and the like, when the ceiling counter 131 is set with the information on the number of ceilings triggered by the open/close execution mode, the information corresponding to the period switching reference number of times is set in the variable selection state counter 132, but the operation When the ceiling counter 131 is set with the information of the number of ceiling times in the main process when the power supply is started, the information corresponding to the period switching reference number of times is not set in the variation selection state counter 132. is not limited to, and in the case of setting the ceiling number information in the ceiling counter 131 in the main process when the supply of operating power is started, the variation selection state counter 132 is set to the information corresponding to the period switching reference number of times may be set. In other words, when setting the ceiling count information in the ceiling counter 131 , the variation selection state counter 132 may always be set with information corresponding to the period switching reference count. In this case, if there are a plurality of types of peak counts set in the ceiling counter 131, information corresponding to the count that is less than the peak count by a predetermined number is set in the variable selection state counter 132. , It is possible to set the reach high frequency state in the game round before the predetermined number of times when the ceiling time reduction occurs regardless of which ceiling number is set.

(34) In the first embodiment and the like, even if the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", the reach high frequency state does not occur in the time saving state. However, even if it is a time saving state, it may be configured to be a reach high frequency state. When the reach frequency state is high in the time saving state, the probability that the reach display will occur in the game round that results in a loss is high, and a long period of variable display period is selected in the game round that causes the big hit result or the loss reach display. Although there is a high probability that the reach display will not occur, the shortest period on the special figure side will be selected in the game round as a result of the deviation.

(35) In the seventh embodiment, when the value of the number-of-games counter of the main side RAM 84 reaches the reference number of times, the ready-to-win display does not occur in game rounds in which no jackpot result occurs in any game state. Although it is configured to perform control, it is not limited to this, and even if the reference number of times is reached in the high probability state, the control may not be performed, and in the time saving state the reference number of times A configuration in which the control is not performed even if the control is performed may be adopted.

(36) In the seventh embodiment, when the value of the number-of-games counter of the main RAM 84 reaches the reference number of times, control is executed to prevent the display of the ready-to-win status in game rounds in which no jackpot result occurs only in that game round. However, it is not limited to this, and the ready-to-win display occurs in the game times in which the big win result does not occur over the specific number of game times (for example, 3 times) from the game time that is the reference number of times. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which control that does not perform is executed.

(37) In the seventh embodiment, every time the number of game rounds executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode reaches the reference number, control is executed so that the ready-to-win display does not occur in the game rounds in which no jackpot result occurs. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, and every time the number of game rounds executed after the opening/closing execution mode or the time saving state ends reaches the reference number, the reach display is displayed in the game rounds in which the jackpot results do not occur. Control that does not occur may be executed, and every time the number of game rounds executed after the end of the time saving state reaches the reference number, control is executed so that the reach display does not occur in game rounds in which the jackpot results do not occur. It may be configured to be

(38) In the eighth embodiment, even if either the time saving state triggered by the time saving result or the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving ends, the variable selection state counter 132 corresponds to the predetermined switching reference number of times. Information is set, and when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after subtracting 1 becomes "0", the reach high frequency state is set, but the variable selection state counter 132 is not limited to this. is executed when the time saving state triggered by the time saving result ends, but is not executed when the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving ends It may be configured so that it is executed when the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving ends, but is not executed when the time saving state triggered by the time saving result ends.

(39) In the ninth embodiment, if a time saving result or a ceiling time saving occurs in the time saving state, the remaining number of times of continuation in the current time saving state and the number of time saving continuations corresponding to the new time saving state are larger. Although the number of times is configured to be the remaining number of continuations in the subsequent time saving state, it is not limited to this, and the remaining number of continuations in the current time saving state and the number of time saving continuations corresponding to the new time saving state are smaller. The number of times on the side may be the remaining number of continuations in the subsequent time saving state, and regardless of the remaining number of continuations in the current time saving state, the number of time saving continuations corresponding to the new time saving state is the remaining number of times in the subsequent time saving state. It may be configured to be the number of continuations, and the number of times obtained by adding the number of continuations of time reduction corresponding to the new time reduction state to the remaining number of continuations in the current time reduction state is the remaining number of continuations in the subsequent time reduction state. good too.

(40) In the ninth embodiment, if a time saving result or a ceiling time saving occurs in the time saving state that is the first high-frequency support mode, the remaining number of times that the time saving state continues is the first time saving continuation number or the second time saving continuation number Although it can be set to the first high-frequency support mode, the time saving state continues, but it is not limited to this, and the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is the first time saving continuation number or the second time saving continuation It is good also as a structure which becomes a time saving state which is a 2nd high frequency support mode while being able to be set to the number of times.

(41) In each of the above-described embodiments, if the time saving result is selected in the success/failure determination process in a high probability state or the like and the time saving result is invalidated, the non-reach out symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 However, it is not limited to this, and the combination of out reach symbols may be stopped and displayed. Even in this case, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the time saving result is invalid from the stop result in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

(42) In each of the above-described embodiments, when a time saving result is selected in the success/failure determination process in a high probability state or the like and the time saving result is invalidated, the non-reach out symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 Although the combination of is stopped and displayed, it is not limited to this, and even if the time saving result is invalidated, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped in the same way as when the time saving result is not invalidated. As a result, the combination of the first time saving pattern or the combination of the second time saving pattern may be stop-displayed.

(43) In each of the above embodiments, if the time saving result is selected in the success or failure determination process in a high probability state etc. and the time saving result is invalidated, the first time saving result and the second time saving result , the display contents of the state suggesting area 43 of the pattern display device 41 are different, but it is not limited to this, and when the time saving result is invalidated, the first time saving result and the second time saving result The display contents of the state suggesting area 43 may be the same regardless of the result.

(44) In the tenth to twelfth embodiments, until the game round that triggered the value of the time saving state counter 134 to become "0" after subtracting 1 is over, the hold that triggered the start of the game round Although the time saving state does not end even if the game cycle triggered by the holding information on the side different from the information ends, it is not limited to this, and the time saving state counter 134 after subtracting 1 in the time saving state. If the specific game round that started before the start of the predetermined game round that triggered the value to become "0" continues, the specific game round will continue even if the predetermined game round ends. It is good also as a structure by which a time saving state is continued until it complete|finishes. If the predetermined game round is a game round triggered by the second hold information and the specific game round is a game round triggered by the first hold information, in the tenth embodiment or the twelfth embodiment, the When the long period on the special figure side is selected as the variable display period of the game round triggered by the 1 hold information, even after the predetermined game round triggered by the second hold information is completed. It is possible to repeatedly complete the game round triggered by the second hold information until the specific game round ends.

(45) In the tenth to twelfth embodiments, when the variable display period of the game round is determined by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuation in the game round triggered by the second hold information in the time saving state, Even if the result of the success/failure determination process of the game round is a time saving result, the variable display period is determined in the same manner as the game round of the losing result in which the ready-to-win display does not occur, but it is limited to this. However, when the variation display period of the game round is determined by referring to the table group for short-term variation in the game round triggered by the second reservation information, the result of the success/failure determination processing of the game round is time-saving. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the variable display period is determined in a manner different from that of a game round in which no ready-to-win display occurs in the case of a result. As a result, when a time saving result occurs in the time saving state, it is possible to set the determination mode of the variable display period of the game cycle to a mode corresponding to it.

(46) In the above-described first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments, as a result of the success/failure determination process of the main side MPU 82, there is a small winning result in addition to the big winning result, the time saving result and the losing result. may be The small winning result is a win/loss result that triggers a shift to the opening/closing execution mode but does not trigger a shift to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small winning result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once or twice in a short period of time (for example, 1 second). The number of game balls entered is about 1 to 3. Even if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the result of the small win, it is preferable not to set the number of ceiling times to the ceiling counter 131 and the number of times to the variable selection state counter 132. - 特許庁As a result, it is possible to generate the ceiling time reduction and reach high frequency state based on the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result.

(47) When the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 in the case of the time saving result in each of the above embodiments is set and not set when the second high frequency support mode is set with the time saving result as a trigger However, it is not limited to this, and the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the pattern display device 41 in the case of a time saving result is triggered by the time saving result. The configuration may be such that it does not change depending on whether it is set or not. For example, when the first time saving result is obtained, regardless of whether or not the second high-frequency support mode is set with the first time saving result as a trigger, blue is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43, and the second time saving When the result is obtained, green may be stop-displayed in the state suggestion region 43 regardless of whether or not the second high-frequency support mode is set with the second time saving result as a trigger.

(48) In the thirteenth embodiment, unused areas of the main RAM 84 (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) is protected, but the unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y (t+3) to address Y(t+5)) may not be protected. Even in this case, in the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), an unused area (address Y (r+3) to address Y(r+5)), the processing configuration for specifying the address range to be executed can be simplified. Become.

(49) In the thirteenth embodiment, the storage area to be cleared in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119) is the work area 213 for non-specific control. Instead, the storage areas to be cleared may be the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. In this case, an unused area (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) exists between the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the addresses of the main RAM 84. Therefore, before executing the clear processing, the protection is canceled by executing the protection cancellation processing similar to step S7501 of the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118) to clear the protect register 223c to "0". A series of addresses from addresses included in the work area 213 for non-specific control to addresses included in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, including unused areas (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) is specified to execute the clearing process, and after executing the clearing process, the protection setting process is executed in the same manner as in step S7506 of the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118) to set "1" to the protect register 223c. may be set again. As a result, in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when clearing not only the work area 213 for non-specific control but also the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Become.

(50) In the thirteenth embodiment, when the protection canceling process (step S7501) is executed in the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), the work area 211 for specific control and the Unused area (address Y (r+3) to address Y (r+5)) provided between the stack area 212 of the main side RAM 84, the stack area 212 for specific control and the work area for non-specific control at the address of the main side RAM 84 213 and unused areas (address Y (s+3) to address Y (s+5)), and a work area 213 for non-specific control and a stack area 214 for non-specific control at the address of the main side RAM 84 Although the protection is canceled for all unused areas (address Y (t + 3) to address Y (t + 5)) provided between and Protection is released for unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) included in the address range, but other unused areas (address Y(s+3) to address Y( s+5) and address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) may be configured so that protection is not released.

In this case, an unused area included in the address range to be cleared (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) and an unused area not included in the address range to be cleared ( Protect registers 223c are provided corresponding to addresses Y(s+3) to Y(s+5), addresses Y(t+3) to Y(t+5), respectively, and protect setting processing (step S4903) of the main processing (FIG. 81) Then, by setting "1" to all of these protect registers 223c, all unused areas (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5), address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y (t+3) to address Y (t+5)) is protected, and in the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118), in the protection cancellation processing (step S7501), an unused area (address Y) included in the address range to be cleared is cleared. The protect register 223c corresponding to (r+3) to address Y(r+5)) is cleared to "0" to release protection, while an unused area (address Y(s+3)) not included in the address range to be cleared is cleared. ) to address Y(s+5) and address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) may be configured so as not to release protection by not clearing to "0". In addition, in the protect setting process (step S7506) of the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) after the clear process is finished, the protect register 223c corresponding to the unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)) is set to " 1”, the protection is set again for the unused area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)). This eliminates the need to protect unused areas (address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5), address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) that are not included in the address range to be cleared. It is possible to prevent it from being released.

(51) In the thirteenth embodiment, in the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118), clear processing is executed for the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are not cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the clearing process for the work area 213 for control is also executed, or the clearing process for the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control is also executed. In a configuration in which the clearing process for the work area 213 for non-specific control is also executed, an unused space provided between the stack area 212 for specific control and the work area 213 for non-specific control at the address of the main RAM 84 area (address Y(s+3) to address Y(s+5)) is also included in the series of address ranges to be cleared. In addition, in a configuration in which the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are also cleared, the stack area 212 for specific control and the work area 214 for non-specific control are cleared at the address of the main RAM 84 . An unused area (address Y (s+3) to address Y (s+5)) provided between the area 213, and a work area 213 for non-specific control and a stack area for non-specific control at the address of the main side RAM 84 214 (address Y(t+3) to address Y(t+5)) are also included in the series of address ranges to be cleared.

(52) The setting display device 205 is provided in the thirteenth embodiment, and the setting values are displayed on the setting display device 205 in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the setting value update process (FIG. 83). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the setting display device 205 may not be provided, and the setting values may be displayed on the pattern display device 41 . Further, the setting values may be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

In the configuration in which the setting values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the setting value update process (FIG. 83), the first to fourth notification display devices The display devices 201 to 204 may alternately display the display of the set value and the display of the base value every predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). As a result, even if the setting values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 on which the base values are displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are confirmed. By doing so, it is possible to perform setting confirmation work or setting change work while confirming both the base value and the setting value.

In addition, in the configuration in which the setting values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, The setting values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the processing to be executed among the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 82) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 83) is The configuration may be such that the display of the set value is ended when the setting is ended. In this case, in a configuration in which the display of the base value is started before the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the setting value update process (FIG. 83) are started, the setting value The display of the base values of the types to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 immediately before the display of is started is resumed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It may be configured to be Further, when restarting, the display of the base value of the type to be restarted may be performed over the display continuation period regardless of the remaining display continuation period at the time when the display was stopped last time.

In addition, in the configuration in which the display of the base value is started before the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the setting value update process (FIG. 83) are started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 When the setting value is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to perform check display before or after the display. In this case, when the display of the set value ends and the display of the base value resumes, or when the display for check ends and the display of the base value resumes, immediately before the display for check or the display of the set value starts Alternatively, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to restart the display of the base values of the types to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . Further, when restarting, the display of the base value of the type to be restarted may be performed over the display continuation period regardless of the remaining display continuation period at the time when the display was stopped last time.

(53) In the thirteenth embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are configured to display the base value, but the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the following parameters may be calculated and displayed. The number of game balls entering the out port 24a is "K1", the number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 is "K2", and the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 is "K2". Let "K3" be the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33, "K4" be the number of game balls entering the second operating hole 34, and "K5" be the number of game balls entering the second operating hole 34.
・First parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 K2 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) The ratio of the total number of game balls K3 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) Third parameter: the total number of game balls K4 into the first operation port 33 / discharged from the game area PA Percentage of the total number of game balls (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) that have been played Fourth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 K5 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) · Fifth parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general The number of prize balls for winning to the winning opening 31" + K3 × "Number of prize balls for winning to the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Second operation opening 34 6th parameter: K3 x ``Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32''/Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x ``For winning to general winning port 31 "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”) ratio Seventh parameter: total number of game balls paid out in all gaming states (K2 x “number of prize balls for winning in general winning port 31” + K3 x “number of prize balls for winning in special electric winning device 32” + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of winning balls for winning to second operating port 34") / total number of game balls discharged from game area PA in all game states Percentage of (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5).

In the above configuration, for example, the first parameter is set as a notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and a plurality of first parameters at different timings are set to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At 204, the display may be sequentially switched every time a predetermined display continuation period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. In this case, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82 ), or in a situation where the set value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the first parameter may be sequentially switched and displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . In addition, when the display for checking is executed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the display for sequentially switching the first parameter is performed, after the display for checking is finished, the The display of the first parameter of the type to be displayed immediately before the start of the check display may be resumed, and the measurement of the predetermined display continuation period may be newly started at the time of the resumption. .

Further, for example, the first to seventh parameters are set as the notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the first to seventh parameters are set to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At 204, the display may be sequentially switched every time a predetermined display continuation period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. In this case, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82 ), or in a situation in which the set value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 may sequentially switch and display the first to seventh parameters. In addition, when the display for checking is executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the display for switching the first to seventh parameters is performed sequentially, after the display for checking is completed, may be configured to restart the display of the type of parameter that was to be displayed immediately before the start of the check display, or may be configured to newly start measuring the predetermined display duration at the time of the restart. .

(54) In the thirteenth embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 are provided in the main control device 71 mounted on the back of the game board 24. In order to confirm the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205, the game machine main body 12 is unlocked from the outer frame 11, and the game machine main body 12 is rotated forward of the pachinko machine 10. Although the configuration is necessary, it is not limited to this, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the setting display device 205 It may be configured to be provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10, or may be configured to have both the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the configuration in which at least one of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 is provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10, the display device provided on the front displays other information. It may be configured to be used also as a display device for displaying. For example, in the configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used in the opening and closing execution mode in addition to the base value. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of game balls to be paid out is displayed. Further, in a configuration in which the setting display device 205 is provided in front of the pachinko machine 10, the configuration may be such that the setting display device 205 displays a display corresponding to an abnormality of the pachinko machine 10 in addition to the set values.

Also, the configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 are provided on the front surface of the game machine may be applied to the slot machine. In this case, in addition to the base value, the number of virtual medals owned by the player and the number of game media given to the player when a minor winning combination is established are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. One of the numbers may be displayed, and the setting display device 205 may display the other of the number of virtual medals and the number of awarded game media in addition to the set value.

(55) In the thirteenth embodiment, after the check display ends, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is continued regardless of whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state or the open state, is configured to continue the display of the base value in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, but is not limited to this, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the first The configuration may be such that display of the base value is started on the display devices 201 to 204 for -fourth notification. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the type of information displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 immediately before the gaming machine main body 12 is closed last time is displayed. The display of the base value may be resumed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. In addition, at the time of this restart, regardless of the remaining display continuation period at the timing when the display of the base value of the restarted type was stopped last time, the display of the base value of the restarted type over the display continuation period is newly displayed. It is good also as a structure performed in.

(56) In the thirteenth embodiment, in the non-specific control process in the main side MPU 82, it is monitored whether the detection of the game ball by each detection sensor 231a to 238a is due to abnormality or fraud. and a process for monitoring whether or not magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor is executed, and a process corresponding to the monitoring result is executed in the specific control process in the main MPU 82. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a part of these monitoring processes is executed in the non-specific control process. In addition to or instead of these monitoring processes, in the non-specific control process, a process for monitoring whether or not the radio wave detection sensor has detected radio waves is executed, and in the specific control process A configuration may also be adopted in which a process corresponding to the monitoring result is executed by

(57) In the thirteenth embodiment, the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b for identifying whether or not the detection of the game ball in each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud, Of the monitoring delay timer counter 211c and the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the work area 211 for specific control, and the first Although the to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, all of the timer counters 211b, 211c, 213a to 213h may be provided in the work area 211 for specific control. It may be configured to be provided in the work area 213 .

(58) In the above 14th embodiment, in the entering ball detection process (FIG. 121), after executing the winning ball counter setting process (step S7801), various flag clearing processes (step S7802) are executed, and the various flags are cleared. After executing the process (step S7802), by executing the process (step S7803 to step S7818) for monitoring whether or not the game ball is detected by each detection sensor 231a to 238a, the first The processing for setting various winning ball counters according to the monitoring results of the respective detection sensors 231a to 238a in the ball entry detection processing (FIG. 121) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) is performed the following processing times with respect to the predetermined processing times. 120) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 120), but it is not limited to this. A process for monitoring whether or not a game ball is detected by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is executed, and a process for setting various prize ball counters according to the monitoring result is executed, and subsequent fraud detection. When it is specified in the execution process (step S7911) that the detection of game balls by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud, the value of the prize ball counter corresponding to the detection sensors 231a to 238a may be decremented by 1. In this case, the value of the predetermined prize ball counter is incremented by 1 in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121), and the value of the predetermined prize ball counter is "1" in the subsequent payout output process (step S7716). The value of the predetermined prize ball counter after the value of the predetermined prize ball counter is decremented by 1 and becomes "0" while the prize ball command corresponding thereto is output due to a certain event. When it is specified that the detection of the game ball that triggered the addition of 1 was caused by an abnormality or fraud, the value of the predetermined prize ball counter is decremented by 1 and becomes "-1". The predetermined prize ball counter that has become "-1" is incremented by 1 when it is newly specified that the game ball is detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the predetermined prize ball counter. becomes "0". Therefore, the payout of game balls executed based on the detection of game balls caused by an abnormality or fraud is compensated for by not executing the payout of game balls based on the subsequent detection of normal game balls.

(59) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, when it is specified that the detection of the game ball in the first operation opening detection sensor 235a is caused by an abnormality or fraud, the first Although both the storage in the special figure reservation area 111 and the payout of one game ball are not executed, the configuration is not limited to this, and only one of them may be executed. Further, the configuration may be applied to the processing when it is specified that the detection of the game ball by the second operation opening detection sensor 236a is caused by an abnormality or fraud.

(60) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, the special electric detection sensor 234a detects a game ball in relation to the period measured by the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b provided in the work area 211 for specific control. is identified as being caused by fraud, and in relation to the period measured by the fourth winning monitoring timer counter 213e provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the game in the special electric detection sensor 234a Although it is configured such that the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o is set to "1" in any case where it is specified that the detection of the ball is caused by an abnormality, it is not limited to this. A different abnormality flag may be set to "1" depending on the case, and the processing corresponding to the abnormality flag set to "1" may be executed. For example, when it is specified that the detection of the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a is caused by illegality, a predetermined abnormality flag is set to "1", and "1" is set to the predetermined abnormality flag. In this case, not only is the value of the 15 prize ball counter not incremented by 1, but also the game stop flag is set to "1" to prevent the execution of the process for advancing the game. When it is specified that the detection of the game ball by the detection sensor 234a is caused by an abnormality, the specific abnormality flag is set to "1", and the specific abnormality flag is set to "1". Although the value of the 15-ball counter is not incremented by 1, the game stop flag is not set to "1", thereby preventing the execution of the process for progressing the game. This makes it possible to execute processing corresponding to each.

(61) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, the relationship with the period measured by the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b or the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c provided in the work area 211 for specific control Monitoring of whether or not the detection of the game ball in the special electric detection sensor 234a or the second operation opening detection sensor 236a is due to illegality is executed in the processing of non-specific control, and the work area for non-specific control Monitoring whether the detection of game balls by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality in relation to the period measured by the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h provided in 213 is executed in non-specific control processing, but it is not limited to this, for example, the former monitoring is executed in non-specific control processing, and the latter monitoring is in specific control processing It may be configured to be executed.

(62) In the thirteenth embodiment, the commands stored in the command transmission buffer 223b are transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224 that operates without using a program. Instead, it may be configured to be transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 under control using a program. In this case, the control may be configured to be executed as specific control processing, or may be configured to be executed as non-specific control processing.

(63) In the thirteenth embodiment, commands transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 93 are stored in the command transmission buffer 223b. may be stored in the command transmission buffer 223b.

(64) In the thirteenth embodiment, when it becomes necessary to transmit a command to the sound and light side MPU 93 in specific control processing, the command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, and non-specific control processing is performed. , the command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b even when it becomes necessary to transmit a command to the sound and light side MPU 93, but the present invention is not limited to this. When it becomes necessary to transmit a command to the light side MPU 93, the command is stored in the work area 211 for specific control or the stack area 212 for specific control, and the command is sent to the sound and light side MPU 93 in non-specific control processing. may be stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control. In this case, the processing for transmitting the stored commands may be configured to be performed by the command transmission circuit 224, may be configured to be performed by specific control processing, or may be configured to be performed by non-specific control processing. may be

(65) In the thirteenth embodiment, the value of the second security counter 213k is added to the value of the first security counter 211a in the security processing (FIG. 101), and the value of the first security counter 211a after the addition corresponds to the value of the first security counter 211a. Although the number of security signals is externally output, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of security signals stored and corresponding to the total value stored in the register may be externally output.

(66) In the thirteenth embodiment, the processing for outputting the security signal is configured to be executed by specific control processing, but may be configured to be executed by non-specific control processing. In this case, the value of the first security counter 211a may be added to the value of the second security counter 213k, and the number of security signals corresponding to the value of the second security counter 213k after the addition may be externally output. In the non-specific control process, the total value of the first security counter 211a and the second security counter 213k is stored in the register of the main MPU 82, and the number corresponding to the total value stored in the register is security signal may be output to the outside.

(67) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, when non-specific control processing is started in a situation where specific control processing is being executed, the information in the flag register of the main side MPU 82 is is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and the information of other registers is saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control in processing of non-specific control, but it is not limited to this. , flag register information may be saved in the work area 211 for specific control, and information in other registers may be saved in the stack area 214 for non-specific control.

Further, both the information of the flag register and the information of other registers may be saved in the work area 211 for specific control or the stack area 212 for specific control in the process of specific control. In this case, when the non-specific control process ends and the specific control process is returned to, information is returned to the flag register and other registers in the specific control process.

In addition, both the flag register information and the other register information may be saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control in non-specific control processing. In this case, when returning to the specific control processing after the non-specific control processing is completed, information is returned to the flag register and other registers in the non-specific control processing.

(68) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, the operation in which the setting key insertion portion 195 is turned on and the reset button 196 is pressed is the setting change operation, and the setting key insertion portion 195 is turned on. The setting confirmation operation is the operation in which the reset button 196 is pressed and the reset button 196 is not pressed. However, the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are not limited to this. In a configuration that can be switched to the OFF position, the first position, and the second position by a key, the setting change operation is to switch the setting key insertion portion 195 to the first position by using the setting key. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which switching and arranging 195 to the second position by the setting key is the setting confirmation operation.

(69) Display control based on a command output from the main controller 71 instead of the configuration in which the display controller 101 is controlled by the sound emission control device 91 based on the command output from the main controller 71 The device 101 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 91 . Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 91 and the display control device 101 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be employed, and the function of one of these two control devices may be may be integrated in the main controller 71 , or both functions of both controllers may be integrated in the main controller 71 . Also, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 71 to the sound emission control device 91 and the configuration of the command output from the sound emission control device 91 to the display control device 101 are arbitrary.

(70) The device that executes the game round effect is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and is configured to execute the game round effect by operating a movable decorative member. Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which an effect for a game round is executed by lighting a predetermined light emitting unit, or a configuration may be employed in which an effect for a game round is executed by a combination of all or part of the above modes. good.

(71) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded upon entry, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mammoth ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reel is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on the effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the gaming machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. Game turn control means (first to eighth embodiments) for controlling game turn execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that game round operations are executed in game rounds Function to execute special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing and special figure confirmation processing of the main side MPU 82 in
In the game round, when it is specified that a predetermined start opportunity (time saving result, ceiling time saving) has occurred, a predetermined game state (low probability mode and second high frequency support mode time saving state) is started, and the Predetermined start processing that does not start the predetermined game state when it is specified that the predetermined start opportunity has not occurred (setting processing for time saving results or ceiling Subtraction processing of counter 131) Predetermined start execution means for executing (function for executing setting processing for time saving result of main side MPU 82 in 1st to 8th embodiments, main side MPU 82 in 1st to 8th embodiments a function of executing subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 of
In the game round, when it is specified that a predetermined termination opportunity (the value of the time saving state counter 134 after subtracting 1 becomes "0") has occurred, the predetermined game state is terminated, and the predetermined termination opportunity Executes a predetermined termination process that does not end the predetermined game state when it is specified that has not occurred (subtraction processing of the time saving state counter 134 executed by the main side MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) Predetermined end execution means (function for executing the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 of the main side MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments),
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined start processing is executed after the predetermined end processing is executed in one game cycle.

According to the feature A1, the predetermined game state is started when it is specified that the predetermined start opportunity has occurred in the predetermined start process, and it is specified that the predetermined end opportunity has occurred in the predetermined end process. Since the predetermined game state ends when the predetermined game state is reached, the player who expects the predetermined game state expects that the predetermined start opportunity occurs when the predetermined game state does not exist, and when the predetermined game state exists, the player expects the predetermined start opportunity to occur. expects that the predetermined termination trigger does not occur. In this case, the predetermined start processing is executed after the predetermined end processing is executed in one game round. As a result, when both the predetermined start opportunity and the predetermined end opportunity occur in one game round, the current predetermined game state is terminated by executing the predetermined end processing first in the game round. , the predetermined game state is restarted by executing the predetermined start processing later in the game round. Therefore, it is possible to continue the predetermined game state even in the game cycle in which the predetermined end opportunity has occurred. Further, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved by a simple configuration in which the execution order of the processes in one game round is the order in which the predetermined end process is executed and then the predetermined start process is executed.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined start executing means invalidates the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity in the predetermined game state.

According to the feature A2, since the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity is disabled in the predetermined game state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from being newly started in the middle of the predetermined game state. In this case, when both the predetermined start opportunity and the predetermined end opportunity occur in one game round, the current predetermined game state is terminated by executing the predetermined end processing first in the game round. Afterwards, the predetermined game state is restarted by executing the predetermined start processing later in the game round. As a result, in a configuration in which a new predetermined game state is not started in the middle of a predetermined game state, when both a predetermined start trigger and a predetermined end trigger occur in one game turn, the predetermined start is prevented. It is possible to create a situation where the occurrence of the opportunity is treated as valid and the predetermined game state continues for a long time.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein both the predetermined end processing and the predetermined start processing are executed after the game round operation of the game round executing means is completed in the game round.

According to the feature A3, both the predetermined end processing and the predetermined start processing are executed after the game-playing motion is completed. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the processing load. In addition, even with the configuration in which the processing load is distributed in this way, the configuration of the feature A1 is provided, and the predetermined start processing is executed after the predetermined end processing is executed in one game round. If both the predetermined start opportunity and the predetermined end opportunity occur in the game round, the predetermined end processing is executed first in the game round to end the current predetermined game state, and then the predetermined start occurs later in the game round. By executing the process, the predetermined game state is started again.

Feature A4. Predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of executions of the game round is provided,
The number of execution times of the game times measured by the predetermined measuring means is a predetermined trigger number (fixed ceiling number in the first to fourth, seventh and eighth embodiments, first ceiling number or second ceiling number in the fifth embodiment) The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the predetermined start opportunity is generated when the number of ceilings is 2, or the number of ceilings is fixed or the number of ceilings is special in the sixth embodiment.

According to the feature A4, in the configuration in which the predetermined game state occurs based on the execution of the predetermined number of game rounds, the configuration of the feature A1 is provided, and the predetermined end processing is executed in one game round. Since the predetermined start process is executed later, when both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in the game round, thereby the current predetermined game is played. After the state is ended, the predetermined game state is started again by executing the predetermined start processing in the game round. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that the predetermined game state will occur when the predetermined number of game rounds are executed.

Feature A5. Predetermined lottery means (main MPU 82 function to execute pending information acquisition processing and acceptance judgment processing),
The game round control means controls the game round execution means so as to produce an operation result corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined start opportunity is generated when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a predetermined lottery result (time saving result).

According to the feature A5, in the configuration in which the predetermined game state occurs based on the result of the predetermined lottery processing becoming the predetermined lottery result, the configuration of the feature A1 is provided, and the predetermined end processing is executed in one game round. Since the predetermined start process is executed after the game is started, if both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in the game round, thereby the current state is changed. After the predetermined game state is ended, the predetermined game state is restarted by executing the predetermined start processing later in the game round. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that the predetermined game state will occur when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result.

Feature A6. Equipped with specific measuring means (time saving state counter 134) that measures the number of times the game is executed in the predetermined game state,
Characteristic characterized in that the predetermined end opportunity is generated when the number of times the game times are executed as measured by the specific measuring means becomes a specific opportunity number (first number of continuous time-saving, second number of continuous time-saving) The game machine according to any one of A1 to A5.

According to feature A6, since the predetermined game state is terminated based on the number of times of execution of the game rounds executed in the predetermined game state becoming the number of specific trigger times, the trigger for ending the predetermined game state is clear to the player. becomes.

Feature A7. When both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the number of game rounds executed in the predetermined game state until the predetermined end processing is executed, and The total number of times of the game times executed in the predetermined game state after the predetermined start process is executed is set when the game state changes from the game state that is not the predetermined game state to the predetermined game state. The game machine according to feature A6, wherein the game state can be continued more times than the predetermined game state can be continued.

According to feature A7, when both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the configuration of feature A1 is provided, and the predetermined start is performed after the predetermined end processing is executed in one game round. Since the process is executed, when both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the current predetermined game state is terminated by executing the predetermined end processing first in the game round. After that, the predetermined game state is started again by executing the predetermined start processing later in the game round. When such an event occurs, the number of game rounds executed in the predetermined game state before the predetermined end processing is executed and the number of game rounds executed in the predetermined game state after the predetermined start processing is executed The total number of times with the number of times can be a number greater than the number of times that the predetermined game state can be continued, which is set when the game state that is not the predetermined game state changes to the predetermined game state. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of generating both the predetermined start opportunity and the predetermined end opportunity in one game round.

Feature A8. Predetermined ball entry means (second operation port 34 in first to fifth, seventh and eighth embodiments, special winning device 151 in sixth embodiment) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter and,
Acquisition means for acquiring special information (second reservation information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (in the first to fifth, seventh and eighth embodiments, the step in the main side MPU 82 A function of executing the processing of S709, a function of executing the processing of step S2806 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
Attachment determination means (function for executing the appropriateness determination processing of the main side MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment correspondence information (appropriateness determination processing); ,
Privilege for awarding a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the granting correspondence result (jackpot result) indicating that the special information corresponds to the granting correspondence information as a result of the granting determination. Giving means (function for executing special electric start processing, special electric open processing, special electric closed processing, and special electric end processing of the main side MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments);
A predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal/universal power control process of the main side MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) that can switch the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state ,
with
The game round control means determines that the game round operation is started and the game round operation is ended as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game round, and in each game round, the game round operation is terminated. It is intended to allow the reusable action to be performed,
The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein the predetermined game state is a game state in which the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another game state (normal game state).

According to feature A8, when the special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means which is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which a privilege is provided to the player, the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state in the predetermined game state than in the other game state. Therefore, the player expects to enter the predetermined game state and to continue the predetermined game state for a long time. In this case, since the configuration of the feature A1 is provided and the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round, both the predetermined start opportunity and the predetermined end opportunity are provided in one game round. occurs, the current predetermined game state is terminated by executing the predetermined end processing first in the game round, and then the predetermined game state is completed by executing the predetermined start processing later in the game round. is started again. Therefore, if a predetermined end opportunity occurs, the player expects that the predetermined start opportunity will occur in the game cycle in which the predetermined end opportunity occurs.

For the configuration of features A1 to A8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group A, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on a game ball entering a ball entering section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special game state. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special game state based on a game ball entering a part. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in this regard, since it is necessary to suitably execute processing for progressing the game.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. Game turn control means (first, fourth, fifth , the function of executing the special figure fluctuation start processing, the special figure fluctuation processing and the special figure determination processing of the main side MPU 82 in the seventh to ninth embodiments);
The specific game state (high probability state) is ended when it is specified that the specific end opportunity (the value of the high probability state counter 133 after subtracting 1 becomes "0") occurs in the game round. , a specific end process that does not end the specific game state when it is specified that the specific end opportunity has not occurred (in the main side MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments Specific end execution means (subtraction processing of the high-probability state counter 133 of the main side MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) function) and
In the game round, when it is specified that a predetermined start opportunity (time saving result, ceiling time saving) has occurred, a predetermined game state (low probability mode and second high frequency support mode time saving state) is started, and the Predetermined start processing that does not start the predetermined game state when it is specified that the predetermined start opportunity has not occurred (executed by the main side MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments Predetermined start executing means for executing time saving result setting processing or ceiling counter 131 subtraction processing) (main side MPU 82 in first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments Time saving result setting a function of executing processing, a function of executing subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 of the main side MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments);
with
Said predetermined start executing means, when said predetermined start processing is executed in said specific game state, is intended not to generate said predetermined start opportunity, or said predetermined start processing is executed in said specific game state In the event that the
A gaming machine characterized in that the specified end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game cycle.

According to feature B1, when it is specified that the specific end opportunity has occurred in the specific end process, the specific game state is terminated, and in the specific start process it is specified that the specific start opportunity has occurred. Since the predetermined game state is started when the player is in the predetermined game state, the player who expects to be in the specific game state expects that the specific end opportunity does not occur in the specific game state, and the player who expects to be in the predetermined game state. expects that a predetermined start opportunity occurs in a game state that is not a predetermined game state.

In this case, when the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state, the predetermined start opportunity does not occur, or when the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state, the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity is invalidated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring redundantly in the specific game state.

Further, since the specific end processing is executed after the predetermined start processing is executed in one game round, even in the game round in which the specific game state ends, if the predetermined start processing is executed in the specific game state. , the predetermined start opportunity does not occur, or if the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state, the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity is invalidated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in the game cycle started in the specific game state even if it is the last game cycle in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive profits from being given to the player. In addition, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved by a simple configuration in which the execution order of the processes in one game round is the order in which the specific end process is executed after the execution of the predetermined start process.

Feature B2. The game machine according to feature B1, wherein the specific game state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state.

According to the feature B2, since the specific game state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state, even if the configuration does not generate the predetermined game state in the game cycle executed in the specific game state, It is possible to prevent a large disadvantage from being given.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that both the specific end processing and the predetermined start processing are executed after the game round operation of the game round execution means is completed in the game round.

According to feature B3, both the specific end process and the predetermined start process are executed after the game-playing motion is completed, so that these processes progress the processing for starting the game-playing motion and the game-playing motion. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the processing load. In addition, even with the configuration in which the processing load is distributed in this way, the configuration of the feature B1 is provided, and when the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state, the predetermined start opportunity does not occur, or the predetermined start opportunity is not generated in the specific game state. In a configuration in which the occurrence of a predetermined start opportunity is invalidated when the start process is executed, since the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round, the player is provided with a profit. can be prevented from becoming excessive.

Feature B4. Predetermined lottery means (first, 4th, 5th, 7th to 9th embodiments of the main side MPU 82 hold information acquisition processing and propriety determination processing) provided,
The game round control means controls the game round execution means so as to produce an operation result corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process,
When the result of the predetermined lottery process is a predetermined lottery result (time saving result), the predetermined start opportunity is generated,
The predetermined start executing means, when the predetermined start processing is executed in the specific game state, invalidates the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity, characterized in that any one of features B1 to B3 The game machine described.

According to the feature B4, in the configuration in which the predetermined game state occurs based on the result of the predetermined lottery process becoming the predetermined lottery result, the configuration of the feature B1 is provided, and the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state. In the configuration in which the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity is invalidated in the case where the game is played, the specific end processing is executed after the predetermined start processing is executed in one game cycle, so that the profit given to the player becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Feature B5. Predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of executions of the game round is provided,
The predetermined start executing means, as the predetermined start processing, updates the number of times of execution of the game times measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game times are executed. , Step S1503 executed by the main MPU 82 in the fifth, seventh and eighth embodiments, Step S3703 executed by the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, and When the number of times of execution of the game round becomes a predetermined number of times (fixed number of times in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments), the predetermined game is generated as the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity Start execution processing for starting a state (step S1506 executed by the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh and eighth embodiments, and executed by the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) step S3705) is executed,
The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the number update process is not executed in the specific game state.

According to the feature B5, in the configuration in which the predetermined game state occurs based on the execution of the predetermined number of game rounds, in the specific game state, even if the game round is executed, it is not measured by the predetermined measuring means. The number update process for updating the number of times the game is played is not executed. As a result, in the specific game state, it is possible not only to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring, but also to prevent the execution of even the number of times updating process which brings the occurrence of the predetermined game state closer. In this case, since the configuration of the feature B1 is provided and the specific end processing is executed after the predetermined start processing is executed in one game round, even in the game round where the specific game state ends, the predetermined game state It is possible to prevent the execution of the number update process that brings the occurrence of

Feature B6. Acquisition means for acquiring special information (first hold information, second hold information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition opportunity (in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, the main side MPU 82 a function to execute the processes of steps S704 and S709);
Attachment determination means (main side MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) for determining whether the special information corresponds to the attachment correspondence information (appropriateness determination processing) a function to execute the validity judgment process);
Privilege for awarding a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the granting correspondence result (jackpot result) indicating that the special information corresponds to the granting correspondence information as a result of the granting determination. Giving means (function for executing special electric start processing, special electric open processing, special electric closed processing, and special electric end processing of the main side MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments);
with
The game round control means determines that the game round operation is started and the game round operation is ended as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game round, and in each game round, the game round operation is terminated. It is intended to allow the reusable action to be performed,
Any one of features B1 to B5, characterized in that the specific game state is a game state in which the result of the grant determination has a higher probability of becoming the grant correspondence result than in another game state (normal game state). game machine.

According to the feature B6, since the probability that the result of grant determination is the grant correspondence result increases in the specific game state, the specific game state is an advantageous game state for the player. In this case, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

Feature B7. Predetermined ball entry means (second operation port 34 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter,
Acquisition means (first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments main side a function of executing the process of step S709 in the MPU 82);
Attachment determination means (main side MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) for determining whether the special information corresponds to the attachment correspondence information (appropriateness determination processing) a function to execute the validity judgment process);
Privilege for awarding a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the granting correspondence result (jackpot result) indicating that the special information corresponds to the granting correspondence information as a result of the granting determination. Giving means (function for executing special electric start processing, special electric open processing, special electric closed processing, and special electric end processing of the main side MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments);
Predetermined ball entry control means capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state function to execute electronic control processing),
with
The game round control means determines that the game round operation is started and the game round operation is ended as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game round, and in each game round, the game round operation is terminated. It is intended to allow the reusable action to be performed,
The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the predetermined game state is a game state in which the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another game state (normal game state).

According to the feature B7, special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which a privilege is provided to the player, the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state in the predetermined game state than in the other game state. Therefore, the predetermined game state becomes an advantageous game state for the player. In this case, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

Feature B8. The game machine according to feature B7, wherein the specific game state is a game state in which the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than the predetermined game state.

According to feature B8, the specific game state is more advantageous than the predetermined game state in terms of the ease with which the predetermined ball-entering means is released. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large disadvantage from being given to the player even in a configuration in which the predetermined game state does not occur in the game cycle executed in the specific game state.

For the configuration of features B1 to B8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. Game turn control means (main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that controls the game turn execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that the game turn operation is executed in the game turn Function to execute special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing and special figure confirmation processing),
State storage means (start high accuracy flag of main side RAM 84) for storing game state information when the game round is started;
After the game cycle operation is completed, when it is specified that a predetermined start opportunity (time saving result, ceiling time saving) has occurred, a predetermined game state (low probability mode and second high frequency support mode Time saving state ), and when it is specified that the predetermined start opportunity has not occurred, a predetermined start process that does not start the predetermined game state (setting for time saving results executed by the main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment Processing or subtraction processing of ceiling counter 131) predetermined start execution means (function to execute setting processing for time saving result of main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, ceiling counter of main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment 131 subtraction function);
with
The predetermined start execution means executes the predetermined start processing in a situation where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means (a situation in which the start accuracy flag of the main side RAM 84 is set to "1"). , the game machine is characterized in that the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity is prevented or the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity is invalidated.

According to the feature C1, since the predetermined game state is started when it is specified that the predetermined start opportunity has occurred in the predetermined start process, the player expecting to be in the predetermined game state is in the predetermined game state. It is expected that a predetermined start opportunity will occur in a game state that is not. Further, since the predetermined start process is executed after the game-playing action is completed, the predetermined start process is executed in a situation where the process for starting the game-playing action and the process for advancing the game-playing action are not executed. It becomes possible to disperse the processing load.

In this case, when the predetermined start process is executed in the state where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity is prevented or the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity is disabled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring redundantly in the game state that triggers the storage of the specific state information. Further, the state storage means stores information on the game state when the game cycle is started. As a result, in the configuration in which the predetermined start process is executed after the action for the game round is completed, the game state when the game round is started is the game state that triggers the storage of the specific state information, and the predetermined Even if the end condition of the game state is satisfied before the start process is executed, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in the game round. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in the game cycle in which the profit of the game state, which is the trigger for storing the specific state information, is given, and the profit is not given to the player excessively. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature C2. The state storage means stores the specific state information when the game state when the game round is started is a specific game state (high probability state),
When the game machine identifies that a specific end trigger (the value of the high-probability state counter 133 becomes "0" after subtraction of 1) has occurred after the game-turning operation is completed. A specific end process (executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that does not end the specific game state (high probability state) and does not end the specific game state when it is specified that the specific end opportunity has not occurred specific end execution means (function for executing subtraction processing of the high-probability state counter 133 of the main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment) for executing the subtraction processing of the high-probability state counter 133). The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to the feature C2, since the specific game state is terminated when it is specified that the specific end opportunity has occurred in the specific end process, the player who expects to be in the specific game state is in the specific game state. It is expected that no specific termination trigger will occur in In addition, since the specific end process is executed after the game-playing action is completed, the specific end process is executed in a situation where the process for starting the game-playing action and the process for advancing the game-playing action are not executed. It becomes possible to disperse the processing load.

In this case, both the specific end process and the predetermined start process are executed after the game-playing action ends. Then, depending on the execution order of the specific end processing and the predetermined start processing, there is a possibility that the predetermined start processing is executed after the game state is changed to a game state that is not the specific game state even in the game round started in the specific game state. . On the other hand, in a game cycle that has the configuration of the feature C1 and is started in a specific game state, the specific state information is stored in the information storage means when the game cycle is started, and the specific state information is stored in the state storage means. When the predetermined start process is executed in the state where the information is stored, the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity is prevented or the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity is invalidated. Therefore, regardless of the execution order of the specific end processing and the predetermined start processing, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in a game cycle started in the specific game state.

Feature C3. The state storage means stores the specific state information when the game state when the game cycle is started is a specific game state (high probability state),
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the specific game state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state.

According to the feature C3, since the specific game state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state, even if it is a configuration in which the predetermined game state does not occur in the game cycle started in the specific game state, It is possible to prevent a large disadvantage from being given.

Feature C4. Acquisition means for acquiring special information (first reservation information, second reservation information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition opportunity (function of executing the processing of steps S704 and S709 in the main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment) and,
Attachment determination means (function for executing the appropriateness determination process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment correspondence information (appropriateness determination process);
Privilege for awarding a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the granting correspondence result (jackpot result) indicating that the special information corresponds to the granting correspondence information as a result of the determination of granting. Giving means (function for executing special electric start processing, special electric open processing, special electric closed processing, and special electric end processing of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment);
with
The game round control means determines that the game round operation is started and the game round operation is ended as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game round, and the game round is performed in each game round. It is intended to allow the reusable action to be performed,
The gaming machine according to feature C2 or C3, wherein the specific game state is a game state in which the result of the grant determination has a higher probability of becoming the grant correspondence result than in another game state (normal game state).

According to the feature C4, since the probability that the result of grant determination is the grant correspondence result increases in the specific game state, the specific game state is an advantageous game state for the player. In this case, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

Feature C5. Predetermined lottery means (holding information acquisition processing of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that executes the predetermined lottery processing (holding information acquisition processing and success/failure determination processing executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) and a function to execute the validity judgment process),
The game round control means controls the game round execution means so as to produce an operation result corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process,
When the result of the predetermined lottery process is a predetermined lottery result (time saving result), the predetermined start opportunity is generated,
The predetermined start execution means invalidates the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity when the predetermined start process is executed in a state where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4.

According to the feature C5, in the configuration in which the predetermined game state occurs based on the result of the predetermined lottery process becoming the predetermined lottery result, the configuration of the feature C1 is provided, and the game state when the game round is started. When the information is stored in the state storage means and the specific state information is stored in the state storage means, when the predetermined start processing is executed, the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity is invalidated, so that the game cycle is started. Even if the game state is the game state that triggers the storage of the specific state information in the case where the specific state information is stored and the end condition of the game state is satisfied before the predetermined start process is executed in the game round, the game round , it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined game state.

Feature C6. Predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of executions of the game round is provided,
The predetermined start execution means performs, as the predetermined start process, a number update process for updating the number of execution times of the game times measured by the predetermined measurement means when the game times are executed (second embodiment). Step S2103 executed by the main side MPU 82 in the above), and when the number of times of execution of the game times measured by the predetermined measuring means reaches a predetermined number of trigger times (fixed ceiling number of times in the second embodiment) A start execution process (step S2106 executed by the main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment) for starting the predetermined game state is executed as the occurrence of a predetermined start opportunity,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the number update process is not executed when the specific state information is stored in the state storage means.

According to the characteristic C6, in the configuration in which the predetermined game state occurs based on the execution of the predetermined number of game rounds, the game round is executed when the specific state information is stored in the state storage means. However, the number update process for updating the number of game times measured by the predetermined measuring means is not executed. Thus, in the game state that triggers the storage of the specific state information, it is possible not only to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring but also to prevent the execution of even the number of times updating process for approximating the occurrence of the predetermined game state. In this case, the configuration of the feature C1 is provided, and the game state information when the game round is started is stored in the state storage means, and the predetermined start is performed in the state where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means. When the process is executed, the number of times update process for updating the number of game times measured by the predetermined measuring means is not executed, so the game state that triggers the storage of the specific state information ends. Even if it is a time, it is possible to prevent the execution of the number update process that brings the occurrence of the predetermined game state closer.

Feature C7. Predetermined ball entry means (second operation port 34 in the second embodiment) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
Acquisition means (in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S709 in the main side MPU 82) for acquiring special information (second reservation information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means; ,
Attachment determination means (function for executing the appropriateness determination process of the main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that performs attachment determination (appropriateness determination processing) as to whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment correspondence information;
Privilege for awarding a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the granting correspondence result (jackpot result) indicating that the special information corresponds to the granting correspondence information as a result of the granting determination. Giving means (function for executing special electric start processing, special electric open processing, special electric closed processing, and special electric end processing of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment);
a predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal/universal electric power control process of the main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state;
with
The game round control means sets a state in which the game round operation is started and the game round operation is ended as a state corresponding to the judgment result of the grant judgment as one game round, and in each game round, the above-mentioned It is intended to allow the action for game play to be performed,
The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the predetermined game state is a game state in which the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another game state (normal game state).

According to the feature C7, when the special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means which is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which a privilege is provided to the player, the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state in the predetermined game state than in the other game state. Therefore, the predetermined game state becomes an advantageous game state for the player. In this case, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

Feature C8. The state storage means stores the specific state information when the game state when the game cycle is started is a specific game state (high probability state),
The game machine according to feature C7, wherein the specific game state is a game state in which the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than the predetermined game state.

According to the feature C8, the specific game state is more advantageous than the predetermined game state in terms of the ease with which the predetermined ball-entering means is released. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large disadvantage from being given to the player even in a configuration in which the predetermined game state does not occur in the game cycle executed in the specific game state.

For the configuration of features C1 to C8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the characteristic group B and the characteristic group C, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special game state. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special game state based on a game ball entering a part. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to favorably award profits to players, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Game turn control means (main side in the third embodiment) that controls the game turn execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that the game round operation is executed in the game round Function of executing special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing and special figure determination processing of MPU 82),
A specific lottery that executes a specific end lottery process (falling determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) that determines whether to end the specific game state in the specific game state (high probability state) means (function for executing fall determination processing of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment);
Predetermined lottery means (holding information acquisition processing of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) that executes the predetermined lottery processing (holding information acquisition processing and success/failure determination processing executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) and a function to execute the propriety judgment process);
Based on the fact that the result of the predetermined lottery process has become a predetermined lottery result (time saving result), a predetermined privilege granting means (main in the third embodiment) that grants a predetermined privilege (second high frequency support mode) to the player A function of executing the setting process for the time saving result of the side MPU 82);
with
The gaming machine, wherein the specific lottery means executes the specific end lottery process before the predetermined lottery process is executed in one game cycle.

According to the feature D1, when a lottery result to end the specific game state is obtained in the specific end lottery process, the specific game state is terminated, and a predetermined privilege is played based on the predetermined lottery result in the predetermined lottery process. Therefore, the player who expects to be in the specific game state expects that the specific end lottery process in the specific game state will not result in a lottery result that ends the specific game state, and the predetermined benefits are given. A player who expects a lottery expects a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery process. In this case, the specific end lottery process is executed before the predetermined lottery process is executed in one game round. Thereby, when the lottery result of the specific end lottery process ends the specific game state in the game round in the specific game state, the predetermined lottery process is executed after the lottery result ends the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to execute the predetermined lottery process in the game round in which the specific game state ends in the situation where the specific game state ends. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform the lottery process.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the predetermined lottery means varies the execution mode of the predetermined lottery process depending on whether the game is in the specific game state.

According to feature D2, since the execution mode of the predetermined lottery process differs depending on whether or not it is in the specific game state, the player pays attention to the game state at the timing when the predetermined lottery process is executed. In this case, with the configuration of the feature D1, when the lottery result of the specific end lottery process in the game round in the specific game state is the lottery result to end the specific game state, the lottery result to end the specific game state. Since the predetermined lottery process is executed after the specified game state is completed, the predetermined lottery process is executed in the state where the specific game state is completed. Therefore, in the predetermined lottery process, it is possible to handle a game round in which the specific game state ends as a game round that is not in the specific game state.

Feature D3. Specific end processing (step S2208 executed by the main side MPU 82 in the third embodiment) to end the specific game state based on the result of the specific end lottery processing becoming the end result (fall result) means for executing the (function for executing the processing of step S2208 of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment),
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein when the result of the specific end lottery process is the end result, the specific end process is executed before the predetermined lottery process is executed.

According to the feature D3, when the result of the specific end lottery process is the end result in the game round in the specific game state, the specific game state can be terminated before the predetermined lottery process is executed in the game round. It becomes possible.

Feature D4. Variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided in a game area where game balls flow down and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is set to the open state (special electric start processing, special electric open processing and special electric function to execute closing process) and
Special transition means (second 3 function of executing the special electric start processing of the main side MPU 82 in the embodiment);
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D4, in a configuration in which a special game state occurs in which variable ball entry control is executed for the variable ball entry means based on the result of the predetermined lottery process being the result of the special lottery, the result of the predetermined lottery process is A predetermined privilege is given based on the result of the predetermined lottery. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not to provide a predetermined privilege by using the configuration of the predetermined lottery process for determining whether or not to generate the special game state.

Feature D5. The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the specific game state is a game state in which the result of the predetermined lottery process has a higher probability of becoming the special lottery result than in another game state (normal game state).

According to feature D5, since the probability of occurrence of the special game state increases in the specific game state, the specific game state is an advantageous game state for the player. In this case, the configuration of the feature D1 is provided, and the predetermined lottery process is executed after the specific game state ends in the game round in which the result of the specific lottery process ends the specific game state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence frequency of game rounds in which the predetermined lottery process is executed in the specific game state.

Feature D6. Specific updating means (type random number counter C2) for updating numerical information;
When the result of the predetermined lottery process is the special lottery result, the special type lottery process (executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) is performed using the numerical information updated by the specific update means. The processing of step S2211) is executed to determine the type of privilege (open/close execution mode, lottery mode and support mode) that can be given to the player (the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment of step S2211). function to perform processing) and
When the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined lottery result, the predetermined type lottery process (executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) is performed using the numerical information updated by the specific updating means. (processing of step S2217) for determining the type of the predetermined privilege that can be granted to the player (function of executing the processing of step S2217 of the main side MPU 82 in the third embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature D4 or D5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D6, when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the result of the special lottery, the privilege of the type selected by the special lottery process is granted, so it is possible to diversify the mode of granting the privilege. becomes. In addition, when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined lottery result, the predetermined privilege of the type selected by the predetermined type lottery process is granted, so that it is possible to diversify the provision mode of the predetermined privilege. . In this case, in the configuration in which the numerical information of the specific update means is used in the special kind lottery process, the numerical information of the specific update means is also used in the predetermined kind lottery process. Thus, it is possible to determine the type of the prescribed privilege to be given when the predetermined lottery result is obtained by using the configuration for deciding the kind of privilege to be given when the special lottery result is obtained.

Feature D7. Any of the characteristics D1 to D6, wherein the predetermined privilege providing means does not provide the predetermined privilege even if the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined lottery result in the situation of the specific game state. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the characteristic D7, even if the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result in the situation of the specific game state, the predetermined privilege is not given, so that the predetermined privilege is not given excessively. It becomes possible. In this case, with the configuration of the feature D1, when the lottery result of the specific end lottery process in the game round in the specific game state is the lottery result to end the specific game state, the lottery result to end the specific game state. Since the predetermined lottery process is executed after the specified game state is completed, the predetermined lottery process is executed in the state where the specific game state is completed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a predetermined privilege in the game cycle in which the specific game state ends.

Feature D8. Predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
Acquisition means (function of executing step S709 of main side MPU 82 in the third embodiment) for acquiring special information (second reservation information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means; ,
a predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal/universal electric power control process of the main side MPU 82 in the third embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state;
with
The predetermined lottery means executes the predetermined lottery process based on the acquisition of the special information,
The predetermined privilege granting means changes the game state to a predetermined game state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another game state (normal game state) as the provision of the predetermined privilege. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that transition is made.

According to feature D8, the special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the predetermined lottery process is executed by acquiring the special information. In this configuration, the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state in the predetermined game state than in the separate game state. Therefore, the player expects to enter the predetermined game state and to continue the predetermined game state for a long time. In this case, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features D1 to D8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group D, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special game state. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special game state based on a game ball entering a part. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, the lottery process must be favorably executed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Game turn control means (first to twelfth embodiments) for controlling game turn execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that game round operations are executed in game rounds Function to execute special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing and special figure confirmation processing of the main side MPU 82 in
Predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed;
Number updating means for updating the number of execution times of the game rounds measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game rounds are executed (in the first, third to eighth embodiments, step S1503 in the main side MPU 82 a function of executing the processing of step S2103 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment; a function of executing the processing of step S3703 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment; In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4503 in the main MPU 82);
The execution count of the game times measured by the predetermined measuring means is a predetermined trigger count (fixed ceiling count in the first to fourth and sixth to twelfth embodiments, first ceiling count in the fifth embodiment, or 2nd peak number of times), a predetermined privilege granting means (in the first, third to eighth embodiments, the processing of step S1506 in the main MPU 82 is executed) to grant a predetermined privilege (second high-frequency support mode) in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2106 in the main MPU 82; in the ninth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3705 in the main MPU 82; in the tenth to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing the process of step S4505 in the main side MPU 82);
When it is specified that an information abnormality has occurred in the predetermined storage means (main side RAM 84) when the supply of operating power is started, abnormality handling processing (first to third, sixth to twelfth embodiments Then, step S121 executed by the main MPU 82, step S2421 executed by the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and step S2621 executed by the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment. Corresponding means (the function of executing the processing of step S121 in the main MPU 82 in the first to third and sixth to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S2421 in the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2621 in the main MPU 82);
Based on the occurrence of the information abnormality, the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a predetermined initial value ("500" in the first to fourth and sixth to twelfth embodiments, "800" in the fifth embodiment). ”) (step S122 executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to third and sixth to twelfth embodiments, and executed by the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment). (step S2506 in the fifth embodiment, step S2622 executed in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment) (step S122 in the main MPU 82 in the first to third and sixth to twelfth embodiments) a function of executing processing, a function of executing the processing of step S2506 in the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2622 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, when the number of times the game is executed as measured by the predetermined measuring means reaches the predetermined number of trigger times, the predetermined privilege is given. It is possible to provide a predetermined privilege. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started and an information abnormality occurs in the predetermined storage means, the abnormality handling process is executed, so that it is possible to deal with the occurrence of the information abnormality. In this case, the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes the predetermined initial value based on the occurrence of the information abnormality. If an information abnormality occurs, the information in the predetermined measurement means may also be abnormal information. It is possible to prevent the game from being started while the information of the means is abnormal.

Feature E2. Means for executing profit giving processing (win-or-fail judgment processing) in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as an object to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (win-or-fail judgment in the main MPU 82 function to perform processing) and
When the supply of operating power is started, a settable state in which the setting value to be used can be changed based on the fact that a predetermined related operation (setting change operation) has been performed (setting value update processing is performed) status generating means (in the first to third and sixth to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S117 in the main MPU 82; in the fifth embodiment, the main side A function of executing the processing of step S2617 in the MPU 82);
with
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process in the settable state.

According to the feature E2, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the set value that is more advantageous to the player is used. It is expected that In this case, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the predetermined initial value in the settable state, even if the settable state occurs, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be maintained at the information before the supply of the operating power was stopped. It becomes possible. In this configuration, the configuration of the feature E1 is provided, and the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value based on the occurrence of information abnormality, so that the game is started while the information of the predetermined measuring means is abnormal information. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Feature E3. The anomaly handling means stores anomaly handling information (information of "1") in an anomaly handling storage area (game stop flag of the main side RAM 84) in the anomaly handling process,
In the game machine, means for initializing the anomaly handling storage area when the settable situation occurs A gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized by comprising a function of executing RAM clearing.

According to feature E3, in a configuration where it is necessary to generate a settable state in order to erase the stored anomaly handling information based on the occurrence of an information anomaly, the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a predetermined value in the settable state. does not become the initial value of , but the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes the predetermined initial value when the abnormality handling information is stored. As a result, in a settable state, it is sufficient to initialize the anomaly-handling storage area regardless of whether or not anomaly-handling information is stored. There is no need to differentiate the contents. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the settable state.

Feature E4. The anomaly handling means stores anomaly handling information (information of "1") in an anomaly handling storage area (game stop flag of the main side RAM 84) in the anomaly handling process,
This game machine is
Means for executing profit giving processing (win-or-fail judgment processing) in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as an object to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (win-or-fail judgment in the main MPU 82 function to perform processing) and
When the supply of operating power is started, a settable state in which the setting value to be used can be changed based on the fact that a predetermined related operation (setting change operation) has been performed (setting value update processing is performed) a situation generating means (a function of executing the process of step S2417 of the main side MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment) that causes the situation to be executed);
means for initializing the anomaly handling storage area when the settable situation occurs (function for executing the processing of steps S2504 and S2505 of the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment);
with
The predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process when the settable situation occurs in a situation where the abnormality handling information is not stored, and does not execute the predetermined setting process when the abnormality handling information is stored. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the predetermined setting process is executed when a setting possible situation occurs.

According to the feature E4, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the set value that is more advantageous to the player is used. It is expected that Also, in order to erase the stored abnormality handling information based on the occurrence of an information abnormality, it is necessary to generate a configurable state. In this case, if a settable situation occurs in a situation in which no abnormality handling information is stored, the information of the predetermined measuring means does not become a prescribed initial value, and the setting is made in a situation in which the abnormality handling information is stored. When the possible situation occurs, the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes the predetermined initial value. As a result, when a settable situation occurs, the information of the predetermined measuring means is basically prevented from becoming a predetermined initial value. It is possible to set the information of the predetermined measuring means to a predetermined initial value.

Feature E5. Means (first through first 3. In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S119 in the main MPU 82; in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2419 in the main MPU 82; function to execute the process of step S2619 in the side MPU 82),
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measurement means is not initialized,
The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process even if the initialization process is executed.

According to the feature E5, in the configuration in which predetermined information is initialized in the predetermined storage means based on the fact that the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the initialization process is performed. Even if the conversion process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the predetermined initial value. As a result, even if the initialization processing is executed, it is possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measuring means as the information before the supply of the operating power was stopped. In this configuration, the configuration of the feature E1 is provided, and the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value based on the occurrence of information abnormality, so that the game is started while the information of the predetermined measuring means is abnormal information. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Feature E6. Means for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player (function for executing the special electric start processing of the main side MPU 82 in the first to fourth and sixth to twelfth embodiments);
Means (in the first, fourth, eighth and ninth embodiments, the step in the main side MPU 82 The function of executing the process of S1005, the function of executing the process of step S1905 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2305 in the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment, and the sixth embodiment. In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3109 in the main MPU 82; in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3305 in the main MPU 82; function to perform processing) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E6, in the configuration in which the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value with the transition to the special game state as a trigger, even if the information abnormality occurs when the supply of the operating power is started The information of the predetermined measuring means becomes the predetermined initial value. As a result, the execution number of game rounds necessary for awarding the predetermined privilege when an information abnormality occurs, and the execution number of game rounds necessary for awarding the predetermined privilege after the occurrence of the special game state are determined. It is possible to make it the same as the number of times.

Feature E7. Equipped with means for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening and closing execution mode) advantageous to the player (function for executing special electric start processing in the main side MPU 82),
The predetermined privilege granting means specifies, based on the information measured by the predetermined measuring means, that the number of executions of the game times executed after the end of the special game state is the predetermined number of trigger times. If you do, the predetermined privilege is granted,
the number of executions of the game rounds ("800" in the fifth embodiment) required until it is specified that the number of executions of the game rounds has reached the predetermined trigger number after the predetermined setting process is executed; After the special game state ends, the number of executions of the game rounds ("500" in the fifth embodiment) required until it is specified that the number of executions of the game rounds has reached the predetermined number of times is different. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that

According to feature E7, in a configuration in which a predetermined benefit is awarded when the number of game rounds executed after the occurrence of the special game state reaches the predetermined number of trigger times, the number of game rounds executed after the information abnormality occurs. The number of game rounds required until it is specified that the number of times has reached the predetermined number of opportunities different from the number of executions. As a result, the number of game rounds necessary to award the predetermined privilege can be made different between after the special game state ends and after the information abnormality occurs.

Feature E8. After the predetermined setting process is executed, the number of executions of the game rounds required until it is specified that the number of executions of the game rounds has reached the predetermined number of trigger times is greater than the number of executions of the game rounds after the special game state ends. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the number of executions of the game is greater than the number of executions of the game necessary until it is specified that the predetermined number of triggers has been reached.

According to the feature E8, the number of game rounds necessary to specify that the number of game rounds has reached the predetermined trigger number after the occurrence of the information abnormality is greater than the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state. If the number of times of execution is greater than the number of times of execution of game times required until it is specified that the number of times of execution has reached the predetermined number of triggers, then when an act of illegally causing an information abnormality is performed, a predetermined benefit will be given. It is possible to increase the number of executions of game rounds required until the award is given.

Feature E9. Predetermined ball entry means (first to fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, second actuation port 34, sixth, tenth to twelfth embodiments Then, the special winning device 151) and
Acquisition means for acquiring special information (second reservation information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (in the first to fifth and seventh to ninth embodiments, the step in the main side MPU 82 a function of executing the process of S709, a function of executing the process of step S2806 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S3901 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments); ,
Attachment determination means (function for executing the appropriateness determination processing of the main side MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment correspondence information (appropriateness determination processing); ,
Privilege for awarding a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the granting correspondence result (jackpot result) indicating that the special information corresponds to the granting correspondence information as a result of the granting determination. Giving means (function for executing special electric start processing, special electric open processing, special electric closed processing, and special electric end processing of the main side MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments);
A predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal/universal power control process of the main side MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) that can switch the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state ,
with
The game round control means sets a state in which the game round operation is started and the game round operation is ended as a state corresponding to the judgment result of the grant judgment as one game round, and in each game round, the above-mentioned It is intended to allow the action for game play to be performed,
The predetermined privilege granting means changes the game state to a predetermined game state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another game state (normal game state). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that transition is made.

According to feature E9, special information is acquired based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entry means that is switched between a closed state and an open state, and the special information corresponds to grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which a privilege is provided to the player, the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state in the predetermined game state than in the other game state. Therefore, the predetermined game state becomes an advantageous game state for the player. In this case, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features E1 to E9, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group E, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special game state. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special game state based on a game ball entering a part. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary that the game be played favorably, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Game turn control means (first to fifth, seventh ~ A function to execute special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing and special figure determination processing of the main side MPU 82 in the 12th embodiment);
Predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed;
Number of times updating means for updating the number of execution times of the game times measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game times are executed (in the first, third to fifth, seventh and eighth embodiments, A function of executing the processing of step S1503 in the main MPU 82, a function of executing the processing of step S2103 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S3703 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment. , in the tenth to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S4503 in the main MPU 82);
The execution count of the game times measured by the predetermined measuring means is a predetermined trigger count (fixed ceiling count in the first to fourth and seventh to twelfth embodiments, first ceiling count in the fifth embodiment, or 2nd peak number of times) to give a predetermined privilege (second high frequency support mode) (in the first, third to fifth, seventh and eighth embodiments, the main MPU The function of executing the process of step S1506, the function of executing the process of step S2106 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3705 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, the tenth to In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4505 in the main MPU 82);
Special transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player (function of executing special electric start processing of the main side MPU 82 in the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments) and,
Predetermined setting processing ( The process of step S1005 executed by the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, eighth, and ninth embodiments, the process of step S1905 executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, The process of step S2305 executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment, the process of step S3305 executed by the main MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment, and the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments The processing of step S4208 executed in ) is executed by the predetermined setting means (in the first, fourth, fifth, eighth, and ninth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1005 in the main MPU 82, the second The function of executing the processing of step S1905 in the main MPU 82 in the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2305 in the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment, and the processing of step S3305 in the main MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment. , in the tenth to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S4208 in the main side MPU 82);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F1, when the number of execution times of the game rounds measured by the predetermined measuring means reaches the predetermined number of trigger times, the predetermined benefit is provided. It is possible to provide a predetermined privilege. Further, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value with the special game state as a trigger, when the number of times of execution of the game rounds executed after the end of the special game state reaches the predetermined number of times, the predetermined privilege is obtained. It is possible to make it be granted. In this case, when the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value triggered by the special game state, the specific initial value is set when the special game state is started. As a result, after obtaining a certain amount of profit in the special game state and before the special game state ends, the supply of the operating power is stopped and the supply of the operating power is restarted, whereby the information of the predetermined measuring means is obtained. Even if a fraudulent act that forcibly terminates the special game state while maintaining it is performed, the information of the maintained predetermined measuring means is a specific initial value set when the special game state is started. becomes. Therefore, it becomes possible to neutralize the fraudulent act as described above.

Feature F2. Means for executing profit giving processing (win-or-fail judgment processing) in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as an object to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (win-or-fail judgment in the main MPU 82 function to perform processing) and
When the supply of operating power is started, a settable state in which the setting value to be used can be changed based on the fact that a predetermined related operation (setting change operation) has been performed (setting value update processing is performed) status generating means (in the first to third and seventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S117 in the main MPU 82; in the fourth embodiment, the main side A function of executing the process of step S2417 in the MPU 82, a function of executing the process of step S2617 in the main side MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment);
with
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process in the settable state.

According to the feature F2, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the set value that is more advantageous to the player is used. It is expected that In this case, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value in the settable state, even if the settable state occurs, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be maintained at the information before the supply of operating power was stopped. It becomes possible. In the configuration, the configuration of the feature F1 is provided, and the specific initial value is set when the special game state is started. As a result, after obtaining a certain amount of profit in the special game state and before the special game state ends, the supply of the operating power is stopped and the supply of the operating power is restarted, whereby the information of the predetermined measuring means is obtained. Even if a fraudulent act that forcibly terminates the special game state while maintaining it is performed, the information of the maintained predetermined measuring means is a specific initial value set when the special game state is started. becomes. Therefore, it becomes possible to neutralize the fraudulent act as described above.

Feature F3. Means ( In the first to third and seventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S119 in the main MPU 82, in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2419 in the main MPU 82, the fifth In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2619 in the main side MPU 82) is provided,
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measurement means is not initialized,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process even if the initialization process is executed.

According to the feature F3, in the configuration in which predetermined information is initialized in the predetermined storage means based on the fact that the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the initialization process is performed. Even if the conversion process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value. As a result, even if the initialization processing is executed, it is possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measuring means as the information before the supply of the operating power was stopped. In the configuration, the configuration of the feature F1 is provided, and the specific initial value is set when the special game state is started. As a result, after obtaining a certain amount of profit in the special game state and before the special game state ends, the supply of the operating power is stopped and the supply of the operating power is restarted, whereby the information of the predetermined measuring means is obtained. Even if a fraudulent act that forcibly terminates the special game state while maintaining it is performed, the information of the maintained predetermined measuring means is a specific initial value set when the special game state is started. becomes. Therefore, it becomes possible to neutralize the fraudulent act as described above.

Feature F4. Means (1st to 5th, a function of executing the propriety determination process of the main MPU 82 in the seventh to twelfth embodiments;
When the supply of operating power is started, a settable state in which the setting value to be used can be changed based on the fact that a predetermined related operation (setting change operation) has been performed (setting value update processing is performed) status generating means (in the first to third and seventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S117 in the main MPU 82; in the fourth embodiment, the main side A function of executing the process of step S2417 in the MPU 82, a function of executing the process of step S2617 in the main side MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment);
with
The predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process even if the initialization process is executed, and does not execute the predetermined setting process in the settable state, and the supply of operating power is started. (In the first to third and seventh to twelfth embodiments, the situation in which the main MPU 82 makes an affirmative determination in step S113 , in the fourth embodiment, the main MPU 82 makes an affirmative determination in step S2413, and in the fifth embodiment, the main MPU 82 makes an affirmative determination in step S2613. The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized by: executing.

According to the feature F4, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the set value that is more advantageous to the player is used. It is expected that In this case, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value, and the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value in the settable state. is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be maintained at the information before the supply of operating power is stopped. It is possible to maintain the information before the stop. In this case, the information of the predetermined measurement means is set to a specific initial value in a predetermined situation in which neither the specific related operation nor the predetermined related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started. As a result, in a configuration in which the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value even if the initialization process is executed and the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value in the settable state, the operating power is supplied. is started, it is possible to set the information of the predetermined measuring means to a specific initial value.

Feature F5. Variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided in a game area where game balls flow down and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is set to the open state function to execute start processing, special electric open processing and special electric closed processing);
with
The special transition means shifts the game state to the special game state after the game round in which the action result of the game round action is a special result (stop result corresponding to the jackpot result) is completed,
A configuration in which the variable ball entry control is executed in the special game state,
The predetermined setting means executes the predetermined setting process after the operation result of the game-turn operation becomes the special result and before the variable ball entry control is started in the special game state. A gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features F1 to F4.

According to the feature F5, the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value after the action result of the game-turn action becomes a special result and before the variable ball entry control is started in the special game state. It becomes possible to

Feature F6. Predetermined ball entry means (second actuation port 34 in the first to fifth and seventh to ninth embodiments, special winning in the tenth to twelfth embodiments a device 151);
Acquisition means for acquiring special information (second reservation information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (in the first to fifth and seventh to ninth embodiments, the step in the main side MPU 82 A function of executing the processing of S709, a function of executing the processing of step S3901 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments);
Applicability determination means (property determination processing of the main side MPU 82 in the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the provision correspondence information (property determination processing) function) and
Predetermined ball entry control means capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state (first to fifth, seventh to twelfth embodiments) function) and
with
The game round control means sets a state in which the game round operation is started and the game round operation is ended as a state corresponding to the judgment result of the grant judgment as one game round, and in each game round, the above-mentioned It is intended to allow the action for game play to be performed,
The predetermined privilege granting means changes the game state to a predetermined game state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another game state (normal game state). The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that transition is made.

According to the feature F6, special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which a privilege is provided to the player, the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state in the predetermined game state than in the other game state. Therefore, the predetermined game state becomes an advantageous game state for the player. In this case, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features F1 to F6, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group F, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special game state. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special game state based on a game ball entering a part. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that games are played appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. Game turn control means (main side in the sixth embodiment) that controls the game turn execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that the game round operation is executed in the game round Function of executing special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing and special figure determination processing of MPU 82),
Predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed;
Number of times updating means for updating the number of times of execution of the game times measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game times are executed (function of executing the processing of step S1503 of the main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment )and,
When the number of executions of the game times measured by the predetermined measuring means reaches a predetermined trigger number (fixed ceiling number or special ceiling number in the sixth embodiment), a predetermined privilege (second high frequency support mode) a predetermined privilege granting means to grant (a function of executing the processing of step S1506 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
special transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player (function for executing the special electric start processing of the main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
Predetermined setting processing (main side MPU 82 the processing of step S3109) (the function of executing the processing of step S3109 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G1, when the number of times of execution of the game rounds measured by the predetermined measuring means reaches the predetermined number of trigger times, the predetermined benefit is provided. It is possible to provide a predetermined privilege. Further, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value with the special game state as a trigger, when the number of times of execution of the game rounds executed after the end of the special game state reaches the predetermined number of times, the predetermined privilege is obtained. It is possible to make it be granted. In this case, when the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value triggered by the special game state, the specific initial value is set when the special game state ends. As a result, even in a configuration in which there are a plurality of patterns of game situations immediately before transitioning to the special game state, the process of setting a specific initial value to the predetermined measuring means triggered by the special game state is performed when the special game state ends. It becomes possible to aggregate as processing. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature G2. The special transition means is
Means for shifting the game state to the special game state when the game round ends (function for executing the processing of steps S3002 to S3005 of the main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
Means for shifting the game state to the special game state when an event different from the end of the game round occurs (function for executing distribution processing of the main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G2, there are cases where the game state is shifted to the special game state after the game round ends, and where the game state is changed to the special game state when an event different from the end of the game round occurs. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the pattern of shifting to the special game state. In this case, since the configuration of the feature G1 is provided and a specific initial value is set in the predetermined measuring means when the special game state ends, there are a plurality of patterns of game situations immediately before shifting to the special game state. Even so, the process of setting a specific initial value to the predetermined measuring means triggered by the special game state can be integrated as the process when the special game state ends.

Feature G3. When the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the special game state, after the supply of operating power is started, the information of the predetermined measuring means is the specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value Specific setting means (sixth embodiment A gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of step S3204 of the main side MPU 82 in .

In the case of a configuration in which a specific initial value is set to the predetermined measuring means when the special game state ends, the operating power is reduced after obtaining a certain amount of profit in the special game state and before the special game state ends. It is assumed that the special game state is forcibly terminated while the information of the predetermined measuring means is maintained by stopping the supply and restarting the supply of the operating power. On the other hand, according to feature G3, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the special game state, after the supply of operating power is started, the information of the predetermined measuring means is a specific initial value or A specific setting process is executed so that a game cycle is executed in a situation where the initial value is different from the specific initial value. This makes it possible to neutralize the fraudulent act as described above.

Feature G4. When it is specified that the supply of operating power will be stopped, means for executing power failure processing (power failure monitoring processing executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) (main MPU 82 function to monitor power outages),
The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the specific setting means executes the specific setting process in the power failure process when the supply of operating power is stopped during the special game state.

According to the feature G4, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special game state, a specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value is set to the predetermined measuring means in the power failure processing. It is easier to identify whether or not the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the special game state, compared to the configuration in which the process of setting the initial value to the predetermined measuring means is executed when the supply of operating power is started. Become.

Feature G5. the number of executions of the game rounds ("500" in the sixth embodiment) required until it is specified that the number of executions of the game rounds has reached the predetermined trigger number after the predetermined setting process is executed; It is different from the number of executions of the game rounds ("800" in the sixth embodiment) required until it is specified that the number of executions of the game rounds has reached the predetermined trigger number after the specific setting process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature G3 or G4, characterized in that

According to feature G5, after the special game state ends, the required number of game rounds to be executed until it is specified that the number of game rounds has reached the predetermined number of triggers, and the supply of operating power during the special game state. It is different from the number of game rounds required until it is specified that the number of game rounds has reached the predetermined trigger number after the supply of operating power is restarted in the case of a stop. As a result, after the special game state ends and in the middle of the special game state, the supply of the operating power is stopped and the supply of the operating power is restarted to reduce the number of game rounds required until the predetermined privilege is granted. It is possible to make a difference between after and after.

Feature G6. After the specific setting process is executed, the number of times of execution of the game times required until it is specified that the number of times of execution of the game times has reached the predetermined number of times is greater than the number of times of execution of the game times after the predetermined setting process is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G5, wherein the number of game rounds to be executed is greater than the number of game rounds to be executed until it is specified that the number of game rounds has reached the predetermined trigger number. .

According to feature G6, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the special game state, and after the supply of operating power is resumed, it is specified that the number of game rounds executed has reached the predetermined trigger number. The required number of game rounds to be executed is greater than the required number of game rounds to be executed until it is specified that the number of game rounds to be executed has reached the predetermined trigger number after the special game state is ended. When the act of illegally stopping the supply of operating power in the middle of the special game state is performed, it is possible to increase the number of times of execution of the necessary game rounds until the predetermined privilege is given thereafter.

Feature G7. Profit granting processing (executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) is performed in a mode corresponding to the setting value set to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage. determination process) (function for executing the right/wrong determination process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
When the supply of operating power is started, a settable state in which the setting value to be used can be changed based on the fact that a predetermined related operation (setting change operation) has been performed (setting value update processing is performed) a situation generating means (a function of executing the process of step S117 of the main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) that causes the situation to be executed);
with
The game machine according to any one of features G3 to G6, wherein the information of the predetermined measuring means is not changed in the settable state.

According to the feature G7, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the set value that is more advantageous to the player is used. It is expected that In this case, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value in the settable state, even if the settable state occurs, it is possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measuring means as the information before the supply of the operating power was stopped. Become. The configuration includes the configuration of the feature G3, and when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special game state, the information of the predetermined measuring means after the supply of the operating power is started is a specific initial value or A specific setting process is executed so that a game cycle is executed in a situation where the initial value is different from the specific initial value. As a result, after obtaining a certain amount of profit in the special game state and before the special game state ends, the supply of the operating power is stopped and the supply of the operating power is restarted, whereby the information of the predetermined measuring means is obtained. It is possible to nullify the fraudulent act of forcibly ending the special game state while maintaining it.

Feature G8. Means ( a function of executing the processing of step S119 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment),
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measurement means is not initialized,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G7, wherein the information of the predetermined measuring means is not changed even if the initialization processing is executed.

According to the feature G8, in the configuration in which predetermined information is initialized in the predetermined storage means based on the fact that the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the initialization process is performed. Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value. As a result, even if the initialization processing is executed, it is possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measuring means as the information before the supply of the operating power was stopped. The configuration includes the configuration of the feature G3, and when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special game state, the information of the predetermined measuring means after the supply of the operating power is started is a specific initial value or A specific setting process is executed so that a game cycle is executed in a situation where the initial value is different from the specific initial value. As a result, after obtaining a certain amount of profit in the special game state and before the special game state ends, the supply of the operating power is stopped and the supply of the operating power is restarted, whereby the information of the predetermined measuring means is obtained. It is possible to nullify the fraudulent act of forcibly ending the special game state while maintaining it.

Feature G9. Profit granting processing (executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) is performed in a mode corresponding to the setting value set to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage. determination process) (function for executing the right/wrong determination process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
When the supply of operating power is started, a settable state in which the setting value to be used can be changed based on the fact that a predetermined related operation (setting change operation) has been performed (setting value update processing is performed) a situation generating means (a function of executing the process of step S117 of the main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) that causes the situation to be executed);
with
A configuration in which the information of the predetermined measuring means is not changed even if the initialization process is executed, and the information of the predetermined measuring means is not changed in the settable state,
In this gaming machine, when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined situation in which both the specific related operation and the predetermined related operation are not performed (the positive determination in step S113 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment means for setting the information of the predetermined measuring means to the specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value (step S114 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment The gaming machine according to feature G8, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of

According to the feature G9, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the set value that is more advantageous to the player is used. It is expected that In this case, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to the initial value, and the information of the predetermined measurement means is not set to the initial value in the settable state, so the initialization process is executed. Not only can the information of the predetermined measuring means be maintained at the information before the supply of operating power is stopped, but even if a settable situation occurs, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be kept as the information before the supply of operating power is stopped. can be maintained. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is started, the information of the predetermined measuring means is a specific initial value or the specific initial value when the predetermined situation is that neither the specific related operation nor the predetermined related operation is performed. set to a different initial value than Thus, in a configuration in which the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value even if the initialization processing is executed and the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value in the settable state, the supply of operating power is started. In such a case, it is possible to set the information of the predetermined measurement means to a specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value.

Feature G10. Variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided in a game area where game balls flow down and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means (special call start processing, special call open processing, function to execute closing process) and
with
A configuration in which the variable ball entry control is executed in the special game state,
Any of the characteristics G1 to G9, wherein the predetermined setting means executes the predetermined setting process after the variable ball entry control in the special game state is completed and before the end timing of the special game state. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature G10, after the variable ball entry control is completed in the special game state and before the end timing of the special game state, it is possible to set the information of the predetermined measuring means to a specific initial value.

Feature G11. Predetermined ball entry means (special winning device 151 in the sixth embodiment) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
Acquisition means (function of executing step S2806 of the main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) for acquiring special information (second reservation information) based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means; ,
Giving determination means (main side a function of executing the propriety determination process of the MPU 82);
a predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal/universal power control process of the main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state;
with
The game round control means sets a state in which the game round operation is started and the game round operation is ended as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game round, and in each game round, the above-mentioned It is intended to allow the action for game play to be performed,
The predetermined privilege granting means changes the game state to a predetermined game state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another game state (normal game state) as the provision of the predetermined privilege. The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G10, characterized in that transition is made.

According to feature G11, when special information is acquired based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entry means that is switched between a closed state and an open state, and the special information corresponds to grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which a privilege is provided to the player, the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state in the predetermined game state than in the other game state. Therefore, the predetermined game state becomes an advantageous game state for the player. In this case, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features G1 to G11, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group G, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special game state. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special game state based on a game ball entering a part. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, it is necessary for the game machines such as those exemplified above to execute the processing favorably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. Game turn control means (first to fifth, seventh , a function of executing special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing and special figure determination processing of the main side MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment);
a period determining means for determining the duration of the game cycle (a function for executing a variable display period specifying process of the main side MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments);
Specific measuring means for measuring the number of times the game is executed (variation selection state counter 132 in the first to fifth and ninth embodiments, game number counter of the main side RAM 84 in the seventh embodiment),
Specific updating means for updating the execution count of the game rounds measured by the specific measuring means when the game rounds are executed (step S1703 of the main side MPU 82 in the first to fifth and ninth embodiments a function of executing the processing of step S3401 of the main MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment);
The number of executions of the game times measured by the specific measuring means after the occurrence of the measurement reference opportunity (opening/closing execution mode) is the specific reference number of times (500 times in the first to fifth and ninth embodiments, 7th In the embodiment, the mode changing means (first to fifth , the function of executing the processing of step S1705 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3402 to S3405 of the main MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment);
Predetermined privilege granting means (first to fifth, seventh, ninth embodiments) that grants a predetermined privilege (second high-frequency support mode) when a predetermined grant opportunity (time saving result) occurs Time saving of the main MPU 82 the ability to perform configuration processing for results);
with
A gaming machine characterized in that even if the predetermined award opportunity occurs and the predetermined privilege is granted, the measurement reference opportunity does not occur.

According to the feature H1, since the determination mode of the duration of the game round is changed based on the fact that the number of the game rounds executed after the occurrence of the measurement reference opportunity reaches the specific reference number, the game round is repeated. It is possible to prevent uniformity in the determination mode of the duration of the game cycle when it is executed. In addition, since a predetermined benefit is awarded when a predetermined grant opportunity occurs, the player expects that the predetermined grant opportunity will occur. In this case, even if the predetermined grant opportunity occurs and the predetermined benefit is granted, the measurement reference opportunity does not occur. As a result, it is possible to provide the predetermined benefit in response to the occurrence of the predetermined grant opportunity without affecting the timing of changing the determination mode of the duration of the game round.

Feature H2. Predetermined lottery means (first to fifth, a function of executing pending information acquisition processing and validity determination processing of the main MPU 82 in the seventh and ninth embodiments),
The game round control means controls the game round execution means so as to produce an operation result corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the predetermined grant opportunity is generated when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a predetermined lottery result (time saving result).

According to the feature H2, in a configuration in which a predetermined privilege can be granted when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined lottery result, the timing of changing the determination mode of the duration of the game cycle is not affected. , it is possible to provide a predetermined privilege based on the result of the predetermined lottery.

Feature H3. Predetermined ball entry means (second operation port 34 in the first to fifth, seventh and ninth embodiments) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter,
Acquisition means for acquiring special information (second reservation information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (the step of the main side MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments function to execute the processing of S709);
Applicability determination means (property determination processing of the main side MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the provision correspondence information (property determination processing) function) and
Privilege for awarding a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the granting correspondence result (jackpot result) indicating that the special information corresponds to the granting correspondence information as a result of the granting determination. Giving means (function for executing special electric start processing, special electric open processing, special electric closed processing, and special electric end processing of the main side MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments);
Predetermined ball entry control means capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state function) and
with
The game round control means sets a state in which the game round operation is started and the game round operation is ended as a state corresponding to the judgment result of the grant judgment as one game round, and in each game round, the above-mentioned It is intended to allow the action for game play to be performed,
The predetermined privilege granting means changes the game state to a predetermined game state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another game state (normal game state). The game machine according to feature H1 or H2, characterized in that the transition is made.

According to feature H3, special information is acquired based on the entry of a game ball into predetermined ball entry means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, and the special information corresponds to grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which a privilege is provided to the player, the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state in the predetermined game state than in the other game state. Therefore, the predetermined game state becomes an advantageous game state for the player. In this case, the configuration of the feature H1 is provided, and even if the predetermined grant opportunity occurs and the predetermined game state occurs, the measurement reference opportunity does not occur. As a result, it is possible to cause the transition to the predetermined game state in response to the occurrence of the predetermined grant opportunity without affecting the timing of changing the determination mode of the duration of the game round.

Feature H4. Predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed;
Number of times updating means for updating the number of execution times of the game times measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game times are executed (in the first, third to fifth, and seventh embodiments, the main side MPU 82 , a function of executing the processing of step S2103 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S3703 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment);
with
The execution count of the game times measured by the predetermined measuring means from the measurement reference trigger is a predetermined trigger count (fixed ceiling count in the first to fourth and seventh to ninth embodiments, and a fixed ceiling count in the fifth embodiment. The predetermined privilege (second high-frequency support mode) or a privilege different from it is given when the first ceiling number of times or the second ceiling number of times) is reached,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the specific reference number of times is a number of times less than the predetermined trigger number of times by a predetermined number of times.

According to the feature H4, when the number of times of execution of game rounds measured by the predetermined measuring means from the measurement reference timing reaches the predetermined number of times of timing, a predetermined privilege or a privilege different from it is granted, so that the game rounds are repeatedly executed. It is possible to provide the player with a predetermined privilege or a privilege different from that in response to the fact that the game has been played. In this case, the specific reference number of times is the number of times that is less than the predetermined trigger number of times by a predetermined number of times. As a result, the number of game rounds to be executed measured by the predetermined measuring means from the measurement reference opportunity becomes the predetermined number of occasions, and the number of game rounds in the game rounds before the predetermined number of times before the predetermined privilege or a privilege different from it is granted. It is possible to vary the manner in which the duration is determined. Therefore, by using the change in the determination mode of the duration of the game rounds, it is possible to detect that a situation is approaching in which a predetermined privilege or a privilege different from the predetermined privilege will be granted when the number of times the game rounds are executed reaches the predetermined number of triggers. It is possible to make the player recognize it. In this case, even if the configuration of the feature H1 is provided and the predetermined award opportunity occurs and the predetermined benefit is awarded, the measurement reference opportunity does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the provision of the predetermined benefit due to the occurrence of the predetermined provision opportunity from affecting the game contents as described above.

Feature H5. The mode changing means determines the number of game rounds in the period determining means based on the fact that the number of times the game rounds are executed as measured by the specific measuring means after the occurrence of the measurement reference opportunity reaches the specific reference number of times. The gaming machine according to feature H4, characterized in that, when changing the determination mode of the duration of the game, the average duration of the duration of the game rounds is made longer than before.

According to the feature H5, the number of game rounds executed measured by the predetermined measuring means from the measurement reference trigger becomes the predetermined trigger number, and in the game rounds a predetermined number of times before the predetermined privilege or a privilege different from it is given. Since the average duration of the game rounds is longer than before, the number of times the game rounds are executed reaches a predetermined number of triggers, and the consumption efficiency of the game rounds is reduced before the predetermined privilege or other privilege is granted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being granted in a short period of time. In this case, even if the configuration of the feature H1 is provided and the predetermined award opportunity occurs and the predetermined benefit is awarded, the measurement reference opportunity does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the provision of the predetermined benefit due to the occurrence of the predetermined provision opportunity from affecting the game contents as described above.

Feature H6. A plurality of types of the specific reference number of times are set,
Each time the number of executions of the game times measured by the specific measuring means after the occurrence of the measurement reference opportunity reaches the specific reference number of times, the mode changing means determines the duration of the game times determined by the period determination means. The game according to any one of the features H1 to H3, characterized in that the determination mode of is changed to a predetermined determination mode (the function of executing the processing of steps S3401 to S3405 of the main side MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment) machine.

According to feature H6, each time the number of times the game is played after the occurrence of the measurement reference opportunity reaches one of the plurality of types of specific reference times, the determination mode of the duration of the game time is changed to the predetermined determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to regularly and repeatedly generate a situation in which the player pays attention to the contents of the game round. In this case, even if the configuration of the feature H1 is provided and the predetermined award opportunity occurs and the predetermined benefit is awarded, the measurement reference opportunity does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the provision of the predetermined benefit due to the occurrence of the predetermined provision opportunity from affecting the game contents as described above.

Feature H7. The mode changing means determines that the situation when the number of executions of the game times measured by the specific measuring means after the occurrence of the measurement reference opportunity reaches the specific reference number of times is a specific situation (second high-frequency support mode), the gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, wherein the period determining means does not change the mode of determining the duration of the game round.

According to feature H7, in the case of the specific situation, even if the number of game rounds executed after the occurrence of the measurement reference opportunity reaches the specific reference number, the mode of determining the duration of the game round is not changed. In a situation where it is not preferable to change the determination mode of the duration of the game cycle, it is possible to prevent the determination mode of the duration of the game cycle from being changed.

Feature H8. The mode changing means determines the number of game rounds in the period determining means based on the fact that the number of times the game rounds are executed as measured by the specific measuring means after the occurrence of the measurement reference opportunity reaches the specific reference number of times. When changing the determination mode of the duration of the game round, the average period of the duration of the game round is made longer than before,
The specific situation is a situation in which the duration of the game round is determined by the period determining means in such a manner that the average period of the duration of the game round is shorter than that in the normal game state. The gaming machine of characterizing feature H7.

According to the feature H8, when the number of times the game is executed after the occurrence of the measurement reference opportunity reaches the specific reference number of times, the average period of the duration of the game is longer than before. It is possible to create a situation in which a flashy performance is generated as the performance of the times. In this case, in a situation where the average duration of the game rounds is shorter than in the normal game state, if the number of game rounds executed after the occurrence of the measurement reference opportunity reaches the specific reference number of times. The manner in which the duration of the game cycle is determined is not changed. Thereby, it becomes possible to give priority to a situation in which the efficiency of digestion of game rounds is high.

For the configuration of features H1 to H8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. Predetermined ball entry means (second operation port 34 in the eighth embodiment) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
Acquisition means (function of executing step S709 of main side MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) for acquiring special information (second reservation information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means; ,
Attachment determination means (function for executing the appropriateness determination process of the main side MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) that performs attachment determination (appropriateness determination processing) as to whether the special information corresponds to the attachment correspondence information;
Privilege for awarding a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the granting correspondence result (jackpot result) indicating that the special information corresponds to the granting correspondence information as a result of the granting determination. Giving means (function for executing special electric start processing, special electric open processing, special electric closed processing, and special electric end processing of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment);
A game cycle action is started, and the game cycle action is ended as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game cycle, and the game cycle motion is performed in each game cycle. To the game execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) game round control means (main side MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing and a function to execute special figure confirmation processing),
period determination means for determining the duration of the game cycle (function for executing processing for specifying the variable display period of the main side MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment);
a predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal/universal electric power control process of the main side MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state;
a predetermined transition means for shifting the game state to a predetermined game state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another game state (normal game state);
Specific measuring means (variation selection state counter 132 in the eighth embodiment) for measuring the number of executions of the game round,
When the number of execution times of the game times measured by the specific measuring means after the predetermined game state is completed reaches a specific reference number of times (50 times in the eighth embodiment), the period determining means mode changing means for changing the determination mode of the duration of the game round (function for executing the processing of steps S1705 and S3512 of the main side MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1, when the special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means which is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which a privilege is provided to the player, the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state in the predetermined game state than in the other game state. Therefore, the predetermined game state becomes an advantageous game state for the player. In this case, since the determination mode of the continuation period of the game round is changed based on the fact that the number of game rounds executed after the predetermined game state ends reaches the specific reference number, the predetermined game state ends. After that, it is possible to change the determination mode of the duration of the game rounds at the timing when the specific reference number of game rounds are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent uniformity in the manner of determining the duration of game rounds, and to provide the player with unexpectedness.

Feature I2. The predetermined transition means, the result of the grant determination, based on the fact that the special information has become a predetermined response result (time saving result) that corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information, without granting the privilege, The game machine according to feature I1, characterized in that the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state.

According to the feature I2, it is possible to create a situation in which the game state shifts to a predetermined game state without awarding a privilege, based on the result of grant determination. Further, since the configuration of the feature I1 is provided, the determination mode of the duration of the game round is changed based on the number of the game rounds executed after the end of the predetermined game state reaches the specific reference number of times. It is possible to change the determining mode of the duration of the game round at the timing when the specific reference number of game rounds is completed after the predetermined game state is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent uniformity in the manner of determining the duration of game rounds, and to provide the player with unexpectedness.

Feature I3. The mode changing means determines that the number of game rounds in the period determining means is determined based on the number of times the game rounds are executed as measured by the specific measuring means after the end of the predetermined game state reaches the specified reference number of times. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, characterized in that, when changing the determination mode of the duration of the game, the average duration of the duration of the game cycle is made longer than before.

According to the feature I3, when the number of times the game is played after the predetermined game state ends reaches the specific reference number, the average period of the duration of the game is longer than before, so that the predetermined game is played. When the state occurs, it is possible to reduce the consumption efficiency of game rounds after that, and it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given in a short period of time.

Feature I4. The mode changing means determines a specific situation (second high-frequency support mode), the gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the mode of determining the duration of the game cycle in the period determining means is not changed.

According to feature I4, in the specific situation, even if the number of game rounds executed after the end of the predetermined game state reaches the specific reference number, the determination mode of the duration of the game round is not changed. In a situation where it is not preferable to change the determination mode of the duration of the game cycle, it is possible to prevent the determination mode of the duration of the game cycle from being changed.

Feature I5. The mode changing means determines that the number of game rounds in the period determining means is determined based on the number of times the game rounds are executed as measured by the specific measuring means after the end of the predetermined game state reaches the specified reference number of times. When changing the determination mode of the duration of the game round, the average period of the duration of the game round is made longer than before,
The specific situation is a situation in which the duration of the game round is determined by the period determining means in such a manner that the average period of the duration of the game round is shorter than that in the normal game state. The gaming machine according to characterizing feature I4.

According to the feature I5, when the number of times the game is played after the predetermined game state ends reaches the specific reference number of times, the average period of the duration of the game is made longer than before. It is possible to create a situation in which a flashy performance is generated as the performance of the times. In this case, in a situation where the average duration of the game rounds is shorter than in the normal game state, if the number of game rounds executed after the predetermined game state ends reaches the specific reference number of times. The manner in which the duration of the game cycle is determined is not changed. Thereby, it becomes possible to give priority to a situation in which the efficiency of digestion of game rounds is high.

For the configuration of features I1 to I5, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. Predetermined ball entry means (second operation port 34 in the ninth embodiment) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
Acquisition means (function of executing step S709 of main side MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) for acquiring special information (second reservation information) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means; ,
Attachment determination means (function for executing the appropriateness determination process of the main side MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) that performs attachment determination (appropriateness determination processing) as to whether the special information corresponds to the attachment correspondence information;
Privilege for awarding a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the granting correspondence result (jackpot result) indicating that the special information corresponds to the granting correspondence information as a result of the granting determination. Giving means (function for executing special electric start processing, special electric open processing, special electric closed processing, and special electric end processing of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment);
A game cycle action is started, and the game cycle action is ended as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game cycle, and the game cycle motion is performed in each game cycle. To the game execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) game round control means (main side MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing and a function to execute special figure confirmation processing),
Predetermined ball entry control means capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state (a function of executing a normal/universal electric power control process of the main side MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment);
A predetermined game state in which the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another game state (normal game state) without giving the privilege based on the occurrence of a predetermined transition opportunity (time saving result, ceiling time saving). Predetermined state setting means for (second high-frequency support mode) (function for executing the processing of steps S3604 and S3705 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment);
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the manner in which the predetermined game state is executed after that may differ according to the game state in which the predetermined transition opportunity has occurred.

According to feature J1, special information is acquired based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entry means that is switched between a closed state and an open state, and the special information corresponds to grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which a privilege is provided to the player, the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state in the predetermined game state than in the other game state. Therefore, the predetermined game state becomes an advantageous game state for the player. Further, when the predetermined game state is entered based on the occurrence of the predetermined transition opportunity, the predetermined game state is entered without giving the privilege. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of surprise. In this case, the manner in which the predetermined game state is executed thereafter may differ depending on the game situation in which the predetermined transition opportunity has occurred. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined game state is executed, and to improve the interest in the game.

Feature J2. The execution mode of the predetermined game state may be different between when the predetermined transition opportunity occurs in the predetermined game state and when the predetermined transition opportunity occurs in a situation other than the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to feature J1.

According to the feature J2, depending on whether or not the predetermined transition opportunity has occurred in the predetermined game state, since the transition mode of the predetermined game state after that can be different, not only whether the predetermined transition opportunity occurs, It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the predetermined transition opportunity occurs in the predetermined game state.

Feature J3. As the predetermined game state, a first predetermined game state (first high-frequency support mode) and a second predetermined game state (a second predetermined game state ( 2nd high frequency support mode) and exists,
The predetermined state setting means is
A first predetermined state setting means (in step S3603 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) for continuing the first predetermined game state when the predetermined transition opportunity occurs in the first predetermined game state function to make an affirmative judgment) and
Second predetermined state setting means (main in the ninth embodiment) for making the subsequent game state to be the second predetermined game state when the predetermined transition opportunity occurs in a game state that is not the first predetermined game state a function of executing the processing of step S3604 of the side MPU 82);
The gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J3, there are a first predetermined game state as the predetermined game state and a second predetermined game state in which the predetermined ball-entering means is opened in a different frequency from the first predetermined game state. Thus, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined game state is executed. Further, when the predetermined transition opportunity occurs in the first predetermined game state, the first predetermined game state is continued, and when the predetermined transition opportunity occurs in the game state which is not the second predetermined game state, the subsequent game state is changed. This is the second predetermined game state. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the predetermined transition opportunity occurs in the first predetermined game state.

Feature J4. The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the predetermined ball-entering means is in the open state more frequently in the first predetermined game state than in the second predetermined game state.

According to feature J4, in a configuration in which the predetermined ball-entering means is in the open state more frequently in the first predetermined game state than in the second predetermined game state, when a predetermined transition opportunity occurs in the first predetermined game state, By continuing the first predetermined game state, it is possible to give priority to the continuation of the first predetermined game state, which is advantageous to the player.

Feature J5. Means (9th A function to execute the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 of the main side MPU 82 in the embodiment),
When the predetermined state setting means shifts to the predetermined game state based on the occurrence of the predetermined transition opportunity, the end reference number of times of the predetermined game state is a predetermined number of times (first time reduction continuation number, second time reduction number of continuations),
In the game machine, when the predetermined transition opportunity occurs in the predetermined game state, the remaining number of times required to reach the end reference number of times of the predetermined game state at that time and the predetermined number of times is greater. Means for making the number of times on the side become the reference number of times for ending the predetermined game state after that (the function of executing the processing of steps S3605 to S3610 and steps S3706 to S3708 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment ), the gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4.

According to the characteristic J5, when a predetermined transition opportunity occurs in a predetermined game state, it is possible to set the subsequent standard number of ending times of the predetermined game state to be an advantageous number for the player.

Feature J6. The predetermined transition opportunity, the result of the grant determination, characterized in that it occurs based on a predetermined corresponding result (time saving result) that the special information corresponds to the predetermined corresponding information characteristic J1 The game machine according to any one of J5.

According to the feature J6, it is possible to create a situation in which the game state shifts to a predetermined game state without awarding a privilege, based on the result of grant determination. In this case, it is possible to obtain excellent effects as described above.

Feature J7. Predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed;
Number of times updating means for updating the number of times of execution of the game times measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game times are executed (function of executing the processing of step S3703 of the main side MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment )and,
with
1. Any one of the features J1 to J6, wherein the predetermined transition opportunity occurs when the number of executions of the game rounds measured by the predetermined measuring means reaches a predetermined number of triggers (fixed ceiling number of times). The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature J7, when the number of game rounds measured by the predetermined measuring means reaches the predetermined trigger number, the predetermined game state is entered. It is possible to shift to a game state. In this case, it is possible to obtain excellent effects as described above.

For the configuration of features J1 to J7, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the characteristic group H, the characteristic group I, and the characteristic group J, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special game state. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special game state based on a game ball entering a part. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. Acquisition means for acquiring special information (first reservation information, second reservation information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition opportunity (in the first to fifth and seventh to ninth embodiments, steps S704 and The function of executing the processing of step S709, the function of executing the processing of steps S2803 and S2806 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment, and the function of steps S3801 and S3901 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments. function to perform processing) and
Predetermined determination means (function for executing the validity determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) for performing a predetermined determination (validity determination process) as to whether or not the special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information; ,
Based on the fact that the result of the predetermined determination is a predetermined correspondence result (time saving result) that the special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information, a predetermined privilege for the player (second high frequency support mode) (a function of executing setting processing for the time saving result of the main side MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) that provides the
The variable display of the predetermined pattern is started, and the variable display of the predetermined pattern is terminated as a result of the stop corresponding to the determination result of the predetermined determination as one game cycle, and the variable display of the predetermined pattern is performed in each game cycle. Predetermined display control means (main side MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments special figure fluctuation Function to execute start processing, processing during special figure fluctuation and processing during special figure determination),
Specific display control means (sound and light side MPU 93, display side MPU 103) for controlling the display of the specific display means (symbol display device 41) so that the variable display of the specific patterns (symbols in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3) is executed in the game cycle )and,
with
The predetermined display means has a narrower display range than the specific display means,
The predetermined privilege granting means is a grantable situation (first to eighth In the embodiment of the normal game state, in the ninth to twelfth embodiments the normal game state or time-saving state) based on the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined corresponding result to give the predetermined privilege, the A configuration in which the predetermined privilege is not granted when the result of the predetermined determination in the restricted situation is the predetermined response result,
The predetermined display control means stops the variable display of the predetermined pattern on the predetermined display means when the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result in either the grantable state or the restricted state. As a result, a predetermined stop result ("4" or "5") is displayed,
The specific display control means is
When the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined correspondence result in the grantable situation, a specific stop result (“1.23” or “3.4. 1”) is displayed (a function of executing the processing of step S1408 of the sound and light side MPU 93 in the first to twelfth embodiments),
When the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined corresponding result in the restricted situation, the result of the predetermined determination may be displayed as a result of stopping the variable display of the specific pattern on the specific display means when the result of the predetermined determination is a wrong result. Restriction handling means (function of executing the processing of step S1410 of the sound and light side MPU 93 in the first to twelfth embodiments) for displaying a predetermined out-of-range result (combination of non-reach out-of-range symbols);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature K1, since the predetermined privilege is given based on the result of the predetermined determination becoming the predetermined correspondence result, the player expects that the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined correspondence result. In addition, while the predetermined privilege is granted based on the result of the predetermined determination in the grantable state becoming the predetermined response result, the predetermined benefit is not granted even if the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined response result in the restricted state. . Thereby, it becomes possible to restrict the situation in which the predetermined privilege is granted.

In this case, in the specific display means having a wider display range than the predetermined display means, when the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined corresponding result in the grantable situation, the specific stop result is displayed as the stop result of the variable display of the specific pattern. On the other hand, when the result of the predetermined judgment becomes the predetermined corresponding result in the restricted situation, the predetermined failure which can be displayed when the result of the predetermined judgment is the result of the deviation as the result of stopping the variable display of the specific pattern. Results are displayed. Thereby, when the predetermined privilege is granted, it is possible to make it conspicuous that the predetermined privilege is granted, and when the predetermined privilege is not granted even though the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined correspondence result It becomes possible to make it inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the predetermined display means displays a predetermined stop result as a stop result of the variable display of the predetermined pattern when the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result regardless of whether it is the grantable state or the restricted state. be done. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily visually confirm that the result of the predetermined determination has become the predetermined corresponding result. Further, since the display range of the predetermined display means is narrower than that of the specific display means, even if the predetermined stop result is displayed by the predetermined display means in the restricted situation, the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined response result in the restricted situation. becomes difficult for the player to notice.

Feature K2. The specific display control means controls a special display area in the specific display means when the result of the predetermined determination in the restricted situation is the predetermined response result and when the result of the predetermined determination is the deviation result. It is characterized by having a display difference means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1412 and S1413 of the sound and light side MPU 93 in the first to twelfth embodiments) that makes the display content of the (state suggesting area 43) different. The gaming machine according to feature K1.

According to feature K2, when the result of the predetermined judgment is the predetermined correspondence result in the restricted situation, even if the predetermined deviation result is displayed as the result of stopping the variable display of the specific picture on the specific display means, the special display means is not allowed to display the specified result. Since the display content in the display area is different from the display content when the result of the predetermined determination is out of range, the manager of the gaming hall can confirm that the specified out-of-range result is displayed on the specific display means. It is also possible to grasp from the display contents of the specific display means whether or not it is triggered by the predetermined response result in .

Feature K3. As the predetermined correspondence result, there are at least a first predetermined correspondence result (first time saving result) and a second predetermined correspondence result (second time saving result),
The predetermined privilege granting means differs in the content of the predetermined privilege to be granted when the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined response result and when the result of the predetermined determination is the second predetermined response result. and
The predetermined display control means makes the content of the predetermined stop result different between when the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined response result and when the result of the predetermined determination is the second predetermined response result. and
The grantable response means makes the content of the specific stop result different between when the result of the predetermined determination in the grantable situation is the first predetermined response result and when the result is the second predetermined response result. is a
The restriction handling means, regardless of whether the result of the predetermined determination in the restriction situation is the first predetermined response result or the second predetermined response result, the As a result of stopping the variable display of the specific pattern, the predetermined deviation result is displayed,
The display differing means differentiates the display contents of the special display area depending on whether the result of the predetermined determination in the restricted situation is the first predetermined response result or the second predetermined response result. The gaming machine according to feature K2, characterized in that the game machine is a

According to the characteristic K3, when the result of the predetermined determination in the assignable situation is the first predetermined correspondence result and the case when the second predetermined correspondence result is obtained, the result of stopping the variable display of the specific pattern on the specific display means is Due to the difference in the content of a certain specific stop result, it is possible to suggest to the player the content of the predetermined privilege to be given thereafter by the content of the specific stop result. On the other hand, regardless of whether the result of the predetermined determination in the restricted situation is the first predetermined response result or the second predetermined response result, as a result of stopping the variable display of the specific pattern on the specific display means Since the predetermined deviation result is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined correspondence result has been obtained, including the type of the predetermined correspondence result. In addition, even in this case, the display contents of the special display area on the specific display means differ depending on whether the result of the predetermined judgment is the first predetermined correspondence result or the second predetermined correspondence result. The manager of the hall can also grasp from the display contents of the specific display means whether or not it is triggered by any of the prescribed response results in the restricted situation when the result of the specified deviation is displayed on the specific display means. becomes.

Feature K4. The gaming machine according to feature K2 or K3, wherein the display range of the special display area in the specific display means is narrower than the display range of the display area in which the specific pattern is displayed in the specific display means.

According to the feature K4, when the result of the predetermined determination in the restricted situation is the predetermined corresponding result, the display content of the special display area on the specific display means is different from the display when the result of the predetermined determination is not the result. Even if the configuration is substantial, since the display range of the special display area in the specific display means is narrower than the display range of the display area in which the specific pattern is displayed in the specific display means, the special display area is not conspicuous to the player. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature K5. Predetermined ball entry means (second operation port 34 in the eighth embodiment) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
a predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal/universal electric power control process of the main side MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state;
with
The acquisition opportunity is a configuration that occurs based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means,
The predetermined privilege granting means changes the game state to a predetermined game state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another game state (normal game state). The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, characterized in that transition is made.

According to the feature K5, when the special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means which is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information. can shift to a predetermined game state. In the predetermined game state, the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined game state becomes an advantageous game state for the player. In this case, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

Feature K6. A specific privilege (opening/closing execution mode) is given to the player based on the fact that the result of the predetermined determination is a grant correspondence result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Privilege giving means (function for executing special electric start processing, special electric open processing, special electric closed processing, and special electric end processing of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment),
Characteristic feature K5 characterized in that the predetermined privilege provision means shifts the game state to the predetermined game state without providing the specific privilege based on the fact that the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined correspondence result. The gaming machine described in .

According to the characteristic K6, when the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined correspondence result, the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state without giving the specific privilege. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of surprise.

Feature K7. A specific privilege (opening/closing execution mode) is given to the player based on the fact that the result of the predetermined determination is a grant correspondence result (jackpot result) that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Privilege giving means (function for executing special electric start processing, special electric open processing, special electric closed processing, and special electric end processing of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment),
Any of the features K1 to K6, wherein the restricted situation is a specific game state (high-probability state) in which the probability that the result of the predetermined determination is the given corresponding result is higher than that of another game state. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature K7, in the specific game state in which the probability that the result of the predetermined determination becomes the granting corresponding result is higher than that in the separate game state, even if the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined corresponding result, the predetermined privilege is not granted. It becomes possible to In this case, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features K1 to K7, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group K, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special game state. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special game state based on a game ball entering a part. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary that the game be played favorably, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. First acquisition means (10th to 12th implementation) for acquiring the first special information (first reservation information) based on the occurrence of the first acquisition opportunity (entering the game ball into the first operation port 33) a function of executing the processing of step S3801 of the main MPU 82 in the form);
First provision determination whether or not the first special information is information corresponding to provision of a specific privilege (opening/closing execution mode) (first special figure special electric control processing of the main side MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments In the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process of the main side MPU 82 in the 10th to 12th embodiments (step S4005 of the special figure fluctuation start process in step S4005) function to perform processing) and
The first special information is triggered by starting the first game-play motion and terminating the first game-play motion as a state corresponding to the result of the first grant determination. First game control means (10th to 12th embodiments in A function of executing special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing and special figure determination processing in the first special figure special electric control processing of the main side MPU 82);
Second acquisition means (tenth to twelfth embodiments) for acquiring the second special information (second pending information) based on the occurrence of the second acquisition opportunity (entering the game ball into the special winning device 151) a function of executing the processing of step S3901 of the main MPU 82 in
Second provision determination whether the second special information is information corresponding to the provision of the specific privilege (special figure fluctuation in the second special figure special electric control process of the main side MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments Step S4005 of the start process) Executes the second grant determination means (the second special figure special electric control process of the main side MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments Executes the process of step S4005 in the special figure variation start process function) and
The second special information is triggered by starting the second game-play motion and ending the second game-play motion as a state corresponding to the result of the second grant determination. Second game control means (10th to 12th embodiments in A function of executing special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing and special figure determination processing in the second special figure special electric control processing of the main side MPU 82);
Predetermined transition means for shifting the game state to a predetermined game state (time saving state) (a function of executing setting processing for time saving results of the main side MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments and subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131);
The total number of game rounds triggered by the first special information and the game round triggered by the second special information executed in the predetermined game state is the number of ending trigger times (first time-shortening continuation number, second time-shortening continuation number of times), a predetermined termination means for terminating the predetermined game state (a function of executing the end determination processing of the time saving state of the main side MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments);
with
At least a part of the period during which the game round triggered by the first special information and at least a part of the period during which the game round triggered by the second special information may overlap. and
The predetermined ending means is configured such that when one of the game round triggered by the first special information and the game round triggered by the second special information ends, the total number of times becomes the ending trigger number. However, if the other game round that has started before the one game round is started, the predetermined game state is ended after the other game round is finished. game machine.

According to the feature L1, since the game rounds triggered by the first special information and the game rounds triggered by the second special information can be executed in duplicate, it is possible to increase the overall execution frequency of the game rounds. becomes. In this case, when one of the game rounds triggered by the first special information and the game round triggered by the second special information ends, even if the total number of times becomes the number of times of termination opportunity, If the other game round that has started before the second game round is started, the predetermined game state ends after the other game round ends. As a result, the continuation period of the game cycle started in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the end trigger count, and the special information on the side different from the special information that triggered the game cycle are used as triggers. The number of game rounds executed until the predetermined game state is completed is varied according to the start timing of the game round and the duration of the game rounds, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Feature L2. Period determining means for making an average period of duration of game rounds triggered by the second special information in the predetermined game state shorter than an average period of duration of game rounds triggered by the first special information. (The function of executing the process of specifying the variable display period of the main side MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments).

According to the feature L2, in the predetermined game state, the game rounds are repeated triggered by the second special information in which the average period of the continuous period of the game rounds is relatively short, thereby improving the digestion efficiency of the game rounds. can be increased. On the other hand, in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the end trigger number, the game round is started triggered by the first special information in which the average period of the continuous period of the game round is relatively long. By doing so, the predetermined game state continues until the game cycle triggered by the first special information ends. By executing the game rounds triggered by the second special information while the game rounds triggered by the first special information are being executed, the number of game rounds executed in the predetermined game state is reduced. It is possible to make the total number of times greater than the number of termination opportunities.

Feature L3. The period determination means is means for determining by lottery the duration of the game round triggered by the first special information started in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the end trigger number of times ( The gaming machine according to feature L2, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S4809 to S4811 of the main side MPU 82 in the twelfth embodiment.

According to the feature L3, when a game round triggered by the first special information is started in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the end trigger number, the duration of the game round is determined by lottery. Therefore, a player who wants to increase the number of times of the game to be executed in the predetermined game state expects that a long period is selected as the continuation period of the game with the first special information as a trigger.

Feature L4. A first ball entry means (first operation opening 33) that allows the game ball to enter when the game ball flows down the first area (left area PA2);
Second ball entry means (special winning device 151) that allows the game ball to enter when the game ball flows down the second area (right area PA3);
with
The first acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the first ball entering means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the second acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the second ball entering means.

According to the feature L4, the player can select which of the game round triggered by the first special information and the game round triggered by the second special information is to be executed in the predetermined game state. In particular, in the configuration having the feature L2 or L3, the game round triggered by the second special information is repeated until the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the end trigger number, When the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the number of end trigger times, the game round triggered by the first special information is executed, and the game round triggered by the first special information is executed. After the start of the game, it is possible to execute as many game rounds as possible by the time the predetermined game state ends by executing the game round triggered by the second special information. Become.

Feature L5. Predetermined ball entry means (special winning device 151 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter,
Predetermined ball entry control means capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state (a function of executing a normal/universal electric power control process of the main side MPU 82);
with
The second acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means,
The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, wherein the predetermined game state is a game state in which the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another game state (normal game state).

According to the feature L5, the second special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the second special information is used to give the specific privilege. In the configuration in which it is determined whether or not it is corresponding information, in the predetermined game state, the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in the other game state. Therefore, the predetermined game state becomes an advantageous game state for the player. In this case, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features L1 to L5, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group L, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special game state. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special game state based on a game ball entering a part. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group M>
Feature M1. First acquisition means (11th, 12th implementation a function of executing the processing of step S3801 of the main MPU 82 in the form);
First provision determination whether or not the first special information is information corresponding to provision of a specific privilege (opening/closing execution mode) (first special figure special electric control processing of the main side MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments In the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process of the main side MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments (step S4005 of the special figure fluctuation start process in step S4005) function to perform processing) and
The first special information is triggered by starting the first game-play motion and terminating the first game-play motion as a state corresponding to the result of the first grant determination. First game control means (11th and 12th embodiments in the A function of executing special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing and special figure determination processing in the first special figure special electric control processing of the main side MPU 82);
Second acquisition means (eleventh and twelfth embodiments) for acquiring the second special information (second reserved information) based on the occurrence of the second acquisition opportunity (entering the game ball into the special winning device 151) a function of executing the processing of step S3901 of the main MPU 82 in
Second provision determination whether the second special information is information corresponding to the provision of the specific privilege (special figure fluctuation in the second special figure special electric control processing of the main side MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments Step S4005 of the start process) Executes the process of step S4005 in the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process of the second grant determination means (the main side MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments function) and
The second special information is triggered by starting the second game-play motion and ending the second game-play motion as a state corresponding to the result of the second grant determination. Second game control means (11th, 12th embodiments in the A function of executing special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing and special figure determination processing in the second special figure special electric control processing of the main side MPU 82);
Predetermined transition means for shifting the game state to a predetermined game state (time saving state) (a function of executing setting processing for time saving results of the main side MPU 82 and subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments);
The total number of game rounds triggered by the first special information and the game round triggered by the second special information executed in the predetermined game state is the number of termination triggers (first time reduction continuation number, second time reduction continuation number of times), a predetermined termination means for terminating the predetermined game state (a function of executing the end determination processing of the time saving state of the main side MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments);
Period determining means for making an average period of duration of game rounds triggered by the second special information in the predetermined game state shorter than an average period of duration of game rounds triggered by the first special information. (In the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4710 to S4713 of the main MPU 82; in the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4812 to S4815 of the main MPU 82);
with
At least a part of the period during which the game round triggered by the first special information and at least a part of the period during which the game round triggered by the second special information may overlap. and
Said predetermined end means is configured such that when one of the game rounds triggered by the first special information and the game round triggered by the second special information ends, the total number of times becomes the ending trigger number. However, if the other game round that was started before the one game round was started is in the middle of the game round, the predetermined game state is terminated after the other game round is completed,
The period determining means determines, in the predetermined gaming state, the duration of the game round triggered by the first special information started in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined gaming state is one less than the end trigger number of times. A short-term selection means (main side MPU 82 in the eleventh embodiment) that makes the period shorter than the duration of the game cycle triggered by the first special information started in another situation or tends to make the period shorter , and in the twelfth embodiment, a function of executing steps S4809 to S4811 of the main side MPU 82).

According to the feature M1, since the game rounds triggered by the first special information and the game rounds triggered by the second special information can be executed in duplicate, it is possible to increase the overall execution frequency of the game rounds. becomes. In addition, in a predetermined game state, the game rounds are repeated triggered by the second special information in which the average duration of the game rounds is relatively short, so that the efficiency of digesting the game rounds can be improved. becomes.

In this case, when one of the game rounds triggered by the first special information and the game round triggered by the second special information ends, even if the total number of times becomes the number of times of termination opportunity, If the other game round that has started before the second game round is started, the predetermined game state ends after the other game round ends. As a result, the predetermined game state can be continued until the game round that triggered the end of the predetermined game state is completed.

However, in this configuration, if the game cycle triggered by the first special information is started in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the end trigger count, the first special information is triggered. game rounds triggered by the second special information are repeatedly executed until the game rounds described above are completed, and the substantial total number of game rounds executed in the predetermined game state is extremely greater than the end trigger number of times. It is possible that there will be more. On the other hand, the continuation period of the game rounds triggered by the first special information started in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the end trigger number is started in another situation in the predetermined game state. The period is shorter than the continuation period of the game cycle triggered by the first special information, or tends to be shorter. As a result, it is possible to prevent the substantial total number of times of the game times executed in the predetermined game state from becoming extremely larger than the number of end trigger times.

Feature M2. The short-term selection means selects the continuation period of the game rounds triggered by the first special information, which is started in the predetermined game state in a situation where the total number of times is one less than the end trigger number of times, in the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to feature M1, characterized in that the duration is equal to or less than the duration selected in the game cycle triggered by the second special information in .

According to feature M2, the continuation period of the game round triggered by the first special information started in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the end trigger number of times is the second special information in the predetermined game state. It is possible to prevent the substantial total number of game rounds executed in the predetermined game state from becoming greater than the end trigger number because the period is equal to or less than the duration selected in the game rounds that triggered it. becomes.

Feature M3. A first ball entry means (first operation opening 33) that allows the game ball to enter when the game ball flows down the first area (left area PA2);
Second ball entry means (special winning device 151) that allows the game ball to enter when the game ball flows down the second area (right area PA3);
with
The first acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the first ball entering means,
The gaming machine according to feature M1 or M2, wherein the second acquisition opportunity is generated when a game ball enters the second ball entering means.

According to the feature M3, the player can select which of the game round triggered by the first special information and the game round triggered by the second special information is to be executed in the predetermined game state.

Feature M4. Predetermined ball entry means (special winning device 151 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
Predetermined ball entry control means (function for executing normal/universal/universal electric control processing of main side MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between a closed state and an open state;
with
The second acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means,
The game machine according to any one of features M1 to M3, wherein the predetermined game state is a game state in which the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in another game state (normal game state).

According to the feature M4, the second special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the second special information is used to provide the specific privilege. In the configuration in which it is determined whether or not it is corresponding information, in the predetermined game state, the predetermined ball-entering means is more likely to be in the open state than in the other game state. Therefore, the predetermined game state becomes an advantageous game state for the player. In this case, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features M1 to M4, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the group M of features, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special game state. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special game state based on a game ball entering a part. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary that the game be played favorably, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. a control means (main-side MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes various kinds of predetermined processing (specific control processing);
information storage means (main side RAM 84 in the thirteenth embodiment) in which information is written when the predetermined various processes are executed by the control means;
with
The information storage means is
a first storage area (work area 211 for specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which information is written when the predetermined various processes are executed;
A second storage area (unused memory area in the thirteenth embodiment) in which information is not written when the predetermined various processes are executed, and the addresses of the information storage means are continuous with respect to the first storage area. area (address Y(r+3) to address Y(r+5)),
The address of the information storage means is continuous with respect to the second storage area, and the third storage area (the specific control address in the thirteenth embodiment) to which information is written when the various predetermined processes are executed. stack area 212);
with
This gaming machine includes the first storage area, the second storage area and the third storage area when a predetermined information erasure trigger (negative determination in step S4918 or execution of setting value update processing) occurs. It is characterized by comprising an erasure execution means (a function of executing RAM clear processing of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing information erasure processing (RAM clear processing) on the storage area of the information storage means. Amusement machine.

According to feature N1, a first storage area and a third storage area are provided as storage areas in which information is written when various kinds of predetermined processing are executed by the control means. It is possible to selectively use the target storage area as the first storage area and the third storage area according to the role. Further, a second storage area is provided between the first storage area and the third storage area at the address of the information storage means. Since writing is not performed, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the first storage area and the third storage area at the addresses of the information storage means.

In this case, when a predetermined information erasure trigger occurs, not only the first storage area and the third storage area used when performing various predetermined processes, but also various predetermined processes are executed. The information erasing process is executed including the second storage area that is not used in the case. As a result, instead of individually designating the first storage area and the third storage area and executing the information erasing process, the first storage area, the second storage area and the third storage area which are consecutive in the address of the information storage means are erased. can be collectively specified to execute the information erasing process. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when executing the information erasure processing.

Feature N2. The erasure executing means stores information in a continuous address range from a predetermined address (address Y(3)) in the first storage area to a specific address (address Y(s+1)) in the third storage area. The gaming machine according to feature N1, wherein the information erasing process is executed for the storage area in.

According to feature N2, even in a configuration in which the second storage area is provided as an unused area between the first storage area and the third storage area, the third storage area is stored from a predetermined address of the first storage area. Since it is sufficient to execute the information erasing process on the storage areas of a series of address ranges up to a specific address in the storage area, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when executing the information erasing process.

Feature N3. Predetermined prohibition setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4903 and S7506 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that performs a predetermined prohibition setting so that information is not written to the second storage area; ,
Predetermined disapproval canceling means for canceling the predetermined disapproval setting when the information erasing process is executed (function for executing the process of step S7501 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature N1 or N2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature N3, since information is not written to the second storage area by setting the predetermined prohibition, information is not written to the second storage area by mistake. It is possible to prevent In this case, when the information erasing process is executed, the predetermined prohibition setting is intentionally canceled. As a result, in a configuration that prevents erroneous writing of information in the second storage area, the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area that are consecutive in the address of the information storage means It is possible to collectively specify and execute the information erasing process.

Feature N4. The gaming machine according to feature N3, wherein the predetermined prohibition setting means performs the predetermined prohibition setting after the information erasing process is executed.

According to feature N4, even if the predetermined prohibition setting is canceled when the information erasing process is executed, the predetermined prohibition setting is performed after the information erasing process is executed. As a result, after the information erasing process is executed, it is possible to restore a state in which information is not written to the second storage area by mistake.

Feature N5. The gaming machine according to feature N3 or N4, wherein the predetermined prohibition setting means performs the predetermined prohibition setting when supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to feature N5, since the predetermined prohibition setting is performed when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, it is possible to prevent information from being erroneously written to the second storage area before the game is started. It is possible to make it a state where it will not be broken.

Feature N6. A predetermined setting area (protect register 223c) that becomes one of the binary information when the predetermined prohibition setting is performed, and becomes the other information of the binary information when the predetermined prohibition setting is cancelled. have
The game machine is characterized by comprising means (RAM management circuit 225) for excluding the second storage area from the target of writing information when the information in the predetermined set area is the one of the information. The game machine according to any one of N3 to N5.

According to feature N6, the information in the predetermined setting area is used as one of the binary information in order to set the predetermined prohibition, and the information in the predetermined setting area is used in the binary information to cancel the predetermined prohibition setting. The other information may be used. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for making the predetermined prohibition setting and the processing load for canceling the predetermined prohibition setting.

Feature N7. The control means is
Predetermined control execution means for executing various types of predetermined processing (function for executing specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
Separate control execution means (function for executing non-specific control processing of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing various other processing (non-specific control processing);
with
The information storage means includes a fourth storage area (work area 213 for non-specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which information is written when the other various processes are executed,
Information is written into the first storage area and the third storage area when the predetermined various processes are executed, and information is written when the other various processes are executed. will not be
Information is written into the fourth storage area when the other various processes are executed, but information is not written into the fourth storage area when the predetermined various processes are executed,
The game according to any one of features N1 to N6, wherein the erasure execution means does not execute the information erasure process for the fourth storage area when the predetermined information erasure trigger occurs. machine.

According to the feature N7, when various predetermined processes are executed by the control means, the first storage area and the third storage area in the information storage means are subject to information writing, and other various processes are executed by the control means. In this case, the fourth storage area in the information storage means becomes the object of writing the information. This makes it possible to distinguish the type of storage area to which information is to be written according to the type of processing executed by the control means. In this case, in the configuration in which the information erasing process is executed including the second storage area, which is an unused area, when various predetermined processes are executed when a predetermined information erasing opportunity occurs, the fourth Information erasure processing is not executed for the storage area. As a result, in a configuration in which the information erasing process is executed including the second storage area in order to simplify the processing configuration, the first storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area are also executed in the information erasing process. It is possible to distinguish between

Feature N8. Predetermined prohibition setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4903 and S7506 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that performs a predetermined prohibition setting so that information is not written to the second storage area; ,
Predetermined disapproval canceling means for canceling the predetermined disapproval setting when the information erasing process is executed (function for executing the process of step S7501 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
When a specific information erasing trigger (affirmative determination in step S7602) occurs, another erasing means (information abnormality monitoring of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes information erasing processing for the fourth storage area function to perform processing) and
with
The gaming machine according to feature N7, wherein the predetermined prohibition setting is not canceled when the information erasing process is executed for the fourth storage area by the separate erasing means.

According to feature N8, in a configuration in which information erasure processing is not executed for the fourth storage area when a predetermined information erasure trigger occurs, when a specific information erasure trigger occurs, the fourth memory area is erased. An information erasing process is performed on the area. This makes it possible to execute the information erasing process also for the fourth storage area. In this case, when the information erasing process is executed, the predetermined prohibition setting is not canceled. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined prohibition setting from being canceled in a situation where the information erasing process is not executed for the second storage area.

For the configuration of features N1 to N8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the N group of features, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special game state. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special game state based on a game ball entering a part. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in the gaming machine such as the one illustrated above, it is necessary for the control means to suitably execute processing, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group O>
Features O1. Means (function of executing the processing of step S805 of the main MPU 82) for executing the profit giving process (step S805 of the main MPU 82) in a manner corresponding to the set value corresponding to the player's advantage;
Situation generating means (the A function of making an affirmative determination in step S4908 or step S4915 of the main MPU 82);
When a specific event (entering a game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34) occurs due to the execution of the game, it corresponds to it history storage execution means (function for executing normal ball entry management processing of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) for storing history information of games to be played in the history storage means (normal counter area 251);
Information derivation means for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to game results using the history information stored in the history storage means (executing the result calculation process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) function) and
Mode notification control means (main side in the thirteenth embodiment) for controlling mode notification means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that the mode information derived by the information derivation means is notified a function of executing the second timer interrupt processing and display processing of the MPU 82;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the mode information can be notified by the mode notification means even in the settable state.

According to the feature O1, since the setting value to be used is set, the player expects that a more advantageous setting value is to be used. Also, when a specific event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. Since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized alteration of the history information. Further, mode information corresponding to the result of the game is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means, and the derived mode information is reported. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the specific event. In this case, the mode information can be notified by the mode notification means even if the setting is possible. As a result, it is possible to set the setting value in a mode corresponding to the content of the reported mode information while confirming the content of the mode information. Therefore, it is possible to suitably manage the gaming machine.

Feature O2. Means for controlling the setting notification means (setting display device 205) so as to notify the setting value in the setting possible state (executing the processing of step S7203 and step S7207 to step S7212 of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature O1, characterized by comprising a function to

According to the feature O2, in the settable state, the setting notification means notifies the set value, and the mode notification means notifies the mode information. As a result, the manager of the gaming hall confirms the content of the mode information notified by the mode notification means, and the desired set value based on the content of the mode information is notified by the setting notification means. Setting work can be performed until Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency for setting the desired set value based on the content of the mode information.

Feature O3. The game machine according to feature O2, wherein the setting notification means is mounted on the mounting surface (the element mounting surface of the main control board 81) on which the mode notification means is mounted.

According to feature O3, since the setting notification means is mounted on the mounting surface on which the mode notification means is mounted, the content of the mode information notified by the mode notification means and the setting notified by the setting notification means It becomes easier to check both values.

Feature O4. The situation generation means, when the supply of operating power is started, causes the situation to occur (that both the pressing operation of the reset button 196 and the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 195 are being performed, and that the setting update display flag is set to "1" is set), the settable state is set based on the occurrence of
The mode notification control means is characterized in that, when the supply of operating power is started and the settable state is reached, when the settable state is started, the notification corresponding to the mode information is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3.

According to the feature O4, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting becomes possible based on the occurrence of the situation occurrence trigger. need to get started. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of illegally setting the setting value. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started and the settable state is reached, notification corresponding to the mode information is started when the settable state is started. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the mode information from being started before the manager of the game hall starts the work for setting the setting value.

Feature O5. Check control means for causing the mode notification means to perform a check display that enables confirmation of whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the mode notification means (processing of steps S4926 and S7302 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment function),
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O4, wherein the check control means causes the mode notification means to start the check display when the settable state ends.

According to feature O5, since a check display is provided to enable confirmation of whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the mode notification means, the manager of the gaming hall checks the check display to confirm that the mode notification means is abnormal. It becomes possible to specify whether or not is occurring. In this case, if a settable state occurs, the check display is started when the settable state ends. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the notification corresponding to the mode information by the mode notification means in the settable state over the check display of the mode notification means.

Feature O6. The situation generation means, when the supply of operating power is started, causes the situation to occur (that both the pressing operation of the reset button 196 and the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 195 are being performed, and that the setting update display flag is set to "1" is set), the settable state is set based on the occurrence of
When the operation power supply is started and a predetermined situation (a situation in which the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process are not executed) occurs in which the setting is not possible, the mode notification control means displays the check display. is finished, the notification corresponding to the mode information is started (the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204), the gaming machine according to feature O5.

According to feature O6, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting becomes possible based on the occurrence of the situation occurrence trigger. need to get started. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of illegally setting the setting value. In this case, if a predetermined situation is reached in which the setting is not possible when the supply of the operating power is started, the notification corresponding to the mode information is started after the check display ends. This makes it possible to give priority to the check display over the start of notification corresponding to the mode information when the setting is not possible.

Feature O7. A mode information storage means (computation result storage area 252 in the thirteenth embodiment) for storing a plurality of the mode information derived by the information derivation means,
The mode notification control means is
Sequential notification control means (step of main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for controlling the aspect notification means so that notifications corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means are sequentially executed A function to execute the processing of S7408 to step S7414);
When the display for check ends after the end of the settable state, the mode notification means performs notification from the type of the mode information that was subject to notification immediately before the display for check is started. Notification resuming means (function for executing the processing of steps S7419 and S7420 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for controlling the
The gaming machine according to feature O5 or O6, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature O7, since the mode notification means sequentially performs notification corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the contents of the plurality of mode information by checking the mode notification means. becomes possible. In this case, when the display for checking ends after the end of the settable state, the notification is executed from the type of mode information that was subject to notification immediately before the display for checking was started. As a result, after the display for check ends, the manager of the game hall can confirm from the contents of the mode information of the type interrupted by the occurrence of the display for check.

Feature O8. The sequential notification control means changes the type of the mode information to be notified based on the lapse of a predetermined notification continuation period (display continuation period),
When the display for checking ends after the end of the settable state, the notification restarting means performs notification from the mode information of the type that was subject to notification immediately before the display for checking was started. wherein the notification corresponding to the aspect information of the type is provided over the predetermined notification continuation period regardless of the remaining predetermined notification continuation period when the check display is started The gaming machine according to feature O7, characterized in that it is intended to be executed.

According to feature O8, when the display for checking ends after the end of the settable state, notification is performed from the type of mode information that was subject to notification immediately before the display for checking was started. , the notification of this type of mode information is executed for a predetermined notification continuation period after the end of the check display. As a result, after the display for check ends, it is possible to sufficiently secure an opportunity for the manager of the game hall to confirm the contents of the type of mode information interrupted by the occurrence of the display for check.

For the configuration of features O1 to O8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the feature group O, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special game state. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special game state based on a game ball entering a part. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic P group>
Feature P1. Display object storage means (calculation result storage area 252 in the thirteenth embodiment) for storing a plurality of display object information (base values);
controlling predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that display corresponding to each of the plurality of display target information stored in the display target storage means is sequentially executed; Predetermined display control means (second timer interrupt processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment and function to execute display processing) and
with
The predetermined display control means, when a predetermined situation in which display corresponding to the display target information is not performed ends, causes display to start from the display target information of the type that was a display target immediately before the predetermined situation started. wherein the display corresponding to the display target information of the type is performed for the predetermined display duration regardless of the remaining predetermined display duration when the predetermined situation is initiated. A game machine characterized by comprising a display resuming means (a function of executing the processing of steps S7419 and S7420 of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that is executed over a period of time.

According to feature P1, the predetermined display means sequentially executes display corresponding to each of a plurality of display target information, and changes the type of display target information to be displayed based on the elapse of a predetermined display duration period. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can grasp the contents of the plurality of pieces of display target information by checking the predetermined display means. In this case, when the predetermined situation ends, display is executed from the type of display target information that was the display target immediately before the predetermined situation started, and the display target information of the type is displayed. It is executed over a predetermined display continuation period after the end of the predetermined situation. As a result, after the predetermined situation ends, it is possible to sufficiently secure an opportunity for the manager of the game hall to confirm the contents of the display target information of the type interrupted by the occurrence of the predetermined situation.

Feature P2. Separate display control means for causing the predetermined display means to perform separate display different from the display corresponding to the display target information (function for executing the processing of steps S4926 and S7302 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) ,
the predetermined situation is a situation in which the separate display is performed;
The display resuming means, when the separate display is finished, executes the display from the display object information of the type that was the display object immediately before the separate display was started, and The display corresponding to the display target information of the type is executed over the predetermined display continuation period regardless of the remaining predetermined display continuation period when the different display is started. The gaming machine according to feature P1.

According to the characteristic P2, when a situation arises in which another display is to be performed by the predetermined display means, the display corresponding to the information to be displayed is not performed, so it is possible to give priority to the different display. In this case, when the separate display ends, the display is executed from the type of display target information that was the display target immediately before the start of the separate display, and the display of the display target information of the type is It is executed over a predetermined display continuation period after the end of the separate display. As a result, after the end of the separate display, it is possible to sufficiently secure an opportunity for the manager of the game hall to confirm the content of the display target information of the type interrupted by the occurrence of the separate display.

Feature P3. Characteristic feature P2, characterized in that the separate display control means causes the prescribed display means to perform, as the separate display, a check display enabling confirmation of whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the prescribed display means. game machine.

According to the feature P3, since the display for checking is performed so that it can be confirmed whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the predetermined display means, the administrator of the game hall confirms the display for check to confirm that the predetermined display means is abnormal. It is possible to identify whether or not In this case, the configuration of feature P1 is provided, and when the check display ends, display is performed from the type of display target information that was the display target immediately before the check display was started. , the display of the display target information of the type concerned is executed for a predetermined display continuation period after the end of the check display. As a result, after completion of the check display, it is possible to sufficiently secure an opportunity for the manager of the game hall to check the content of the display object information of the type interrupted by the occurrence of the check display.

Feature P4. The predetermined display control means is
means for starting to display the display target information before the check display is started in a first situation (a situation in which set value update processing is executed) when supply of operating power is started (first 13, the function of executing the process of step S5101 of the main side MPU 82 in the embodiment);
In a second situation (a situation in which the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process are not executed) when the supply of operating power is started, the display target information is started to be displayed until the check display is finished. a means for starting the display of the display target information after the check display ends (function for executing the process of step S4932 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature P3, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature P4, depending on the situation when the supply of operating power is started, the display of the information to be displayed is started before the check display is started, and the display is displayed until the check display is finished. It is possible to cause a case in which the display of the display target information is started after the check display ends without the display of the target information being started.

Feature P5. Means (function of executing the processing of step S805 of the main MPU 82) for executing the profit giving process (step S805 of the main MPU 82) in a manner corresponding to the set value corresponding to the player's advantage;
When the supply of the operating power is started, the situation occurrence trigger (both pressing operation of the reset button 196 and ON operation of the setting key insertion part 195 are being performed, "1" is set to the setting update display flag) based on the occurrence of the check display, a settable state (setting a situation generating means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S4908 or step S4915 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that causes a value update process to be executed);
with
the first situation occurs when the configurable situation occurs;
The gaming machine according to feature P4, wherein the second situation occurs when the settable situation does not occur.

According to the feature P5, since the setting values to be used are set, the player expects that more advantageous setting values are to be used. In this case, if a settable situation occurs when the supply of operating power is started, the display of the information to be displayed is started before the check display is started, and when the supply of the operating power is started If the settable state does not occur, the display of the display object information is not started until the check display ends, and the display object information starts to be displayed after the check display ends. As a result, when the setting becomes possible, the information to be displayed can be displayed in the setting possible state, while when the setting becomes not possible, the information to be displayed is displayed after the display for checking ends. It is possible to make it start.

Feature P6. When a specific event (entering a game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34) occurs due to the execution of the game, it corresponds to it history storage execution means (function for executing normal ball entry management processing of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) for storing history information of games to be played in the history storage means (normal counter area 251);
Information derivation means for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to game results using the history information stored in the history storage means (executing the result calculation process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) function) and
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P5, wherein the display target information is the mode information.

According to feature P6, when a specific event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. Since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized alteration of the history information. Further, mode information corresponding to the result of the game is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means, and the derived mode information is displayed. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the specific event. In this case, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described in the feature P1.

For the configuration of features P1 to P6, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the group of characteristics P, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special game state. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special game state based on a game ball entering a part. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to appropriately perform display on the predetermined display means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic Q group>
Feature Q1. a first processing group executing means (a function of executing the specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) for executing the processing of the first processing group (specific control processing);
Second processing group execution means (function for executing non-specific control processing of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) for executing processing of the second processing group (non-specific control processing);
When the process of the first process group is executed, information can be written and read, while when the process of the second process group is executed, information can be read, but information a first process-compatible storage area (the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) in which writing of the
When the process of the second process group is executed, information can be written and read. On the other hand, when the process of the first process group is executed, information can be read, but information a second process-compatible storage area (the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) in which writing of the
with
The second process group executing means performs a predetermined event (an event in which the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments makes an affirmative determination in step S6003, an affirmative determination in step S6009) as the process of the second process group. event, an event determined affirmatively in step S6014, or an event determined affirmatively in step S6505), the predetermined event occurrence information (any of the abnormality flags 213l to 213t) is set to " 1”) (function of executing the processing of step S6004, step S6010, step S6015 or step S6506 of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) with
The first process group execution means is a special process execution means (a thirteenth In the embodiment of the main MPU 82, step S6602, step S6603, step S6605, step S6606, step S6608, step S6609, step S6611, step S6612, step S6614, step S6615, step S6617, step S6618, step S6620, step S6622 or The function of executing the process of step S6624, the process of step S8006 of the main MPU 82 in the 14th embodiment, the process of step S8013, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8102, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8105, step affirmative determination in step S8108, affirmative determination in step S8111, affirmative determination in step S8115, and affirmative determination in step S8118. Amusement machine.

According to feature Q1, when the process of the first process group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the first process is targeted for writing information, but the storage area corresponding to the second process is not targeted for writing information. When the process of the second process group is executed, the information is written in the memory area corresponding to the second process, but the information is not written in the memory area corresponding to the first process. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the types of storage areas to which information is written when the processes of the first process group are executed and when the processes of the second process group are executed. On the other hand, even when the process of the first process group is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the first process but also from the storage area corresponding to the second process. Even when the process is executed, it is possible to read information not only from the storage area corresponding to the second process but also from the storage area corresponding to the first process. As a result, information corresponding to the processing result of one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group can be referred to in the other processing.

In this case, if it is specified that the predetermined event has occurred in the processing of the second processing group and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, then in the processing of the first processing group Corresponding special processing is performed. Accordingly, by executing the process for specifying whether or not the predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. Even with a configuration with a margin, it is possible to execute special processing in response to the occurrence of a predetermined event as processing of the first processing group. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably execute the processing in the control means.

Feature Q2. The first process group executing means is a means for executing, as the process of the first process group, grant opportunity processing for specifying whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred (in the thirteenth embodiment, the main side MPU 82 Function to execute the processing of step S5602, step S5605, step S5608, step S5611, step S5614, step S5617, step S5620 or step S5622; S7809, step S7811, step S7813, step S7815 or step S7817 function),
The gaming machine according to feature Q1, wherein the special process is a process of nullifying the awarding opportunity of the privilege specified in the awarding opportunity process.

According to the feature Q2, it is specified whether or not a privilege granting opportunity has occurred in the granting trigger processing, which is the processing of the first processing group, and the predetermined event is detected in the occurrence information storage processing, which is the processing of the second processing group. occurrence is identified and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process, the special process, which is the process of the first process group, nullifies the opportunity to grant the privilege. . Accordingly, by executing the process for specifying whether or not the predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. While providing a margin, it is possible to collectively perform the processing for identifying the occurrence of the opportunity to give the privilege and the processing for invalidating the opportunity to give the privilege in the processing of the first processing group.

Feature Q3. The first processing group executing means,
As the processing of the first processing group, means for executing a reservation process for withholding the granting of the privilege when it is specified in the granting opportunity processing that the privilege granting opportunity has occurred (14th a function of executing the processing of steps S8017 to S8018 or steps S8021 to S8022 of the main MPU 82 in the embodiment of );
As the processing of the first processing group, if the special processing is not executed after the reservation processing is executed, means for executing privilege grant processing for granting the privilege reserved in the reservation processing ( A function of executing the process of step S8004 or step S8011 of the main MPU 82 in the fourteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature Q2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature Q3, when it is specified that a privilege granting opportunity has occurred in the processing of the first processing group, the granting of the privilege is temporarily suspended, and then the processing of the second processing group performs the second processing. If the predetermined event occurrence information is not stored in the processing corresponding storage area and the processing of invalidating the opportunity to grant the privilege is not executed in the processing of the first processing group, the above-mentioned temporary Reserved benefits are granted. As a result, even if the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, is not executed between the grant opportunity process and the privilege grant process in the process of the first process group, when the predetermined event has not occurred, (2) makes it possible to grant a privilege in response to a privilege granting opportunity, and to disable the privilege granting opportunity by invalidating the privilege granting opportunity when a predetermined event occurs.

Feature Q4. The reservation process is a process of acquiring numerical information used in the lottery process from numerical information updating means (win random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, reach random number counter C3),
The gaming machine according to feature Q3, wherein the privilege giving process is a process of storing the numerical information in the storage area corresponding to the first process so that the numerical information can be used in the lottery process.

According to feature Q4, in the configuration in which, when an opportunity to grant a privilege occurs, numerical information is acquired from the numerical information updating means and lottery processing is executed using the acquired numerical information, the privilege is granted. When the trigger occurs, although the numerical information is acquired from the numerical information updating means, it is retained, and when it is specified that the predetermined event has not occurred after that, the retained numerical information is It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process so that it can be used in the lottery process. As a result, it is possible to obtain the numerical information at the timing when the privilege is given, and at the same time, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described in the feature Q3.

Feature Q5. The first process group executing means stores the predetermined event occurrence information in the second process corresponding storage area in a situation where the awarding of the privilege is reserved in the reservation process as the process of the first process group. Equipped with means for executing information specifying processing for specifying whether or not (function for executing the processing of step S8002 or step S8009 of the main MPU 82 in the fourteenth embodiment),
The special process executing means executes the special process when it is specified in the information specifying process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process. The gaming machine according to feature Q3 or Q4.

According to the feature Q5, the information specifying process is executed for specifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process in a situation where the provision of the privilege is reserved in the reservation process, When it is specified that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored, the opportunity to give the privilege is invalidated as special processing. This makes it possible to prevent the information specifying process from being executed in a situation where the provision of the privilege is not reserved.

Feature Q6. means for starting a predetermined unit process (first timer interrupt process) when a process execution trigger occurs (function for executing the first timer interrupt process of the main MPU 82 in the fourteenth embodiment);
The predetermined unit processing includes the generated information storage processing, the special processing, the granting trigger processing, the reservation processing, and the privilege granting processing,
Characteristic features Q3 through Q3, characterized in that the processing order of the predetermined unit processes in one processing time is set so that the occurrence information storage process is performed after the process of the first process group. The gaming machine according to any one of Q5.

According to feature Q6, the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, is arranged to follow the process of the first process group in the predetermined unit process in one process cycle, while performing the above-described processing. It is possible to achieve excellent effects.

Feature Q7. In addition to the generated information storage process, the predetermined unit process includes processes of the second process group (information clear process, test firing test process, non-specific control timer update process, information abnormality monitoring process, and check processing) is included,
The processing order of the predetermined unit processes in one processing cycle is set so that the processing of the second processing group is in the processing order after the processing of the first processing group. The gaming machine described in Q6.

According to the feature Q7, in the predetermined unit processing in one processing round, the processing of the second processing group is aggregated as a processing order after the processing of the first processing group, so that the predetermined unit in one processing round It eliminates the need for repeated transitions between the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the processing. In addition, even in this configuration, the configuration of the feature Q3 is provided, and when it is specified that the privilege granting opportunity has occurred in the processing of the first processing group, the granting of the privilege is temporarily suspended, and then When the predetermined event occurrence information is not stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process in the process of the second process group and the process of invalidating the granting opportunity of the privilege is not executed in the process of the first process group, The temporarily withheld privilege is granted in the processing of the first processing group. As a result, even if the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, is not executed between the grant opportunity process and the privilege grant process in the process of the first process group, when the predetermined event has not occurred, (2) makes it possible to grant a privilege in response to a privilege granting opportunity, and to disable the privilege granting opportunity by invalidating the privilege granting opportunity when a predetermined event occurs.

Feature Q8. The first process group executing means stores grant opportunity information (confirmation flag group 211d Setting "1" to each confirmation flag) means for executing grant trigger processing (step S5603, step S5606, step S5609, step S5612, step S5615, step S5618 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment , a function to execute the processing of step S5621 or step S5623),
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q7, wherein the special process is a process of erasing the grant opportunity information stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process.

According to the feature Q8, when it is specified that a privilege granting opportunity has occurred in the granting triggering process, which is the process of the first processing group, the granting triggering information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process. When the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, specifies that the predetermined event has occurred and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process, the first process The grant trigger information in the storage area corresponding to the first process is erased in the special process, which is the group process. Accordingly, by executing the process for specifying whether or not the predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. In the process of the first processing group while using the storage area corresponding to the first processing, the processing for specifying the occurrence of the granting opportunity of the privilege and the processing for invalidating the granting opportunity of the privilege while giving a margin It is possible to do it collectively.

Feature Q9. The first process group execution means is means for executing a privilege grant process as the process of the first process group when the grant trigger information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process (thirteenth embodiment). function to execute the processing of step S5518, step S5704 or step S5709 of the main side MPU 82 in
The gaming machine according to feature Q8, wherein the occurrence information storage process and the special process are executed after the grant opportunity process is executed and before the privilege grant process is executed.

According to feature Q9, the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, and the special process, which is the process of the first process group, are performed after the application trigger process, which is the process of the first process group, is executed. It is executed before the privilege provision processing, which is the processing of the first processing group, is executed. Accordingly, by executing the process for specifying whether or not the predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. It is possible to invalidate the opportunity to give the privilege before executing the privilege giving process when a predetermined event occurs while providing a margin.

Characteristics Q10. means for starting a predetermined unit process (first timer interrupt process) when a process execution trigger occurs (function for executing the first timer interrupt process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The first processing group executing means executes, as the processing of the first processing group, information identifying processing for identifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing correspondence storage area (first 13 of the main MPU 82 in the embodiment), and
The special process executing means executes the special process when it is specified in the information specifying process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process,
The predetermined unit processing includes the generated information storage processing, the granting trigger processing, the privilege granting processing, and the information specifying processing,
The occurrence information storage process is executed after the grant opportunity process is executed, the information identification process is executed after the occurrence information storage process is executed, and the privilege grant process is executed after the information identification process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature Q9, wherein the processing order of the predetermined unit processes in one processing time is set so as to be executed.

According to feature Q10, in a configuration in which the predetermined unit process includes occurrence information storage processing, grant trigger processing, privilege grant processing, and information specifying processing, the occurrence information storage processing is executed after the grant trigger processing is executed, Only by setting the execution order of the processes in the predetermined unit process so that the information specifying process is executed after the occurrence information storage process is executed, and the privilege provision process is executed after the information specifying process is executed, It is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above.

Feature Q11. The first processing group executing means executes, as the processing of the first processing group, information identifying processing for identifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing correspondence storage area (first In the thirteenth embodiment, the main MPU 82 has a function of executing the processing of steps S6601, S6604, S6607, S6610, S6613, S6616, S6619, or S6621. S8002, step S8009, step S8102, step S8105, step S8108, step S8111, step S8115, step S8118 function),
The special process executing means executes the special process when it is specified in the information specifying process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process,
The second processing group execution means is means for executing, as the processing of the second processing group, occurrence information deletion processing for deleting the predetermined event occurrence information after the information specifying processing is executed (the thirteenth and fourteenth A gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q10, characterized in that it has a function of executing information clearing processing of the main MPU 82 in the embodiment.

According to the feature Q11, when it is specified that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process in the information specifying process which is the process of the first process group, the process of the first process group is performed. In the configuration in which special processing is executed, after the information specifying processing is executed, the predetermined event occurrence information is erased by the occurrence information erasing processing, which is the processing of the second processing group. Thereby, when the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, the predetermined event occurrence information is erased in the processing of the second processing group while the special processing is executed for the predetermined event occurrence information. becomes possible.

Feature Q12. The second processing group execution means is means for executing, as the processing of the second processing group, event occurrence identification processing for identifying whether or not the predetermined event has occurred (steps in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments). S6001 to step S6003, step S6007 to step S6009 or step S6013 to step S6014 function),
When the occurrence of the predetermined event is specified in the event occurrence identification process, the occurrence information storage process stores the predetermined event occurrence information in the storage area corresponding to the second process. is the configuration,
The gaming machine according to feature Q11, wherein when the event occurrence specifying process is executed, the occurrence information erasing process is carried out before the event occurrence specifying process is carried out.

According to feature Q12, when it is specified that a predetermined event has occurred in the event occurrence specifying process, which is the process of the second process group, the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, performs the second In a configuration in which predetermined event occurrence information is stored in a storage area corresponding to processing, when event occurrence identification processing is executed, generation for erasing predetermined event occurrence information before the event occurrence identification processing is executed Information erasure processing is executed. In other words, the event occurrence identification process and the occurrence information storage process are executed after the predetermined event occurrence information is once erased. Thereby, when the process for storing the predetermined event occurrence information in the storage area corresponding to the second process is executed in the process of the second process group and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process In the configuration in which the special process is executed in the process of the first process group, while preventing the special process from being executed multiple times by storing the predetermined event occurrence information once, appropriate in the process of the second process group It is possible to execute the occurrence information erasing process for erasing the predetermined event occurrence information at appropriate timing.

Feature Q13. The first processing group executing means, as the processing of the first processing group, based on the occurrence of a predetermined measurement start event (step S6104 or step S6303 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) , Predetermined measurement start for starting measurement of a predetermined monitoring period using a predetermined measurement storage area (special electrical monitoring delay timer counter 211b, general electrical monitoring delay timer counter 211c) provided in the storage area corresponding to the first process. means for executing processing (function for executing the processing of step S6106 or step S6305 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments),
In the occurrence information storage process, when the predetermined corresponding event occurs in a situation where the predetermined corresponding event should not occur due to the relationship with the predetermined monitoring period, the occurrence of the predetermined event is regarded as the occurrence of the second process corresponding storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q12, wherein the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the game machine.

According to feature Q13, when a predetermined corresponding event occurs in a situation in which the predetermined corresponding event should not occur due to the relationship with the predetermined monitoring period, the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding storage area as the occurrence of the predetermined event. is stored and special processing is executed, processing for performing measurement for a predetermined monitoring period using a predetermined measurement storage area can be performed in the processing of the first processing group.

Feature Q14. The first processing group execution means is means for executing processing for specifying whether or not the predetermined measurement start event has occurred as the processing of the first processing group (in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, The gaming machine according to feature Q13, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S6103 or step S6302 of the main side MPU 82 .

According to feature Q14, in a configuration in which a process for identifying whether or not a predetermined measurement start event has occurred in the processing of the first processing group, the configuration of feature Q13 is provided, and a predetermined storage for measurement is provided. A process for measuring a predetermined monitoring period using an area is performed in the process of the first process group. This makes it possible to integrate the processing for measuring the predetermined monitoring period into the processing of the first processing group.

Feature Q15. The second processing group executing means, as the processing of the second processing group, based on occurrence of a specific measurement start event (affirmative determination in step S6013 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) , a specific measurement start process for starting measurement of a specific monitoring period using specific measurement storage areas (first to eighth winning monitor timer counters 213a to 213h) provided in the second process corresponding storage area. The gaming machine according to feature Q13 or Q14, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing the processing of step S6016 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments).

According to the characteristic Q15, the processing for measuring the specific monitoring period based on the occurrence of the specific measurement start event is included in the second processing group. As a result, the processing for measuring various periods can be distributed between the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group for each type of period to be measured.

Feature Q16. The second processing group execution means, as the processing of the second processing group, when the specific response event occurs in a situation where the specific response event should not occur in relation to the specific monitoring period, It is characterized by having means for executing the process of storing the predetermined event occurrence information in the storage area corresponding to two processes (function for executing the process of step S6015 of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments). The game machine according to feature Q15.

According to feature Q16, when a predetermined corresponding event occurs in a situation in which the predetermined corresponding event should not occur due to the relationship with the predetermined monitoring period measured in the processing of the first processing group, the predetermined event is determined as the occurrence of the predetermined event. In a situation in which the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing and the special processing is executed, and the specific event should not occur in relation to the specific monitoring period measured in the processing of the second processing group. Even when a specific corresponding event has occurred, the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second process corresponding storage area and the special process is executed. As a result, the processing for measuring each period for specifying whether or not an event that triggers the storage of the predetermined event occurrence information in the storage area corresponding to the second process occurs , it is possible to divide the processing into the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group.

For the configuration of features Q1 to Q16, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group R>
Feature R1. a first processing group executing means (a function of executing the specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) for executing the processing of the first processing group (specific control processing);
Second processing group execution means (function for executing non-specific control processing of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) for executing processing of the second processing group (non-specific control processing);
When the process of the first process group is executed, information can be written and read, while when the process of the second process group is executed, information can be read, but information a first process-compatible storage area (the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) in which writing of the
When the process of the second process group is executed, information can be written and read. On the other hand, when the process of the first process group is executed, information can be read, but information a second process-compatible storage area (the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) in which writing of the
with
The second processing group executing means,
As the processing of the second processing group, a predetermined event (an event in which affirmative determination is made in step S6003 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, an event in which affirmative determination is made in step S6009, or an affirmative determination in step S6014 A means for executing an event occurrence identification process for identifying whether or not an event occurring) has occurred (steps S6001 to S6003, steps S6007 to S6009 or steps S6013 to S6014 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments function) and
As the processing of the second processing group, when the occurrence of the predetermined event is identified by the event occurrence identification processing, predetermined event occurrence information (abnormal flags 213l to 213r) (executing step S6004, step S6010 or step S6015 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) function) and
with
The first processing group executing means,
means for executing information specifying processing for specifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area (in the thirteenth embodiment, steps S6601, S6604, S6607, and Function of executing the processing of step S6610, step S6613, step S6616, step S6619 or step S6621; S8115, the function of executing the processing of step S8118);
As the processing of the first processing group, special processing executing means ( In the thirteenth embodiment, step S6602, step S6603, step S6605, step S6606, step S6608, step S6609, step S6611, step S6612, step S6614, step S6615, step S6617, step S6618, step S6620 or step The function of executing the process of S6622, the process of step S8006 of the main MPU 82 in the fourteenth embodiment, the process of step S8013, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8102, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8105, and step S8108. affirmative determination processing, step S8111 affirmative determination processing, step S8115 affirmative determination processing, step S8118 affirmative determination processing);
with
The second process group executing means, as a process of the second process group, deletes the predetermined event occurrence information before the event occurrence specifying process is executed when the event occurrence specifying process is executed. A game machine characterized by comprising means for executing information erasing processing (function for executing information clearing processing of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments).

According to feature R1, when the process of the first process group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the first process is targeted for writing information, but the storage area corresponding to the second process is not targeted for writing information. When the process of the second process group is executed, the information is written in the memory area corresponding to the second process, but the information is not written in the memory area corresponding to the first process. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the types of storage areas to which information is written when the processes of the first process group are executed and when the processes of the second process group are executed. On the other hand, even when the process of the first process group is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the first process but also from the storage area corresponding to the second process. Even when the process is executed, it is possible to read information not only from the storage area corresponding to the second process but also from the storage area corresponding to the first process. As a result, information corresponding to the processing result of one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group can be referred to in the other processing.

In this case, if it is specified that the predetermined event has occurred in the processing of the second processing group and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, then in the processing of the first processing group Corresponding special processing is performed. Accordingly, by executing the process for specifying whether or not the predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. Even with a configuration with a margin, it is possible to execute special processing in response to the occurrence of a predetermined event as processing of the first processing group. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably execute the processing in the control means.

Further, when it is specified that a predetermined event has occurred in the event occurrence specifying process, which is the process of the second process group, the storage area corresponding to the second process is specified in the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second process group. In a configuration in which predetermined event occurrence information is stored in a storage device, occurrence information deletion processing for deleting the predetermined event occurrence information is performed before the event occurrence identification processing is executed when the event occurrence identification processing is executed. executed. In other words, the event occurrence identification process and the occurrence information storage process are executed after the predetermined event occurrence information is once erased. Thereby, when the process for storing the predetermined event occurrence information in the storage area corresponding to the second process is executed in the process of the second process group and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process In the configuration in which the special process is executed in the process of the first process group, while preventing the special process from being executed multiple times by storing the predetermined event occurrence information once, appropriate in the process of the second process group It is possible to execute the occurrence information erasing process for erasing the predetermined event occurrence information at appropriate timing.

Feature R2. The information identifying process is executed after the event occurrence identifying process is executed and before the occurrence information erasing process corresponding to the next execution of the event occurrence identifying process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature R1.

According to the feature R2, when it is specified that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process in the information specifying process which is the process of the first process group, the process of the first process group is performed. In the configuration in which special processing is executed, after the information specifying processing is executed, the predetermined event occurrence information is erased by the occurrence information erasing processing, which is the processing of the second processing group. Thereby, when the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, the predetermined event occurrence information is erased in the processing of the second processing group while the special processing is executed for the predetermined event occurrence information. becomes possible.

Feature R3. The first process group executing means is a means for executing, as the process of the first process group, grant opportunity processing for specifying whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred (in the thirteenth embodiment, the main side MPU 82 Function to execute the processing of step S5602, step S5605, step S5608, step S5611, step S5614, step S5617, step S5620 or step S5622; S7809, step S7811, step S7813, step S7815 or step S7817 function),
The gaming machine according to feature R1 or R2, wherein the special process is a process of nullifying the awarding opportunity of the privilege specified in the awarding opportunity process.

According to the feature R3, it is specified whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred in the grant trigger processing, which is the processing of the first processing group, and the predetermined event is detected in the occurrence information storage processing, which is the processing of the second processing group. occurrence is identified and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process, the special process, which is the process of the first process group, nullifies the opportunity to grant the privilege. . Accordingly, by executing the process for specifying whether or not the predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. While providing a margin, it is possible to collectively perform the processing for identifying the occurrence of the opportunity to give the privilege and the processing for invalidating the opportunity to give the privilege in the processing of the first processing group.

Feature R4. The first process group executing means stores grant opportunity information (confirmation flag group 211d Setting "1" to each confirmation flag) means for executing grant trigger processing (step S5603, step S5606, step S5609, step S5612, step S5615, step S5618 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment , a function to execute the processing of step S5621 or step S5623),
The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R3, wherein the special process is a process of erasing the grant opportunity information stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process.

According to the feature R4, when it is specified that a privilege granting opportunity has occurred in the granting triggering process, which is the processing of the first processing group, the granting triggering information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process, and then When the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, specifies that the predetermined event has occurred and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process, the first process The grant trigger information in the storage area corresponding to the first process is erased in the special process, which is the group process. Accordingly, by executing the process for specifying whether or not the predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. In the process of the first processing group while using the storage area corresponding to the first processing, the processing for specifying the occurrence of the granting opportunity of the privilege and the processing for invalidating the granting opportunity of the privilege while giving a margin It is possible to do it collectively.

Feature R5. The first process group execution means is means for executing a privilege grant process as the process of the first process group when the grant trigger information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process (thirteenth embodiment). function to execute the processing of step S5518, step S5704 or step S5709 of the main side MPU 82 in
The gaming machine according to feature R4, wherein the event occurrence specifying process and the information specifying process are executed after the granting trigger process is executed and before the privilege granting process is executed. .

According to feature R5, the event occurrence specifying process, which is the process of the second process group, and the information specifying process, which is the process of the first process group, are performed after the application trigger process, which is the process of the first process group. is executed before the privilege provision process, which is the process of the first process group, is executed. Accordingly, by executing the process for specifying whether or not the predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. It is possible to invalidate the opportunity to give the privilege before executing the privilege giving process when a predetermined event occurs while providing a margin.

Feature R6. means for starting a predetermined unit process (first timer interrupt process) when a process execution trigger occurs (function for executing the first timer interrupt process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
the predetermined unit processing includes the event occurrence identification processing, the grant trigger processing, the privilege grant processing, and the information identification processing;
The event occurrence identification process is executed after the grant trigger process is executed, the information identification process is executed after the event occurrence identification process is executed, and the privilege grant process is executed after the information identification process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature R5, wherein the processing order of the predetermined unit processing in one processing cycle is set so that is executed.

According to the feature R6, in a configuration in which the predetermined unit process includes an event occurrence specifying process, a grant triggering process, a privilege granting process, and an information specifying process, the event occurrence specifying process is executed after the granting trigger process is executed, Only by setting the execution order of the processes in the predetermined unit process so that the information specifying process is executed after the event occurrence specifying process is executed, and the privilege provision process is executed after the information specifying process is executed, It is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above.

For the configuration of features R1 to R6, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature S group>
Feature S1. a first processing group executing means (a function of executing the specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) for executing the processing of the first processing group (specific control processing);
Second processing group execution means (function for executing non-specific control processing of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) for executing processing of the second processing group (non-specific control processing);
When the process of the first process group is executed, information can be written and read, while when the process of the second process group is executed, information can be read, but information a first process-compatible storage area (the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) in which writing of the
When the process of the second process group is executed, information can be written and read. On the other hand, when the process of the first process group is executed, information can be read, but information a second process-compatible storage area (the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) in which writing of the
with
The first processing group executing means, as the processing of the first processing group, based on the occurrence of a predetermined measurement start event (step S6104 or step S6303 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) , Predetermined measurement start for starting measurement of a predetermined monitoring period using a predetermined measurement storage area (special electrical monitoring delay timer counter 211b, general electrical monitoring delay timer counter 211c) provided in the storage area corresponding to the first process. means for executing processing (function for executing the processing of step S6106 or step S6305 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments),
The second processing group execution means performs a predetermined response when a predetermined response event occurs in a situation in which the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period as the processing of the second processing group. A game machine characterized by comprising predetermined corresponding execution means for executing processing (function for executing the processing of step S6004, step S6010 or step S6015 of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments).

According to feature S1, when the process of the first process group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the first process is targeted for writing information, but the storage area corresponding to the second process is not targeted for writing information. When the process of the second process group is executed, the information is written in the memory area corresponding to the second process, but the information is not written in the memory area corresponding to the first process. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the types of storage areas to which information is written when the processes of the first process group are executed and when the processes of the second process group are executed. On the other hand, even when the process of the first process group is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the first process but also from the storage area corresponding to the second process. Even when the process is executed, it is possible to read information not only from the storage area corresponding to the second process but also from the storage area corresponding to the first process. As a result, information corresponding to the processing result of one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group can be referred to in the other processing.

In this case, when a predetermined response event occurs in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur due to the relationship with the predetermined monitoring period, the predetermined response processing is executed in the processing of the second processing group. Accordingly, by executing the process for specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process that can be executed as the process of the first process group It is possible to have some leeway. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably execute the processing in the control means.

Further, in the configuration in which the predetermined response process is executed in the process of the second process group when the predetermined response event occurs in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur due to the relationship with the predetermined monitoring period, the predetermined response process is performed. It becomes possible to perform the processing for performing the measurement for the predetermined monitoring period using the measurement storage area in the processing of the first processing group.

Feature S2. The first processing group execution means is means for executing processing for specifying whether or not the predetermined measurement start event has occurred as the processing of the first processing group (in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, The gaming machine according to feature S1, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S6103 or step S6302 of the main side MPU 82 .

According to feature S2, in a configuration in which a process for specifying whether or not a predetermined measurement start event has occurred in the processing of the first processing group, the configuration of feature S1 is provided, and a predetermined storage for measurement is provided. A process for measuring a predetermined monitoring period using an area is performed in the process of the first process group. This makes it possible to integrate the processing for measuring the predetermined monitoring period into the processing of the first processing group.

Feature S3. The second processing group executing means, as the processing of the second processing group, based on occurrence of a specific measurement start event (affirmative determination in step S6013 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) , a specific measurement start process for starting measurement of a specific monitoring period using specific measurement storage areas (first to eighth winning monitor timer counters 213a to 213h) provided in the second process corresponding storage area. The gaming machine according to feature S1 or S2, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing the processing of step S6016 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments).

According to feature S3, the processing for measuring the specific monitoring period based on the occurrence of the specific measurement start event is included in the second processing group. As a result, the processing for measuring various periods can be distributed between the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group for each type of period to be measured.

Feature S4. The predetermined response execution means is characterized by executing the predetermined response process when the specific response event occurs in a situation where the specific response event should not occur in relation to the specific monitoring period. The gaming machine described in S3.

According to feature S4, the predetermined response process is executed when the predetermined response event occurs in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur due to the relationship with the predetermined monitoring period measured in the processing of the first processing group. In addition, the predetermined response process is executed even when the specific response event occurs in a situation where the specific response event should not occur due to the relationship with the specific monitoring period measured in the processing of the second processing group. As a result, the process of measuring each period for specifying whether or not an event that triggers the execution of the predetermined response process has occurred is performed in units of the types of periods to be measured, and the processes of the first process group and the processing of the second processing group.

Feature S5. The predetermined response process stores predetermined event occurrence information ( setting "1" to any of the abnormality flags 213l to 213r) is stored,
The first process group execution means is a special process execution means (a thirteenth In the embodiment of step S6602, step S6603, step S6605, step S6606, step S6608, step S6609, step S6611, step S6612, step S6614, step S6615, step S6617, step S6618, step S6620 or step S6622 of the main MPU 82 In the fourteenth embodiment, the processing of step S8006 of the main MPU 82, the processing of step S8013, the processing of making an affirmative determination in step S8102, the processing of making an affirmative determination in step S8105, and the processing of making an affirmative determination in step S8108. processing for making an affirmative determination, processing for making an affirmative determination in step S8111, processing for making an affirmative determination in step S8115, and processing for making an affirmative determination in step S8118). The game machine according to any one of S1 to S4.

According to the feature S5, when a predetermined response event occurs in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur due to the relationship with the predetermined monitoring period, the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing storage area. Special processing is executed in the processing of the first processing group when the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to two processing. Accordingly, by executing the process for specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process that can be executed as the process of the first process group Even with a configuration in which a leeway is provided, it is possible to execute special processing in response to the occurrence of the predetermined response event as the processing of the first processing group.

Feature S6. The first process group executing means is a means for executing, as the process of the first process group, grant opportunity processing for specifying whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred (in the thirteenth embodiment, the main side MPU 82 Function to execute the processing of step S5602, step S5605, step S5608, step S5611, step S5614, step S5617, step S5620 or step S5622; S7809, step S7811, step S7813, step S7815 or step S7817 function),
The gaming machine according to feature S5, wherein the special process is a process of nullifying the awarding opportunity of the privilege specified in the awarding opportunity process.

According to the feature S6, it is specified whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred in the grant trigger processing, which is the processing of the first processing group, and the predetermined event is detected in the occurrence information storage processing, which is the processing of the second processing group. occurrence is identified and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process, the special process, which is the process of the first process group, nullifies the opportunity to grant the privilege. . Accordingly, by executing the process for specifying whether or not the predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. While providing a margin, it is possible to collectively perform the processing for identifying the occurrence of the opportunity to give the privilege and the processing for invalidating the opportunity to give the privilege in the processing of the first processing group.

Feature S7. The first process group executing means stores grant opportunity information (confirmation flag group 211d Setting "1" to each confirmation flag) means for executing grant trigger processing (step S5603, step S5606, step S5609, step S5612, step S5615, step S5618 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment , a function to execute the processing of step S5621 or step S5623),
The gaming machine according to feature S5, wherein the special process is a process of erasing the grant opportunity information stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process.

According to the feature S7, when it is specified that a privilege granting opportunity has occurred in the granting triggering process, which is the processing of the first processing group, the granting triggering information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first processing, and then When the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, specifies that the predetermined event has occurred and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process, the first process The grant trigger information in the storage area corresponding to the first process is erased in the special process, which is the group process. Accordingly, by executing the process for specifying whether or not the predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. In the process of the first processing group while using the storage area corresponding to the first processing, the processing for specifying the occurrence of the granting opportunity of the privilege and the processing for invalidating the granting opportunity of the privilege while giving a margin It is possible to do it collectively.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of features S1 to S7, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic T group>
Feature T1. a first processing group executing means (a function of executing the specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) for executing the processing of the first processing group (specific control processing);
Second processing group execution means (function for executing non-specific control processing of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) for executing processing of the second processing group (non-specific control processing);
When the process of the first process group is executed, information can be written and read, while when the process of the second process group is executed, information can be read, but information a first process-compatible storage area (the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) in which writing of the
When the process of the second process group is executed, information can be written and read. On the other hand, when the process of the first process group is executed, information can be read, but information a second process-compatible storage area (the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) in which writing of the
with
The second process group executing means performs a predetermined event (an event in which the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments makes an affirmative determination in step S6003, an affirmative determination in step S6009) as the process of the second process group. event (or an event determined affirmatively in step S6014) occurs, predetermined event occurrence information (setting "1" to any of the abnormality flags 213l to 213r) in the storage area corresponding to the second process. Means for executing the occurrence information storage process to be stored (function for executing the processing of step S6004, step S6010 or step S6015 of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments),
The first processing group executing means,
As the processing of the first processing group, when it is specified that a privilege granting opportunity has occurred, the granting opportunity information (each confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d is set to "1" in the storage area corresponding to the first processing) means for executing grant trigger processing (step S5603, step S5606, step S5609, step S5612, step S5615, step S5618, step S5621 or step S5623 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) functions to perform) and
As the process of the first process group, a special process of deleting the grant trigger information stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process when the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process. Special processing execution means to be executed (in the thirteenth embodiment, steps S6602, S6603, S6605, S6606, S6608, S6609, S6611, S6612, S6614, S6615, S6617, The function of executing the processing of step S6618, step S6620 or step S6622, the processing of step S8006 of the main side MPU 82 in the fourteenth embodiment, the processing of step S8013, the processing of making an affirmative determination in step S8102, and the affirmative determination in step S8105 a process of making a judgment, a process of making an affirmative judgment in step S8108, a process of making an affirmative judgment in step S8111, a process of making an affirmative judgment in step S8115, and a process of making an affirmative judgment in step S8118); ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature T1, when the process of the first process group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the first process is targeted for writing information, but the storage area corresponding to the second process is not targeted for writing information. When the process of the second process group is executed, the information is written in the memory area corresponding to the second process, but the information is not written in the memory area corresponding to the first process. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the types of storage areas to which information is written when the processes of the first process group are executed and when the processes of the second process group are executed. On the other hand, even when the process of the first process group is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the first process but also from the storage area corresponding to the second process. Even when the process is executed, it is possible to read information not only from the storage area corresponding to the second process but also from the storage area corresponding to the first process. As a result, information corresponding to the processing result of one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group can be referred to in the other processing.

In this case, when it is specified that a privilege granting opportunity has occurred in granting triggering processing, which is the processing of the first processing group, granting triggering information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first processing. When the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing by specifying that the predetermined event has occurred in the occurrence information storage processing which is the processing of the second processing group, the first processing group In the special process, which is the process, the grant trigger information in the storage area corresponding to the first process is erased. Accordingly, by executing the process for specifying whether or not the predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. In the process of the first processing group while using the storage area corresponding to the first processing, the processing for specifying the occurrence of the granting opportunity of the privilege and the processing for invalidating the granting opportunity of the privilege while giving a margin It is possible to do it collectively.

Feature T2. The first process group execution means is means for executing a privilege grant process as the process of the first process group when the grant trigger information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process (thirteenth embodiment). function to execute the processing of step S5518, step S5704 or step S5709 of the main side MPU 82 in
The gaming machine according to feature T1, wherein the occurrence information storage process and the special process are executed after the grant opportunity process is executed and before the privilege grant process is executed.

According to feature T2, the occurrence information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, and the special process, which is the process of the first process group, are executed after the application trigger process, which is the process of the first process group. It is executed before the privilege provision processing, which is the processing of the first processing group, is executed. Accordingly, by executing the process for specifying whether or not the predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. It is possible to invalidate the opportunity to give the privilege before executing the privilege giving process when a predetermined event occurs while providing a margin.

Feature T3. means for starting a predetermined unit process (first timer interrupt process) when a process execution trigger occurs (function for executing the first timer interrupt process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
The first processing group executing means executes, as the processing of the first processing group, information identifying processing for identifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing correspondence storage area (first 13 of the main MPU 82 in the embodiment), and
The special process executing means executes the special process when it is specified in the information specifying process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process,
The predetermined unit processing includes the generated information storage processing, the granting trigger processing, the privilege granting processing, and the information specifying processing,
The occurrence information storage process is executed after the grant opportunity process is executed, the information identification process is executed after the occurrence information storage process is executed, and the privilege grant process is executed after the information identification process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature T2, wherein the processing order of the predetermined unit processes in one processing time is set so as to be executed.

According to feature T3, in a configuration in which the predetermined unit processing includes occurrence information storage processing, grant trigger processing, privilege grant processing, and information specifying processing, the occurrence information storage processing is executed after the grant trigger processing is executed, Only by setting the execution order of the processes in the predetermined unit process so that the information specifying process is executed after the occurrence information storage process is executed, and the privilege provision process is executed after the information specifying process is executed, It is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above.

For the configuration of features T1 to T3, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group U>
Features U1. In a game machine provided with control means (main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes various processes,
The control means is
a first process group executing means (a function of executing the specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing the first process group process (specific control process) among the various processes;
Second processing group execution means (function for executing non-specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing the second processing group processing (non-specific control processing) among the various types of processing;
with
This game machine is
When the process of the first process group is executed, information can be written and read, while when the process of the second process group is executed, information can be read, but information A first process-compatible storage area (the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which writing of is impossible,
When the process of the second process group is executed, information can be written and read. On the other hand, when the process of the first process group is executed, information can be read, but information a second process-compatible storage area (the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which writing of the
with
The first processing group executing means, as the processing of the first processing group, stores the first transmission information (normal return command, means for executing a first transmission information storage process for storing a return command, a confirmation start command, a return command at confirmation, an update start command, a return command at update, a first pending command, a second pending command) (a thirteenth a function to execute the processing of steps S4914, S4921, S5003, S5007, S5105, S5114, S5705 or S5710 of the main MPU 82 in the embodiment),
The second processing group executing means stores the second transmission information (disconnection generation command, short circuit generation command, general electric prize winning abnormality) in the transmission information storage area when the second transmission trigger occurs as the processing of the second processing group. means for executing the second transmission information storage process for storing a command, a special electric winning abnormal command or a magnetic abnormality command (step S5404, step S5408, step S6005, step S6011 or step S6507 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment function to execute processing),
When the first transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the game machine transmits the first transmission information to a transmission target (sound and light side MPU 93), and stores the first transmission information in the transmission information storage area. 2 transmission execution means (command transmission circuit 224) for transmitting the second transmission information to a transmission target (sound and light side MPU 93) when the second transmission information is stored.

According to feature U1, when the process of the first process group is executed, the information is written in the storage area corresponding to the first process, but the information is not written in the storage area corresponding to the second process. When the process of the second process group is executed, the information is written in the memory area corresponding to the second process, but the information is not written in the memory area corresponding to the first process. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the types of storage areas to which information is written when the processes of the first process group are executed and when the processes of the second process group are executed. On the other hand, even when the process of the first process group is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the first process but also from the storage area corresponding to the second process. Even when the process is executed, it is possible to read information not only from the storage area corresponding to the second process but also from the storage area corresponding to the first process. As a result, information corresponding to the processing result of one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group can be referred to in the other processing.

In this case, when the first transmission trigger occurs, the first transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area in the first transmission information storage process, which is the processing of the first processing group, and the second transmission trigger occurs. In this case, the second transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area in the second transmission information storage process, which is the process of the second processing group. Then, when the first transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the first transmission information is transmitted to the transmission target, and when the second transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the second transmission information is stored. 2 Transmission information is transmitted to the transmission target. That is, the storage area to which information can be written by the process of the first process group and the storage area to which information can be written by the process of the second process group are divided into the first process-compatible storage area and the second process-compatible storage area. , the transmission information to be transmitted to the transmission target is written in a common transmission information storage area. This makes it possible to integrate the configuration for transmitting the transmission information, compared to the configuration in which the transmission information is individually transmitted in each of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group.

Feature U2. The control means is configured to write information to an internal storage means (register area 223) provided in the control means when executing the various processes,
The gaming machine according to feature U1, wherein the transmission information storage area is provided in the internal storage means.

According to feature U2, the transmission information storage area in which the first transmission information is stored in the processing of the first processing group and the second transmission information is stored in the processing of the second processing group is the internal storage means of the control means. is provided in As a result, the storage area to which information can be written by the process of the first process group and the storage area to which information can be written by the process of the second process group are divided into the first process corresponding storage area and the second process corresponding storage area. In a configuration in which the storage area for the first process and the storage area for the second process are not used, storage areas for writing transmission information are divided between the processes of the first process group and the storage areas of the second process group. It is possible to share the processing.

Feature U3. The gaming machine according to feature U1 or U2, wherein the transmission execution means is included in neither the first process group execution means nor the second process group execution means.

According to feature U3, the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area can be transmitted to the transmission target independently of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group.

Feature U4. The first processing group executing means executes the processing of the first processing group using a program,
the second processing group executing means executes the processing of the second processing group using a program;
The game machine according to any one of features U1 to U3, wherein the transmission executing means performs the transmission without using a program.

According to feature U4, the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group are executed using a program, while the transmission of the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area to the transmission target is Done without using a program. As a result, the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area can be transmitted to the transmission target independently of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group, and the necessary program capacity can be reduced. It becomes possible to execute control to transmit transmission information without increasing the transmission information.

Feature U5. The first transmission information can be transmitted not only in a situation where the control means is executing the processing of the first processing group but also in a situation where the processing of the second processing group is being executed. Thus, the second transmission information can be transmitted not only in a situation where the processing of the second processing group is being executed by the control means, but also in a situation where the processing of the first processing group is being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4, characterized in that:

According to feature U5, the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area can be transmitted to the transmission target regardless of the execution status of the processes of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group.

For the configuration of features U1 to U5, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group V>
Feature V1. a first processing group executing means (a function of executing a specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing a first process group process (specific control process) among various processes;
Second processing group execution means (function for executing non-specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing the second processing group processing (non-specific control processing) among the various types of processing;
When the process of the first process group is executed, information can be written and read, while when the process of the second process group is executed, information can be read, but information A first process-compatible storage area (the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which writing of is impossible,
When the process of the second process group is executed, information can be written and read. On the other hand, when the process of the first process group is executed, information can be read, but information a second process-compatible storage area (the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which writing of the
with
The first process group executing means executes, as the process of the first process group, a first update process of updating information in a first numerical value storage area (first security counter 211a) when a first update opportunity occurs. means (function for executing the processing of step S4917 or step S4920 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment),
The second process group executing means executes, as the process of the second process group, a second update process of updating information in a second numerical value storage area (second security counter 213k) when a second update trigger occurs. (a function of executing the processing of step S5405, step S5409, step S6006, step S6012 or step S6508 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment),
This gaming machine includes means for executing specific handling processing corresponding to both the information in the first numerical value storage area and the information in the second numerical value storage area (the security processing of the main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment). A game machine characterized by having a function to execute).

According to feature V1, when the process of the first process group is executed, the information is written to the storage area corresponding to the first process, but the information is not written to the storage area corresponding to the second process. When the process of the second process group is executed, the information is written in the memory area corresponding to the second process, but the information is not written in the memory area corresponding to the first process. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the types of storage areas to which information is written when the processes of the first process group are executed and when the processes of the second process group are executed. On the other hand, even when the process of the first process group is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the first process but also from the storage area corresponding to the second process. Even when the process is executed, it is possible to read information not only from the storage area corresponding to the second process but also from the storage area corresponding to the first process. As a result, information corresponding to the processing result of one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group can be referred to in the other processing.

In this case, when the first update trigger occurs, the information in the first numerical value storage area is updated in the first update processing, which is the processing of the first processing group, and when the second update trigger occurs, the second update trigger is updated. The information in the second numerical value storage area is updated in the second update process, which is the process group process. Then, a specific handling process corresponding to both the information in the first numerical value storage area and the information in the second numerical value storage area is executed. Thereby, in a configuration in which the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group are clearly distinguished, the contents specified in each of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group are handled. Processing can be executed.

Feature V2. The gaming machine according to feature V1, wherein the first numerical value storage area is provided in the first processing correspondence storage area.

According to feature V2, it is possible to use the storage area corresponding to the first process as a storage area for storing information corresponding to the occurrence of the first update trigger.

Feature V3. The gaming machine according to feature V2, wherein the second numerical value storage area is provided in the second processing correspondence storage area.

According to feature V3, it is possible to use the storage area corresponding to the first process as a storage area for storing information corresponding to the occurrence of the first update opportunity, and the occurrence of the second update opportunity. It becomes possible to use the second process corresponding storage area as a storage area for storing information corresponding to .

Feature V4. The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3, wherein the specific handling process is included in either one of the processes of the first process group and the processes of the second process group.

According to feature V4, it is possible to aggregate the specific handling process into either the process of the first process group including the first update process or the process of the second process group including the second update process.

Feature V5. The specific handling process is included in the process of the first process group,
The first process correspondence storage area includes a confirmed storage area (previous value storage area 211e) for storing information of the second numerical value storage area when the specific correspondence process is executed,
In the specific handling process,
Difference identification processing for identifying the difference between the information in the second numerical value storage area and the information in the confirmed storage area (processing of steps S6701 to S6703 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment);
Processing for executing control corresponding to both the difference information identified by the difference identification processing and the information in the first numerical value storage area (step S6706 to step processing of S6714);
The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V4, wherein

According to feature V5, in a configuration in which the first update process and the predetermined correspondence process are included in the process of the first process group, and the second update process is included in the process of the second process group, the information in the second numerical value storage area Control corresponding to both the difference and the information in the first numerical value storage area can be executed in the specific handling process.

Feature V6. It is possible to measure the number of times the first update trigger occurs using the first numerical value storage area,
It is possible to measure the number of times the second update trigger occurs using the second numerical value storage area,
The game according to any one of features V1 to V5, wherein in the specific correspondence process, a process corresponding to the sum of the information in the first numerical value storage area and the information in the second numerical value storage area is executed. machine.

According to feature V6, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration that executes processing corresponding to the sum of the number of times the first update opportunity has occurred and the number of times the second update opportunity has occurred. .

For the configuration of features V1 to V6, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, features H1 to H8, features I1-I5, features J1-J7, features K1-K7, features L1-L5, features M1-M4, features N1-N8, features O1-O8, features P1-P6, features Q1-Q16, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the feature Q group, the feature R group, the feature S group, the feature T group, the feature group U, and the feature group V, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special game state. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special game state based on a game ball entering a part. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in the gaming machine such as the one exemplified above, it is necessary for the control means to suitably execute the processing, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. The game machine stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a predetermined period of time has passed, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 24a... Out mouth, 27... Game ball launching mechanism, 31... General winning opening, 32... Special electric winning device, 33... First operating opening, 34... Second operating opening, 37a... First special figure display Part, 37b... Second special figure display part, 41... Symbol display device, 43... State suggestion area, 81... Main control board, 82... Main side MPU, 83... Main side ROM, 84... Main side RAM, 93... Sound Light side MPU 103 Display side MPU 131 Ceiling counter 133 High probability state counter 134 Time saving state counter 151 Special winning device 195 Setting key insertion unit 196 Reset button 201 to 204 First to fourth notification display devices 205 Setting display device 211 Work area for specific control 211a First security counter 211b Special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c Normal electric monitoring delay timer counter , 211d...confirmation flag group, 211e...previous value storage area, 212...stack area for specific control, 213...work area for non-specific control, 213a to 213h...first to eighth winning watch timer counter, 213k...first 2 security counter, 213l to 213r...abnormality flag, 214...stack area for non-specific control, 223...register area, 223b...command transmission buffer, 223c...protect register, 224...command transmission circuit, 225...RAM management circuit, 251 . . . Normal counter area 252 .. Calculation result storage area PA2 .

Claims (1)

a control means for executing various predetermined processes;
information storage means in which information is written when the predetermined various processes are executed in the control means;
with
The information storage means is
a first storage area in which information is written when the predetermined various processes are executed;
a second storage area that is contiguous to the first storage area at the address of the information storage means and in which information is not written when the predetermined various processes are executed;
a third storage area that is contiguous to the second storage area at the address of the information storage means and into which information is written when the predetermined various processes are executed;
with
This game machine is
erasure execution means for executing information erasure processing on storage areas of the information storage means including the first storage area, the second storage area and the third storage area when a predetermined information erasure opportunity occurs ;
Predetermined prohibition setting means for performing a predetermined prohibition setting so that information is not written into the second storage area;
predetermined prohibition canceling means for canceling the predetermined prohibition setting when the information erasing process is executed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images